JP6552119B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, as can be seen, for example, in Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a game lottery for the progress of a game is performed when a game ball enters a starting port.

  In this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the start port. When there is a ball entering the starting port, a game lottery for the progress of the game is performed. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a large amount of gaming balls are paid out to the player by playing the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when a game lottery related to the progress of the game is performed, an effect of variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the liquid crystal screen is performed. In such an effect, an operation opportunity (such as operating an operation button) may be given to the player until the predetermined effective period elapses. I am trying to maintain my interest.

JP 2012-061263 A

However, in such a gaming machine, a reduction in Yu technique interest is concerned.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a decrease in amusement can be suppressed.

Means 1: Game control means for giving a privilege to a player when a predetermined display mode appears due to symbol variation;
Display means for performing display effects;
Sound output means for audible output of sound;
Detection means that can be detected by operation;
Sound control means for audibly outputting sound by the sound output means according to the progress of the display effect in the display means during the execution period of the symbol variation;
A reception period generating means capable of generating a predetermined effect reception period when the display effect on the display means comes to a predetermined timing during the execution period of the symbol variation,
The predetermined effect reception period can be generated after the specific BGM that is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output while maintaining the assignment state to the channel. Game machine, and
Before the effect acceptance period of the previous SL predetermined occurs, the condition specifying BGM is audible output by suppressing manner, or in a state in which the specific BGM is not even audible output while maintaining the allocation state for the channel, said The predetermined effect sound can be output in an audible manner in a non-suppressed mode using a channel different from the channel to which the specific BGM is in an assigned state .
During the execution of the symbol variation, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output while maintaining the assignment state to the channel. If there is a detection by the detection means within the predetermined effect reception period which occurs after the audio output state is entered while maintaining the audio output state or the assignment state to the channel in the suppression mode, based on the detection , The audible output of the predetermined effect sound is terminated, and the special effect sound suggesting an expectation degree in which the predetermined display mode appears in the design variation is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner, but the specific BGM is assigned to the channel. state rather Rukoto changes state according to its output as a response to that despite the detection by keeping,
further,
A game machine characterized in that the timing at which the audible output of the special effect sound ends is different depending on at which timing within the predetermined effect reception period the detection by the detection means is made.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 taken along the line PP. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. 90 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection fault judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure showing the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure showing the circuit composition when a plurality of sensor signal input parts respectively connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors were connected in parallel with a plurality of base terminals of a transistor of a detection circuit part. (A) shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in a prior art example, (B) is the figure which shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in an Example. (A) shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in a prior art example, (B) is the figure which shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in an Example. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arrange | positions a voltage raising part and a detection circuit part on the same board | substrate, and arrange | positions a voltage output part in another board | substrate (sensor board | substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board | substrate, and has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part to another board | substrate (for example, main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected the several sensor to the voltage output part in parallel. FIG. 7 is a view schematically showing a state in which integration is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud in the first control unit MCG. It is a figure which shows the partial area | region in this base substrate about the base substrate of the main control substrate concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of an opening window. It is AA arrow sectional drawing in FIG. The figure which shows typically the relationship between the special operation receiving part when the pachinko machine 1 is seen by a front view, and the various effect members arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with this special operation receiving part by a front view. is there. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control mode to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control mode to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a control about the detection information analysis process of the physical object performed in a periphery control part regular process. (A) is a time chart showing control when generation reception occurs in a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows a state of generation of production operation when generation reception is respectively generated in a plurality of operation parts FIG. It is a figure showing example production 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure showing example production 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 2nd starting port passage process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about jackpot determination processing (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure showing judgment table T1 of a production pattern (variation production) referred to by the above-mentioned production symbol fluctuation start processing when it is in a normal gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process sequence about the lottery (notice lottery performed within an effect symbol variation start process) regarding the notice effect which appears within the execution period (design variation time) of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of timer notice determination table T2 referred when the said fluctuation | variation (due | hold by which it is digested) is not the object of timer pre-reading effect in 2nd game state (2nd timer notice lottery). (A) is a figure showing an example of the 1st mission effect determination table T3a (1st mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is performed in a normal game state, and (b) is a normal game It is a figure which shows an example of 2nd mission presentation determination table T3b (2nd mission presentation lottery) referred when when advance | attraction side timer presentation is not performed in a state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification side timer type determination table T4 referred in the notification side timer type lottery (step S5505). The reach type and processing status (when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) has not been made) It is a figure which compares and shows the upper limit number of appearance of the timer object candidate effect determined according to the below-mentioned 5th processing status and 6th processing status etc. besides the 1st-4th processing status. Step S5508 in the first processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of. Step S5523 in the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507) It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of. Step S5533 in the third processing state where the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5532) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of. Step S5543 in the fourth processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to not execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5532) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of. In the first processing situation, which is a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and determination to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5507), the process of step S5508 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 a-1 referred when it is decided to make notice number into 1 as a result of performing (step S5509). In the second processing situation, which is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507), the process of step S5523 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing (step S5524). The processing of step S5543 in the fourth processing situation, which is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when it is decided to make notice number into 2 as a result of performing (step S5544). This is equivalent to Character Reach in the second processing situation where it is a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not to be executed) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number to be selected is selected. This is equivalent to SP reach in the second processing situation where it is a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not to be executed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number to be selected is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of table T7a referred by the 1st timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b referred by the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). In the fifth processing situation where it is determined that the advance effect timer effect is not performed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display conversation advance is displayed) is determined (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553. In the sixth processing situation in which the notice timer performance is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made, step S5553 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 e-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing process of (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made, step S5553 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 e-2 referred to when it is decided to make notice number into 2 as a result of performing processing of (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which the notification side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (NO in step S5552) is determined to be executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing process of (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which the notification side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (NO in step S5552) is determined to be executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 f-2 referred when it is decided to make notice number into 2 as a result of performing process of (step S5564). (A) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and three hold information in which the variable display is not executed (all are the first special symbol). It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred within the 1st special figure pre-reading processing, when the new winning a prize (1st special symbol) occurs in a state. Further, (b) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and two hold information (both being the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not yet executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred within the 1st special figure pre-reading processing, when a new winning a prize (1st special symbol) occurs in the state which is. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about table T8a-1 and table T8a-2 referred when deciding the execution mode of timer pre-reading effect in the situation where pre-reading fluctuation possible number is 4 . (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about Table T8 b-1 and Table T8 b-2 referred when determining the execution mode of timer pre-reading effect in the situation where the pre-reading changeable number is 3 . It is usually referred to when there is nothing to make the jackpot symbol appear among the pending information in the state where the variable display is being executed and the pending information (for example, the hold 1 to the hold 3) in which the variable display is in the unexecuted state It is a figure showing time reserve change table T9a. It is referred when there is something to make a big hit symbol appear among the pending information which is in the state that the variable display is under execution and the pending information (for example, the hold 1 to the hold 3) in which the variable display is not in the state It is a figure which shows the time holding | maintenance change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the process sequence about the process performed in order to implement | achieve a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. (A) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing state in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed. This is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and a timer object is sent out in the second processing situation in which determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of production. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination processing about whether a timer object advance effect is generated, and also at which timing a timer object advance effect is generated. When performing timer object advance presentation effect in any one timing of timing Ta1 to Ta3, it is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination processing about what kind of production | presentation aspect generated at this timing is used. When performing timer object advance presentation effect in any two timings of timing Ta1 to Ta3, it is a figure showing the example about the contents of judgment processing about what kind of production mode made at those timings. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about which kind of effect form to generate | occur | produce at those timings, when performing timer object advance effect at all timings of timing Ta1-Ta3. The number of notices is 2 in the second processing situation in which it is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507). Revival timer effect that is performed when it is determined (step S523) that the “conversation notice” is performed at the previous timing and the “object A action 1” is determined at the later timing. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object suppression control performed. (B) is a figure which shows the example about the table referred in the timer object suppression control when changing the ratio which a suppression period generate | occur | produces with the kind of effect aspect which appears as a timer object effect. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. A timer mode presentation performed in a second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of. (A) to (c) are modes of a single timer (YES in step S506), and a determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507) is made It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed in the processing condition of. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process sequence when implement | achieving count output stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer plus production. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer stagnation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the progress effect connected with a timer object effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area | region for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a search process of the free channel at the time of performing sound control at the time of defining only one AUTO group in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (stops sound reproduction) when the channel is not empty at the time of output of new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control process which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effects which shows volume (sound volume) control for every total reproduction | regeneration time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half of a flow chart showing the procedure of volume control processing that performs sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a second half of the flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing of performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation condition) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished besides the alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting mode, and alerting | reporting time according to the kind of alerting sound illustrated in FIG. (A) shows an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced Is a figure. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, when the notification sound which belongs to 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated It is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (C) is a figure showing an example of processing when output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure which illustrates separately about the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the contents of the information progress under production processing. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when channel special release processing is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when operation sound output processing under control is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when processing related to channel assignment cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the jackpot determination, and the state on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected not within the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit judgment, It is a time chart which shows an example about the condition by the side of a decoration body. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at the specific timing in the period when pattern change is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. . In the time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at two different timings in the period in which symbol variation is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a selection table of a production pattern in production mode which can perform a blowout production, (A) It shows an example of a selection table which chooses existence of a blowout preparation shift production according to classification of a fluctuation pattern. ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is a state transition figure explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a knapsack state, (B) the 1st gutter state, and (C) the 2nd gutter state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period concerning the operation means. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. FIG. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. FIG. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of the sword decorative body of modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament (the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation transition used as the feature of a false revival sword LV1 presentation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, showing a false sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. As in the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect, in the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Even though the second suggestion pattern has been performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the step decoration is temporarily activated without the sword decoration becoming effective, and the operation button becomes effective once, and then the sword decoration becomes effective. It is a figure showing about the indication production before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the contents of an effect when specific operation related rendition is performed as a omen effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation when displaying sword decoration image SYG in a special aspect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. (A) is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated several times in the mode of single operation when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated by the aspect of a long press when not done. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when operation is started by the mode. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the symbol variation is started with “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears” can be set, It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state or the operation (setting operation) for setting is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the 3 effect states, the symbol in the second effect pattern (loss of variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set " The time chart which shows the example of a process when a fluctuation | variation is started and the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling | releases an automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for a setting are performed within the execution period of this symbol fluctuation | variation is there. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” is set, and the symbol change execution period It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed in the inside. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation when production is advanced by a 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing in connection with presentation such as presentation setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing in connection with presentation such as presentation setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production processing about a special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example concerning the effect development at the time of starting the production after operation, maintaining "the image which suggests the classification of operation object" as a display state. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern whose effect is advanced in an aspect shown in FIG. 374 is executed. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern whose effect is advanced in an aspect shown in FIG. 374 is executed. It is a figure which shows the example when displaying a haze image as a moving image by displaying a some haze image sequentially, when the specific reception effect generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st receptionist production and the 2nd receptionist production from which the time from the period which the production | presentation acceptance is permitted generate | occur | produces until the production | presentation reception generate | occur | produces automatically differs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st receptionist production and the 2nd receptionist production from which the time from the period which the production | presentation acceptance is permitted generate | occur | produces until the production | presentation reception generate | occur | produces automatically differs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating novel directivity using an automatic directing function. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decoration body when specific conditions are satisfied. FIG. 40 is a time chart showing a modification to the example shown in FIG. 393. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart which shows abnormality determination timing of the operation button in other than an arbitrary operation confirmation period, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in an arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the sword decorative body in the operation reception period, (B) is a time chart which shows the relation between the operation state of the sword decorative body and the abnormality detection other than the operation reception period (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of an operation button, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the movable decoration provided in the game board. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of normality, (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the normal button production at normal time, and (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the button normal production at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode at the time of abnormality occurrence in the operation reception period, and (B) is the operation button at the time of abnormality occurrence in the automatic operation confirmation period It is a time chart which shows the relationship between an operation state and a notification mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production | presentation at the time of abnormality generation | occurrence | production of a movable decoration body. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button at the time of abnormality occurrence in the non-time-short state, (B) is the operation button cover and the operation button at the time of the abnormality occurrence in the time-short state It is a time chart which shows an operation state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the restriction | limiting with respect to the volume setting and brightness | luminance setting when generating a penalty with respect to operation with respect to the sword part 5010. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the light emission aspect of the lamp for production | presentation in the abnormality alerting | reporting period according to specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline | summary of the function for performing presentation control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the periphery control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a structure until it acquires data required for presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp | ramp and the sound in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of change display from the change start of the special symbol in this embodiment to a stop, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / blink control of the lamp | ramp in step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp | ramp in the button cut-in notification of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow and the left star character in star character thing preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star character in star character preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star role in the star role notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in the logo combination thing fall notice of this embodiment. It is drawing explaining the scheduler data executed at the time of power-on of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect in a series of fluctuation | variation display until it stops from the fluctuation | variation start of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) performs the effect performed from a fluctuation | variation start to completion | finish, and the said effect | production. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining the position of the winning combination in the winning combination fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of button 鉈 combination first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the first half drop notice of the 鉈 combination that is the first half of the combination drop notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the second half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to change pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of presentation control of the first half fluctuation | variation (normal fluctuation | variation 12 second) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control starting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs advance notice production in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, and (A) is the timing which performs advance notice production, and the execution time of the notice effect concerned, (B) is The scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern of this embodiment and the liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which produces the data file for drawing for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment by the step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 productions) with the image composition / motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub effect block data. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the step in which a step-up notice effect is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid-crystal rendering scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master SW defined on liquid crystal effect scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production | presentation switch of this embodiment, and the evaluation procedure which sets production | presentation SW to ON is shown especially. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines an effect SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the presentation SW flag of this embodiment, and a presentation SW information table, (A) shows a presentation SW flag, (B) shows a presentation SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines presentation SW replacement table information and presentation SW replacement table included in the presentation SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is presentation SW replacement table information, (B) is presentation SW Indicates a replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list | wrist which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background) Indicates It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice) Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid-crystal layer table and liquid-crystal production common block in this embodiment, (A) is a liquid-crystal layer table of step-up notice production, (B) shows the structure of a liquid-crystal production common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal presentation block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the button mini character effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged within the callback function at the time of callback execution by effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of notice effect execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block which spans a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is the display timing of a symbol display and a notice effect, (B) is a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, (C) Indicates a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by common blocks extending over a plurality of periods. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer, respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure which writes in a frame buffer after converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which memorize | stores the display list command group in this embodiment temporarily in peripheral control RAM, and transfers to sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers the display list command group in this embodiment to VDP with built-in sound source, without memorize | storing in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when changing a state between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows a display example when the expectation effect that a princess character is largely displayed as a background image is performed during execution of a specific effect pattern. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example when a help image is displayed in a state where the expected effect shown in FIG. 477 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when generating a production | presentation limitation period in a non-game state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when a production | presentation limitation period is terminated at an early stage. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process concerning a special period (opening exclusive period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the process when a game is started when it is set to the opening special period (special period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 in a front view left side of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and the lower portion for bass inside A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls are housed in the inside A payout control board box 950 There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the rear side position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. Yes. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. The

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in a state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. Yes. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It is something that can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both right and left sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can do. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 34 (b). Fig.39 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides Longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a It is equipped with. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) Since the game board 5 is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the outlined arrows in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player who presses the operation button 410 is operated. The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the in-operation button decorative member 432 are formed of transparent members, as shown in FIG. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative part 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative part 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Thus, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that is erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. The left reflection upright wall portion 538 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided by providing the inner side surface of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective upright wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion that bears a part (left side portion) of the reflective upright wall portion 33 described above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 50). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front surface diffusing lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532 f in various directions, and the prismatic lens portion 532 b It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is directed forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decorative base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line N-N in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting upright wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. The right side reflective upright wall portion 568 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface provided to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner side surface of the left reflection upright wall portion 538, in addition to providing the inner side surface of the right reflection upright wall portion 568 itself from a material for reflection such as metal or resin, the reflection surface reflects the inner side surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for the like. And although mentioned later, this right side reflective standing wall part 568 is formed of the right unit base 551, and serves as a part which bears a part (right side part) of the reflective standing wall part 33 mentioned above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole moves to the right from the rear end side toward the front, so that the main body 553a is moved to the right in the front view with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 Can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflection portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 55, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light can be decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1 The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff in the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and make it possible to quickly respond to the problem. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) respectively have internal spaces opened only toward the side on which the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the opening window so as to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window (the left outer periphery outer emitting unit 34a, the right outer periphery outer emitting unit 34b) and the inner periphery of the opening window The outer-periphery light detector 35 (the left-hand outer light detector 35a and the right-hand outer light detector 35b) that detects the light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  That is, although described later, according to such a structure, since the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 are disposed outside the outer periphery of the opening window, the opening as viewed from the front view Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a portion (operation receiving portion) to be operated by the player. In addition, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not disposed in an open state, and is disposed in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 opened only toward the side on which the opening window is provided. Thus, when detecting light by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, it is possible to preferably exclude the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both right and left side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and the LED is mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at the portions facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to each of the parts and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 271 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit body 271 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  Further, the unit body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched in a square from the rear end to the front in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 271 further includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion projecting forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevennesses formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574 f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the right front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open part is closed by the unit body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it goes to the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front side of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center. Approximately parallel to the

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the left and right center in the unit body 271 It is done. The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the horizontally extending surface Inclined state. Thus, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 271. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. The player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal for the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the left and right ends. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front face of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  The front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rails 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 to position between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Further, panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5 a and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1115 having a front side depressed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are not cut to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120 It is almost flush with the front surface. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1121 is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 which are extended and which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 which engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper side of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward the end and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement piece 1125.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000, the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the lower end and is opened downward. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Furthermore, although the illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings which are penetrated back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 like the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520 and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as members having transparency so as to allow visual confirmation from the outside. There is. That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a surface that is inferior in fraud suppression performance particularly in the payout control substrate 951 in the payout control substrate box 950 and the main control substrate 1310 in the main control substrate box 1320. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by passing the gaming ball against the gate unit 2003. , A normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 Number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second The special lottery result mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 when the result is "big hit" or the like.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling an effect to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached from the front to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front face of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of game balls in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first start opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the big winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, four to six) can be extended to the left and right in an acceptable size, and can be opened and closed according to the game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in a circular arc along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the lower side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  The center role 2500 is located slightly above the center of the front view slightly above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a, and is located on the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the effect units and the like provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center product 2500 has a gate unit 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It can not be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. It has a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left and right direction and then discharges it into the gaming area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530. When the gaming ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending leftward and rightward along the axis and housing the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view left side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b in the rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 is appropriately used using a rear-behind movable effect unit 3100, a rear-upper left movable effect unit 3200, a rear-left movable effect unit 3300, a rear-upper movable effect unit 3400, a lower-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball is released into the gaming area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn to the center side in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 and the first There is a possibility that it can be accepted by the starting opening 2002 and the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), Downstream from that, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided will flow down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 There are 15R big hit, "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per hit", "probability change time per shot", "probability change time for short loss", etc.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of gaming balls are taken from the payout device 830 by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes open state which can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of accepting gaming balls, or to the big winning opening 2005. When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decoration bodies of center character 2500, various decoration bodies of back unit 3000, back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-down front movable effect unit 3500, etc. The player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment covers the window portion of the present embodiment, and the bulging part of the present invention corresponds to the operation button 400 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention. The second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. LED 477a of 477 is a light emitter of the present invention, door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, unit base 431 of base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc. overlapped, the decoration in which the first button decorative part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is full of perspective, so that it can attract the player's attention strongly. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) move closer to or further from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative part 411a and the second in-button decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) according to a change in the distance to the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) , Etc.) can be changed, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration) can be changed. The decoration (cross mode) by the member 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. Of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432 cross each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decorating, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are mounted on each LED (or sub screen decoration substrate 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the light can be decorated by the light in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the sub screen decoration member 476), and furthermore, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button inner decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is decorated with indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the first button decoration 411a is weakly decorated while the second button inner decoration 432g (the sub screen decoration member 476) is strongly lighted and decorated, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, With each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 lit, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a Looking at the two-button inner decoration 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized sense of appearance, and it is an appealing ability that strongly attracts the player's attention. A high pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame). The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The decorativeness can be enhanced, the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is broken during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and lowers the interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized through the through-hole 111 from the front, On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are disposed in the frame The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the cylinder portion 416d, and the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that divides the second button decorative portion 411b from the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion Light from the first LED 422a, 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411 due to the 413a and the inner extension portion 413f, and light from the second LED 422b, 423b makes the second button decorative portion 411b. It can be prevented from being illuminated, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be made to emit light and be decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be light-emittingly decorated, respectively, and a light-emitting effect with a good appearance can be performed. In addition, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed by appropriately combining light off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like with the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the first LED 422a and 423a emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b and 423b emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are one operation button left outer decoration Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (the operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently It can be irradiated to the second button decoration part 411b in a diffused state . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly emitted and decorated, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player is strongly drawn. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be operated. The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Can be decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. And by making 1st LED422a, 423a and 2nd LED422b, 423b emit light suitably, the transparent member in which the in-operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). The effect image etc. by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b at the outer edge, the player can operate the operation button 410 while the player participation type effect is being executed. By causing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 may be lighted and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It can prevent that the decorative member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) are hard to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect and the like sufficiently to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416 d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second side of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is decorated on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion 411b from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the inner cylindrical portion 416d, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a or the second LED 422b, 423b Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LED 422 a, 423 a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422 b 423 illuminates the second button decoration 411 b Never do. Therefore, light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely divided by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go through the rear end of the main body 413a, and completely prevents the light from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration in front of the region outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411) Since the part 411b is positioned, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is arranged from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 in the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The second button decoration part 411b can make the member on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (the back side) less visible and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A are relatively darkened, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made less visible. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation member in the operation button 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, a frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b and the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) The side lenses 417 extend in an arc shape. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light as appropriate, so that the light rotates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect or light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a and the upper plate 321 used for the game is In addition to mounting, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front and lower side of the upper tray 321, and a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) A remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to lower dish first region A1 in lower dish main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of mounting space 326j from that portion A portion corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside, and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, which makes the lower plate 322 inconspicuous and makes the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) relatively easy to be noticeable. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper tray and the lower tray were viewed side by side vertically in the conventional pachinko machine The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's attention strongly it can.

  Further, at the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. The lower bowl cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the gaming ball prevents the gaming ball in the lower tray 322 from coming in contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the gaming ball does not abut on the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the gaming ball does not damage the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, lower dish cover 340, 340A which restricts the movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of main body standing wall portion 325b and mounting space 326j in the lower dish second region A2 portion of lower dish main body 325 of lower dish 322. And the game ball can be prevented from invading (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or feeling unpleasant by intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j by the game ball being inserted into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 splashes in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), etc., and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can do.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. by the contact of the game ball to the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower cover 340, 340A to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is assured. It can be prevented.

  In addition, since the lower dish ball hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box). It can be made difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A is provided as described above, the game ball of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is provided. Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, damage to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the gaming ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is inclined The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the gaming ball in contact with the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be reduced, movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j is surely restricted by the lower plate cover 340, 340A. In addition to the above, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls abut on the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b and to suppress them from being broken.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front is swelled forward most below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game ball is received in the general prize opening 2001 or the like. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been taken out is provided with the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400 </ b> A detachably attached to the most bulging portion of the tray unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with a storage bowl capable of storing game balls, and is viewed outward of the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view A space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) in the lower tray first region A1 located and the front view Because the lower tray second region A2 is positioned at the front panel, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more visible when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321) And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal that can make it possible to recognize at a glance that it is, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, a portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is provided. The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view is smaller. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. The lower plate cover 340, 340A or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C have a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the tray unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (changing) the lower cover 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to cope with the size of the rear portion of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward, Can be stored reliably. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A has the cover upright wall 340a rising from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, 340A of various shapes is prepared in advance. In addition, it is made to correspond to various forms by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above.

  Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Thus, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the gaming balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the portion of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A The boundary (joint, dividing line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the weight of the stored gaming balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, the force is such that the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are pulled away from the lower tray main body 325 even if many gaming balls are stored. It does not act and can prevent the lower cover 340, 340A from being removed from the lower main body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed to receive a game ball at the general winning opening 2001 etc. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball opening hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) provided with the lower plate 322 and the lower plate 322 and arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player) (it is difficult to see), so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, and the player's interest Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball going from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game in the lower plate 322 This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. An illusion can be made that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since half or more of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, and the like are difficult to visually recognize from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower tray 322 is made to turn to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), the actual lower tray is smaller than the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored in the lower plate 322 compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating around the lower plate 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 can be reliably made difficult to visually identify from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, when the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the ball guide portion 322c etc. immediately sends the game ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 without causing the player to notice it. Since it is possible to discharge the lower balls from the lower ball ball removal holes 322a downward, it is possible for the player to illusion that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plates 322. Can. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front half or more of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower tray 322. The actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size of the visible one with respect to the size of 322. Therefore, as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Because it has a shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, At first glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the finger of the hand put in the lower plate 322 is hard to touch the back wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., it gives the player the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be relieved and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even when the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the player covers the lower plate 322 because the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the part of the lower plate 322 which is located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a finger tip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) etc. It can be played in a safe state. In addition, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from intruding (spinning) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball hole 322a that is vertically opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a feeling like this, and allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 bulging forward under the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the player. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached and the outer operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outer periphery. The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. Reduces the visibility of the outer edge and back side (rear side) and the like of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the like from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is increased to increase the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be favorably concealed, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing the appearance from deteriorating. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (body part 413a) cylindrically protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation member inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 The light is likely to be refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to Accordingly, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape which bulges outward, the volume in the operation button 410 is increased, so the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame disposed in the operation button 410 It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device in which the player can be enjoyed by the operation button 410 It is possible to facilitate the provision of the 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorability) is given to the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 in the present pachinko machine 1 is made conspicuous to interest the player. This makes it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game.

  Further, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide that the back side of the operation button 410 or the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470) can be seen from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  In addition, the button lens 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 and having a predetermined width, and in cooperation with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 less visible from the side, the main portion 413a and the in-operation button decorative member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make the player easily touch the operation button 410 to perform a pressing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). A drop in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player participation type effect and have fun. In addition, by performing the production within the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good depending on the player, and the expectation for the game is raised and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 are enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the button frame 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (ie, the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is surrounded from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411) Although the thing provided with the button base 413 (main-body part 413a) which protruded cylindrically to the 2 base unit 450 side was shown, it is not limited to this, but the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side second production At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a lower dish that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps behind. It may be

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal column surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedron shape.

  Moreover, although said example showed the example which attached the presentation operation unit 400 (2nd presentation operation unit 400A) in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, it does not limit to this, "an operation dial, a touch panel etc. "Having the operation device of", "having the rotating body having the decoration on the surface", "having the decoration having the decoration and the movable device for moving the decoration", "the game "Equipped with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama) etc. according to the machine concept", "characters, items, logos and predetermined patterns according to the game machine concept , Etc., which are decorated by stickers, printing, or the like ", or a member such as a panel or a panel provided with the above may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the pan unit cover 326 is formed with the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward to mount the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-like cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the attachment space 326j (or the remaining space of the attachment space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decoration such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411 b and the frame side lens 417 may be in the form of an annular ring extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the rendering operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown, The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval) centered on the center.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect that are arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A and the like such that the rear member is always visible is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is a predetermined condition. It is good also as composition provided with the variable light transmission means which a back side can recognize visually by fulfillment of. Here, as the variable light transmission means, “the rear side can be visually recognized due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, such as a magic mirror”, “transparent by turning the power ON / OFF, such as a liquid crystal film Become opaque or become opaque so that the rear side becomes visible. The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in the normal state, only the front member or the front and rear members can be viewed. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The members and the back member, or the front and back members and the members on the back side of the back member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, so that the player can be made hard to get tired, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The members become visible, and it is possible to show the player the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration by the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the members, it is possible to show the player a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character).

  Furthermore, when both the front and rear members are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be viewed through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or the space between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as LED And the requirements for the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the members on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) are satisfied through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting the site to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple steps, and a player can enjoy various decorations.

  In the above example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the rear side is darkened. You can show the glittering decorations to the players.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light from the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. 73 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for gaming balls etc. relaying the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game that is progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the process at the time of power on at the time of power on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the time of power on. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that incorporates various control programs such as a main control program that controls the game operation and is executed after execution, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a predetermined voltage blackout or an indication of a momentary power failure; Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  60, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects an illegal act using a magnet attached thereto is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a driving signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the substrate 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. A contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 4020 4020. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long life is used as the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than that of the proximity switch are used as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. Main control MPU 1310a, upon completion of normal reception of various commands from payout control board 951 as serial data, main control output with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 79). The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, and a serial management unit 1310 aec (see FIG. See 79). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BCO (see FIG. 75). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM by this. (Clear).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout and an operation switch 954 having various functions. And an error LED indicator 860 b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls relating to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 are serially received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs with respect to the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-balls detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of ball induction unit 820 of payout unit 800, and payout detection sensor 842 for detecting gaming balls discharged from payout outlets 831b and 832b of payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 which controls the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending device connection terminal board for game balls etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is a CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent game balls, and at the same time, the game ball displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330. The signal is output to the ball lending return display unit 330 by outputting the signal to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 includes the capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof is given via the payout control input circuit 952b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb, and is also output from the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and in addition to the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal board 869, between the game device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control substrate 951, the game device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 951 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The segment display of the digit is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the sphere rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to output to the CR unit 6. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility when the power switch 934 is operated. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and performs control to output to the firing solenoid 682 While the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315; Control is performed to send the game balls received by the ball transport member to the ball striking device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 in the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door While performing the drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs sound control of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time, hour and minute A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the second, and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data that prescribes Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by the large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, peripheral control MPU 1511a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It comprises an / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511 ak.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak, without using peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad controls internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral bus 1511 ai, and external bus 1511 h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and this timer is reset by hardware when it runs up. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the integrated movable body detection data from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit by the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob is The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is set, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrences of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating against the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning a game effect and the like are notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy areas 1511 cd, which exclusively store the copied various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc., stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b A variety of control data copy area 1511ce, which exclusively stores the copied data, and a backup non-management target, which exclusively stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, ones that are not subject to backup And a work area 1511cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means that it has a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a to indicate that it can receive screen data from the frame, so every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 is set. ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. If the effect display drive substrate 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is like that.

  Next, a backup first area 1511 cb and a backup second area 1511 cc will be described which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and whenever the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 1511 db to backup second area 15 11 dc described later, have the same storage area as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various data such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e Signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is inputted, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not inputted, the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512 f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
The channel CH2 uses an interface according to the parallel method, while the serial interface according to the Signaling method is used. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from main control board 1310, sound source built-in VDP 1512a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set, the music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume that has been adjusted by turning the volume, and the volume of the combined performance sound actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used; Volume control set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track used The maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when an effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, control for sending an alarm sound so as to notify a store clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track into which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually lower. The master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and this amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period elapses, sound generation forcibly set to mute is performed. The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data for the board is again set as the sub-volume value by adjusting the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and is adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 It is supposed to flow.

  Thus, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, Although the volume of the effect sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has a predetermined period When no sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it went.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b draws game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, and therefore the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise. The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. It can be determined that no problem has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, but a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. "), The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled by the game board side In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the year, month, day, and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to be.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the LED type, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510 a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512 a) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, muffling The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. Yes. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or the pressing operation unit 405. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a wait by customer becomes a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the effect operation unit 400. The volume operation unit can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted by the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the rendering operation unit A desired sound volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the state is continued for a predetermined time, and when the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly demonstrationd (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935 c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the constant current is output to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 to thereby control the ball of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball hitting device 650.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) is respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 through the payout control substrate 951. The +5 V production circuit 1310 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from +12 V from the payout control board 951. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control filter circuit 1310 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951, and then returns again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a and causes the diode MD0 to forward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When the main control substrate 1310 is depleted, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 as the main VBB, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935 d of the power source substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, peripheral It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  Peripheral control board 1510 is provided with +3.3 V creation circuit 1510 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V produced by the +3.3 V production circuit 1510 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600 a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600 b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 3 together with +9 V generated by the +9 V forming circuit 194 a.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-disc-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +12 V to +3.3 V. + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460 is supplied. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control substrate 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310 h is supplied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g and removes noise from this +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e detects a +12 V and +24 V power failure or an indication of a momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notification. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952 a via the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control substrate 951. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are respectively input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e applies a voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the symptom of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 1310, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  69 and 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and noise components are removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that when the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off due to a power failure or momentary interruption at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 becomes a power failure or an instantaneous stop It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded with the ground (GND) Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V generated by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The main control output circuit 1310 ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control substrate 1310 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error, A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic from the payout control board 951 is input. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period after power on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on to switch the switch The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general prize opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, and detects a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, when it detects a blackout or a blackout indication. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21, is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR 23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 78, the positive terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, as shown in FIG. Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In this embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notification signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout blackout notification signal is open. The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 951 through a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control substrate 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 7, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notification signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control substrate. It is input to 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310 b which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 951 Reset function to output as a power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral blackout notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is connected Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payment serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information about the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The control output circuit 1310 ca outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 951 or the like.

9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the payout control board 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12 V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is influenced by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 951 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 1310 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310 aea.

  As described above, the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to the main control MPU 1310a when a power or momentary interruption occurs is generated. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae can be completely transmitted, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V as the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V as the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a, a +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310 h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main periphery serial data. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb are reset to function as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb, the peripheral control board 1510 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. And can be received reliably.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of capacitor PC0 grounded. The capacitor (PC0) first removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 931 from the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) and smoothes it. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing further ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying a payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 80 in addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, so here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, In the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, when the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. When 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned off. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where main body frame 4 is opened from outer frame 2, since main body frame open switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 1310 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 4 does not occur during the normal game, and the outer frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer end is designed to be input The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Or it is impossible to determine whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, but there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that it is occurring.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . When the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931, and when it detects signs of blackouts or blackouts, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the output of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, since a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no indication of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is a payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The transistor PTR41 is turned on by inputting the signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. In 951, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit configured of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 through the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is employed, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for full detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fal cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842 and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full by storing the gaming space, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. It comes to perform control. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not full of the gaming balls with the storage space stored, but In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and it is possible to drive the payout motor 834 despite the fact that the storage space is full with the reserved gaming balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 834 Load is applied abnormally, and the discharge motor 834 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat and malfunction, or the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the discharge rotor. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first selected so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the three terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. Further, the fourth terminal, which is an output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after turning on the power (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power is turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal of which the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is pulled down to the main control board 1310 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness). Entered. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic “LOW” shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is applied to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952 da. While supplying to the terminal and the 10th terminal respectively, it supplies to the payout motor 834.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the BRDY as a ball rental request signal and the BRQ as a single payout operation start request signal via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer FIG. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80A)). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and that signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Ru.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR73 to turn on the transistor PTR71 and also the switch circuit It will turn on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the signal output via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 cb without reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  The above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notification signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output to the payout control output no payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a, and the EXS signal from the reset function no payout control output circuit 952cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 through the payout motor drive circuit 952 d In addition to The main control of the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with the reset function is outputted to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, the payment ACK signal notifying the completion of the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca as shown in FIG. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signal such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control substrate 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Outputs game information signals such as output signals, probability fluctuation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time information output signals, start opening winning information output signals, etc. to external terminal board 784 To do. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. In other words, two signals are outputted to the external terminal board 784, the outer end frame door open information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when the round has become 15 times (number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the combined number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 shows an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal, and the two round big hit information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time in-short information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that a state has occurred, and the payout ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 5 is generated every time the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls reaches 10 balls. The main prize-ball number information output signal is a signal indicating the effect, and the various prize-winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls that entered the ball, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot In a state 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal to tell that it is in the state where 2 round big hit is occurring, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is in the state where probability fluctuation occurs The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that there is a change, and the special symbol change display is ended by the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the variation display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the prize ball number information output signal as the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball. While being able to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, it is possible to count the number of balls of the game ball paid out and grasp the total number of balls of the game ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. And, in the present embodiment, the signal is outputted from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is terminated (stopped) in this embodiment. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and then the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted to count the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the starting opening winning combination information output signal is a signal that indicates the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 and, in this embodiment, Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning combination information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning combination information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting opening 2004 and counting the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 The total number of game balls entered can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15 round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that 15 round big hit is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the 15 round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15 round big hit information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates 15 round big hits in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round big hit information output signal is being input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the 15 rounds of big hit have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is pinked to output a two-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol, In this embodiment, output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped) in 1402 and count the number of times, and the total displayed the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 by fluctuation. The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output an information output signal during time saving. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal indicating that a time reduction state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and time state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange to output an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state in which probability variation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability variation is input. While being able to grasp a certain thing, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a probability fluctuation.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is planned to pay out the game ball as a prize ball, counting the number of balls of the game ball which is due to be paid out, it grasps the total number of balls of the game ball which is intended to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main award ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main award ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As in the case of one continuous signal, the signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals outputted on the side of the payout control board 951, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are main control board Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting a wiring having a connector in the same color as the color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously made electric Connection can be prevented. The various signals output on the payout control substrate 951 are transmitted to the hall computer so that the various signals output on the payout control substrate 951 and the various signals output on the main control substrate 1310 are not mixed. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 of the external terminal plate 784 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, also at this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hole computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side Incorrect wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the gaming ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the gaming ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the jackpot happens to hit 15 rounds on the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the gaming balls as prize balls runs out, so payout is made (In addition, for example, when a ball clog or a ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be resolved). Then, as described above, the winning ball number information output signal outputted on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 balls the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since this is a signal that informs the player every time, the payout control board 951 can output the award ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the Pachinko Island facilities to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball clogging (for example, occurs in the payout device 830) In this case, the game ball is returned to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall is working, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, the game ball is paid out by the work of the store clerk or the like after 15 rounds of big hit When it returns to the ready state, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid gaming balls one after another, and even though it is a time when 15 rounds of big hits have ended and 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, the payout control boards 951 Outputs an award ball number information output signal to notify that effect each time the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls by the payout motor 834 and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 It will be. Then, although it is a time when 15 rounds of jackpots are not generated, a very large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control substrate 951 to actually pay out as a winning ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control substrate 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described trouble (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be released and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hole computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive substrate 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320, A liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. Restore to three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) (that is, parallel signals before being serialized). The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are, as described above, those in which the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, they are upper 6 bits in each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Two signals obtained by differentiating a certain LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, forced switching circuit 1512 f of peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in differentiation circuit 1512 e, when these two signals are input. When the two circuits differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect as shown in FIG. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are The difference is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512 f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e are not input, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) based on a differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of “S-Electronics Inc.'s“ V-by-One (registered trademark) ”from the transmitter IC 1512d for side effect as a plus signal and minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 And 868, and are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and to the RXIN + and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When the two signals differentiated into the source signal and the negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, produces the start screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on During a period displayed on the display device 1600 or a period in which a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display The door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Shine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, LOCKN signal output request data having a data format different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3 V created by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDS GND request paper, PLL GND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE 0, and MODE 1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to ground.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal to the GND terminal serving as the ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and the capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as the ground for the LVDS input, and supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This terminal is used to designate either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and in the present embodiment, the terminal As such, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, the rising edge can be specified.

  The OE terminal instructs whether to allow the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In this mode, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to be switched automatically.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the inputted LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Send to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal restored are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  Terminals D0 to D17 are three video signals (18 red, green and blue video signals restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals, respectively (18 It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals such as D0 to D5 terminals, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
Incidentally, it is generally known that when electronic components are surface-mounted, it is beneficial in that the hardware circuit can be suitably downsized by integration. However, in the case of integrated circuit components (components encapsulated in a relatively large package in the form of integration of multiple types of single function elements (such as resistance elements, diode elements, or capacitor elements)), By nature, a package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which a single functional element is enclosed in a relatively small package), thus creating a relatively large space on the back side of the package. In addition, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a place (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are easily mounted illegally) that is difficult to visually confirm in a surface-mounted state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate or the like) for many years instead of surface mounting.

  That is, the electronic component to be inserted and mounted tends to generate a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting the electronic component, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a spot that can be easily confirmed visually even in the mounted state, whereby the illegal component can be mounted. It is made to be suitably suppressed.

  However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the size of the space provided for presentation has been further increased, and the hardware circuit has been miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. There is a need to plan.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second control unit, which is only for performing effect control regarding a game, among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefit obtained by the player and is not easily targeted for fraud, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

  That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control substrate 1510 as shown in FIG. The second control unit SCG uses the various integrated circuit parts mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 and the various discrete parts to perform the progression of effects according to the result of the above-mentioned game progression process. Can be executed.

  Here, examples of various integrated circuit components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 include a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Also, as various kinds of discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510, there are, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, etc. shown in FIG.

  In this respect, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510) on the surface of the base plate. Only the surface mounting area to be mounted in a form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the various electronic components described above that the peripheral control substrate 1510 has. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are not subject to fraud, the security performance against the unauthorized loading of the electronic components is not degraded. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be miniaturized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to control the power supply for control (for example, + 5V). Processing related to the game including generation processing and payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be illegal. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and amusement entertainment The decline is inevitable.

  However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931). Of the various electronic components, the discrete component has a smaller package than the integrated circuit component, and even if the electronic component is illegally mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed by visual recognition. It can be said that this is a component having relatively high performance as security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  That is, the inventor found that among the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG, components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components) are mixed. If attention is paid to the fact that further integration as a hardware circuit is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud, the above-mentioned first control unit MCG side that is easily subject to fraud also It has been found that it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically illustrating a state in which the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud. In the following, referring to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent. This is explained.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. A base substrate 951 and a base substrate of the power supply substrate 931 are provided, and an example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As a matter of fact, here, for convenience of explanation, first, it will be described on the assumption that they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, the base plate BB is
An insertion mounting area TH which is mounted in a form in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and which is inferior in integrated performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
The surface mounting region SM is excellent in integration performance due to the multi-layering of wiring patterns, etc., with the lead portion provided in the electronic component being mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the surface mounting area SM Both are provided in the form of being divided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to mount an electronic component that is not easily targeted for fraud in the surface mounting area SM, but the electronic component that should be pursued for suppressing fraud rather than being integrated is mounted on the insertion mounting area TH side While making it possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit, it is possible to preferably maintain the suppression performance for the mounting of the illegal part.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
· An integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance against improper mounting, in which multiple types of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package.
-The single function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and it has a discrete part D2 with high security performance against improper mounting.

  In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance is referred to as the insertion mounting region TH and the surface. The mounting area SM is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance, and only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent.

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, surface mount type discrete components D2a and the discrete components D2 mounted on the surface mount area SM as the discrete components D2 with high security performance. And an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting region TH.

  That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, in general, it is possible to achieve integration by using a surface mounting type instead of an insertion mounting type. However, when both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately as the base plate BB, for example, the position at which the integrated circuit component D1 electrically connected is provided in circuit design. In view of the balance with the space provided with the wiring pattern related to this, it is possible to reverse the integration by arranging the electronic components not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. Cases can also arise.

  In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, not all of the discrete components D2 are used as the surface mount type discrete components D2a, so that it is the most suitable mode for integration. In some cases, an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used. As a result, it is expected that miniaturization of the hardware circuit can be more suitably achieved while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppressing performance is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the board and is formed on the other side (front side) surface to provide discrete components. And integrated circuit components are both mounted. On the other hand, the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is not formed on the one side (back side) surface of the substrate, and is formed on the other side (front side) surface so that the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are not formed. Of these, it is desirable to mount only the discrete components without mounting the integrated circuit components. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back surface, which is likely to be a blind spot when confirming whether the illegal component is mounted, is excluded. On this basis, in the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent and discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. In the inferior surface mounting area SM, since only discrete components that are not subject to fraud are to be mounted, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of fraudulent components. It becomes like this.

  Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even with the discrete component D2 with high security performance, the capacitor element with the largest capacitance value among the capacitor elements (backup In the case of power supplies, etc., the surface mounting area in view of its relatively larger shape than other elements (such as resistor elements, diode elements, and capacitor elements with a small capacitance value (such as filter circuits)). The surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM is not used, and only the insertion mounting type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insertion mounting area TH is prepared. As a result, when miniaturizing the hardware circuit, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components can be more suitably maintained.

  However, although the capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete components), there is no case where a very large gap is generated between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit component D1. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

  In addition, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a characteristic second technique based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). As a discrete circuit (a hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC that is electrically constituted by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 which are respectively mounted in an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM.

  That is, in this case, although it is one discrete circuit DHC aiming to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), mounting on the insertion mounting area TH is performed on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that can be mounted and an electronic component D2a having a shape that can be mounted on the surface mounting region SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party views the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the current situation, and it is expected that fraud can be suppressed even if the difficulty in understanding the circuit is increased. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting region SM, it is possible to expect a reduction in the size of the hardware circuit.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suppressing the fraud with respect to the electronic component.

  However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Next, an example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application. explain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. And three base substrates. Then, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base substrates.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the power supply substrate 931 of the three base substrates, and the base of the main control substrate 1310 In the substrate and the base substrate of the delivery control substrate 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.

  Of the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 (FIG. 75) of the “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM” described above. Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base substrate of the main control board 1310 as a surface mount type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) in the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM” is mounted on the surface of the base board of the payout control board 951. In the region SM, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is to be mounted.

  According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is a surface mount type discrete component D2a. It is mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent. A characteristic first technique according to the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG has a specific type of discrete component (here, both the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are Schottky). Only a plurality of diode elements will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance have the same shape, it is expected that the effort required for fraud confirmation is saved.

  Further, in the above configuration, discrete components (electronic components that bear a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) side different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mounting region SM on the power supply substrate 931, the surface mounting region SM is formed on another substrate and mounted as a surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, a single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. The plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are mounted separately in an insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and a surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, although it is one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) aiming to exhibit a backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply substrate) on the base plate BB Electronic component D2b having a shape enabling mounting on 931) and electronic component D2a having a shape enabling mounting on surface mounting area SM (main control substrate 1310, payout control substrate 951) are mixed become. Therefore, when a third party views the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it hard to recall that there is a problem, and it becomes possible to suppress fraud even if the difficulty of understanding such a circuit is enhanced (the second characteristic technique of the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function are inserted and mounted region TH (capacitor element). And the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), and the discrete component D2 is divided into two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board) In this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit has increased. So incorrect suppression can be further expected.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as apparent from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the insertion mounting area TH in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. The area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting area SM inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided, and it becomes possible to expect fraud suppression.

  In the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for whether or not fraudulent acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is relatively inferior in security performance are relatively reduced. Thus, the visual check can be facilitated.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a surface mounting area that is relatively inferior in security performance is relatively reduced. , It will be possible to reduce the load on the visual check.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting region SM is provided on each of the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951. You may form.

  Further, the surface mounting region SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and the surface mount type discrete component D2 that should be originally mounted on the other base substrate is also collectively arranged on the specific base substrate. Also good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting has been performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mounting region SM formed on a specific base substrate. It is expected that the time and effort required can be saved.

  However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the above three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to preferably prevent fraud. I must.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is configured by three base substrates, as schematically shown in FIG. 117, they may be configured collectively on one base substrate.

  Further, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application only needs to divide the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH, and this is provided by a plurality of base substrates. It may be provided by one base substrate.

  For example, the base board of the main control board 1310 includes a first base board in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, and the second base board By inserting and mounting the board on the insertion mounting area TH of the first base board, the electronic components inserted and mounted on the first base board are maintained while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It may be assumed that a structure in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other is adopted, but in this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG” “Plate BB” is a concept including at least a first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. . That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as “in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.” It is included as an aspect.

  When the first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and the second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided. It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so as to face different directions (preferably, orthogonal directions).

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is an electronic component sealed in a relatively small package as a component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting the illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

  However, even with such discrete components (surface mount components) with excellent security performance, there are places on the back side that are difficult to confirm by visual inspection when mounted on the surface mount region SM, although it is a small space. It is still left. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1 understands that “there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mounted parts) to mount unauthorized parts”. However, in the situation where it is difficult to check by anxiety, such as “an extremely small illegal part may be created and this may be illegally installed”, it is difficult to confirm by visual inspection. There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 become complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

  Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 in the following manner instead of the above-described manner.

[Modified Example of Each Base Substrate of Main Control Substrate 1310 and Dispensing Control Substrate 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a partial region of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, a modification of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. Although the description of the modification of the base substrate of the payout control board 951 is omitted, it can be modified with the same contents as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least the insertion mounting substrate THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

  Then, also in the insertion mounting substrate THB according to the modification, as in the insertion mounting substrate TH of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in a form of being inserted. Also, similarly, among the electronic components (insertion mounting components), both the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2b with high security performance are included.

  However, as apparent from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. The electronic components to be mounted in this way are only provided. That is, although the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification has both the surface mounting area and the surface mounting components mounted in the area, any of them may be It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

  More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes the special mounting parts D3 (in the figure, special mounting parts in addition to the integrated circuit parts D1 and the discrete parts D2b as the insertion mounting parts). D3a, special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 incorporates an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance to the above-mentioned insertion mounting substrate THB in a state where it is concealed Insertion mounting is performed via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL described later.

  According to such a special mounting component D3, although the surface mounting area described later and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area are respectively provided in the interior, fraud suppression is performed. Since it has an appearance shape that looks as if it is a single insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB having excellent performance, it is expected to be removed from the target component for unauthorized purposes by a malicious person. It can be done. Note that in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion on which the special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting board THB is the surface mounting on which the surface mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

  In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged in one place (adjacent) but are arranged at a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component D3a) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large region (insertion mounting region) where the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It is supposed to set up.

  That is, in this case, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mounting components) mounted on the surface mounting area are divided into portions and become inconspicuous, and in addition to the appearance shape described above, The surface mounting area exists when a malicious person looks at the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it becomes better integrated into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice, and as a result, it is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the illegal part more suitably.

  Although described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed in the special mounted component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, also in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) (Diode MD0)) and mounted separately. Moreover, for the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position (such as the power supply substrate 931) not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a incorporating the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area It is made to be implemented with.

  As described above, it is made difficult to recall that the electronic component incorporated in the special mounting component D3a exerts a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), thereby enhancing the difficulty of circuit understanding. Thus, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

  Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the part on which the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and a part of the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is omitted to reveal the internal structure thereof. The figure (part surrounded by dotted line) is included.

  As is shown together with the explanatory view, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification is a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted, Surface mount type discrete components D2a mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB, and special insert mounting lead portions as insertion mount lead portions inserted into through holes (specific insertion holes) of the insertion mount substrate THB It comprises TL and an outer package OP which molds each of these portions with a mold resin.

  Here, the special surface mounting substrate SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mounting type discrete component D2a) mounted on the substrate and the special insertion mounting lead portion TL. The wiring patterns HP are formed so as to be connected to each other, and the mounting surface thereof is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

  The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is limited to a size that allows the surface mounting type discrete component D2a to be mounted. For example, it is necessary when mounting an integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a. The mounting surface has an area smaller than the assumed area. In other words, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is a surplus space for further mounting other electronic components. In the surface mount substrate SMB, in order to reduce the size, there is not enough space to mount another electronic component when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted. Not left.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes difficult to perform any fraud on the special surface mounting board SMB, further downsizing of the hardware circuit can be achieved while suppressing the mounting of the fraudulent parts. Expected.

  The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded by a molding resin. Then, inside thereof, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed to be drawn to the outside of the inner package (mold resin), and the surface mount lead portion SL is By electrically connecting to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB The Schottky diode element (the diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

  Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided in a flat outer shape (package shape), and is soldered in a form in which the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. By surface mounting. However, as described above, the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB on which the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type is mounted has a relation substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface but a surface (thin surface) on the thin side facing the insertion mounting substrate THB. It will be implemented to be a form.

  In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board THB, not a flat surface having a relatively large area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (for two through holes) is left on the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even under such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed for the small area (for two through holes).

  Note that the size of the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself (the length in the horizontal direction in the figure) according to this modification is when the special mount component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The pitch is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are inserted (specific insertion hole installation interval).

  The special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mounting substrate SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed in the special surface mounting substrate SMB. By being soldered at the same place, it is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead SL through the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is soldered in a state of being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting substrate THB so that it is fixed to the insertion mounting substrate THB and the insertion mounting substrate THB side They are electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern of

  Further, the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by a mold resin, but is different from the mold resin. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double-molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

  With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to perform any fraud on a surface-mount substrate that is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

  In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the appearance shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mounting component itself internally surface-mounted. . That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a can be mounted in a state of concealing the external appearance of itself, it is possible that the surface mounting component of the specific type embedded in the special mounting component D3a is not mounted. It becomes more difficult to understand the circuit, and can be expected to suppress fraud.

  Moreover, the outer package OP has only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL out of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided in the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount substrate SMB so as to be drawn out to the outside of the lead, and the special mount component D3a is inserted into the lead portion for insertion mounting (special insertion mounting). It is designed to be mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

  According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a can be provided despite the fact that the surface mounting substrate and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate, which are inferior in fraud suppression performance, are provided therein. It is expected to be excluded from the target of fraudulent's fraudulent purpose because it can be functioned as if it is one insertion packaging part implemented in an insertion packaging area excellent in fraud suppression performance. It can be done. In addition, since it is possible to treat it equally as a single insertion mounting type discrete component also in the physical distribution and mounting, it can be said that such ease of handling is excellent.

  Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a whose lateral width is smaller than the pitch between through holes, by the molding resin different from the molding resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding together with the target special surface mounting substrate SMB, the external shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between through holes is obtained.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting region (the interval between the insertion holes), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may promote fraud.

  In this respect, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a, which has a width smaller than the pitch between through holes, is an electronic component having a size that does not fall within the pitch between through holes. It is made to be implemented after giving an appearance shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310, there is no electronic component having an external shape whose lateral width is smaller than the pitch between through holes. Since only the electronic component of the type (insertion mounting component) can be viewed as being mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized components.

  Furthermore, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic components mounted on the surface, and all the insertion mounted components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB (special It is considered as a unique appearance shape different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3. That is, the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification has an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin against a mere discrete component D2a that can only have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. After being applied, it is made unique and has a relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape for attracting the malicious person's attention.

  According to such a configuration, excessive security performance applied on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 can be shown to a third party, thereby reducing the will to commit fraud. Can be expected.

  Furthermore, an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP. In this modification, the content of the identification number (◯ 3213) is assigned to the inner package ( It is made to differ from the content (SD) of the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

  According to such a configuration, since the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the specific type of surface mounted component does not appear, the external package OP is externally surface-mounted with the appearance shape generated by the external package OP. This difference from the external shape of the specific type of surface mounted component (in combination with the structure of the double mold) makes it possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mounted component is not mounted. In addition, it can appear as if only the insertion mounting type electronic component (insert mounting component) is mounted, and the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal component can be improved.

  Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting board SMB is made smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Then, on this, the mounting surface on which the electronic component and the wiring pattern are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the mold resin is directly applied on the back surface side It has become.

  That is, by adopting such a configuration, an insertion mounting type in which the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting component D3a is mounted in the insertion mounting area TH as well as forming a unique and asymmetric appearance shape This is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. Thus, in combination with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other, there is no need to secure a special mounting space or the like when mounting the special mounting component D3a to the insertion mounting substrate THB. The special mounting component D3a can be inserted while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

  As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example appears as one insertion mounting type discrete component in appearance. And D2a is included in the inside. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB inside and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire.

  Further, in the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a to be surface-mounted, a special mounting component D3b for internally mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

  That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the insertion mounting type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. It forms a circuit. Even in such a filter circuit configuration, it is recalled that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrical close role in order to exert a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult to suppress the fraud. By increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, fraud can be suppressed.

  In the special mounting component D3b, both of the resistor element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be surface-mounted on the special surface mounting board SMB. However, in this case, at least the electronic components having the highest height among the electronic components (insertion mounting components) to be inserted into and mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB, such as arranging each electronic component in a row side by side For example, it is desirable from the viewpoint of miniaturizing the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 that the outer appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element (not shown) or the like is left as it is.

  In addition, the special mounting component D3 may be one in which a plurality of types of electronic components are built in this way, or a plurality of one type of electronic components may be built in. In any case, in the case where a plurality of electronic components are incorporated, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted on one special surface mounting substrate SMB side by side and in a line, and the electronic components are mounted. It is desirable that the parts and the special surface mounting substrate SMB be collectively molded by a molding resin and packaged.

  However, when a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the external shape naturally becomes large, and “it is an electronic component of a type that can be inserted and mounted with this size and shape. There is a concern that it may not be possible to expect a dazzling effect using a preconception, such as a discrete component of the insertion mounting type. Therefore, in order to suitably obtain such a dazzling effect using preconceptions, a single surface mount type discrete component is used alone, and its external shape is made different by the structure of the double mold described above, and its thinness is reduced. It is desirable that the surface be mounted so as to face the insertion mounting substrate TH.

  In addition to forming the outer package OP of the above-mentioned double mold with a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number attached to one surface mount type discrete component itself. It can also be said that it is important to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding by adding OP.

  The special mounting component D3 according to this modification is a structure having “one surface mounting type discrete component” smaller than “one insertion mounting type discrete component” in the inside thereof. The size when double-molded is about the same size as “one insert mounting type discrete component”, and it can be expected that the above-described excellent operational effects can be expected. . Therefore, in a configuration in which “one insert mounting type discrete component” is included and double-molded, the size is larger than “one insertion mounting type discrete component”. Since it is clear, it can not be expected that the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved.

  Hereinafter, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized. Each content to be described below can be adopted by any of the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and another example thereof, and the technique described with reference to FIG. 118 and another example unless otherwise described. This is an effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 are:
-A game progressing process including a payout of a prize ball as well as a process of generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V etc.) by using a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic parts are mounted and using the electronic parts And a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, effects relating to the game advanced by the first control unit MCG are performed. Second control unit SCG
Game machine, which aims to solve the problems such as "to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component". .

  More specifically, in the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, first, “play control relating to a game among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the above-mentioned second control unit SCG, which is only to be performed, is not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and is not easily regarded as an object of fraud, the second control unit SCG One of the technical features is that this is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface-mounted type components (SMD) are also used as the various mounting electronic components described above that the peripheral control substrate 1510 has, but these mounting electronic components can be obtained by the player. The hardware circuit to be mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without degrading the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component since it is not directly related to the benefits and is difficult to be regarded as an illegal target. Can be miniaturized.

  On the other hand, since the process on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be an illegal target. Therefore, although the size reduction of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of the mounting electronic components is significantly reduced, The reality is that a decline in the amusement interest is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the first control unit MCG has a substrate on which
· An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate BB and the integration performance is inferior but the fraud suppression performance is excellent;
· A surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB and is excellent in integration performance due to multi-layer lamination of wiring patterns etc. but inferior in fraud suppression performance First of all, both and will be established. Then, on this, it is a technical feature that the following two types of mounting electronic components having different properties are selectively mounted on the insertion mounting area or the surface mounting area having the above-mentioned properties in a form capable of solving the above-mentioned problems. One of them.

・ Multiple types of single function elements are integrated in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting ・ Single function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package Discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

  More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component with low security performance is mounted only in the insertion mounting area which is excellent in fraud suppression performance among the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area. At the same time, in the surface mounting area which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance, only discrete components with high security performance are to be mounted. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component on the side of the first control unit MCG which tends to be a target of the illegal operation.

  However, even if it is configured to maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components in this way, the board included in the first control unit MCG is likely to be targeted for fraud. There is no change. Therefore, the substrate of the first control unit MCG basically has a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. It is desirable that the mounting surface (flat surface) be directed to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in a state covered with the In other words, in this case, the first control unit MCG can be achieved by simply opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 as well as making it possible to make illegal actions on the mounting surface (flat surface) difficult by the transparent cover member. Therefore, it is possible to monitor (visually) whether or not an illegal component is mounted, so that an illegal component is used as a substrate (first substrate) on which an integrated circuit component that is likely to be illegal is mounted. It is possible to preferably ensure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring for the loading of the

  In order to obtain such effects, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic component is mounted on one side (back side) of the board of the first control unit MCG. First, the mounting electronic component is mounted only on the other side (front side) and covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 should be disposed in such a manner that the other side (front side) faces the rear side.

  Further, in view of the fact that, among the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 is a portion that performs processing directly linked to the awarding of a player's benefit, the first control unit MCG has each component described above. It may be desirable to apply each of the substrates to the substrate of the main control substrate 1310, in particular.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably maintain the security performance against improper mounting of the mounting electronic component, first, as a substrate included in the main control substrate 1310, an insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed to form an integrated circuit component. Prepare at least a first substrate on which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance is formed and integrated circuit components are not mounted but discrete components are surface mounted Make it And about the said 1st board | substrate among these board | substrates, the surface (an electronic component is not mounted) of the said one side in the state covered with the said transparent cover member (various board | substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320 etc.) The second side of the other side (the front side on which the electronic component is mounted) and the other side (the front side on which the electronic component is mounted) is disposed to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Both the one side surface (the back side surface on which the electronic component is not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal to this It is desirable to arrange so as to face the direction. That is, in this case, since the presence of the surface mounting area (the second substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance can be made less visible from the rear side, the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component is more preferable. It will be expected to be maintained.

  However, even in such a configuration, if a malicious person sticks to "Surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed somewhere", the surface inferior in fraud suppression performance There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting region is formed will be noticed. In this case, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, although only the discrete component with high security performance among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is mounted, the fraud that the hall side has not yet recalled. If a small illegal chip is used (for example, a very small illegal chip is developed), a loss may occur.

  Therefore, the other side surface (front side) of the first substrate on which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is not limited to the insertion mounting area but fraud suppression. The surface mounting area with inferior performance is also formed on the same surface (front side). Then, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is left exposed, and the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is connected to the pachinko machine. It is desirable to arrange it so that it faces the rear side of 1. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting region of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first board arranged to face the rear side is when a malicious person tries to perform an illegal act from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It plays a role as an advertising tower that appeals that “no mounting electronic components are mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, and the pachinko machine 1 has high fraud suppression performance” As a result, it is possible to lose the willingness of a malicious person to find the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed. Note that the surface mounting region formed on the first substrate is preferably provided at a position (such as an end of the first substrate) where the presence of the surface mounting region is easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

  The pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate has an independent shape that is not electrically connected to the surface mounting area and the insertion mounting area formed on the same plane. Although it is electrically connected to the insertion / mounting area, even if an unauthorized part is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion / mounting area side is not affected (the game is advanced) It is important to form it on an output signal that does not need to be used above. On the other hand, unlike the first substrate, the second substrate according to this illustrative example is formed with only the surface mounting region that is inferior in fraud suppression performance among the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region. A mounting electronic component (here, a discrete component) is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region.

  Even when each configuration described above is adopted, it is possible for a malicious person to find out "the second board on which discrete components are surface-mounted to the surface mounting area which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance". Sex can not be completely excluded. Therefore, among the surface mounting areas of the main control substrate 1310, “the surface mounting area formed only on the other surface of the first substrate and on which no mounting electronic component is mounted” is the surface mounting area. While the pattern wiring as a pattern is exposed in the form of facing toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, “the surface mounting area formed only on the other side surface of the second substrate” The second substrate is molded with a mold member (non-transparent member) in a state where only discrete components that are difficult to be illegitimate of the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are surface-mounted and molded by the mold member (impermeable member) Both the back side on which no electronic component is mounted and the other side (front side) do not face the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and face the direction orthogonal to this It is desirable to be disposed. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component mounted on the surface mounting area is. In addition to making it difficult to tamper with the mounting surface by means of the mold member (a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area where mounting of the Since it can be removed from the target that requires monitoring for mounting), the hardware circuit is miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components. It is expected to solve the problem of “good” appropriately.

  However, more preferably, with regard to mounting components (in this case, discrete components) surface-mounted in the above-mentioned surface mounting area, as shown in FIG. It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area TH of the first substrate in a state where it is molded with a non-permeable member. According to such a configuration, the first substrate arranged to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (a surface mounting area which impresses that “the pachinko machine 1 does not mount the surface mounting component”, and the electronic component In the insertion mounting area among the substrates on which the insertion mounting area on which the chip is mounted is formed, the “discrete component”, the “integrated circuit component”, and the “second substrate together with the mold member (impermeable member) The “surface-mounting regions in a state molded by the above” are inserted and mounted, and are electrically connected between the electronic components. That is, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, both the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are mounted, and the surface mounting area (the first one is inferior to the fraud suppression performance) 2) “The security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting is maintained because it becomes possible for the substrate to be incorporated as if it were an insertion mounting part and to be electrically functioned as it is difficult to visually recognize by the mold member. However, it is expected to solve the problem of “reducing the size of the hardware circuit” more suitably.

  In addition, for the second board on which the surface mount component is mounted, the board is inserted and mounted to the first board so that the thin surface of the board faces the rear side (the board surfaces are orthogonal to the first board). Therefore, it is possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without generating a large blind spot between the first substrate and the first substrate.

  Here, even when each of the above configurations is adopted, “the second substrate itself in a state of being molded by the mold member (non-permeable member) is used as a mold member (non-permeable member) together with unauthorized parts. The hall side is required to periodically check whether or not an illegal act such as “replace with another substrate in a molded state” is performed. In this regard, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, the fraudulent action is performed when the above-mentioned fraudulent action is performed in which the color or material of the mold member is replaced with another substrate having the same configuration. It may be difficult to detect that the electronic device is in a broken state, and the security performance against improper mounting of mounting electronic components may also be reduced.

  Therefore, only a specific type of discrete component (mounting electronic component) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 is included in the surface mounting region of the second substrate to be molded. It is preferable that the surface mounting is performed, and the other types are not mounted on the second substrate but only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only the discrete component having a specific shape is molded on the surface mounting region of the second substrate while being surface-mounted, so that the shape of the undulating portion ( The degree of swelling of the mold member at the discrete component mounting position (see, for example, FIG. 118) is unified. That is, when another substrate on which an unauthorized component is also mounted is molded by the mold member in addition to the discrete component of the specific type, the degree of expansion of the mold member at the mounted position of the unauthorized component is the mounting position of the discrete component of the specific type Therefore, it is easy to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior by the shape difference appearing on the mold member (the swelling state is not single). It will be expected to maintain security performance favorably.

  In this case, discrete components of a specific type are collectively mounted only on the surface mounting area of the second substrate on at least the substrate of the first control unit MCG which the main control substrate 1310 has, It can be said that it is more desirable to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit by not mounting it on a board different from the two boards.

  However, “discrete components of a specific type” in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects are required to be electronic components for mounting that are geometrically the same, so for example, “discrete components of a specific type” If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type" and is not mounted on the second substrate and is different from this Will be required to Also, strictly speaking, when “Schottky barrier diode” is surface-mounted on the second substrate as “discrete component of a specific type”, “Schottky barrier diode” of the same product is used for the second substrate in all cases. Surface mounting is required, and it is desirable that different products “Schottky Barrier Diodes” be mounted not on the second substrate but on a different substrate.

  However, on the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit more appropriately, only the types of the discrete components to be surface mounted are different, and the other structure (the insertion mounting area is not formed or Prepare a third substrate that is mounted on only one side, the mold structure, etc., the same as the second substrate described above, and surface-mount only one type of discrete component different from the specific type. It is desirable that the third substrate is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to other mounting electronic components. According to such a configuration, the substrate (second substrate, third substrate) having the above-described mold structure for each type of discrete component is a special mounting component D3a, special in the example of FIG. It is prepared as mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified for each substrate having a mold structure, and monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent action (on the corresponding substrate) “It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are not mounted. It is possible to preferably solve the problem of “miniaturizing the circuit”. In addition to the second and third substrates, a substrate on which only discrete components of a type different from the discrete components mounted on the substrates may be similarly prepared.

  If only one discrete component is mounted on the surface of the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring can be further facilitated and the above-described double mold structure can be used. In combination, it becomes possible to more suitably solve the problem of “reducing the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components”.

  When a plurality of substrates thus molded (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided. It is desirable that each surface mounting surface (the other surface described above) is disposed so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to collectively check the degree of swelling in the mold member of each substrate from the same direction, monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (a type of type that should not be mounted on the relevant substrate It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not electronic components are mounted.

  Furthermore, component-side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component mounted on the surface of each of the substrates is applied to each member (mold member) for molding the second substrate and the third substrate. In addition, it is desirable that each of the surfaces with the component side identification display be arranged so as to face the same direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to make one-to-one correspondence between the "type of component side identification display" attached to the second substrate and the third substrate and "the shape to appear in the mold member". It will be possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, the component side identification display is to be attached to the mold surface (the surface on which the mold member does not generate swelling) which is opposite to the side on which the surface mounting area is formed. It is desirable to eliminate distortion as the identification display so as not to cause a confirmation error.

  Further, according to the above configuration, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, one discrete electronic component surface-mounted with respect to the substrate is molded on one substrate Each of the components is provided as a component, and insertion and mounting are performed with the substrate surfaces orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second and third substrates on which discrete components originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted are as if they are insertion mounted components without creating a large space between the first substrate and the second substrate. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount on the first substrate, it is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  However, in order to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of the illegal component, the appearance as the “electronic component to be inserted and mounted to the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounted component” It is required that each of the third substrates be provided so as to be invisible to the substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed. Therefore, for the second substrate and the third substrate, it is possible not to surface-mount a plurality of types of discrete components, to prevent the integrated circuit components from being surface-mounted, or as shown in FIG. In the case where only one discrete component is surface-mounted, the size as the substrate is reduced and this is used as one insertion mounting component (the structure in which the electric element is connected to the insertion mounting lead portion by the bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it appear as if it is a common electronic component (discrete component)). That is, the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate is at least an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate, or an empty state formed on the first substrate but not mounted at all. It is required that the area be smaller than the surface mounting area.

  Furthermore, in this way, the second substrate and the third substrate can be made compact, and the first substrate can be one electron each of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate. Insertion mounting parts (discrete parts (discrete parts (general electronics having a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion mounting leads by bonding wires) mounted at a mounting height lower than those electronic parts when the components are inserted and mounted as parts Components) and insertion mounting components mounted at a mounting height higher than those electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components having a structure in which electric elements are connected to insertion mounting lead portions by bonding wires)) It is more desirable to arrange each of them. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance formed on the first substrate. It becomes possible to make it look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second and third substrates may be provided as electronic components (mold components) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or may be inserted into the first substrate It can also be important to be provided as an electronic component (mold component) smaller than the largest one of the discrete components to be mounted.

  In general, a board corresponding to the type of electronic component mounted on the board on which the electronic component is mounted, including the board (first board) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed. For example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is provided near the place where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, for the second substrate and the third substrate according to this embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component functions and to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding. It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of the illegal parts suitably.

  Therefore, different board side identification displays are attached in the vicinity of positions where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the insertion mounting surface of the first board. However, any of these board-side identification displays includes any board-side identification display provided in correspondence with the same type of mounting electronic component, and any board-side identification within the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to make it a unique aspect different from the indication (for example, a special indication aspect such as “?” Or “*”). That is, in this case, even if the board side identification display (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board or the third board is inserted and mounted, the mode is the same kind of mounting electronics. Since it has a unique aspect that differs from the board-side identification display attached to each component, which type is mounted as a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate, respectively Can be made difficult to recognize.

  However, if a structure is adopted in which the difficulty of circuit understanding is enhanced by concealing which type of electronic component the second and third substrates function as described above, the type In order to grasp the above, there is a concern that a malicious person may perform an act of cutting the mold member and trying to check the internal element.

  Therefore, for the second substrate and the third substrate, first, no substrate side identification display should be attached on the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on the substrates. However, even if a malicious person scrapes the mold member and attempts to confirm the inside, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Is desirable.

  Still further, with respect to each discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate, many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate Is formed by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted by the second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as the other insertion mounting parts, and the second substrate or the third substrate is Even in the case of insertion mounting, the manager on the hole side can easily find out where the second and third substrates are located, and the second and third substrates are tampered with. It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation of the presence or absence of

  In this case, even in the case of a malicious person, it helps to grasp information as to which surface mounting area (the second substrate or the third substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided. It may be. In this respect, in the above configuration, the type as the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting region on the second substrate or the third substrate with the second mold member. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color disposed on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface, as well as the difficulty in understanding the circuit. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete components mounted on the surface mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and attempts are made to check the inside thereof. Even so, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded on the second substrate or the third substrate is scraped or whether the first mold member in the second substrate or the third substrate is scraped. As a result, it is expected that the difficulty of understanding the circuit is suitably maintained while keeping the type of the electronic component secret.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are each inserted and mounted as one electronic component, on the same mounting surface. A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”) different from any board-side identification display is added. However, if only the board side identification display having such a unique aspect is attached, it is impossible to grasp which type of electronic component functions on the hall side, and maintenance / There is a concern that the management will be adversely affected. Therefore, a board having a unique aspect at a position that is relatively easily visible in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are each inserted and mounted as one electronic component among the insertion and mounting surfaces of the first board. In addition to the side identification display, the same type of mounting electronic components (or different) on the same mounting surface at a position that is relatively difficult to see (such as directly under the molded second substrate or third substrate) It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same form as the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board) is also secretly attached.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) are surface mounted. In the surface mounting area of the third substrate, there is one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacitance) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310. Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) of the capacitor are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is apparent that the second substrate or the third substrate alone can not function as a discrete circuit (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit) having a specific function. That is, the mounting electronic component mounted on the surface mounting region formed on the molded substrate (the second substrate or the third substrate) and a substrate (here, different from the substrate (the second substrate or the third substrate) Then, by configuring a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components that are surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), the difficulty in understanding the circuit is increased, or the molded substrate (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace itself (because the structure in the mold is concealed and it is necessary to make a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function). It will be expected to be provided for countermeasures.

  As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the configurations having some technical features have been described in the order that can be expected to exert a synergetic effect. About each composition, it is only what was described as the best embodiment, and, in addition, not only that it is not necessary to necessarily use all those compositions, and combining suitably regardless of the order which described those compositions. It is possible to carry out.

  Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modifications will be described below.

[Technical thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that leads provided on the electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region is formed by molding the surface mount component itself with a mold resin. A game machine characterized in that the surface mounting area to be mounted is also molded with another mold resin.

[Technology 1-2]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, generation processing of a control power source and progress processing of a game can be respectively executed;
And a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided on the electronic component Of the surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the surface, only the surface mounting area is provided,
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
Of the plurality of electronic components, the first side surface mounting component mounted on the surface mounting area provided on the base plate of the first control unit, and the surface mounting area provided on the base plate of the second control unit Although all of the second side surface mounting components to be mounted are themselves molded by a molding resin, it is possible to use one of the first side surface mounting components and the second side surface mounting components. The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the first side surface mounting component is further molded on the surface mounting region together with a molding resin different from the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

  According to such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, although the surface mounting component mounted in the surface mounting area which is inferior in the fraud suppression performance is itself molded by the molding resin, Since the mold resin separately from the mold resin is molded integrally with the surface mounting area to be mounted, the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance may be subjected to some injustice. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technology 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic components is inserted and mounted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting part of the electronic components is placed on the surface,
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
On the special surface mount board,
A wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion;
Surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are:
Of the surface mounting lead portion and the special insertion mounting lead portion, only the special insertion mounting lead portion is integrally molded with the special surface mounting plate so as to be drawn out of the mold resin, A gaming machine that is mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a special insertion mounting lead portion.

  In such a technical idea 2, a surface mounting component mounted in a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is caused to function as if it is one insertion mounting component mounted in an insertion mounting area in excellent fraud suppression performance. As a result, it can be expected that a malicious person is excluded from the object of fraud.

[Technical thought 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic components is inserted and mounted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting part of the electronic components is placed on the surface,
For the surface mounted components,
It includes at least discrete surface mount components in which a single function element is molded with a mold resin,
The discrete surface mount components are
The discrete surface mount component has a relatively large external shape by being integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface mount component itself, and the base of the specific control unit A gaming machine having an appearance shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

  In this technical idea 3 above, excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is given to a mere discrete surface mounting component that can have only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit etc. It is unique as an appearance shape that attracts the attention of a malicious person and has a relatively large appearance shape. That is, in this case, since it is possible to show the third party the excessive security performance provided in the specific control unit, it is possible to expect a decline in the will to commit fraud.

[Technical thought 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that leads provided on the electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting areas are dispersedly provided at a plurality of places so that the respective areas become relatively small areas, whereas the insertion mounting areas are dispersed. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

  In such a technical idea 4, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppressing performance is not concentrated in one place, but is divided into small portions so that the surface mounting area is inconspicuous, and the fraud suppressing performance is relatively large. It is arranged to be inserted into an insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, when a malicious person looks at the base plate of the specific control unit, it becomes difficult to notice that the surface mounting area exists, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected that the hardware circuit be miniaturized.

[Technical thought 5]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using those electronic circuits, it is provided with a specific control unit which can respectively execute generation processing of control power source and progress processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
In the plurality of electronic circuits,
A backup power supply circuit for supplying a backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off is included as a discrete circuit including at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of single function elements. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area to be mounted in such a manner that leads provided on electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
The insertion mounting area is
The electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area is provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area,
The backup power circuit is
Although provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying a backup power supply to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off, the capacitor and the diode included in the discrete circuit One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting area surrounded by the insertion mounting area, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area. A game machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to a part.

  According to the technical idea 5 as described above, although it is a discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on an insertion mounting area on the base plate. An electronic component having a shape that can be equalized and an electronic component having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area are mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of a specific control unit, they have a close electrical role to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding these circuits, it will be possible to suppress fraud.

  Moreover, a specific electrical function (backup power supply) is disposed after arranging the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area excellent in the fraud suppression performance. The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit intended to exert the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it hard to notice the presence of the surface mounting area which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance, and the electronic component mounted on the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic components even when the presence is noticed. It is then possible to make it difficult to recall what kind of electrical function is implemented to exhibit, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, it is preferable to suppress fraud. It can be expected.

[Technology 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form of being inserted;
A surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface;
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
The special surface mount board is
While having a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting to the insertion mounting board The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion mounting plate and disposed such that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In general, the components mounted on the surface mounting board often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6 described above, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting board are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, an electronic component is mounted as an insertion mounting board because a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mounting board can be arranged even in a situation where only a few possible areas (surface areas) are left.

[Technical thought 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form of being inserted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface of the base board in the form of being mounted on the surface of the base board.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion mount plate. Are
The specific surface mount components are:
Although the size is within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mounting component itself is integrally formed with the surface mounting board to be mounted by the molding resin different from the molding resin of itself. A gaming machine having an appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within an installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

  That is, when a specific surface mounting component is kept in an external shape smaller than the installation distance of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting board, the specific control unit is provided with a surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which may in turn encourage fraud.

  In this point, in the above technical idea 7, a specific surface mounting component is integrally molded with a surface mounting board to be mounted by a mold resin different from a mold resin of the specific surface mounting component itself. Since the external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. Will be able to make it harder for third parties to notice things.

[Technical thought 8]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and capable of executing a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using the electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The base plate of the first control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as a substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed,
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is left exposed and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. Are arranged in
The second substrate is
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface mounting region, and only the discrete component is mounted, and faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A game machine characterized by being disposed.

  In such a technical idea 8, a first substrate on which a surface mounting region in which no mounting electronic components are mounted and which is in an empty state is prepared is prepared, and the first substrate is provided in the surface mounting region. The pattern wiring is arranged in such a manner as to face the rear side of the gaming machine while the pattern wiring is exposed. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, “There is no mounting electronic component on the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance, and it is highly illegal as a gaming machine. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that “suppression performance is provided”, and it is expected to suppress the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  On the other hand, the second board is arranged in a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine so that the presence of the second board is not easily noticed, and the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Among the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components which are likely to be fraudulent are not mounted and only discrete components which are less likely to be fraudulent are mounted. That is, in this case, the presence of the first substrate makes it difficult to notice the presence of the second substrate itself, and of course, even if the presence is noticed, the second substrate is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since only discrete components that are not subject to fraud are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized components. Become.

[Technology 9]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region is formed in which a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate A second substrate having a surface mounting region mounted thereon and a special insertion mounting lead portion that extends outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting region of the first substrate. And
The first substrate includes
An insertion mounting area where insertion mounting lead portions provided in the insertion mounting component can be mounted and a surface mounting lead portion provided in the surface mounting component are placed on the surface. Both the surface mount area that can be mounted are formed, but no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mount area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is not formed. It has been left in the dew,
The second substrate includes
Only the surface mounting region is formed of the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region, and only the discrete component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is to be mounted. As the one electronic component molded into the first board, the special insertion / mounting lead portion is inserted into the insertion / mounting area of the first board, so that various insertion / mounting parts to be mounted on the first board can be obtained. A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between.

  In such a technical idea 9, a surface mounting area in which no mounting electronic component is mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed as a surface mounting area having poor fraud suppression performance ( A first substrate), and a surface mounting area (second substrate) in which only discrete components which are difficult to be targets of fraud among discrete components and integrated circuit components are in a state of being molded on both substrates in a surface mounted state; Is equipped. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, it is difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting area on which the mounting electronic component is mounted. Since only the surface mounting area on which no electronic component is mounted can be viewed, the surface mounting area is “not mounted on any surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. As a gaming machine, it plays a role as an advertising tower to appeal that it has a high fraud suppression performance, and it is expected that this will suppress the mounting of illegal parts.

  In addition, the first substrate on which the surface mounting region serving as the advertising tower is formed has an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance in addition to the surface mounting region. Thus, the surface mounting region (second substrate) that is molded together with the substrate is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area (first mounting) that is inferior in fraud suppression performance in the insertion mounting area that is excellent in fraud suppression performance in the board (first board) that impresses that “the surface mounting component is not mounted”. (2 substrates) is inserted into the mold in such a way that it is difficult to see, so that it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting illegal components. Become.

[Technical thought 10]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region is formed in which a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate A second substrate on which a surface mounting area is mounted to be mounted on the surface;
In the first substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on the one side surface, and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other side surface, and the other side surface is behind the gaming machine. Whereas it is arranged in the direction facing the side,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one side surface, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other side surface, and only the discrete component is mounted. In the molded state, the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted on the first substrate in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine to be.

  According to such technical idea 10, with regard to the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the surface on one side, and integrated with the discrete component on the other surface. Since both the circuit component and the circuit component are mounted, the other side surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the gaming machine, so that an integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent is mounted. Thus, it is possible to preferably ensure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring for mounting of the illegal part as the target substrate (first substrate).

  In addition, for the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the surface on one side, and the integrated circuit component on which the other surface is likely to be fraudulent is mounted Because only discrete components that are not easily tampered with are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit should be miniaturized while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal components. Become.

  In addition, in the second board, both the one side surface and the other side surface are the gaming machine in a state where a surface mounting region on which the discrete component is mounted is molded with a molding member together with the board. It is arranged so that it faces in a direction different from the rear side. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area where mounting of the illegal parts is substantially impossible, and monitoring of mounting of the illegal parts is required (game machine It can be removed from the object to be confirmed from the rear side.

  In addition, regarding the surface mounting area (second board) thus excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of the unauthorized parts, the thin portion of the board faces the rear side (both the one side surface and the other side surface are the relevant). Since it is mounted on the first board so that it faces in a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine), the molded state without creating a large space with the first board. It becomes possible to mount the second substrate.

[Technical thought 11]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed;
A second substrate on which a surface mounting area on which a specific type of mounting electronic component of the discrete component is mounted is not formed, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A third substrate on which a surface mounting area on which a mounting electronic component of a type different from a specific type is not mounted is formed without the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component being mounted. And have
The second substrate and the third substrate are
By being provided as separate electronic components molded into discrete components respectively surface-mounted to those substrates, and by being insert-mounted to the insertion mounting areas formed in the first substrate, respectively. It is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
A component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component mounted on the surface of each of the second substrate and the third substrate is attached to each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate. A gaming machine, characterized in that each surface with an identification display is arranged so as to face a specific direction.

  According to the technical idea 11 as described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Thus, only the discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulently mounted on the second and third substrates on which the surface mounting regions inferior in fraud suppression performance are formed are respectively mounted in different types for each substrate.

  Therefore, for mounting electronic parts mounted on the insertion mounting area side with excellent fraud suppression performance, not only the conventional fraud suppression function is maintained but also mounting on the surface mounting area side with inferior fraud suppression performance As for electronic components, confirmation is made as to whether the mounting electronic components having the type corresponding to each of the second and third substrates are mounted (electronic components of a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate) It will be easy to detect even if fraud is made, and it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit. become.

  In addition, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components that are surface-mounted on those substrates, respectively. In addition, by being inserted and mounted in each of the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, it is possible to electrically connect to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. Yes. That is, in this case, a specific type of discrete component originally provided as a surface mounting component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were insertion mounting components. Since it becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while preferably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  Furthermore, each component that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. Each of the surfaces with side identification indications is arranged so as to face a specific direction. That is, in this case, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the “type of component side identification display” and the “shape that should appear on the mold member” attached to the second board and the third board that are respectively inserted and mounted on the first board. Since it becomes possible to cope with it, it is possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical thought 12]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
Insertion mounting is provided as a single electronic component molded to discrete components mounted on the surface of the substrate, and the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. By doing so, it is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounted components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate includes
An insertion mounting component mounted at a mounting height lower than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and a mounting height higher than the electronic component A game machine characterized in that insertion mounting parts are respectively disposed.

  According to the technical idea 12 described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate in which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as a single electronic component molded on each of the discrete components surface-mounted to the substrate and formed on the first substrate Insertion mounting is performed in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the inserted mounting region. That is, in this case, without creating a large space between the second substrate on which the discrete components originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted, the first substrate is as if it were an insertion mounted component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Still further, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and the electronic component Since the insertion mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height are respectively disposed, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in the anti-fraud performance is formed is the illegal one formed on the first substrate. It becomes difficult to recognize that it is mounted in an insertion mounting area with excellent suppression performance.

[Technical thought 13]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is molded by a first mold member of a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
An insertion mounting area provided as a single electronic component molded by a second mold member of the same or a similar color as the specific color to each discrete component surface-mounted to the substrate, and formed on the first substrate The gaming machine can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate by being inserted and mounted on the first board.

  According to the technical idea 13 as described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is less likely to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed on the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. It is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  In addition, for discrete components that are surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member having a color different from many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate And configured as one electronic component that is further molded by a second mold member having the same or similar color to the specific color together with the second substrate to be mounted. I have to.

  Therefore, even if the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same manner as other insertion mounting parts and inserted and mounted to the first substrate, the holes The side manager can easily find out where the second substrate is, and can easily confirm whether the second substrate is tampered with. However, in this case, even a malicious person may help grasp information as to which surface mounting area (second substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing the type as the electronic component by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting region with the second mold member together with the second substrate. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface as well as improving the performance. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside. Even so, it can be difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped or whether the first mold member inside is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component is kept secret and the difficulty of understanding the circuit is suitably maintained.

[Technology 14]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. Can be electrically connected with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate side identification display corresponding to a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the substrate, and the one electronic component is not mounted on the mounting surface of the first substrate. A specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the same kind of mounting electronic component. A gaming machine characterized by a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification displays attached in the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine, including the board-side identification display.

  According to such a technical idea 14, on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance is formed, both the integrated circuit component which is easily subject to fraud and the discrete component which is not easily fraudulent are mounted In the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. Therefore, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the fraudulent components suitably, hardware It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed on the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. It is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  Furthermore, no board-side identification display corresponding to the discrete component mounted on the surface of the second substrate is provided on the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate, and on the mounting surface of the first substrate. Although a specific substrate side identification indication is attached corresponding to the position where the second substrate as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted, the specific substrate side identification indication is the same kind of mounting electronic component In the first aspect of the present invention, a unique aspect different from any of the substrate side identification display provided in the first control unit and the second control unit is adopted, including the substrate side identification display provided correspondingly. That is, in this case, even if the specific substrate side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first substrate is confirmed, the aspect is different from the substrate side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Because of the unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. Also, even if the malicious member scrapes the mold member and attempts to confirm the inside of the mold member in order to grasp the type of the discrete component mounted on the surface mounting area, It is possible to make it hard to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical thought 15]
A first control unit having a base on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using the electronic circuits, generation processing of a control power source and progress processing of a game can be respectively executed;
And a second control unit that has a base board on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and can use the electronic circuits to execute a progression process of an effect according to the result of the game progression process.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit include:
It consists of mounting electronic components for single-function devices and includes specific discrete circuits that aim to perform specific electrical functions,
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates.
In the specific substrate of the base plate on which the surface mounting area is formed, only a specific type of mounting electronic component of the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface mounted and the specific type Various electronic components for mounting are provided as one electronic component molded on each and mounted on the different substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. Electrically connectable with the insertion mounting parts of the
Among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components that constitute the specific discrete circuit, another mounting electronic component different from the specific type is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being

  In such a technical idea 15, only a discrete component (a mounting electronic component constituting a specific discrete circuit) that is difficult to be fraudulently mounted is mounted on a specific substrate on which a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed. For this reason, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  In addition, in the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only the specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted, and the specific type Various electronic components that are mounted on the different substrates by being mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate are provided as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components. It can be electrically connected to the insertion mounting component of

  That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to insert and mount the specific substrate on which the surface mounting component is mounted on the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounting component, the suppression performance against the mounting of the illegal component It is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the above. Also, with the above specific substrate, since only a specific type of mounting electronic component of the mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit is surface mounted, it is necessary to confirm whether the surface mounting area is tampered with Can be made easier. In addition, since the above-mentioned specific substrate is molded in a specific type of mounting electronic components together, it is inserted and mounted on another substrate on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit with respect to a specific discrete circuit formed over the surface mounting area formed in the substrate and the insertion mounting area formed in the substrate different from the specific substrate to be provided for fraud measures Is expected.

[13. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described, and the main control board receives The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage trays, are driven by driving the dispensing motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing device 830) by communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko machine 1). When an apparatus for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the payout control board 951 from 1310, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H Then, two prize balls are designated,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in command 1 EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H.
By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and short time states, a low probability time short state indicating a low probability state and a short time state, a high probability time short state indicating a high probability state and a short time state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-short state which indicates that it is a state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state which indicates that it is a high probability state and not a short state (as normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for fluctuating display of symbols is shortened compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state), and stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery in a predetermined time will be described. The number of stop display times is increased compared to the non-short time state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is further extended compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state). State that it is possible to obtain the lottery opportunity of the special symbol without reducing balls by raising the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 which is shown (in other words, non-short time state The second start is achieved by increasing the determination of whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces and extending the period of the open and close operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces. The state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the mouth 2004).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 89, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening to start, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is starting while the 1st to 16th round big winning opening 1 is open (shown in FIG. 8, the starting opening unit 2100 The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize opening 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls of 0 to 10 is counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination effect (in the small hit, when the gaming ball entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005) The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open (starting opening unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the N round of the winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the winning opening 1 (start closing of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), Large winning opening 1 count display command, when the large winning opening 1 opening and count change to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the beginning of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning hole 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes a command at the time of power-on and a name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command includes the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 at power-on (including power-on and power-on recovery as well as power on and power failure). Information that indicates that the RAM is cleared when the operation switch 954 is operated, and also includes power recovery (in addition to power recovery, power recovery may occur due to power failure or momentary power outage) Information indicating which one of the low probability and short status, the high probability and short status, the low probability non-short status, and the high probability non-short status above (state and short status) to return. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the condition is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether it is (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also sent). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common drawing tuning production start, common design designation, common drawing tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1402. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. A low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-shorting state is set).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hitting opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (the pair of movable pieces The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display divisions are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  When the winning a prize display command is a big hit in the big hit other than during the big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even in the big hit, the game ball enters the big win port 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 and its game ball When the count sensor 4005 detects that the count error is detected), the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical signal in a route between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection error, the start of connection error notification is instructed, and for example, the disconnection / short circuit error display command includes a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, a count sensor This command instructs the start of the break / short circuit display when there is a break or short circuit in the electrical connection with the 4005 etc. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to the terminal, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error release navi command (corresponding to an error release command), and a command named frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test related category is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-10. Others]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting opening winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening start winning effect start, and based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and transmits the number of balls (number of pending) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shows the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of normal symbols (number of held)) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. It is intended to instruct the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 suspension, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command of the special symbol 2 suspension is the function display unit 1400 Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1405, pre-read and instruct pre-reading effect start to notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the starting ball winning command is when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor (when the starting ball is winning, or the second When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting opening sensor 4004), mainly from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. Transmitted to notify the effect, and the fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the termination of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension termination period) after the fluctuation is determined after settling the fluctuation shortening of the specified number of times, and the high probability termination designation command is , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 storage command is stored. When the ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and there is a reserved number not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases using the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 from the number of reservations) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 When the number of game balls enters the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases further while there is a number of reservations not yet used in the variable display, the second special symbol indicator 1405 makes it special from the number of reservations Pattern The normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced (used when the variable number display is reduced), and when the number of the symbol 1 operation ball is changed (the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the function display unit 1400 is normal) In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent) when it increases. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that effect, but The manner in which the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notification by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the pachinko machine 1 is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 may simply receive the starting opening winning command but may not be notified by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. The frame state 1, error release navigation, The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), the ball is detected, and the payout detection sensor error and the retry error are prepared. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated The random number for reach determination for use in the determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69 A random number for display pattern, a random number for a big hit symbol for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a big hit gaming state, and this big hit A big hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator 1 when generating a small hit gaming state 03 and second special symbol display 1405 for a small hit symbol random number for use in the determination of the small hit symbol displayed in derived display, an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in the determination of the initial value of this small hit symbol random number A random number for decision etc. is prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the initial value of an ordinary symbol determination random number per pattern for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are obtained. When the extraction is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a judgment random number.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. The counter counts up from the random value for determining the initial value per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value per symbol for normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the normal value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol per symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and always updates the random number for determination per symbol based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the starting opening 2004 can not be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned main control program performs processing at the time of main control power on as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register”) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310 af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts, clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is started, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this electric power clear process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary interruption occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear process, first, output of a power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, thereby starting output of the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power-clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure advance signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). It is done. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notification signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilized after power on, the main control program outputs a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It does depending on whether it is done or not. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The state is set (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notification signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value (sum value) of the checksum, etc. are changed by performing various processes after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 built in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware The random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) that should have been originally used for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-attrition random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the main control program returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special hold number indicator 1406, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188, the state indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). By the setting of the RAM access prohibition, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can not be accessed, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. Explain the problems in

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is charged to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary interruption. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is applied by applying +5 V as the charge stored in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after it is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and a pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Just before the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) starts to wait (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) and immediately before reaching the waiting time. Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. Interrupt initialization is performed, and then, in step S52, interrupt permission setting is performed. Even if the main control side timer interruption process described below is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process may not be completed. . For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the store clerk or the like in the hall of RAM clear, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (clear ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure advance signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly As stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is made in step S10.

  In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (ie, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure notice signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is shut off, backup processing for storing game information according to the progress of the game by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a A master consisting of the processing of step S58 to step S68, which is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of power-off on the main side, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the checksum calculation result in step S28 Since it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) in the backup processing matches, the instantaneous interruption stored and held in the main control internal RAM There is no need to initialize game information immediately before a power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the power supply VDD terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, and the timer clears to the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310 a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by setting the set value, clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af and not being able to start the time counting again. . The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 1310af, so that an interrupt initial setting is performed after step S24 (specifically, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM by setting the interrupt permission and preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing (to be described later). Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the main control-side power The contents of the main control built-in RAM (the contents of the main control built-in RAM are divided into two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-port solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. Starting to drive the solenoid 2108 and shifting from the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state in which it is opened; That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned based on the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize 1 count display command is transmitted to inform the number of gaming balls that are detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Control from the main control board 1310 a large winning a prize opening 1 closed display command instructing to shift from a closed state to a closed state (that is, start of closing between big winning opening 2005 rounds of starting opening unit 2100) When transmission is made to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. That the state is to be released (that is, 5 of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  Further, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. 8 is displayed when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to drive the start port solenoid 2107. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen indicating that it is present on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he plays.

  Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that it was not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 and the big prize opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) ) Can not be displayed in the display area of the game A screen (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game is played in the big prize opening is started.) The driving of the casoleole 2108 is started and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. “Please play the game to make the ball enter.” Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. Later, a game can be instructed to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 2005. For example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is entered. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start-up solenoid 2107 serves as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction after driving is started (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. After the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine. The game of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 can be instructed. As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the checksum values will match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are generated. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Will be stored in For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by a power-on main control return destination command in a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  Incidentally, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to do so, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of variations of special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 turn on in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 951 various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 which detects gaming balls entered into general winning openings 2001 and 2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 detects the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is transmitted which indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the detection signal from 024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later , And stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 4004 which detects the game ball which entered the second starting opening 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004. The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and count sensors 4005 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening 2002, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2002, second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting the gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning award opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are displayed. Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And, it may be a mechanism to update the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process of step S56

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection between the control substrate 1310 and the delivery control substrate 951 is created. Then, the prize ball command and the self-check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or when the payout ACK signal notifying that the payout control substrate 951 has received the award ball command normally is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program is various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) divided into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the sender serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs fraudulent activity detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit decision value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is to be generated or not (referred to as "special lottery") or the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control When it is determined whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is set so that the indicator 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relationship shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal motorized product control processing (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information To remember.

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information is described above as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the common electric circuit production shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. If the value of the random number for determining the selected standard symbol is not identical to the standard symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is made based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the transmission information described above as the transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is set so that the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is illuminated according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the memory area, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When it is a big hit game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the start aperture solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as short and medium information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, and shown in FIG. Various commands classified into commands and jackpot relations (for example, when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, the big prize is based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 winning command 1 count display command corresponding to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing synchronization effects, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effects, FIG. The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display, and the state display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures various commands as main cycle serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as + 5V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main cycle serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The power-on state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value as main cycle serial data, and then the power-on main control return destination command is formed, status, It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the mode and then the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. In step S22, the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared by setting a timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts again, so that the main control MPU 1310 a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 89, the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 for instructing the drive state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is set to the peripheral control board 1510. Can be output to. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 93, the main control board 1310 mainly sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process. Based on power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power on status command classified as power on in FIG. 89 and a power on status are transmitted to notify that power has been switched on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command as the main cycle serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 returns the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power return to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, so-called freeze Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and thumb value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and compare Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 1511 c. And cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. The (SRAM) is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511 cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs this initialization setting process, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 When lighting up, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus does not use a bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Determine whether to reflect on

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is generated from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are outputted. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is generated on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this can prevent the processing time from being delayed, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output process of step S1012. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effects of the LEDs and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 by the LEDs and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the music and sound effects according to the.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, in addition to stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various kinds of information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. Do. In addition, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a start opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, A special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) which is output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, which indicates the contents of full shown in FIG. 90) It is analyzed whether or not it is a full error occurrence command (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently in effect. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that a command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 in the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above, various kinds of commands are performed. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, on the game board side The visual display device 1600 (render device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (render device), and the lamp (render device) are used to warn the outside visually, or a speaker is used to warn the outside aurally ( Error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side effect display device 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. Audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0-6 is obtained. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source built-in of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is making a fraudulent act, an alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 are stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and As the effect backup information (1fr), the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 1511ac, and copying of backup first area 1511cb to Bank 2 (1fr) is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 1511db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) successively, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is specified as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db is specified, and the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates the copy of the backup second area 1511 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to Bank 4 (SRAM) of backup second area 1511 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (eg, 1 byte) in the second backup area 1511 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the following will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether steady-state processing-in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Usually, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 97, peripheral control MPU 1511 a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times or not. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally arranged as shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. 72. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. While updating the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and updating the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series to configure The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and frame decoration drive of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511 caf is sent via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf for 1 byte, external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive boards is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 1511 cae of peripheral control MPU 1511 a and peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag The first 1 byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT thus processed is transmitted via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai, as a transmission buffer for the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer and write to register. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information Movable position history information etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the periphery shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the control MPU 1511 a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on peripheral control board 1510, and receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect provided on effect display drive board 4450 , And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is acquired from the history of LOCKN signals set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, from the frequency of the trouble between the connection of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence state of the trouble. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms), specify the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). The From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is determined whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1511 a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The receive command storage area 1511 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer 1511 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal which is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310 The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts the 2 microsecond timer first (step S1320), and the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification) It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is turned off, excitation to a motor or a solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 2 (1 fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Can not be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, while when a power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and peripheral control external WDT 1511 e Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creating process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 having a capacity and provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is memorized.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data)) and No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, etc. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 101, of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to convey that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. The connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver does not occur. And exit this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value in step S1522, peripheral control board 1510 Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d for preparing the frame and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 for the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver each time this routine is executed. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and the power recovery is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is the cumulative number If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the cumulative number determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1526 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is a flag indicating whether or not there is a malfunction in the value, and value 1 when there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a malfunction occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the power recovery is restored. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal Report that fact.

  When connection recovery processing is started, as shown in FIG. 102, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral control steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is active, while the screen generation schedule When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state of the customer. It is possible to judge based on the screen generation schedule data whether or not it is a period, and display the start screen at the time of powering on of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600 If the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all the pointer updating is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is provided for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process as the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Then (step S1548), this routine ends. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 in order to reliably convey that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Do the drawing process. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed. Also, in the communication error display process, the demonstration screen by the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 or in waiting for customers. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display request of the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the LOCKN signal is not input, the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure as a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that the notification is being made, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition to the processing described above, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly flowed from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to turn on all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various kinds of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, to briefly describe the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the process at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady process etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. 8 When the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening 2004 becomes "big hit", the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) Then, the round is to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative graphic is in the center. On the right side, the change display of the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in an opaque aspect so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, schedule data storage area 151 of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in cae, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data is output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Because it is updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT of the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem with the connection) between the receiver and the receiver is not performed, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC SDIC0 by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the presentation is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Warning in step S1024 in the peripheral processing unit steady process of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When it is determined that there is no failure in the connection with the receiver, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is determined to be in a state where there is a failure is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. When there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the communication abnormality flag CC- When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the process, and the communication error display described above is performed. Perform processing and end the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 is performed, In other words, while processing to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk. LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  The variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern again In the interval period until the start of the game, since the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect Trouble occurs between the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of occurrences is at least one, and the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, SYNC While the pattern output processing is always performed, processing for recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is performed, while the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a fault occurs in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) ) By always performing communication error display processing, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is active, so the left side decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol , And until the right-hand decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the number of times is the same, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is performed , The process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is an abnormal data. While invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that there is a drawing, the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Display an image based on.

  As described above, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. In the interval period until the change display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. A receiver ICSD for door frame side presentation that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the combination result in which the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state to which the game is given occurs, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the rendering is not interrupted and the process of recovering the drawing correctly is not performed, but the display area of the game board side rendering display device 1600 is left. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a waiting state. Thus, during the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, it is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e provided in the periphery control board 1510, as described above, the differential is generated. The two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512 e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512 f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512 f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512 e, so that One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V included in the effect display drive substrate 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is determined that the data is abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is detected around the periphery control unit 1511 of the periphery control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. Accordingly, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a causes the effect display drive board 4450 not to have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While it can be determined that no fault has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a fault has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 as a fault has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the notification image to notify that (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk."), The sound source built-in VDP1512a to control the game board side effect display device An alarm sound to be output to 1600 and to that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0. The door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is judged that there is, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 Since it is a signal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the ICSDIC 0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, for door frame side effect Receiver ICSDIC0 is a transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect When the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the drawing data received becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for informing that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting the data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is possible to eliminate the communication failure between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to the communication failure between the image communications at an early stage, and act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the failure. It is supposed to be. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives an image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460, transmits the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d When it can not be received normally, the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that a communication failure occurs. Telling you To generate a message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate. Please call a clerk.” And display the generated image on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can directly notify the store clerks in the hall or notify the store clerk in the hall that took the front of the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the store clerk in the hall suffers from the problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by early finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from the timing K1 to the timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state of being not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communications From the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during the period when the game starts and stops and the game is not progressing, it is possible to move toward a direction in which the communication trouble is eliminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate the communication failure during image communication is provided. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and confirms that the game progress is started again When the output of the signal is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d opens the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) into a door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a repeat failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not executed by displaying start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction of solving the communication failure. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and displays stop. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if the 10 main control MPUs 1310a start fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start the progress of the game again, the door frame The distortion (disturbance of the image) of the effect that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460 is every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to execute the progress of the game again and ends (a period from timing K1 to timing K2 Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 is a start area in which the game balls emitted by the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 toward the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of the gaming balls by the payout device 830 based on the winning ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The 70 dispensing control MPU 952a is implemented.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information on the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and if the payout control unit is operated within the period during which the power-on process is performed, the payout control built-in RAM is stored in the payout control built-in RAM. A RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. A period (or power supply) during which the determination process of step S16 in the on-time process is performed 82 is used as an error canceling signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after a period of time during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of entry. The game control microprocessor uses the RWMCLR signal of FIG. And an error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period when the payout control unit power on processing is performed from the time of power on, Since the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process of (Or, when it is operated after a lapse of time from when the power is turned on, a period in which the process when the turn-on of the dispensing control unit is performed) elapses, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. The RAM clear function is also operated by one operation switch 954 as it is combined with an error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a that is the payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is the game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, i.e., and an error release function. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input part of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. Do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area, etc. to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired and obtain an unfair profit There is no end to unfair gaming practices.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such illegal gaming activities and to control the illegal activity by the light emitting means or the alarm by sound or the like. Yes.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. It does not (0 V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thus, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is not detecting magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thus, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage, in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR2. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 is connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is the case.

  In addition, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1 and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in the form of a table in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact types and bellows contacts in the connector member depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, the pin contacts The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is open, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

  Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing right-handed, when sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific part of the game area where many game balls continuously concentrate and flow down to the connector member However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when the contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 times to 1000 times that in the case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR is generated, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310 b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  Note that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126 become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment differs from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that it is between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the non-detection state. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side is applied, the action by the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is performed. The voltage raising unit 4166 is provided to avoid the problem, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured of a Zener diode ZD0 whose Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. A sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS unit is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is sent to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 reports an abnormality with the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the sound, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lifts up. In FIG. 105, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, a sound, etc. notify that an illegal game action using a character is performed or that a break occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 Do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the second embodiment includes a magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end grounded. The second resistor IR3 is included. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. A sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lift up. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current with a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost falls to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (third example) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the third embodiment, the voltage boosting unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the predetermined voltage higher than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, in place of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 which are connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit. Connected That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured of the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 which cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4. The other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as well as being one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 whose +12 V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and a pull-up resistor IR0 and a resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the previous transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. Thereby, the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage is turned on.

  When the succeeding transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, as the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lift up. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current also flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. It does not flow in. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Further, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is also not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the voltage raising portion 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit portion 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input portions 4162 respectively connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminals of the transistors ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on when the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on. The transistor ITR1 is turned off. In addition, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, each provided with a voltage output unit 4163, for example “TD62083AP” It can be used by connecting to the product.

  As mentioned above, although the sensor signal input part 4162 arrange | positioned at the panel relay board 4161 of this embodiment was demonstrated, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input part 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, A connector member As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor, various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact, etc. A sensor or the like can be applied.

[Application to which sensor signal input unit 4162 of panel relay substrate 4161 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 in each of the first to third embodiments described above is described as one that prevents erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance that occurs when contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable part of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, there are circumstances in which the detection sensor sets a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, each is arranged near the starting opening, winning opening, big winning opening, out opening, etc.) . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on the panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor depends on various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. Is appropriately selected. About this point, it will take various forms by the difference in the model of a game machine.

  By the way, the electric current which flows in the detection sensor is changed by changing the resistance value depending on the aging of the used electric parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and the wiring pattern and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes when, for example, the type of the detection sensor, the placement location, and the length of the wiring (harness) are design-changed due to the specification change during development. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. In addition, depending on the location where the detection sensor is arranged, the length of the harness being extended, or the location where the harness is routed changes, there may be locations where noise is easily picked up, and the influence of noise also changes.

  If a current flows to a resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing to the detection sensor may be different from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the detection sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 according to the first to third embodiments is an electric component (for example, a connector or a detection sensor) used, aging of the wiring pattern, wiring (harness) Depending on the length, even when the resistance value changes, false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the example of FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  In the following, the case where noise appears on the harness will be described as an example. 110A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 110 (A) is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is applied.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, it is low level (0.4 V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. Can be maintained at a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is applied, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform has a voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown by the hatched portion. ), The transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  Further, not only noise but, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), when overshoot occurs, in the state where magnetism is detected, no false detection occurs, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. As a result, the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 105 to 2 V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8 V. It is done. The detection operation is low level (0.4 V) in the state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the absence of noise, and is lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on. A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V) and higher than the boosted voltage 2 V, so the voltage boosting unit 4166 is turned on and the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. The level is higher than 8 V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism. Since the voltage is also lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage raising unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Thus, false detection can be prevented.

  Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to a rise in resistance due to aging will be described as an example. FIG. 111A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 111A is a signal waveform that is input when it is normal, and the right side is a signal waveform that is input when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change.

  In the conventional example, when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage as shown by the hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 turns on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on and can not maintain the off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when a voltage rise occurs due to the increase in resistance value due to aging, in the state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage is turned on by the transistor ITR0. Voltage (0.8 V) is lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage boosting unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Thus, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise. In addition, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 is provided with the voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be caused by changing the arrangement location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the place to draw the harness. Even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up, the sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise. Therefore, the circuit units (the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164) provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin in design change during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162 ′ of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 described in the first to third embodiments described above includes the built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is detected. Although the transistor STR is turned off, in other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a signal whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Instead, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when magnetism is not detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when magnetism is not detected and turned on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

  FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when not detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and turned on when magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected.

  The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161 via the connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

  As the voltage raising portion 4166, the one described in the first to third embodiments can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example formed of a Zener diode ZD0 whose Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 at the front stage of the connection portion.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is composed of a transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and +12 V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied at one end. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, a sensor signal winning unit 4162 ′ is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166, and a detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is configured by the transistor ITR0.

[Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

  Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  Thus, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation of abnormal case due to change of resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

  At this time, even if noise is applied to the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is a higher voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 There is no influence on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 via the anode terminal thereof, and the transistor ITR0 remains unchanged. In other words, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 ′.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  Thus, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. The predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example in which multiple sensor signal input units 4162 are arranged on panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration according to the first aspect of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three of the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are disposed on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is disposed on another substrate (for example, sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

  Further, in FIG. 115, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are disposed on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is disposed on another substrate (for example, the main control substrate 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the performed circuit structure. Thus, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously changed.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with age or wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments in FIG.

  The voltage output unit 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a second voltage that is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. At the same time, a high level voltage (for example, 12 V) is output.

  The detection circuit unit 4164 switches on / off of the output of the detection signal according to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. In the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113, since the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments is used, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

  Then, for the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (12 V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (eg 0.4 V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage lower than (a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111 as an example) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising unit 4166 is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163 and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are disposed on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). . In this example, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 disposed at the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163. Also, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166,... Are electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS is the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  In FIG. 113, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is. Therefore, it is possible to detect the detection signal without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to take into consideration the changing resistance value as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one substrate (on panel relay substrate 4161), and panel relay substrate 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) in various types of game machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to reduction of man-hours involved in design change and manufacturing in the middle of development.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS according to another embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided, and a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. Further, in FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is configured. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (eg, 0.4 V) while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12 V).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit unit 4164 'described in the other embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V, and +12 V is applied to one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the applied pull-up resistor NR1.

  In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process result. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a display mode (a symbol, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) contributing to the production are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, the number of pending special symbol sides is increased by one. To be done.

  If the process flag is 0 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, after the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested and executed on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator based on the stored result of the big hit judgment and the current gaming state etc. The processing flag is updated to “2” after determining and setting a stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) after a special symbol variable display is started and stopped.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, processing during variation is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time-out. Stop. After that, when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit (losing) The processing selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the big hit game processing is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated, and the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the big hit game determined based on the type of the winning big hit, Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, processing to stop the operation of the condition device is performed, or when the winning big hit type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a short time state or a probable change state. After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, it is necessary to start over from the fluctuation start process again.

  A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, and when the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for outlying reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach display is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed. Production is performed. The out-of-reach reach fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is judged that the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and the reach judgment is based on reach random numbers, and in the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, decoration An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not reach the reach effect. An effect is carried out in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally released so as to display the off symbol for a final decision. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is defined so as to be able to identify which fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to this, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the variation display pattern of the decoration symbol is made to appear in the effect display device 1600, and the effect display (background and hold image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) in the operation unit 400, or to operate a movable member such as the back and back movable effect unit 3100.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, operation information on the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window can be acquired, and control concerning an effect according to the information can also be executed.

  Here, the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the acquisition principle of operation information in the vicinity of the opening window, in which members unrelated to the explanation of the acquisition principle of operation information are omitted, and the members having a relationship are also included. These are shown schematically. FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG.

  In other words, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 in which the game area 5a in which the game ball flows and which is stored in the main body frame 4 is formed, and the game area 5a are visible. It has an opening window and a door frame 3 provided so as to be able to open and close with respect to the main body frame 4. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective upright wall portion 33 erected along the outer periphery of the opening window so that light can be reflected at least on the inner surface thereof. It is done. The opening window is a portion on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192 in the through-hole 111.

  Here, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflection standing wall 33 is formed by a lower reflection standing wall 338 formed by the lower dish unit base 323, a left reflection standing wall 538 formed by the left unit base 531, and a right unit base 551. And the right reflection upright wall portion 568 to be arranged, and these members are arranged in a substantially U shape (a mode in which the reflection upright wall portion is not installed above the opening window) along the outer periphery of the opening window. It is configured by In the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568, the inner side surfaces thereof are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). The light reflecting surface is provided.

  According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is provided among the reflection standing wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U shape. The portion (the upper side of the opening window) is “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and as a result, a reflecting vertical wall portion It functions as a first part that makes it possible to “reflect at 33”, and “the light reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window”. It also functions as a second part that allows it to be detected.

  Furthermore, in the reflection upright wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection member is provided across the inner side surfaces of three separate members (the lower reflection upright wall portion 338, the left reflection upright wall portion 538, the right reflection upright wall portion 568). A structure to which a member 36 (for example, a reflective seal) is attached is adopted, thereby suitably securing the reflection performance as the reflection upright wall portion 33 including joints of three separate members.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23) In the inner space 3435a, the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflection standing wall 338, the left reflection standing wall 538, and the right reflection standing wall 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. The space is opened only to the side so that light can travel toward the opening window and is provided as a space into which light from the opening window can be taken. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573, but in order to suppress fraud from the back of the speaker 573, it is between the opening window. A transmitting member 3436a designed to have extremely high transparency and extremely low influence on the light traveling direction is provided.

  Further, the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is unitized with the left outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35a, and emits light toward a wide range at least on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so that it can proceed.

  Further, the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a is united with the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33 to form the internal space 3435a. Incorporated into In this point, in the internal space 3435a, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, so that the disturbance is suitably suppressed, the left outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34a It becomes possible to detect the light emitted and reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 by the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side outside the outer periphery of the opening window in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). In the inner space 3435b, the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b and the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, like the internal space 3435a, the internal space 3435b includes the one specific virtual plane P at a position where it intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall 338, the left reflective vertical wall 538, and the right reflective vertical wall 568, respectively. And is opened as a space where only the opening window is provided so that light can travel toward the opening window, and light from the opening window can be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an inner space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, while the fraudulent act from the back of the speaker 573 is suppressed, the space between it and the opening window A transmitting member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the light traveling direction is disposed.

  In addition, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b, and emits light toward a wide range at least on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so that it can proceed.

  The right outer peripheral light detector 35b is united with the right outer peripheral light emitter 34b, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33, and is reflected from the reflective vertical wall portion 33 to become the internal space 3435b. Incorporated into In this point, in the internal space 3435b, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b. Therefore, while the disturbance is suitably suppressed, from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b It becomes possible to detect the light emitted and reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 by the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the region (3) surrounded by the lower reflective upright wall portion 338, the left reflective upright wall portion 538, and the right reflective upright wall portion 568 from the three directions by their height widths ( An area marked with a dotted pattern in FIG. 120 functions as a special operation receiving portion 3333 capable of detecting an operation by the player, and the operation mode of the player with respect to the special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. The effect control corresponding to the determination is executable.

  For example, when the player does not perform an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, the light irradiated in a wide angle range from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is not blocked by any physical object, and is reflected from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33. It becomes reflected light from various angles (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) in the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a. That is, in the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a, a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) that reflects light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. The special operation receiving unit 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object is present to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  At this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also not blocked by any physical object, and various angles in the reflective standing wall portion 33 (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P Angle) to be reflected toward the right outer peripheral outside light detector 35b. That is, the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b also uses a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) to reflect light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. The special operation receiving unit 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object is present to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  On the other hand, when the player performs an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer periphery light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is a player's finger ( Therefore, only light other than light traveling in the direction (angle range) is blocked by the reflection standing wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a. That is, in this case, in the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements aligned on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the size of the physics in which direction as viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a Information on whether an object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  At this time, part of the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) Only the light other than the light is reflected by the reflection wall 33 and travels toward the right outer peripheral light detector 35b. That is, in this case, in the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements aligned on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the physical quantity of which direction in which direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. Information on whether an object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the information from the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b are respectively acquired and analyzed, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 performs physical analysis. The coordinate position (x, y) and the size of the physical object in the special operation receiver 3333 as well as the information (whether or not the operation to the special operation receiver 3333 is performed) exists in the special operation receiver 3333 Will be able to obtain information related to As will be described later, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, such information is periodically acquired, whereby the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 or the size of the physical object can be obtained. An operation gesture such as a change can be determined, and an effect control corresponding to the determination is executed.

  Note that these analysis processes may not necessarily be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and may be performed by an external unit that acquires information from the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a and the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may obtain the analysis result from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share analysis.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b are respectively blinked, and the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b is in an extinguished state. A period of time and a period of time in which the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state may be alternately generated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is the right outer peripheral If the outside light detection unit 35b detects and analyzes the information based on the information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a does not interfere with the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. As a result, it is expected to obtain more accurate detection information.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer periphery light emitting portion 34b are respectively blinked, and the left outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34b is in the off state. And the period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state, and the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is also One cycle in which the periods in the extinguishing state occur sequentially may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected. If the detection is performed on the outside light detection unit 35b side and the offset when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a are in the extinguished state is also detected and analyzed based on these information, Interference between the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is eliminated, and it is possible to determine after excluding the detected offset, and the more accurate by that amount It becomes expected to obtain high detection information.

  Further, visible light may be used as light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, in view of the fact that the light is being produced in various places, it is possible to use invisible light rays such as infrared rays, the disturbance from the effect light and the effect light. It is more desirable to suitably suppress adverse effects on

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “the light from the predetermined light source located outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. The first portion which makes it possible to be reflected by the reflection upright wall portion 33, and the light reflected by the reflection upright wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is outside the outer periphery of the opening window A second portion which makes it possible to “detect” is provided as the same portion of the substantially U-shaped reflection standing wall portion 33. However, a plurality of regions where light can be allowed to travel between the inside and the outside of the outer periphery of the opening window are provided for the reflection upright wall portion 33, and the outer peripheral light emitting portion and the outer peripheral light detecting portion are separately provided for these regions. And may be arranged respectively.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflecting upright wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U shape whose upper side is opened, but of the inner space 3435a and the inner space 3435b of the opening window upper portion The reflective standing wall portion 33 may be formed also on the peripheral edge between them. However, it is desirable that the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b be provided so that the direction in which the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b are opened is a downward direction, in order to suppress direct light from illumination or the like to be a disturbance. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a and the left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a, the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b, and the right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b are used to specially Although the operation in the operation receiving unit 3333 can be detected, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure capable of detecting the operation in the special operation receiving portion 3333 may be used. For example, the reflected light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the reflected light from the right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b The detection may be performed by the light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) or the size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer-periphery light emitting unit 34 (the left outer-periphery light-emitting unit 34a and the right outer-periphery light-emitting unit 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is used as the opening window. Outer peripheral light detecting portion 35 provided on the outer periphery of the opening window as reflected light from the reflecting upright wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to reflect light at least on its inner side The detection is performed by the outside light detection unit 35a and the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b), thereby causing the vicinity of the opening window to function as the special operation reception unit 3333 and effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation reception unit 3333. It is made feasible.

  Further, the outer periphery outside light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. As described above, when detecting light by the unit 35, it is possible to preferably exclude the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 is reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the effect light is also taken in in addition to the light, there is a concern that such effect light may be disturbed to adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral light detection unit 35.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is firstly arranged on the one specific virtual plane P. It is arranged in the position which can not be irradiated with the light which advances. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving portion 3333 and has a very low light transmittance (or 0) with respect to the base portion BL1. It is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side on which the opening window is provided). Thus, the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 is difficult to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decoration base portion 551a provided by a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side And a second right decoration base portion 551b provided by a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right decoration base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 can contribute as effect light, whereas the second right decoration The base portion 551b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. Also by this, it is difficult for light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, while the second right decoration base 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 to travel toward the player through the first right decoration base 551a, The right decoration base portion 551a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably preventing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 from traveling to the opening window .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decoration base portion 551b, but only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting unit L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  On the other hand, the frame side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having a very low light transmittance (or 0). Is located at a position where light traveling on a specific virtual plane P of can be emitted. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is provided with the opening window. It is considered difficult to move to the side, so that the light from the frame side light emitting unit L2 is difficult to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  However, since the height width of the reflection member 36 is low, there is a concern that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member or the like and travels toward the opening window. Therefore, even with the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left decoration base portion 531a provided by a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side A second left decorative base portion 531b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left decorative base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as effect light. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for light from the frame side light emitting unit L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, while the second left decoration base 531 b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L 2 to travel toward the player through the first left decoration base 531 a, The left decoration base portion 531a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably preventing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 from traveling to the opening window .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b. These members may not necessarily be provided, and even in this case, as described above, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435. When the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 is not provided with the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a. Rather than being attached to the outer surface (surface that can be contacted from the outside), if attached to the inner surface (surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a, from the outside It would be expected to avoid the degradation of the reflection performance due to the direct physical contact of In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting part 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting part 34a, the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b) passes through the first left decorative base part 531a and the first right decorative base part 551a and then the above. The light is reflected by the reflection member 36, transmitted through the first left decoration base portion 531 a and the first right decoration base portion 551 a again, and then taken into the internal space 3435.

  When the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided in the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base portion 551b is provided in the right unit base 551, the reflecting member 36 is omitted, and the second The left decoration base portion 531b and the second right decoration base portion 551b may also function as a reflecting member using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, the effect light from the frame side light emitting units L1 and L2 may be disturbed only by providing the reflection members (the second left decoration base portion 531b and the second right decoration base portion 551b). In order to be able to ensure suitably the detection accuracy by perimeter outer light detection part 35 by the catoptric light from the member for reflection (the 2nd left decoration base part 531b, the 2nd right decoration base part 551b), controlling suitably. Become.

  The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can obtain information such as the coordinates and size of a physical object located near the aperture window by using the operation information acquisition principle near the aperture window. The more dynamic and flexible operability, and the use of the substantially entire area of the opening window (approximately the whole area visible in the front view of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving portion 3333. It is possible to realize the rendering effect suitable for this.

  Hereinafter, operability and performance that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described. FIGS. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for describing the operability and the effect that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333, and are related to each other in describing the operability and the effect. In addition to omitting members that are not present, they also schematically show related members.

  121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed in front, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 in front. Is schematically shown. In addition, the arrow in the same figure shows the movable range of various movable bodies of the effect members A to E simply.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the back side across the glass plate 192 can contribute to the effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B and C, a display D, and a panel surface light emitting portion E provided so as to be capable of emitting light at a portion where the game ball can flow down and at other portions . The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

  In addition, these members are shown as an example for demonstrating the technique of this application, and it does not necessarily correspond with the Example previously demonstrated using FIG. 60 etc. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are “back-bottom back movable presentation unit 3100, back-top left movable presentation unit 3200, back-left movable presentation unit 3300, back-top middle movable presentation unit 3400, back The display portion D corresponds to the “effect display device 1600”, and the board surface light emitting portion E corresponds to “various decorations provided in the game board 5”. It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a substrate". In addition, the board surface light emission part E does not necessarily need to be provided in the game board 5, For example, the member (light guide plate etc.) provided in the front side rather than the game board 5 may be sufficient.

  Here, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, first, the display unit D on which the effect display according to the result of the big hit judgment is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front with the display unit D. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, it can be controlled so that an effect change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

  Hereinafter, an example of effect control in the case where the effect is changed on the display unit D by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First Operation Control Mode for Display D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (a), when the first performance condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect and displayed. The specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the part D. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation (strictly on the glass plate 192) with respect to somewhere in the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. If a finger or the like is required in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it is not always necessary to touch it))), and when this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. The acceptance of the effect on the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated, an effect change is caused in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed by the type of the effect change that has occurred.

  At this time, in order to cause the effect change on the basis of the fact that the operation has been performed somewhere in the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect change is at least It is desirable to generate in the first display area opposite to the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to view the first display area in front view with his / her finger or the like, an effect change occurs at least in the first display area. In the first display area until the first display area is visually recognized from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of shifting their fingers or from a front view. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the appearing effect change. Alternatively, the player keeps his / her finger on the first coordinate area Z1 and proceeds with the game without confirming the change in the effect in the first display area, or is positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to select a way of enjoyment, such as having a third party who is not present check the effect change in the first display area, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game.

  It should be noted that the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed when the operation by the player is not detected from the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1 until the predetermined period elapses (the specific timing comes). And the reception of effects for the first coordinate area Z1 is ended. At this time, an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated, or an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 is generated. You may make it complete reception of the effect with respect to the 1st coordinate area Z1.

[Second Operation Control Mode for Display D]
Also, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (b), when the second rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, “the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display D” and “the third display of the display D” The second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D while setting (controlling) both of the area and the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area to be able to receive effects, and the third display area The third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, within a second coordinate area Z2 or a third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 during a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is sufficient and it is not necessary to touch necessarily)) is performed on somewhere and this is a physical object When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden and the effect reception of the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate region Z3 is ended, and the display unit D is also displayed. Generate a specific effect (effect according to the selected side (coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)), and the expected effect for the result of the big hit judgment in the specific effect that has occurred is Thereby enabling executing the instigation that may be controlled.

  It should be noted that no operation by the player was detected from the appearance of both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 until the predetermined period has elapsed (the specific timing has come) In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are not displayed, and reception of effects for the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate region Z3 is ended. ing. Under the present circumstances, you may make it produce the specific presentation which appears when there is reception of presentation with respect to 2nd coordinate area Z2 or 3rd coordinate area Z3, and you may make it not produce a specific presentation. However, when a specific effect that appears when an effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, an operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is received prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to make a display (effect, etc.) generated when being pressed or a display (effect, etc.) generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment without knowing what effect is being executed.

  Moreover, in the 1st operation control aspect with respect to the display part D, and the 2nd operation control aspect, not only the production | generation reception with respect to 1st coordinate area Z1, 2nd coordinate area Z2, and 3rd coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but the same. Within the period, the same effect reception may be permitted for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

  For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first production condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate region Z1 and the operation button 410 can be produced and the specific operation instruction image S1 is received. Even if a pressing operation on the operation button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed instead of an operation on the first coordinate area Z1 (detection of a physical object) during the predetermined period in which The operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, the effect acceptance of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, the effect is changed in the display D, and the type of the effect change causes an expectation for the result of the big hit determination. It is possible to carry out control whose degree can be suggested.

  Even when an operation (physical object detection) is performed on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the reception of the effects of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated. A change in effect is produced in the display unit D, and control can be performed which can suggest an expectation for the result of the jackpot determination by the type of the effect change that is produced.

  Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second presentation condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all be received. Do. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, not the operation (detection of a physical object) on any of the second coordinate region Z2 or the third coordinate region Z3 When a pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. Switching display with the third selected image showing that the camera is in the off state is performed. Then, in a state in which either the second selected image or the third selected image is displayed, the selected image is displayed when a predetermined period has passed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed. A display (effect or the like) that can be grasped that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where the symbol appears is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. All the images (second selection image and third selection image) are not displayed, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 is ended. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display section D, and control can be performed which may suggest an expectation for the result of the big hit determination in the generated specific effect.

  In the predetermined period, an operation (operation for accepting any determination) on another operation means can be accepted, and the selected image appears when the operation on the other operation means is performed. The second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection) are generated while generating a display (effect) capable of grasping that the operation on the side operation instruction images S2 and S3 has been accepted. It is also possible to hide the image and the third selected image) and to end the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and another operation means. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display section D, and control can be performed which may suggest an expectation for the result of the big hit determination in the generated specific effect.

  In addition, within the predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinates even if either the second selected image or the third selected image appears. Region Z3 is available for presentation. And when operation with respect to either the 2nd coordinate field Z2 or the 3rd coordinate field Z3 is detected, it does not matter which of the 2nd selection picture and the 3rd selection picture was in the state which has appeared, The display (effect etc.) on the side where the reception is made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image) are not displayed. Then, the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and other operation means is ended. At this time, the operation is detected prior to hiding the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3 and the selected image (the second selected image and the third selected image). Switching display may be performed so that the selected image (second selection image, third selection image) on the other side appears. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display section D, and control can be performed which may suggest an expectation for the result of the big hit determination in the generated specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, not only acceptance of effects to the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410, The same production reception is possible. In this respect, in the second operation control mode, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate is operated when the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is operated while the same effect reception is enabled. It is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player only by accepting one operation (detection of a physical object) for the area Z3. That is, when another operation means is used, “the side according to the preference by the player until the predetermined period from when the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed elapses While it is required to be able to generate the effect of “or perform at least two or more operations using a plurality of operation means”, when a specific operation receiving unit 3333 is used, The display mode according to the player's preference can be made to appear with only a few operations (one time in this production example), so that more complicated performance can be realized with simple operability. It will be expected.

  In addition, while providing such an efficient operability, at the same time providing an operability that can achieve a desired operation by performing at least two operations using a plurality of operation means, The player can perform an operation in a process step up to the desired operation while being troubled as to which one of the desired operations should be selected. That is, in this case, while performing the operation in the process step up to the desired operation, it becomes easy to imagine the presentation situation after the selection, and it is troubled which operation should be performed with a margin in a predetermined period. Will be able to Thus, according to whether the player is in a state in which the player can make a prompt decision or is in a state of being annoyed, it is possible to selectively use the operation means having different numbers of required operations, so that the game interest can be maintained. It will be.

  As described above, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, by setting the display unit D as the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is possible to realize an effect with unprecedented interest. However, as described above, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 is larger than the display unit D in the operation reception range (the coordinate range to be detected is the glass plate 192 It is provided to have almost the entire area), and by realizing the effect using such a special relationship, it is possible to realize more dynamic operability with high degree of freedom and an effect suitable for this. .

[Third Operation Control Mode for Display D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects, and displayed The specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the part D, and the specific image that prompts the user to operate to move the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B in the other display area of the display part D indicate.

  Then, in a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192) is performed on anywhere in the fourth coordinate region Z4 of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Strictly speaking, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the special operation receiving unit 3333 needs a finger or the like, and does not necessarily have to touch)) and this is detected as a physical object. A large fifth coordinate area including a coordinate area facing at least the movable body B provided outside the display section D, not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display section D. Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 in this example is opposed to the movable body B provided outside the display section D from the coordinate area facing the fourth display area (which does not necessarily have to coincide with the fourth coordinate area Z). It is set to include the movable coordinate system B, the display unit D, and the board surface light emitting unit E.

  At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that an operation has been performed anywhere in the fourth coordinate area Z4 in the special operation receiving unit 3333. Or may be displayed in a vibration mode) so that the specific operation target image S4 can be recognized as being movable by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this third operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger fixed within the special operation receiving portion 3333, the coordinate position at which the physical object faces the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. It is as if the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display section D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display section D and movement on the movable body B is started when moved up to the position Realization of directing.

  Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is moved in the fifth coordinate area Z5 with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object and detects the movement of the physical object. It is possible to execute control to move the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the middle of the movement in which the physical object has not yet moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B. The inside of the display section D is moved so as to follow the movement in the front view.

  More specifically, with the physical object such as a finger fixed within the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is placed from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 as shown in FIG. 124 (a) In the peripheral control board 1510, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display unit D so as to follow such movement of the physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is at a position shown in FIG. 124 (a), when trying to display a specific operation target image S4 in a display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed. A part of the display part D protrudes from the display part D, and the whole can not be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to the present embodiment, only the portion that can be displayed is displayed on the display unit D, and the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, and the portion that protrudes from the display unit D is present Is controlled so that the corresponding part of the panel light emitting part E emits light. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the board surface light emitting unit E Control is performed so as to increase the number of portions corresponding to the light emission region.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to express that the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by the operation by the player, and the display unit D More dynamic and flexible operability that can not fit into a single unit, and a rendering suitable for this will be realized.

  In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124A, a physical object such as a player's finger is at a coordinate position facing the display portion D in the fifth coordinate area Z5. In spite of being placed, effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (panel light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the plurality of members in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement has appeared. It becomes possible to preferably realize the rendering suitable for dynamic operability.

  When the physical object such as the finger of the player is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the physical object is not the display section D but the game board 5 (Here, it is placed at a coordinate position facing the board surface light emitting unit E). However, also in this case, not all the specific operation target image S4 is suddenly hidden to cause only the panel light emission unit E to emit light, but as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, the specific operation is performed. Control is performed so as to reduce the number of portions displayed on the display D by the target image S4 and to increase the number of portions corresponding to the light emission area of the panel surface light emission portion E. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated by a specific distance from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, an effect (light emission in this case) is given only to the panel light emission unit E of the display unit D and the panel light emission unit E. As a result, it becomes possible to express an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display section D.

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches a position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned to face the physical object. Control is performed to cause both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-described effect control performed between the display unit D and the panel light emitting unit E is performed between the panel light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I want to do it. More specifically, when a physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board light emitting unit E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B by a predetermined distance, the physical object Even though the unit itself is in the coordinate area facing the panel surface light emitting unit E, the effect control is performed not only on the panel surface light emitting unit E but on a member (movable body B) different from the panel surface light emitting unit E I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display It becomes easy to recognize that a specific operation target image S4) that has moved out of the part D has appeared (moved), and thereby it is possible to suitably realize a performance suitable for dynamic operability. .

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if moved to a proper position is properly performed, and the condition acceptance in the fifth coordinate area Z5 is ended on the assumption that the condition in the third operation control mode is satisfied. In addition, a display capable of recognizing that the condition in the third operation control mode (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) is satisfied is displayed on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Control to start production is executed. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, as an effect that causes the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined mode, an effect that causes the movable body B to operate in a predetermined mode, or the like. To be able to suggest an expectation for the result of

  When the physical object is moved out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 while the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the third operation control mode (a finger is removed from the special operation receiving unit 3333). It is desirable to redo from the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). In other words, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically acquires the position information of the physical object regularly regardless of the performance execution state, and thereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information to the effect of moving, information to the effect of moving out of the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

  Further, although the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the above specific one may follow only the movement of the specific direction component of the physical object. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

  In addition, the fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Also, if there is no portion that can be rendered to suggest that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. An effect representation may be performed that suggests that a specific operation target image S4 is present at a part.

  Moreover, in this explanatory example, although the panel surface light emission unit E capable of effect representation (light emission) is placed between the display unit D and the movable body B, the panel surface light emission unit E is not necessarily required. Good. That is, in this case, after the specific operation target image S4 is not displayed on the display unit D, the player is moved from the physical object to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or the coordinate position in the vicinity). Will continue the operation while holding in the head an image in which the specific operation target image S4 is moving.

  Further, on the display unit D, a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B is displayed, and the position where the specific operation target image S4 exists according to the movement of the physical object is displayed in the map. The effect display suggested by may be performed.

  Although the coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 are shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, in actuality, the player can not visually recognize.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in which the effect operation according to the result of the big hit determination is performed are also positioned as the targets of the operation effect. When the player performs an operation on the coordinate area overlapping the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in the front view of the operation receiving portion 3333 and this is detected as a physical object, an effect operation corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate mode (speed, movement amount) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth Operation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126 (a), when the fourth rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects. At this time, in order to make it possible for the player to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 can be accepted to make the movable body C move, a specific display image is made to appear on the display section D, or the movable body It is desirable to cause C to emit light (for example, to emit light in a blinking mode) or to vibrate in the first mode.

  Then, in a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be effect-acceptable, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, special) is performed anywhere on the sixth coordinate area Z6. As shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the operation receiving unit 3333 only needs a finger or the like and does not necessarily have to touch) and this is detected as a physical object, an effect can be accepted as shown in FIG. 126 (b). Instead of the sixth coordinate area Z6, the coordinate area to be set is changed to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger fixed in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to a coordinate position facing the part, an effect is realized that the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that makes it possible to recognize In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the movable body C emits light in the second mode (for example, light emission in the normal mode).

  However, from the player's side, it is not understood what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, and after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 There is a concern that even if the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be properly performed. As a result, when the physical object such as the player's finger deviates from the seventh coordinate area Z7 despite having the intention of performing the operation along the movable range CT of the movable body C (special operation receiving unit If the user takes his finger off the screen 3333), the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) may be redone against the player's intention, which may reduce the fun of the game.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the seventh coordinate region Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is to be controlled. The sixth coordinate area Z6 is set in a range in which at least the first distance is expanded in all directions in a front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what movable range CT is provided on the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C When a finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move although the effect reception is made (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is not retried) Since the phenomenon occurs, the operation can be performed by estimating the movable range CT of the movable body C through confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (shown in FIG. 126 (b) ( Original position), the second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third position shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the fourth position (terminal position) shown in FIG. 127 (b)) Control to be executed. On this, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is divided into a first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position), and a second drive coordinate area including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2 can be classified into a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position. By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area corresponding to the determination. Control can be executed.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is controlled. The range of the movable body C is set as a range extending at least a first distance from the sixth coordinate region Z6 in the left, right, and lower directions except the upper side in which the movable range CT extends.

  According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object is in the single first drive coordinate region Z7-1. So that the movable body C continues to stay at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 in which the physical object is detected, without moving. Become. That is, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for presentation (despite not being retried from the state shown in FIG. 126 (a)). Therefore, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  On the other hand, after the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object is movable. When the movable range CT of the body C is moved in the extending direction (moving less than the first distance), the physical object moves only the second distance shorter than the first distance, as shown in FIG. 126 (b). The second drive coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126C is reached from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (FIG. From b)), it moves to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. As for the left and right directions orthogonal to each other, there is a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the up-down direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the left-right direction.

  According to such a configuration, when moving the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in a direction different from any of the vertical directions in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is , And the movable body C corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without moving. Continue to stay in the second position. That is, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for presentation (despite not being re-started from the state shown in FIG. 126A). As a result, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  In addition, since the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is set so as to extend to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). In this case, the reference that is determined to be appropriate as an operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C after the physical object such as a finger is detected is relaxed. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object while guessing this without knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. It will be possible to maintain the interest.

  When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Light may be emitted in an aspect (for example, green) different from the light emission aspect (for example, blue). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts moving toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is determined that the player's operation has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress the frustrating feeling due to the behavior delay of the movable body which is inevitably generated for the quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

  In addition, when the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body can not be moved to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control to move to the latest detection position is performed.

  Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (FIG. When detected within a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. As for the left and right directions orthogonal to each other, there is a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

  In other words, as described above, when a movable body that does not have a technique capable of instructing the operation direction is used as an operation target, unlike the display means, this is performed without knowing what movable range is provided. You must move the physics object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C. It has also been described above that by expanding the range, the criterion that is determined to be appropriate as an operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT is relaxed.

  However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from Accordingly, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. By having a range extending over a distance longer than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is assumed that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 is increased and the deviation from the movable range CT is also gradually increased. Also, this can be accepted as a proper rendering operation. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while guessing this without knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

  When the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. You may make it light-emit by the light emission mode (for example, red) different from any of the light emission mode (for example, green) when it was located in. Further, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C (When starting to move toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3), the light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green).

  And, for the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is further leftward and rightward orthogonal to the up-down direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends further than the third drive coordinate region Z7-3. It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's operation of a finger or the like, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)) to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). In addition, if a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by a player's finger operation or the like and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, it is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. In such a case, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. When the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's operation with a finger or the like, the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 ( b)) Expectation (specific result is obtained) depending on whether an effect that moves to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) appears without moving to the fourth position. May be shown in a definite manner).

  In the peripheral control board 1510, a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like and detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In this case, it is determined that the condition in the fourth operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. When it is determined that the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is set in a region where the effect can be accepted. Is controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body C is set in a region where the effect can be accepted. Control to move C to the first position is performed.

  However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C is movable to the fourth position, the movement in which the movable body C moves downward in the downward direction (the movable body C is at the fourth position (FIG. 127) Even if it is determined that the effect of moving to (b)) or not or that it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, the movable body C is once moved upward. It is desirable from the point of view of improving the fun of the game to show the movement to move (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))).

  Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is positioned at the first position The light emission mode (for example, green) and the light emission mode (for example, red) at the third position are different from the light emission mode (for example, red). Although the timing may be different from the first to third positions, it is not the timing when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but the timing later than that (the movable body C It is desirable to make it appear after the timing at which movement to the fourth position can be definitely grasped. Also, similarly to this, even when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, it is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but It is desirable that the light emission be ended after a later timing (a timing when the movement of the movable body C can not definitely move to the fourth position).

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed after moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is ended.

  By the way, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body is movable from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. C can be moved freely. For example, when the physical object is moved back to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 after the movable body C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)), the peripheral control board 1510 performs the first drive. Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) . When the movable object C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the second drive. Based on the physical object detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)). It will be.

  According to such a configuration, the player prefers a driving mode for moving the movable body C little by little up and down as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) The game can be made to appear according to the time of day, or can be performed only for the time that suits the player's preference, so it becomes possible to manipulate the "interval" until the final result appears in the production, thus improving the fun of the game Will be expected to In addition, after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is ended, and the movable body C can not be manipulated freely.

  It is to be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is performed after the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) is set (controlled) to receive an effect and until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). When the physical object is not properly detected, the effect reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C may be caused to appear when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, or the movable body C may not be produced. Control may be performed so as to be positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

  Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanatory example, the first to third positions (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. In the meantime, the movable body C can be moved freely, but instead, within the range of the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. The higher the probability of being a big hit suggested, the higher the position may be. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectations based on the result of the jackpot determination, and positions (first position to fourth position) defined by the selected effect pattern. The movable body C is controlled to be operable. At this time, the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. Sometimes, an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position (a behavior to come and go) may appear.

  Further, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when making the images S1 to S4 capable of effect reception, coordinate areas Z1 to Z4 larger than the images S1 to S4 are generated in front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in the front view is generated when making the movable body C capable of receiving effects. That is, since a movable body often includes a portion having a relatively large amount of movement and a portion having a relatively small amount of movement, for example, a portion having a relatively small amount of movement is produced It is desirable to remove from the object of reception in order to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. On the other hand, in the display unit, when trying to set the coordinate area in accordance with the size of the image that can be rendered acceptable, it is required to make the image large in order to suitably maintain operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may be deteriorated, it is desirable to separate the setting range of the coordinate area and set the size independently for the image that can be rendered acceptable.

  However, in the case where control is performed to detect the movement of the physical object in a specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and to make an effect corresponding to the movement For example, the physical object being detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves, and the fourth drive coordinate area does not pass through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 or the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that a situation in which a sudden detection occurs at Z7-4 occurs. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and then the left hand is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. It is determined that the physical object is not moving, and effects (such as movement of the movable body C) should not be performed according to the movement.

  In this respect, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms) is being executed. Within the timer process, the information from the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b are respectively acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. A specific coordinate region is analyzed by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) pieces of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is completed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described above. It is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moving in (for example, the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4), and control data for the actuator is determined according to the determination result. Set. Then, in the interrupt process every 1 ms, the control for driving the movable body C based on the control data set in this way is performed, so that the movable body C moves from the physical object to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. From the time when the movement has not been completed, the movement of the physical object follows the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 in front view. The coordinate information is stored in chronological order when the coordinate position is acquired.

  For example, even if a physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the inside of the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 The coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 at the timing before the physical object is detected in step S3, and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. If coordinate information indicating that the object is detected does not exist, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and control is performed so that the movable body C is not operated.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. When the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. In the case where they are respectively detected in time-series order in 4, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, for example, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C does not move. Thereby, only when there is an appropriate operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, an appropriate effect can be made to appear.

  In the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, To move the movable body C depending on whether the movement of the physical object having the vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C You may That is, in this case, vector components of the physical object are analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

  The setting control of the coordinate area used in the fourth operation control mode, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C are, for example, in the display unit in the third operation control mode described above. It may be applied to the image S4.

  Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (effect reception) regarding the movement after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not finished yet. While being performed, control is performed to move the production target (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the physical object that has already been detected. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to create such an effect as if he / she produces an effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  By the way, in the 1st operation control mode, the 2nd operation control mode, the 3rd operation control mode, and the 4th operation control mode, production reception to special operation receiving part 3333 is coordinates set at that time Limited to the area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 itself is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position and movement of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, one of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating a control example of the physical object detection information analysis process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

  That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not it is in the operation effect reception period that occurs based on the fact that the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied (step S3301). As a result, when it is in the operation effect reception period, as described above, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received. And if a physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for such effects, control (re-setting or termination) regarding the coordinate area where the effects can be accepted, control for causing effect changes to the effect objects such as display images and movable bodies, Control to maintain the effect state is performed (step S3303). As a result of the processing in step S3302, even if no physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received, control (re-setting, (End), control for returning a production target such as a display image or a movable body to the original position (for example, control for moving the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126A) may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S3301 that there is no operation effect reception period in which a coordinate area that can receive an effect is set for the special operation receiving unit 3333, the analysis content for the effect The analysis is performed with contents different from that of (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided in a form facing the entire game board 5. Accordingly, in order to illegally facilitate the winning of the game ball, an act of placing a magnet at a coordinate position facing the various winning openings in the special operation receiving portion 3333, a wire or the like from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 It can be assumed that an action is taken such as destroying a speaker that intrudes and emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud.

  Therefore, in the process of step S3312 described above, analysis is performed as to whether there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on coordinate information stored in association with time series. It is like that. For example, it is determined whether a physical object is detected in special operation reception unit 3333, and if a physical object is detected in special operation reception unit 3333, the movement mode or size of the physical object, etc. Analyzes whether or not it matches the movement mode or size that can appear when a fraudulent act is performed. Then, when it is determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being performed as a result of the analysis for the fraud countermeasure, an external output indicating that the fraudulent activity is being performed is executed, an alarm sound or an alarm light is output. It controls so that the fraud measures, such as emitting, are performed (step S3313), and when it is not determined that there is a possibility that fraud is being performed, it controls so that such fraud measures are not performed (step S3313) ).

  As such an analysis procedure for fraud countermeasures (step S3312), for example, when a physical object is first detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as an analysis reference position ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends from the analysis reference position by a predetermined distance is set, and the detected physical object falls within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Keep track of) and keep track of (physical objects hardly move). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some illegal act has been performed in the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method for determining that there is a At this time, if the size of the physical object is a size that cannot be cheated (such as a very thin shape), the cheating is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility. As a result, it is possible to suppress false notification of incorrect notification when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

  According to such a configuration, when it is in the operation effect reception period, even if any action is performed, it is not determined as an injustice, and an analysis is performed only as a effect and the result of the analysis While the production control according to is performed, if it is not in the operation production reception period, all acts are determined as an analysis target of fraudulent activity, and control for fraud countermeasures according to the result of the analysis may be performed. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs and is detected in special operation reception unit 3333, depending on the rendering situation, It may be considered as a rendering act to cause a specific rendering change, or it may be considered as a fraudulent act and may be illegally notified. In this way, by using one detection information for different purposes (in this case, purpose of rendering and purpose of fraud prevention) according to the situation of the game and the effect, more purposes with less detection information Can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

  In this explanatory example, when it is not in the operation presentation acceptance period which occurs based on that the specific presentation condition according to the result of the big hit judgment is satisfied, the operation to the special operation reception unit 3333 does not cause the presentation change Although it has been described as a thing, even when it is not in the operation effect reception period (always), the display image changes or the movable body emits light and moves due to the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 It is also good. However, in this case, when it is not in the operation production reception period, in addition to determining all acts as an analysis target of fraudulent acts, it is also determined as an analysis target of rendering actions and performs control according to the results of these determinations. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both the production change and the fraud notification can appear.

  In addition, during the process of monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. If an operation effect reception period occurs based on the above, monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) without ending the analysis processing for the fraud countermeasure It is desirable to continue the process even after the operation effect reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, during the operation effect reception period, in addition to performing analysis processing for effects and control according to the result, does the physical object stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)? Monitoring will be continued, and depending on the result of the monitoring, fraudulent notification will be performed.

  By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first production period in which the production reception regarding the first production event (for example, the production of moving the movable body) is allowed, an operation means (different from the special operation receiving unit 3333). For example, you may make it perform control which further produces | generates the 2nd effect period in which the acceptance of the effect regarding the 2nd effect event (for example, the effect which changes a display image) is accept | permitted in the operation button 410).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at timing t1, the special operation reception unit 3333 allows the reception of an effect (reception of a panel operation) regarding the first effect event (for example, an effect of moving the movable body). It is assumed that a first effect period has occurred. In this first effect period, the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 during the period from the generation of the period to the time t2 when the first reception time has elapsed. Control for operating the movable body in a mode according to at least the moving direction and moving amount of the physical object already detected (analyzed) while detection (analysis) regarding movement has not ended and is still continued (For example, control to move a specific movable body so as to follow movement of a physical object) is executable.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the first rendering period is generated, and while this is still continued without being ended. A second effect that allows acceptance of an effect (acceptance of a button operation) relating to a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) in an operation means (for example, operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 It is possible to execute control for setting an effect pattern or a notice effect that is determined to generate a period.

  That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the operation button 410 accepts the effect reception (button operation reception) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image). Control to generate a second effect period. And when operation with respect to the operation button 410 is received before timing t12 when the 2nd reception time passed after the 2nd production period generate | occur | produces in this way, the said 2nd production period will be complete | finished at that time. Let Alternatively, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted before the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period ends when the timing t12 arrives.

  According to such a configuration, the first performance period in which the performance reception regarding the first performance event is permitted in the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333), and the performance reception regarding the second performance event Both of the second effect period permitted by the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) occur simultaneously (timing t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period that is generated later than the first effect period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period is generated with a delay in the first effect period, is the operation interrupted to operate the second operation portion even if the first operation portion is being operated? It is required to operate the first operation part and the second operation part at the same time in different modes, and to provide an unprecedented operability of operability and to suppress the decrease in the game entertaining It will be expected.

  In order to suitably realize such performance operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the production reception related to the second production event (the production on the side finished in a relatively short period of time) The reception is performed when it is detected that a predetermined number of operations (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (finite amount of operation) is performed with the second operation part (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, an effect operation that changes the display image) without requiring an operation thereafter. For example, when a single pressing operation is detected with respect to the operation button 410, the second effect period ends before the timing t12 arrives, and after that, no operation is required and the effect changes to the display image. This is the case for the control that causes

  On the other hand, with regard to the effect reception regarding the first effect event (the effect reception on the side terminated with the relatively long time lapse), at least until the end of the second effect period, and further thereafter Regardless of the number of times of operation or the amount of operation for one operation site, the reception of the first rendering event is continued without ending, and whenever the operation for the first operation site is performed during the continuation It is desirable to perform control that reflects the change in performance according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without terminating the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object. This corresponds to control that repeatedly executes the process of moving the movable body to the latest coordinate position analyzed each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms).

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation for the first operation part is interrupted when the second effect period occurs behind the first effect period, the operation opportunity for the first operation part is lost. Since it is possible to preferably guarantee that it does not happen, it is possible to suppress the decline in the fun of the game due to the interruption. Moreover, after interrupting the operation to the first operation site, the second effect period can be ended at a relatively early stage by operating the second operation site, and thereafter, the operation to the second operation site It becomes possible to resume the operation on the first operation part at a relatively early stage, since the effect change (the second effect event) corresponding to the operation is generated without the need for This is suitably ensured for an operation opportunity for one operation site.

  In this case, in a situation where the operation on the first operation site is resumed, the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation site is just started, and the first operation It is possible to generate a special production situation in which the second production event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this respect, “when the operation on the second operation site is performed, an effect event in which the size of the specific display image changes is generated, and when the operation on the first operation site is performed, the specific display image reaches the specific position. If setting the influence (changing) of the target object aspect of the above-mentioned second rendering event such as “to cause moving rendering event to occur” is set as the above-mentioned first rendering event, In a special rendering situation, it is possible to enjoy the second rendering event while changing the aspect of the rendering target of the second rendering event by the operation on the first operation part, and it is more dynamic and flexible High operability and stage performance suitable for this will be realized.

  Here, as an example of affecting (changing) the aspect of the rendering target of the second rendering event when performing the operation on the first operation site, for example, the rendering of the second rendering event Changing at least one of the movement amount, movement direction, movement speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, movable object, etc.) However, the invention is not limited to these, as long as it can have some effect on the object of the second effect event (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.). That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation site and the target of the operation effect for the second operation site are the same effect targets, an aspect of the effect to be generated in the effect target (for example, the first operation site The size may be changed in the operation effect for, and the display position may be changed in the operation effect for the second operation part). In addition, the first effect period may not necessarily be set as a finite time, and an operation on the first operation site may be received even after the second effect period ends, and the second effect What is necessary is just to be able to perform an operation on the first operation part when an event occurs.

  In addition, in a period in which both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously, the second effect event is selected among the effect reception regarding the first effect event and the effect reception regarding the second effect event. Only for the effect reception, a display for prompting an operation instruction or a display for suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second effect period suitably urges the interruption of the operation on the first operation site. Desirable above.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to suitably realize such a relationship of effects, there is a case where control is performed to generate the second effect period after the first effect period. The control is performed so as not to generate the first effect period later than the second effect period.

  In the example described above, both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously. However, when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the first effect period is changed to the first effect period. The first production period may be generated again when the second production period ends. Even in this case, it is possible to realize the above-described operability and performance so as to affect the aspect of the production target of the second production event when an operation is performed on the first operation part. Is possible.

  In the example described above, each time an operation is performed on the first operation part, the control is performed to reflect the change in effect according to the operation. However, a plurality of operations are performed on the first operation part. If there is, control for reflecting the change in performance according to the operation may be performed.

  The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can realize various operation reception effects as described below by appropriately using the control method according to each of the above-described illustrative examples.

[Example 1 using special operation receiver 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the effect pattern (the variation pattern of effect example 1) of effect example 1 is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 1 is displayed in display D It is assumed that the decorative symbol SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 is set to be able to receive effects An operation effect period to be controlled is generated.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of effect example 1 determined to operate the movable body A1, and the effect example 1 defined to operate the movable body A2 And an effect pattern A2 of. However, while the movable body A1 is provided so as to be visible from the player side on the front side of the gaming board 5, the movable body A2 is made difficult to be viewed from the player side on the back side of the gaming board 5 And provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, even if any of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect example 1, in the display section D, a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. In the image, the suggestion image HG1 indicating that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any effect pattern A1 or A2 is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing this should be operated. ing.

  Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the production pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the player to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (b). Control is performed so as to start the leftward movement of the movable body A1. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (a). After the body A1 is moved to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A1 is allowed. In this situation, in the display unit D, a display appears which suggests that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific effect position and the expectation for the big hit determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable to produce effects such as changes in the form and shape.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the information shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the reception of the effect on the movable body A1 is allowed so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted is ended, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears indicating that the failure to move the movable body A1 to the specific performance position and the expectation level for the big hit determination is low, and the light emission ends in the movable body A1. Will be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the performance pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (c). Control is performed so as to start the leftward movement of the movable body A2 in the form of following. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a form that allows the player to follow the slide operation. After the body A2 is moved to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A2 is allowed. In this situation, in the display unit D, a display appears which suggests that the movable body A2 is successfully moved to a specific rendering position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is extremely high, and in the movable body A2, It is desirable to produce effects such as changes in the form and shape of light emission.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player has reached a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), in order to interrupt the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 in response to the player's slide operation, the operation presentation period in which the reception of effects on the movable body A2 is permitted is ended, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display unit D fails to move the movable body A2 to a specific effect position, and a display appears suggesting that the degree of expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Control to be terminated.

  According to such an effect example 1, when the player performs a slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a) showing that the movable body A1 is operated appears, the movable body A1 is displayed. However, since the movable body A2, which has been made difficult to see, will move in the form of sudden appearance, it is possible to suppress the fall of the game entertainment by a surprised moving effect as if such a production target has been replaced. Can be done.

  Although illustration is omitted, according to such an effect example 1, the slide operation by the player is performed within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (c). Although the movable body A2 has started to move, this is still in a position where it is still difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and when viewed from the player side, there appears to be a situation where no production change has occurred. It will be able to appear. In other words, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display unit D after causing a disappointment that no effect change has occurred even though the slide operation by the player is properly performed. Therefore, the fall of the game entertainment can be more preferably suppressed by such a surprised movable effect.

  Further, in the above-described effect example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position overlapping the decorative symbol SZ in the fluctuating state. It becomes possible to prompt the player to shift the gaze from the decorative symbol SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, thereby making it difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the manner of overlapping the decorative design SZ is different between when the movable body A1 appears and when the movable body A2 appears, so that the decorative design SZ changes to the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if it is a failure to shift the gaze by the player, it is predicted which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size and position of the part in which the decorative symbol SZ is difficult to see As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the player sees which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In the above example 1, the movable body A1 is disposed on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 5, but the front side of the game board 5 Both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed, or both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed behind the game board 5.

  Here, in the case where both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are disposed on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is disposed on the front side so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain the visibility difficulty of the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the portion which does not move) and the like continuing to be positioned on the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves.

  On the other hand, when the movable bodies A1 and A2 are both arranged behind the gaming board 5, it is possible to give fun about which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation by the player. It will be. In this case, a portion of the game board 5 located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light, and an operation to a coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) opposed to the portion is urged. Is desirable.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example 1, although the movable directions (left direction) of the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to be the same, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game is directed to the left by being prompted by an operation instruction (suggesting image HG1) that suggests the left direction The movable body A2 moves upwards regardless of the slide operation performed by the person, and the fall of the game entertainment can be more preferably suppressed by such a surprised movable effect. Or, even though the operation on the movable body A1 in which the movable direction is set to the left direction is urged, an operation instruction suggesting the upward direction is made to appear, and the player performs a slide operation in the upward direction. When it is performed, the movable body A <b> 2 which has been difficult to visually recognize may move upward and appear.

  Moreover, in the said production example 1, when movable body A2 appeared by operation by a player, movable body A1 did not operate | move, However, It is not restricted to this. For example, when moving the movable body A2 by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 have moved by a predetermined distance, the fall of the game entertainment is more preferably suppressed by the surprised movable effect. Become moist. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by an operation by the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, after the movable body A1 moves by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player. With some movable effects, it is possible to more suitably suppress the decrease in the game interest. However, when the operation target by the player is exchanged between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is kept at a predetermined location for a predetermined time (time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined location). It is desirable to perform the production.

  Moreover, in the above-described effect example 1, although the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are caused to emit light in the situation where the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily emit light. That is, in this case, the timing at which the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the movable body A1, and the movable body A2 starts advancing to the front side of the display portion D and returns to the original position. The control to end the light emission of the movable body A1 is performed at a timing (a timing at which it moves to a predetermined position) or the like which is easier to visually recognize than a certain time.

  Further, although in the above-described effect example 1 or another example thereof, the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view, a panel surface light emitting unit E is disposed instead of the movable body A1. You may do it. That is, in this case, when moving the movable body A2 (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the movable body which is difficult to visually recognize by emitting light from the panel surface light emitting unit E positioned on the front side of the movable body A2. An operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing A2 is prompted.

  Further, in the display unit D according to the above-described effect example 1, in each situation shown in FIGS. 130A to 130C, the effect image HG1 has one effect regardless of the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located. The situation (the initial situation where none of the movable bodies are operating) was shown. However, instead of this, the display state of the suggestion image HG1 is changed according to the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, and the movement state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized only by looking at the suggestion image HG1. You may

[Example 2 of production using special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the effect pattern of the effect example 2 (the variation pattern of the effect example 2) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of the effect example 2 is displayed on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative symbol SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets (controls) the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving portion 3333 so that the effect can be received during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) To generate an operation effect period.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least at least the effect pattern A1 of effect example 2 determined to operate the movable body A1, and the movable body A1 and the movable body B are determined to operate respectively. And the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 being included. And, in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2, as in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (a), (b) and FIG. 131 (a) (or FIG. 131 (b)) The reception opportunity of the operation presentation with respect to movable body A1 is provided in the mode shown to, and movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the reception opportunity of the operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided, the reception opportunity of the operation effect on the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, even when any of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2 above, in the display section D, a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. In FIG. 5, a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any effect pattern A1 or AB is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing this should be operated. ing.

  However, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), an effect event specific to the movable body A1 First, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), control is performed to hide the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D and to interrupt reception of effects in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol SZ in the display section D is displayed (in a semitransparent manner, etc.) in a visible but hardly visible mode, and the light emission state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to make it

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display part D in which the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed in this way, an operation on an operation means (such as the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving part 3333 is performed. While displaying the prompting operation instruction image SG, an operation reception period of a specific effect using the other operation means (the operation button 410, etc.) is generated. Then, when an operation on another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is received during the operation reception period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG on the display unit D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133 (a). At the same time, control is performed to operate a movable body B different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the rendering target. In addition, in this example of effect 2, the movable body B is advanced to a front side of the display portion D for a predetermined time.

  Then, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the movable body B operates in this manner, the movable in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the display section D as shown in FIG. A coordinate image (not shown) facing the movable body A1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 is displayed while displaying the suggestion image HG2 indicating that the operation to slide the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed. An operation effect period for setting (controlling) to be able to receive effects is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for the production operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132 (a) appears, the movable body B operates without operating the movable body B. It is desirable to set the expectation level higher in the production pattern AB of the production example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B is operated than in the production pattern A1 of the production example 2. And in this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), it is suggested that the display pattern of the suggested image HG2 is a rendering pattern with high expectation by making the display mode of the suggested image HG2 different from the suggested image HG1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) It is desirable that the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is different from the light emission mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) so as to suggest that the production pattern is highly expected. .

  In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIGS. a) In the mode shown in FIG. 131 (b), the reception opportunity of the operation effect to the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (c) and FIG. 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b)). The reception opportunity of the operation effect with respect to the movable body A1 may be provided in the mode shown in), and the effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

  In particular, in the effect pattern AB of this effect example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation is made to appear, or the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is Because it is made to differ, in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1, the movable effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is performed is also included. It is desirable to perform in a special execution mode different from the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2.

  According to the effect pattern AB of such effect example 2, the first effect opportunity using the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is first provided (in this situation, the second operation) Although the second effect opportunity for the part (for example, the operation button 410) is not given), when the first operation part is operated and the effect is accepted, it is different from the first operation part The second production opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is given, and the first production opportunity is once lost. When the first operation opportunity is operated by operating the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) in a situation where the first production opportunity is once lost, the second production event (in response to the production reception) ( Here, the operation of the movable body B occurs. That is, in this case, it is possible to generate a presentation effect as to whether or not the second presentation opportunity for the second operation part is given when the presentation reception for the first operation part is made. A novel operability using the operation part is provided.

  In order to suitably realize such a novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable that the second operation part is always provided in a form that is difficult to physically operate. When it is determined that the second rendering opportunity is to be given to the second manipulation site, it is difficult to physically operate the second manipulation site based on the reception of the rendering for the first manipulation site. It is desirable to control from the aspect to the aspect which is easy to operate, and to allow the reception of the effect on the second operation part when in the aspect which is easy to operate. Here, the “mode that is physically difficult to operate” is, for example, a mode in which the second operation site (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member and is difficult to operate, or the second operation site. Is a state that is positioned in a state when it has already been operated, and “control from a physically difficult mode to an easily operable mode” means, for example, that the second operation site itself is Control to operate to a position not covered by other members, control to operate another member covering the second operation part to a position not to cover the second operation part, and operation to the second operation part It is realizable as control etc. which are operated to the position different from the state at the time of being carried out. Further, in this case, as a trigger for controlling the second operation part from the aspect in which it is difficult to physically operate to the aspect in which it is easy to operate, it is not necessary to receive the effect for the first operation part. It may be when a specific time has elapsed since the rendering pattern of. In any case, the second operation site itself or a member provided in the vicinity of the second operation site is operated to give the second presentation opportunity for the second operation site when the presentation for the first operation site is received. It is desirable to do so in order to suggest that the object of the operation has been changed from the first operation site to the second operation site and that the degree of expectation is increased by the change.

  Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given a first production opportunity, and then the first operation site is operated. Based on the reception of the production, the second production opportunity is given. However, after giving the 1st production opportunity using the 1st operation part (here special operation receiving part 3333) (or displaying suggestion picture HG1), after the 1st progress, the 1st A second presentation opportunity for a second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation part may be given and the first presentation opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, until the predetermined time elapses, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation part, but the first effect event is ended based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (When the effect target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to the original position). Alternatively, the first operation part using the first operation part is not given, and a second operation part (for example, different from the first operation part after elapse of a predetermined time after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed) You may make it give the 2nd production opportunity with respect to the operation button 410). In other words, in this case, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the presentation is not accepted by the operation on the first operation part even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 above, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. The operation instruction image SG shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to describe how the suggestion image HG1 changes to a suggestion image HG2 having a higher degree of expectation, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the effect reception for the first operation site is not performed, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, changing from color display to black and white display, semitransparent, etc. It is desirable to make the display mode relatively difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, a clocked image indicating the display remaining time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time for effect reception for the first operation site to be performed) is displayed together, and effect reception for the first operation site is not performed. In the state, if the timekeeping image indicates that the remaining time does not decrease, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period in which the effect reception for the first operation site is performed is not reduced. As a result, a game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be enjoyed with peace of mind. In this case, although the remaining time for which the effect reception is performed is reduced by a predetermined amount although the effect reception for the first operation site is not performed, the remaining time is not reduced. If it is shown by the said time-measurement image, more interesting performance can be provided.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 described above, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the effect acceptance for the first operation portion is not performed based on the effect acceptance being performed for the first operation portion. While generating a period, changing the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 in the predetermined period (for example, changing from color display to black and white display, or setting it as a display mode that is relatively invisible such as semi-transparent, etc.) The image may indicate that the remaining time does not decrease (for example, the display meter does not decrease but does not decrease). At this time, it is desirable that the display mode of the image different from the suggested image HG1 in the display unit D is also changed. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second rendering opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, and the rendering acceptance for the first operation site is performed again. You may do it.

  Further, in the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 prompting an operation for targeting the movable body A1 (or in a state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the operation of the player. For example, based on the determination of whether the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the special result is obtained. It may be a non-operating movable body that operates. When adopting such a non-operation movable body, even if it is determined to operate (a special result is obtained), an operation instruction for the non-operation movable body is not performed, but an operation acceptance is performed. Nor. In this respect, if it is possible to appropriately determine whether the predetermined operation condition for the non-operation movable body is satisfied regardless of the execution state of the effect pattern, another effect object (a movable object or a display image And so on, since the decision to operate the non-operation movable body can be made secretly in the state that the suggestion image HG1 of Among the possibilities, it is possible to have the possibility that the non-operation movable body unrelated to this suddenly operates, and the possibility that the special movable body and the other rendering object operate simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to expect that the game entertaining effect can be improved by such unexpected operation effects.

  Further, when the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation region (a specific coordinate region in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) ) Is not allowed to receive the effect, but can also be allowed to receive the effect in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion where the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear. Also good. According to such a configuration, even when the operation site cannot be recognized, it is only necessary to operate the specific images (the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image S) that appear in the display unit D. A similar effect can be generated, and a decrease in game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333, detection of the movement has not been completed and has not been completed yet. Although it has become possible to execute control to move the rendering object (display image or movable body) in a mode according to the moving direction and the moving amount, the movement speed of the physical object is detected when performing control related to the movement of the rendering object Then, the level of the moving speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, the special operation receiving unit 3333 produces an effect in a coordinate area facing the portion to be operated. Although the reception is made, it does not necessarily have to be the coordinate region facing the part to be operated, and the production reception may be made in a specific coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Good.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 detects a change in light caused by an operation (a physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333 and uses the peripheral control substrate 1510 to detect this. Although analysis is performed to determine the operation mode (for example, movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation receiving unit 3333, for example, the special operation reception using the touch panel installed for the glass plate 192 An operation mode for the unit 3333 (in this case, a mode of touch operation on the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 is adversely affected.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal from one start port sensor 4002 is in an ON state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is acquired from the random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). On the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (second special symbol) A second start-port passing process is performed such that the second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the big hit control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R big hit gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 or not, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that repeats 16 times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 4005 after 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state that is repeated eight times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed after being closed is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state which is repeated twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time reduction control is executed, the right hitting is more advantageous for the player than the left hitting, and in the situation where the time saving control is not executed As described above, the left hand is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a maximum of 8 rounds of long-open big hit game Only the state (about 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004, the probability of approximately 50% (allocation ratio of winning types The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a big hit, such as that a big hit game state (generally 2,000 game balls can be obtained) of 16 rounds of long time opening is executed. In the case of being controlled to shift to the right, it is possible to expect to obtain a greater amount of prize balls than in the left.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the open control of such big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 140, according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, a high probability Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit judgment processing shown in FIG. Certain variation big hit, 8R certain variation big hit B) is set when you end the big hit game state based on B), when the next big hit first special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 144 described later or second special symbol stop processing not shown It is reset by.

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B) is terminated. Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated. Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a jackpot after a low probability short-time state occurs, a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  The variation counter is a counter indicating the number of variations of a special symbol since the variation counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 described later. It is updated when variation of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed (for example, counting up) and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B) It is reset when the big hit gaming state based on is started.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set as the processing of step S5236. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such open control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the big hit determination is not won.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process concerning the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, if the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of the second jackpot determination random number stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol of A second special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). Thus, as long as the player does not lose the lottery for the second special symbol held on hold (unless the value of the second special hold number counter is “0”), about the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery hold status, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number is continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time saving state (high probability time short state), the player can maintain the hitting (right hitting) of the game ball to the right of the center character 2500, It becomes possible to continuously perform only the lottery (judgment process) on the random numbers for the two big hit judgments without interruption.

  In addition, it is limited to the special figure game (pattern change) using the second special figure (second special symbol) to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). For example, execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S5232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is on and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the random numbers on the first special symbol side (big hit determination random number, reach determination random number, big hit symbol random number, variation display pattern random number) as the process of step S5241. ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the processing of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is used as a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in

  Then, next, the first special drawing pre-reading process for executing the first special drawing side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process is ended (step S5245). As will be described later, the prefetching effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In this first special view prefetching process, information necessary for determining whether or not the prefetching rendering is performed, rendering contents, etc. on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information related to the drop for prefetching determination, and the symbol type for prefetching determination) Information, information on variation pattern numbers for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5242 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S5234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol for The random number and the second variable display pattern random number) are acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control for the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly reserved. In order to achieve the state of (5), the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S5254, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S5251. To store.

  Then, next, a second special drawing pre-reading process for executing pre-reading effect on the second special drawing side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the second special view side prefetching effect is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol before starting variable display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a change effect described later can be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5253 to S5255, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  When the number of reservations for the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) instructs the number of reservations for the first special symbol (First pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) instructs the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Command (second pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S5238). The first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read out big hit determination random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

  2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination processing of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S5281 )

  3. The first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 on the basis of the random number for the variable display pattern 1403 and the above-mentioned effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 corresponding to the special symbol The first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

  4. First special symbol variation processing that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 as the first special symbol display mode is determined based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5301. As a process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol that is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302 next. First random number related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in first-out (First-In, First-In) random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process that is a determination process for the big hit is based on the read first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), the process ends.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 140 (A) if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) (step S5311). The big hit determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S5313). The jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the game state is low in probability for each type of special random numbers (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). (Low probability non-short time state, low probability short time state) and low probability jackpot judgment table and high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers have won the jackpot, 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the first big hit determination random number of the type matches the loss determination value indicating that it is the loss (a big hit probability at a low probability; “1/321”). On the other hand, in order to compare with the special symbol and the random number for the big hit judgment of the second special symbol (the second jackpot judgment random number) in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and the special motorized symbol control processing. In the jackpot determination table at the time of the low probability to be referenced, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at high probability referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value and 63634 types of first jackpot determination The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63396 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) The number of jackpot judgment values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the jackpot determination table at the low probability and the jackpot determination table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). .

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the big hit determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S5315) ), A jackpot flag indicating that the change is won by the jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that a big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is judged whether or not it is (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) in this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short time state And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-short state state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number indicates reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicates that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The reach determination random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, in order to maximize the progression speed of the game in the time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach is matched In this case, it may not coincide with the reach determination value indicating reach.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 reach reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state The random numbers for reach determination are associated with one another such that the random number for reach matches the reach determination value indicating that the 67 random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that the reach will not be reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as the low probability non-short state.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319), it determines that reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120) Then, a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140 (B) and selects the first big hit symbol random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the selected symbol determination table (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, a random number for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) Of the first jackpot symbol) is stored in an associated manner. As shown in FIG. 140 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second big hit symbol (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number are set to be different . More specifically, the distribution ratio (allocation) between the high probability probability transition probability odd hit and the normal probability hit that does not become the high probability status transition is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number is greater than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number ing.

The following is a concise summary of the specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Next, the game is controlled to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state is performed. Are controlled to the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a low-probability short-time state until the special symbol fluctuation display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state A battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low probability time reduction state, the effect display device is relatively in a disadvantageous state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 16 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) and control it to 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (successful production) ) Will be added, and a relatively advantageous state will be given after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high probability short-time state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability time and short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, during the execution period of 8R big hit gaming state the effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state, this is a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600 or for a long time. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit game state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit game state, Control the low probability time short state until the variable display of the symbol is digested 100 times (or win a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit gaming state In the production display device 1600, a battle production (battle defeat production) is defeated, and in a low probability short-time state, the state is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a first special symbol holding ball. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and big hits (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol are generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), and the opening / closing pattern is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. With a big hit related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 game balls can be paid out by repeating an open / close pattern that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 8R probability variable big hit A is determined, the 8R probability variable big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R normal big hit is determined, the 8R normal big hit symbol is changed to the 8R normal big hit symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is decided, the 8R probability variation big hit is decided as the big hit symbol. When it is decided to B design and decided to 2R normal big hit, it decides to 2R normal big hit design as big hit design.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as processing in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small special symbol ( After determining to the specific pattern stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is stopped as the mode when the change of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. Do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach is out of place, out of place as processing in step S5337) The determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set such that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, this process is ended.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and change pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decoration symbol → right decoration symbol → The stop display is made in the order of the middle decoration pattern (in addition, the left, middle and right decoration symbols may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and may be displayed simultaneously and stopped). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when winning as a big hit is a type other than 2R normal big hit. On the other hand, when the 2R normal big hit is obtained, it is decided to a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose When the design is determined and the design is specified, the design with no reach is determined (combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns having at least the left and right decorative patterns different). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  In any case, when the winning is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the winning effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the game is started, an effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation display pattern random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this processing is ended. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1403 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 controls the effect in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a big hit determination random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and a big hit symbol random number (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the above. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The first change display pattern random numbers are stored in a form associated with each other. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process in step S5302 among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. The above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the variable display pattern random number with the random number for variable display pattern read out and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Determine the change pattern of Thereby, the determination process about the change pattern of the said special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the variation pattern table at the small hit is not used. In this example, a small hit is not won, but a small hit may be selected.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for fluctuation display pattern. Has been. For example, in the non-temporal state, 164 random display pattern random numbers out of 241 random display pattern random numbers are set as a judgment value (0 to 163) indicating execution of any of normal reach effects, 59 The variable display pattern random number is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a large hit expectation is to be performed, and the 18 variable display pattern random numbers have a high hit probability. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be performed.

  The super reach production (SP production) has a higher expectation degree of big hit than the normal reach production, and the player who wants to generate the big hit gaming state is the player who is in the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. The expectation of is becoming higher. In other words, such a super reach production has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and even if a losing is eventually displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state Can be increased. However, in fact, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state, a highly anticipated notice effect that is a lottery separate from the variation pattern appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed It is required to do (combine).

  In addition, it is provided corresponding to the random number for the first jackpot determination and the random number for the first jackpot symbol, and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds is commonly set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to The variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short-time state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short time state and in the non short time state, and in the short time state, during the variation of the first special symbol, the game ball wins the second starting hole 2004. In addition to prompting, a time for the player to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004 is secured.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of the second special symbol loss, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It will be suppressed that it is discharged | emitted without being provided to a lottery process.

  That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 while in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), a hit as an ordinary symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, in a situation where it can be successively received in the second start opening 2004 (a short time in which substantially all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500 can be received in the second start opening 2004). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. Become possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) The game ball can be received more frequently at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the starting opening 2004. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the fluctuation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is possible to prevent such game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5371. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, as a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned drawn fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284) in the process of step S5373, this process is ended.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), when the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped), Every time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. The display control for causing the first special symbol display 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as the command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the jackpot gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, When the time-short flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is further reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process that is the initial value (step S5389). In step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The big hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of big hit. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R positive change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect (battle effect or extra challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is present (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time short state, it is determined whether or not the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition to end the low probability time short state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short playing state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time-shortening function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), the small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is performed. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit executing flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240 b) is performed. The small hit gaming state is executed. Incidentally, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small hit gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without processing for the big hit or the small hit, assuming that it is a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is executed according to the status of suspension. A process according to the progress of (lottery, symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403)
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 as the mode at the time of the variation control stop Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process for controlling the machine (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated such that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S5402).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the on state in the process of step S5401, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 146, The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310 a as the processing of step S 5411. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. It will process. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-use variation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, in step S5414, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of step S5412 to step S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S5421. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, then, as the processing of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of the steps S5423 and S5424, the ordinary holding number counter is counted down, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S5426) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S5427), the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the per-common-figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the per-common-pattern determination table used when the game state is short (high probability time short state) and the game state is non-short And a non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time short state, high probability non-time short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003, the winning ball is always won by the usual time, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. Controls acceptance. Instead of all 255 types, a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may coincide with the determination value per universal figure indicating that it is won per universal figure.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting opening, since the player can not win the winning game. There is no possibility to control the reception of gaming balls to 2004. However, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-short time condition, and in this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than the short time condition, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the hit. The movable piece of the second start opening 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the short time, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2004, and then advanced again. The reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be disabled.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429) ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S5430), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal symbol) at the time of change control stop of normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined to be out of place A non-usual symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S5404), this processing is ended (step S5433).

  While the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby obtaining the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation in each case is grasped, and effects corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation in process, effect symbol variation stop process, jackpot display process Performs either a jackpot in-game process or a jackpot end effect process.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process: It takes an effect (demonstration effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a. When the control is performed and the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decoration symbol change is started based on the determined effect contents. To control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of rendering symbol variation.

Effect symbol variation processing: Various effects determined in the effect symbol variation start process are controlled at each timing during the symbol variation period, and the process flag value is determined when the variation time ends. Update to a value corresponding to the change stop process.
Production symbol variation stop processing: Control of deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped. If the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative symbol is stopped at the loss symbol symbol, the process flag value is changed to a waiting process for receiving the variation pattern designation command. Update to a value corresponding to.

  Big hit display processing: It controls the effect in the period from the stop of the decorative symbol with the big hit symbol to the start of the big hit game (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit). After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

  During the big hit game processing: Control concerning various effects during the occurrence period of the big hit game state is performed. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big-hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the player that the big-hit gaming state has ended) is controlled in a period from the end of the big-hit gaming state to the variation allowed state. . Then, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (variation effect) determination table T1 referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with each of the change numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the change pattern commands. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (the fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the effect pattern determined It will control so that the fluctuation of a decorative symbol is started based on (the fluctuation production).

  The effect pattern (the change effect) may not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured to associate a plurality of effect patterns for some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, although this will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a notice lottery (determination process of advance effect) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern after determining the effect pattern (change effect). By performing control (process during production symbol fluctuation) to cause the preliminary announcement effect won in the preliminary lottery to appear at a predetermined timing during the execution of the above determined effect pattern (variation effect). The expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested by the appearance mode etc. as those that can be combined.

  In the past, among such combined effects, there may be a plurality of occurrences while the same specified notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being performed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed. By this, it is expected that maintenance of the game interest will be aimed at. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation of the big hit design is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed will naturally be low. It has been considered difficult to sufficiently improve the amusement of the game.

  Although described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variation effect), and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect is performed is a first predetermined value. (E.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (e.g., "0 second") or a count effect display, or a standby display (such as in preparation) before starting the count display It is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a presentation (for example, a conversation announcement or a cut-in A) that causes the player to appear either in a relatively disadvantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a low degree of expectation) or an advantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a high degree of expectation). , B, etc.) are targeted for timer production, it is guaranteed that an advantageous production result will surely occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (in particular, the advance side timer effect performed as a result of the advance lottery), at least when the count display is started, it is concealed as to which effect is the effect target It is desirable to do so. In addition, “effect object of timer effect” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) In the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time since the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect. If it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to indicate the number of seconds) correctly.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as effect contents appearing only when winning in the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice-side timer effect is executed, the count effect display is executed as "advantage effect of the advance effect which functions to increase the jackpot expectation degree with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, it is also executed as “the content of the effect of the effect pattern itself determined based on the change pattern command”, and the expectation from the big hit expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the change pattern command It is possible to cause the count effect display (the timer effect) to appear without wasting the item in vain (the increase in the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, when the big hit expectation when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", when the advance side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation is increased by the function of the combined effect. For example, it becomes “40%” and the frequency of appearance must be lowered by that amount, but when the fluctuation side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit is expected It is possible to execute the timer effect while keeping the degree at “20%” (it is possible to appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and it is possible to preferably maintain the appearance frequency.

  In the determination table T1, the jackpot expectation when the rendering pattern (variation rendering) appears differs depending on the variation number (further, the rendering pattern), and basically, as the variation number increases, the jackpot expectation There is a tendency to become higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10) and 17 (18), the fluctuation-side timer effect is executed in which "conversation announcement" is the effect target as the effect contents. While the appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6)> fluctuation number 9 (10)> fluctuation number 17 (18), the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) <fluctuation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Here, for convenience of description, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state is described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time short state or the high probability time short state, the contents of the effect pattern itself As an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the fluctuation-side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can be performed on the variable side timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4. The variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, the variable numbers 9 and 10 execute the variable timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, In 12, the fluctuation-side timer effect for the cut-in A is performed, and for the fluctuation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation announcement and the cut-in A are executed, and the fluctuation-side timer effect for the effects is performed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are performed on the variation side timer production with the conversation notice as the production target. In 20, the variable-side timer effect for the cut-in B is executed, and for the fluctuation numbers 21 and 22, the conversation announcement and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable-side timer effect for the effects is performed It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation rate is higher in the case where the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the conversation announcement is executed. Is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  In addition, with "conversation notice", it is possible to appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (the change effect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the effect that the relatively low expectation degree is often made On the other hand, the cut-in A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (decorative production of the decorative design) is executed, and the expectation level is relatively high. This is often an effect (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-in A, B, and later-described accessory A action, B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be In addition, "Cut in" that appears as the content of the fluctuation effect is executed to correspond to the cut in A that appears as the effect content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the "cut in" appears. It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as production contents of the production.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the content of the effect (effect pattern) for a plurality of change patterns (change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ) Is assigned as the variable timer production. On this basis, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (such as variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a low-expected normal reach effect”, a count effect display as a notice timer effect is displayed. While the effect is not won (by increasing the premium level) and the expected level UP when the notice timer effect appears, the change pattern is “change pattern (execution of change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern is the above-described predetermined type (for example, variation) compared to the case where the variation number is not such a count variation pattern. The ratio corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) is made low.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is executed. Since only variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) which may be set individually may correspond to the above predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. In contrast, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation timer presentation is not executed, and four variation patterns (variations) Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (variable numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the fluctuation pattern is one capable of performing count effect display (fluctuation timer effect) (count fluctuation pattern), a notice is given rather than the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation timer effect is not performed. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice timer effect) can not be executed as the effect content of the effect decreases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one rendering pattern (variation rendering) without unnecessarily accumulating the expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is a count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) ), The proportion of occurrence of the notice side timer effect varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect pattern corresponding to the change numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect pattern corresponding to the change numbers 9 to 14 is executed. The above-mentioned notice-side timer effect is allowed to appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

  Even when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may appear with low probability. In addition, even when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, it is actually a big hit than in the case of a loss The above-mentioned notice effect timer effect can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern which has been won, and the fluctuation number 22 can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability than the fluctuation number 16 ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is displayed in advance according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the production contents (notice timer production) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type thereof Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In particular, although it will be described later, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if it is a rendering pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the rendering content of the same reach type appears, the fluctuation side timer rendering is included as the rendering content In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined in the advance notice lottery that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed) is increased. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuating timer effect and advance timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation for winning only one forward timer effect in the advance lottery. As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of the big hit expectation.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (the change effect) determined in the effect pattern change start process is the count change pattern (the change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in this case, the fluctuation-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which “conversation announcement” is the target of rendering and the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which the “cut-in” is the rendering target In the above, the aspect of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even when the effect pattern (for example, the change numbers 9, 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the change side timer effect (change side count effect display) is confirmed In combination with "the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern is made", it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You can expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display which appears by advance notice side timer production (notice side count production indication), fluctuation side timer production (fluctuation side regardless of whether the production object is the same (conversation notice, cut in) or not It may be different from (or at least different from) the aspect of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same aspect (or at least the same as at least one). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. This is useful for making it possible for the player to recognize that the notice-side timer effect set to a high degree is appearing and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). About the common aspect as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  In order to make it possible to more appropriately recognize that the advance notice timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice timer effect is executed and the count display when the fluctuation timer effect is executed It is desirable to make the counting speed different (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is focused on even during a period in which the count display is in progress, and the fluctuation-side timer effect and the relative degree are relatively low. Thus, it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the highly anticipated advance notice timer effects is being executed, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the timer digestion period.

  Also, in this case, in the variable-side timer effect, according to the object (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the advance-timer function. If the count display is made with a cut-in) and an aspect (conversation announcement) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect, whether or not the advance notice timer effect is executed It is possible to make the judgment difficult and to impart an interest. Also, while the count display is performed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number in the fluctuation-side timer effect (or the notice-side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed in the notice-side timer effect (or the fluctuation-side timer effect). You may make it count display by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance timer function are simultaneously executed, it is easily grasped whether or not the advance timer function is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment counts the change patterns corresponding to the change-side timer effect (count change patterns such as change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.). A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation-side timer effect is acquired, the count display of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notification-side timer are performed so that any one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on random numbers for effect. If the ease of performing the same with the count display of the effect (for example, the larger the total number is easier to overlap, etc.) is made different, it may be different in the ease of judging whether or not the advance side timer effect is being executed. I am trying to give it an interest

  In this embodiment, the count display start timing or end timing (total count, or time required for all counts) differing from one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect targets and reach) The content of the production is the same), but multiple production patterns with different count display start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for all counts) (however, they are subject to production of timer production) A plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and corresponded one-on-one with the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern.

  In addition, even if the count display number (count total number) when appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the fluctuation side timer effect and the advance notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different depending on the side timer effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the advance side timer effect is being performed and to make the difficulty different to impart an interest. .

  In addition, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed by the count up display, it is determined whether or not the advance side timer effect is executed. It is expected that it will be possible to greatly improve the fun of gaming. Also, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, the variable side timer effect for the specific effect (for example, conversation advance announcement) is executed by the count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the change-side timer effect for the cut-in) is executed by the countdown display, it is determined whether or not the advance timer-side effect is executed, and the difficulty is made different according to the effect object It becomes possible to grant.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is used as the production target for the variable timer production and the notice timer production, and there are cases where different productions are used as the production target. To control. And, when the same production (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for production in the variable timer production and the notice timer production, compared with the case where the production different in the variation timer production and the notice timer production is targeted. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the big hit expectation is lowered is high, and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is the first predetermined value. However, at this point in time, a different effect is targeted (the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation). Looks like). After that, since the other count display that has been continued reaches a predetermined value in a manner that it is clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the effect, it is ended first. Even if it is made clear that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production by the timer production on the end side, a different production that can appear afterwards is targeted for production ( It is expected to improve the interest of the game by maintaining the sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect is determined in advance. It is desirable to make each count end corresponding display (for example, "count success!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear at timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, a variable side timer effect and a notice side timer effect with “conversation notice” executed as an effect on the variable side or the notice side appearing in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are simultaneously performed. In the variable timer effect, the variable side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production that occurs (such as “count success!” And effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice timer production is related to the “conversation notice”. A count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("chance UP!") That occurs as the notice side effect, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect). By progressing, separate count end corresponding displays are made to appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the conversation announcement and the cut-in effects are always executed when they are targeted for the effect of the variation timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value relative to the effect on the variable timer effect, Therefore, it is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, about the production made into the production object of the fluctuation side timer production, it incorporates beforehand as the production contents of the above-mentioned production pattern (the fluctuation production), only with the execution of the production pattern and the fluctuation side timer production and its production object It is desirable that each of the effects (a relatively high expectation mode) can be made to appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to control so that the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) targeted for the effect is selected in the notice lottery. .

  In addition, when each presentation of the conversation announcement and the cut-in is not set as the presentation object of the fluctuation side timer presentation, from the fact that it is judged whether it is made to appear as the presentation contents of the announcement side in the announcement lottery described later A determination is made as to what aspect (a relatively high-expectation aspect or a low-expectation aspect) to appear as the side effect content, and control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination .

The process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 148 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, and the like from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, bias (expected degree) can be given to the probability variation expectation degree when the specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, etc. become.

  Next, as the production pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of production patterns (a plurality of production patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the variation timer production) are prepared so as to be selectable. If it is determined, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different count display start timing or end timing is selected based on the success of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display It is made to have a tendency that the possibility of the jackpot pattern appearing becomes higher as

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so as not to appear the fluctuation-side timer effect is selected.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after selecting an effect pattern (effect from the start of decoration pattern change to change stop) that appears during symbol variation, what kind of notice effect is performed within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute additionally (composite) (notice lottery).

  FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing procedure of the lottery relating to the notice effect appearing in the execution period of the effect pattern (the fluctuation time of the symbol) (the notice lottery carried out in the effect pattern fluctuation start process). Note that the processing procedure for the advance notice lottery described below is merely an example, and the processing procedure for the advance notice lottery is not limited to this as long as the intended purpose as the advance notice effect can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in the advance lottery, first, it is determined whether or not the change (pending to be digested) which is awaiting start is a target of timer prefetching effect described later (step S5501). ). As a result, while the first timer advance lottery is performed when the timer pre-reading effect is targeted (step S5502), the second timer pre-check lottery is performed when the timer pre-reading effect is not targeted (step S5502) S5521).

  That is, when the timer pre-reading effect is applied (first timer notice lottery), the notice side timer effect is executed as compared with the case where the timer pre-read effect is not provided (second timer notice lottery). The rate at which decisions are made is set to be high. The ratio may also include a ratio determined at 100%. Also, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different decision tables are prepared for different game states, thereby making a decision to execute the notice side timer effect according to the game state. The percentages made (for example, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the decision to execute the notice timer effect is made at a lower rate (including the percentage determined at 0%) than in the normal gaming state) is different. It has become.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice determination table T2 which is referred to in the normal gaming state, when the change (settled hold) is not the target of the timer prefetch effect (second timer advance notice lottery). .

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer notice lottery according to this embodiment, when a predetermined type of change pattern command (here, change numbers 1 to 6) is acquired, a notice timer effect is provided. The decision to execute is not made. The same applies to the first timer notice lottery and other game states.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer preview lottery, even on the effect pattern (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the change numbers 15 to 22) where the effect content of the same reach type appears, the change side In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) in which the timer effect is included as effect content, the variation-side timer effect is not included as effect content in the effect pattern (for example, SP reach corresponding to fluctuation numbers 15 and 16) It is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is made is high. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to cause two timer effects (fluctuation timer effect, advance timer effect) to appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the advance notice lottery, As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of winning expectations (winning the double timer production). The same applies to the first timer notice lottery and other game states.

  However, in the first timer advance notice lottery, the rate at which the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is made is generally higher than that of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer notice lottery, even if any of the variation numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the notice side is compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. The proportion of the decision to execute the timer effect is high.

  As will be described later, in the timer prefetching effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (a low expectation mode, a high expectation mode, and a decision mode) in which the ratio at which the advance notice timer effect is executed in the fluctuation targeted for the prefetching is different It is designed to be carried out in any of the modes). Then, in the first timer advance notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer pre-reading effect is being executed, and even if the pre-reading is being executed in the low expectation mode, the second timer advance notice lottery It is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is made is generally higher than the timer advance decision table T2 referred to in the above. When timer pre-reading effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the rate at which it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is performed is generally higher than in the low expectation mode, and the timer pre-reading effect is When executed in the finalized mode, it is set that the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is always made regardless of the variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 22).

  If it is determined that the timer side timer effect is to be executed as a result of such timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 When it is not determined to execute the advance notification side timer effect while the one mission effect lottery is performed (NO in step S5503), the second mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

  In other words, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started (the longer the time it takes for the timer to spend), the higher the expectation of jackpot expectation. Is set to have However, in this case, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the big hit expectation degree tends to be low. Concern about decline in interest was a concern.

  Therefore, although described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment causes the effect display device 1600 to display a "specific display related to the first effect" such as "Let the first effect appear" and the specific display When the first effect occurs (appears) while the is displayed, a special effect such as “mission success” appears, thereby enabling execution of the mission effect that suggests that the jackpot has been won.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, an effect type (here, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect is set as the first effect. We are going to adopt it. That is, in this case, when the timer effect is executed (while the mission effect is appearing), the count indication is displayed while the specific indication such as "Let's make the conversation announcement (the first effect) appear" appears. Even if the displayed count number (total number of counts) displayed when S is started is that the target object of the timer notice is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" even if the count display number is small ( It can be expected that the player has won the prize, and the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is large, and the count display is continued even after the end of the conversation announcement. It is expected that the game excitement when the timer effect is executed can be stably increased, since it can be expected that the big hit expectation will be high even in the case of Kill as to become.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in order to achieve a synergistic effect caused by such a timer effect and a mission effect more appropriately, a specific display related to the first effect (a conversation notice should appear) ) Is displayed, the notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. To do. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed simply by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear). You will be able to The first effect targeted for mission display may not be “conversation notice”, and may be executed instead of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

Note that when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Although any method may be adopted as a method of raising E, it can be realized, for example, by adopting any of the following methods.
a. First, determine whether to perform the mission effect. When it is determined to perform the mission effect, the timer effect is set so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the mission effect is not determined. Method to determine whether to appear b. First of all, it is determined whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is determined that the timer effect is performed, the mission effect is set so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when the timer effect is not determined. Method to decide whether to make it appear

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment employs the above-described method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect drawing (step S5504) when it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is won in the process of step S5503, it is not determined that the advance notice timer effect is won in the process of step S5503. As compared with the second mission effect lottery in the case (step S5551), the proportion of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is increased. It is determined whether or not the mission is displayed within the variation (effect pattern).

  It should be noted that the specific display related to the first effect (please let the conversation announcement appear) and the timer pre-read effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode) which suggests that the fore-end timer effect will be executed. Aspect) can be displayed at the same time. In addition, under a predetermined condition, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) appears higher when it appears.

  In addition, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (hold information that generates the mission effect) is obtained, You may enable it to display over a plurality of fluctuation displays until digested. At this time, if the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (the hold information that generates the mission effect) is a big hit hold information, the change that is executed before the big hit hold information is digested A special notice (successful mission) may be displayed by causing a conversation notice to appear in the display. However, when the special display (successful mission) is displayed in advance as described above (when the successful mission is displayed when the hold information for generating the mission effect is not yet digested), the loss variation display is executed. It is desirable to be limited when That is, in this case, although the special display (successful mission) is displayed, in the variable display where the special display appears, the losing pattern (lost effect) appears, but in this way, the special display (mission successful) is displayed. In this state, the hold information that is the target of the mission effect is digested and the jackpot symbol (the jackpot effect) is displayed in the variation display, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the timer effect count display is started while the mission effect and the timer prefetch effect are executed over a plurality of variations, It is possible to realize an effect as if the variation display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over until the variation display in which the count display of the timer effect starts is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) that is referred to when a notice timer effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 151 (b) These are figures which show an example of 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is not performed in a normal game state.

  As is clear from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a to be referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed, the advance timer side effect is not performed. It is set so that the rate at which the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (let's make the conversation announcement appear) related to the first effect is higher than the second mission effect determination table T3b to be referred to Yes. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired even though the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern in which “conversation notice” appears as a variation effect. Is set so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. It is done. That is, since the variable numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach production (reach type with low expectation), both the timer production and the mission production occur in such a low expectation reach production, and the mission is successful. Then, there is a concern that the interest of playing "I wanted to see such an effect with a reach effect of a type with a higher degree of expectation" would be reduced by the game interest. For this reason, in the variation numbers 5 and 6, although it is a reach effect in which a variable timer effect with “conversation notice” as the effect target is performed, in either the first mission effect determination table T3a or the second mission effect determination table T3b It is desirable to set so as not to execute the effect that the specific display related to the first effect (please let the conversation announcement appear) is displayed. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the variation pattern that causes the “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect. However, these variation numbers are acquired. Even when there is, in the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b, it is set so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) is displayed It is done. This is because the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 are change patterns at the time of the loss, and it is impossible to display the effect of the mission success (suggestive suggestion that the jackpot has been won) in the effect. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  Further, as also shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns for causing "conversation notice" to appear as a variation effect, and these variation numbers 10, 14, If a specific display related to the first effect (display conversation announcement appears) is displayed when 18, 22 are acquired, the message of mission success (suggestive indication of winning a big hit) is displayed The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) to be referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, When 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (3 times) to be significantly higher than that in the second mission effect drawing (step S5551) which is referred to when the advance notice timer effect is not performed. Yes. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  On the other hand, during the execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, and 20) in which “conversation notice” does not appear as the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect, the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) When the message is displayed, there may be a production situation with a sense of incongruity such as “The conversation notice cannot be displayed despite the mission being displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed after the mission fails.” Absent. Accordingly, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect. ) Is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed. There is. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  However, as will be described later, when it is determined that a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed, a relatively high probability. Thus, it is controlled such that the probability that "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is high (step S5509 and step S5534 described later). In view of the fact that such control is performed, the “conversation notice” is used as the effect of the fluctuation effect even for the hit fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that do not appear as the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect. The mission effect may be performed with an execution probability similar to that of a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) appearing as contents.

  On the other hand, variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach effects at the time of losing that “conversation notice” does not appear as the effect contents of the change effect. Since such reach effects can be performed at the time of the loss in the form that the mission effect is a failure without making "conversation notice" appear, it is referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed In the first mission effect lottery to be performed, the execution probability is set (3 times) to be significantly higher than that in the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) which is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  Although it will be described later, it has been decided that a reach effect (a change number 7, 11, 15, 19 etc.) at the time of losing is not made to appear as a “previous conversation announcement” as the effect content of the change effect, and the mission effect is executed. In some cases, control is performed such that the probability that “conversation notice” is executed as the content of the notice effect is zero. This is because in the reach production at the time of the loss, it is not possible to display the effect of the mission success (indicated that the jackpot has been won) in the production.

  According to the configuration that takes such a mission effect, always (when no mission effect appears), the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is the second effect (conversation notice) than the first effect (conversation notice) It is more desirable to obtain a sense of anticipation than a production with a higher expectation (for example, cut-in or a later-described accessory action). When it is (conversation notice), the expectation cannot be obtained suitably. However, when the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (for making the conversation advance notice appear) relating to the first effect (conversation notice), the effect target of the timer effect is the first effect Since either the (conversation notice) or the second effect (cut-in) can be at least expected more than the expectation obtained by the second effect (cut-in), the timer effect You can enjoy with confidence.

  In addition, when such a specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the design effect (make the conversation notice appear). Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when no icon is displayed, the game is simply displayed with the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice). A decrease in interest can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that in realizing such effect control, the variable-side timer effect is not necessarily prepared so as to be executable, and may be realized only by the notice-side timer effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation notice and cut-in (or a later-described accessory action) can be executed within one production pattern, and the conversation notice is cut-in (or a later-described role). It comes to appear at the timing before object operation). Therefore, if the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, the mission may be successful even if the count display number (total count) displayed when the timer effect count display is started is small. The decrease in feeling of expectation comes to be suppressed from being conscious. Also, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started, the expectation can be suitably maintained only by that, so that the game entertainment when the timer effect appears can be improved. It will be expected to maintain stable.

  In addition, as will be described later, the timing for displaying (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is the period during which the symbol change targeted for the specific display is being performed. Not only inside, but the symbol variation targeted for the specific display can appear even during a period of being put on hold. In addition, in the situation where the specific indication related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed during the period when the symbol variation that is the target of the mission effect is still on hold, It will be described later that a special display such as "mission success" may be made to appear (appear).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, the notice timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the notice timer effect as the processing of step S5505. .

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the noticing timer type determination table T4 referred to in the noticing timer type lottery (step S5505).
As shown in FIG. 152, in this notice side timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the notice side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode or the notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode. The effect random numbers are allocated by different allocations of the change numbers. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment refers to the notice timer type determination table T4 based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and the obtained effect random number value is the single timer mode and double timer. By determining to which of the modes of (1) and (2), the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed.

  The “single timer” to be determined in the notice timer type lottery corresponds to “a mode in which one notice side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern”, and “double timer”. Is equivalent to “a mode in which two advance notice timer effects different from one to another in the effect pattern are executed”. In the advance notice side timer type determination table T4, the effect random numbers are allocated for each variation number so that the jackpot expectation when the "double timer" appears is higher than the "single timer".

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute the above-described variation timer effect depending on the type (variation number) of the variation pattern. Therefore, if it is determined that the notice timer presentation is to be executed in a single timer mode when such a count fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation appear in one production pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in a double timer (or triple timer) manner. Similarly, if it is determined that the notice side timer effect is to be executed in a double timer mode when the count variation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are included in one effect pattern. By appearing, the timer effect is executed in a triple timer (or quadruple timer) mode.

  In other words, in this case, if the number of appearances of the notice timer effect (single, double) is determined regardless of whether the count variation pattern is selected, “appearance of timer effect appearing in one effect pattern” The relationship that “the larger the number, the higher the expectation of jackpot” may collapse, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the effect when the timer effect is executed (which aspect is the higher expectation) There is a concern about the decline in gaming entertainment.

  Therefore, in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear. When the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) which does not execute fluctuation side timer production is selected, reach type (character reach relatively low expectation degree, SP reach relatively high expectation degree) Accordingly, the SP reach having a relatively high expectation is more likely to select the double timer mode.

  On the other hand, of the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice timer effect is allowed to appear, variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22) for executing two variation side timer effects different from one to another The mode of the double timer only in the case of SP reach with a relatively high degree of expectation according to reach type (relatively low expected degree character reach, relatively high expected degree SP reach) when is selected Is selected. That is, in this case, when the aspect of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable-side timer effects different from one to be displayed and the two advance-side timer effects in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach having a relatively high degree of expectation In this case, it is definitely suggested that the rendering pattern is to be executed, and the game interest can be improved. However, instead of this, when the aspect of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable-side timer effects different from the effect target and the two advance-side timer effects in one effect pattern, it is determined that the big hit symbol appears It may be suggested.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation number 13, 14, 21, 22) which performs two different fluctuation side timer effects for presentation object is selected, the mode of the single timer in the said notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) Even when is selected, the appearance of the triple timer appears by the appearance of two different variable-side timer effects and one advance-side timer effect different in the effect object in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer aspect appears, the above-mentioned timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation. When the variation number 13, 14 to be selected is selected, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability compared with the variation numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make a triple timer) (See the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

  On the other hand, a variation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12 and 17 to 20) for executing one variation timer effect is selected from the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice timer effect can be generated. When it is set, the selection probability of the double timer mode in the case of relatively low character reach (variation numbers 9 to 12) is set significantly lower, and SP reach (variation number relatively high expectation) is set. 17-20) is set so that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. That is, in this case, in combination with the distribution mode of change number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, an aspect of a triple timer (one change side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, or two change side timers) in one effect pattern When the effect and one fore-end timer effect are displayed, the ratio of appearance of relatively high expected SP reach rather than relatively low expected character reach is increased, so that the game interest can be improved. Will be able to.

  In the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting one of the single timer and the double timer is performed as the notice timer effect type. However, with regard to the notice timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice timer effect of triple timer or more can be executed, and the mode of the count display of the notice timer effect is expected You may make it perform as a lottery process about whether it performs in which of several different aspects (for example, color difference etc.).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed in this way, the mode of the single timer and the mode of the double timer as a result of the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) Whether the decision to perform the advance notice timer effect has been made (Step S5506), or the decision to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect drawing (Step S5504) (Steps S5507, S532) Production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeted for timer candidate candidate productions (preliminary productions that can be the production targets of the preliminary timer production) with the contents (table) according to each result of , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes will be performed.
-It is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and when it is in the first processing state where a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made, First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when in the first processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed (step S5508). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. (Step S5509).

In the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) is not performed. First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the second processing state, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as the effect contents of the advance effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed on the parameter (step S5523). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. (Step S5524).

In the third processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5532) is made, First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the third processing state, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as the effect contents of the advance effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed on the parameter (step S5533). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5534).

In the fourth processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not made) (NO in step S5532) is not performed. First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the fourth processing situation, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as the effect contents of the advance effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for the above (step S5543). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5544).

  FIG. 153 shows the reach type when the decision to execute the mission effect (display the conversation announcement) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display the conversation announcement) are not made. In the figure which compares and shows the appearance upper limit number of the timer object candidate production which is decided according to the processing condition (the 5th processing condition and the 6th processing condition which it mentions later besides the 1st-4th processing condition) and the like is there.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the mission effect (display the conversation notice), the mission effect (display the conversation notice). The upper limit number (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is controlled to be larger than when the determination to execute (1) is not made.

  That is, whether or not to execute the advance side timer effect, whether or not the advance side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, and whether or not the reach type is a reach effect having a relatively high degree of expectation, Even if the determination result such as etc. is determined in any case, when it is determined to execute the mission effect (display the conversation notice), the determination to execute the mission effect (display the conversation notice) The upper limit number of occurrences (average number of occurrences) of the timer target candidate effect is increased as compared with the case where the timer is not performed.

  Note that such processing setting is performed when the above-described notice-side timer effect is executed (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544), or when a later-described notice timer effect is not executed. This is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the effect drawing (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

  According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is executed, the appearance rate of the advance effect is increased and the average number of appearances is increased to improve the game interest. In addition to that, it should be possible to have a sense of expectation that "if there are frequent announcement effects so often, conversation announcements with a relatively low expectation among the announcement effects may also appear and become mission success" become able to. As described above, the presentation targeted for the mission display is required to be a presentation with a relatively low degree of expectation such as a conversational announcement, but it does not necessarily have to be the one with the lowest degree of expectation. When the types of effects that can be regarded as effects of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, they may be classified into groups relatively having low degrees of expectation. Or, it is a notice effect which appears at a timing before the reach effect is started and the expectation degree is lower than this, as compared with the specific effect with a high degree of expectation which appears after the reach effect is started and Also good.

  FIG. 154 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and is in the first processing state in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is made) (YES in step S5507) It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of step S5508 in that case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154, since the table T5a is referred to when the advance announcement timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the advance timer effect can not be executed. When the fluctuation numbers 1, 13, 17 and 21 corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 6 or the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the production contents of the fluctuation effect are acquired There is no reference to T5a.

  In addition, since the table T5a is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Further, in the table T5a, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12 and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, up to four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effect of the variation numbers 7 and 8 On the other hand, up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only up to two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14 Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the variation effect, while in the variation numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the variation effect is One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and at the change number 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect. It is supposed to be. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one more advance notice effect is respectively assigned, and in the variation number 14, substantially two or more notice effects are It is synonymous with each being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variable number 14, an effect random number of “400” is actually assigned to the number of notices 3, and an effect random number of “600” is assigned to the number of notices 4. Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, the most notice productions are assigned most easily.

  By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) appearing at the change number 10 is set to have a lower hit probability than the effect pattern (character reach + cut in A) appearing at the change numbers 11 and 12 It is as having mentioned above. However, in the table T5a to be referred to when referred to the first processing situation, with the change number 10, “mission success (special display) is displayed, and then it is stopped as a jackpot symbol as a presentation pattern In view of the fact that it is the one to be executed, the number and probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed), Is used to improve the game entertainment when the mission success (special indication) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. . However, in the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the number of notifications is more likely to increase as the variation number has a higher jackpot expectation). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  In addition, although it mentions later, with character arrival when it is in the 1st processing circumstance, until the design fluctuation is stopped up to 5 timer object candidate candidacy effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action) , And a special timer) can appear. However, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalization effect (special timer), it also functions as a big hit effect by mission success even when conversational announcement is selected, so the timer is targeted When four or more candidate effects appear, the notice effect of the big hit decision will appear. Therefore, in table T5a, at variable number 7, which is character reach at the time of losing, only up to three timer target candidate effects are allowed to appear, and the variable number is character reach (cut-in A) at the time of losing. At 11, it is possible that only up to two timer target candidate renditions (substantially up to three) can appear.

  On the other hand, in SP reach when in the first processing situation, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, etc.) until symbol variation is stopped. The timing at which the cut-in B and the action B action) can appear is reached. However, when a conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect by mission success, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmed advance notice effect appears. Therefore, in table T5a, at variable number 15, which is the SP reach at the time of losing, only up to five timer target candidate effects are allowed to appear, and the variable number is character reach (cut-in B) at the time of losing. At 19, it is possible that only up to four timer target candidate renditions (substantially up to five) can appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect is described below.
· Conversation notice: Although the speech of the predetermined character is displayed in the effect display device 1600 and the big hit expectation may change according to the content of the words, the big hit expectation when the speech notice appears is the other It is set lower than the production (holding change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action).
・ Hold change: Display corresponding to the hold display that has been subject to digestion even during symbol fluctuations performed in response to hold-up (display that corresponds to the hold display when in the hold state, although not already in the hold state) Is displayed, it changes the display mode (color, etc.) of the hold display that has been digested, and the expected jackpot expectation may change depending on the display mode after the change. The jackpot expectation at the time when the holding change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the character A operation, the cut-in B, and the character B operation.
Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed with respect to the effects performed during symbol variation, and the expectation of jackpot when the cut-in A appears is the role A It is set lower than the operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.
-Action A action: Operates any of the above-described production movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the action A action appears is set lower than the action B action.
Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed with respect to the effect that is being performed during symbol variation, and the expectation of jackpot when the cut-in B appears is the role A It is set lower than the operation and the action B operation.
-Action B action: Operates one of the above-described production movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the action B action appears is another effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A It is set higher than the character A operation and the cut-in B). The production movable body that is operated by the accessory B operation may be the same as or different from the production movable body used in the accessory A operation, but the operation is performed when the same production movable body is used. The aspect will be different.

  It should be noted that each of these effects can be executed as effects for the timer, as well as a period before, during or after the count display is executed, or a fluctuation period during which the timer effect is not executed. The timer can be executed as an effect that is not subject to the timer. In addition, each of these effects may be executable in any of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, such as blue cut-in A and red cut-in A, for example. In addition, with respect to the pending change, a premier mode (special mode) in which a big hit is decided when appearing may be included. However, in this case, when the premier mode (special mode) appears during execution of the count display, the hold change is not executed as the target of the timer effect when the count display becomes a predetermined value.

  FIG. 155 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506) and is in the second processing state in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of step S5523 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the advance announcement timer effect is executed, the fluctuation number 1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the advance timer appearance can not be executed. When 〜6 is acquired, the table T5b is not referred to. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17 correspond to the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) for causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. , 21 are also referred to in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5b, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Also, since the table T5b is similarly referred to when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected so that at least one of the variation numbers is separately selected. Is allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  In addition, similarly, in the table T5b, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, up to two timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variation numbers 7 to 12, Only a maximum of one timer target candidate effect is assigned to the variation numbers 13 and 14 with relatively high expectations. However, while variation targets 7 and 8 do not have timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) as the effect content of variation effects, variation numbers 9 to 12 have 1 as the effect content of variation effects. Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect when the one timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) comes to appear. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with substantially one or more preview effects being respectively assigned, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, substantially two or more previews It has the same meaning as the effect is assigned to each.

  Then, for example, since the change number 14 is substantially synonymous with the fact that the production random number of “1000” is assigned to the number of notices 3, the change numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the character reach production are provided. Among the fourteen, it can be said that it is allocated so that a large number of preliminary announcement effects are likely to appear.

  In addition, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, a relationship substantially the same as the relationship between the respective variation numbers in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  In addition, in table T5b, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as table T5a. However, since the table is referenced when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is smaller than T5a.

  FIG. 156 shows an aspect of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and is in the third processing situation in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of step S5533 in that case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 156, since the table T5c is also referred to when the advance announcement timer effect or mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the advance timer effect can not be executed. When the fluctuation numbers 1, 13, 17 and 21 corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 6 or the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the production contents of the fluctuation effect are acquired T5c is never referenced.

  However, since the table T5c is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, it is not always necessary to assign two timer object candidate effects as the effect content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect according to the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Also, in the table T5c, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, up to four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only up to three timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variation number 14. Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in the change numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the change effect is 1 Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear, and when the variable number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the variable effect. ing. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one more advance notice effect is respectively assigned, and in the variation number 14, substantially two or more notice effects are It is synonymous with each being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variable number 14, an effect random number of “400” is assigned to the number of notices 4, and an effect random number of “600” is assigned to the number of notices 5. Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, the most notice productions are assigned most easily.

  In addition, in character reach when in the third processing situation, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, special timer) until symbol variation is stopped ) Has come to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalization effect (special timer), and when conversational announcement is selected, it functions as a big hit effect by mission success, so timer object candidate effects When 4 or more appear, a notice effect of confirming the big hit (mission success or special timer) will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, the variation number at the time of losing is at most three (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variation side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the advance notification side is three). Is not allowed to appear.

  In addition, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot finalizing effect (special timer), the notice number 5 is selected when the variable number is 8, or the notice is provided when the variable numbers are 10 and 12. When the number 4 is selected and the notice number 3 is selected when the variable number is 14, the execution of the jackpot finalizing effect (special timer) is determined. As described above, when the notice timer presentation is executed in the double timer mode, the rate of appearance of the special timer described later is higher than when the notice timer presentation is executed in the single timer mode. In addition to winning the jackpot, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the game will shift to a high-probability short-time state and that a 16-round jackpot game will be executed. In particular, when it is a double timer mode and mission presentation is executed, such a sense of expectation can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is effective to utilize the mission presentation with low expectation in the first place. Will be able to create a variety of staging situations.

  By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) appearing at the change number 10 is set to have a lower hit probability than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) appearing at the change numbers 11 and 12 That is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to when in the third processing status, the variation number 10 is “the mission success (special display) is displayed, and then the effect pattern is stopped with the big hit symbol” In view of the fact that it is the one to be executed, the number and probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed), Improves the enjoyment of the game when the mission success (special display) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. . However, in the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, The number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher in the case of the fluctuation number 20 per hit than in the case of the fluctuation number 18 (the number of predictions tends to be larger as the fluctuation number is higher for the jackpot expectation). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  As will be described later, in SP reach when in the third processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action) until symbol variation is stopped , The cut-in B, and the feature B motion) can come. However, when a conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect by mission success, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmed advance notice effect appears. Therefore, in table T5c, up to five variable numbers corresponding to SP reach at the time of losing (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the fluctuation side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notification side is five) However, the timer target candidate effect is not allowed to appear.

  FIG. 157 shows a fourth processing state in which a mode of double timer (NO in step S5506) and determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5532) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of step S5543 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the notice timer presentation is executed, the change number 1 corresponding to the change pattern in which the notice timer presentation cannot be executed. When .about.6 is acquired, the table T5d is not referred to. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17 correspond to the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) for causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. , 21 are also referred to in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5d, production random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each number of notices.

  Similarly, the table T5d is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected for each variable number so as to be selected. Is allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, it is not always necessary to assign two timer object candidate effects as the effect content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect according to the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Similarly, in the table T5d, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are reached for the winning effects of the variable numbers 13 and 14. Only allocated. However, while variation targets 7 and 8 do not have timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) as the effect content of variation effects, variation numbers 9 to 12 have 1 as the effect content of variation effects. Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect when the one timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) comes to appear. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with substantially one or more preview effects being respectively assigned, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, substantially two or more previews It has the same meaning as the effect is assigned to each.

  Then, for example, since the change number 14 is substantially synonymous with the fact that a production random number of “1000” is assigned to the number of notices 4, the change numbers 7 to 10 corresponding to the character reach production. It can be said that among the fourteen, the most noticeable effects are assigned so as to appear most easily.

  In addition, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, a relationship substantially the same as the relationship between the respective variation numbers in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  Besides, in the table T5d, distribution of effect random numbers is performed in substantially the same manner as the table T5c, but since this table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table referred to when the mission effect is not executed The upper limit number of appearances (average appearance number) of the timer candidate candidate effects is smaller than T5c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the notice timer type lottery (step S5505), it is decided whether to perform the notice timer effect in the mode of the single timer or the mode of the double timer in this way (step S5506) Furthermore, it is determined whether to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect drawing (step S5504) (steps S5507, S5532). After determining the number of appearances of the effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the noticing timer effect) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), only the determined number is used as the timer target candidate effect, and any type of notice Make a production appear, and then select one of them A determination process as to whether to effect target Ma effect (step S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  FIG. 158 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5508 (step S5509).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158, this table T6a-1 (step S5509: number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the form of a single timer. Therefore, one notice effect determined to be executed as the timer object candidate effect is automatically set as an effect object of the notice timer effect (in FIG. It shows that it is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5509: number of notices N), N timer object candidate effects are determined. A notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as a notice object of the notice timer effect.

  In addition, it is a case where it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, and N-1 of them (1 in the single mode, 2 in the double mode) ) When the following numbers of effects are to be the effects of the advance notice timer effect (steps S 5509, S 524, S 534, S 544), even if the same effect combinations of N as the timer object candidate effects are selected It is desirable to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which one of the effects is determined as the advance notice timer effect. For example, a first effect that appears at a relatively early timing in one effect pattern (for example, a conversation notice) and a later effect that appears at a relatively late timing in one effect pattern (for example, an accessory A) Motion) is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the later effect (for example, the action A action) is performed on the notice side effect than when the previous effect (for example, conversation notice) is selected as the effect object of the notice side effect timer. The ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) is set to be higher when the timer is to be produced (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even when a variation number for executing “conversation notice” or “cut-in A, B” is acquired as the contents of the effect of the change effect, As the production contents, “conversation notice” and “cut-in A, B” can be determined. However, as a result, if it is determined that the same effect appears in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the notice effect, the control is not performed so that it appears separately as the effect content of the notice effect. A process of setting the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) appearing as the effect content of the effect as the effect target of the advance notice timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544).

  For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1), when the “conversation notice” is determined as the production content of the notice effect with the variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, or “cut” with the variable numbers 11 to 14. When “In A” is determined as the content of the notice effect, or when “Cut-in B” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect with the variation numbers 19 to 22, the effect content of the change effect and the effect of the notice effect It is determined that the same production appears in both the contents. However, in this case, control to separately appear as the effect content of the notice effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appearing as the effect content of the fluctuation effect is set as the effect target of the notice timer effect. Processing is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) is determined to appear in both the effect contents of the change effect and the effect contents of the advance effect, it is separately provided as the effect contents of the advance effect. It is also possible to set the specific effect on the separately appearing side (the content of the effect of the advance effect) to be set as the effect target of the advance notice timer effect.

  In addition, this table T6a-1 (number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear), and is also shown in FIG. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the “conversation notice” are acquired as the contents of the variation effect, or “conversation notice” is selected as the timer target candidate effect (the contents of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (successful mission) is displayed and it is definitely suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

  In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 when the “conversation notice” is executed as the contents of the variation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, and when the “conversation notice” is not performed as the contents of the variation effect. Compared to 16 and 20, the ratio of determining “conversation notice” as the production content of the notice effect is set to be lower. That is, as described above, when “conversation notice” is determined as the content of the notice effect in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are subject to the “conversation notice”. In this way, when two timer effects target the same effect, the big hit expectation is basically compared to the case where the two timer effects target different effects. It is because it sets so that degree may become low. As a result, it is possible to relatively reduce the appearance ratio of the special display (mission success) when both the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation are directed to the “conversation notice”.

  The same is also true for the contents of effects of change effects other than such "conversation notice", for example, among the change numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, the change numbers for which "cut-in B" is not executed as the effect contents of change effects. Among the 15 and 16, the 150 variation numbers are assigned to the variation number 15 at the time of losing, whereas the 250 variation numbers are assigned to the variation number 16 at the time of hitting. On the other hand, out of the fluctuation numbers 19 and 20 for executing "cut-in B" as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect among the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, 250 effect random numbers are in the fluctuation number 19 at the time of losing In contrast to the allocation, only 200 effect random numbers are allocated to the fluctuation number 20 at the time of hitting.

  That is, in this case, when “Cut in B” is to be the production target only by the fluctuation timer effect with fluctuation numbers 15 and 16, both the fluctuation timer effect and the announcement timer effect appear with fluctuation numbers 19 and 20. As compared with the case where both of these target "Cut in B", the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol comes to be high. As a result, in a situation where two timer effects are simultaneously displayed in a count, it works as an important effect element whether or not those timer effects reach the predetermined value with the same effect target, and during the count display It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, among fluctuation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach, at fluctuation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 during a hit, the period until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol fluctuation) In the special timer mode that targets the effects that appear after the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern, not the effects that appear in the game It can be decided to execute the notice side timer effect. Although this special timer will be described later, in this embodiment, the special timer may not appear even if it is determined to generate the special timer in the process of step S5509, and the special timer is not executed. The execution mode of the special timer, including the presence / absence of this, is determined in the process of the subsequent step S5514.

  Here, the notice-side timer effect may have a relatively high jackpot expectation even if the total number of counts from when the count display is started to when it is small (such as when it is started from the middle of the variable display). On the other hand, in the variable-side timer effect, if the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small, the expectation suggested in the timer effect is always lower than in the case where the total number is small. May be

  Although it will be described later, such a special timer is a thing that definitely suggests that a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, as well as a high probability time short game state or 16 round big hit when it appears It can be said that the game is more beneficial to the player than the timer effect for making other effects effective in that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high. The percentage may include 100%.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By controlling, a sense of expectation when a special display (when the mission is successful) appears more suitably (steps S5509, S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (the advance notice number 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach that the special timer may appear, the variation side timer effect (mission success) for which the conversation announcement is targeted is appeared While 100 effect random numbers are assigned to the special timer for the fluctuation numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, when the fluctuation side timer effect (mission success) for conversation announcement is targeted, the hit time does not appear In the variable numbers 8 and 12, only 50 production random numbers are allocated to the special timer.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the special display (mission success) does not appear, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation) The expectation when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) appears by controlling the appearance rate of the special timer to be higher than when the notice is not made (steps S5524 and S5544). Is more suitably played.

  In addition, when the timer effect is performed in the double mode by the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is greater than when the timer effect is performed in the double mode only by the notice-side timer effect. It is set to be low. Also, even if the timer effect is performed in a triple manner with one variable timer effect and two notice timer effects, one of the notice timer effects is the same effect as the variable timer effect. In this case, the appearance ratio of the special timer is set to be lower than in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect of the advance timer and the variable timer.

  FIG. 159 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

  As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach where the special timer may appear, the variable numbers 10 and 14 50 effect random numbers are allocated, and 20 effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 8 and 12. Thus, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), a special timer is used compared to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance ratio of is set to be low.

  Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is referred to when the mission effect (display the conversation notice is not made), the conversation notice is made to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. The table T6b-1 (notice number 1) is also referred to when the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to the loss change pattern (change pattern in which the mission can not be successful) is acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 9, 13, 17 and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Moreover, in the fluctuation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, the fluctuation-side timer effect with "conversation notice" as the target of the fluctuation effect is displayed, so the notice effect When "conversation announcement" is selected as the presentation contents of the above, both the variable-side timer presentation and the announcement-side timer presentation are to be executed with "conversation announcement" as the presentation target. Therefore, in table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is selected in change numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 in other change numbers, " The production random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of jackpot is lower than when “conversation notice” is selected.

  The contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect other than such “conversation notice” are the same. For example, “cut-in B” that can be the effect of both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect in the SP reach, Allocation is made in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned table T6a-1 (notice number 1).

  Also, similarly, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is also referred to when it is determined to execute the notice timer effect in the single timer mode, One advance notice effect determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is naturally set as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: notice number N), N as timer object candidate effects The same is also true in that the advance notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect.

  Timer target notice lottery (step S5534, when the notice side effect timer is performed in the double mode, in contrast to the timer target notice lottery (step S5509, S5524) when the notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode. In S5544), when both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are the same effect, it is a big hit compared to the effect where the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are different effects. Basically, the effect random numbers are distributed in the same manner, such as a point set to lower the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 160 shows a mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing state where it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5532) is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

  As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: number of notices 2) is referred to when it is decided to execute the notice side timer effect in the form of a double timer. For this reason, both of the two notice effects that are determined to be executed as the timer object candidate effects are set as the effect objects of the notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (3 or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5544: number N of notice), N timer object candidate effects are determined. In addition to determining the advance notice effect, two of them will be determined as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in the other rendering situations.

  As shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target the same effect, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect It is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the case where an effect that is different from is targeted for the effect.

  In addition, when one of the two preliminary effects selected as the preliminary effect timer is the same target as the variable effect timer, one of the two preliminary effects selected as the special advance timer is the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than in the case where it is not the same effect target as the effect timer.

  In particular, in the case of the variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22, when both of the two notice effects that are selected as the notice side effect timer are the same effect target as the two variable side effect timers that appear in one effect pattern. The jackpot expectation is significantly lower.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of performing such timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which effect of the timer target candidate effect is to appear and the effect of the advance side timer effect When it is determined which object to use, a count display lottery is performed next as processing of step 510.

  In this count display lottery (step 510), each effect determined to appear as a timer target candidate effect is caused to appear at any timing within one effect pattern (fluctuation pattern), and further to the effect object. A determination is made as to from which timing within one rendering pattern (variation pattern) the notification-side timer effect to be directed to the count display is to be executed. In this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect that is the subject of the notice timer effect is late, the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is compared to when the appearance timing of the effect that is the subject of the notice timer effect is early. It is desirable to be performed so that the appearance ratio of) increases.

  FIG. 161 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number equivalent to a character reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG.
・ Normal production period in which normal production is performed,
・ Normal reach production period, after the decoration pattern becomes reach mode under the background at the time of normal production,
・ Each time period such as a character reach production period in which the production is promoted by switching to a background different from that in the normal production, and ・ a design stop period in which the decorative symbol is determined and stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol) Is in a processing situation where it has been decided that it will appear sequentially within the 50 second fluctuation time (period in which symbol fluctuation is performed) (the reference).

  Also, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, after the variable side timer effect is started as the effect pattern at the start of the symbol change and displayed for 10 seconds, the “conversation notice” is displayed. ”And the fact that the variable timer presentation is started again after a predetermined time has elapsed and displayed for 10 seconds, and then“ cut-in A ”is made to appear.

  As described above, even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), the production pattern is not limited to this, and the variation timer production is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and this is displayed for 5 seconds. It is also possible to select other performance patterns that cause a “conversation notice” to appear after. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, selection of such a production | presentation pattern is already performed before the lottery (each process shown by FIG. 149) regarding the said advance presentation production.

  Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), it is determined in the timer target advance lottery (here, step S5524) that such effect periods sequentially appear and the effect contents on the fluctuation side have already been determined. A determination is made as to at what timing each of the rendering target of the previewing-side rendering timer and the preview-side rendering timer for counting display to the rendering target appear. In addition to the timer target candidate effects to be rendered by the preview side effect timer in the timer target advance lottery, the timer target candidate effects not to be rendered when the timer target candidates effect not to be rendered is further determined. The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

  For example, in the case where "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), as shown in FIG. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute the conversation notice and the notice timer presentation. In this embodiment, among conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode of conversation notice 1 is the mode with the lowest big hit expectation degree, and is selected so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher as the number becomes larger. The probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the hit or fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) of the big hit, etc. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, at this time, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation notice appears as the contents of the effect of the change effect are acquired, the notification effect of the notice effect is also obtained in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524). If "conversation notice" is determined as the presentation content, the form of the conversation notice 1 is selected. In this case, apart from the conversation announcement performed as the effect content of the variation effect, the count indication of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variation effect without causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. The control to be performed will be executed (a form of the conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach are acquired, the timer advance notice lottery (here, step S5524) indicates that “pending” as the effect content of the above-described advance effect If "change" is determined, it is determined in which of the hold changes 1 to 5 the hold change and the advance notice timer effect are respectively executed, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect contents of the advance effect. If it is, it is determined in which of the cut-ins A1 to 3 whether the cut-in A and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed, and "A character action A" is determined as the effect contents of the advance effect. If yes, it is determined in which mode of the feature A actions 1 to 4 to execute the feature A action and the advance notice side timer effect, respectively, If Ma "is determined so that the determining whether to perform the announcement side timer effect in any aspect of special timers 1 and 2.

  In this embodiment, the smallest number of modes is the largest hit expectation in any of the effect selection of the hold changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3, and the feature A operations 1 to 4 in the figure. The selection probabilities are set so that the big hit expectation increases as the number increases. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are effects that indicate that the big hit symbol (special display mode) always appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 161, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, three possible timings of the appearance of the timer effect on the notice side can be obtained while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although prepared (at the start of fluctuation, a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F), their appearance timing is a plurality of timer target notices (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in It is in the form of being used in common with A, character A operation, and special timer). Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of notice E2, and a little before the appearance timing of notice F), a plurality of display displays are prepared as the total number of count display when the advance notice timer effect appears 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and even if any of those count display total numbers are displayed, it is predicted which effect the target of the effect is. It is designed to be difficult.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds at a timing that arrives a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings. The notice-side timer effect with a total display count of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds can appear. However, it is difficult to predict which mode of conversation notice 3 and hold change 3 is being executed only by the effect pattern of character reach when the notice side timer effect having a count display total number of 10 seconds appears Even when the notice-side timer effect with a total display count of 20 seconds has appeared, any aspect of hold change 4 and cut-in A2 is executed only in the effect pattern of Character Reach. It is difficult to predict.

  In this point, when the notice timer effect with a total display count of 30 seconds appears at a timing that comes a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the production pattern of the character reach is displayed. If it sees, only the aspect of the action A operation | movement 2 can be performed. However, looking at the SP reach effect pattern (see FIG. 162) described later, the mode of the action A action 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, so the appearance timing of the notice E2 is a little. Even if the notice timer effect with a total display count of 30 seconds appears at the timing before it arrives, the notice timer effect in any mode, including whether it is character reach or SP reach It is difficult to predict what will be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the notice timer production appears, it is unknown which production is the production target (the big hit expectation varies depending on the type of the production to be produced). Since it is possible, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display of the timer effect becomes a specific numerical value (here, 0). In this embodiment, when a notice timer effect with the same count display total number appears at the same timing, the effect target is basically a conversation notice (unless there is a balance with a mission effect or the like). When the jackpot expectation is the lowest, the jackpot expectation is set to gradually increase in the order of the hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the notice side timer effect appears, a plurality of count display totals (the big hit expectation varies depending on the length of the number of seconds) are prepared at any appearance timing. When the notice timer effect appears, it becomes possible to give an interest about which count display total number is, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the notice timer effect appears. .

  In this embodiment, even if it is a notice side timer effect that appears at any timing, the effect target is made difficult to predict at the time of appearance, but one effect target for the total count display count An aspect may also be included in which an effect target is set to be predictable without being associated (for example, a special timer). Further, an appearance timing in which only one count display total number may appear may be included as an appearance timing in which the advance notice side timer effect may appear.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), for convenience of explanation, when the same effect is made the effect of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, In the side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the count display is performed for the same number of seconds, or it is described as if the count display is ended at the same timing. However, as described above, the end timing of each count display is actually made different even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. The other count display is made to continue while one of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect comes to an end by reaching a specific numerical value (0 in this case) first.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (Charareach: notice number 1), it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is made in second units, but “second Is not limited to. Therefore, for example, the time required for the number change of the count display may be different between the fluctuation side timer effect and the advance side timer effect, or the time required for the change of each number in the count display appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect is constant It does not have to be.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), when “special timer” is determined as the effect contents of the notice effect, the notice timer effect in either of the special timers 1 and 2 is used. It is decided to decide what to do. That is, in this case, after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), when 20 seconds pass (during the big hit game execution period), the count display is a specific numerical value (here 0). It will reach. After this, a presentation that suggests that it is a type that is advantageous to the player as a type of big hit (for example, a hit type to make transition to a high probability time short state, a hit type to be played a big hit game of 16 rounds, etc.) is started However, such a special timer mode is set in step S5514 described later.

  In this embodiment, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is selected in the count display lottery (step S5511). It may be set in step S5514.

  In addition, when the count display is started after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display, not the timing at which the variable display according to the hold information is started, the timer pre-reading effect described later is not executed. Alternatively, an aspect (for example, during timer preparation) that is displayed in a timer pre-reading effect described later may appear (for example, appear at a predetermined probability) over a predetermined time until the count display is started.

  FIG. 162 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number equivalent to SP reach is chosen.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 162, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period in which normal production is performed,
・ Normal reach production period, after the decoration pattern becomes reach mode under the background at the time of normal production,
・ A character reach production period, in which the background is switched to a background different from that for normal production
・ The SP reach production period that appears in the form of the progress of the production, and the decoration design stops to show the winning of the jackpot (the jackpot symbol, the lost symbol) Each period such as the symbol stop period is determined to appear sequentially within a 90 second variation time (period in which symbol variation is performed) ("fluctuation time" in the figure), See the line "Variation PTN production").

  Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, after the variable side timer effect is started as the effect pattern at the start of the symbol change and displayed for 10 seconds, the “conversation notice” is displayed. ”, And after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable side timer effect is restarted and displayed for 10 seconds, and then“ cut-in B ”appears.

  Also in this example (SP reach: notice number 1), as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: notice number 1), even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), about the effect pattern The present invention is not limited to this, and another effect pattern may be selected such that "conversation notice" appears after a variable side timer effect is started for a predetermined time after a predetermined time from the start of symbol change and this is displayed for 5 seconds. ing.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect of the notice effect in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524), As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in any of the conversation notices 1 to 6 whether the conversation notice and the notice timer presentation are to be executed. In this embodiment, among the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the aspect of the conversation notice 1 is the aspect with the lowest expectation degree of the big hit, and the selection is made so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher as the number increases. Probability is set. Accordingly, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the jackpot win or fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 15 to 22). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, in the same manner, when the change numbers 17, 18, 21, and 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the change effect are acquired, the notice is also given in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). If "conversation notice" is determined as the contents of the effect, the mode of the talk notice 1 is selected. In this case, apart from the conversation announcement performed as the effect content of the variation effect, the count indication of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variation effect without causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. The control to be performed will be executed (a form of the conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, the timer target notice lottery (in this case, step S5524) shows “pending” as the contents of the notice effect. When “change” is determined, it is determined which of the change changes 1 to 7 to execute the hold change and the notice timer production, and “cut-in A” is decided as the notice contents of the notice effect. In the case where the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed, it is determined whether the cut-in A or the notice-side timer effect is executed, and “act A action” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If it is determined that the feature A action and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed in any of the action A actions 1 to 4, it is determined that In the case where “In B” is determined, it is determined in which of cut-in B 1 to 5 the cut-in B and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed. If "" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the accessory B operations 1 to 4 whether the accessory B operation and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed.

  In addition, also in the example of this SP reach, any effect selection of retention changes 1 to 7 in the figure, cut in A1 to 5, character A operation 1 to 4, cut in B1 to 5, character B operation 1 to 4 Also in the above, the smallest number of modes is the mode with the lowest big hit expectation degree, and the selection probability is set such that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher as the number becomes larger.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the advance notice timer effect can appear are prepared while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is performed (at the start of fluctuation, the notice E2) Slightly before the appearance timing of S, slightly before the appearance timing of notice F, a little before the end of the normal reach production period, within the character reach production period, the timing when the SP reach production period is started) It is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 161 in that it is difficult to predict which effect will be produced when an effect appears.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, an aspect (for example, a timer of 40 seconds for cut-in B) set to be able to predict a rendering target without associating only one rendering target with the total number of count display The appearance timing at which the side timer effect can appear includes an appearance timing in which only one count display total number appears (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period is started).

  Thus, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance time of the notice effect or the notice timer effect produced in the timer object notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of notice effects produced in the timer object notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effect that is designated as the notice object of the notice timer effect, the appearance time of the effect that is not the object of the notice timer effect Etc. are also decided together. In addition, when the notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, at what timing each of the two notice timer effects and the effects to be produced appear (two notice timer effects) (Including whether or not to execute the count display of when overlapping) may be further determined.

  However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of notice effects determined by the timer target notice lottery, whether or not it is a double timer mode, and mission effect (display conversation notice) are executed. It is desirable that the advance notice effect determined by the timer target advance notice lottery, the appearance time of the advance notice timer effect, and the like are determined in different modes according to the processing situation such as whether or not. For example, in a processing situation in which a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, if a conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the start of fluctuation, there will be no dramatic excitement. It is desirable to make it easy to select the speech announcements that appear at the late stage. Further, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which each count display is simultaneously progressed appears, as compared with the case where each count display does not overlap within one effect pattern. The selection rate is higher in the case where the situation where each count display simultaneously progresses appears than when the situation where each count display progresses simultaneously does not appear because It is desirable to do. In addition, when the number of the notice effects determined by the timer target notice lottery is two or more, the appearance times of the notice effects are determined so that the notice effects do not appear at the same time.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the notice-side timer effect can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F, slightly before the end of the normal reach effect period, the character reach effect period Among them, the timing for starting the SP reach production period is within the period during which each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation) can be performed. It is desirable to set. In other words, in this case, the notice timer production is started even if the notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, or the notice effect is performed even if the notice timer presentation is not started at a particular timing. It can be expected that the decrease in the entertainment interest will be suppressed. In addition, since the advance notice effect appears at a specific timing, and further an effect situation in which the advance notice timer effect is started may occur, it is also expected to improve the game interest. In this case, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change (at a specific timing), the notification effect is not executed when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the notice side timer effect is started is higher than the time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, the state of the notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery becomes a special timer as the process of step S5511. Determine if it is possible.

  That is, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, separately from timer target candidate effects (notice effects that can be effects of the notice-side timer effect), non-target Non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and a non-target notice F can be executed as the notice effect (the notice effect that can not be the target of the notice on the notice side timer effect). Among them, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is lower than the non-target notice F in the situation where the count display of the notice-side timer effect is not performed, whereas the notice-side timer effect is In the situation where the count display is performed, the expectation of jackpot is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F.

  In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is performed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is performed while the count display is not performed. Counting when non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, in a relationship where the expectation that the big hit symbol (specific symbol aspect) appears is lower than when the big hit symbol (specific symbol aspect) appears Timer effect on the notice side (count effect so that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol (specific symbol form) appears is higher than when non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed Will be enabled. Therefore, as described above, the notice-side timer effect (counting non-target notice E2 (in which the count display is executed) is performed in which count display is performed in a manner of significantly increasing the degree of expectation when non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears. The timer effect) at which the first effect) is started and ended is referred to as a “special timer”.

  That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a lower expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), whereas the count display is While being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) comes to function as an effect having a higher degree of expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect). Accordingly, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect of the timer side timer effect (count effect display), the non-target notice E2 (the first effect) before the count display is exhausted. It will be possible to have an interest in whether or not a single production) will appear, thereby maintaining the game entertainment in the period until the count display is digested and a predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed. Will be expected to

  In addition, when the count display is started with a small number of counts with a notice side timer effect, the big hit expectation is set to be lower than when the count display is started with a large number of counts with a notice side timer effect, By realizing such control related to the special timer, even if the count display is started with a small total number of counts with a notice timer effect, the non-target notice E2 is being executed while the count display is being executed. Can be made to be aware of the possibility of appearance of the game, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the premier mode in which the jackpot is confirmed with the effects (conversation notice, cut-in, actor action, etc.) that are the targets of the subsequent timer effects. It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of. The percentage may include 100%.

  In this embodiment, non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and non-target notices E2 (first effect) are conditions that non-target notices E1 have appeared. It is supposed to appear in In addition, the non-target notice E3 is allowed to appear on the condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 appear respectively, and in this embodiment, the jackpot symbol appears whenever the non-target notice E3 appears. I am doing so. According to such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the advance notice timer effect is performed, the user is interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. , And it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment during the count digestion period.

  However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as so-called step effects, and are not necessary for realizing the above-described effect relationship between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. The target notices E1 and E3 may not necessarily be prepared. Further, the order of appearance of the non-target notice F after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is not limited to this. The target notice E2 (first effect) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may appear first among all the notice effects, or may appear last among all the notice effects. May be set appropriately. In addition, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related (suggested) to the type of reach effect to be executed in the variable display.

  Moreover, when not realizing non-target notice E2 as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 be performed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of jackpot expectation. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in a mode with the highest expected degree of jackpot, even if the count display is not performed, the big hit expectation degree may be higher than that of the non-target notice F. . However, when comparing the jackpot expectation degree (expected degree including all aspects) expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is not performed with the jackpot expectation degree expected when the non-target notice F appears, It is required that the big hit expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

  In this respect, when the non-target notice E2 is made to appear in the situation where the count display is performed (in the case of a special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in any of a plurality of modes including a mode having a low hit probability. It is desirable to make the jackpot expectation higher than the non-target notice F even if any of the modes appears. That is, in this case, although a non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode with a low level of jackpot expectation, a presentation situation in which the level of jackpot expectation becomes dramatically higher comes to be created. Even if it appears disappointing for a moment, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved in a surprise manner by confirming that the count display is executed. In this sense, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in such a manner that the non-target notice E2 can be executed in the low-hit expectation mode even in the situation of such special timer, and the non-target notice E2 in any mode including the low aspect. It is desirable that the expected degree of appearance of the jackpot symbol be the same even if the above is executed (further, whether or not another notice effect is generated). The expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 is caused to appear in the situation where the count display is performed, it is desirable to set so that a highly expected aspect among the plurality of aspects is likely to appear.

  Also, when performing count display across non-target notice E2, for example, the same number (for example, for example, regardless of whether the count display starts with different count total numbers (for example, "10", "5") It is desirable to control so that non-target notice E2 appears when it becomes "1". At this time, of the candidates (eg, “20”, “10”, “5”) as the total count appearing at the start of the count display, less than half of the candidates (eg, “5”) having the smallest total count. It is desirable to control the non-target notice E2 to appear when it is a number (a number less than 2.5). As described above, by making the non-target notice E2 not appear until the last moment the count display finishes being digested, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment in the period until the count display finishes being digested.

  Note that non-target notices F may also be made executable in any of a plurality of modes having different levels of big hit expectation, but in the special timer situation, the non-target notices F have the highest degree of big hit expectation. Even if it appears in the embodiment, it is required to set the non-targeted preview F so as not to have a higher jackpot expectation than the non-targeted preview E2 (for example, the embodiment with the least big-hit expectation).

  Further, the non-target notice E2 may be allowed to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the time when the variable display is started. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears at the same count total number at the same timing, the non-target notice E2 comes to cross and the non-target show comes to occur, and the game display when the count display is executed It will be expected to be maintained.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the variable timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears in the count display execution period among the candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern). Such a mode is not included.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, if it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the mode of the advance announcement side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 If it is determined that the first timer non-targeted advance notice lottery as the process of and that the mode of the advance notice timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) is not the one that can be a special timer, the process of step S5525 The second timer non-target notice lottery will be performed.

  The case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer is, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, an effect mode (for example, FIG. 161, conversation announcements 2, 3, hold changes 2-4, cut-in A1, 2, and accessory actions 1, 2, etc.) are selected, and whether or not the production mode can be a special timer. Or is classified in advance.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b.

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the timer non-target notice lottery (steps S5512, S5525) can not be the target of the notice timer effect based on the result of the big hit, the variation pattern (variation number), etc. A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F prepared as effects is to be executed.

  Among them, in the table T7a (first timer non-targeted notice lottery) referred to at the special timer, the notice E2 is compared with the table T7b (second timer non-targeted notice lottery) referred to when not the special timer. The big hit expectation degree when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) to perform is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is higher than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected. ing.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) that is referred to when the timer is not a special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected. The big hit expectation is lower than when the aspect (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  In this embodiment, when the table T7a that is referred to at the time of the special timer is compared with the table T7b that is referred to when the timer is not the special timer, the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the production random numbers, and there is a change in the jackpot expectation level. However, when the notice F is executed (PTN5, 6), there is no change in the big hit expectation level, and even the production random number distribution changes. It is not the same.

  According to the effect by such a special timer, when performing count display in a mode (a mode of a special timer) straddling non-target notice E2, a mode straddling non-target notice F without straddling non-target notice E2 ( Compared to the case where the count display is executed in a mode that is not a special timer), the percentage of appearance of a high-representation performance aspect when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the appearance of a big hit design when symbol appearance is stopped The proportion will be increased.

  Furthermore, when both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in one symbol effect in which the count effect is not executed, the one symbol in which the count effect is not executed. In the production, the non-target notice F (second production) is not executed, and the ratio of appearance of the jackpot symbol is higher than when the non-target notice E2 (first production) is executed. Even if the (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed within one symbol effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode across the non-target notice E2 (first effect). Is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed within one symbol effect and straddle the non-target notice F (second effect). Count production in two ways So the proportion of big hit symbol appears is higher than when it is the row.

  That is, in this case, even if "non-target notice E2 (first effect)" and "count effect" are respectively symbol effects, the count effect is "non-target notice E2 (first effect)". "Not targeted notice F (second directed)," which is executed to indicate that the expectation level has been raised further, not crossing "not directed notice E2 (first directed)" Depending on whether or not "non-target notice F (second effect)" is performed in one of the symbol effects depending on whether or not "non-target notice F (second effect)" is not performed in one of the symbol effects Will be higher. Therefore, the effects (counting notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, cut-in, etc.) different from the target items of the count effect (non-target notice E2 (first effect) and non-target notice F (second effect) Even if it is not set as B, role-of-goods B movement, etc., and it is non-target notice E2 (the first production) and non-target notice F (the second production) which are not related originally, "count production is finished Even if the non-target notice E2 (the first effect) appears in the interval between the two, or “the non-target notice E2 (the first effect) appears after the count effect is finished, the non-target notice F (the first It becomes possible to be interested in whether or not 2) effects are further executed, etc., and thereby the count display is digested and a game is performed until a predetermined effect (timer object candidate effect) is performed. To maintain It will be waiting.

  In this embodiment, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) which is not executed as the effect of the counting effect is not executed as the effect of the counting effect when the counting effect straddles the first effect. The relationship in which the expectation for these expectations is crossed when the count production crosses the non-target notice F (second production), the production is reversed from the relationship for those expectations when the count production does not cross. Although non-target notice E2 (first effect) and non-target notice F (second effect) may be exemplified as the target of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the counting effect is executed, the effect of whether the counting effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect). Will also be added.

  In addition, either the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect) can be executed as a count effect effect object, and the other is executed as a count effect effect object. It may not be the case.

  Further, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is advantageous to the player as well as the expectation of big hit is higher than when the count effect is straddled the notice F (second effect). It may be configured such that the rate of transition to a different gaming state (such as a high probability short-time gaming state) is increased. At this time, the rate of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (such as a high probability short-time gaming state) may be 100%.

  Further, as described above, the counting effect is performed in any of a plurality of modes (total number of counting numbers, display mode, timing to start counting, etc.). In this regard, the count effect of the specific mode is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not the notice F (second effect), and to straddle the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to be performed so that there is at least a case where it is performed so as to cross the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even when the count effect of the same number of seconds is started, either the case of straddling only the notice E2 (first effect) or the case of straddling only the notice F (second effect) Since it becomes possible to advance the count effect while it is unknown whether it is, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the period in which the count effect is being executed.

  Still further, the count effect of the specific mode is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not the notice F (second effect), and to straddle the notice E2 (first effect). In addition to being executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect), it may be executed so that neither the notice E2 (first effect) nor the notice F (second effect) straddles. It is desirable to have it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) appear over the entire period from when the count effect is started to when it is ended. become able to. In this case, the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the count effect of the specific mode is executed, but within the same symbol variation. May not appear in

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the ratio that the big hit symbol appears is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). So configured. However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that there is no change in the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, regardless of which aspect the count effect is executed. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a completely independent performance that is not affected by the performance such as “which aspect appears as a count effect”, and the count effect is executed. It will be possible to suitably enhance the stage performance.

  On the other hand, when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), it is possible to cause a change in the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears according to which aspect the count effect is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, the aspect as the count effect is expected to be a big hit, depending on whether the target of the count effect is the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect). Since it is possible to vary the performance of the influence, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained during the period in which the count effect is being performed.

  However, even if the counting effect across the notice F (second effect) is the mode with the highest degree of expectation among the plurality of modes, the expectation when the counting effect crosses the notice E2 (first effect) exceeds For example, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, among the count effects of a plurality of modes, at least some of the count effects are configured so that they may straddle the notice F2 (second effect) but not the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to do. In this way, the number of modes as count effects that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of aspects as count effects that can straddle the notice F (second effect). By doing this, it is possible to suggest the possibility of straddling the notice F (second effect) depending on which aspect the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more plural aspects as the aspect of the counting effect that can cross the notice E2 (first effect).

  The notice F (second effect) is executed prior to the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is issued after the notice F (second effect) is completed. As described above, it may be performed. At this time, when the count effect straddling this appears when the notice F (second effect) is executed, compared to when the notice effect F (second effect) is executed but the count effect straddling this is not shown, It is desirable that the rate at which the count effect appears across the advance notice E2 (first effect) is high. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, even if this is ended over the notice F (second effect) instead of the notice E2 (first effect), the notice E2 (first effect) is displayed. It becomes possible to expect that the count effect that straddles further appears, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes an effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination. In this respect, it is preferable that the notice E2 (first effect) and the counting effect across the same be able to appear respectively even if the effect pattern does not appear the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, even if the notice F (the second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the appearance of the count effect across the notice E2 (the first effect). It becomes like this. However, when the notice F (second effect) does not appear, the notice F (second effect) is executed, but the notice E2 (first effect) is performed compared to when the count effect straddling this is not appeared. It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the counting effects across the screen appear.

  In addition, a plurality of modes are provided as modes of count effects (total number of counts, display modes, timings at which counting is started, etc.) that are possible to straddle the notice F (second effect). As described above, even when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, the notice F (second effect) is not necessarily executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears within the period in which the count effect is executed is also determined. Interestingness can be provided, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained while the count effect is being performed.

  In addition, it is also possible to prepare a plurality of modes of count effects (total number of count, display mode, timing when count starts, etc.) that can be made to cross the notice E2 (first effect). As described above, when the count effect is performed in any of the plurality of modes, it is preferable that the notice E2 (first effect) is always performed within the period in which the count effect is being performed. . According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired mode, it is suggested that the expectation degree is greatly enhanced over the notice E2 (first effect) when the count effect is performed. Thus, it becomes possible to preferably improve the game entertainment while the counting effect is being performed.

  When it is determined in this way that the timer non-target notice lottery (the first timer non-target notice lottery, the second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed and which one of the non-target notices is to be executed, step S5513 is performed next. It is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the above-mentioned special timer as the process of (1).

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in a situation where a specific type of reach effect (character reach) is selected, the notice timer is based on the result of the big hit determination (winning or fluctuation pattern, etc.). It is possible to execute control to start the effect (count effect display) and continue the count display even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). That is, in this case, since the count display is continued even after the effect pattern (effect display) according to the result of the big hit determination is finished and not displayed, the special symbol from the remaining time of the count display, etc. It becomes difficult to predict the fluctuation time (type of reach) of the symbol, and for example, the effect that the count display started during the symbol change is involved in the effect in the big hit gaming state after the symbol stop is realized It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to make the production development after that interesting.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, a big hit game start interval period or a big hit game after the symbol is fixedly stopped) Period), the number of rounds (16 rounds) that have a large expected value of the amount that can be obtained as a prize when appearing, or the first special effect in which the ratio of winning the type to shift to the high-probability short-time gaming state increases. It is possible to execute a second special effect in which the ratio to be executed is high. Note that these ratios may include 100%. Then, the timer-side notice effect on the notice side for the effect that is started after the appearance of such a jackpot symbol (special display mode) starts before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears and counts it. The control is continuously performed even after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears.

  That is, in this case, the count display of the notice side timer effect started before the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is not terminated when the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, but the jackpot symbol (special display mode) When the specific numerical value (0 in this case) is reached after continuously being executed even after appears, the first special effect or the second special effect appears. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, not only does it definitely suggest that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) will appear in the performance pattern, but when it appears, a high-probability short-time gaming state or a 16-round jackpot game Since the rate at which is executed is relatively high, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, not only that the big hit has been won by the big hit determination, but also the type that causes the big hit to generate a short game state at high probability, 16 round big hit games Control to cause the special timer to appear with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that the specific type is not the specific type. Desired.

  Therefore, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the process of step S5513, next execution of whether or not the special timer is made to appear as the process of step S5514 It is decided to determine the execution mode of the special timer, including the presence or absence.

  For example, in the process of step S5514, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a specific type (a type for generating a high probability time short game state or a type for generating a 16 round big hit game). As a result, when the big hit is not a specific type, it is decided that the special timer is not made to appear with a predetermined probability, and the probability that the big hit is a specific type is raised when the special timer appears by the amount thinned out. Will be able to The expectation may be 100%. In addition, when it is determined that the special timer is not made to appear, other notice effects (timer object candidate effect effects, non-target notices) or the notice side timer effect may be made to appear instead of the special timer.

  In this embodiment, the type of the big hit is determined in the processing of step S5514 after the decision to execute the special timer in the timer target advance notice lottery has been made once, and the special timer is executed based on the result. Whether or not to decide again, but it is decided to execute a special timer in the process of step S5514 by performing a timer target advance notice lottery based on the type of the big hit as well as the hit of the big hit It may not be determined again whether or not.

  In addition, for the first special effect or the second special effect of the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period and the big hit game period of the big hit game after the symbol is decided and stopped), the big hit is It may be performed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, which are special types. That is, in this case, when the special timer appears, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a high expectation mode among a plurality of modes. It will be.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the effects (first special effect or second special effect) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time has elapsed after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is made to appear at the timing when 20 seconds have passed, but a plurality of timings after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the first after 15 seconds have passed) You may make it appear at a timing and the 2nd timing 30 seconds passed. That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode that reaches a specific numerical value (0 in this case) when 15 seconds elapse (or shortly before) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol When 30 seconds have passed since the (special display mode) appears (or just before that), either the second mode that reaches a specific numerical value (0 in this case) is selected and made to appear.

  In this case, it is set so that the ratio at which the big hit of the special type is obtained is higher when the effect appears at the second timing than when the effect appears at the first timing, and the big hit is a specific type. Sometimes, if the special timer is executed so as to be higher in the second mode than in the first mode, the count display after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears is continued until It becomes possible to have an additional interest. Note that these ratios may include 100%. By the way, when the rendition does not appear at any of the first timing and the second timing, the ratio at which the big hit of the special type is obtained is set lower than when the rendition appears at the first timing. .

  In addition, for the special timer, in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, it is displayed as "timer in preparation" and displayed as "timer in preparation" The count display may be started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears as it is. That is, during the big hit game, since the time required for the digestion of each round game varies according to the game progress, the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears When the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and to set to start the effect to be the effect target. In this respect, if the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of "timer preparing" is maintained until a specific round game in the jackpot game is started. Then, by starting the count display in accordance with the start of the specific round game, it is possible that the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game and the effect to be rendered is executed It becomes possible to set to. At this time, after the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) until the count display is started, display such as "during timer preparation" may not be performed at all.

  In addition, when counting display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in this way, it is different even during the execution period of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears The count display of the advance notice side timer effect may be started. As for the other advance notice side timer effect, the counter display may finish being digested before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and the effect to be the effect target may appear, or the big hit symbol ( It may be one (double special timer) in which an effect to be produced appears after the count display is exhausted after the special display mode) appears.

  It should be noted that different effect contents appear between the effect in the variable display and the effect in the big hit game, and usually the effect (for example, the opening effect etc.) at the time of effect switching different from any effect is executed between them It is often done. In this point, within the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, the timer display is set such that the count display does not reach a predetermined value, and the count display is not displayed within the switching period. It is desirable for the player to recognize that the two effects (here, the effect in the variable display and the effect in the big hit game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is digested for the elapsed time, and when the count display is displayed again, the count display is hidden. It is desirable to control so as to be a value smaller than the numerical value of (it is not a countdown, but a large value when counting up).

  Then, whether the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514), or if the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the timer target notice lottery or count is performed as the processing of step S5515. After the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. Thereby, drawing data corresponding to the effect determined in the notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect in the effect symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case where it is determined that the timer side timer effect is not won (NO in step S5503), various lotteries (notice side of the notice side timer effect) are performed. A timer target candidate effect (notice) with a content (table) according to whether a decision to perform a mission effect is made as a result of the second mission effect lottery without performing a timer type lottery or a single lottery (step S5552). An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564) is performed for the advance notice effect that can be the effect target of the side timer effect.

More specifically, one of the following processes will be performed.
In the fifth processing state where it is determined that the advance effect timer effect is not performed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display the conversation advance notification) is determined (YES in step S5552) First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when the processing state is the fifth, the number of timer target candidate effects during the execution of one effect pattern is set as the effect contents of the notice effect. A determination process is performed as to whether or not to appear (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of preview effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

In the sixth processing state where it is determined that the advance presentation side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display the conversation advance notification) is not executed (NO in step S5552) First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the sixth processing situation, during the execution of one effect pattern, the number of the timer target candidate effects described above is used as the effect contents of the advance effect. A process for determining whether or not to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of preview effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (display conversation announcement) is executed. The upper limit number of occurrences (average number of occurrences) of timer target candidate effects is increased when the effect is determined, as compared with the case where it is not determined to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement). I try to control it.

  FIG. 165 shows the fifth processing state in which determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553 when it exists in. Further, FIG. 166 shows that the sixth effect is that determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563 when it exists in a process condition.

  First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, there is a lost change pattern (a mission success can not be made to cause a conversation notice to appear as an effect content of the change effect When the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to the change pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, since the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, there is a lost change pattern (a mission success can be made to cause a conversation notice to appear as an effect content of the change effect The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to (non-variation patterns) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 9, 13, 17 and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice timer presentation is not executed, and in these process situations, the notice timer presentation is produced. It is not essential to select one of the timer target candidate effects that can be a target. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (the number of notices is 0).

  In addition, among the contents of the same reach production (character reach and SP reach) in the table T5e and the table T5f, the variation number where the timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the production content of the fluctuation production varies. There is a higher percentage of timer candidate candidate effects being selected compared to variable numbers that do not show timer candidate candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in A) as the effects of the effect, In the variation number 7 that is the reach, only up to three timer object candidate effects can appear, and in the variation number 15 that is the SP reach at the time of loss, only up to five timer object candidate effects can appear. The points that are not included are the same as the above-described table T5a and the like.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the contents of the effect of the notice effect when in the fifth and sixth processing situations where the notice timer effect is not executed in this way. After the determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) has been performed, the determination process (steps S5554 and S5564) regarding which type of notice effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the determined number is performed. . However, when it is determined that no timer target candidate effect is caused to appear as a result of the notice number determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) (notice number 0), in the timer object notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564), Regardless of the change number, one processing result in which none of the timer target candidate effects are selected is selected.

  FIG. 167 shows the fifth processing state in which determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5552). FIG. 16 shows an example of a table T6e-1 that is referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 (step S5554). In FIG. 168, the fifth effect is that determination to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5552) is made without executing the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503). It is a figure showing an example of table T6e-2 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing processing of Step S5553 in processing status (Step S5554).

  Further, FIG. 169 shows that the sixth effect is that determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6f-1 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 1 as a result of performing processing of Step S5563 in a processing situation (Step S5564). Further, FIG. 170 shows that the sixth effect is that determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6f-2 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing processing of Step S5563 in a processing situation (Step S5564).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f, which are referred to when in the fifth and sixth processing states, are determined not to execute the notice-side timer effect. Since it is referred to, none of the N advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are set as the show objects of the advance notice timer effect, and all of them are normal. It will be carried out as an aspect of advance production (in the figure, it has shown that x mark is performed as an aspect of usual advance production).

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f, which are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states, the same effects are produced by the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect. Since it does not target, when the fluctuation number 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern which makes the conversation announcement appear as the production contents of fluctuation production, execution is executed A presentation random number is assigned to each of the variable numbers so that the conversation announcement is not selected as the advance announcement to be made. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, variation numbers 11 to 14 and 19 to corresponding to the lost variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) for causing the cut-ins A and B to appear as the rendering content of the variation presentation When 22 is acquired, effect random numbers are allocated separately for each change number so that cut-ins A and B are not selected as the advance effect to be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to when the fifth and sixth processing states are present are referred to when the notice timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the announcement (here, a special timer) based on the premise that the announcement timer production is performed is not included in the announcement production to be selected.

  In addition, in the table T6e referred to when in the fifth processing state, since it is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement), FIG. As shown in addition, when the change numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the contents of the change effect, or as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect), "conversation notice" When “is selected (PTN1), the special display (mission success) is displayed, and the point that it is definitely suggested that the jackpot symbol appears is the same as the case of the above-mentioned table 6a.

  In addition, since the table T6f referred to when in the sixth processing situation is referred to when the mission effect (display the conversation advance notice) is not executed, the conversation advance notice appears as the effect content of the change effect The above-mentioned table 6a is that the presentation random numbers are allocated separately for each notice number for the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful). Is the same as in

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even when it is decided not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect in the process of step S5503, after the timer target announcement lottery (steps S5554, S5564) is performed in this way, Regarding which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F provided as the effects that can not be the effects of the advance notice timer effect based on the hit result of the big hit, the change pattern (change number), etc. A determination process (third timer non-target notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

  Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, the table is basically the same as the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer. When the mode of executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is lower than when the mode of executing notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  Then, after the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) or the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5554) is performed next as the processing of step S5515. After the notice effect determined in step S5555) is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. As a result, drawing data and the like corresponding to the effects determined in the preliminary lottery are created, and control is performed to start at the timing when each effect should be made to appear in the process of changing the effect symbols.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that no advance notice timer effect is to be executed, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-targeted advance notice lottery are processed separately. I decided to do it. However, if it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect in the process of step S5503, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the notice timer effect. The timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

  In addition, the above-described special timer mode (non-target notice E2 is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed. In the situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is performed, the relationship with the notice side timer effect is also adopted in the case of not adopting the big hit expectation degree compared to the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F, the timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the notice timer effect, the determination process as to which effect is to be executed as the notice effect is performed. After determining in what manner to execute the rendition of the rendition, the presence or absence and execution mode of the advance notice timer rendition may be determined.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a winning (opening of the game ball) to the starting opening 2002, 2004 occurs, whether pre-reading effect is to be performed for the suspension information according to the winning A determination process as to whether or not it is performed (steps S5245 and S5255). In this point, in this determination processing, the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the suspension display to be the target of the pre-reading effect is changed based on the information on the hit or fluctuation pattern of the big hit determination included in the suspension information. Lottery about the change effect (execution of existence, lottery about the display mode), lottery about the look-ahead zone effect across multiple changes (execution of execution, lottery about the execution mode (color, number of continuous execution, etc.) etc. In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable display according to the hold information is to be the target of the "timer prefetch effect".

  Here, the timer pre-reading effect is an effect in which when the change display that has been put on hold (the change display of the effect target) is being executed, the proportion of the notice-side timer effect that appears within the change time increases. For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, “Preparing a timer”) is displayed at the start timing of the variable symbol display that starts after the winning timing (the timing when the timer pre-reading effect is won). Etc.) is displayed. Note that the reason why the predetermined image (for example, “Preparing the timer”, etc.) does not appear at the winning timing (timing won for the timer prefetching effect) This is to make it difficult to recognize.

  According to such a timer pre-reading effect, it is suggested that the occurrence ratio of the notice-side timer effect is high over a plurality of variable displays while it is unspecified which one of the hold displays corresponds to. Since it becomes possible, it will be expected to maintain the game interest over multiple variable displays. However, it is a type of continuous presentation (or continuation) over a plurality of variable displays, without specifying which hold display is included, including such timer pre-read effects among advance effects (prefetch effects). When performing the production (preceding period rendering), if the same type of rendering (preceding period rendering) and its execution period may overlap, the rendering becomes too complicated and what was targeted and purpose There is a concern that it will not be possible to understand whether it is a production, and the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (pre-reading determination at the time of winning a prize), the preceding period effect corresponding to other previously held information that has been won is not being executed and waiting for execution. Make a decision about whether it is not And the preceding period effect such as the timer pre-reading effect is newly provided at least on the condition that the preceding period effect according to the other on-hold information previously won is not executed and is not in a waiting state. It is possible to make a decision to generate the error. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the two preceding period effects are overlapped, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  As the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer pre-reading effect, a continuous continuous pre-reading effect that causes at least a part of a stop symbol to appear in the same manner (color of numbers, etc.) over multiple variations, or a background image over multiple variations It is possible to employ a pre-read zone effect that changes the character to a special mode. Then, in the above process (preliminary judgment at the time of winning), among these preceding period effects, not only that the same type of preceding period effects do not overlap and appear, but also the execution period of these different type of preceding period effects Will be controlled so that they do not overlap. Among the pre-reading effects, for the type of effects (for example, a hold change effect, etc.) that are performed over a plurality of variable displays by identifying which hold display is supported, the execution status of these preceding period effects It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of whether or not it is possible to appear, but if a new prize occurs when the preceding period production is being executed or is waiting to be executed, a new prize will occur when it is not in that situation It is desirable to perform the pre-reading determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the effect of the type (for example, the hold change effect) is reduced as a pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning compared to the case where the winning is performed.

  In this way, while a preceding period effect such as timer pre-reading effect (a type of effect that makes it continuous (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is specified) is being performed The game is caused by the interference between the two preceding period effects by performing the prohibition control to prevent this from occurring for the preceding period effects corresponding to the newly generated game ball winning. Deterioration of interest can be suppressed. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency with which the preceding period effect is performed as the preceding effect is reduced by the amount that the preceding period effect is subjected to the prohibition control, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Ru.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when performing the leading period effect corresponding to the hold information while the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information is not yet started, first, a specific effect Set information that indicates that you are in a restricted situation. And, when the hold information is newly stored when the information is set by the hold information stored in advance, at least the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information stored in the previously is ended. While the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed until then, the newly stored is performed after the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is ended. Control is performed so as to be able to execute the preceding period presentation corresponding to the hold information.

  That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is not allowed at the time when the hold information is newly stored, the game is then advanced and stored first. In a gaming situation in which there is no concern that production interference with the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information has occurred, the execution of the preceding period effect is permitted once it has been determined that the execution is not allowed. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed while performing the prohibition control on the preceding period effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest.

  More specifically, in the first special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new winning is generated, first, the first special hold described above Based on the counter value by the number counter or the second special reservation number counter, it is determined what is the holding order (digestion order) of the new winning. For example, in the case of the first special view prefetching process, first, the hold information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol hold storage area a to the first special symbol hold storage area d. Determine if it is in state. Then, after the new winning combination is stored and the variable display is in the execution state, and the hold information in which the variable display is in the non-execution state. Determine if there is something that is As a result, even if there is specific hold information for which the preceding period effect is to be executed, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is not completely prohibited, but the above identification In the period after the variable display according to the hold information is completed, control is performed such that execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is permitted.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed gaming situation as an example.
FIG. 171 (a) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and three hold information (all are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not yet executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred in a 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the state which is being held. FIG. 171 (b) shows the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and the two pieces of hold information (both in the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the memorize | stored state.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, the pending information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is in execution and the three pending information in the state where the variable display is not executed (any one Depending on which of the first special symbol) is the target of the preceding period effect, or none of them is the target of the previous period effect, a new winning (first special symbol) It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding hold information can be the target of the preceding period effect (the number of prefetchable fluctuations).

  For example, in the table T7a, all of the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and the three pieces of hold information in which the variable display is not executed (all are the first special symbol). Is not the subject of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1 (first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (first special symbol hold storage) A variable display according to the second hold information stored in the area b), a variable display according to the hold 3 (the third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b), and The new winnings were targeted over four variable display periods with the variable display corresponding to the holding 4 corresponding to the new winning (fourth holding information stored in the first special symbol holding storage area d). It is possible to carry out the production for the preceding period There is determined (determination that prefetching variability number is 4). That is, in this case, the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is performed at the timing after the variable display corresponding to the running state is finished and the variable display corresponding to the first hold information is started. It is acceptable to execute the leading period effect for the target.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the pending information in the state in which the variable display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 2 and the variable display according to the hold 3 It is determined that the leading period effect for the new winning can be performed over the three variable display periods with the variable display according to the pending 4 according to the final winning (indicating that the look-ahead variable possible number is 3 Determination). That is, in this case, the timing after the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is further ended, and the variable display according to the second hold information is started Thus, the execution of the leading period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is permitted.

  Here, even when the suspension information in which the variable display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1, the variable display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 Over the four variable display periods of the variable display according to the new prize and the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize, it is determined that the leading period effect for the new prize can be executed ( It may be determined that the number of prefetch fluctuations is 4). However, in this case, the preceding period effect appearing in the variable display in the state of execution and the new leading period effect started in the variable display according to the hold 1 are continuously executed, Whether the leading period effect is the same effect (is the previous leading period effect continued) or is another preceding period effect newly started (is the previous preceding period effect terminated)? A method to set it as a prohibited period so that the preceding period effect is not newly generated in the first variable display after the preceding period effect is finished. It is more desirable to adopt Such a method is employed not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (in addition to the table T7b, a table not shown).

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period effect, two change displays of the change display according to the hold 3 and the change display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning. Over the period, it is determined that the leading period effect for the new winning combination can be performed (determination that the number of prefetchable variable is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display in the state of execution is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, and the variable display according to the second hold information is further ended, and the third At the timing after the variable display according to the hold information is started, the execution of the leading period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is permitted.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, the preceding period for the new winning is only the variable display period corresponding to the holding 4 corresponding to the new winning. It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the number of prefetch fluctuations is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, the variable display according to the second hold information is ended, and the third hold information is displayed. The preceding period for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning at a timing after the variable display according to the game is further ended and the variable display according to the fourth hold information is started. The execution of the production is allowed.

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is the target of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning is not executable (the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 0). Judged). That is, in this case, the execution of the leading period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is not permitted.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether or not it is the target of the preceding period effect, and the number of prefetchable fluctuations obtained as a determination result is smaller than that in the table T7a. Although basically the same as the table T7a, the explanation will be omitted. In addition, tables similar to these are also prepared at the time of Hold 2 prize and Hold 1 prize, but the explanation will be omitted.

  Incidentally, it may be assumed that there are two pieces of hold information that are the targets of the preceding period production at the time of winning the hold 4, etc., but in this case, either To determine the number of prefetchable fluctuations. For example, at the time of winning the hold 4, if the variable hold and the hold 2 are the targets of different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 on the later side of the holding order is the target of the preceding period effect. “The number of prefetchable fluctuations = 1” is determined.

  Further, as described above, the control related to the prohibition period of the preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. It is made for the purpose of setting the prohibition period of the type of effect based on the execution situation. Therefore, the prohibited period of the leading period effect does not occur depending on the execution status of the type of effect (hold change effect) or the like that specifies which the pending display corresponds to, and the execution status of the preceding period effect (pre-reading Even if the number of possible fluctuations = 0, the type of effect (hold change effect) that identifies which hold display is supported is not prohibited.

  Moreover, even if it is in the prohibition period of the preceding period effect, among the timer prefetching effects, for the timer prefetching effect performed in the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode, which will be described later, the notice side timer effect appears. You may make it appear because certainty is not calculated | required.

  If the hold information on the second special symbol side is included in the hold information in which the variable display is not executed as the prohibition control of the preceding period effect, the hold information on the second special symbol side is preceded. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, control is performed so that a new preceding period effect is not started until the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended. Good. At this time, it is not necessary to set the next variable display period after the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the second special symbol side as the prohibition period, and a new preceding period from the time when the next variable display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

  In addition, in the process of confirming the status of the pre-reading effect set for the hold in this way and determining the pre-read variable number according to the result, a new winning occurs or whenever a hold is taken. It is desirable to do it every time.

  Then, in the first special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the prefetchable fluctuation number is determined in this way, the determined period (prefetching is possible A determination process is performed as to what type of preceding period effect is to be performed (including the presence or absence of the execution) in accordance with the number of changes.

  For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the hold information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, as the type of advance period effect, there are a plurality of pre-read zone effects for displaying related background images across a plurality of changes, and a plurality of specific advance indications that indicate that the advance notice timer effect is likely to be executed. It is possible to prepare a timer pre-reading effect or the like displayed across the variation as a selection candidate. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, a determination process as to how the preceding period effect of the determined type is executed is performed.

  FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 which are referred to when deciding the execution mode of the timer prefetching effect in the situation where the prefetchable variable number is four. It is. 173 (a) and 173 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect is determined in a situation where the prefetch variable number is three. It is.

  As described above, the timer pre-reading effect is an effect that, when appearing, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears is high when the hold information that is the target of prefetching is digested. In the control MPU 1511a, the timer prefetching effect is executed in a first leading mode, a second leading mode, a third leading mode, or the like in which the appearance ratio of the advance notice side timer effect is different.

  Here, the first preceding mode is, for example, one in which a first mode such as “timer premonition” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode. The probability that the advance notice timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

  In addition, the second preceding mode is, for example, a second mode such as “timer occurrence chance” displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer pre-reading effect is executed in the second preceding mode, a notice side is displayed. The probability that the timer effect is executed is set to about 80% (step S5502).

  In addition, the third preceding aspect is, for example, a third aspect such as “timer being prepared” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer pre-reading effect is executed in the third preceding aspect, the notice timer The performance is always executed (even if it is not 100%, it may have a higher probability than the second preceding mode) (step S5502).

  Then, based on the information related to the big hit for prefetch determination, the information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc., it is determined in which execution mode the timer prefetch effect is executed. For example, in a situation where the number of prefetch fluctuations is 4, with reference to tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), prefetching corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 is performed. In the situation where either one of the modes is selected based on the information and the production random number assigned to the information and the prefetch variable number is 3, tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. 2, one of the modes is selected on the basis of the prefetch information corresponding to the variable numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random numbers assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, the variability display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started in the state where the first preceding mode finally appears. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
The timer pre-reading effect does not appear in any manner when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2 and is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the variable information display of the hold information is in the hold 1 state. When the state is 3, the timer prefetching effect does not appear in any manner, and the timer prefetching effect is the first preceding when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. A mode in which it is displayed in a mode (foreseeing the occurrence of a timer) and continues this even in the state of the hold 1-of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect Hold this timer prefetch effect when dynamic display is in the state of the hold 3 and displayed in the first prior embodiment (feeling of timer generator) 2, aspects to be continued in a state of hold 1

In the table T8a-1, the following six modes can be used as modes for starting the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect in the state where the second preceding mode appears in the end. It is prepared.
The timer pre-reading effect does not appear in any manner when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2 and is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the variable information on-hold information is in the hold 1 state. In this state, the timer prefetching effect is not caused to appear in any manner, and the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the second preceding mode when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. A mode in which it is displayed as (Timer occurrence chance) and this is continued even in the state of Hold 1-Hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch presentation effect A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the fluctuation display is in the hold 3 state and this is continued even in the hold 2 and hold 1 states. When the change display of the hold information in the state is in the hold 3 state, the timer prefetch effect is not caused to appear in any manner, and the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 2 state The timer pre-reading effect is displayed when the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (predicting the occurrence of the timer) and the variation display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 1 state. Changing the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) to the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) and displaying it as the target of the timer prefetching effect The timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the change display of the hold information being held is in the hold 3 state, and this is continued even in the hold 2 state. When the change display of the hold information that is the target of the production is in the hold 1 state, the timer pre-reading production is changed from the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance). Mode to be displayed ・ When the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the state of the hold 3, the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of occurrence of timer) and the timer prefetching effect The timer prefetching effect is displayed from the first leading mode (prediction of timer occurrence) to the second preceding mode (timer generation C Change and display it and continue it in the state of Hold 1

  Note that the timer pre-reading effects of the first and second preceding modes are displayed in the hold 1 state and then continuously displayed after the hold information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the aspect may be further changed in the variable display started by digesting the holding information. Further, when the notice timer effect is started in the variable display, the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect may be hidden, but the notice timer effect is started. Even so, the display is continued even after the notice side timer effect is started, or after the notice side timer effect is started. If it is made non-display at a predetermined timing after that, it becomes possible to impart an interest. Note that if the timer-predictive timer effect is not executed even though the timer pre-reading effect is executed in either the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect, the non-notification is made when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. It will be displayed. Further, it is more desirable that the timing of the non-display is the same as the timing of the non-display (such as the predetermined timing described above) when the notice side timer effect is executed.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first predecessor mode (predicting the occurrence of a timer) or the second predecessor mode regardless of the timer prefetching effect that increases the execution ratio of the notice timer effect when it appears. The timer pre-reading effect of (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are made to appear as different effects. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, in the state where the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed, the timer pre-reading effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode. This is not adopted for the display mode. In addition, in the situation where the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (during timer preparation) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) appears. Or, in the situation where the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (timer occurrence premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) appears. Can be generated.

  Therefore, in the situation where the number of prefetchable variable is 4, the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) with reference to the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) In addition to determining the execution mode relating to the timer pre-reading effect of, the execution mode relating to the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding aspect (during timer preparation) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect in the state where the third preceding aspect finally appears. As an aspect in which the variable display is started, only the following one aspect is prepared.
-When the change display of the hold information that is the subject of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 3 state, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (in preparation for the timer), and this is indicated as hold 2 and hold 1 Mode to continue even in the state

  However, also in the case of the third preceding aspect, it is not limited to the above one aspect, and similarly to the case of the first preceding aspect described above, when in the state of hold 3 or hold 2, neither timer prefetching effect appears From the above, it may be possible to select a mode for displaying the third preceding mode.

  According to such a configuration, the timer prefetching effect of the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) is executed, and the timer of the third leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) When the pre-reading effect is executed, both the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding mode (preliminary occurrence of timer) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are both Each case will be executed. Then, when both of the timer prefetching effect of the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third leading aspect (during timer preparation) are respectively executed, Being in a situation where it is definitely suggested that the advance timer side timer effect is executed, enjoy the effect such as whether it changes from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode, with a margin or a sense of security. Will be able to.

  Also, control may be performed so that the timer prefetching effect of the first leading mode, the timer prefetching effect of the second leading mode, and the timer prefetching effect of the third leading mode can simultaneously appear.

  In addition, it is desirable that the timer pre-reading effect in the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) is continuously displayed even after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) is not displayed when the notice side timer effect is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the third leading aspect of the timer pre-reading effect is adopted as the aspect for displaying “during timer preparation” in the effect display device 1600, but in the state of hold 1, for example You may make it employ | adopt as a mode which starts the count display toward the production | presentation (the production | presentation which appears in the unexecuted fluctuation display) made into the production | presentation object of timer production. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time in which the state of Hold 1 is continued (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in the state of fluctuation display when in the state of Hold 1) and Hold 1 are digested and the fluctuation display The count display is performed over the time obtained by adding up the time from the start to the start of the effect set as the presentation object of the advance notice timer effect, and the timer look-ahead effect (third leading mode) and the advance notice timer The effect is executed as one count display linked with two variable displays.

  In this respect, when the third leading aspect is realized as one count display linked to such an advance notice timer effect, the count display is not performed in the hold 3 and the hold 2 and the count display is performed when in the hold 1 state. It is desirable to perform. That is, when the count display is started when in the hold 3 or the hold 2, according to the number of hold when the state of the hold 1 is reached, "the effect that is the target of the effect of the advance notice timer effect ( It is possible to appropriately execute count display (count display until reaching a predetermined number) for the same effect by changing “the remaining time until start of the unexecuted variation display) is started”. This is because there is a concern of disappearance.

  The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are the same as the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b). Detailed description will be omitted because it has basically the same relationship with the table T8a-2.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment determines the hold change effect in the first special figure prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetch process (FIG. 136: step S5255). It also processes. The hold change effect means that the hold display is changed in any manner by changing the hold display mode corresponding to the hold information acquired in accordance with the prize to any of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode. Depending on whether it is displayed, the expectation of jackpot when the hold display is digested is suggested.

  More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, the white blink mode, the blue display mode, and the green display Can be displayed in any of the display mode, the display mode in red, and the display mode in rainbow color, and basically, the degree of expectation of the big hit when the hold display is performed in the mode of displaying by white blinking Is low, and the probability of big hit is gradually increased in the order of blue, green and red, and the probability of appearing a big hit symbol when it is reserved and digested is 100 if it is displayed on hold in the form of displaying in rainbow color % Is set to be a relationship. Although the jackpot expectation is naturally set for the mode of normal retention, the probability of big hit when the normal suspension is displayed is set to be lower than the mode for displaying in white blinking. Alternatively, it may be the same as or higher than the mode in which the white blink is displayed.

  Therefore, normally, for example, when an aspect in which white blinks or blue is displayed appears, the first effect situation having a lower jackpot expectation degree than when displaying in green or red is provided. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the control that can provide the second effect situation in which the big hit expectation is increased when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears instead of green or red under a predetermined condition. Can be executed.

  FIG. 174 shows a case where there is nothing that causes a jackpot symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the change display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the normal time retention change table T9a referred. In addition, FIG. 175 has a jackpot symbol that appears in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the change display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the special time pending change table T9b referred to when.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first special view prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) or the second special view when a new winning (the acceptance of the game ball) to the starting opening 2002, 2004 occurs. In the pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the suspension information stored prior to the new winning and in the state in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in the state in which the variable display is not executed (for example, 1 to Hold 3), it is determined whether there is one that causes a jackpot symbol to appear (one that has been determined to win the jackpot as a result of the jackpot determination or the prefetch determination). As a result, when it is determined that there is nothing to make the jackpot symbol appear, the normal time table T9a (white blink, blue, green, red, rainbow color) is set to have a relation of gradually increasing the jackpot expectation in the order of By executing the on-hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first effect situation in which the big hit expectation is lower than when displaying in red is displayed. To be provided.

  However, it is determined that there is one that causes a jackpot symbol to appear between the hold information that is stored prior to the new winning and the variable display is in a running state and the hold information that is not in a variable display. When this occurs (when a rare event occurs), the second change situation is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special time change table T9b (FIG. 175).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special-time hold change table T9b, first, red and rainbow colors related to the hold display mode are acquired as hold information corresponding to the new winnings. The production random numbers are distributed so that any of the “prefetch information” and “prefetch information regarding the variation pattern” indicates any of them.

  In addition, as for the green color relating to the hold display mode, even if the change pattern (change numbers 7 to 14) in which the production random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special time hold change is performed. In the table T9b, the production random numbers are distributed so as not to be selected. In this regard, when the pre-read information regarding the fluctuation pattern is equivalent to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time hold change table T9b. The distribution of effect random numbers is performed so that the probability of appearance of green is lower when winning a big hit as compared to the change table T9a and when it is lost.

  On the other hand, with regard to white flashing and blue regarding the aspect of the pending display, in the special time pending change table T9b, the appearance probability thereof is higher when winning as well as when winning as a big hit compared to the normal pending change table T9a The production random number is distributed. In addition, with regard to white blinking and blue regarding the mode of the suspension display, even the variation numbers 1 and 2 which are not selected in the normal suspension change table T9a, can be selected in the special period suspension change table T9b. In this way, the production random numbers are distributed.

  According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high degree of expectation in which a jackpot symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a timer timer effect for the actor B action appears in the SP reach variation pattern) is executed. If a new win occurs during the game (under certain conditions), if a green or red appearance appears as a hold display corresponding to the new win, a jackpot symbol will appear in the high-expected performance being executed. It is difficult to have expectations for the second stage, but when a white blinking or blue mode appears, it is relatively easy to have the expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in the high expectation stage during the execution. Will be able to provide.

  In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third leading aspect of the timer prefetching effect, the remaining time for which the state of hold 1 is continued (the state of variable display when in the state of hold 1) Over the combined time of the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in) and the time from when the hold 1 is digested and its fluctuation display is started to when the production set as the target object of the notice effect on the announcement side is started The count display of can be performed. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, the fluctuation display may end before the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the next fluctuation display may be started. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved in combination with the control using the special time hold change table T9b.

For example, suppose that the count display (or timer preparation in progress) of the notice side timer effect appears during the execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach) in the situation where the blinking white or the blue hold display appears as the hold 1 Thus, the second game progression can have a sense of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear rather than the first game progression described below.
-The notice timer timer effect is directed to the effect in the hold 1 for which only a low expectation level (blinking white or blue) is shown, and the hold is performed after the running variable display (for example, SP reach) is finished in a losing manner. The first game progress / notice side timer effect in which the variable display according to the hold information of 1 is started is not the effect in the hold 1 in which only the low expectation level (blinking white or blue) is shown, and the change being executed Second game progress in which the effect in the display (for example, SP reach) is the target of the effect

  In other words, the notice timer performance with a high expectation level (for example, a jackpot symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, but the notice timer effect with a low expectation (for example, appears). Even if there is a case where the effect in the hold 1 of white flashing or blue) in which the jackpot symbol does not appear with a probability of only a few percent, the possibility of the jackpot symbol appearing is greatly reduced. However, according to the above-mentioned second game progress, it is special because the chance increase by avoiding the occurrence of such a production situation and the fluctuation display during execution are big hits. Referring to the time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175), the chance display is increased due to the expectation that the hold display of hold 1 is in a flashing white state (high appearance probability) or blinking blue. The notice timer performance with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is that the effect of “the effect in the running fluctuation display during the run” is directed as if “the running fluctuation display is a big hit”. As the chances will increase with the double, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the third leading aspect of the timer pre-reading effect may be executed as "during timer preparation" instead of the count display. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the advance notice timer effect with the effect in the variation display as the target of the effect is executed when switching to the count display from the situation where "timer in preparation" is displayed. As a result, when there is a pending display that is blinking in white or blue at the time when the count display appears, it is possible to expect that the jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the green and red (especially red) suspension display is being displayed and "counting in progress" is not displayed and count display is started, the notification timer effect is performed although it is Not only does it make it difficult to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the fluctuation display, but also a timer on the notice side to raise the expectation level for green and red (especially red) hold display. The production can not function. Therefore, if “Timer preparation” is displayed in a situation where a green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) hold display is consumed. It is hoped that the count display will not be started, and it will be expected to maintain the game interest within the period until the count display (notice timer effect) is started.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high probability of big hit appears in the variable display under execution, a new winning is generated to cause a hold display of any mode such as white blinking, blue, green, red, etc. Since it becomes possible to predict with a certain probability whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the variable display under execution, it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun by checking whether the symbol appears.

  In addition, such a hold change effect using the special time change table T9b is executed for a hold display corresponding to a new winning, but the effect target is actually “new Rather than "whether the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display of the hold information (hold information that has changed hold) according to the winnings", "holding information that is stored before the new winning (holds not subject to hold change) It is designed to act as a presentation about "Does the jackpot symbol appear in the variable display of information)?" Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new winning occurs or the above-mentioned preceding period effect is prohibited, the special time change change table T9b is determined by the hold information that has been won later. When the hold change effect using is executed, it becomes possible to function as an effect as if the prefetch effect was generated afterwards for the hold information for which no prefetch effect was executed. It will be expected to reduce the game interest due to not being played.

  In the special time hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected for some reach types. However, as with the red mode, any variation pattern may not be selected. . In short, if the rate of appearance with a high expectation that can appear as a hold display is a low rate (including 0) compared to the normal hold change table T9a, white is displayed when the count display appears. It is possible to improve the fun of the game when there is a blinking or blue holding display.

  In addition, the pending change can be generated at a winning time, at the start of the change, or at a predetermined timing during the change, and the number of changes may be generated a plurality of times. That is, in this case, even when the count display of the notice timer effect is started in the variable display according to the hold display that is blinking white or blue, the white blink or blue may change to green or red Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. In this embodiment, the display corresponding to the pending display that is the subject of digestion even during the symbol variation performed in accordance with the pending digestion (not already in the suspended state, but the suspended display when in the suspended state) As described above, the corresponding display) is displayed, and the display mode corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change).

  However, when such a hold change effect using the special time change change table T9b is realized, a new prize is generated while the specific effect with high expectation is being executed during the execution of the variable display, and the prize is won. When the hold display corresponding to the red color is generated, the big win symbol is displayed in a variable display in which a specific effect with a high expectation level (for example, a timer effect that is directed to the action B action) is executed. It may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

  Therefore, new winnings occur during a period in which a specific timer effect for which at least the character B operation is targeted among the timer effects is being performed (while a specific effect with a high expectation is being performed). Even if it does, it is desirable to control so that the hold display according to the winning does not appear in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of change in hold is hidden. Further, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state for the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and has been digested.

  However, in this case, the hidden display that has been hidden is not continuously hidden until the variable display is terminated. For example, within the period of the variable display, for example, a hit effect or a loss ( It is desirable to display the mode of the hold change by causing the hold display that has been hidden to appear after the timing when the loss effect that suggests a big hit) appears. According to such a configuration, even if the on-hold display corresponding to the new winning is red, it is already suggested that the game is lost, so that the on-screen display is not reduced. By being red, it is possible to improve the game interest due to the fact that the hold information with high expectation for big hit is included in the hold.

  In addition, the control concerning the non-display of such a pending | holding display does not aim at all of timer production (notice production | presentation production), but comparatively big hit such as what makes a feature B operation | work production target among timer productions etc. It is desirable to execute only a specific timer effect with a high degree of expectation (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation).

  Also, as described above, when the on-hold change effect using the special-time on-hold change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third leading mode (during timer preparation, etc.) while the blue on-hold display appears. In the case where it has been done, it is desirable that the game progress in which the big hit symbol appears when the count display (timer effect) is started in the variable display prior to the blue hold display being digested. In this respect, even in the gaming situation where such a game progression is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the fluctuation or the fluctuation according to the blue hold display without being started. In the variation display where the count display (timer effect) is started and the big hit symbol appears before the blue hold display is digested so that a pounding feeling about whether the count display is started by the display is given. The count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started according to the start timing of the variable display (timer effect) It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started is higher. The percentage may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to control so that the rate at which the count display (timer effect) is started when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display is higher than when the red hold display appears. . The percentage may include 100%.

  Such a double-counting effect (chance change effect using the special-time hold change table T9b) in which a chance up occurs is, in short, “hold information displayed in the second mode among a plurality of modes (for example, In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the red prefetching reserve), the reserve information (for example, blue prefetching reserve) displayed in the first mode of the plurality of modes is digested. "The ratio at which the big hit symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed is made higher than the variable display of the identification information that has been started", but executes at least the specific count effect within the period when the variable display of the identification information is executed Hold information that is later in digestion order than the variable display in the execution state (when the specific count effect is being executed within the variable display execution period, it is not yet executed) When the prefetching for variable display in is displayed in the second mode (for example, red prefetching pending), the suspension information is displayed in the first mode (for example, blue prefetching pending) It is characterized in that the rate at which the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in the execution state is reduced rather than the case.

  According to such a configuration, when a red pending display (second mode) is being displayed for a variable display that is late in digestion order and not yet executed, a specific count is included in the variable display that is already in the execution state. Assuming that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is ended, a blue hold display (first mode) is displayed for a variable display that is late in digestion order and not yet executed. When the count display of the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the variable display that is already in the running state, an effect mode with a lower expectation appears as the effect object. The proportion will be high. That is, in this case, during the period when the specific count effect is being executed, whether or not the red hold display (second mode) appears with respect to the variable display that has not yet been executed functions as an important effect element. Through this special effect relationship between the count effect and the pre-read effect, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count effect. It will be expected. In this sense, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, it is still being executed, triggered by a new winning or a change change effect (for example, an effect of upgrading a blue hold display to a red hold display). It is important to enable the pending display for the variable display not appearing in any of a plurality of modes such as the blue pending display (first mode) and the red pending display (second mode). It can be said that there is.

  According to the special effect relationship between the count effect and the pre-read effect, when a red hold display (the second mode) appears for a variable display that has not been performed yet, the current display is in progress. Counting effects are not ended by variable display of, and it is more likely to continue to variable display after the next time, since the proportion of appearances with high expectation degree appears when counting effects end, so the specific count effect is ended It comes to expect not to be. On the other hand, when a blue hold display (the first aspect) appears for a variable display that has not been executed yet, blue hold with a low expectation for the one whose count effect is ended in the current variable display. Since the proportion in which the effect mode having a high degree of expectation appears when the count effect is finished is higher than when the variable effect display is ended, it is expected that the specific count effect is terminated early.

  However, with regard to the count effect, it is not always necessary to straddle a plurality of variable displays, and the count effect may be ended within one variable display started. Even with such a configuration, when a new winning is generated while the counting effect is being executed, the blue suspension display (the first mode) and the red suspension are performed for the variable display that is not yet executed. There is no change in that the display (the second mode) can function as an important performance indicator for the count effect, so there is no special effect between the count effect and the pre-read effect Through the relationship, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment over a long period from the start of the specific count effect to the end thereof.

  At the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of hold indications are displayed, but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, pre-read hold such as green or red) (for example, a situation in which the pre-read hold is not changed) Even if appears, it is possible to execute a process of causing a specific mode to appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, a process of changing from normal hold to red hold). According to such a configuration, at the start of the specific count effect, it is assumed that a plurality of hold indications are displayed, but an effect situation (for example, a situation in which the pre-read hold is not changed) has appeared. However, there is a possibility that the display can be changed to a hold display having a specific form (pre-read hold such as green or red) until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (the specific display result in the variable display in the execution state) Since the possibility that the ratio of deriving and displaying is high can be shifted from a high ratio to a low ratio), the game entertainment from the start to the end of the specific count effect is suitably maintained. Will be expected to do.

  However, at this time, a plurality of display modes are prepared as the count display by the specific count effect, and when the count display is displayed in the first mode and the count is digested, the second mode is used. A process of causing a specific mode to appear on the hold display before the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, normal hold) It is desirable that the rate at which the process of changing from red to red is performed is low. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode can be changed to “pending display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) during the counting period”. Recognize “high possibility” and predict from the remaining count value “high possibility that the specific count effect will continue until after the next symbol variation starts” As a result, it becomes possible to provide interest by comparing the results of their recognition and prediction.

  On the other hand, when a specific count effect is started, when a plurality of hold indications are displayed but none of them is in a specific state (for example, a state where the pre-read hold is not changed), During the execution period of the specific count effect, the process of causing the specific mode to appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, the process of changing from normal hold to red hold) may not be executed. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect may change to a hold display having a specific form (pre-read hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (in the execution state). The possibility of being shifted to a state in which the ratio is high from a state in which the specific display result is derived and displayed in variable display is not likely to occur). Will be able to provide a sense of security.

  In addition, a plurality of hold displays may be digested sequentially until a predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses, and a plurality of symbol variations may be sequentially digested. According to such a configuration, even if the third on-hold display is red on-hold in the situation where the specific count effect is started, the symbol variation corresponding to the third on-hold display is started. Since the specific count effect may reach a predetermined value during the execution period, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect ends.

  In addition, it is possible to execute processing for changing the symbol fluctuation again to the fluctuation state after the symbol fluctuation is stopped (temporarily stopped) while the specific count effect is being executed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the symbol variation is stopped (temporarily stopped) while the pre-reading suspension appears for the variable display which has not been executed yet, the specific being in the execution state Since it will function as an effect as if the next symbol variation is started while the count effect is continued, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest until the specific count effect is ended. Become.

  Moreover, in the example of the production related to the above-mentioned “double chance up” (holding change effect using the special time change table T9b), the hold display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count effect, or the front of the hold display. It is possible to move the movable decorative body or display another display image so as to cover the hold display so that even if a change occurs in the hold display, it is difficult to notice this. It is desirable to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest when it occurs.

  In addition, a “first mode that requires a relatively long time” and a “second mode that requires a relatively short time” are prepared as a “specific count effect” and an “effect pattern (fluctuation time of a symbol)”. A plurality of effects based on the result of the big hit determination “a specific effect pattern that is shorter than the relatively long time (first aspect) but longer than the relatively short time (second aspect)” You may make it select and execute from patterns. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next change depending on which aspect (first aspect, second aspect) the specific count effect is executed. Or will not be continued, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in the example of presentation related to the above-mentioned "double and chance up" (hold change effect using the special hold change table T9b), the "hold information displayed in the second mode among the plurality of modes (for example, red In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the pre-read hold), the start is made by digesting the hold information (for example, blue pre-read hold) displayed in the first form among the plurality of forms. "The rate at which the big hit symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed is made higher than the variable display of identified identification information", but at least the specific count effect is executed within the period when the variable display of identification information is executed Hold information whose digest order is later than the variable display that is in the execution state (when the specific count effect is being performed within the variable display execution period, it has not been performed yet. If the prefetching for variable display is displayed in the second mode (e.g. red prefetching pending), it is better than the case where the suspension information is displayed in the first mode (e.g. blue prefetching pending) Also in the case of performing symbol variation in a shorter time than the predetermined time required for the specific count effect, in order to reduce the rate at which the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in the execution state, There is a case where the symbol variation is executed in a longer time than a predetermined time required for the specific count effect. However, in this case, for the above-mentioned "specific count effect", "effect that suggests the remaining time for the specific effect (the remaining time until the specific effect change occurs for the specific effect) by updating the count value according to the passage of time However, it may be executed as, for example, an “effect that suggests the remaining time related to a specific effect by an image change according to the passage of time”. The point is that if it is possible to indicate the remaining time, it is possible to provide an interest as to whether or not the symbol variation is finished before this remaining time is digested, and the game interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the “specific count effect” is not “an effect that suggests the remaining time related to the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time”, but “the change in the image corresponding to the elapsed time as the remaining time related to the specific effect, etc. Realization by other depictions, such as “effects suggested by”, is different from the above-described example of “double chance up” (holding change effect using special time change table T9b) (counting) You may make it apply with respect to (production).

  In addition, with regard to the “specific count effect”, the suggested “remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect” ends before the digestion is completed, and the effect change with respect to the specific effect is completed. May occur. At this time, it may be possible that an effect change that cannot appear when the “remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to a specific effect” is exhausted without being terminated in the middle. These modified examples are also applied to an effect example (count effect) different from the above-described effect example related to “double chance up” (holding change effect using the special time change table T9b). It is also good.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new winning is made during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. When the hold information corresponding to this is newly acquired and the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started and this is being executed, the ratio that the notice timer effect is executed is the above In order to be different according to the newly obtained hold information (new winning), control (control concerning the one change effect) which can execute timer pre-reading effect is performed.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a processing procedure for processing performed to realize such a changeable effect. In addition, this processing is a winning of a game ball to a specific starting opening during a period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first leading aspect or the second leading aspect is being executed. ) May be performed when it occurs, or within a period before it is digested that the hold information (hold information for which information related to effects is deleted / reset) is held before the prize. It may be performed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, in the processing of step S5601, it is determined whether the hold information corresponding to the new winning is indicative of specific game information. Note that the specific game information may be, for example, “game information for causing a high expectation specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested”, or “the new It may be game information to be won by a big hit when the hold information is digested. Here, for convenience of explanation, “game information to be won by a big hit when the new hold information is digested” will be described as the specific game information.

  As a result, when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new winning is indicative of the specific game information, the next step S5602 stores the information prior to the hold information corresponding to the new win. When at least part of the information related to the effect is deleted and the change effect is performed with respect to the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode) among the held information Reset to content.

  For example, when the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) is set as the timer pre-reading effect, if the hold information targeted for the timer pre-reading effect is digested, the pre-notice timer effect is approximately 20% of the time When the second leading aspect (the timer occurrence chance) is set as the timer pre-reading effect, it is executed and the probability of approximately 80% when the pending information targeted for the timer pre-reading effect is digested As described above, the advance notice side timer effect is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, a table to be referred to when all (or at least a part of) information related to the timer pre-reading effect is deleted or when determining an effect pattern (SP reach etc.) or a notice lottery A setting (such as setting of a single change flag) for changing to a different one from the normal time is made. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, by performing control (FIG. 149) relating to the effect based on the effect information modified (deleted / set) in this way, the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) and Even if any of the two preceding modes (timer generation chances) is set, the notification timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50% in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149). In addition, also when determining the contents of the effect pattern and the notice effect, for example, a table (not shown) at the time of effect effect is referred to based on the fact that the one change flag is set, and various effects are performed in a different mode from normal. Will be executed.

  Then, after the modification process (step S5602) for the pending presentation information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is performed in this way, the background image is displayed as the background image when the change effect is performed as the process of step S5603. Process to change to. At this time, it is desirable that the display (the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect) appearing as the timer prefetching effect is also hidden. That is, in this case, when a new winning occurs (or after the winning is generated until the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is digested), the background image is the background at the time of the changing effect. If the image is suddenly changed to the image, the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode that has appeared until then is not displayed, but the background image at the time of the change effect itself functions as one mode of the timer pre-reading effect. Become moist. Then, during the period in which the background image at the time of the dramatic effect appears, whether or not the notice timer effect appears when the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is digested (whether it is a frustration). It becomes possible to have a great interest, and this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest during the period when the timer prefetching effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5601 that the hold information corresponding to the new winning is not indicative of specific game information, whether or not to execute a change gaze effect next as the process of step S5611 Judgment processing is performed. This change gaze effect is an effect that changes the background image to the background image when the change effect is performed in the process of step S5603, although the modification process (step S5602) is not performed on the above-described hold information. That is.

  In the process of step S5611, when it is determined that the one-to-one effect is not performed, the current timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode) and the determination mode of various effects are continued. The process (FIG. 176) is terminated without performing any process related to the change effect.

  In such a configuration, when a new winning occurs during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1 or table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed (in a specific starting area). When a game ball is accepted and game information corresponding to the game ball is newly acquired), when the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started and this is being executed, the notice timer effect is displayed. The notice side timer effect can be executed so that the executed ratio varies depending on the newly acquired game information (holding information). In other words, in this case, if the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, it is not the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect but the new information. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific variation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that the type of the big hit is to shift to a high probability short-time gaming state, etc. ), The rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect changes, so that it is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. Expectations for other effects can be given before the variable display is executed, and a decrease in the gaming interest in the period can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired in a period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first leading aspect or the second lead aspect is being executed, the hold information which is the target of the timer prefetch effect is not selected. Depending on whether or not the newly acquired hold information is a specific game information, the modification process (step S5602) is performed, and then the hold information for which the timer pre-reading effect is targeted is digested. In addition, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of the change effect, and the display related to the timer prefetch effect is hidden. That is, in this case, the main subject of the effect is the timer pre-read effect until the unusual effect is started, and the effect of giving an expectation to the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-read effect is provided. On the other hand, the main subject of the presentation is changed to the one after the one-off effect is started, and in order to give expectation to the newly obtained hold information including the above-mentioned timer pre-reading effect It will be transferred to the production situation where various productions are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to flexibly change the subject of the effect when the hold of high expectation is acquired more than the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-read effect, and it has already been set. It can be avoided that the presentation time for the high-retention information with a high degree of expectation is taken away by the presentation.

  Such a changeable effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect indicates that a big win is won. That is, in this case, since the main subject of the production moves to the newly-held winning hold information, the big hit effect appears in the hold that is digested before that, so a surprise-like production is realized. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of gaming.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the process related to the above-mentioned change effect is executed (FIG. 176). However, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding aspect is being executed, the process (FIG. 176) relating to the above-mentioned change effect may be executed. .

  Further, the background image at the time of the change effect may be continued even after the change display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is ended. That is, in this case, the hold information that is digested after the end of the variable display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect, functions as a single change effect.

  In addition, with regard to such a one-off effect, even when the timer pre-reading effect is not executed, it may be executed on the condition that the new winning is generated and a specific condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the production pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the notice lottery for all the hold information stored before the new winning is changed to a table different from the normal time. Settings (such as setting of a change flag) are made, so that the appearance probabilities of various effects change as long as the change is not a change effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the ratio at which the advance notice timer effect is executed is changed at the time of the one change effect, but at the time of setting the one change flag, the change side timer is determined by determining the effect pattern different from the normal time. You may make it change the ratio by which presentation is performed. Thereby, even if it is a fluctuation number that does not cause the fluctuation-side timer effect to appear at the time of non-execution of the one-change effect, the fluctuation-side timer effect appears at the time of execution of the one-change effect or Even when the number is changed, it is possible to perform control so that the variable timer effect does not appear when the change effect is executed.

  In addition, when it is made to perform such one change production, even if it is made to appear timer production at the time of non-execution of one change production, possibility that the fluctuation side timer production will not appear at the time of execution of one change production. Because there is also a concern about the decline in gaming interest, at the time of execution of the special effect, if it is won by selecting a lottery for a special advance effect that can not appear at normal times (during non-execution of the special effect), the special advance notice You may control so that an effect may appear.

  In addition, the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the variable display that has been the target of the timer prefetch effect at the time of the unusual effect does not necessarily have to be constant (50% here), for example, the object of the timer prefetch effect It may be controlled differently depending on whether or not the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display that has become.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, the contents of the effects of the above-described timer effect example will be described in detail. Here, the processing examples relating to the above-mentioned effects are merely examples, and for example, effects other than the above-described types may be executed as the contents of the notice effects, Appearance conditions and the like may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the example of effects described below, although the processing contents according to the above-mentioned each effect may not be included in the processing content, it is within the scope of the same technical concept and within the feasible range by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are changed as appropriate. Also, the following "timer effect" basically means that count display is executed by the notice-side timer effect or the fluctuation-side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including timer prefetching effects. In addition, as a mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted in the following, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect situation in which a change display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state. In FIG. 177 (B), two winnings occur during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the suspension information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the suspension for which the first winning is achieved The on-hold display corresponding to 1 indicates the normal on-hold mode, and the on-hold display corresponding to the second on-hold hold 2 is displayed in red. FIG. 177 (C) shows that the suspension information is first-in-first-out after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the state of the variable display in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (B) is stopped and displayed with the lost symbol. ) Shows the production situation in which the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested and changed to a change state. In this example of effect, as is clear from the figure, even when the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of the variable display (state of hold 0) is shown, it is shown at hold 1 Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the hold display mode (hold 0 display). In addition, it is described above that the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in the state of the hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in the state of such variable display It is street.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information in the state of hold 1 in FIGS. 177 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display. Although the pre-reading effect may be executed in any of the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode as described above, the holding pre-reading is performed in the rendering state shown in FIG. 177 (C). The appearance of an effect means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variation display) or the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect (example here) Then, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect).

  FIG. 177 (D) shows that one winning occurs during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the holding information corresponding to the winning is normally held as a holding display corresponding to the holding 2 Shows the rendering situation displayed in the form of. However, if the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, jackpot information) and satisfies the above-described change effect execution condition, FIG. 177 (E) shows. As described above, control relating to the one-off effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

  As described above, a change effect is a change made by changing the contents of hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored and held before hold information (here hold 2) that causes the change effect. It is to be digested. On the other hand, the above-described change gaze effect is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, jackpot information) and generates the change gaze effect. The information is stored before the information (here, hold 2), and the contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) that is in the hold state are subjected to hold digestion without being changed. That is, in this case, since the ease of occurrence of various effects will be different when the hold 1 is digested depending on whether the change effect or the change Gase effect is performed, It is possible for the player side to estimate whether or not the hold indicating the game information is included (whether the change effect or the change gaze effect is performed), so that the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed. It is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to these effects so that no hold change occurs regardless of the result of the jackpot determination in both the change effect and the change gaze effect.

  Therefore, with regard to the timing at which control relating to such an effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to such a hold 2, it is after the end of the fluctuation display of the hold 0 that is not a target of modification of the hold information. In addition, it is desirable that the change display of the hold 1 to be modified of the hold information is before the start of the variable display. In this point, in this embodiment, after the lost symbol is stopped by the fluctuation display of the suspension 0, when the suspension display of the suspension 1 is not yet shifted and displayed, the control according to the variation effect is executed. In addition to changing the hold information of hold 1 (especially, information related to the effect), as shown in FIG. 177 (E), the timer prefetching effect or the mode (red) of the hold change that has been displayed so far The background image is not displayed (displayed in a normal hold mode), and the background image is changed to the background image when the change effect is performed. At this time, a predetermined display image (here, “change”) is displayed for a predetermined time.

  Also, in such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer prefetching effect which has appeared until then until the end of the fluctuation display of hold 0 continues the display without starting the count display. Since it is stored, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer pre-reading effect is hold 1.

  In (F) of FIG. 177, after the appearance of the unusual effect background shown in (E) of FIG. 177, the suspension information stored as suspension 1 is digested by the shift operation of the suspension information and is changed. It shows the production situation.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state in FIG. 177 (E) is digested and the variable display is started. The count display of the timer effect is started after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. Similarly, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display related to the first production (here “conversation notice”) (here, “make conversation notice appear”) is displayed. It is done. The timing at which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) may appear before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. It is also possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

  Note that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 177 (D)). A partial display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays “Take a conversation notice to appear” in the so-called ticker mode (slide video) is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this. ing.

  In addition, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), since the timer effect starts counting display with a relatively small number of counts such as "10 seconds", the effect of low expectation is concerned if only this is seen There is a high possibility that it will be the target of the timer performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered. However, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific display (conversation notice to the effect that the effect type (conversation notice) appearing at a relatively early stage is displayed among the effect types targeted for the effect of the timer effect It is expected that it is suggested that the target of the timer effect is “a conversation announcement that appears in a relatively early stage” and the jackpot is won by the mission success. For this reason, the decline in the entertainment interest is suppressed.

  In addition, when the one-off effect is being executed, as described above, the timer effect appears at a probability different from that at the normal time. For example, when the timer pre-reading effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first leading mode (prediction of timer occurrence), the timer effect appears only with a probability of about 20% under normal conditions. On the other hand, when the one-off effect is being executed, the timer effect comes to appear with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears in such an unusual effect background appearing, it is not the one variation Gasse effect (approximately 20%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, but the one in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. The sense of expectation that approximately 50% is being executed, and consequently the sense of expectation for winning a big hit (because it is determined that the big hit is included when the special effect is executed) will be enhanced. However, in this case, when the timer effect does not appear while such an unusual effect background appears, it is not the unusual effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, and the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change This will result in an increase in the level of concern over which a one-off shift (about 20%) has been implemented.

  When the timer pre-reading effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third leading mode (during timer preparation), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% under normal conditions. When the one-off effect is being executed, the timer effect only appears with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect does not appear while such a strange effect background appears, it is not the one-change-gasse effect (approximately 100%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, but the one in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. It will be definitively suggested that rendition (approximately 50%) is being carried out and, in turn, that there will be hold information for winning a big hit. However, in this case, when the timer effect appears in such an unusual effect background, it is not an irregular effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but an irregular change in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. As a result, the degree of concern that the performance (approximately 100%) is being executed increases.

  In FIG. 178 (G), the timer related signal indicating that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) has reached a predetermined numerical value (here 0) and has reached the predetermined numerical value (here 0) The display status (here “Yukuzo”) is shown. Note that the timer related display (here, “go”) indicating that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is not displayed.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), since the count display has reached a predetermined value while the mission display (display conversation announcement) is still displayed, some effect is provided as an effect target of the timer effect. It is a situation that is definitely suggested to be in a situation that is about to appear right now, and it can be said that a great deal of attention is drawn to whether or not a speech advance notice appears as the effect.

  FIG. 178 (H) shows a conversation notice (in this case, after the timer effect that has reached a predetermined value in FIG. 178 (G) and the timer related display are hidden) "I think it might be a chance," shows the rendering situation that appeared. Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission was successful appears in the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear).

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), since the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) indicates that the mission was successful, it is definitely suggested to win the jackpot.

  In FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is successful in FIG. 178 (H), the change display is stopped by the losing symbol even though the special display (here, “Mission successful!”) Appears. Shows the stage of the production.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with regard to the specific display related to the first effect (here, “conversation notice”) (here, “display the talk notice”), the hold information to be the target of the effect (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the hold 1), and of course, under predetermined conditions, the pending information prior to the variable display (FIG. 178 (I In the situation shown in), it is possible to appear earlier also within the period of the variable display according to the hold 0). Moreover, the timing at which the first presentation (here, “conversation notice”) is displayed and the special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Appears, is also the holding information (the big hit) Within the variable display period according to the hold information (hold information that does not become big hit) before the variable display under a predetermined condition. Can also appear in advance.

  According to such a configuration, even though a special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Appears in the mission effect, and it has been definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, the fluctuation display ends with a losing pattern. Since it becomes (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur as a player. However, after that, when the next variation display is started, the variation display ends (stops) with a jackpot symbol, so that a sense of happiness after being dropped into despair is given. . As a result, it becomes possible to add a dramatic inflection even after it has been definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, so that it is possible to maintain the gaming interest until the big hit symbol is stopped become.

  However, when the special display is made to appear in advance in this way, there is a concern that the player's side complaints to the hole side will occur when the variable display is ended (stopped) with the lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of the lost change in which the special display appears first, the rate at which the pre-reading effect over the next change display (the change display that becomes the big hit) is executed does not appear in the execution period of the change display. It is desirable to set it higher than when. In this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is achieved in FIG. 178 (H), the timer within the period until the fluctuation display is ended (stopped) with the lost symbol The pre-reading effect is to be newly generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the count display of the timer effect is started, the lost symbol is displayed in the variable display, and the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears It is possible to achieve an effect as if the variation display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a complaint on the player side with respect to the hole side when the variable display is terminated (stopped) with a lost symbol.

  However, the look-ahead effect that spans multiple variation displays (up to the variation display that is a big hit) may not necessarily be executed. In this sense, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the hold information in which the jackpot symbol appears. It is desirable to continue to display a special display (in this case, “Mission successful!”) That appears within the execution period of the variable display in which the losing symbol appears, even after the digestion is started and the variable display is started. In this respect, if such a special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Is continuously displayed until the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display where the jackpot symbol appears, it will be produced before the jackpot symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 178 (K), an effect image that is definitely suggested to win a big hit as an effect in the effect pattern, because there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest without a typical inflection. It is desirable to hide the special display (here, “mission success!”) Before the timing of As a result, after the special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. 178 (K) (determined to win a big hit as the effect content in the effect pattern) Until the appearance of the suggested effect image), the feeling of anxiety about the appearance of the jackpot symbol increases somewhat, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (L) (the effect state where the jackpot symbol is stopped) It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained until).

  In FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect of 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (K) is While the timer effect display of the 30 seconds is finished and the timer related display (here, "Go") is displayed, the effect to be the effect target is generated until the appearance. Needless to say.

  Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

  FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero. In FIG. 179 (B), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), three winnings occur and the suspension information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the first winning is the suspension An effect in which the hold display corresponding to 1 is normally held, the hold display corresponding to hold 2 winning the second is red, and the hold display corresponding to hold 3 the third win is displayed in blue. Indicates the situation. In FIG. 179 (C), after the decorative symbol SZ which was in the state of the variable display in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (B) is stopped and displayed with the lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) ) Shows the production situation in which the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested and changed to a change state. Note that, even in the example of this effect, as is clear from the figure, even when the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the variable display state (hold 0 state) is shown, it is shown at hold 1 Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the hold display mode (hold 0 display). In addition, it is described above that the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in the state of the hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in the state of such variable display It is street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, in FIGS. 177 and 178, the movable body KT for effect which is omitted for convenience of description is shown in the figure. The movable body KT may be, for example, a back-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-up left movable effect unit 3200, a back-left movable effect unit 3300, a back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-back front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It corresponds to `` movable member '' etc.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information in the state of hold 1 in FIGS. 179 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. The hold pre-reading effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. The pre-reading pre-production effect may be executed in any of the first preceding aspect, the second pre-preceding aspect, or the third pre-preceding aspect described above. The appearance of the effect means that any of the hold information of the hold 0 (in the variable display state), the hold information of the hold 1 or the hold information of the hold 2 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect. (In this example, the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold pre-reading effect).

  Here, as an aspect of the hold pre-reading effect, the count display may be executed from when the corresponding hold display (here, hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), the count display is the predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), as well as an event that the decorative display of the decorative symbol SZ may end. Since the event that the variation display of the decoration symbol SZ ends before the time reaches the point can occur, even if the count display is being executed, the target of the timer effect is any hold information It becomes difficult to grasp whether or not.

  However, in this effect example, any one of the first preceding mode (predicting timer generation), the second preceding mode (timer generating chance), and the third preceding mode (timer generating chance) is displayed as the mode of holding pre-reading effect. It can be done.

  In this respect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), of the hold information 0, 1 and 2, the hold information 1 is in the red mode, and is in the mode of the hold display with the highest degree of big hit expectation. In view of the above, it is desirable from the player side that the timer pre-reading effect targets the holding information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red holding display. That is, in this case, since it is indicated that the expectation obtained for the big hit is further high in the suspension information 1 by the combined effect, the timer 0 reading of the suspension 0 of the normal suspension mode and the blue suspension 2 with low expectation. It becomes possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears in any of the hold information 0 to 2 rather than the case where the jackpot expectation is dispersed as the target of the effect. In addition, if the blue hold 2 with low expectation becomes the target of the timer prefetching effect, there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment, so the blue hold 2 with low expectation is the timer for maintaining the game entertainment. It is also important to develop the production so that it is not the target of the pre-reading production.

  Moreover, as described above, in this embodiment, when a new winning is generated when the hold information (big hit hold) in which the big hit symbol appears is stored, it is not the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174) but the big hit hold time. With reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: special time hold change table T9b), hold change production is performed. In the on-hold change effect using this special-time on-hold change table T9b, red and green are hard to appear as an aspect of the on-hold 2 when a big hit on-hold is already included (when the on-hold 1 in red mode is a big hit) And the aspect of blue and white flickering is relatively easy to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), when the timer pre-reading effect targets the hold information 1 and functions to increase the jackpot expectation, the blue hold 2 with low expectation is timerd. Chance up by avoiding the decline of the game interest due to targeting, because the reserve information of reserve 1 of the red form is a big hit is the special case reserve change table T9b (Figure 175) is referred to the blue aspect Chance up by being able to expect that the pending display of pending 2 is blue (with a high probability of appearance) is in the production situation (presence timer effect with high expectation for big hit "production in the running display of variation" Also works as if it supports the fact that "the fluctuation display in action is a big hit" and the chance is raised with the double) From becoming cormorants, it is possible to improve the game playability.

  Therefore, in the production situation shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and (C), when a new winning is generated, a blue or white blinking on-hold display is newly generated, or a green or red on-hold display is displayed. It is possible to recognize whether a big hit hold is included if it is made to confirm whether it newly occurs, and it can be said that it is in a presentation situation where a new winning is promoted.

  In FIG. 179 (D), the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ in the running state is maintained while the timer pre-reading effect mode shown in FIG. 179 (C) is maintained (the count is not started). After the termination (stop), the suspension information stored in the suspension 1 is digested by the shift operation of each of the suspension information to indicate the effect status in which it is changed.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D), the player is subject to the timer pre-reading effect in the hold information of hold 0 (in a variable display state) that is in red and in blue. It becomes possible to recognize that the information is one of the hold information of the hold 1 and hope that the count display is executed within the execution period of the variable display corresponding to the hold information of the hold 0 which is a red mode.

  Also in this example of the effect, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, a partial range (left portion) of the serif portion of the female character in the speech advance notice is hidden by the timer effect displayed prior to this.

  FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer pre-reading effect ends and the timer effect count display is under execution while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D) is being executed. .

  However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of the red hold information (whether the timer prefetch is for red hold information) ) Is an extremely high level of interest for players. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display that is in the running state is made so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that such count display is in the running state. Control can be made so that the movable body KT for the production is moved forward and positioned for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is executed, and it is confirmed whether the timer effect count display is executed while the player is feeling excited. By making it difficult, it is possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of throb.

  In order to suitably realize such an effect, in the situation where the timer effect is being executed but the count display is not yet executed (for example, while the timer pre-reading effect is being executed), the aforementioned movable body for effect KT It is desirable to control so that it does not move (move). That is, in this case, since the movable body KT for the effect suddenly moves where the player does not care about the existence of the movable body KT for the effect, the count display becomes difficult to see. With such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing, it becomes possible to further strengthen the attention to the timer effect and enhance the excitement.

  In addition, as the operation effect by the movable body KT for the effect, it may be made to function only as an effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the timer prefetching effect among the timer effects and make it difficult to visually recognize the count display. You may make it function also as object notice E2 (1st production). That is, in this case, although there is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) which is not a target of the timer effect and is not originally related, a non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed during execution of the count display. By becoming (Fig. 179 (E)), for example, a big hit expectation degree higher than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (Fig. 179 (F)) comes to be shown, and the game interest is improved. Will be able to

  As described above, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 (here, the action presentation by the movable body KT for presentation) is performed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, for example, counting In the non-execution state, it is desirable to indicate the jackpot expectation depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, red) appears when the movable body KT for effect operates. At this time, when the production movable body KT operates in the red light emission mode, the expectation degree of big hit may be higher than the cut-in production shown in the next production situation (FIG. 179 (F)). The expected value of the jackpot expectation when the action effect is generated by the effector movable body KT is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). Are required to However, as described above, when performing the operation effect by the movable body KT for effect during the execution of the count display, even if any of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the operation for the effect is It is desirable to control the jackpot expectation indicated by the action effect by the body KT to be the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, while the count display is being executed, it is not the operation rendition by the movable body KT for presentation, but not how the operation rendition by the movable body KT for presentation is generated. Since it comes to gather, it is avoided that a game interest will fall by the aspect when the operation | movement production | presentation by the movable body KT for this production | generation generate | occur | produces.

  By the way, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the above-mentioned double chance increase has succeeded because the subject of the timer prefetching production is not the blue hold 2 but the red hold 1. In addition, chances are also raised by the execution of the non-target notice E2 (here, the action presentation by the movable body KT for presentation) is executed during the execution of the count display. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the variation display is not likely to win the big hit despite the fact that there is such a high expectation situation, the game entertainment will be enhanced originally. It is inevitable that the game interest will be significantly reduced in the supposed variable display. In this regard, in the above-described special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) that is referred to when a big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, a green or red state hold when a new winning occurs. Since it is difficult for information to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning is displayed in red in the production state shown in FIG. 179 (E), a jackpot hold is included. It may happen that the player is exposed to the fact that he is not

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, new winnings can be made during a period in which count display of a specific timer effect which is regarded as an aspect having a high degree of expectation among timer effects is performed, or in a subsequent period. Control that makes it difficult to recognize the mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even if a warning occurs, and that the mode becomes difficult to recognize even if the hold display that has already been displayed is further changed to hold I will do it. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), it is difficult to recognize the mode of the hold display by hiding the holds 1 and 2 and displaying them by the shadow, but the hold display itself in the effect display device 1600 May be hidden. As a result, although the count display with a high degree of expectation is being executed, it is avoided that the game interest is reduced by the green and red hold display appearing when a new winning is generated. become.

  In FIG. 179 (F), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “Go”) is displayed, This shows the effect situation in which the effect to be the effect of the timer effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), in the situation where the effect (the cut-in effect by the ally character) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed, the holdings 1 and 2 remain hidden, and the shadows The mode of the pending display is made difficult to recognize.

  FIG. 180 (G) shows the variation display when the teammate character wins the enemy character after the effect (cut-in effect by the teammate character) that is the target of the timer effect in FIG. 180 (F) is executed. It shows the production situation shown to be decided and stopped by the jackpot symbol.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), since it is definitely suggested to be a big hit, the game interest is lowered even if any of the modes appears as the modes of holding 1 and 2 There is no such thing. Therefore, with regard to the reservations 1 and 2 which are difficult to recognize, after displaying the effect indicating whether or not to be a big hit in this way, it is displayed in a form that can be recognized which mode is appearing It is desirable to be done. That is, in this case, even if it is shown that the ally character loses the enemy character and the variable display is decidedly stopped due to a loss, as a result that the modes of holding 1 and 2 become recognizable at that time, it is held. Since it may be recognized that one of 1 and 2 is a red or rainbow aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. In this count display, the remaining count is left as it is (the count is displayed at the start of the count display even in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) in which the big hit symbol is fixedly stopped and the variable display is ended. Among them, the number of counts which is smaller than the smallest number of counts (10 seconds) remains, and it is continued even after the fluctuation display is finished, without generating the effect to be the target of the timer effect. It is executed as the special timer effect described above.

  However, after this, while the opening effect is performed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (I), the count display of the timer effect is not displayed. Thus, the variable display (symbol effect) ended in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect (big hit game effect) in the big hit game started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J) are It becomes possible to recognize that the effects are not connected to each other, and the player can thus enjoy the newly started effects with a fresh feeling.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is secretly executed as time elapses even during the period in which the timer effect count display is hidden (the opening effect execution period). When the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect during the jackpot game that is started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. Like to be. This will create a production situation as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer production reaches a predetermined value has suddenly decreased, so it counts in a state where the player's feelings are not ready It becomes possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is suitably avoided that the timer effect continued from the state of the variable display becomes a manner.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display is controlled so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the execution period of the big hit game. At this time, a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) that suggests that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached appears in the same manner as the timer effect performed within the period of the variable display.

  In FIG. 180 (K), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “Go”) is displayed, It shows an effect situation in which a specific effect (corresponding to the above-mentioned first special effect or second special effect, and “CHANCE” displayed in the drawing) to be the effect of the timer effect is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (K), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute a specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) within the execution period of the jackpot game, and the specific effect (“ When the "CHANCE" display is executed, the type of jackpot that wins the jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, the type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or the probability of short time game state after the end of the jackpot game) It is shown that the degree of expectation is high. Note that the ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-mentioned special timer effect is executed, the count display is continued until after the big hit game is started, not only is the big hit confirmed, but the winning big hit is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player. A certain degree of expectation will also increase, so that it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  After that, when the teammate character plays an effect to fight against the enemy character in a specific round game etc., and the teammate character wins as a result (Fig. 180 (L)) It will be shown that. When the ally character loses the effect, it is indicated that the winning jackpot is not a jackpot type advantageous to the player.

  Thus, when the result of the performance during the big hit game appears, the game proceeds with the content according to the result. For example, if the result that the ally character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or, after the end of the big hit game will be controlled to high probability time short state. On the other hand, when the result of losing the teammate character is obtained, the big hit game is finished in eight rounds, or after the big hit game is finished, a gaming state (for example, a low probability of lower probability) than the high probability short-time state. It is controlled in a short time state.

  Here, the content of the specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to an effect in which a teammate character fights against an enemy character in a specific round game. For example, it is possible to set an effect content for the ally character to acquire a weapon in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K) and execute an effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), it can be implied that the possibility that the allied character will win in the subsequent battle is increased.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is performed, and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described. In addition, while being able to perform combining each effect suitably demonstrated below between the effects, it is possible to perform combining suitably also between each effect mentioned above. Moreover, although the case where it is performed as a notice side timer effect is described in each example of presentation below, it may be made to be performed not as a notice side timer effect but as a fluctuation side timer effect. That is, in this case, the effect contents according to each of the following effect examples will be determined in advance as effect contents of the fluctuation pattern.

[Timer exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A operation, special timer, cut-in B, feature B operation, etc.) as effect candidates to be timer targets The timer effect is prepared by setting any of the effect modes as a timer target (count target) (timer object advance notice lottery) and displaying a timing for the effect mode targeted for the timer to appear. Execute. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action (feature A notice), special timer, cut-in B, feature B action It is performed while it is unclear which of the (character item B notice) is the timer target, and the effect mode (the timer target notice) which is not the timer target in such a rendering situation A display may be provided that suggests which effect mode is not determined as the timer target in the lottery (timer object exclusion effect).

  That is, in this case, at the stage of digesting the remaining count in the timer effect, a guessing material as to which effect mode is the timer target is provided. For example, when a low expectation effect mode (for example, conversation announcement) is suggested as a play mode not targeted for the timer, the possibility that the low expectation effect mode appears as the timer target is excluded at that time. Since it is a stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed, a high expectation performance mode (for example, the character B action etc.) is expected to appear as a timer target, but the game is entertaining It is expected to improve this. In addition, when a high expectation effect mode (for example, a character B action etc.) is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target, it is determined that the timer effect can not be expected at that time. It becomes possible to pay attention to the effect, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the expectation for the timer effect without changing the mode of the count display itself while digesting the remaining count.

  FIG. 181 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object exclusion presentation performed when change numbers 7 and 8 (refer to Drawing 148) equivalent to "there is no timer character reach" are chosen. FIG. 181 (b) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer target exclusion presentation performed when change numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected in the situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (any one of “pending change 5”, “actual object A operation 3”, or “special timer 1”). The timer target exclusion effect is to be executed when is selected (see FIG. 161), and even in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), a specific timer type (as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) When any one of “holding change 5”, “actual object A action 3”, and “actual object B action 1” is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

  However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is not relevant, and the type of fluctuation pattern is Alternatively, it may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained by a predetermined effect drawing based on the result of the big hit determination or the like. As will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be caused to appear in the fluctuation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed (for the timer object advance effect) later (though it is unclear whether it is executed), the effect which does not appear as the timer object It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed), the timer effect is subsequently performed as compared to the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which is performed is high, and that it is also performed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is to be performed.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of “holding change 5” or “actual object A operation 3”, 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation started. At around timing, a count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“holding change 5” or “actual A operation” 3 ") is to appear.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b) where the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "character A action 3", similarly, 20 seconds after the start of symbol fluctuation At the timing when it has passed, the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“hold change 5” or “feature A operation 3 ") appears.

  In this case, in the case of these examples, although 10 seconds have passed since the start of symbol variation, the timer effect has not yet been executed (the timer pre-read effect is not even displayed). First, the timer exclusion effect can occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that “conversation notice” is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer target is displayed. Can be grasped by the player that is restricted to any one of the pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, and accessory B operation. That is, in this case, a low-expected production mode out of a plurality of production modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A action, special timer, cut-in B, and action B action) is not a candidate for timer. (A high-expected production mode can be expected to be a candidate for the timer), so the player wishes that the timer production will occur within the fluctuation. Thus, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state.

  In the period in which the count display is in an unexecuted state (in this example, the period from the start of symbol variation until 20 seconds elapses), the above-described timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding mode, the second mode) The preceding mode and the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

  Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation, a second timer target exclusion effect may occur in accordance with the start of count display in the timer effect. In the second timer target excluded effect, effects other than the effect (conversation notice) excluded in the first timer target excluded effect are excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, when it is indicated that the "special timer" is not a candidate for timer target, the candidate timer target is pending change, cut-in A, role-of-article A operation, cut-in B , It becomes possible for the player to know that one of the feature B operations has been narrowed. In this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action), the effect mode that is determined to be a big hit is a timer target candidate As it becomes possible to recognize that it has come off, it is possible to get a sense of apprehension about whether a high expectation effect will appear as a timer target in reverse from when the first timer target exclusion effect is executed. Become.

  Then, a third timer target exclusion effect may be generated at a timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation. In the third timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) excluded in the first and second timer target exclusion effects are further excluded. For example, when it is indicated that "cut-in B" is not a candidate for the timer target, the candidate for the timer target is narrowed to any one of the hold change, the cut-in A, the feature A operation, and the feature B operation. It becomes possible for the player to be able to grasp that.

  Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), and the production mode ("holding change 5 "", A pending change occurs, and in the case of "act A action 3", an act A action occurs) is executed as a timer target effect.

  By the way, in the timer effects of “pending change 5” and “object A action 3” shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation, As shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, the timer effect in this manner (timer effect in which the effect of the timer target is executed when 40 seconds elapse) is executed. It can be seen that there are only three prepared as the target of the timer effect: conversation notice, hold change, and feature operation. That is, in this case, the experienced player confirms that the timer target of the mode in which the count display reaches the predetermined value has occurred at the timing of 40 seconds after the start of the symbol variation, the timer target is the conversation notice. , Hold change, cut-in A, accessory A action, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B action, but not one of conversation notice, hold change, accessory A action It is assumed that the At this time, if there are cases where two effects are excluded by the timer-excluded effects, among the effects of conversation advance notice, change on hold, and accessory A action, any effect is displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer-excluded effect so that at least two effects are left as candidates for the timer effect.

  According to such a timer-excluded effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state or while the count display is being executed, it is inflated to an expectation or anxiety (any effect is excluded from the timer object). Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is the same as the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect). The timing is set in accordance with the arrival of any of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates.

  For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, when 45 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, “action A feature” is an effect of the timer even if the count display becomes 0 thereafter. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. As described above, in the timer effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) There is a relationship that the types of effects that can appear as timer objects are narrowed down as the In this respect, by performing the timer target exclusion effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) (even in this example, the variation starts) even for beginners Can recognize that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets will be narrowed as 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) pass, and timer effects can be enjoyed at a high level .

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “special timer 1” (count display with a count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol variation of character reach) In the example), every 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, The timer target exclusion effects of the second time are respectively executed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of “act B action 1” (the count having the count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the SP reach symbol variation). In the example in which the display is performed, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, and the third timer each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds elapse from the start of fluctuation. The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are executed.

  In addition, the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment suggests one effect mode that is not a timer target in the count effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive after the start of symbol variation. I did it. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer exclusion effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability every time these timings arrive based on the type of variation pattern, the result of jackpot determination, etc. The timer target exclusion effect may appear, or the timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from those timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer exclusion effect may be made different at a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing after the start of symbol variation (for example, the timing at which the first timer-exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur) If the ratio at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than the later timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur) It is possible to digest the count display over a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the aspect is not a timer target. However, in this case, when the timer-excluded effect is executed at the timing when the first timer-excluded effect can be generated, and when the timer-targeted excluded effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer-targeted excluded effect can occur It is desirable that the proportion (expected degree) in which the jackpot symbol appears be the same (and even if the timer target exclusion effect is executed at any timing). In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer-excluded effect appears at an early timing (while the rate of execution of the timer-excluded effect is increased) after the count display is started (after the symbol starts to fluctuate). As you become aware of what you do, you will be expected to try to improve the fun of the game from the beginning of the production.

  When such an effect is realized, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first targets the timer based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "Hold change 5" of Character Reach). Whether the exclusion effect is to be generated or the determination as to which timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), the maximum of three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) to generate the timer object exclusion effect Do the processing. Next, a determination process is performed as to which of the effect modes is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer object at each timing at which it is determined that the timer object exclusion effect is to be generated. These determination processes are performed after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 and before step S5511, for example, before each process. It is possible to do based on the result information of processing.

  Or you may make it perform the timer object exclusion | determination effect for exclusive use (only for conversation notice) which suggests that a specific production | presentation aspect (for example, conversation notice) is not a timer object. That is, in this case, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “reserved change 5” of the character reach, etc.) A determination process is performed as to whether or not to generate a dedicated timer target exclusion effect at which timing.

  In any case, when the effect mode suggested as the effect mode not targeted for the timer is a effect mode with a relatively low expectation, the effect mode suggested is a effect mode with a relatively high expectation It is desirable that the proportion of the highly anticipated performance mode appear as a timer-targeted performance is higher than that of the above. According to such a configuration, when a dedicated timer target exclusion effect that excludes a low-expected effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, at least at a specific timing among the plurality of timings, only a specific performance mode (for example, a “conversation notice” which is a low-expected performance mode) may be suggested as a performance mode that is not a timer target. It may be set as That is, in this case, when the timer-excluded effect is generated at a specific timing, it is understood that a specific effect mode (for example, “conversation notice”, which is a low-expected effect mode) is not a timer target. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by giving a sense of expectation that the timer target effect is in the high expectation effect mode.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to the present embodiment, the one effect mode is suggested as the effect not for the timer object, but under predetermined conditions, two or more effects are not for the timer object. You may make it suggest the production | presentation aspect. For example, if two low expectation effects are suggested, it will be possible to greatly enhance the game interest even though the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed.

  In addition, with respect to “display suggesting which presentation mode is not a timer target”, the count display starts within a period from when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or It is desirable to make it appear within the period until the effect that is the target of the timer is executed, and to maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, with regard to the “display that suggests which effect mode is not subject to the timer”, if the display is maintained after the effect that is subject to the timer is executed, the timer effect It becomes possible to use it as a material when remembering which presentation aspect the target of was.

  In addition, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, “display that suggests which production mode is not the target of the timer” is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is digested (for example, a specific timer When a timer effect of a type is executed, it is hidden at a predetermined timing (when a specific count value is reached before the count display reaches a predetermined value) (when the count display reaches a specific count value, etc.). May be maintained while the count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) and the effect targeted for the timer is executed. In other words, in this case, the remaining count of the count display will be digested without knowing when the “display that suggests which direction is not targeted for the timer” will be hidden, It will be expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to become silent). In order to obtain such an operational effect, for the “display indicating which presentation mode that is not a timer target” is hidden, the count display reaches a predetermined value and becomes a timer target. It is desirable to maintain the non-display state even after the appearance of the effect mode. However, even if the “indication suggesting which effect mode is not targeted for the timer” is hidden, the effect once suggested as the effect mode not targeted for the timer is displayed as the effect targeted for the timer. It is important to control so that it does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind unless the memory about the hidden display mode is forgotten. In addition, with regard to the “display that suggests which effect mode that is not a timer target” is hidden, the display after the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer mode target mode appears. After maintaining the non-display state (for example, after the elapse of a predetermined time), check that the player's memory is correct so that the symbol is displayed again at a timing before it is confirmed and stopped. It is desirable to be able to do this.

  In addition, when a timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state, a “display suggesting which effect mode that is not a timer target” appears, the predetermined effect condition is When satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while the timer effect (count display) is not executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to give a sense of tension regarding the timer effect before the count display is started, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect.

  Although it will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 198 (C) to (K) and FIGS. 200 (B) to (J), “a display indicating what kind of effect mode is not the timer target”. In addition, it is sufficient if it can be grasped that the effect mode does not occur when the count display becomes 0. As another method, for example, in addition to a method of displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and adding an X mark thereto, the conversation notice or cut-in is made before the count display reaches 0. To show that the female character or male character used to perform the conversation is dead and suggest that the conversation notice or cut-in cannot be performed, or the hold display is monochrome at the timing before the count display reaches 0 Show that the products A and B fail and become inoperable at a timing before the count display reaches 0. It is also possible to adopt a feature A operation or a method indicating that B can not be performed. The point is to prepare a special mode that can not appear at a timing before the count display reaches 0 when it is selected as a timer target effect, and at a timing before the count display reaches 0. If an effect that is not subject to timers such as conversational announcements and hold changes is executed in a special mode, it is possible to realize "a display that suggests which effect mode is not subject to timers". .

  Further, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the high expectation effect mode is easily displayed as the timer target when the count display reaches the predetermined value, as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect is not generated. By controlling in this way, it can be expected that the game entertainment is improved more suitably when the count display digests the remaining count.

  By the way, when it is suggested by the timer object exclusion effect that the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination is not a timer object, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even so, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced as compared with the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination. Therefore, if it is indicated that the winning appearance mode (special timer) is not subject to the timer, even if any other mode of appearance appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value, The variation may always be stopped at the jackpot symbol.

  Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the jackpot symbol appears even if any effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The ratio (the degree of expectation) may be the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, so that the time at which the timer target exclusion effect appears (the rest of the count The timer effect can be ended early at the time when the time is consumed. As a result, it becomes possible to shift attention to other effects even though the remaining counts of the count display are being digested, so effect design that increases the types of effects appearing per unit time Can be encouraged.

  In addition, when two or more count displays (timer effects) appear within one symbol variation period and a timer-excluded effect is executed, if an effect situation occurs in which they reach a predetermined value at different timings, the timer It is desirable to perform control so that an effect mode that is suggested not to be a timer object in the target exclusion effect does not appear as the timer object in any timer effect (count display).

  In addition, with respect to the production mode suggested that the timer target exclusion production is not targeted for the timer, even if it is at a timing different from the timing at which the count display reaches the predetermined value, it does not appear after that. It is desirable to control (control so as not to appear even as an effect that is not a timer target).

  Further, when executing the timer target exclusion effect, it may be possible to perform an advance effect as to whether or not to suggest that the timer is not targeted. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined aspect does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined aspect appears in the preceding effect.

  In this embodiment, the timer-excluded effect is executed in accordance with one of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, the timer target exclusion effect may be performed according to any of a plurality of predetermined timings, and may not necessarily be performed according to these timings. However, it is desirable that the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when it is in a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low even within the period in which the count display is being performed.

  Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), among timer types that are not permitted to execute the timer target exclusion effect over the entire period in which the count display is being executed, and of the periods in which the count display is being executed. In some of the time periods, there may be cases where execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it becomes possible to concentrate on digesting the count display and enjoy the original timer effect. It becomes like this. In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, when it is in a special period during which the timer target exclusion effect can not occur, an effect mode different from that when not in the special period is made to appear and the special period is in this special period. It can be said that it is important that the player can recognize this. On the other hand, even if it is a timer type in which execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted over the entire period in which the count display is executed, concentration on the timer effect is performed in the period before the count display is started. Therefore, it is desirable to allow execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

  In addition, it is made to control the period which makes non-display the display which suggests "the production mode which is not the timer object" mentioned above as the same period as the period when execution of the timer object exclusion effect is not permitted. Also good.

  After the situation where both the timer effect and the timer object exclusion effect are executed appears, when the predetermined timing comes, only the timer object exclusion effect is hidden and the timer object exclusion effect is hidden. Under this condition, the timer effect may be counted up. Further, in this case, after the timer effect is counted up, the timer target exclusion effect which is not displayed may be re-displayed (within the same symbol variation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to urge attention to the original timer effect while performing the timer target exclusion effect, so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  When a situation in which both the timer effect and the timer-excluded effect are executed appears, even after the timer effect is counted up and the timer-targeted effect is executed, the display of the timer-excluded effect is maintained. You may do it. According to such a configuration, even after the timer effect ends, the effect can be advanced while leaving a history of how the timer effect was executed.

  When a situation occurs in which both the timer effect and the timer-excluded effect are executed, a movable effect that moves the movable decorative accessory to a position that overlaps at least the area where the timer-excluded effect is performed in front is executed. It may be possible to According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize which effect mode is not a timer target even though both the timer effect and the timer target exclusion effect are executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the timer effect and the timer target exclusion effect. In this case, it is desirable to move the movable decoration role so as not to overlap in front view with the area where the timer effect is performed. In addition, it is desirable that the movable decoration role be returned to the original position before the timer effect is counted up.

  In the execution period of the timer effect in which the count display is performed for a predetermined time (predetermined count number) or more, the timer target exclusion effect is more effective than the execution period of the timer effect in which the count display is finished in less than the predetermined time (predetermined count number). It is desirable to increase the appearance ratio. According to such a configuration, even if the count display is performed for a relatively long time, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained as much as the expectation for the occurrence of the timer-exclusion effect is increased. become.

  For the timer-excluded effects, there may be a case where a pre-display in a different mode may be performed before a “special display mode” suggesting an effect mode that is not a timer target. May change to a "special display mode", it may indicate an effect mode that is not a timer target. However, in this case, even if the previous display in a different mode appears, it is desirable from the viewpoint of improving the fun of the game that it does not necessarily change to the "special display mode". In addition, a plurality of modes different from the “special display mode” may be prepared, and the rate of change to the “special display mode” may be different depending on which of the modes is displayed before. .

  The timer target exclusion effect may be executed only for a specific effect among a plurality of effects prepared as timer targets. According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately understand that a specific effect is not set as a timer object at the time when the timer object exclusion effect occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the plurality of effects prepared as timer targets include an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect.

  In addition, when the count display in the timer effect is performed in any of a plurality of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode, and the count display is performed in the second mode, the first process is performed. Control may be performed so that the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is performed is higher than when count display is performed in an aspect. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed according to the count display mode, and it is possible to focus attention on the effect during the count display according to the count display mode.

  The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). You may make it perform based on the special result being obtained by the predetermined | prescribed effect lottery based on the result of determination. As will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be caused to appear in the fluctuation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good.

  Also, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the timer prefetch effect is not displayed), compared to the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. After that, it is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is performed is increased, and the timer effect is preferably performed as an effect that indicates that the timer effect is to be performed. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as a first preceding aspect or a second preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation in which the timer effect is executed is not started and is still in the hold state, a specific effect mode that is not set as a timer target in the timer effect can be suggested. A specific effect mode is not targeted for the timer together with speculation such as whether the timer effect appears in the symbol change in the middle, the timer effect appears in the symbol change in the hold state, or the timer effect does not appear, etc. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the timer performance occurs.

[Timer target advance effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a predetermined effect (character B action) using the specific decoration member (character B) is counted, and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect appears is displayed. The process is executed up to a predetermined value within a period during which the design effect is performed. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, identification is performed within a period prior to the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears. By causing the effect using the decorative member to appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is to be counted (timer object advance effect).

  That is, in this case, by focusing on what effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being digested, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained from when the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value.

  FIG. 182 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). FIG. 148 is a time chart for describing the specific contents of timer target advance effect performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when any one of the specific timer types (first-out timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). A timer target advance effect is executed. In the first-out timers 4 to 6 of the first-out timers 1 to 6, as the effects of the timer, the combination of the combination A used in the “combination A operation” and the combination B used in the “combination B operation”. An effect such as an “actual article A & B operation” for operating both is performed.

  However, the timer-first-out effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first-out timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, FIG. When one of the timer types selected is selected, the timer target advance effect may be performed, or the timer type is irrelevant, and a special effect lottery based on the variation pattern type or the result of jackpot determination is special. You may make it carry out based on the result being obtained. Further, as will be described later, the timer target advance effect may appear in a variation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed afterwards (for the timer target advance effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the timer effect count display It is possible to indicate in advance which type of effect mode that appears when becomes a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target advance effect appears when the timer effect is not yet executed (even when the timer prefetch effect display is not displayed), the timer target advance effect does not appear after that. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect suggesting in advance that the timer effect is executed.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“feature B operation” or “feature A & B operation”) targeted by the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the count display having the count number of 70 seconds is started according to the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is "0". After that, an effect mode ("act B action" or "act A & B action") that is a timer object appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timer 3, 6, the display of the timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) At the same time, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed and the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed at the timing when 50 seconds have passed, and the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started. After the display becomes “0”, an effect mode (“act B action” or “act A & B action”) appears as a timer target.

  In this respect, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the timer effect is not yet executed (even when the timer advance effect is displayed, at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The first timer target advance effect may occur despite the fact that the first timer target is out. In the first timer target advance presentation effect, for example, the combination B used in the "part B operation" or the "part A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target of the first out timers 1 and 4 is at or near the first position. An effect of making a rattling vibration (function B rattling) is performed.

  In other words, "action B action", which is the effect of the timer object of the advance timer 1, is "effect of displacing the object B from the first position to the second position", and is an effect of the timer object of the advance timer 4. The "character A & B operation" is an effect of displacing the character B from the first position to the second position and displacing the character A from the third position to the fourth position, while the first operation The timer target advance effect is common in that it uses the feature B used in the effects, but effects (feature B rattle) different from any of the effects are performed. According to such a configuration, although it is at a stage before the timer effect is performed, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the timer effect will be performed thereafter, and, of course, the target effect in the timer effect is It is possible to suggest which effect mode is used (indicating that the effect is using the accessory B). In addition, in the first-time timer target first-out effect, by using the character B, the effect (character B), which is different from the effect of the timer B (character B action, character A & B motion), While suggesting that the target effect in the timer effect is the effect using the character B, it conceals how the character B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value Thus, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

  Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the second timer target is selected while the timer effect count display is being performed. A first-out effect can occur. In the second timer target advance presentation effect, for example, from the first position, the combination B used in the "part B operation" or the "part A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target of the first out timers 1 and 4. An effect (act part B middle action (small)) to be displaced to the “first halfway position between the first position and the second position” is performed.

  That is, the second timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the “act B action” and the “act A & B action” is used, but the effect different from any of these effects (the accessory) B) It is assumed that the operation (small) is performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which effect mode is the target effect. It becomes possible to suggest (indicate that it is the effect using character B). Also, in the second timer target advance effect, the effect B (operation B intermediate operation (small)) that is different from the timer object effect (object B operation, accessory A & B operation) is performed using the accessory B. As a result, while suggesting which direction the target effect of the timer effect is, the action B is operated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to conceal the game, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer object is performed.

  In addition, in the second timer target advance effect, the first timer target advance effect (latter in the vicinity of the “first position”) rather than the range of effects using the feature B (“first position” to “first Displacement from “first position” to “second position” that appears when “act B action” or “act A & B action” is performed. It becomes an aspect approaching). Therefore, by comparing the first-time timer target advance effect and the second-time timer target advance effect, the role object B is the effect for the timer target ("the title B action" and "the title A & B action"). It will be possible to provide a guessing material as to how it works.

  Further, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the timer object is displayed for the third time while the timer effect is being displayed. A first-out effect can occur. In the third timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is “first” from the first position. An effect (moving action B on the middle of the accessory B (large)) is performed to “a second intermediate position between the first intermediate position and the second position”.

  That is, although the third time timer target advance effect is also common in that it uses the character B used in "character B operation" and "character A & B operation", the effect (character B middle operation (large)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which effect mode is the target effect. It becomes possible to suggest (indicate that it is the effect using the character B). In addition, even in the third timer target advance effect, it is possible to use the character B to perform effects (character B middle operation (large)) different from the effects of the timer object (character B operation, character A & B operation) By doing this, it is possible to indicate which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, but also regarding how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is performed.

  Moreover, in the third timer target advance effect, the range of the effect using the character B (the displacement from the “first position” to the “second halfway position”) is greater than in the first and second timer target advance effects. It becomes larger, and it becomes an aspect that comes closer to the range of the effect (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") that appears when "character B operation" or "character A & B operation" is performed. There is. Therefore, by comparing the first to third timer target advance effects, the bonus item B operates in any mode in the timer target effect (“role item B operation” and “role item A & B operation”) You will be able to provide more speculative material about what to do.

  On the other hand, in the case of the first-out timers 2 and 5, also in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example 57 seconds) Respective effects such as “character B middle movement (small)” and “character B middle movement (large)” are performed as first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timer 2, 5 in any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the timer target first-out effect is performed in the situation where the count display has consumed the remaining count. Will be done.

  On the other hand, in the case of the first-out timer 3 and 6, also in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example 57 seconds) The effects such as the object B middle movement (small) and the "character B middle movement (large)" are performed as the first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timers 3 and 6, at each of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is in an unexecuted state, and the timer pre-reading effect is displayed. The first and second timer target advance effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, although the timer target advance effect is executed when the count display is in the unexecuted state, in the case of the mode of the advance output timers 1 and 4 in which even the timer advance effect is not displayed Compared to the above, the percentage of occurrences of events such as “Timer target itself was not executed despite the timer target advance effect being performed” is reduced, so the player also has a higher sense of expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer target advance effect.

  In each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target advance effects are executed. After that, after the timer target effect is executed, the symbol variation is stopped.

  In addition, in the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after the start of the symbol variation, the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” It was decided to produce using the accessory B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target advance effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are determined based on the type of variation pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, etc. The timer target advance effect may appear with a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or the timing at which the timer target advance effect is performed may be selected from these timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target advance effect or the selection ratio of the effect contents may be different depending on a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

  When realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the target of the timer based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “first-out timer 1” of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether the advance effect is to be generated or at which timing the timer target advance effect is to be generated. Next, determination processing (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is performed as to which effect mode is to be executed as the timer target advance effect at each timing at which it is determined to generate the timer target advance effect. These determination processes are performed after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 and before step S5511, for example, before each process. It is possible to do based on the result information of processing.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content (table T10) of the determination process regarding whether to generate the timer target advance effect or at which timing the timer target advance effect is generated.

  As described above, with the timer target advance effect, the timer target is within the period before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target appears, in the period in which the symbol effect is performed, It is an effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted for the timer by making the effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect of the peripheral control according to this embodiment. The MPU 1511a prepares three timings Ta1 to Ta3 as timings at which such timer target advance effect can appear.

  Therefore, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, table T10 shown in FIG. 183 is referred to, and information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to those pieces of information Based on the timing Ta1, the timer target advance effect is executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or the timer target advance effect is not executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3).

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, “does not execute timer target advance effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ none ”in the drawing)” as a selection candidate for execution of the timer target advance effect. “Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta1 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 ”in the figure)”, Execute timer target advance effect only at timing Ta2 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. Among them, “Ta2”), “Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta3 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta3 ”in the figure), and“ at timing Ta1 and Ta2 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 A timer target advance effect is executed (in the figure, “Ta1 2) "," execute timer target advance effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1 & 3" in the figure), "Timer target at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 Selection candidates are prepared such as performing advance effect (“Ta2 & 3” in the drawing) and “Performing timer object advance effect at all the timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 & 2 & 3 ”in the drawing)”.

  In the example of the table T10, when the count display is in an unexecuted state and the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target advance effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target advance effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1 & T2, the timing T1 & T3, and the timing T1 & T2 & T3. However, as described above, the timer target advance effect may be performed at these timings.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer target advance effect is executed is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. In addition, the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used for the timer target effect is “act A & B”, compared to when the specific decorative member used for the timer target effect is “act B”. The timer target advance effect is set to be performed at a high rate, and the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed is also increased.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at least at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 as a result of performing the determination process based on the table T10, the timer target advance effect appears. The determination process for the production type is further performed.

  FIG. 184 shows an example of contents (table T11) of determination processing as to what type of effect mode to be generated at the timing when performing timer target advance effect at any one timing of timing Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. Then, based on the information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to the information, any type of rendering mode (“rolling thing B rattle”, It will be judged whether "character B middle movement (small)" and "character B middle movement (large)" are made to appear at one timing that has been determined as described above.

  FIG. 185 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T12) regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at the timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 shown in FIG. Then, based on the information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to the information, any type of presentation mode (“ Object B rattle ", character B Batter → character B middle movement (small)", "character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (small)", "character B rattle → character B Midway operation (Large), "A character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (Large)", "Hole character B middle movement (Large) → character B middle operation (Large)", It will be determined whether or not to appear at each of the two determined timings.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that “actual object B rattle → actual object B rattle” appears, “actual object B rattle” is determined at any of the above two determined timings. This is executed as a timer target advance effect, and when it is determined that the “actual object B rattling → actual object B midway action (small)” appears based on the table T12, "A character B Battering" is executed as a timer target advance effect at the earlier timing of the timings, and "A character B midway operation (small)" at the timing after the two timings that have been determined as above. Will be executed as a timer target advance effect.

  FIG. 186 shows an example of the content (table T13) of the determination process as to which type the effect mode to be generated at these timings is to be performed when timer target advance effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. Then, based on the information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to the information, any type of presentation mode (“ "B B rattling" → "B B rattling" → "B B rattling" → "B B midway action (Small)" Operation (small), "character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (small)", "character B rattle → character B rattle → character B middle Operation (Large), "Character B Battering → Character B Midway Operation (Small) → Character B Midway Operation (Large)", "Character B Midway Operation (Small) → Character B Midway Operation (Small) → “Intermediate action B (Large)”, “Intermediate action B (Small) → Intermediate action B (Large) → Intermediate action B (Large)”, It is determined whether the character B middle movement (large) → character B middle movement (large) → character B middle movement (large) is made to appear at each of the three timings determined above. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that "character B. rattle → character B. rattle → character B. rattle" is made to appear, "role" is determined at any of the three timings that have been determined. The object B rattle is to be executed as a timer target advance effect, and it is determined based on the table T13 that the character B rattle → the character B middle movement (small) → the character middle B movement (large) is made to appear When one of the three timings is determined to have been made, "feature B rattle" is executed as a timer target advance effect at the first of the three determined timings, and of the three determined timings is executed. At the second timing of, “Act B during the action (small)” is executed as a timer target advance effect, and the above three timings that have been determined to be determined And executes the "character object B middle operation (large)" as the timer object first out effect in the third timing.

  In the example of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same manner (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. The determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio) depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. For example, if the determination process is performed in such a manner that the ratio at which an effect mode having a large effect range is selected increases as the timing at which the timer target advance effect is determined to appear is later, the timer It is possible to estimate how much time remains until the target effect is performed based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target advance effect. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), the timer object is operated by operating the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) in a manner that overlaps the count display of the timer effect in a front view. In order to obtain such an effect, it is preferable to make it difficult to visually recognize the count display during the execution of the first-stage effect (the action B intermediate operation (small), “the operation B intermediate operation (large))”. In this way, if the timer target advance effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target advance effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target depends on the type of effect that appears at that time. Or will feel that there will be enough time left before the timer-targeted performance will be performed (when the range of the performance is large) ( When the output range is small), it is expected that a gap from when the accurate remaining count can be grasped thereafter can be expected to have fun. At this time, the count display may be hidden during execution of the timer target advance effect, and the count display may be displayed again when the timer target advance effect ends.

  However, if the specific decoration member (in this case, the character B) is operated in a mode overlapping with the count display of the timer effect in front view, and it is difficult to visually recognize the count display during execution of the timer target advance effect ( Or, when the count display is not displayed), it is misunderstood that the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is being executed although the timer target advance effect is being executed. There is a concern Therefore, it is desirable that while the timer target advance effect is being performed, it is difficult to visually recognize the count display, while the count sound generated according to the execution of the count display is continuously performed. That is, such count sound is output when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and is not output when the effect of the timer target is performed. By continuously outputting the count sound during the execution of the effect, it is expected to suppress false recognition that the effect of the timer object is being performed.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the timer target advance effect has a larger effect range compared to the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. It is set so that the ratio at which the aspect is selected is high.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act A & B”, and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act B”. In comparison, the ratio is set such that the ratio of the effect mode having a large effect range is selected in the timer target advance effect.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, when the timing is late among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, compared to when the timing is early among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the production mode having a large production range in the timer target advance production. Is set so that the rate of selection is high. Therefore, it can be estimated based on the size of the range of the effect which appeared by the timer object advance effect, whether or not the remaining time until the effect of the timer object is performed is left little.

  Moreover, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time passes, the range of effects in the timer target advance effect (character item B rattle → character item B middle operation (small) → character item B middle movement (large) ) Is set so that the status quo (characters B rattle → character B rattles, etc.) does not occur even if there is a reverse. That is, in this case, as time passes, it becomes a mode approaching the range of the effect that appears when the "subject B action" or "off article A & B action" for the timer is performed. By confirming the effect, it is possible to recognize that the remaining time until the “object B operation” and the “object A & B operation” to be performed by the timer are performed is reduced.

  Further, in the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used during the timer target effect (for example, the accessory B operation) is always used. For example, the timer target advance effect may be performed using a different decorative member (for example, the accessory A) without using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used during the accessory B operation). That is, in this case, the timer target advance effect functions as an effect that suggests the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value with a predetermined accuracy. And when realizing such a timer target advance effect, the type of effect to appear as the timer target advance effect (the accessory B rattle, the accessory B midway action (small), the accessory B halfway action (large)) In addition, it is desirable that the ratio (accuracy) that appears when the type of the suggested effect reaches the predetermined value depends on the number of executions. For example, when the type of production (action B midway action (large)) with a large production range appears, the timer target advance is compared to when the type of production (composition B with rattling) with a small production range appears. The effect using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the effect (the accessory B operation, the accessory A & B operation) may be increased when the count display reaches a predetermined value. When the number of executions of the timer target advance effect in the variation is large, the effect (special item B) using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the timer target advance effect is smaller than when the execution number is small. The rate at which the action, the character A & B action) appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of effects modes including “the accessory B operation” and “the accessory A & B operation” (“the accessory B operation”, “the accessory A & B”). Performing an effect using a specific decorative member (an accessory B) as a timer target advance effect on the premise that any of the effects other than “operation” can appear. It was. However, on the premise that only the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” is prepared as an effect mode using the accessory B, a specific decorative member (object) An effect using B) may be performed.

  For example, as an effect mode using the accessory B, only the “object A & B operation” can appear as an effect for the timer target, and the specific decorative member (the accessory B) is used as the timer target advance effect. When the used effect is performed, only a part of the decoration member (the accessory B) used in the timer target effect (the accessory A & B operation) is used in the timer target advance effect. That is, in this case, it is suggested that the “effect using the accessory B” appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target advance effect, while the “effect using the accessory B” is displayed. It becomes more difficult to predict the whole picture (using the accessory A in addition to the accessory B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the effect of the accessory B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by a plurality of timer target advance effects (the accessory B rattle → the accessory B halfway operation (small) → the accessory B halfway operation (large)). Even if an effect approaching the range is executed and its prediction is possible, the presence of the effect A as well as its presence range is concealed, so the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value It becomes possible to suitably maintain the content of the target effect (the accessory A & B operation) in a concealed state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as a timer target advance effect.

  According to such a configuration, the timer target advance presentation effect is performed using only a part (character item B) of the prizes A and B used in the "character article A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer subject. In addition to the above, in the timer target advance presentation, the presentation range of the prize B in the "figure A & B action" using only a part (figure B) of the prizes A and B used in the "figure A & B action" The effect (action in middle of the character B (small), movement in the middle of the character B (large)) appears only in a part of. Then, after such a small effect range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer target first-out effects, only the feature B in a larger effect range is performed by performing the "feature A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer object. Since the effect using not only the feature A but also comes to appear, by performing the timer target advance effect when the remaining count is being digested, the novelty when the timer object is performed is lost It is expected that such things will be maintained properly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target advance effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to completely match each other, as long as it can be suggested by the timer target advance effect that which effect mode appears as the effect of the timer object. For example, in the case where a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged in a front view as fan-shaped features, This is a case where the specific decorative member used in the above is a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the specific decorative member used in the timer target performance is a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, a fan-shaped accessory was used as a timer target advance effect at a stage before the effect using a fan-shaped accessory was performed as a timer target effect (while the count display was being executed). It is possible to produce an effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, although the special product is used as the specific decoration member, the display means may be used as the specific decoration member instead. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the effect using the above-mentioned feature is realized by enlarging the range (range of effect) in which the display appears or making the display content different. It is possible.

  The invention according to the above embodiment refers to the period from when a specific count display (timer effect) is started to when it is ended, before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). If a specific value (for example, "43" displayed at timing Ta2 by the advance timer 1 having a count number of "50") which is to be counted on the It can be executed. In this regard, the count display mode may be changed within a period from when the count display of the specific value appears until the count display of the predetermined value appears. For example, the count display is displayed large immediately after the appearance of the count display of a specific value at which an effect using a specific decorative member is started, but when a predetermined time has elapsed, this is displayed in a normal size (small) If this is done, it can be suggested that the effect using the specific decorative member is started even while the count display is being performed. In addition, if the mode in which the count display is displayed as a specific value and the mode in which the count display is displayed as a predetermined value are different from each other, the effect using the specific decorative member is the number of times You will be able to suggest that there is.

  Further, in the above presentation example, after the count display of a specific value (for example, "43" displayed at timing Ta2 by the advance timer 1 having the count number of "50") appears and the predetermined value (here, Within the period until the count display of “0” appears, it may be possible to generate a period during which the count display is not displayed. According to such a configuration, the “representation using a specific decorative member” performed when the specific value is displayed is executed as the effect of the timer target, and the timer rendition has already ended. The sense of apprehension such as or not can be remembered, and the sense of tension can be suitably maintained while the count display is being performed. However, it is desirable to set the time for which the count display is not displayed to be shorter than the time for which the count display is displayed, in order not to excessively impart such anxiety. .

  In addition, in the above-mentioned effect example, even when the effect of the timer target is executed when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the count display is not displayed but is not displayed. Here, the display may be continued with "0"). That is, in this case, the effect of the timer target is executed while the display is continued while the count display remains at the predetermined value (here, "0"), and this is performed as the effect of the timer target. It can be easily recognized. In addition, if it is possible to further generate another effect different from the timer target effect while the count display is continued with the predetermined value (here, “0”) being displayed, the timer target effect is 2 It becomes possible to make it appear as above, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In the above presentation example, a specific value (e.g., the advance timer 1 having a count number of "50") which is counted before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here "0"). The "specific decoration member" which can be rendered even when it is displayed "43") may be provided on the door frame 3 side.

  In the above presentation example, the predetermined value (in this case, “0” after the count display becomes a specific value (for example, “43” displayed at timing Ta2 by the advance timer 1 having the count number of “50”) ) May take a relatively long time and may take a relatively short time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect during the period from when the count display becomes a specific value to when the count value becomes a predetermined value, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  The effect using the specific decoration member may also be performed as an effect (for example, an effect after an operation according to an effect reception by an operation) that is unrelated to the timer effect. However, in the case of being executed in relation to the timer effect and in the case of being executed as the effect unrelated to the timer effect, the display content when the effect is executed, and the operation mode of the specific decorative member itself It is desirable to make at least one of the two different.

  As described above, the rendering using the specific decoration member may be performed in a state in which the timer rendering has not yet started (for example, in advance timing 1 in the advance timers 1 and 4). However, when the effect using the specific decorative member is in a state where the timer effect has not been started yet (for example, the timing Ta1 in the advance timer 1) comes, and the count display in the timer effect has a specific value (For example, when it comes to "43" displayed at timing Ta2 by the advance timer 1 having a count number of "50"), the count display in the timer effect has a predetermined value (here, "0") When it is assumed that it will be performed when it comes to “When the timer effect is started and the timer display is started and the count display becomes a specific value,” Is desired to be shorter than the “time from when the count display reaches a specific value until it reaches a predetermined value”. Arbitrariness. That is, in the "period from when the count display becomes the specific value to the predetermined value", the count display by the timer effect is being performed, and "the effect using the specific decoration member" is the "timer effect" It is easy to understand that it is easy to understand that it is carried out in relation to the above, in the "period from the predetermined timing to when the count display becomes a specific value", "representation using a specific decorative member" It can be said that it is important to relatively shorten the time in the period because there are few production elements to be linked.

  Incidentally, it is desirable that the “effect using a specific decorative member” performed as the timer target advance effect be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the specified decorative member is a prize, control is made to return the specified decorative member to the original position after the elapse of a predetermined time, and when the specified decorative member is the display means, after the predetermined time has elapsed, Control to hide the display as the timer target advance effect is performed. At this time, it is desirable that the predetermined time required for the timer target advance effect be shorter than the time required for the effect (effect for the timer object) appearing when the count display reaches the predetermined value. As described above, by realizing different presentation modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target advance presentation, the specific decorative member used in the production of the timer target can be kept at a level of unsatisfactory satisfaction. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment by waiting for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is not displayed, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A operation, special timer, cut-in B, feature B It is possible to execute a count effect in which at least one of the motion etc. appears. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches the predetermined value and the display is not displayed, the first effect mode (for example, conversation announcement) appears among the plurality of effect modes. Even then, the count display is redisplayed after this and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after the count display is re-displayed, the count display is not displayed again after a predetermined time elapses, and a second effect mode (for example, a character A action (character product A notice)) appears among the plurality of effect modes. It is like (resurrection timer production).

  That is, in this case, after making it appear as if the first effect mode is the timer target (count object), the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect is further continued, and the second effect different from the first effect mode is generated. Even if the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears and this is hidden, After that, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target is changed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. In the situation, it is determined that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and “conversation notice” is performed at the previous timing and “act A action 1” is performed at the later timing. FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the revival timer effect performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “No timer character reach” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (a plurality of not only the character A action 1 but a plurality may be selected) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is performed in (see FIG. 161). However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the recovery timer effect is not performed, and the recovery timer effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing regarding may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), assuming that the timer type of “character product A operation 1” is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the next processing as the next processing. The selected “object A action 1” includes a plurality of effect modes (“object A action 1-1”, “object A action 1-2”, “object A action 1” including the mode of the resurrection timer effect. A determination process is performed as to which of “-3” and “character article A operation 1-4”) is to be executed. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Of the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of "character product A action 1-1", 20 seconds after the count display having a count number of 40 seconds is started according to the start of symbol variation The "conversation announcement" which is not the timer target is executed when it passes, and it becomes the timer target under the condition that the predetermined value is reached and the count display is not displayed when 40 seconds pass. The “object A operation (object A notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-2", after the count display having a count number of 20 seconds is started according to the start of the symbol variation, a predetermined value is set when 20 seconds have elapsed. When the count display is not displayed and the "conversation anticipation" (the first presentation mode) not subject to the timer is executed while the count display is not displayed, the count annunciator The timer effect is to be displayed again, and the timer effect will be continued, and after the predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed since the count display having a count number of 20 seconds has been started), the count display is hidden again The “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is a timer object, is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-3", a predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have elapsed after the count display having a count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation While the count display is not displayed, the notice E2 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-target notice that can not be the effect of the timer target, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) is ended. When it is done, the count display will be redisplayed and the timer effect will continue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have passed since the count display with the 12-second count started), the count display Is not displayed again, and the “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is the object of the timer, is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-4", a predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have elapsed after the count display having a count number of 8 seconds is started in synchronization with the start of symbol variation While the count display is not displayed, the notice E1 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-target notice that can not be the effect of the timer target, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is When it is ended, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect is continued, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of the count display having a count number of 8 seconds), counting is performed. The display is again hidden, and the "subject A operation (subject A advance notice)" (second presentation mode) which is the timer target is executed.

  That is, among a plurality of presentation modes prepared in correspondence with the “object A operation 1”, the “object A operation 1-2”, the “object A operation 1-3”, and the “object A operation” The aspect of “1-4” corresponds to the rebirth timer effect. In these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden between the time when the count display is started and the time when the timer target effect (the accessory A operation) is performed. Since the notice of conversation, notice E2, or notice E1) appears, it is possible to make it seem as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

  In this respect, in the mode of "character article A action 1-2", a plurality of effect modes that can be adopted as a timer target (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut in A, character article A action, special timer, cut in B Among the role B, etc.), the effect (first notice mode) of the effect (conversation announcement) whose jackpot expectation is lower than the effect (feature A action) that is the timer target I will do it. That is, in this case, after it is shown as if a presentation with a low probability of big hit (conversation announcement) appears as a presentation of the timer object, it is indicated that the presentation (conversation announcement) is not a presentation of the timer object (count display Re-display), an effect (act A action) having a higher degree of big hit expectation than the effect (conversation notice) comes to appear as an effect (second effect mode) of the timer object (count display is not performed again). Display), it is expected that the recreation of the game will be improved by such reversible performance.

  In addition, in the mode of “act A action 1-3” or “act A action 1-4”, there are a plurality of performance modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F). Or the like) as a target (first effect mode). In such a configuration, when the effect mode (in this case, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that can not be adopted as the timer object appears as if it is the effect of the timer object, the timer effect is not ended at this timing. Will be suggested to continue. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of the “act A action 1-4” is executed is low in expectation of itself, but the timer effect is continued without being terminated at this timing. By functioning as an effect that suggests, it becomes possible to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment. It should be noted that a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the notice E1, the notice E2, the notice E3, the notice F, etc.) that cannot be adopted as the timer object can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

  In addition, in each of the “object A operation 1-2”, “object A operation 1-3”, and “object A operation 1-4” according to this embodiment, it appears when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), the peripheral control MPU 1511a has set a 40 second effect timer secretly in control, and it counts Even when the display is temporarily hidden, by internally performing processing for continuously updating the effect timer, when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display, the effect of the timer object (( The feature A action is made to appear. According to such a configuration, any one of “Combination A operation 1-1”, “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” is selected. Even when the accessory A operation 1 is executed in the aspect, it is possible to hide the count display again at the same timing from the start of the change and to cause the effect of the timer (event A operation) to appear.

  And, in such a revival timer effect, "count display which appeared before being hidden once" and "count display which is once again displayed after being hidden once" have different count digests It is important to make it possible to recognize that the same count digest is being used, not to indicate that the timer performance has continued in the middle. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of “actual object A operation 1-2”, when the count display with the count number of 20 seconds becomes “0 second”, the count display is not displayed. The “conversation notice” is executed, but after the “conversation notice” is completed, the count display is displayed again with a minus sign so that “0 seconds” when the display is hidden is displayed. It is intended to express how the count is not finished and this is continuing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of "character product A action 1-2", the count digest is kept secret while the count display is not displayed, The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count is digested for the time that has been hidden. More specifically, in the mode of "character A action 1-2", the count display is hidden at "0 seconds" and the count display is displayed again after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is redisplayed, the count digestion by minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2 seconds”.

  In each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol variation is stopped after the timer target effect is thus executed.

  When realizing such a resurrection timer effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the result of the jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of timer effect (for example, “Role A action 1” of the character reach). Thus, a determination process (see FIG. 187 (b)) is performed as to whether the revival timer effect is to be generated or in which aspect the revival timer effect is to be generated. Note that this determination processing is performed based on the result information of each previous process, for example, after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 and before step S5511 is performed. Is possible.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows that “boy A action 1” includes the mode of the revival timer effect when the timer type of “boy A action 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) It is a figure which shows the example about the content (table T14) of the determination process about which of the some production | presentation aspect is performed.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when “Character A action 1” of the character reach is selected, the “act A action 1” is changed to “the accessory A action 1-1”. , “A character operation A 1-2”, “character object A operation 1-3”, and “character A operation 1-4”.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b) and allocates the winning information, the information regarding the variation pattern type, the information regarding the timer type, and the information. Based on the effect random number, any mode of "character item A action 1-1", "character item A action 1-2", "character item A action 1-3", "character item A action 1-4" With this, it is selected whether to execute the timer effect.

  Then, as a result, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in one of the "character product A operation 1-3" and the "character product A operation 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. Based on the determined type, the type of non-target notice is determined. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be performed in the mode of "character product A operation 1-3", it is determined that at least the notice E2 is performed as the non-target notice in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. Therefore, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of "character product A operation 1-4", at least the notice E1 is executed as the non-target notice in the process of steps S5512 and S5525. A decision will be made.

  In the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect for the effect mode (conversation announcement) that can be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode (notices E1 and E2) which can not be adopted as the timer object The big hit expectation is set to be higher than when the targeted revival timer effect is executed. In addition, when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode with a high degree of expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that can not be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode that can not be adopted as the timer object (notice The big hit expectation is set to be higher than when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode having a low degree of expectation among E1, E2) is executed. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the revival timer effect is executed is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. Is set to

  According to such a revival timer effect, a low-expectation effect mode (first effect mode) appears once by non-displaying the count display, which temporarily gives a disappointment to the player, but subsequently counts The display is redisplayed and this is continued, and the count display continued after the predetermined time is not displayed again, and an effect mode (second effect mode) having a high expectation level appears. This makes it possible to give surprises and surprises to the player who was paying attention to the count display temporarily while giving a sense of regret by continuing and reversing the count. Can be suppressed.

  In this sense, after the high-expected presentation aspect (the second presentation aspect) is executed as the presentation using two different decorative members, the low presentation level (the first presentation aspect) is obtained. It is desirable from the viewpoint of expressing the reversibility by the resurrection timer rendition that the rendition timer rendition effect is performed by using only one of the two different decoration members (or the decoration member related thereto). In this case, one of the two different decorative members may not necessarily be completely identical between when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, as a fan-shaped character, a “relatively small fan-shaped character” and a “relatively large fan-shaped character” are disposed overlapping in a front view, the first effect The decorative member used in the embodiment is a "relatively small fan-shaped character", and the decorative member used in the second rendering mode is a "relatively large fan-shaped character". However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the presentation performed as the first presentation mode has a lower degree of expectation.

  In addition, in such a revival timer effect, “count display that appeared before being temporarily hidden” and “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed” are different counts. In order to make it possible to recognize that the same count digestion is being performed instead of digesting, the count sound is "hidden", even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continue to execute over the count display that has appeared before being executed and the count display that has been once hidden and then re-displayed.

  In this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once within a period during which one symbol variation is performed. However, the revival timer effect is performed a plurality of times within a period during which one symbol variation is performed. It may be performed over time. At this time, each time the count display is hidden, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed. Then, as the number of times that the resurrection timer effect is executed increases within the period in which one symbol variation is performed, an effect aspect (such as effect type and effect content (a cut-in aspect, etc.)) having a high degree of expectation as an effect of timer object. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing high.

  Further, in the resurrection timer effect, the time until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears after the count display is hidden and the count display redisplayed again is not displayed. By making the length different from the time until the second effect mode (character A action) appears, it is possible to recognize whether or not the effect of the timer object is appearing. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, in order to improve the game interest as a timer effect, when a revival timer effect intended for a effect mode (conversation announcement) that can be adopted as a timer object is executed, an effect mode that can not be adopted as a timer object. Compared with the case where the resurrection timer effect for the notices E1 and E2 is executed, an effect aspect (such as effect type and effect content (a cut-in aspect or the like)) having a higher degree of expectation appears as an effect for the timer object. It is desirable to control the ratio to be high. In addition, when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode with a high degree of expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that can not be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode that can not be adopted as the timer object (notice A rendering mode (a type of rendering or a rendering content (a cut-in that has a higher degree of expectation) as a timer target effect than when a resurrection timer effect for a rendering mode with a low degree of expectation is executed among E1 and E2). It is desirable to control so that the rate at which the aspect)) appears.

  Further, in the revival timer effect according to this embodiment, the first effect mode appears after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is not displayed, and the first effect is displayed. When the mode is ended, the count display is redisplayed and this is counted minus, and it is decided that the second effect mode is made to appear after this reaches a specific negative value and is made non-display, but the count display If the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear under the non-display mode, the count display is not displayed when the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear. Each count value at this time may be set appropriately.

[Timer target suppression control]
In other words, the effect that is the target of the timer effect (count object) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not performed. For example, the specific effect that is executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern Production (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation, etc.), predetermined production (for example, hold change, etc.) executed at the timing of winning a prize Prepared. However, among these, a new prize is awarded when the count display reaches a predetermined value in a situation where the “specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern” is the target of the timer effect (count object). If a certain effect (for example, a change in hold) occurs due to accidental occurrence, a predetermined effect has occurred in relation to the count display reaching a predetermined value as the target of the timer effect. Or it may be difficult to know if the prescribed effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect. ) Missed specific effects (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action, etc.) Rikane no.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a specific type of timer effect with the specific effect as a timer is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the specific type of timer effect reaches a predetermined value When there is a relatively large first period, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed when a new winning occurs, but the first period ends, and the count display in the specific type of timer effect is a predetermined value. When the remaining time until reaching the second period is relatively small, even if a new winning occurs, display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is not permitted (timer target suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect with a specific effect as a timer is executed, the count display is displayed as the target of the timer effect while allowing the generation of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target due to the occurrence of a new prize. It becomes difficult to grasp whether a predetermined effect has occurred in relation to reaching a predetermined value or whether a predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused) Can be suitably avoided.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object control control performed when a specific change number is chosen.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the specific effect that is the target of the timer appears. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a period from when the symbol variation starts until the specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0 seconds") (First period) allows the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer when a new winning occurs (permissible period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") In the predetermined period (second period), it is assumed that timer target suppression control is performed that does not allow display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target even if a new winning is generated (suppression period).

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, the “count display indicates a specific count value (a second period) during which the display of the predetermined effect is not permitted. For example, the period from "5 seconds") to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and the specific effect as the timer target is executed (ended) It will be continued until "a period after the specific effect is over". That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and the specific effect which is the timer object is generated, the generation of the effect itself is suppressed, so it is the timer object The specific effect will function as a valuable effect occurrence opportunity, and the interest for the specific effect is improved, and the game interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) is suitably maintained. That is expected.

  However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the end of the specific effect as the timer target. At this time, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is not permitted is ended.According to such a timer target suppression control, the symbol variation is stopped after the suppression period ends. In the period until it is made, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed again when a new winning occurs.

  By the way, as described above, in the suppression period, even if a new winning is generated, the display of the predetermined effect which is not the timer target is not permitted. However, in this case, there is a concern that a game that does not generate a new prize is performed by the player during the suppression period in which display of a predetermined effect is not permitted even if a new prize is generated, and as a result, the speed of game progress per unit time May be detrimental to the hall side.

  Therefore, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not allow the display of the predetermined effect resulting from this even if a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect which is not permitted In this case, instead of discarding the display of the predetermined effect itself, control is performed to delay (carry over) the timing of the display until the end of the suppression period. According to such a configuration, although display of a predetermined effect resulting from a new winning being generated is not permitted even when a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect is suitably performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period.

  In addition, when a new winning is generated within the allowable period and a predetermined effect is displayed, the sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect, but a new winning is generated within the suppression period and predetermined. In the case where the display of the effect is to be delayed (carried over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to perform the acoustic output in accordance with the display when the display of the predetermined effect is performed. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be secretly performed at a timing different from that of the normal (at the time of winning), and when the predetermined effect displayed while the player does not know is surprised It is expected to improve the game entertainment interest by granting.

  In addition, for the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the execution period of the effect that is the timer object is started to the timing after the execution period is ended, the timer object is It is desirable to control so that it does not necessarily occur when an effect is performed.

  For example, when a timer effect is performed, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability, and when a big hit is won in the big hit determination, it is compared with when it is lost (losed) in the big hit If the rate at which such a suppression period occurs is increased, the predetermined effect resulting from the winning will occur when the winning is generated aiming at the timing before and after the effect of the timer target is performed. It will be prompted to confirm whether or not it is in a situation where a suppression period has occurred and there is a high possibility of winning a big hit, and a new prize is generated when it is in the suppression period It will be suppressed that the game which is not made is performed.

  Also, the rate at which the suppression period occurs is made different depending on the type of presentation mode (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut in B, role B action, etc.) that appears as effects of the timer object In this way, whether or not the predetermined effect resulting from the winning occurs is generated when the winning is generated within the period before the timer-targeted rendering is performed (the suppression period is generated and the effect of the specific type is generated) Will be prompted to confirm whether there is a high possibility of being executed as a timer target), and it will be suppressed that a game that does not generate a new winning will be performed when in the suppression period Will come to be.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) referred to in the timer target suppression control when making the rate at which the suppression period occurs different according to the type of effect mode appearing as a timer target effect. .

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc. are prepared as timer target effects. .

  In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the lower the jackpot expectation degree, the lower the rate of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect. It is set so that the ratio which generates the suppression period before and behind execution of the production for timer object is so high that it is a presentation mode with high degree.

  More specifically, when the timer-targeted production is “conversation notice”, the suppression period is not necessarily generated, and when the timer-targeted production is “cut-in A”, the suppression period is 20%. When the effect of the timer object is "cut in B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect of the timer object is "character item A operation" In some cases, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80% when the effect targeted by the timer is "action B". When the effect of is a "special timer", a suppression period is always generated.

  According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation degree of jackpot, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect, so that a predetermined effect is generated due to a new winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility of missing a rendering mode with a high expectation of a big hit. To put it the other way, the lower the expectation level for jackpots is, the more likely it will be missed, so when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the appearance mode with low expectation level for jackpots appears. It becomes possible to proceed with the production while keeping what is being kept secret, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained until the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, the generation ratio of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to generate the suppression period at the same rate if the type of the effect mode appearing as the effect of the timer target is the same both when winning the big hit and when it is lost (losing) .

  By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the effect of the timer object is "hold change", the suppression period is always generated despite the effect aspect that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. It is like that. That is, the "hold change" according to this embodiment can be displayed as a predetermined effect which is not the timer target when a new winning is generated, as well as being able to be displayed as the specific effect which is the timer target. Therefore, if there is a case where the suppression period does not occur when such a "hold change" occurs, the "hold change (pattern during change) as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Of the change in the display of suspension corresponding to) and “change in the suspension of display (change of the display of suspension corresponding to the design on hold)” due to new winnings, and there is a concern that their confusion will occur is there. Therefore, it is desirable that the suppression period is always generated when the timer target effect is "hold change". However, as described above, as for "hold change", as with "conversational notice", the possibility to miss this is increased to make the presentation mode with a low hit probability when the count display reaches a predetermined value. If the aim is to aim for the effect to proceed while concealing what has appeared, it may be controlled so that the suppression period does not occur even when the effect of the timer object is "hold change".

  In the example of table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), although the rate at which the suppression period occurs is made different depending on the type of effect mode that appears as effects of the timer object, in addition to this, the effect of the same type Even if it is an aspect, the ratio at which the suppression period occurs may be further varied depending on the timer type determined in the count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S 5510).

  For example, even if "conversation announcement" is selected as the timer target effect, the "conversation announcement" is shown in "conversation announcement 1 to 4" shown in FIG. 161, and further shown in FIG. It is desirable that the occurrence ratio of the suppression period be made different depending on which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 corresponds to. In this case, the generation ratio may include 100% or 0%.

  In addition, the effect of the timer target is any of "conversation notice", "hold change", "cut-in A", "special timer", "feature A action", "cut in B", and "feature thing B action" When this is the case, the suppression period may be generated at a predetermined ratio not only for a predetermined period before and after execution of the timer target effect but also for the entire period from the start of symbol variation to the termination. In particular, when the performance of the timer target is the “special timer” with the highest expectation level for jackpots, the above-described suppression period must be generated over the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. You may try to increase the sense of expectation for being performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if a new winning occurs while the suppression period is in progress, the display of the predetermined effect resulting from this is not discarded, and the timing of the display is the end of the suppression period. Although the control to delay (carry over) is performed, the display of the predetermined effect itself may not be discarded.

[Timer production targeting the new timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, etc.) prepared as candidates for count while the count display is being performed within a period in which symbol effects are being performed It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which at least one of cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc. appears. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the “specific effect mode” is prepared as one of the plurality of effect modes appearing when the count display reaches the predetermined value, and then the “specific effect mode” is generated. When the “mode” appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) until then is newly started.

  That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in a form divided into the first count display and the second count display, the time required for the timer effect as a whole is the same. The time required to digest one count display (the first count display or the second count display) can be shortened as such, thus eliminating monotony while the count display is being digested and making the game entertaining It will be expected to suppress the decline of

  FIG. 189 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect for the new timer performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to “No timer character reach” are selected in the situation It is a chart. FIG. 189 (b) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507) is made. Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect with the new timer performed when the variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected in the situation It is a chart.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for convenience of explanation, only one pattern is prepared for the type of “timer effect with a new timer as an effect” for each variation pattern. A plurality of types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) having different generation timings (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started from the middle of symbol variation) and end timings are prepared. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

  In the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect” shown in FIG. 189 (a), first, a first count display with a count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is not displayed, the “specific effect mode” that is the timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific presentation mode" appears, a new count display (the second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) is displayed anew from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far To start this (new timer). In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared up to that time is always performed when the “specific effect mode” appears. ) To be displayed and started. However, even if the first count display has become a predetermined value in this way, execution of the effect that is targeted for the timer is only started by newly starting another count display (second count display) other than this. May feel as if they were deposited, and there is a concern about the decline in entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the "timer effect directed to a new timer effect" according to this embodiment, first, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. “Failure production” that does not show any expectation is to appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect having an expectation as an effect of the timer target (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut-in B, role A disappointing rendering situation will be produced as if it failed to generate an object B motion etc.), but in this rendering situation, the second count display will be newly started, so As a player, he / she feels that he / she can challenge the failed timer effect again, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game through the intonation of such feelings.

  However, in “Timer effect with new timer as effect target” shown in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after “Fail effect effect” is not ended within the period of symbol variation, and the remaining count is displayed. The symbol stop (big hit symbol or lose symbol) is performed without digesting. According to such a configuration, even if the player looks forward to what effect the expectation will appear when the second count display reaches the predetermined value (here, “0”), the count digest is performed. Since it will be possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation at the point when the symbol stop (winning win of the big hit) is displayed earlier, without causing any decline in the entertainment interest of the game The timer effect can be ended. In the symbol stop that appears before the second count display is completely exhausted, in addition to the lost symbol, a jackpot symbol can also appear, especially when the jackpot symbol appears, there is no entertainment at all There will be no decline.

In other words, in "Timer production with the new timer set as the production target" shown in FIG. 189 (a), almost no symbol fluctuation period (at least half of the pattern fluctuation occurs even though the timer target does not appear at all Count display (first count, second count) over the above period)
-In addition to performing an effect (the effect that the first count reaches a predetermined value) that makes it possible that an effect with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle stage,
・ By having a configuration in which the newly started second count display is designed to stop the design with the count remaining, the expectation that a timer-targeted production will soon occur will be achieved. It can be sustained over a period of time. In addition, as described above, it is a mechanism that suitably suppresses a decrease in the entertainment enjoyment attributed to the fact that no production with expectation is generated in either the first count display or the second count display. It is street.

  On the other hand, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect” shown in FIG. 189 (b), as in the example shown in FIG. 189 (a), the count number of 30 seconds coincides with the start of symbol variation. The first count display having the is started. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and non-displayed, the “specific presentation mode (failure presentation)” that is the timer target appears. Thus, after the "specific presentation mode (failure presentation)" appears, another count display (the second count display having a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is also the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) within the symbol variation period. It is supposed to be. In this respect, “the timer effect targeted at the new timer” means, as described above, an expectation that the timer object will soon be produced without any effect having an expected degree as the timer object. Since it has a technical feature in sustaining, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of symbol variation, an effect with an expected degree should appear. I do not. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) within the symbol variation period, the timer target is used only for processing that does not cause the effect having the expectation to be made to appear. The expectation that the production will soon occur cannot be sustained.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol fluctuation period, the second The count display is not hidden and is maintained as it is at a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the symbol is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained, from the player's side, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect (effect to be counted) appears Since it seems to be in a proper state, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of anticipation that the timer target effect will soon occur until the time the symbol stop is performed. Even in such a configuration, the interest regarding the big hit expectation can be completely lost when the symbol stop (hit a big hit) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, it is possible to end the timer effect without causing any decrease in the game interest and without causing any effect.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for the player who has already confirmed "the timer effect for which the new timer is the effect target", when the failure effect or the second count display occurs, nothing happens. There is a concern that it will be overlooked that there will be no production. Therefore, only when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display has digested the remaining count (including the period in which the display of the state where the second count display has reached the predetermined value is maintained), A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Or you may make it the ratio which a special production produces increases. According to such a configuration, the second count display is different from the first count display in counting purpose, and is the big hit symbol stopped within a period in which the second count display is remaining counting the count? It becomes possible to add interest of no. In this sense, in the first count display and the second count display, the display modes (form, position, size, etc.) may be made different from each other.

  The special effect may be generated when the second count display leaves a remaining count and this is in a running state. However, in view of generating a special effect as the effect corresponding to the second count display, the second count display is not displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (the second count display remains the remaining count) It is desirable to execute a special rendering after hiding the state even if it is not displayed. And about the special production performed in this way, it is desirable to display this continuously including the execution period of a big hit game and the game period after that. That is, in this case, the special effect is ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process related to the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect”.

  The special effect may be generated within the period of symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable to execute special effects after making the jackpot symbol appear (for example, displayed in a state of temporary stop) within the symbol variation period and making the second count display non-display. However, the jackpot symbol may be displayed (for example, displayed in a state of temporary stop) within the period of symbol variation, and the second count display may be hidden after a special effect is performed.

  Then, if the generation ratio (including 100%) of special effects is increased when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is remaining and the count is being digested, the symbol stop is a line. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before it is displayed, the second count display may be hidden and the symbol may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, while the second count display is being performed, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest. However, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value and this is not displayed, even if a big hit symbol appears in the symbol stop after the symbol is not displayed, the rate at which the special effect is generated remains relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

  When realizing such a “timer effect with a new timer as a production target”, a “failure production” that does not show any expectation degree is caused to appear particularly when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. This is different from the case of the above-mentioned timer effect in which other effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut in B, character B action, etc.) appear (In addition to the lottery), the “timer effect using the new timer” will be performed based on the fact that the specified effect condition that has nothing to do with the result of the jackpot determination or the type of variation pattern is satisfied. It is desirable to make a decision on That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is stopped, both the big hit and the lose can be stopped (a situation where the big hit symbol may appear as the probability of the big hit lottery), It is possible to generate a timer effect "to be an object of the effect, whereby it is possible to cause a failure effect having no degree of expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the timer target effect will soon occur without causing any effect with the expectation level to appear as the timer target over the period in which the symbol variation is performed.

  However, if it is not required to exhibit such an operational effect, the “specific production mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure production without any expectation. , It may be executed as another effect mode (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as the above-described timer effect for causing other effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut in B, character B action, etc.) to appear The “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” is executed.

  In FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first variation pattern (without timer, character reach) is selected, the second count display started after “failure effect” is a symbol before it reaches a predetermined value. The variation is stopped, and in FIG. 189 (b), in the example where the second variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (no timer, character reach) is selected, it may be possible for a pattern in which symbol variation is stopped to appear after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. In the example in which the variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. In addition, when a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, “a timer effect directed to a new timer” may be performed.

  Also, for the first count display, it is possible to execute the count display having a count number shorter than the second count display which can be stopped during the execution of the count display. It is desirable to maintain a sense of expectation to do.

  In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the “failure effect” is performed, if the symbol display is stopped before the count display is digested, either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol may appear However, in the case of the normal count display that occurs independently of the “failure effect”, it is desirable that the jackpot symbol always appears when the symbol display is stopped before the count display is finished digesting.

  The first count display has a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds) as the count number, and may be executed in any one of them. The first count display and the second count display are different count displays that are executed only in one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the count number executed in the first count display. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is executed.

  Further, in view of the fact that the first count display and the second count display are executed as different count displays, the period when the first count display is performed and the period when the second count display is performed Processing to differentiate the display mode (including different colors and effects) of the background image etc. according to (including the period in which the display has reached the predetermined value). desirable. In such a process, even if the reach effect is generated during the period when the first count display is performed and the background image is shifted to the reach effect, the second count display is executed until then. The second count display is executed even when the reach effect is generated and the background image for reach effect is generated within the period in which the second count display is performed. The display mode different from that which has appeared at that time is maintained even during the reach production period, and is maintained until the second count display is not displayed.

  In addition, in the "timer effect directed to a new timer" according to this embodiment, there is no particular "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed. "Failure effect" which does not show the degree of expectation is made to appear, but in place of this, another count start suggestion which suggests that the count display different from the count display which has been executed until now is newly started An effect may appear. In this case, the expectation may be indicated by the separate count start suggestion effect, or the expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action) prepared as candidates for counting within a period in which symbol effects are being performed , Cut-in B, accessory B action, etc.), a timer effect in which a count display is performed up to a predetermined value for the timing at which it appears. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display has a predetermined value before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (1st timer mode display) with a relatively low proportion of appearances of presentation modes (representation type and presentation contents (cut-in mode etc.)) with high expectation as effects of timer target when becoming In such a way that one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) having a relatively high proportion of the appearance of a high expectation degree as a timer target effect can be displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Yes (Timer mode effect).

  That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is consumed, any one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage regarding the timer effect is displayed, so this is a predetermined value after the count display is started. It will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until it becomes (here, "0").

  FIG. 190 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). Timer mode effect that is performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected and it is determined that “cut-in B1” is performed as an effect for the timer. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (in fact, there are a plurality of cut-ins, not just cut-in B1) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161) In addition, the following processing relating to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer mode effect is not performed even if any timer type is determined, instead of performing the following processing relating to the timer mode effect. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 190, assuming that the timer type of “cut in B1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a selects the selected “cut in” as the next process. B1 of the plural effect modes ("cut in B1-1", "cut in B1-2", "cut in B1-3", "cut in B1-4") including the mode of timer mode effect Judgment processing as to which is executed is performed. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, in the form of “cut-in B1-1”, when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. “Cut-in B (cut B notice)”, which is a timer object, is executed while the count display is hidden by reaching a predetermined value (“0” in this case).

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-2”, 20 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specified When the count value ("30" in this case) is reached, the display of the hell timer mode (the first timer mode display) is performed while the count digest is in progress, and 50 seconds after the start of the count display. When it has elapsed and reaches a predetermined value (here "0"), "Cut in B" which is the timer target is executed under the condition that it is not displayed, but the hell timer mode (the first timer mode) The display of "display" is maintained even after "Cut-in B" is hidden without being hidden.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-3”, 18 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count value. A heaven challenge effect is performed whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digest is in progress when reaching a second specific count value (here, “32”) before that. As display of hell timer mode (1st timer mode display) is performed as a result of failure of heaven challenge production, when 50 seconds pass after count display is started, when it reaches specified value (here “0”) While the count display is not displayed, “Cut-in B”, which is the target of the timer, is executed, but this is not displayed for the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display). Since without being to indicate the "cut-B" was hidden even the display is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-4”, 18 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count. A heaven challenge effect is performed whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digest is in progress when the second specific count value (here, “32”) before the value is reached. As a result of the successful heaven challenge production, the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is performed, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display started, and the predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached. Then, while the count display is hidden, “Cut-in B” which is the target of the timer is executed. For the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), After the "cut-B" without being in the non-display is hidden even the display is maintained.

  That is, among the plurality of effect modes prepared for "cut in B1", the modes of "cut in B1-2", "cut in B1-3", and "cut in B1-4" are timers. It corresponds to mode production. And in these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs while the count digestion is in progress, and the timer target effect is executed while either display of the timer mode appears. Will be. Therefore, even when the count display is remaining and the count is taken up, the timer effect can be made to have an effect by the timer mode effect related to the timer effect.

  More specifically, when a heaven timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the rate at which an effect type with a higher expectation degree appears as a timer target effect is higher than when a hell timer mode appears. As the rate of appearance of a high expected degree mode becomes high as a mode (content of effect) of cut-in B which is the effect of the timer object, it is difficult to wait for the timing of the count display to reach a predetermined value. As a result, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more closely watched. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as the type of timer mode effect, since the effect itself for the timer object can not be expected as compared with the case where the heaven timer mode appears, an effect different from the timer effect The gaze can be directed to the direction of the video game, so that even if the low expectation presentation mode appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

  In addition, in order to make such heaven timer mode and hell timer mode function more effectively, the same effect as the timer target effect between when heaven timer mode is displayed and when hell timer mode is displayed. Even when a mode appears, it is desirable to control so that the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol becomes higher at the time of the symbol stop after that when the effect mode appears when the heaven timer mode is displayed.

  In addition, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4” modes), the timer Even after the target effect is executed and the display is hidden, the display regarding the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect proceed while the timer related effect is displayed even after the timer effect is finished, and the effect situation where the timer effect is executed by either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode The symbol stop is performed in a state in which the player is made aware of the presence of the symbol. In addition, about the display of heaven timer mode and hell timer mode, it is not displayed before the count display reaches a predetermined value (before the effect of the timer object is generated), or it is displayed rather than symbol stop is displayed. The display may be hidden at the previous timing, or the display may be maintained even when the symbol stop is displayed, and may be hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

  In addition, the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is performed (for example, during timer prefetch effect execution). In addition, when the display of heaven timer mode or hell timer mode or heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where count display is not executed, the timer effect necessarily occurs between the time the effect is executed and the symbol is stopped. You may not make it happen. However, when the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where the count display is not performed, compared to the case where those effects are not performed in the state where the count display is not performed. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the timer effect is executed before the symbol is stopped, and to execute it as an effect that suggests in advance that the timer effect is executed.

  In the "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4" modes, the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and then the count display is the first While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the specific count value is reached, in the "cut-in B1-2" mode, the count display becomes the second specific count value. The heaven challenge effect is not performed when it is performed, and then the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

  According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, first, it becomes possible to focus on whether or not the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur, so the count display is the first specific count value. When it becomes, it becomes possible to be able to make a further gaze at whether the hell timer mode occurs or not.

  In addition, when the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the rate at which a highly anticipated effect mode appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the proportion of appearances with high expectation is different as the effect of the timer object depending on whether the timer mode effect itself does not occur or if the hell timer mode occurs, the opposite is true. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode is generated when the count display becomes the first specific count value.

  On the other hand, when the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are used as the timer mode effects when the count display reaches the first specific count value. As a result, the timer mode effect type that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value can be further watched.

  According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values different from the predetermined value (first specific count value, second specific count value) Since it becomes possible to give an interest to the timer effect (count value) or the effect related thereto even when it reaches the point, it becomes possible to make the game look interesting while the count display is being executed. Can be suitably maintained.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, when the count display of the timer effect successively reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value and reaches the predetermined value in this way, the effect of the timer target is executed, and thereafter The symbol change will be stopped.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific As a timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190), it is determined which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed. However, as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510), cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared instead of cut-in B1. It is also possible to determine which timer type to use from among these candidates. About this processing method, it is employable also in processing concerning execution of other productions (for example, revival timer production etc.).

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the effect for the timer object is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, the effect (cut-in B) of the specific type is performed as compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of high expectation content (such as cut-in B with high expectation color) was increased. However, instead of this, when the heaven timer mode is displayed, if the timer target effect is performed, compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed, a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change) , Cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) may be such that the proportion of the high-expected performance type appears. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, as a timer target effect, the rate at which an effect type with a high expectation level appears may be high, and the rate at which the content with a high expectation level may be increased.

  In addition, a specific effect type is selected from among a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, role A action, cut in B, role B action, etc.) as effects for the timer object. If, or if a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode must be generated within the execution period of the count display. It is also good. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode is generated can also appear without the heaven challenge effect being performed.

  In addition, an effect may be provided to indicate that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is necessarily generated within a period before reaching the second specific count value at which the heaven challenge effect is performed.

  In addition, when a prescribed performance condition is satisfied, a heaven high probability mode in which the percentage of success in the heaven challenge performance (proportion displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher when heaven challenge performance occurs than in normal times. It may be made to shift to That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, if the heaven timer mode is not displayed, the generation probability of the heaven challenge effect itself is lowered (the probability that the hell timer mode is generated without generating the heaven challenge effect, the timer The probability that the mode effect is not generated is increased), or the expectation of the timer target effect itself generated in the heaven timer mode is lowered as compared with the normal time, thereby realizing the heaven high probability mode.

  In Heaven Challenge production, a period in which the player can receive an operation can be set, and based on the player's operation performed during the period, the result of success or failure of the heaven challenge production (Spaly timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes occurs) may be displayed.

  In addition, when heaven challenge effect occurs when the count display number in the count display is relatively small, such as when the heaven challenge effect occurs simultaneously with the start of the count effect of the timer effect, the count in the count display It is desirable that the percentage of success in creating the heaven challenge (the percentage displayed in the heaven timer mode) be higher than when the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executed pieces is relatively large. . That is, in this case, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the effect in the near future immediately before the appearance of the effect that is the object of the timer effect, and the effect which is the target of the timer effect appears When it takes a long time (count number) to do, it will be expected to maintain the game interest by feeling of expectation for heaven challenge effect to occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer object effect is executed. In this case, the percentage of success in the heaven challenge effect is minimized and the timer object effect that has already been executed is generated. On the other hand, heaven timer mode or hell timer mode will be generated in the form of follow-up.

  In addition, heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. In addition, when heaven challenge production is executed as a target production of timer production, after the heaven timer mode is displayed, the percentage of success in the heaven challenge production (percentage displayed in the heaven timer mode) is 100%. Within the symbol variation period, although it did not become a timer target, the rate at which a high expectation effect (for example, a character B action) appears among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates is the effect It is desirable to make it higher than when it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, etc.) prepared as candidates for count while the count display is being performed within a period in which symbol effects are being performed It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which at least one of cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc. appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect during the execution of the count display (desired effect having a predetermined expectation is desirable, but not necessarily limited thereto). When it is executed, it is not performed until the output concerning the count display reaches the predetermined value until the output concerning the count display of the timer effect reaches the predetermined value, and this is not performed until the predetermined value is reached. Any of the production modes for which output is to be stopped is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  According to such a configuration, even if the output relating to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is interrupted on the way and the output relating to the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is maintained until the count display of the timer effect is performed and this reaches a predetermined value (counting period).

  FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) show the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) FIG. 18 is a time chart for describing the specific contents of count output cancellation control that is performed when a specific variation number is selected in the second processing situation.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, an effect of the timer object which is the timer object appears.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time of causing the predetermined effect to appear It is determined whether the situation is in a predetermined production situation. As a result, when it is in a specific effect situation, control is performed to stop the output of the timer effect count display and execute the predetermined effect. The "predetermined specific effect situation" to be used to determine whether or not to stop the output relating to the count display of the timer effect is, for example, the count display of the timer effect being executed. In the case of executing a predetermined effect using a region, it is an effect situation in which competition occurs with respect to an effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is also output after the output of the predetermined effect is finished. The count display is not output again. On the other hand, even after the peripheral control MPU 1511a stops outputting the count display, the time since the count display is started (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly measured internally. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started), it is determined that the timing at which the output display is stopped reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The target production appears.

  According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is performed, the output state for counting display is maintained while the output state for counting display is maintained, but if the output of the count display is not stopped, it is set to a predetermined value (here, “0”). When the timing which should have been reached comes, the effect of the timer object comes to appear. That is to say, in this case, it is expected to improve the fun of the game when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise property which has been kept secretly as if the timer effect had been shown hidden as if it had been terminated halfway by execution of the predetermined effect. Will be

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even if the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined control is performed. When the presentation situation at the time of presentation of the presentation is not in the specific presentation situation defined in advance, the output according to the count display of the timer presentation is continued without stopping it until the predetermined value is reached, and the count display is digested In this situation, a predetermined performance is executed.

  More specifically, the predetermined effect is "effect for causing an enemy character to appear in a specific area", "effect for attacking against a specific area", or "display at the time of failure in effect in a specific area In the case where it is assumed that the effect of outputting music or music is performed, and such a predetermined effect is executed while the count display is being performed in a specific area, the player can use a timer effect (count display) as the player. On the other hand, there may be a concern that there may be some adverse effects on the performance (for example, the expectation level of the timer performance is lowered). Therefore, when there is a production situation that may cause such a concern, the output of the timer production count display is stopped and the predetermined production is executed, so that any adverse effects on the timer production are produced. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined effect without generating an image as if to exert (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, since the effect of the timer target is made to appear as a surprise while maintaining the state of the output stop concerning the count display, such a predetermined effect is used. It can be expected that the game interest will be improved in reverse (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

  However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped every time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself deteriorates, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered. Will be Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there is a vacancy (a region where no effect is output) different from the specific region where the count display of the timer effect is output when the predetermined effect is executed. In some cases, the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in a vacant area while maintaining the output of the timer effect count display without being stopped (FIG. 191 (c)). ) Production mode). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect that cancels the count display of the timer effect in the middle of the process, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the game entertainment is reduced. Will be avoided.

  Then, in each of the examples shown in FIG. 191, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer object is thus executed.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure when realizing such count output cancellation control.

  As shown in FIG. 192, assuming that it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is First, when the timing to generate a predetermined effect has come within the execution period of the symbol variation, it is determined whether or not a specific effect situation exists prior to the start of the output according to the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

  Here, the “specific effect status” refers to various other effects (here, count display of timer effects, etc.) necessary for newly outputting the predetermined effect when the predetermined effect is newly output. As described above, it is a situation where all of them are used and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 201 (G) and (H) described later, the “bullet firing effect” by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. Then, in the bullet firing effect, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area, and the lower area in the display area are selectively set as empty (unused) areas of the display area as the bullet destination. In general, the unused area will be used to create a bullet launch effect. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), which will be described later, an area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect is other various effects (count display (upper left area), symbol variation (upper right) Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), and hold display (lower area)) are all used, and there is no space for outputting the predetermined effect anew This corresponds to the above-mentioned "specific presentation situation". And, if it is assumed that the projectile has been fired temporarily while in such a specific presentation situation, the presentation (for example, the count display) that is already in the output state at the projectile destination is broken or destroyed by the fired projectile. May cause concerns such as a big hit expectation level may drop as a result. Is also mentioned above.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that the specific production situation is in place before starting the output related to the predetermined production (YES in step S5701), it is already different from the predetermined production. The output (in this case, count display) in the output state is stopped (step S5702), and processing relating to the output of a predetermined effect is performed using the free space created thereby (step S5703).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no specific effect situation prior to the start of the output relating to the predetermined effect (NO in step S5701), another effect is required in the area required for effect output Since there is an unused area that is not used, processing for outputting a predetermined effect is performed using the unused area without stopping output of an effect different from the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

  Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, an effect mode advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to increase the rate at which appears. For example, in the example of FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), when the effect of the timer target is suddenly executed while the output relating to the count display is stopped, the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b) appears. It is desirable to control so that the ratio in which a presentation mode (representation type or presentation content) having a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the presentation mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

  The processes of step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one process. For example, when the output data of the predetermined effect is overwritten in the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output relating to the count display is naturally canceled, and the output is interrupted in the state of being canceled. It is possible to perform output related to a predetermined effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it is in a specific effect situation, the output concerning count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, but the effect to be the target of the output stop is not limited to this, and the other The output related to the production may be stopped.

  In the process of step S5702, an effect type is selected from among a plurality of effects using (in an output state) an area necessary for outputting a predetermined effect, and the output of the selected effect is canceled. Then, a predetermined effect may be output. In this case, it is desirable that priorities be set in advance with respect to a plurality of effects which are considered as selection candidates for output cancellation, and effect types for which output cancellation is to be performed are selected based on the priorities. About this priority, it is desirable to make it preset on a program on the basis of whether it is an effect with a higher degree of importance to the player. As a result of determining the priority, if all the other effects in the output state have higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effects is maintained and the predetermined effect is not output. .

  Then, the effect type for which the output is to be stopped is executed as a plurality of effects connected with the effect contents having relevance (for example, a timer effect connected by the count display and the timer object effect, etc.) Among the effects, the predetermined effect is produced before the output is stopped during the effect that appears earlier (for example, while the count display is being executed) and before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer target effect) is started. It is desirable that, for the effects that will appear later, this is executed without stopping the output when the is finished.

  In addition, with regard to effects that are targeted for output discontinuation when performing predetermined effects and predetermined effects, in addition to effects by image display, effects by character operations, effects by music, effects by board lights, etc. Good. In addition, at the time of executing a predetermined effect, the effect to be output cancellation target or the predetermined effect is a composite of at least two or more of each effect element such as image display, character operation, music, and board lamp In the case of being executed as a combined effect, it may only be necessary to discontinue output of at least one of the combined effect elements. For example, in the case where the predetermined effect is “bullet emission effect” shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later, and the effect targeted for output cancellation is “composite effect of image display and board lamp”, the combined effect is Even if the output applied to the image display is canceled and the output applied to the board lamp is maintained, the effect by the board lamp which is not reached by the bullet as the image display in the display area is adversely affected. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition by production) will occur.

[Timer plus production]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first counts at least one of a plurality of performance modes (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). The count display can be displayed within the period during which the symbol effect is performed, and the count display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then this is not displayed and the count target effect appears in the non-display state. It is possible to perform the production. In this regard, in the count effect, after the count display that has reached a specific count value (for example, “0”) is not displayed, not only one of the plurality of effect modes appears, but also a specific count value (for example, “0”). ]) By re-displaying the count display with a count value larger than that, an effect of continuing the count effect can be executed (timer plus effect).

  That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “0”) and this is not displayed, the count display is not displayed. Since there is a possibility that the count effect will continue to be displayed again with a count value greater than the specific count value (the possibility that a higher expectation effect mode will appear), the count display is It will be expected to maintain the game interest after the non-display.

  FIG. 193 (a) shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer plus production performed when a specific change number (no timer SP reach) is selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (a plurality of not only cut-in B2 may be present) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 193). 162), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer plus effect is not performed even if any timer type is determined instead of performing the following processing relating to the timer plus effect. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), assuming that the timer type of "cut in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the timer type as the next processing. A determination process is performed as to whether “cut-in B2” is executed in a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the mode of the timer plus production. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Of the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the “cut in B2-1” mode, 40 seconds are displayed after the count display with the count value of “40” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. When a predetermined value is reached (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed, “Cut In B (Cut B Notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B2-2”, a count display in which the count number is significantly smaller than that in the form of “cut-in B2-1” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change. There is. Generally, in such a timer effect, since there is often no effect during the period from when the count display is executed until the count display reaches the predetermined value, there is a concern that the game interest in that period will be reduced. Ru. Therefore, in the timer plus effect (a form of “cut in B2-2”) shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, “4”) after a predetermined time has elapsed from symbol variation. After the count display is displayed and the display is hidden, the first double compatible effect in the non-display state is longer than the time during which the count display is displayed (here, 4 seconds) (For example, for 9 seconds).

  Here, in the first double-compatible effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B as an effect (first timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, “4”). Run. However, in the first timer target effect, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) appears as a mode of cut-in B. Thereafter, an effect (second timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in such a manner that the count value is larger than the first count value. In addition, as an effect about whether to re-display the count display, for example, whether a specific display image (count-up image) appears or whether a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates It can be realized as an effect such as no.

  In addition, in the effect (count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display, each time the count display in the non-display state is re-displayed, it is executed prior to that, but the specific display The effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable character (count-up character) is made different according to the number of times it is displayed again It is desirable to do so. When a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as an accessory indicating that the count display is redisplayed, the count-up effect is given to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory). It is desirable not only to be used for other effects such as jackpot confirmation, for example. However, in this case, in addition to changing the operation mode of a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), in addition to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), a different movable accessory is further operated. It is desirable from the viewpoint of grasping that the count-up effect is not being performed, by causing them to cooperate and perform the movable effect.

  According to such a configuration, two different effects (first timer target effect (cut-in B) in which the degree of expectation is indicated) as a target of the count “4”, the second on whether the count display is redisplayed. Since a timer target effect (count-up effect) is performed, when a relatively short time count display (count “4”) is executed, it is possible to enjoy a timer target effect over a longer time. become able to. Therefore, it is expected that the time required for the count display to be executed is reduced while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and that the decrease in the game interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value is suppressed. Become so.

  In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the first double compatible effect, and when the effect result appears, the first effect is generated. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving the second count value (here, “5”) larger than the count value of. However, in the first double compatible presentation, a presentation pattern in which a presentation result that fails to redisplay the count display appears is also prepared, and when the presentation pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable to end the timer effect at this point.

  After this, when the count display given the second count value (here, “5”) is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-compatible effect is displayed in the non-display state. Is to be executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time for which it is displayed (here, 5 seconds).

  Also in this second double compatible effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B is performed as an effect (third timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, “5”). Run. However, in the third timer target effect, as a cut-in B mode, an aspect (a character covering a green aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect appears. Thereafter, an effect (fourth timer effect) regarding whether or not to re-display the count display in a manner having a count value larger than the second count value is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, “5”) that requires a longer time than the first count value (here, “4”) is executed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of the cut-in B comes to be executed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, it is expected to suppress the decrease in the game interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value while extending the time required for the count digestion. Become.

  In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, a rendition result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the second double correspondence rendition, and when the rendition result appears, the second The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving a third count value (here, “7”) larger than the count value of. However, even in the second double compatible presentation, a presentation pattern in which a presentation result that fails to redisplay the count display appears is prepared, and when the presentation pattern appears, this count display is not displayed again. It is desirable to make the timer effect end at the time.

  After this, when the count display having the third count value (here, “7”) is hidden, the count display is displayed for the third double-compatible effect in the non-display state. It is supposed to run for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (7 seconds in this case).

  Here, even in the third double-compatible effect, first, as an effect (fifth timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, “7”), the cut-in The effect of B is executed. However, in the third timer target effect, as a cut-in B mode, an aspect (a character covering a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears. Thereafter, an effect (sixth timer effect) regarding whether or not to re-display the count display in a manner having a count value larger than the third count value is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, “7”) that requires a longer time than the first and second count values (here, “4”, “5”). However, in exchange for this, the effect of cut-in B will be executed in a mode with higher expectation than the first and second timer target effects. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment in the period until the predetermined value is reached.

  In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, an effect result that fails to re-display the count display appears in the third double compatible effect, and at this time, the timer effect is ended. Will be. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect of the timer object, but until the cut-in B according to the aspect appears Since the count display for a relatively short time is displayed a plurality of times, and the effects corresponding to the count display are executed a plurality of times, the timer effect is started and ended. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, every time the count display is redisplayed, the total time for displaying the count display itself is increased from the total time for which the count display is not displayed, although the count value is increased to earn a scale as the entire effect. Because the timer target effect is executed in a higher expectation mode each time the count display is hidden, the timer effect is executed while maintaining the game interest for a long time. Will be able to.

  Moreover, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, every time the count display is hidden, the expectation level is gradually increased by changing the mode (color) for the same effect (cut-in B). Since it was made to express a mode, it became possible to execute the count display of those plural times as one timer effect for "cut-in B", and the effect displayed finally (red It is possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura of is a target of the effect of the timer effect.

  In addition, in the third double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is re-displayed to perform timer effect. It is desirable to keep the However, when the count display has reached the maximum number of times to be redisplayed, it is not the effect of cut-in B which has been executed up to that time, but the effect different from this (the degree of expectation is higher than any of the cut-in B modes) It is desirable to recognize that the maximum number of times has been reached by executing a special effect that is not prepared as a timer target candidate. In this case, the effect on whether or not to re-display the count display after the special effect is executed does not appear, but the time required for the special effect is the double corresponding effects (two It is executed over a longer period of time than the effect that the timer target effect is executed), suggesting that the expectation is higher than the effect that has appeared so far (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura). This is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the expectation may be 100%.

  FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modification of timer plus effect.

  The timer plus effect may be performed in the mode shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the mode shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, the effect corresponding to “4” corresponding to “4” (4-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count "4" (the effect at the time of 4 seconds timer), an effect period for only the time required for the first count value ("4" in this case) to be digested is set. Within the effect period, timer object effects such as cut-in B are executed in a predetermined mode (such as a character covered with a blue aura).

  According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute the effect of the timer target in the situation where the count display is being performed, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the count digestion. .

  In addition, when such a "4" corresponding effect (4 seconds timer effect) is finished, the count display of the "4" count will also reach the predetermined value ("0" in this case), so the timer Even if the count display of the effect is not confirmed, it is easily recognized that the count display has reached the predetermined value (here, “0”) only by confirming the corresponding effect for “4” (4 seconds timer effect) corresponding to the count “4”. Will be able to.

  Then, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “4” (the 4-second timer effect) is finished (after the count display of the count “4” reaches a predetermined value), the first count value ( Here, an effect (first count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is executed in such a way as to have a count value larger than “4”). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to redisplay the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect ends at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the first count-up effect, the second count value (here, “4”) larger than the first count value ( Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving “5”). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”). "5" corresponding effect (5 seconds timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the effect at the time of the 5-second timer), an effect period corresponding to the time required for the second count value (here “5”) to be consumed is set. During the production period, timer target effects such as cut-in B appear in an aspect (such as a character covered with a green aura) with a high degree of expectation compared to the case of the above-mentioned count "4" corresponding effects (4 seconds timer effect). Will be allowed to.

  Then, after the timing for ending the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the effect at the time of the 5-second timer) has come (after the count display of the count “5” reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here Then, an effect (second count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is executed in such a way as to have a count value larger than “5”). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to redisplay the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect ends at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the second count-up effect, a third count value (here, “5”) that is larger than the second count value ( Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving “7”). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”). "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “7” (the effect at the time of the 7-second timer), the effect period corresponding to the time required for the third count value (here “7”) to be consumed is set. During the production period, timer target effects such as cut-in B appear in a mode (such as a character wearing red aura) with higher expectations than in the case of the above-mentioned effect corresponding to the count "5" (5 seconds timer effect). Will be allowed to.

  Then, after the timing at which the count “7” corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here Then, there may be an effect (third count-up effect) regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display in such a way as to have a count value larger than “7”). This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is performed as a result of the effect. When an effect pattern that fails to re-display appears, the timer effect ends at this point without re-displaying the count display.

  In this regard, in this modified example, after the timing at which the count “7” corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which the count-up effect itself suggesting the possibility of no appearance. Thus, even when the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not redisplayed as in the case where the effect pattern that fails to re-display the count display appears in the count-up effect. At this point, the timer effect comes to an end.

  According to the count-up effect according to such a modified example, when a count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed in advance corresponding to the count value. Since a count-corresponding effect (cut-in B or the like) having an effect content for a certain amount of time is started, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during execution of the count display. In addition, when such a countering corresponding effect is finished (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect of giving a large count value to the count display and redisplaying is performed, and these two effects are alternately performed. Since the timer effect is executed and continued as it appears, it is suppressed that the count display is performed only in the timer effect and the occurrence of a situation where no effect is performed, so that the game entertaining is preferable. You will be able to maintain it.

  In this modified example, a count-corresponding effect (for example, count “4”) having effect contents for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, “4”). While the corresponding effect) is being executed, the count display is also digested (count down from 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0). However, as described above, the count corresponding effect (for example, the count “4” corresponding effect) according to this modification is finished at the timing when the displayed count value (for example, “4”) ends. Since the count display is executed, only the count value at the time of appearance (for example, “4”) is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) is performed. It is more desirable not to necessarily perform this for the countdown (→ 0), in order to encourage attention to a count corresponding effect (for example, a count “4” compatible effect).

  And in each example shown to FIG. 193 (a), (b), after a timer effect is performed in this way, a symbol fluctuation | variation will be stopped.

  Of the timer plus effects, the effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display is set based on the fact that an effect acceptance period of a predetermined time is set and the player performs an operation within the period. An effect suggesting that the display is redisplayed (success effect) or an effect suggesting that the count display is not redisplayed (failure effect) may appear. That is, in this case, after the success effect appears, the count display is redisplayed in the form of an increase in the count number to continue the timer effect, and when the failure effect appears, the count display is redisplayed thereafter. Absent. When such an effect is adopted, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect reception period, the effect result (success effect or failure effect) predetermined at a predetermined timing after the period is Will be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double compatible effects is set to the same time, but it corresponds to each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”). You may make it set mutually different time as production time to perform. For example, every time the count display is redisplayed, as the count value of each count display gradually increases, the time required for this also gradually increases as a double-compatible effect corresponding to each count value. If it is set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short, and the scale of the overall production can be suitably extended while maintaining the game entertainment.

  Moreover, in the effect about whether to re-display the count display, when displaying the effect result, a plurality of effect modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the count display is re-displayed as the count number increases. Either one may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, every time the count display is redisplayed, the count display having the count value larger than the count value at the time when the previous count display is displayed is made to appear. It is not necessary to re-display the count display having a count value that is necessarily larger than the count value when the count display is displayed. That is, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, the game interest can be improved simply by redisplaying the count display when a predetermined effect image appears thereafter. I can expect it. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, there is an effect with a higher expectation as a timer target effect than the previous count display. If the appearance ratio (which may be 100%) is increased, combined with the increase in the sense of speed from the display of the count display to the appearance of the timer target effect, the game interest is further improved. Will be able to. When re-displaying in such a count display with a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer target effect is gradually shortened from when the count display is first displayed. As such, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action, etc.) The counting display is performed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and when the counting display reaches a predetermined value, the effect mode counting among the plurality of effect modes is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be made to be non-displayed before the count display starts until it reaches a predetermined value, and the count display is There is a case where it is not displayed over the first time and a case where it is not displayed over a second time longer than the first time (timer stagnant effect).

  In other words, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of performance modes appears as a count target. Since it may be hidden for a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until any one of a plurality of production modes occurs, and the tension until the production subject to count is executed Can be sustained.

  FIG. 194 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when the fluctuation | variation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "No timer character reach" are selected in a condition.

  In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 2 but also a plurality of them) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer stagnation effect is not performed even if any timer type is determined instead of performing the following processing regarding the timer stagnation effect The following processing regarding may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of "character product A operation 2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the next processing as the next processing. Whether to execute the selected “object A action 2” in a plurality of effect modes (“object A operation 2-1” or “object A operation 2-2”) including the mode of the resurrection timer effect It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 194 (a), in the mode of “actual material A operation 2-1”, after the count display with the count value “30” is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, When the second has passed, the “object A operation (object A notice)” that is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is not displayed when the predetermined value is reached (here, “0”). Is done.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “act A action 2-2”, the count display with the count value of “10” is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol fluctuation, and the count is counted after 5 seconds. When the value becomes “5”, it is not displayed, and when the non-display state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is displayed again with a count value of “4”. After that, when 2 seconds pass and the count value becomes “2”, it is again hidden. When the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is restarted with the count value of “1”. 1 seconds later, after reaching “0”, the “object A operation (object A notice)” which is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is hidden. It has become.

  According to such a mode of “actual material A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a count display with a count value of “10” starts a predetermined time after the start of the symbol variation. In spite of this mode, as in the case where the count display with the count value of “30” is started, a predetermined value (here, “30” is passed when the count display is started). 0 ") and the timer target performance is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect that makes it non-display for a predetermined time (timer stagnation effect) occurs while the count display is digested, Will be stagnated by that amount of time, and it will be expected to be executed as a timer effect that requires the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. . And, as described above, in the timer effect, the longer the time required for this, the higher the proportion of the appearance of the timer object with a high degree of expectation, and the tendency for the appearance of the timer object to appear higher. By making it possible to generate a stagnation effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time of the timer effect as a whole is extended by adding the time during which the count display is not displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest while the count display is executed. .

  Further, in the mode of the “actual material A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The count display is not displayed over a period (a period between the count value “5” and “4”) over a second period (16 seconds) longer than the first time. Period (a period between the count value “2” and “1”) can appear, but the count display is “non-displayed” regardless of the length of the time (the first time and the second time). When returning from the “display state” to the “display state”, the count value advances (changes) only for a specific number (here, “1”) which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the time in which the count display is maintained in the "non-display state" is, the longer the progressing speed of the count is stagnant as the time lengthens. Can be expected to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in the mode of the “actual material A operation 2-2”, as the count value in the timer effect progresses, the time that the count display is kept in the “non-display state” becomes longer when the count display is hidden. It is supposed to be set to. In other words, in this case, even when the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed, even if the count digest is about to end (a situation where the predetermined value is reached soon), If the timer stagnation effect appears, the time required for the timer effect is greatly increased and the expectation degree is greatly improved. Therefore, the game interest is suitably maintained over the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to.

  Further, in the mode of the “act A action 2-2”, after the count display is hidden, the count display is displayed again, and the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. However, after the count display is not displayed, the count display is not necessarily redisplayed, so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is interrupted at this point can also be generated without executing the timer object effect. May be. When this effect pattern appears, the percentage at which symbol variation is stopped in the big hit symbol is lower than when a predetermined value is reached and timer target effect is executed, but timer effect is produced by preparing such effect pattern It is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of this itself. In addition, after the count display is made non-display (after the timer effect is terminated), while waiting for the count display to be re-displayed, the symbol variation may be stopped by the big hit symbol. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by realizing such a surprise effect.

  Further, in the mode of “act A action 2-2”, the total time during which the count display is hidden (22 seconds) is longer than the total time during which the count display is displayed (10 seconds). This makes it possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment while the count display is being executed.

  FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the risk level at which the count display is not redisplayed. It is Table H1 which shows separately the count value when making it display. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as the relationship shown in the table H1 appears, it depends on the type of timer effect including the aspect of the timer stagnation effect and the execution mode thereof based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of fluctuation pattern. It is desirable to perform processing.

  According to the aspect shown in such a table H1, as the count value is developed (as it approaches the predetermined value), the maintaining time when being hidden tends to be long, while the hiding time is not There is also a tendency that the risk that the timer effect ends without the count display being re-displayed while being displayed is gradually increased. That is, in this case, when the count value is not advanced at a stage when it is not displayed, the total time as a timer effect can be slightly extended although it is small but the end value is small but the count value is large. If it is hidden at the advanced stage, the end risk is high, but the total time for the timer performance can be greatly extended, so the performance as a timer stagnation effect gradually changes as the count value progresses Thus, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment while the count display is performed.

  In Table H1, one non-display time is associated with each count value, but a plurality of non-display times are associated with each count value, and the timer stagnation occurs at any one of these non-display times. An effect may be generated.

  Also, at which timing (count value) during the count display is executed, the count display is not displayed, and the number of times the display is not displayed depends on the result of jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, etc. It is desirable to make a determination based on the start of symbol variation.

  Further, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is not displayed. For example, when the count value “6” is hidden for 6 seconds, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6” is performed for 6 seconds, and the count value “2” is not displayed for 16 seconds. If the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “2” (the effect different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6”) is performed for 16 seconds, It is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment when the count display is in the non-display state. Further, at this time, an effect as to whether or not the count display is redisplayed in the non-display effect may appear, and the count display may be redisplayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the effect result. .

  More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started to when it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, any effect (effect different from the timer effect) indicating the big hit expectation is newly added If it is not started, and it is possible to newly start an effect (a different effect from the timer effect) that indicates the jackpot expectation degree when the count display is in the non-display state, the remaining count should be taken care of It is possible to enjoy an effect different from the timer effect. In addition to the expectation increase due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect itself, it is possible to enjoy the expectation increase due to the performance effect different from the timer effect, and the expectation for the timer stagnation effect is increased. It will be possible to make it even higher.

  Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, a new timer is set before the timing at which the count display in the non-display state is advanced and the count display in the non-display state is displayed again is reached. It is desirable that the effect count display reaches a predetermined value and the target effect appears. In addition, as the target effect of the new timer effect, an effect of redisplaying the count display in the non-display state may be performed.

[Progressive production leading to timer target production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, count display to a predetermined value is performed within a period in which symbol effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for effects corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that causes one to appear as a timer target effect. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present invention, a series of effects including the effects of the timer (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut in B, role B action, etc.) The timer-related effect is started before the count display reaches the predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches the predetermined value (a progress effect that leads to the timer target effect).

  That is, in this case, since a series of timer-corresponding effects corresponding to the timer effects are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, the game entertainment is suitable until the count display reaches the predetermined value. You will be able to maintain it.

  FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progress effect leading to the timer target effect.

  As shown in FIG. 195, a timer effect is being executed with a specific timer type within the symbol variation period, and the count value of the count display reaches the first specific value (here, count “6”). Assuming that the progress has been made, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first develops a progress effect (a series of timers corresponding to the timer target effect) that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”). Production).

  Here, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 195, as a timer target effect appearing after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the cut-in by the ally character is A display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this point, in the timer effect according to this explanation example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed in the period during the count digestion before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”). The process of reaching the situation is displayed as an effect image (a progress effect that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect).

  For example, in this explanation example, the count value of the count display before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, count “0”) is the first specific value (here, count “6”). When it becomes, as a production corresponding to this, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who seeks help from an ally character is displayed.

  Next, when the count value of the count display becomes the second specific value (here, count “3”) before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, count “0”). As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 depicting a situation in which a friend character accepts a request from a person seeking help and faces an enemy character is displayed.

  That is, by causing the display images SEG1 and SEG2 to sequentially appear while the count display is progressed to a predetermined value, when the count display further progresses and reaches a predetermined value, cut-in by the ally character (here, It can now be expected that the display image SEG 3-1 in which the teammate character takes over the aura to defeat the enemy character is expected to be displayed, thereby making the game entertaining while the count display is being executed. Can be controlled.

  However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”) appears, the cut by the ally character occurs when the count display reaches the predetermined value. An effect pattern is also prepared in which a display image SEG 3-2 depicting a situation in which the teammate character escapes in front of the enemy character is displayed instead of the display image SEG 3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, the count display has a predetermined value while it is possible to attach a star as an object of the timer effect as a target of the timer effect in a period before the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since it does not reach until it specifies the effect mode which appears when it reaches to, it becomes possible to maintain this suitably also about the game interest after the count display reaches a predetermined value. The display image SEG 3-2 may not necessarily be prepared, and the display image SEG 3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In this regard, in this example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count "6") appears, the display corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count "3") After the appearance of the image SEG2, it is supposed to prepare an effect pattern which is terminated prematurely before the count display progresses further and reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, the progress of the count display is carried out with the risk that the timer effect will end prematurely without the appearance of the timer object being displayed while the effect progress appearing before the predetermined value is reached. Will be able to enjoy. It should be noted that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway is not necessarily prepared, and the timer display may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in is performed by the teammate character, and Although illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image connected to different display images (for example, cut-in by different characters) prepared as timer target effects. For example, in the examples shown in FIG. 204 (C) to (F) and FIG. 205 (G) to (I) described later, any one of the three ally characters shown in FIG. A request from a person is accepted, and the accepted ally character confronts the enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

  Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, count “3” is displayed. Not the display image SEG2 but another display image may be displayed as the display image corresponding to “)”, and when the other display image is displayed, the display image when the predetermined value is reached Progress of presentation is made so as to be connected to a display image (for example, a cut-in by a different character) different from SEG 3-1. The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that necessarily leads to the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the ally character is performed.

  It should be noted that it is desirable to determine which route the effect is to be developed while the count display is being executed, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, etc. when the symbol changes. When the effect pattern for which the timer target effect is not executed appears, the percentage of symbol fluctuation being stopped at the big hit symbol is lower than when the timer object effect is executed by reaching a predetermined value, but such effect pattern By preparing, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the timer effect itself.

  In addition, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count "6") appears, counting is performed until the count display becomes the second specific value (here, the count "3"). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count “6” is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count “6” is displayed for the time period during which the counts “5” to “4” are digested. The count display is not displayed while the display image SEG1 is displayed. Then, after that, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing when the count number becomes “3”, and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count “3” is the time for which the count “2” to “1” is digested. , And hide the count display while the display image SEG2 is displayed. After that, when the count display is displayed according to the timing when the count number becomes “0”, and the display image SEG 3-1 (timer object effect) corresponding to the count “0” is executed, it is predetermined. It becomes possible to enjoy the progress of production corresponding to the count number without worrying about counting toward the value.

  Note that the display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1, and the like may be displayed as a still image or a moving image that requires a predetermined time. When displaying as a still image, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (a first specific value or a second specific value).

  In addition, the time for displaying the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value, the time for displaying the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. It is desirable that the times are set as different times.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the progress effect leading to the timer target effect, it is decided to prepare a plurality of types of progress effects leading to any of a plurality of timer target effects, but a specific timer object effect appears It may be possible to execute progress presentation linked to the specific timer target presentation even before the count display reaches a predetermined value, only occasionally.

  In the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed when the count number is “6”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining specific count is a relatively small first specific count (for example, “3”) and when the remaining count is a relatively large second specific count (for example, “6”). When the progress effect connected to the timer target effect is executed when the progress effect related to the timer target effect is made executable and the remaining count is the second specific count number (for example, “6”). If the jackpot expectation level is made relatively high, it will be more suitable for the game interest since the stage will be more developed with the continued number of counts as if the jackpot expectation level is high. To be able to maintain.

[Internal operation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a count display up to a predetermined value can be executed within a period during which the design effect is performed, and the count target effect that is the target of the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be accepted during the execution of the count display. 410), when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of operation-time effect modes having different ratios of appearance of high-expected effect modes (for example, cut-in B) as the count target effect. To generate. In addition, as a period during which the production can be accepted, a first period from when the count display is the first count value to the second count value, and a third count value that is counted after the second count value is counted. And the second period from the time of the fourth count value to the fourth count value is prepared as a settable period. On this basis, during the symbol effect period in which it is determined that a high-expected effect mode (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect, the count display is the second from the first count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the first period up to the count value and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value, When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to the count value and the effect is received, the specific operation-time effect is obtained as a result of the effect reception. The ratio of occurrence of a mode (for example, a mode that suggests that a specific effect with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is high) is made different ( Timer within the operating performance).

  That is, in this case, even if it is determined that a high expectation effect (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count corresponding effect, the count display is from the first count value to the second count value. Identification when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated when the count display is the third count value to the fourth count value Since the ease of occurrence of the operation mode is different, the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from when the count display is the first count value to when the count display is the second count value. Should operate the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value, or both Work unit (e.g., operation buttons 410) it is possible to have fun in game strategies such should manipulating.

  For example, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) within a period in which a specific operation effect mode is likely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation effect mode does not appear can be suppressed. Even when this specific operation effect mode is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as a count target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) within a period in which the specific operation effect mode is hard to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation effect mode does not appear is high. When it appears that the specific operation-time effect mode is less likely to occur, it is easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count-corresponding effect.

  Then, until the count display becomes a predetermined value in such two different periods (from the time of the first count value to the time of the second count value and from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value) To have an interest in how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) for these two periods, and to maintain the game interest during count digestion That is expected.

  FIG. 196 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the operation production in a timer performed when a specific change number (no timer SP reach) is selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following process regarding the operation effect in the timer is performed. It is supposed to run. However, in view of the fact that the operation effect within the timer functions as “an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a specific effect appears as a timer target effect”, a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Instead of performing the following process for the operation effect in the timer when being played, the following process for the operation effect in the timer is also performed when a timer type for which another effect mode appears instead of the cut-in B as the timer object effect is determined. Run. When the timer type in which an effect with a lower expectation than cut-in B appears as a timer target effect is determined, the effect is produced as compared to the case where the timer type in which cut-in B appears as a timer target effect is determined. When the reception is made, the ratio of occurrence of a specific operation time effect mode is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), assuming that the timer type of “cut in B2” is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the timer type as the next processing. A determination process is performed as to whether “cut-in B2” is executed in a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B2-11”, “cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of the operation production in the timer. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 196 (a), in the form of “Cut in B2-11”, 40 seconds are displayed after the count display having the count value of “40” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. When a predetermined value is reached (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed, “Cut In B (Cut B Notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the "cut-in B2-12" mode, a predetermined value (40 seconds after the count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation Here, "cut-in B (cut B advance notice)" which is a target of the timer is executed while "0" is reached and the count display is not displayed. However, in the "cut-in B2-12" mode, the first period from when the count value of the count display is "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)" is the same as in the first embodiment. Regarding the operation effect within the timer when the operation button 410) is operated in the second period from when the count value is “15 (third count value)” to when it is “5 (fourth count value)”. The effect reception of is to be made, and a display indicating that the effect reception is in an acceptable state appears. In addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, a display indicating that the effect reception is permitted is "25 (second count value)" from "35 (first count value)". By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)”. Is also feasible.

  That is, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", any one of the first period (count values "35" to "25") and the second period (count values "15" to "5") If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the period, the effect reception as the operation effect in the timer will be made, and based on the effect reception, the rate at which the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect is different. One of a plurality of operation time presentation modes is generated. In addition, about the some operation time production | generation aspect, it is possible to employ | adopt as a mode which lights a predetermined lamp in either blue or red (specific operation time production | generation aspect), for example, the aspect lit in blue The rate at which a specific effect with a high degree of expectation appears as the count target effect is the lowest when appearing, and the rate at which a specific effect with a high degree of expectation emerges as a count target effect when a mode of lighting in red (specific operation effect mode) appears Can be set to be the highest.

  In FIG. 196 (b), it is determined which of the effect modes should be made to appear as the operation effect mode depending on whether the effect is accepted when in the first period or when the effect is accepted in the second period. It is a figure which shows the example about the table (table T16) referred when carrying out.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is turned on in either blue or red (a specific operation effect mode) is prepared as the operation time effect mode.

  In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect, if the effect is accepted during the first period, "Blue" (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "30/100", red color (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "70/100", and effects are accepted when in the second period Then, the blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "70/100", and the red color (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "30/100". Therefore, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the first period, it is possible to suppress the presentation risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear, but the red (highly expected mode) is likely to occur. Even if this appears only for a minute, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as the count target effect. On the other hand, when the operation to the operation button 410 is performed in the second period, the risk of the effect that red (high expectation mode) does not appear increases, but red (high expectation mode) is less likely to occur. Only when this appears, it becomes easy to have a sense of expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as the count target effect.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in an effect pattern in which an effect mode with a lower expectation than “Cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect, for example, when an effect is received during the first period, “50/100 "Blue" (low expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "50%" and red color (high expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "50/100". The blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of 90/100 ", and the red (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of" 10/100 ". Therefore, when a red color (high expectation mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that the effect pattern (cut in B2-12) in which “cut in B” appears as the timer object effect is selected. become.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods of the first period and the second period are generated within the fluctuation time, but the result or fluctuation of the big hit judgment You may make it generate | occur | produce at least one of a 1st period and a 2nd period based on the classification of a pattern, or a timer classification. For example, when only the first period occurs, the risk that the red (high expectation mode) does not appear when the effect reception is made is suppressed, but the expectation when the red (high expectation mode) appears is too much The operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that it does not go high, and when the second period only occurs, there is a high risk that the red (high expectation mode) does not appear when the effect is accepted. However, the operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that the degree of expectation becomes high when the red color (high expectation mode) appears. That is, in this case, depending on the player's preference, even when it is desired to operate on the first period side, the operation opportunity is provided only on the second period side, or even if it is desired to operate on the second period side. Since the operation opportunity is given only on the one period side, the count display is executed by causing a conflict as to whether to operate within the period on the unfavorable side while the count is digested It is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while being played.

  In addition, during the first period or the second period, the display indicating that the effect reception is permitted may not necessarily be performed. That is, in this case, it is counted in a state in which it is unknown whether the stage reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the stage reception is allowed in either the first period or the second period. As the display progresses, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interesting, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest while the count display is performed.

  Moreover, about a 1st period and a 2nd period, it is desirable to set the time length in which presentation reception is permitted in those periods to the same. According to such a configuration, the effect reception is permitted for the same amount of time in either the first period or the second period, so that the count value is a specific number (here, “10”. It is possible to provide a period of progress only as "sinking time to perform the operation", and to maintain the game interest during the period in which the count display is executed through the addition of such effect elements It will be.

  In addition, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to receive the operation by the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode changes (for example, blue → green → red) through the reception of the plurality of times. The ratio of appearance of a high expectation (for example, cut-in B) may be increased as the count target effect. However, in this case, even if the effects are received a plurality of times, in the first period and the second period, the appearance possibilities of the effect modes that finally appear are set to be different from each other.

[Timer concealment production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, count display up to a predetermined value is performed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be performed. In this regard, in the present invention, during the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display.

  That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the count target effect is counted so that it is difficult to visually recognize the count display until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since forward rendition comes to be performed, the count value by count display can be grasped only by skipping etc. Only a little time (during count forward rendition by decoration) until count object rendition is performed It becomes difficult to grasp and the interest in the count display can be increased.

  In addition, since the expectation for the appearance of the big hit symbol is made high through the count forward rendition by the decoration instead of making it difficult to visually recognize the count display, it is about the decrease of the game interest due to the difficulty of visually recognizing the count display. Will be expected to suppress this.

  FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (c) show the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). In a 2nd processing condition, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer concealment production performed when a specific change number is chosen.

  In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, count display having a count number of “30” is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After the count display becomes “0”, a timer target effect that is a timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

  Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the examples of FIGS. 206 (B) and (C) described later, the movable body KT for effect is moved to the front of the count display and the predetermined time is set. It can be realized as a count erosion effect for positioning this. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be anything as long as it makes the count display relatively less visible at the time of production than at the time of non-production.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as the effect state (the state in which the count display is difficult to be recognized visually) until the count value becomes “10”. In the effect state, the operation aspect or the light emission aspect or the like by the decorative body is intended to indicate the ease of appearance of the specific effect with high expectation as the timer target effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the count front effect by the decorative body is finished, the count value is changed from “10” to “0” in a state where the count display is easily visible. Then, one of a plurality of effects forms appears as a timer target effect.

  On the other hand, also in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count number of "30" at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The display is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect which is the timer target appears. In addition, the point is also the same as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), in that the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display while the count display is being performed.

  However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished The count display progresses from “15” to “0” in a state where the count display is easily visible, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, the count display having a count number of “25” is made at the timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The timer target effect that is the target of the timer appears after the count display becomes “0”. As in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the count display.

  However, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body is generated and ended at a relatively early stage, and the count forward effect by the decorative object is ended. The count display advances from “20” to “0” in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  As described above, in the timer effect, as the count value at the start of the count display is larger, the rate at which the effect target having a high degree of expectation appears as the timer object effect is higher. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the count front effect is generated by the decorative body, the count front effect is ended, not the count value when the count display is started. The relationship is such that the higher the count value when it is made easier to perform, the higher the rate at which a production target with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer production. The percentage may include 100%.

  For example, in the above-described effect examples in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count value when the count display is started in any effect pattern is “30”, which is the same as FIG. 197 (a). While the count value is "10" when the count forward effect is finished and it is easy to visually recognize in the effect example of, when the count forward effect is finished and it is easy to visually recognize in the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) Since the count value of “15” is “15”, the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) has a higher rate of appearance of a highly expected effect as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect occurs during execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number appearing at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count forward effect is ended Since the size of the character is re-focused, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is being performed.

  For example, in the effect example in FIG. 197 (c) described above, “25”, which is a relatively small count value, is displayed at the start of counting, but is relatively large at the end of the effect when the count forward effect ends. “20” which is a count value is displayed, and the ratio of occurrence of a high expectation effect as a timer target effect is increased as compared to the example of the effect of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b). There is.

  That is, in this case, if the count forward effect is generated, there is a possibility that the ratio of the effect having a high degree of expectation as the timer target effect will be higher than when the relatively large count value is displayed at the start of the count. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

  However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, compared to when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting, when a forward effect is generated thereafter, the relatively large count is also generated at the end It is desirable to set so that the rate of occurrence of the value is high.

  Moreover, in the example of the effect of the above-mentioned FIG. 197 (a)-(b), since several time is prepared as time from a count display being started until a count front production | presentation generate | occur | produces, count display is performed. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the count forward rendition may occur over a long period of time and to maintain the game interest.

  Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) described above, the count forward effect is started because a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count forward effect to the end thereof. At this point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest until the count forward effect is ended.

  The count forward effect is displayed during a period before the count display is performed, for example, during a timer pre-read effect where the rate of appearance of the timer effect increases, for example, during the count display. It may be. However, in view of the configuration according to the present application in which it is difficult to visually identify the count progress by making the count forward effect appear while the count display is being performed, and to aim for interest as the effect, even before the count display is started. It is desirable that the count forward effect is executed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is being executed in the period of one symbol fluctuation, the count display is not yet started when the count forward effect is finished, and the timer prefetch effect Is in the state of being executed, the rate at which the effect with a high degree of expectation appears as the timer object effect is higher than in the state in which the count display is being performed when the count forward effect is finished. It is desirable to set as follows.

  In addition, if it is assumed that the count forward effect is executed in a state where the timer prefetch effect is being executed, then the timer prefetch effect and the count display are made to display those display locations at different positions, and then the timer prefetch effect is performed. During execution of the count forward effect by the decorative body is performed on the front side of the display position of the timer prefetch effect, and during the count display, the count forward effect by the decorative body is on the forward side of the display position of the timer prefetch effect It is desirable to perform. That is, in this case, the decorative body is moved to a different position depending on, for example, whether the timer pre-reading effect is being performed or the count display is being performed. When the timer pre-reading effect is finished when the is positioned, the count display is started at a position different from the timer pre-reading effect which has been difficult to be recognized so far. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect occurs while the timer pre-read effect is being executed, the count display is started at a stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and this is not ended. Even if this is done, it becomes possible to make the count value of the count display easily visible from the time of its start, so there is a possibility that the effect value as the size of the count number at the time of start of the count may be damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward rendition while being excluded.

  In addition, with regard to the count forward rendition, it is at a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has passed since the count display was started, rather than a relatively early stage where the time has not passed so much since the count display was started. It is desirable that the rate at which the count forward effect is performed is higher.

  In addition, if the count forward effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer target effect is executed is relatively small, it is impossible to expect the count value that appears when this effect is ended. In addition to this, because there is a concern that may be confused with the timer target effect, the count forward effect is ended before the remaining count is less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count is less than the predetermined number. It is desirable to prevent the count forward rendition from being executed anew.

  In addition, as for the count forward effect, when a plurality of count displays are being performed, the decoration may be positioned on the front side across the count displays.

  Among timer effects, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer object advance effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When the rendition is executed, it is possible to substantially expose the current count value by the related rendition even during the count forward rendition by the decoration, so that the count display can be viewed It will be possible to predict how much count progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of performing the count forward effect by the decorative body only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) when the specific count value is reached. Or, as the decoration is positioned forward to the position where a predetermined effect movable body (timer object advance effect) appears, the count forward effect is performed in a form where the decoration is positioned, and it is difficult to see the count display It may be difficult to predict how much the count has progressed.

  With regard to a decorative body that effects on the front side of the count display, the count front effect may be performed such that not only one decorative body but a plurality of decorative bodies are positioned on the front side of the count display. In this case, any of a plurality of modes, such as a mode in which only one of the plurality of decorative bodies is located on the front side of the count display, in addition to the mode in which the plurality of decorative bodies are all located on the front side of the count display. The count forward effect may be selectively executed.

  Hereinafter, the contents of the effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207 regarding various aspects of the above-described timer effect itself and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect. Here, the processing example according to each effect described above is merely an example, and for example, effects other than the types described above may be executed as the content of the effect, and the appearance timing and appearance condition of each effect And the like may be appropriately changed within the scope of the same technical concept. Accordingly, in the production examples described below, there may be some productions that do not match the production contents of each production described above, but within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are changed as appropriate. Also, the following "timer effect" basically means that count display is executed by the notice-side timer effect or the fluctuation-side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including timer prefetching effects. In addition, as a mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted in the following, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 0. ing. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY for effect which has been omitted is shown in the drawing. The specific decorative member SDY may be, for example, “backward behind-bottom movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Equivalent to the movable member of

  In FIG. 198 (B), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70”, and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198 (B), when the timer effect (count number) is displayed, when the count display of the timer effect becomes a predetermined value, the target of the timer effect The candidate of the effect type that can appear as is displayed, and while it is unclear which of those candidates appears as the effect of the timer target while the count display is executed, any of those candidates is the timer target It is possible to recognize that it appears as an effect. Note that "conversation" in the figure corresponds to conversation announcement, "pending" in the figure corresponds to pending change, and "cut A" in the figure corresponds to cut-in A, as shown in FIG. The "part A" in the inside corresponds to the action A, the "secret" in the figure corresponds to the special timer, and the "cut B" in the figure corresponds to the cut-in B, “Combination B” in the figure corresponds to the accessory B operation.

  FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the timer target exclusion effect described above is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198 (B) is “60”.

  Note that, as described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that is not selected as a timer target in which it is unclear which effect mode the timer target effect is (in the timer target notice lottery, the timer target It is possible to display an indication suggesting at least one (or two or more may be suggested) of the presentation modes not determined as.

  Here, although this is also described above, in the timer effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) and the effect of the timer object can appear (in this example, As 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds and so on) have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the types of effects that can appear as timer objects are also narrowed down. Therefore, in the example of the effect of FIG. 198 (C), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing when the effect for the timer object can appear (10 seconds, 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) are to be set according to arrival.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern for displaying the timer effect with a count number of “70” is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count number of “70”, but has another count number such as “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, or “50”. An effect pattern to be displayed can also be generated. Among these, assuming that a timer effect having a count number of “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). The predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached at the specified timing, and for example, “conversation notice” is made to appear as the effect of the timer. On the other hand, if a timer effect with a count other than “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the “conversation notice” will not appear as a timer target effect. When the count number is left at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C), the “conversation notice” is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as a timer target. It can be said that the candidates that can appear as production were narrowed down. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), since it is in an effect situation in which the count display is being executed with the count number of "60" remaining, at this timing It is desirable to perform an effect (a timer target exclusion effect) that indicates which of the effect types (conversation announcements) that are excluded from. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately represent the performance situation where the player is placed.

  However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), it is suggested that “special timer” is not selected as the timer target effect, not “conversation notice” at this timing. There is. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it becomes clear during the digestion of the count that "the effect indicating that the big hit is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as the timer target effect. It is possible to feel anxiety about whether a highly anticipated performance appears as a timer target.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display image corresponding to the “special timer” (the secret) is locked among the display images displaying the candidates for the target effect of the timer effect. A padlock in a state is displayed in an overlapping manner, and a display such as "Lock !!" is made to indicate that the "special timer" is not selected as a timer target effect.

  FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display becomes a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). There is.

  As described above, the timer mode effect is an expectation for the effect of the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value within a period before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The hell timer mode (the first timer mode display) with a relatively low ratio of appearance of the high effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode etc.)) and timer target when the count display becomes a predetermined value One of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) having a relatively high ratio of appearance of a high expectation degree is displayed as the effect of.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, it is decided to perform a heaven challenge presentation whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and the heaven challenge presentation appears At this point, it will be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode always occurs.

  In addition, in heaven challenge production, there is a possibility that it is likely to shift to hell timer mode, or there is a high possibility to shift to heaven timer mode (for example, demons and angels are pushing each other, which is the prevailing situation Or the like may be performed, and in this case, it will indicate which of the hell timer mode and the heaven timer mode is to occur after such an effect.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed while the effect type excluded in the timer object exclusion effect is shown, any effect type is in the timer object exclusion effect Depending on whether it is excluded (is the type of production with a low degree of expectation excluded or is the type with a high degree of expectation excluded), is the situation where the hell timer mode is likely to occur, or heaven It can be said that the present situation is such that the timer mode is likely to occur with a certain degree of accuracy.

  In FIG. 198 (E), the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is shown as a result (for example, the result that the angel has won the battle with the devil) as a result of succeeding the heaven challenge direction shown in FIG. It shows the status of the production being performed.

  In this rendering situation, it is indicated that the transition to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) has a relatively high proportion of the appearance of the rendering aspect having high expectation as the rendering of the timer object when the count display becomes a predetermined value. Be Therefore, when the timer target exclusion effect is performed in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), a result advantageous to the player (here, a low-expected effect among the plurality of effect types is a timer target effect). The rate at which it is suggested that is not selected is increased, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

  On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the timer target exclusion effect is executed while the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) appears as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). In this case, since the rate at which it is suggested that a result disadvantageous to the player (in this case, that the high expectation effect among the plurality of effect types is not selected as the timer object effect) is high, timer object exclusion You will be able to get anxious feeling when the rendition occurs.

  In the example of FIG. 198 (E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as a count display mode, but a mode of the decorative symbol SZ that is changing or related to it. In this way, it is possible to recognize that transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is made without losing other effects during the remaining count. In this case, the current timer mode can be easily confirmed even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

  FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times that the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) is displayed after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). The timer target exclusion effect of is executed, and when the count display is “20”, the fifth timer target exclusion effect is displayed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), five types of effects among the seven types of effects prepared as timer target effects candidates are locked and displayed by the timer target exclusion effects (5 types of effects). Is in the state where it is indicated that the timer is not targeted), and when the count display reaches the predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (hold change, feature B operation) occurs It can be said that it is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (holding change, The ratio of the production with the higher expectation in the action B) is higher, and the expectation until the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

  At this time, after the appearance of the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F), the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden from the time when the effect of the timer object appears. According to such a configuration, if it is not stored that the heaven timer mode is displayed, it becomes unclear which of the remaining production candidates is high, and it is counted as a compensation for not concentrating on the production It is possible to give a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

  FIG. 199 (G) is before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target appears, after the appearance of the fifth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F). By causing the effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the character B) to appear within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (character B) is made to be a timer target This shows the production situation where the timer target advance production suggesting that the timer is being executed.

  That is, in this case, since the timer target advance effect is executed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect appears, any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect may appear as the timer target effect. It is possible to provide further information for determining whether the cost is high.

  And, in this example, since "A character B middle movement (small)" is executed as a timer target advance effect, a specific one of the presentation candidates (hold change, role B operation) squeezed by the timer target exclusion effect is specified It is possible to recognize that the "character B action" which is the effect using the decoration member SDY (character B) is in a situation where the possibility of being executed as the effect of the timer target is high (may be 100%). It will be. As described above, the “actual object B midway operation (small)” means that the “object B operation” which is the effect of the timer is “the specific decorative member SDY (community B) is from the first position to the second position”. When it is assumed that it is "displaced", it means "effect of displacing the specific decoration member SDY (character B) from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

  However, in this explanation example, as the content of the effect related to the “act B action”, the first effect with a relatively low level of expectation that only displaces the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) from the first position to the second position. In addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (characters B) from the first position to the second position, in addition to the content, a relatively high expectation of the second displacing the goods A from the third position to the fourth position The contents of the effect are prepared, and the effect according to the "character B motion" is performed in any of the effects.

  In this respect, in the heaven timer mode according to this example, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when the “object B action” is selected as the timer target effect, the content of the effect is relatively high. The heaven timer mode is set so that the rate at which the high second effect content appears is high, and the effect type appearing as an effect of the timer object is completely squeezed by the timer object advance effect. As a player, a useful function is provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target advance effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is counting. The timer target advance presentation effect is provided in a form overlapping with the count display, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such timer target advance effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) used in the timer target effect is in a state where the effect is being executed. It is easy to be misunderstood that it is easy to misunderstand that the timer target effect after the count display reaches a predetermined value and this is not displayed, instead of the timer target advance effect during count digesting combined with some things. Will be created. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is not the timer target effect but the timer target first effect, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is used as the timer target first effect. It is possible to make a strong impression of the time being, and then, even if no display regarding the timer target advance effect is performed until the count display becomes the predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (character It is expected that the timer target effect is generated with the recognition that B) is used. When the timer target advance effect is executed, the count display may not be difficult to visually recognize, and may not be displayed until the timer target advance effect is ended.

  In FIG. 199 (H), after the timer target advance effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed, a specific count value (here, “in this case,” the count display is earlier than the predetermined value (“0” here)). 3) A new winning is generated after reaching 3), and the timer for suppressing the effect according to the winning, despite being in a situation where it is determined to execute the effect (hold change) according to the winning. The effect situation in which object suppression control is performed is shown.

  That is, as described above, particularly in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), the possibility that “hold change” is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer object advance effect is extremely low. However, since "hold change" is still left as a timer target effect candidate, there may be a hold change corresponding to a new winning near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. And, it may be mistaken that the pending change is a timer target effect, and as a result, the timer target effect itself may be overlooked. In addition, when “hold change” is executed as an effect for the timer, it is executed for “hold 0” in the figure, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether the effect is for the timer. However, it is thought that there is a great possibility that these pending changes may be misunderstood under the situation where the remaining count number is low.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period in which the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect reaches the predetermined value is relatively long (here, the count number is When it is in the remaining "3" period, the hold change according to the new winning being generated is permitted, but the first period is over, and the remaining time until the count display reaches the predetermined value When the second period is relatively small (here, the period after the remaining number of counts is “3”), even if a new winning is generated, a change corresponding to this is not allowed. To eliminate the above-mentioned concern (timer target suppression control).

  In FIG. 199 (I), while the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is being performed, the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and timer related After the display (in this case, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, an effect situation in which an effect (action B operation) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), it is shown that in the heaven timer mode, the feature B operation which is the effect of the timer target is not the first effect content with a relatively low degree of expectation but the comparison. It shows that it is being executed as a second rendering content with a high degree of expectation. However, in this case, the character B corresponds to the specific decoration member SDY, and the character A corresponds to the specific decoration member TGY. The specific decorative member TGY to be selected is a position on the back side in a front view with respect to the specific decorative member SDY to be provided for any of the first effect content and the second effect content, and most of them (at least It is designed to produce at a position where more than half of the area overlaps.

  According to such a configuration, which of the first effect contents having a relatively low degree of expectation and the second effect contents having a relatively high degree of expectation are being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in an effect state ) Can be made difficult to determine, and this encourages concentration on the timer target performance. In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, as for the second effect contents, it is sufficient that the specific decorative member SDY (characters B) and those behind the above can produce effects, and in this sense, the specific decoration Instead of the combined effect of the member SDY (the accessory B) and the specific decorative member TGY (the accessory A), the specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decorative member TGY (the accessory A). It may be executed as a combined effect of the effect and the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B).

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new winning is generated, a pending change corresponding to this occurs. There is no need to do this, and the hold display that has won the prize in FIG. 199 (H) is also kept unchanged.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), "action B action" is executed as effect of the timer target among "hold change" and "action B action" left as effect candidates for the timer target. The display which can recognize that it is displayed (“役 B” in the figure blinks) appears, and the display that it can be recognized that it is not the effect of the timer target for “hold change” (“ “Pending” is displayed).

  FIG. 199 (J) shows an effect situation when the timer object suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the timer object is executed in FIG. 199 (I).

  That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the timer-targeted effect is executed, there is no concern that this is falsely recognized as the timer-targeted effect even if "hold change" is executed. Accordingly, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), the display of the hold whose execution has been carried over although it has been decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. This is changed on hold at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even if a new winning that is subject to a hold change occurs near the timing at which the timer-targeted effect is executed, the hold-change is properly displayed while clearly indicating that it is not a timer-targeted effect. Be able to run.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the hold display different from the hold display (hold 0) during change is changed to blue. However, in view of the above special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, such blue hold display has appeared Since it is clearly shown that the percentage of the jackpot symbol appearing in the variation is higher than in the case where the red reserved display appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), which effect type is excluded by the timer-excluded effect even though a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer-targeted effect was executed. In addition, a display indicating which of the timer-targeted effects was continuously executed. Also, a display indicating that it is in the heaven timer mode is continuously executed. However, the display indicating that it is in the heaven timer mode is a mode in which the display is made smaller as the decorative symbol SZ is displayed in the form of the reach display in a reduced size.

  And in this explanation example, each display which is continuously executed in this way even in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is continuously executed even in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199 (FIG. 199) K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state where the symbol is stopped (a state in which the big hit symbol appears), the timer effect is executed in the effect process up to that point, and the effect targeted by the timer effect It is possible to recognize that the “act B action”.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. .

  FIG. 200A shows an effect situation in which a change display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being four. ing.

  In FIG. 200 (B), during the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (A), the timer target exclusion effect is executed although the timer effect is not being executed. Indicates the situation.

  In this timer target exclusion effect, it is indicated that "act part B operation" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs in the fluctuation by this, the candidate for the timer target is a conversation It becomes possible for the player to know that the selection has been made to any one of the advance notice, pending change, cut-in A, action A operation, special timer, and cut-in B. That is, in this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action), the effect aspect having a relatively high expectation is the timer target Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player has deviated from the candidate, the player wishes that the timer effect does not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is not executed yet. You will be able to stimulate the game entertainment when you are.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a display that suggests various effects that are prepared as timer-targeted effect candidates when performing the timer-target excluded effects. Is not executed, but a display indicating that at least "action B operation" is not selected as a timer target effect appears. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the “act B action” is not a timer target effect, but it is unclear what other types of effects are available as timer target effects. The Rukoto.

  In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “15”, and the count display (here, countdown) is started The production status is shown.

  Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this explanation example, after displaying that at least the “act B action” is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200B), the display is changed to the timer effect ( This is continuously displayed without being displayed until the (count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display is displayed. In such a configuration, how much the degree of expectation this is from the time when the count display is started (in this case, it is a timer effect in which the "part B operation" with a relatively high degree of expectation is not executed) Will be able to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 200 (B) and 200 (C), a display indicating that at least "action B" is not selected as the effect of the timer object is continuously displayed as it is Although the aspect which depends on those displays is sometimes changed, it may not necessarily be different and may be the same.

  In FIG. 200 (D), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the timer display is performed under the non-display of the count display. It shows an effect situation in which "conversation announcement (first effect mode)" prepared as an effect candidate is being executed.

  That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that an effect such as "It may be a chance" as the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is recognized as an execution object of the timer effect. Become. However, the “conversation notice” shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect form of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is not displayed. When it is ended, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) is redisplayed and is continued further (resurrection timer effect).

  That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is displayed as if it was a timer target (count target), the count display is re-displayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect Since the second effect aspect different from the aspect is indicated to be the timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears and this is not displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target is changed after that, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In FIG. 200 (E), after the “conversation notice” executed under the condition that the count display is not displayed in FIG. 200 (D) is ended, the displayed count display is redisplayed. The effect situation which continues this is shown (revival timer effect).

  Here, in such a revival timer effect, while the count display is not displayed (FIG. 200 (D)), the count digest is also continued secretly, and in the example of FIG. 200 (E) The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the number of minutes (in this case, 2 seconds) which has been hidden is digested. That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice" is finished, the count display is re-displayed in minus notation (here, "-2"), but this causes "0" when it is hidden. Now, it is possible to express how the count digestion has not ended and this is being executed continuously. As a result, the “conversation notice” that appeared in FIG. Be able to recognize.

  In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "count display which has appeared before being temporarily hidden" and "count display which has been once re-displayed since being temporarily hidden" are different counts. In order to make it possible to more reliably recognize that the same count is being digested rather than being digested, it is possible to count the count sound, even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continue to perform over the “count display that appeared before being hidden” and the “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed”.

  In addition, when the count display is performed in minus notation (here, “−2”), a display (for example, “−2 (remaining 18), etc.) that can recognize how much the count number remains It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches “−20 (remaining 0)” as a predetermined value (when minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2”), this is not displayed and the timer target effect is executed. Become so.

  FIG. 200 (F) shows an effect situation in which a heaven challenge effect (not shown) is generated while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) is continued, and as a result, the mode is shifted to the heaven timer mode. .

  The appearance of such timer mode effect (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode) makes it clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still in a continuous state (state in which count display is in progress). Will be able to make In the example shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating that the state is the heaven timer mode is not associated with the decorative symbol SZ, but within the display area. Is displayed as a stamp notation on the left side.

  In (G) of FIG. 201, after the display indicating that it is in the state of the heaven timer mode in (F) of FIG. 200 is performed, another rendition that is not related to timer rendition is being performed. The production situation in which the “cannon chance production” is generated as the predetermined production) is shown.

  That is, in this “cannon chance effect”, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until a predetermined value (−20 in this case) and the output related to the count display are set to a predetermined value (here −20). When the “cannon chance effect” is executed, any one of the effect modes in which the output is stopped in the middle stage is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  More specifically, in "Cannon chance direction", after the cannon image is displayed near the center in the display area, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right area in the display area from the cannon image. An effect in which an area which is empty (unused) out of the area and the lower area is selectively used as a projectile of the projectile and the projectile is launched (projectile effect (predetermined effect shown in FIG. 201 (H)) Is to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area required to newly output such a bullet emission effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is various other effects (count display (upper left area), Reach fluctuation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)) are all used, and the bullet firing effect (FIG. H) There is no room for new output (a specific production situation), and if a bullet is fired in such a specific production situation, The production that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) may be damaged or destroyed by the bullet that has been fired (there is a conflict in the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production) Shima ), And more big hit expectation degree or not from being dropped, concerns such as may have occurred as a result.

  So, in this explanation example, when there is no space for the output at the time of execution of the bullet shooting effect (predetermined effect), it is in the specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G)), Out of the areas (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area) which can be used as the projectile of the bullet, the output concerning the count display using the upper left area is a predetermined value ( In this case, the output is not interrupted until -20), and output is interrupted in the middle of the process (count output abort control).

  FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which a bullet emission effect is executed under the condition where the output relating to the count display is not performed until the output reaches a predetermined value (here, -20) and the output is interrupted at an intermediate stage.

  As described above, when the output relating to the count display of the timer effect is stopped to execute the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect), the output according to the bullet emission effect is different from the case of the above-mentioned revival timer effect. The count display of the timer effect will not be output again after the end. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly counted, and this is a predetermined value (Fig. When reaching the value (−20) when 35 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started at 200 (C), it is assumed that the timing when the count display whose output has been stopped reaches the predetermined value has arrived. I am trying to make a rendition appear.

  In FIG. 201 (I), after the timing that should have reached the predetermined value has arrived if the output of the output-stopped count display has not been stopped, cut-in A (cut-in effect by ally character) as the effect of the timer target. Shows the rendering situation being executed. Note that, in the relation to the above-mentioned revival timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as the “second effect mode”.

  According to such an effect progress, after a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, a predetermined value is reached if the output of the count display is maintained but the output of the count display is not stopped. When the timing that should have been reached, the timer-targeted performance appears. That is, in this case, improvement of the game interest when the effect of the timer target appears due to the surprise property in which the timer effect which has been shown as if it were ended halfway by the execution of the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is continued Will be expected to

  In addition, for example, when the display regarding timer mode effect is not performed and there is a space in the left area in the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the count display (upper left area) of timer effect is displayed. With the output maintained, a bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is output using the space (left area). That is, in this case, the timer effect count display and the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) are simultaneously output, and the timer effect count display is also performed after the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is finished. It will be continuously performed until it becomes a predetermined value (here, -20).

  As described above, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is to output the bullet using any one of the plurality of areas. Even if the bullet is fired toward any of these areas, the bullet The jackpot expectation shown by the launch effect (predetermined effect) is the same with no change.

  And also in this explanation example, it is related to a display indicating which one of the effect types excluded in the timer target exclusion effect executed in FIG. 200 (B) and a heaven timer mode displayed in FIG. 200 (F). As for the display, the decorative symbols SZ are made to be stopped while they are being continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. .

  FIG. 202 (A) shows the effect status in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero.

  In FIG. 202 (B), while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A) is being executed, the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “3”, and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. It shows the presentation situation to be started.

  In FIG. 202 (C), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “go”) is displayed, The effect situation where the effect (cut-in B) used as the effect object of the timer effect is performed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), “cut in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. At this time, since the count display is also in a non-display state, for the player, the timer effect is ended by the appearance of “cut-in B”, which has a relatively low expectation (blue aura). Will come to recognize. However, in this effect example, after the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. An effect (second timer target effect) about whether or not to appear further appears.

  202D shows whether or not the count display is redisplayed while “Cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202C is displayed. The effect situation (second timer object effect effect) for is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), as an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display, an operation system effect that allows the player to operate for a predetermined time. If the player performs an operation within the predetermined time, a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed or a second effect indicating that the count display is not redisplayed is displayed. A presentation result (not shown) is made to appear. In addition, as an operation system effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG prompting the operation of the operation button 410, the first operation when the operation button 410 is operated is displayed. The operation expectation image SKG that suggests the ease (ratio) of appearance of the effect result is displayed. The percentage may include 100%.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), a presentation aspect in which the first presentation result is most likely to appear among the plurality of presentation modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG (anyway your friend's friend Character has appeared. Therefore, although the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the timer effect is continued. Moreover, in the timer plus production according to this embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value “3” shown in FIG. 202B) is given. Since the count display is re-displayed in the form, it is expected that an effect mode with a higher expectation will appear further as a timer target effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), “cut-in B (blue aura)” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. (The display is not hidden), and the effect (second timer object effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. The timer object effect (the first timer object effect shown in FIG. 202C) The “cut-in B (blue aura)” as the first timer target effect) is hidden, and then an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. Also good. However, in this case, the effect is switched from the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202C to an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display. It is desirable to allow the player to recognize that the timer effect has not ended and is being continued (or possibly continued).

  FIG. 202 (E) shows a count number with a timer effect of “5” after a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed in the operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (D) appears. Is displayed again, and the production status is shown in which the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In the operation system effect, in addition to the case where the player's operation is accepted within a predetermined time, the case where the player's operation is not accepted within the predetermined time, the same effect result (first) As a result of the presentation, the result of the second presentation) appears after the end of the predetermined time

  In FIG. 202 (F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) and a timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The effect situation where the effect (cut-in B) used as the effect object of the timer effect is performed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), “cut-in B” as a timer target effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high expectation (red aura). That is, in this example of production, those target effects are executed as effects of the same type in the first count display and the second count display displayed again, and in the second target effect, the first target effect is produced. It is made to execute in the form of changing (promoting) to a rendering mode with a higher degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is recognized that the same type of effect is executed as the timer target effect, so that it is executed as one timer effect in which the first count display and the second count display are connected. As the number of times that the count display is redisplayed increases, the effect mode as the timer target effect is changed (promoted) to a mode with higher expectation, and the timer target effect is generated. From the time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 203 (G) shows an effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display while “cut-in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F) is displayed. It shows the rendering situation being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), it is easier for the first effect result to appear than the example shown in FIG. 202 (D) among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG. An appearance mode (a mature character ally character) is appearing. Therefore, in a situation where "Cut in B" as the timer target effect has been executed in a relatively high expectation mode (red aura), the count display may not be redisplayed. It can be said that we are in a situation that brings awareness. As described above, after the count display reaches the predetermined value, on the other hand, the effect (cut-in B) having an aspect (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed as the timer target effect. On the other hand, an effect (an operation expectation image SKG) having a relatively unfavorable aspect (a senior friend character) is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the more the number of times that “cut-in B” is changed to an advantageous mode for the player on one side and the count redisplay is repeated, the more Since the operation expected image SKG having a disadvantageous aspect is likely to appear and the rate of redisplay is reduced, the game entertainment is enhanced and tension is felt each time the count is redisplayed. Can be suitably applied.

  And as a result of such an effect, when the count display is not re-displayed, the timer effect is ended at that time, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

  Next, various examples of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. .

  FIG. 204A shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is being performed by the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero.

  In FIG. 204 (B), while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A) is being executed, the timer effect is displayed with a count number of "10", and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the timer effect, generally, the longer the time required for counting the count, the higher the rate at which an effect with a high expectation appears as a timer target effect. When a count display having only “10”) is displayed, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in this demonstration example, during the execution of the count display, an effect of making the count value non-displayed for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress rate of the count is made to stagnate for that time. The timer stagnation effect that maintains the sense of expectation by extending the time required can be executed.

  In FIGS. 204 (C) and (D), when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) becomes the first specific value (here, “5”), this is not displayed. The production situation is shown.

  In other words, in this effect example, when the count display reaches the first specific value (here, “5”), if the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type ( A presentation (progressive presentation leading to a timer target presentation) is started to indicate whether a conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, a feature A action, a special timer, a cut-in B, a feature B action) appear. While the effect is executed, the count display is not displayed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started under the non-display state after the count display becomes the first specific value.

  In this effect example, a display image SEG11 depicting a person seeking help for a teammate character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from a person seeking help are sequentially displayed as progress effects leading to a timer target effect. It has become so. Here, when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, it can be narrowed down to some extent which type of effect appears as the timer target effect, but it specifies which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to do that. For example, the display image SEG12 shows a situation in which three teammate characters accept a request from a person who seeks help, but it is predicted that someone of the three teammate characters will confront an enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unclear which of the three ally characters will face the enemy character (for example, which one of the cut-in A or B, etc.).

  204E is displayed again with the count value of “4” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” shown in FIGS. 204C and 204D is completed. The production situation is shown.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is between “10” and “5”, the count value is incremented by “1” every time one second elapses, whereas the count value is changed from “5” to “5”. When progressing to “4”, until “the progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” that appears when the count value becomes “5” ends (here, 6 seconds), The progress of the count value is not made and this can be stagnated. In order to stagnate the progress of the count value, the display of the count display may not necessarily be non-display, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, “5”).

  204 (F) and 205 (G) are displayed when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204 (E) is advanced to the second specific value (here, “2”), and this is not displayed. It shows the presentation situation when it is turned on.

  That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden a plurality of times until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Thus, each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is displayed. Progress presentation that is connected with is to be executed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started under non-display after the count display becomes the second specific value.

  In this effect example, as a progress effect that leads to the timer target effect, a display image SEG13 that shows the intention of the middle-class ally character among the three ally characters depicted in FIG. A display image SEG14 depicting the appearance of the teammate's ally character facing the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 and the display image SEG14 are displayed, it is possible to grasp that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as a timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura) It is not possible to specify whether or not a red aura is worn.

  FIG. 205 (H) shows a count value of “1” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (second time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G) is completed. It shows the rendering situation to be redisplayed.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is advanced from “2” to “1”, the “progress effect that leads to the timer target effect (second time) that appears when the count value becomes“ 2 ”. Until the end of “)” (in this case, 14 seconds), the progress of the count value is not made and it can be stagnated.

  In FIG. 205 (I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205 (H) is advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed. Thereafter, an effect situation is shown in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, an effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, so that it is suitable for amusement entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value. To be able to maintain. In addition, while the effect related to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnated, so that the time required for the digestion of the count can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. . In FIGS. 206 and 207, for convenience of explanation, the movable body KT for effect which is omitted in the other drawings is shown in the drawing. The movable body KT may be, for example, “a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom-front front movable effect unit 3500, Equivalent to the movable member etc.

  FIG. 206 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state.

  In FIG. 206 (B), during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40”, and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the timer effect, in general, as the time required for count digest is longer, the appearance rate of the effect with high expectation as the timer object effect is higher, and such a large count number (here, When the count display having "40" is displayed, there is a concern that the tension may not be suitably maintained while the count number is being digested. Therefore, in this example of effect, while performing count display, count forward effect is generated by the decoration in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display, and the count forward effect is ended and the count display is performed. As the count value is increased when it is easy to visually recognize again, the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect is more easily appeared.

  FIG. 206 (C) shows a state in which the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time while the count display is executed with the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B). Shows the rendering situation (count forward rendering by the decorative body) that continues to stay over. FIG. 206D shows an effect state in which the count front effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206C is finished and the count display is easily recognizable.

  According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is once displayed, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body) and seems to be redone as a count display with a smaller count value. Being able to provide stage effects raises the concern that tension during the count count can not be suitably maintained.

  Further, in such a count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect, the smaller the count value that is easily visible when the effect ends, and as a result, the expectation level as a timer target effect There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment will decline due to the appearance of high effects of Therefore, in the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the movable body KT (decorative body) also has a plurality of effect modes (expectations different in expectation in the lottery separate from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect). For example, it is desirable to make any one of the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emission mode, etc. appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult for an effect with a high degree of expectation to appear as a timer target effect, the big hit expectation is high due to the effect on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, which is another lottery. If it is done, it will be possible to maintain the game interest favorably.

  In this respect, in this effect example, since it is possible to return to a state where it is easy to visually recognize while maintaining a relatively large count value such as "35", the sense of expectation for the timer effect is maintained thereafter as well. In this condition, it can be expected that the count display will be continued.

  FIG. 206E shows the operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. FIG. 206 (F) shows an effect situation in which an operation by the player is accepted for effect at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E) and the effect result appears. ing.

  That is, in this effect example, if there is an operation by the player during the first period from when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”). As a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operation effect modes with different rates of appearance with a high expectation as the timer target effect (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Evil, etc. in descending order of appearance rate) ) To make it appear.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “23”, and as a result of the production, the operation-time production mode that is most advantageous to the player ( Since Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the first period from when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”), when the player does not receive an effect, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  FIG. 207 (G) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206 (F) appears, and displays to the player. On the other hand, FIG. 207 (H) shows that the operation by the player is accepted for the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G) and the effect of the effect is shown. The production status is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, if the player performs an operation even in the second period until the count display reaches the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”) As a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operation effect modes with different rates of appearance with a high expectation as the timer target effect (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Evil, etc. in descending order of appearance rate) ) To make it appear.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “8”, and the result of the effect is a special operation effect that is most advantageous to the player. From the appearance of the mode (Daikichi), it is expected that the game interest until the count display reaches the predetermined value is maintained. In the second period from when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”), when an operation by the player is not accepted, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  However, in this effect example, when the count display is in the first period from the time of the first count value (here, “30”) to the time of the second count value (here, “20”) For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410) and an effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period until an effect is received, a special operation-time effect mode (Daichi) The rate of occurrence is different.

  More specifically, if the effect is accepted during the first period, the generation ratio of the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) is relatively high, and the effect is accepted when in the second period And the occurrence ratio of special operation-time effects (Daiyoshi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed in the first period, it is possible to suppress the production risk that the special operation-time production mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation-time production mode (Daikichi) Even if this appears as much as it is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of anticipation that a high expectation effect appears as a timer target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the second period, a special operation-time effect mode (Daiyoshi) is generated, although the production risk that the special operation-time effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear increases. When this appears as it is difficult to do, it becomes easy to have a sense of anticipation that a high expectation effect appears as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, the count display is the first count value (here, “30”) from the first count value according to the player's preference and the production status such as the degree of expectation shown in other productions. If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period in which the rendering risk is low up to the time of 2 count values (here, “20”), the count display indicates the third count value (here “15 )) To the fourth count value (here, “5” in this case), the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated bullishly in the second period with high production risk, or both It becomes possible to make the gaming strategy interesting, such as whether to operate the operation button 410.

  In FIG. 207 (I), after the presentation result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears, the count display is further developed to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer related display (here, “go”) ) Is displayed, an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

  In each of the count effects described above, the count target effect is not executed immediately when the count value reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case), and the count target effect is executed after a while. To be. In this respect, a display mode suggesting which effect is to be executed as a count target effect within a period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the count target effect is executed. You may make it appear. According to such a configuration, even when a situation in which a plurality of effects appear in parallel when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any of these effects is subject to the count effect. You will be able to enjoy it without mistaking what is being done.

  In this respect, in the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) to the time when the target object effect is executed, “the target object does not have one to one correspondence with the target object It is desirable that a “specific display mode” commonly used in different count target effects may appear. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects will appear, but when a display mode that should originally appear as a count target effect is performed It is more desirable that the rate of occurrence of the jackpot pattern be higher than that. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that it will be misunderstood which effect is being executed as a count effect, but it is guaranteed that the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing will be high. Since it becomes possible to have an interest in finding out whether it is being executed as a count effect target, it is expected that improvement of the game interest will be achieved.

  However, when the number of types of effects that can be executed as a count target effect is N, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the count target effect is executed. Even if a specific display mode appears in, as a count effect target to the extent that "one of M (more than 2) effects less than N is executed as a count effect target" It is desirable to be able to narrow down which rendering is to be performed in order to have an interest in finding which rendering is being performed as a count rendering target.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each corresponding default. Reproduction is performed using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There is a problem that it is impossible to realize various sound effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds, for the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. While each channel is dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the output means and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is If it exceeds the maximum number of channels (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output in the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means) . The details will be described below.

12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
208 (A) and 208 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 208 (B) shows an example of assigning playback channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  As for "informing sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled. As a channel allocation method, as much as possible, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing does not suffer.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the reproduction channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  211A shows an example of a production time chart, FIG. 211B shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. 211C indicates that playback cannot be performed when attempting to play back each sound. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 211A to 211C, the horizontal axes are mutually common time axes.

  In FIG. 211 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis as "the first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the "first half of the change" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 208 (B), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “holding winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In "the latter half of the change" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 208 (B), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212 (A) and 212 (B) each show an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

  FIG. 212 (A) shows an example of the reproduction channel of sound, and in the above-mentioned sound control by fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel becomes an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” shown). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Corresponded to “automatic channel sound control”).

  In the automatic channel system sound control according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the above-described fixed channel system sound control. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the automatic channel sound control, as shown in the figure, priorities are individually assigned to the respective sounds. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play a sound for the AUTO group. When sound is assigned to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  In the above case, if there is no empty channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no vacant channel in the AUTO group whose priority is lower than or equal to the priority of the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definition of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

  First, an identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. The priority indicates that the larger the numerical value is the sound to be reproduced with priority, while the smaller the numerical value is a sound to be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as an order of types of sound to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sound having a priority of “25” (“informing sound 1”, “informing sound 2” and “informing sound 3”) , Sound effects with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmed sound" and "button press sound"), BGMs with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effects"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("half notice sound effects" to "second half notice sound effects"), and hold winning sounds with a priority of "01" And As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, indicates that the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Further, as described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). The sound localization initial position of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, and additionally “1” (0x1FF in the third byte) By setting one or more volume control devices provided to the gaming machine, it is not affected by the volume change, and it is always reproduced with the volume set at the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. Each sound is set to [1]. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In these FIGS. 215 (A) and 215 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), the game state is sequentially changed along the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the “normal BGM playback” sound is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the on-hold winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting opening winning (corresponding to the “on-hold winning” in the figure), reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM playback” is played all the time on the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated, so that the notification sound having the highest priority of “25” as a new sound ( When trying to reproduce “information 2” shown in the figure, as a result of the search for the empty channel, it becomes clear that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 215 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 216 shows an example of work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control is, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a required sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic allocation group, an automatic allocation priority, an elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a workpiece for work and a workpiece for pan control, and has respective information corresponding thereto.

  The setting reservation flag has a value other than “0” to indicate that setting reservation is made. The required sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if “−1” is not stopped and other than “−1”. The sounding number during reproduction indicates the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is not stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent to Here, for example, “1” indicates that the automatic allocation group is the AUTO group 1, and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is identified, and this sound is overwritten and erased with the new sound.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans described above.

  FIG. 217 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 217, the channel is abbreviated as "ch".

  The presentation control program confirms the automatic assignment group related to the new sound (step S1102A) when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1100A), and the fixed assignment is fixed when the automatic assignment group is “0”. It is determined that is, and reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, the effect control program determines that the automatic assignment group is other than “0” as automatic assignment, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to a monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  The effect control program determines whether a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) exists if the new sound is monaural (step S1108A), and if there is a vacant sound (monophonic), the vacant space (monaural) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel) (step S1109A), the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, if not present It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The effect control program ends the processing when there is no reproduced sound channel that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when it exists. It is determined whether there is a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are a plurality of corresponding channels but not one (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106A, when the production control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, if the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not the (stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step S1124A) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1126A).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from registration, reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an available channel in order to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such free channels will be explained more visually and intelligibly.

  FIG. 218 (A) and FIG. 218 (B) to FIG. 221 (A) and FIG. 221 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 218 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice A, which has a priority of 05, as the reproduction channel 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for a button pressing sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 04 to 05 to the playback channels. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first half notice B, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a play request for a big hit definite sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 08 to 09 to be performed. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the big hit fixed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first notice_C having the priority of 05 is generated, and the reproduction channel 10 Since there is a vacancy of ̃11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and causes the playback channels 12 to 13 to be searched. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels 14-15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  FIGS. 222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 222 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a reach BGM playback request having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 is generated, and there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the production control program next, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10, Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the generation of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. 223 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (vacant)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the drawing), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using the reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing an accessory announcement sound with a priority of 10 is generated, and plays channels 12-13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01 as shown in FIG. 225 (A). Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacant)” (shown), reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which are reproducing the "preserved winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the free channel can be effectively utilized as described above, but each sound including the output schedule is as many as possible using each channel including the free channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  FIG. 226 (A) and FIG. 226 (B) to FIG. 227 (A) and FIG. 227 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and free channels are created in the playback channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the effect control program searches for a free channel triggered by the generation request for the middle symbol stop sound whose priority order is 15, and the reproduction channel 00 to 01. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the generation of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channel 00 to 01 is free. Therefore, the big hit BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement control of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that it is good to do so.

12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above is used. You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the two types of channel schemes described above or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control according to the maximum channel number (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 228 (B) shows this The present invention corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment in the case where sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by the maximum number of channels. The sound control based on these two channel allocations has already been described, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment for performing channel control for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups and performing sound control by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN 2” in the figure) . FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for the some reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponds to "PTN3" shown).

  FIG. 228 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for a part of the playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN 4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG. 229.

  FIG. 228 (F) is a diagram showing the assignment of channels to the maximum number of playback channels using one automatic channel group to perform sound control by the automatic channel method, and the sound by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. Although control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is secured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all the channels are in one group, it is possible to assign free channels or replace the channels in the output based on the previously specified criteria. Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method in which a channel is designated to output a sound, the management of the channel is not required, so that the control relating to the sound output can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels for each group, it is possible to reliably output the sound. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning and the fluctuation display is Output by automatic channel method.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize an idle channel by the automatic channel method and to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control that mixes fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 (ch), and a channel for reproducing a sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing a sound by an automatic channel method are included. . In addition, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. This will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 229.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of this embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed for the channel number, "division" indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" for each channel. Note that “Remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 229, according to the configuration of each channel in this embodiment, channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, 24 to 29 Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound etc. which is displayed while displaying a maker's logo at the time of game machine activation. Also, channel 1 is a channel that makes a pair with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during game play or waiting for customers. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Furthermore, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically allocating the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a channel for reproducing BGM is a fixed channel system, and only BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output at the time of the execution of the advance presentation effect. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, for the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

  In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  In the case of outputting a sound at the time of execution of the preview effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an available channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output the designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is opened and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is canceled based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, as in the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound at the time of volume change and a notification sound at the time of payout of game media. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a channel of the fixed channel system is allocated when the output is continuously continued as in BGM, or when it is necessary to reliably output as in the case of an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of free channel search processing in the case of executing control of outputting a sound according to the present embodiment. Although FIG. 217 describes the case of one AUTO group, FIG. 230 is different in having a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 230, in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B, when the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not an idle channel exists in the channel of the same group. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacant space in the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B becomes "No".

  Further, in the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no idle channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, a channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of sound (stopping playback of sound, opening it) when there is no channel available at the time of output of a new sound in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of change in the sound being played back, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection, Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, a channel with a long reproduction time is selected. In this manner, the output of the effect sound sufficiently executed is ended by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time after the start of reproduction, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been performed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, since an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by stopping the effect with a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Although the condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, for example, the sound output of the effect with a short (or long) effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this manner, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the presentation.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a large volume of sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, a channel with a small volume of output sound is selected with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected, and the player may be made to recognize that an effect is newly executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect having a higher degree of importance, and a channel with a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to produce a more important effect by the effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect, a channel with less dynamic sound image localization position Prioritize and select. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs monaural sound is selected on the assumption that the effect produced by stereo sound with high sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel for outputting stereo sound in order to increase vacant channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning unique priorities to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  Although the conditions of 1 to 8 are shown as an example in the table shown in FIG. 231, these conditions may be applied singly or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel satisfying more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition to sequentially apply the conditions.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which channel assignment control is performed based on priority assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel through which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of sound effects in the example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half advance notice A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Furthermore, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 233, the priority of the first-half notice A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, the volume is selected based on the suppression volume value when the low priority preliminary announcement effects in the same group are executed in duplicate. Reduced.

  The first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output from the channels 08 and 09 in stereo.

  The first half advance notice B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button depression sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice B is started, and the effects from the channels 10 and 11 are in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice C, the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound with lower priority than the first half notice C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. The sound is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half advance notice C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effects of each preliminary presentation effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the first half change of this embodiment, (A) shows output timing of effect sound, and (B) shows volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half advance notice A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half advance notice B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority of the first-half notice _B is higher than the priority of the first-half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume may not be lowered if the priority of the preview effect performed later is lower than or equal to the priority of the preview effect being executed, or even if there are few sound effects being output simultaneously You do not have to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Furthermore, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the effect sound of the first half notice A and the first half notice B, which are muffled from time t3, is resumed at time t5. The button pressing sound is originally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_C ends at time t8, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of another sound effect is suppressed by the first half advance notice C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priority are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being reproduced, the volume of the sound being reproduced on all the channels is selected instead of lowering the volume of the sound designated by the volume suppression flag or the like. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). In addition, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for reliably transmitting to the player or the game arcade employee, or the expectation for the result of the variable display to be a big hit is high. The sound effects are for enhancing the sense of expectation of the game, and the sound effects can be highly effective and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by grouping each channel used in sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of effect data relating to effect sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of a bug due to the execution of systematic tests. Also, by making stable gaming possible, the interest of gaming can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effects of the preview effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effects. The number of sound effects of the preliminary presentation effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously at the same time. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, the fun of the game can be maximized by outputting the rendering effect sound with low priority while replacing the rendering effect sound with high priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 .

  Furthermore, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound along with the change of the suspension display of the variable display and the effect display along with this can greatly enhance the player's sense of expectation, and it is desirable to be executed surely . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. There is less chance of being Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a high-effect effect that enhances the player's sense of expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, while effectively utilizing a limited number of channels by searching for free channels, priority output is given to output high-representation effects and sounds with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or the sound is preferentially output in order to notify of the breakdown of the gaming machine, the fraud, and the like. As described above, by applying the channel system suitable for the characteristics of the sound and the application, it is possible to effectively use each channel and to perform appropriate control in accordance with the sound output situation. For example, in control to output BGM, a sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the gaming state, and in control to output an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue while lowering the volume without interrupting the effect being executed. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. In addition, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effect and executing the specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modification of sound control with fixed channel method and automatic channel method]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set in the fixed channel scheme are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same kind of sound can be temporarily assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that can execute an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of parts (for example, nine parts), and a different scene is displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the occurrence of reach.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is performed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene are simultaneously output. The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the embodiment described above. The default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration of FIG. 236 (A) is similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 229 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if different preview effects are performed while the multi-screen effect is being performed.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (latter half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, he selects the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and selects the BGM of the selected scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of a scene, or the volume of BGM of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the latter half of fluctuation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) is output timing of effect sound, (B) is volume change of each effect sound Indicates

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 236 (B) at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the second half fluctuation, multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 236 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _ 5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When continuing the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the start of the execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed channel” in FIG. 228F) performing sound control in the fixed channel method and the automatic channel (sound control in the automatic channel method) The number of “variable AUTOch” (228 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced on presentation.

[16. Control of sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, the example in which the channels are grouped and the sound to be output is managed by being associated with each group has been described. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being generated is stopped based on a predetermined condition, and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. And, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, in the case where sound is newly assigned to a channel and output is performed, control of changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel or the like will be described.

  In the state before the occurrence of reach after the start of the special symbol variation (during the first half variation), the output of the sound of the BGM being played and other effects is regulated (muted) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect that performs such control, there is a blackout effect that controls the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the output of the sound effect is restricted, the darkening of the screen is canceled, and the sound output by the BGM or other effects is resumed, whereby the newly output sound (the sound concerned) To draw the player's attention and to increase the player's expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which assignment of a new sound to an empty channel is not performed, but the assignment of a channel from which sound effects are output is not canceled and a new sound is assigned. In this case, in order to restore the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassignment of sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sound of different group is being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. A description will be given of a case where a sound is newly output from a channel belonging to a higher priority group when a sound is output from a channel belonging to a lower priority group.

[16-1-1. Channel group volume control table]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group-specific volume control table indicating the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) It is divided into five groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority order and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound being played is changed when the sound is played on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. When “0” is set, control is performed to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. Note that control may be performed to set a numerical value of 100 or more to make the volume larger than normal.

  Further, each setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 238. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel scheme and the automatic channel scheme are mixed. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of effects are assigned.

  In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since “0” is set in the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced with the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or a game hall employee as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch 1, the output of the rendering effect sound or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output in order to make the occurrence of the cheating or the failure be a factor. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of the other sound having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 238, the group volume priority is set to "4" which is the lowest. In addition, since the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, even if the sound reproduction on the fixed ch 2 is started, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound played on the fixed ch 2 is mainly BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the BGM is being output, and the effect sound etc. that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol etc. Is output.

  In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds in reproduction other than the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit definite sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variation display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning a prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound notifying that the game ball has won the V zone, for example, that it is decided to shift to the high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved similarly to the big hit determined sound. Can be made.

  The blackout effect sound is an effect sound which is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound at the time of executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be performed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot sound and V winning sound are output in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the case of the blackout sound effect, the player is focused on the blackout effect by setting no sound effect by another effect for a predetermined time after outputting the blackout effect sound. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed by the change, for example, the blackout effect is executed by the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect is executed by the second fluctuation You may

  In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sounds are played in the AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in the groups whose priority is “4” or less are halved (50% Output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. Thus, it is possible to execute an effect of drawing the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely turning off the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice effect sound.

  In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Further, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, “50” is set as the suppression volume value, so when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group whose priority is “3” or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced to half. At this time, when the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch 2 is already halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, and the volume is further halved (one-fourth of the original volume). May be

  The specific sound output in the AUTO group 3 is, for example, a hold winning sound at the start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button press sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed, etc. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters a start winning opening, a pending winning sound is output even when a blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control process]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control part steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control part power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing from step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (result of step S 1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a specifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and the volume control table by channel group From FIG. 238, the suppression volume value and group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result in step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control performed in step S1410 and subsequent steps will be described. If the sound to suppress the output of the sound being reproduced has already been registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a new reproduction request The group volume priority order of the sound is compared with the group volume priority order already stored in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a requests the new reproduction request. The volume of sound that has been dropped is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new playback. The work area is overwritten with the sound number of the requested sound, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 have been executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417) or after the process of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are a work It is determined whether it is registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has ended (step S1421). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1421 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. Are erased (step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 240 illustrates an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch 2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed channel 2 has a group volume priority “4” and a suppression volume value “−1”. In the normal BGM, since the suppression volume value is “−1”, the sound is reproduced without the sound number of the normal BGM, the group volume priority, and the suppression volume value being recorded in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding prize is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2 and the group volume priority is "3" and the suppression volume value is "50" (steps S1402 and S1403 result is "No") . Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is made in advance. A set volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the normal BGM volume is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is changed to the blackout effect. The above parameters are updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the normal BGM being reproduced and the effect sound effects of the first half notice A are lower in group priority than the blackout effect, the group priority of the sound effect of the blackout effect is lower than the blackout effect (result of step S1415 is “Yes”). The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Furthermore, the second half notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of the step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in the muted state and the blackout effect Continue until the end of the

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a reserved winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output in a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the pending winning sound is output as usual.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A and the second half advance notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B is ended (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while sound effects with high group priority are being output, it is possible to highlight a specific effect by suppressing the output of sound effects with low group priority. Furthermore, with the volume control based on the suppression volume value, it is possible to make the player recognize that a plurality of effects are progressing at the same time, and a group effect effect sound that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation like a big hit decision sound By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

  In addition, when a sound with a high priority is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value The volume of other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppressed volume value) and faded out from the timing when the high priority sound is output. It is also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined, or based on the contents of effects such as the length of reproduction time of the effect sound. You may make it set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to highlight the effect sound, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target A time reaching the value may be set long to reduce a sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output, such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly produced effect sound more prominent without destroying the game tempo.

  Furthermore, when the output of a new effect sound ends and the output of another effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value) Instead, the start value (volume during regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the normal BGM output is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but when the normal BGM output is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%, and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of discomfort while enhancing the switching of the effect sound effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the rendering effect sound as an example, the present invention can be applied to the case of an alarm sound or an alarm sound as well. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity), not only the presentation effect sound but also a notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) ( For example, the output of an alarm sound of a ball jam may be regulated. On the other hand, if an illegal act is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high-priority (priority) notification sound (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to the output time of the sound like the effect sound, and the output of the sound is continued until the cause of the alarm and the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a plurality of types of alarm sounds and alarm sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another alarm sound is output. . At this time, the next higher priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)
In the above, the control of the sound output overlappingly by the priority between groups was demonstrated. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long and short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume Control Table by Sound Effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each sound effect indicating volume (volume) control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) in the present embodiment. For each sound effect, a used playback channel (ch), a total playback time, and a suppression volume value are set.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 238, the reproduction channels used are divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, as in the example shown in FIG.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set as the total reproduction time, the effect sound is output with a volume set in advance without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect can not be suppressed.

  When 0 is set to the total playback time, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. Note that the unit of the total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

  Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 238, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound effect that is simultaneously output. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being reproduced (in the total reproduction time- Output (except for sound effects set to 1) is suppressed (mute). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the allocated sound effects are also the same. It is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are played back, All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or the employee of the game arcade to the outside, and is an effect sound to be outputted since it is caused by the occurrence of an illegal act or a failure etc. And the output of sound effects during other playback is forcibly suppressed (cancelled, muted).

  Since the total reproduction time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" in the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effects are repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 2 are mainly BGM in games.

  In the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, a value (reproduction time) set for the total reproduction time for each sound effect, and “0” for the suppression volume value, the notification sound output from fixed ch 1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone. As specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 1, as shown in FIG. 238, there are a big hit confirmed sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like.

  The sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3 have the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value “50”. When a sound is reproduced, all other sound outputs being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as a specific sound to be output in the AUTO group 2 which can make the effect stand out while halving the output of BGM and continue the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Sounds, etc., and specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, the hold winning sound at the start winning, the hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and the pressing of the effect button It is a button depression sound etc. to inform.

[16-2-2. Volume control process]
In the present embodiment, the output of sound effects reproduced in duplicate is controlled according to the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIG. 242A and FIG. 242B are flowcharts showing procedures of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of sound effect output control in this embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1501A is "No"), the processing at step S1530A and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request for playing a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound that has been requested to be played, and The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1504A is "Yes"), the processing at step S1506A and the subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result at step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result at step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510A and subsequent steps.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested for new reproduction is “−1”. (Step S1510A). If the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output at the time of occurrence of abnormality, etc. The volume of the playback sound is prohibited from being suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work number is overwritten with the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1513A). When the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), peripheral control MPU 1511a does not receive the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether a sound number is not set in “−1” or the work area (step S 1520 A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 A is “Yes”), the processing of step S 1530 A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a It is determined whether the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  When the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value already held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of sounds for which a new playback request has been made is shorter or the same as the total playback time already stored in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is longer than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (the result at step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area, for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of step S1530A and subsequent steps (step S1528A).

  When volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. It is determined whether or not is registered in the work area (step S1530A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not (step S1531A). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erasing is performed (step S1532A). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1533A, S1534A), and the process is ended.

  The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total sound effect playback time in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described along a time series. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining, in chronological order, the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 243 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started and a normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output at the fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. Also, normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a volume value set in advance is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

  Further, since no parameters are registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a reproduction request has been made has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, at this point, the normal BGM is being played back, and the volume is not suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is "100" and is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the previous notice A recorded in the work area. (The result at step S1526A is “No”), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). , This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of Step S1504A is “Yes”), and the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is being output (Step S1506A). The result is “Yes”).

  Furthermore, the blackout effect sound effect requested for new reproduction has a total reproduction time of “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is “15000” (result of step S 1520 A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound requested for the new reproduction is “0” (step The result of S1521A overwrites the work area with the sound number of the blackout effect sound for which the new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0" and the total reproduction time "8000" (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black in the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the preliminary presentation effect sound (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and “0” for the sound effect volume of the blackout notice effect effect already recorded in the work area. (“NO” at step S 1526 A), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half advance notice A is set to “0” (step S 1527 A).

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is “2000” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. (Result of step S1520A is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is “50” (the result at step S1521A is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the on-hold winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound is continued.

  After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the blackout stored in the work area The parameters of the effect sound are erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A whose sound reproduction has been suppressed (volume has been reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the BGM is normally suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effects of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of another sound effect being reproduced and to make it possible to highlight a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) while the effect sound of the effect sound is generated during the muffling period. Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effects is suppressed. To notify the player while the output of sound effects is continued until after the end of the mute period, by suppressing the output of the sound effects of the corresponding effect during the mute period, the execution of a specific effect is made distinctive be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (the number of empty channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game-related interest will be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in the effect design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when new sound data allocation conditions are satisfied when there is no space in the channel (the number of empty channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. Based on the priority order, by controlling to discard the sound output of lower importance more selectively, it is avoided that the aspect of the sound output unintended in the effect design appears, and the game interest is reduced. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it is also important to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear in a situation where there is no space in the channel (a situation where the number of free channels is zero).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to effect sound (effect sound), various types of output are not made as long as proper gaming is performed. As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving control structure is adopted for output of various notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X and the like) of the limited number of channels prepared as sound control according to the fixed channel method, as various types of alarm sound (dispense alarm sound and abnormality alarm sound) excluding the effect sound. 7 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, manage the priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and definition of output type setting doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the descriptions of other definitions such as the notification sound and the effect sound are omitted. With regard to the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is allocated to and output from the channel X regardless of the state of the notification sound to which the numerical value of the priority is low for the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. It will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each notification sound exemplified in FIG. 244, notification conditions, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition (release condition) where the notification is terminated for each notification sound type. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. It is a treatment for maintaining in the state and for suppressing the subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state where the magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (in a state where the possibility of fraudulent action using a magnet is high). This is to notify that there is. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetism has been detected” And lighting by means of various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is from 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. As for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of fraudulent action by the dodging act being high is high) Alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormal) to notify that it is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first large winning opening sensor or the second large despite being not in the big hit gaming state (the state that the big winning opening is opened) Notification sound for notifying that a state in which detection by a winning prize sensor) has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in a closed state and winning a game ball) is performed. 3 (big winning prize abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when it is highly likely that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected” and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 as notification time While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when there is a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps The execution of the lighting by is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “boooo big prize abnormality detected”, and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A display (for example, "a big winning prize has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the count sensor 4005, within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). In addition, with regard to the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “booboo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of fraud is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) which plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of notification is made is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the first notification group (state in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is high), it is possible to respond to the fraudulent activity on the hole side rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this respect, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of “booo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, but they belong to the first notification group It is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is to follow the notification sound of "booboo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hole side can be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is in a state where the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (a possibility of fraudulent action by the door open being performed However, it is reported that it is in a state where the door may be opened by the abnormal handling by the hall side. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “door is open” And the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as notification time, about loop processing which outputs notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" repeatedly from the time when there is detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (equivalent to the notification sound repetition for 3 times In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 is used to open the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), a state in which the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed by opening the main body frame, a notification sound 5 (frame opening) for notifying that there is a possibility that the main body frame is opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side) There is an intermediate possibility that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and this is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when it is in a state where it can not be denied. With regard to notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notification The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open" and lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, while the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, As for lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, but the door About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) There is.

  That is, when notifying those belonging to the second informing group (a state in which there is an intermediate possibility that fraudulent acts have been made), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to perform the hole side abnormal treatment promptly to some extent. In this respect, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to a third notification group described later, a message sound notifying which notification type is to be output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the alarm sound such as “ping pong ping pong” is continued to the message sound although it is an alarm sound different from that belonging to the first notification group. So that it makes it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgusted, it is an output mode when it belongs to the third notification group although it is a lighting mode different from the case where it belongs to the first notification group By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, although the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-short state, the game ball is provided with the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate manner (left-handed)) This is to be notified. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “return to the left” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, in a non-time-short state, both the loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 When the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed, the process is ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for two times).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in addition to the notification sound 6 (left hitting guide) (lower plate Informing sound 7 (ball removal guidance) notifying that it is in the state where it is necessary to perform the ball removal of the game ball in 322, perform the game guidance for appropriately advancing the game although the possibility of fraud is low It is regarded as belonging to the 3rd informing group when it is in the proper state, and regarding the informing sound belonging to the 3rd informing group, setting the informing mode, the informing time, and the cancellation condition to those in common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), the sensors 2401 and 2401 are terminated when 20 seconds have elapsed after detection by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, the notification sounds 6 and 7 function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

  By the way, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short in order to have a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. In this way, it is possible to give a notice on game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 244 and FIG. 245, for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound is created at the time of output. After that, it may be assigned to the channel.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (a), assuming that there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no alarm sound is output now, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. Is detected, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and its notification mode is set. (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is allocated to the channel X, sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and peripheral control is performed. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed together. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously performed until the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality is performed.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as "booboo magnetic detection detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic detection is detected And the lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), at the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop playback, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I do not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side of the allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is output (reproduction state), when the timer (60 seconds) has not expired, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “Boom vibration detected”) Playback is to be executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display or lamp is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. These are executed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be reflected in various types. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even in the case of reflecting, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  After that, at timing tα3 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) At the timing tα3 that has been increased, the loop processing is terminated at a time when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and when the notification sound is good.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest thereof By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a time (a time obtained by subtracting a time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “booboo vibration ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound reproduction is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (a), the sixth alarm sound (here “booboo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have been played, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, "a booboo magnet is detected" and "a booboo vibration is detected" is connected at a strange place and it becomes impossible to recognize an unauthorized notification in a tense situation (for example, If notification sound 1 ends with "booboo magnetic" and notification sound 2 starts with "motion detected", meaningless notification such as "booboo magnetic movement detected" The occurrence of content that may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer according to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and finished at the alarm sound of “boooo”, and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is ended and is not reproduced at a halfway timing. If it is a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is prompted to confirm the display in the liquid crystal, and “displayed magnetism” and “detected vibration” are displayed on the liquid crystal display respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) Is almost the same as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Then, information indicating that there is a frame open detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information is included, the alarm sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 245 is allocated (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Start notification sound reproduction in a mode (here, a loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the frame closing detection which is the cancellation condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “ And “lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tβ1 and the notification sound “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter) in which the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state As a result, even if it is understood that door open detection information is included, alarm sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. 245 is displayed to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, it corresponds to the door open detection. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the screen generation schedule data according to the door open detection, The above-mentioned liquid crystal is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection is set, the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the frame open detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection have the same data contents, In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After this, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At time t.beta.3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been reproduced three times, and the timing is good.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door There will be an announcement sound playback in the (loop of ping-pong).

  That is, while the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the alarm sound of “the door is open ping pong pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the alarm sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open” It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as ping-pong ping-pong.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (b), the third message sound (here, “the frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping pong pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, smooth notification sound switching can be realized as if "the door is open") has been reproduced. As a result, "the frame is open and the door is open" and "the door is open and the door is open" may be connected in a strange place, and it may not be possible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 246 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-saving state within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed detection in a non-short-time state), The control MPU 1310 a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information that there is a right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. Thereby, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It will be. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tγ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, When the right-handed detection information is detected, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (not shown) for starting notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-handed”) and counting the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( Set 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, with regard to right-handed detection in the short time state, information to that effect is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command in this embodiment, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate portion 2003 It is determined whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time-short state on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side so that only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command. And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-short state.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state is copied to various control data copies of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in the non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511 cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. Display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left") will be performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), step S110 or step S110 is performed at timing tγ2 at which 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tγ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is in loop playback. In the processing of S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the lower tray full tank detection is performed by the full tank detection sensor 279. At this point, the main control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that lower-side full-tank detection has been made as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of timing tγ1 at which rightward detection in the short time state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (lower counter full detection) is supplied to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information on the detection of the lower pan full is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is displayed on the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20 For the second), and when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out and the lower tray is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X only for the remaining time, and set the notification mode (here, "Please remove the lower plate ball. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom fullness detection at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), it is for screen generation according to the bottom fullness detection. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c so that the above-mentioned liquid crystal internal display is executed. Yes.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 at which 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball out guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom full detection. , And by allocating notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" will be executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. It will be possible to prompt.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 246 (c), the second message sound (here "Please return to the left") has finished playing, the third message sound (here "Please pull the ball of the lower plate") It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if reproduced. As a result, "Please return to the left" and "Please pull the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange places, and the occurrence of situations where the notification content can not be recognized can be suitably suppressed. Will be able to

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, silent data of 5 seconds is interposed. Because the message sound of another notification sound comes to be played back, the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, and the notification content can not be recognized. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), if there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, this will be said. With respect to processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), processing similar to that described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detection detected” is started, and the timing (time of 60 seconds) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) timer is up. At t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state. In the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that there is a door open detection by the door frame open switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door open detection (see FIG. 244). ), Even when door open detection occurs, processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  In general, the lower priority processing is similar to the case where the same priority processing described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (c) is overlapped. Processing is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group” in which the possibility of fraud is moderate. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at timing t-2, neither the alarm sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. , Set only the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting according to the door open detection is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, "booboo magnetism is detected even though there is door open detection by the door frame opening switch 618 in a state where an alarm sound such as" booboo magnetism has been detected "is being played back in a loop. "From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection is played back for 30 seconds," the door is open ping pong ping pong " That is, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound is reproduced three times. In this way, notification sound 4 (door opening) according to door opening detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from processing based on normal priority, and notification belonging to the second notification group Although it is the content (here, the "door is open" loop of ping-pong ping-pong), it will be expected to promote the recognition that it is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound that “booboo magnetism has been detected”, the notification content is started from the message sound (the door is open), so the first notification group in the most tense situation is It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs is ended. On the other hand, the alarm sound of “ping pong ping pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it can be easily recognized that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (b), it is assumed that there is door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tδ1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t.delta.1 and the step is performed at the timing t.delta.2 in which the notification sound such as "the door is open" is in loop playback. In the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed strike in a short time. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state Therefore (refer to FIG. 244), even when the right hitting detection in the non-time-shortened state occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the process on the side with the lower priority, the notification sound on the side with the lower priority is the same as in the case where the processes with the same priority overlap described with reference to FIGS. The process is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is performed. No schedule data is set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return to left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "Please open to the left" has not been included at the good timing of the cut. Since it can be reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has become low while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type which has been reproduced up to that point has ended and the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be.

  FIG. 247 (c) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), 30 seconds has not elapsed from timing tε1 and at timing tε2 in which a notification sound such as “the door is open pinging pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112. It is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in either sound or lamp lighting. The output content is not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, with regard to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound and lamp lighting, it has been set up at that time at timing tε2. The sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection may be processed to be canceled from the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in a set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tε2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (processing at the time of opening the door) does not perform any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boost magnetism detected” is started, and a timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-Bou magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is immediately performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection having a high possibility of the fraudulent activity being performed. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the alarm sound such as "booboo" is first reproduced as the alarm sound, the alarm belonging to the first alarm group is performed, and it is promptly transmitted to the hall side that it has switched to a tense situation It comes to be expected.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, rightward detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that there is a right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing), the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 246 (c) is performed. Therefore, at timing tζ1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at time tζ2 in which a notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in a state where the loop sound is being reproduced since 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tζ1, It is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opening) according to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the detection of the door opening, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator in the process of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance), right-turn detection in the non-time-short state which has been set up at time tζ2. A process may be performed to cancel the sound generation schedule data according to the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state but also the sound generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state at timing tζ2. The schedule data for sound generation according to the door open detection as well as the schedule data for the sound generation according to the door open detection whose priority is higher than this are kept as they are set in the set state, and the light emission mode The generation schedule data is set to each set. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed without any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (left-hand guidance process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and in the alarm sound 4 (door open). As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection occurs in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  Even in the situation where such abnormal alarm sound is output, it is possible to change the volume setting value or the brightness setting value, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is preferable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 244 are to be output, various processes described above are performed according to the priority order. Even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for notification sound, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group which has a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of a fraud may be higher than a medium condition depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection that is highly likely to have been tampered with, but also when there is an abnormality detection that is less likely to be fraudulently performed. is there. In other words, if there is a high probability of an anomaly being detected, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with an anomaly detection that is less likely to be conducted. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. 248 to 253, in addition to the control based on the priority described above, special conditions are taken into consideration, and the state of the gaming machine is further enhanced. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 at which no alarm sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also included. Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played over a second.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is maintained until the timing tα 16 when the door open is not detected by the door frame open switch 618 comes.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is finished and the channel X is in the idle state, the magnetic detection whose priority regarding the notification is relatively high Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection They are put in the set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, and for the notification sound according to the magnetic detection, 60 seconds until the timing tα 14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the alarm sound reproduction according to the door opening detection is finished and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that the magnet may enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place the wrong purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in the cold state, and it is extremely malicious. Therefore, there is a concern that it is insufficient as a countermeasure only to perform the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already off, magnetic detection can not be used as a trigger even if some measures are taken.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the fact that the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing is used, Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. Special processing to reassign to is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", so that a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and everyone's attention will be gathered. In addition, even as a person who does fraud, it is already relieved that "when notification of magnetism is over, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is possible to finally make the situation where it is not obvious to be cheating". Since an alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection that should have ended is reproduced, and an unexpected alarm condition occurs, it is expected that recognition that there is an excess of risk is too large. It will be.

  Although described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is performed and in the period during the notification process belonging to the second notification group, other channels are used. A process (a process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed to suppress the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and the gaming sound other than that being assigned. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period for which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal It is a period in which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. A process (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that is performed, and the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed in the period of timing tα13 to tα14. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) that suppresses the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the other game sounds is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, when the door opening detection is finished at timing tα16, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the end state is reproduced in a form that leads to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", there is a possibility that extremely malicious action has been performed In view of the above, even when the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended is reached, the volume of the effect sound in the symbol change or the game sound other than that may be suppressed without being suppressed.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 248, as apparent from the processing according to the door open detection, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is a period during which the notification sound according to the door open detection is reproduced. The period to be performed and the period to light the lamps in the manner according to the door open detection are made to have the same start time but different end times. As described above, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds by operating them so as to have different roles for the notification sound, display in liquid crystal, and lamp emission. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed, right-handed detection in a non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 248, since it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the other game sound is not changed. By the way, it is extremely vicious even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right hitting detection in the non-short time state by the gate sensor 4003 after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door opening detection ends. Therefore, when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is ended at the timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. There is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is no such thing as being played back in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then detects the door opening. Wait for the notification sound reproduction according to the end, and when it is attempted to secretly arrange an illegal target magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold, the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 The possibility of being in the situation entered is assumed. However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more useful to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection to end, it was tried to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold. Even when the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced according to this, the situation is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is going to be re-placed, and there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, the notification sound 1 A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed. Can be played continuously. In this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is continuously reproduced over a period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. Finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism is detected" ends, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as "Booboo magnet detection". As a result, it will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing great discomfort in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was made, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting the boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated at the timing tα 54 in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 252, when an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state in which the warning sound has cooled after the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection is finished. Even though the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without suffering from such a situation. It is assumed that there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection” At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further linked to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  Moreover, at the timing tα 54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated, a timer (60 for not counting the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Is set, and the schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended. .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boost vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is not completed at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boost vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted with a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the door open detection” A special process is performed in which “schedule data” is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection” connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. In addition to being played back at the same time, it is played back in a form linked to “playback of notification sound in response to vibration detection” at which the loop processing is terminated at an abrupt timing such as “detecting booby vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame open detection ends instead of door open detection Assumed.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the detection of the frame opening is a situation where there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened. Even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used for the ball side to eliminate the clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection. By reproducing in a form linked to “reproduction” (timing t α 64 to t α 65), a great sense of discomfort is generated in the hole, and it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, thereafter, at timing tα 66 when the main frame 4 is closed and frame open detection is ended, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also according to magnetic detection Each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) is also subjected to a special process for ending them.

  According to such a configuration, the notification processing corresponding to the frame open detection and the magnetic detection can be performed only by closing the main body frame 4 when the false detection on the hole side is performed while suitably performing the function against the fraud As it becomes possible to end all notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), it is expected that the response on the hole side to the false detection can be speeded up and the atmosphere in the hole suitably maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 253, the frame opening detection is also performed when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. At the end timing, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also each informing processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetic detection You may make it perform the special process which complete | finishes.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the player's setting value (player's setting value) is reduced with respect to the speaker volume, it is determined by the player with regard to the speaker volume when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated. Processing to increase the value (player set value) is performed. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. The volume adjustment is completed, and it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is lowered and when it is raised. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when the empty channel is exhausted (for example, the output sound volume of the effect sound ( It is possible to more reliably transmit that the volume of the audible sound has changed.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value at any time, etc., it is intended to maintain the amusement of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic abnormality or door opening, processing is performed to assign and output a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not discontinued. From the above, it is possible to enjoy the effect again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is ended.

  However, in the above-mentioned effect development lower notification processing, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of display effects is not to be canceled, the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel at a normal time More channels are used than in the non-informing state, and there are no free channels to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no vacant channel to which sound data has not been assigned at a stage prior to the end of channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, either of the sound data at that time Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (informing status) of a specific notification sound is ended thereafter, the sound data that can not be assigned to a channel can be reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether to adopt the automatic channel system or should be determined from the design viewpoint of the game and the effect, even if any channel system is adopted as the above-mentioned effect development lower notification process It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program, in order to ensure cost reduction and reliability improvement for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the effect sound that is being produced is not variable but is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“Pi!” Or “Pi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. It is hoped that this will give more room to the channel and help reduce the risk of losing free channels.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the period in which the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being performed, the output volume (possible) After the setting change of the sound volume of the listening sound becomes acceptable, it is necessary to receive multiple operations to change the sound volume to the proper value, but in this case the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned sound of volume adjustment completion. As a result, there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the fact that the effect sound can not be properly output due to the lack of available channels despite the fact that the informing progress lower notification process has finally ended.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. While the output sound volume of the effect sound being played (sound volume of the audible sound) is not made variable but is maintained, the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the sound volume is allowed to be accepted by itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the setting value (player setting value) in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Even when the notification process under the effect progress is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production ends, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification processing under effect progress was performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, etc., the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. It may be made to output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of a special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more preferably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations or the like, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) at once as the notification process under the progress of production is finished. . According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In the above explanation example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, when the magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification sound corresponding to this is ended, the door opening detection is performed. Notification sound was output again (see FIG. 248). However, when the alarm sound according to the door open detection is in the output state and a magnetic abnormality occurs and the alarm sound according to this is ended, even if the door open state is maintained, It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted “notification sound according to door opening detection”).

  When the door is opened, lamp emission is performed according to the detection of door opening. This lamp emission continues even when the notification sound according to detection of door opening ends and when the door is open. It is desirable to make it. Furthermore, it is desirable to continue for a predetermined time after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is ended.

  Even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and when the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while maintaining the door open state, the specific error It is desirable that the alarm sound according to the door open detection be output again based on the occurrence of the. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening.

  Alternatively, there is a specific error that does not output an alarm sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the error occurs according to the door open detection while the door open state is maintained, when the specific error occurs, The notification sound according to the door open detection may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and the state where the re-notification can be performed may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is preferable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described for the processing from the execution of such notification processing under effect development to the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram for describing the contents of the in-progress development informing process separately for the informing state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to explaining the processing from when the effect progress notification process is executed until the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. A brief explanation of Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are illustrated, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 254, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among these, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in this particular example, the process according to the output itself is performed without the effect sound being performed. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any is performed, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the side of high suppression degree. Moreover, even when abnormality detection is turned off, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the volume of the sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, abnormal vibration, Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is ended in the first sound volume suppression mode on the side where the suppression degree is low.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. Therefore, no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound).

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. The output volume of the production sound in one suppression mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed are not necessarily different. A process of suppressing (the volume of the audible sound) may be performed. However, with regard to the termination condition of the process to be suppressed, it is different if the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make

  FIG. 255 shows the contents of the processing relating to the volume adjustment associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process regarding the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is varied by “1” within a range of “1” to “5” by an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. As the value is smaller, the volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller. In addition, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the player setting in the state where the above-mentioned suppression mode (the first sound volume suppression mode and the second sound volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), the player setting value is “3” of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the production sound, and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” that is 20 times that. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the big hit determination is not made and is in the start prize waiting state, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect selection left button 331 is simulated. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is displayed to indicate that the volume can be adjusted through these operations. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. Ru. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be always displayed, or during a specific period such as super reach effect which is a reach effect to be executed in a state where the background image is changed. In the case of the above, at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a later-described second volume value display OH2 may appear when the player performs an operation without displaying. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 255A, when an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20”. In addition, whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255C) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume (audible sound volume) is reduced. The person setting value is kept at “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is kept at “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

  On the other hand, when the starting winning combination occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255 (A) (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the execution period, acceptance by the player is permitted. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration allows the setting change to be made possible.

  That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in association with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation of them, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is “60” which is 20 times of those While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at "80" which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, player setting is made. The value is changed from “4” to “5”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed to “80” to “100” which is 20 times of those. Volume adjustment completed at “100”, the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the range of the player setting value is “1” to “5”. A second volume value display OH2 indicating which one of the current setting values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical value range of “1” to “5” is regularly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change in the player setting value. Is displayed to show the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when there is an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C). The display is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value) When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 256 shows that the door open detection is generated during the symbol fluctuation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying a thing.

  The situation shown in FIG. 256 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (A). In this situation, when a start winning is generated and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong”, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is open ”and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is used. Informing processing under notification progressing processing is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 256 (A). The sound output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player setting value). The contents of the performance are developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accepting the change of itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point It is as mentioned above that it is made to make a batch change.

  That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the first specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification processing (output volume to a specific value) When the process of decreasing is completed, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), to the output volume (volume of audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. The first specific value (here, “10”) is to be collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump (“10” → “100”) in accordance with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are exemplified as the specific state, but the process of notification of the progress of the development progress and the door opening occur in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs. Regarding the notification process under the effect progress in the performed state, the end conditions may be different.

  For example, first, with respect to the presentation progress notification process in a state where the door has been opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door has been opened) ). However, in any case, when the output volume (volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively (for example, “10” → “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment complete sound although the output volume changes. It is desirable not to make the assignment itself.

  On the other hand, the notification process under the progress of the presentation in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred is not terminated only when the state of the magnetic abnormality is terminated, but is continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is turned off. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel assignment of the volume adjustment complete sound itself.

  In addition, in the progress notification process in the state where the door has been opened, a display indicating that is made when the player setting value is changed, whereas in the progress process in the notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that may be omitted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process when the door is opened and the effect progress notification process when the magnetic abnormality occurs. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hole side, it is impossible to output the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob. It is more desirable to make room for an empty channel.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, in addition to the buttons for volume adjustment (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332), various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 Lamps (for example, lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for production, and game lamps such as special-purpose LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting targets. Of the brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the player determines the brightness applied to the various effect lamps. A process for changing the set value (player set value) can be executed. In addition, when the player setting value related to brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value according to the setting value applied to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the luminance of such a rendering lamp can be set and changed by the operation of the player in any of the state in which the symbol is not changed and the state in which the symbol is changed.

  In addition, it is desirable to assign a channel on the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound for the brightness adjustment completion sound, and in this case, even if the setting value for the luminance is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation There will be a situation where the channel assignment of sound itself is not performed, and a situation where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and outputted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (for example, whether or not the above-described performance progress notification process is being executed) when the setting value related to the brightness, not the volume, is changed. Will be made possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since being controlled by the demonstration screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (the first volume value display OH1 or the second volume) It is to the third party that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where neither the value display OH2) nor the output (channel assignment) applied to the volume adjustment completion sound is performed. It is more desirable to make it hard to recognize.

  Also, when a new volume adjustment is performed when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state is output even if there is an empty channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel and outputting it (overwriting output) in the form of quitting is more effective in making room for the number of empty channels. desirable.

  Also, when the operation to the side where the volume is increased is performed even though the player set value is at the maximum value, or to the side where the volume is reduced although the player set value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is a vacant channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not allocated to the channel and this is not output, so that the number of vacant channels has a margin. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but a display (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) indicating which of the current set values is displayed is displayed. Also good.

  Volume adjustment by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is allowed, but it may be possible to generate a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not allowed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 257, when the state detection occurred in FIG. 256 is not door opening but magnetic abnormality, the processing for the notification sound according to this is executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). In this situation, when a start win occurs and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the magnetic detection that belongs to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to this is executed. Specifically, loop processing (60 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Also, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in accordance with this, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. Informing processing under production progress is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 257 (A). The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a second predetermined specific value (here, “0”) which is lower than the original value (20 times the player set value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this respect, even when the process for notifying the progress of the effect on the lower side according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, the second specific value (here, “0” is selected when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed. The output volume of the effect sound reduced to “)” (volume of the audible sound (silence here)) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-described production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is finished. As described above, the batch change is performed.

  That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that a predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) that is lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is advanced with the volume of the second specific value being maintained.

  At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is the second specification Since the value (here “0”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this example of the explanation, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The notification process under the effect progress that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of magnetism detection while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH has returned to the state in which it is executed again. When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 257 (D), the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) in which all the operations up to that time are reflected in accordance with the completion of the process. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  Note that when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. Yes. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is ended, the effect sound deviates from the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, according to the player setting value. However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when the magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is permitted even during the period when the effect development lower notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game until the informing processing lower notification processing ends. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed in a lump (“0” → “100”) when the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality is terminated. In spite of the change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is not possible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 244, for the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and the notification sound corresponding to magnetic anomaly such as "Boo-boo magnet was detected" Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is executed, the notification processing is not executed, so during the execution of such notification, the player is set Both the value and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 244, since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value, regardless of the player set value, It always plays back at the volume set with the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, for each process described in FIG. 256 and FIG. 257, state detection is performed not only during the period of symbol variation execution, but also before the symbol variation is started and over the start and end timing of symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  In each process described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 256 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 257 differed in the production | presentation sound suppression aspect during the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression aspect, it does not necessarily exist. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  In addition, in the announcement progress under notification processing, although it will suppress the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of various game sounds, the game ball is in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 among these game sounds. Some game sounds such as a sound reproduced in response to winning (prize sound) may be reproduced with the volume set as the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, there is no channel space by adopting a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) It was proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical matters are performed at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In addition, when adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, it is not necessarily adopted about the control structure of the above-mentioned channel saving type which enables an alarm content etc. to be appropriately notified only by a single channel regarding various alarm sounds. You do not have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is employed, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be employed, and a process for discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Moreover, each example demonstrated below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an act of praying with the hand holding the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” has been performed. It can be detected by detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined value that does not indicate any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel over a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is performed in this way, even if special performance conditions such as a jackpot finalizing effect and a pre-reading effect are established as a result of the game ball being received at the specific winning opening, At this time, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to end, an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and reproducing it can be executed (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned to the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to winning.

  As for special sounds, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, in the effect determination based on the jackpot determination according to the winning (for example, Predictive announcement sound that is executed when a highly anticipated announcement effect that is performed during the execution of a reach production is selected, or when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by a prefetch judgment according to a prize It is possible to exemplify a pre-read notification sound or the like that is executed as an effect, but in essence, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special determination result is obtained by determination by a predetermined determination means according to winning What is necessary is

  FIG. 258 shows that when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a special sound (for example, a quine) corresponding to a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state where the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a determination that a special sound is to be output (a determination that a pre-reading effect will be performed) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation process ensured in advance from time.

First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, general pre-reading effects which are known techniques will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. , First and second start opening winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In this first / second start opening winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a start opening (first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that the player has won a prize, the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by one.

  Further, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 134: Steps S5231 to S5234), the prefetching process for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. 134). 135: step S5245, FIG. 136: step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed and the contents of the effecting on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information relating to the winning for prefetching determination, symbol type for prefetching judgment) Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol as described above. It is an effect that In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the big hit is won and the symbol variation is not digested, and information obtained from the prefetch command when they are put on hold ( Expectations on whether the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result based on information related to the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side and information related to the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side) It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the special symbol processing flag based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue color and a relatively high expectation red color). Whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the prefetching expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined not to perform the pre-reading effect) according to the result of the determination In the normal display mode of (1), the process of performing the suspension display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such pre-reading effect, when making a pending display (including a big hit confirmation pending display) appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation, an output of a special sound (for example, quein) may be performed according to the pre-reading execution. There are many. However, since such special sound (prefetch effect) is reproduced at the winning timing of the gaming ball which occurs irregularly, winning of the gaming ball occurs at timing when there is no space in the channel, and it is determined in the prefetching determination. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special indication is not reproduced even though the pre-reading judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode (blue or red) with high expectation. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, prior to making the game ball win a prize in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and outputting a special sound (pre-reading effect), the special sound is Since the channel to which it can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is possible to execute the channel reservation process secured in the.

  For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot determinations that are currently on hold (the number of holds) is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable state, the player usually wins a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in order to increase the number of holds. A game (handle operation) is performed as described. As a result, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winnings, and the big hit determination is made. Every time the game is put on hold, a process relating to a hold display or pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

  Here, as a pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first winning combination (first hold), the second winning combination (in the order of winning to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. Then, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning the pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the pre-reading determination is made by winning). A hold display with a mark will appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also the first prize (first hold), the second prize (for example, in the winning order to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing of winning), but this is maintained in the execution waiting state After waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become empty, the special sound (for example, quein) is output. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing of outputting the special sound (for example, quein), or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold made in the pre-reading determination occurs. Good. However, in the case where the hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold that has won the pre-reading determination occurs, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being performed and the channel reservation process are not being performed. In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can be made to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held around the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is not shown. However, this is detected as an object, and this is used as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display is performed in which "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and "countdown of A process of assigning and reproducing “sound” to a predetermined channel is performed. The voice of the countdown is, for example, started from "30" and is ended when it is counted down every second and becomes "0". Further, even during the period when the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for “Shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and “voice of countdown” in a predetermined channel. It can be generated as a trigger (detection by a sensor) as a trigger only by itself, and it is not related to the contents of the rendering (representation that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation under execution, It does not depend on the result of the big hit judgment at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be appropriately changed to other contents. However, by performing such processing, the display and sound are predetermined for a predetermined time (30 seconds). The channel can be maintained in a usage state (in this case, a “countdown voice” usage state that does not indicate any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends for a predetermined channel is assigned (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first win (first hold), the second win (second hold), the third win (third hold), and the fourth win (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown audio” is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetching win) that the prefetching effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, quein) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and is stored as a waiting state. The special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state in this way is output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning time at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period (timing tY11 to tY12) from when the player holds his hand up and starts reproduction (channel reservation processing) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention and is ended. If there is no, or if a special prize has not been obtained but a special judgment result has not been obtained (if it was not won in the pre-reading effect), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends is reached Sound is not played.

  According to such a configuration, the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) from his own intention to the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-fetching win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” It is ended and it will be executed as a notice effect after aiming at timing when a channel becomes vacant. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is generated at a timing when at least one channel is vacant. Since reproduction is aimed at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, and a special determination result (read-ahead) within a relatively long period of timing tY11 to tY12. It will be possible to easily recognize whether or not (winning) has been obtained.

  In addition, when outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at timing tY12 for reproduction. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown voice” has been assigned, channel reservation processing and an announcement effect according to that are performed for only one channel. It can be said to be beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of effects can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, for prayer mode background display in which “Torii of the shrine” is displayed as a background image, timing tY12 when reproduction of “voice of countdown” is ended, and reproduction of special sound (cuein) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to cause the channel reservation process to occur again each time the number of reservations decreases. From the point of view that it seems that there is a benefit when the hand of the “Shrine torii” is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be reproduced at a later notification timing is higher). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, release operation by a button). However, in fact, even if "the shrine's torii" is displayed as a background image, the player holds his hand even if "the shrine's torii" is not displayed as a background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for the predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (voice of countdown), so the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "voice of countdown" is ended. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the notification sound is terminated.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again and is detected during the period from timing tY11 to tY12, the "countdown voice" playback time from the second detection until the predetermined time (here 30 seconds) elapses. May be extended so that a special sound corresponding to the pre-reading winning is outputted when the timing comes.

  In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol variation is in the changing state but also when the symbol variation is not in the changing state. You may make it do. In addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation.

  However, when a special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-announcement sound, the first time winning (first hold), the second time winning ( (2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold), it will be difficult to know which special decision result (prefetch win) was obtained, so prefetch win There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to being put on hold without recognizing that the hold is pending. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (second hold) (3 hold), it is also possible to make it different depending on which hold of the fourth winning prize (fourth hold) wins. However, in this case, since the content changes from the sound (in this case “Cuin”) that is played in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not being executed, it is possible to know that the pre-reading is won. There is concern that it will be lost.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is given at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, and fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) is obtained, a process of varying the playback time of the special sound (herein “cuin”) starting from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the first winning (preserving first) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, the special sound (here, “Quin”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, there is a case where a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the second winning (second suspension) winning at a relatively early timing in the period from timing tY11 to tY12. In this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Quin" once is 3 seconds, and if the special sound (here, "Quin") is played for 6 seconds, "Quin" is played twice As a result, a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) winning at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 9 seconds, “Cuin” is 3 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at a very late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once, when playing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin / Cuin / Cuin / Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained between timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained by a winning that has occurred. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special determination result (prefetching win) was obtained with the winning that occurred at an earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. The longer the playback time of the special sound from timing tY12 is, the longer the timing of tY11 to tY12 between timings tY11 to tY12 is indicated, the more special judgment result (prefetching winning) is obtained. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result can be obtained according to the winning, but also in this case, according to the timing at which the winning occurred. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, in view of the fact that the number of reservations is limited to four at the maximum, when a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Quein" 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the play time of the batch, if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the play time of "Quin" 2 times regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Quin" regardless of the winning timing, and if the special judgment result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is regardless of the winning timing May be set to the playback time of "Quin" for 4 times.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading winning is obtained, “cuine” is reproduced as the special sound, but the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when winning. The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed according to which of the low read-ahead winning) and the second determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation is obtained) is obtained in a pre-read determination when winning a prize, “Quin” is reproduced as a special sound, but pre-read when a prize is won When the second determination result (predicted winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading prize is obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively low degree of expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively high degree of expectation) It will also be possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is made by the look-ahead determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning in the very early timing among the timing tY11 to tY12. On the assumption that the second judgment result (predicted winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained by the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at a very late timing. However, in this case, after the special sound is reproduced in the form of "cuin" for 3 seconds from timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the form of "docan" for further 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the prefetching was won in the prefetch determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching win with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) is the second It is possible to predict that the determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (prediction winning on the first special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound and If the second determination result (prediction winning on the second special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second start port 2004, "docan" may be reproduced as a special sound . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second starting opening 2004 Depending on the situation, it is desirable to play "Quin" or "Docan" as a special sound.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 can be obtained. The first winning (winning with the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing is a winning on the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (first special view It becomes possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading win is also determined in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) which is won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (the pre-reading win on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the form of "dokan" after one "cuin" played back has been played, the 4th prize (the 4th hold) is the second starting port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special view side) has been obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning combination while the channel reservation process is being performed. In the pre-reading effect, it was decided to illustrate the case where the pre-reading winning is obtained. However, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262, the point is that the gaming machine is subjected to the determination process when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (such as channel reservation processing) that can avoid that a channel shortage occurs and can not be output when a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained, which has technical features in itself Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetching in the prefetching effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored during the progress of the game, and when this number is less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is made to be high (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, for at least part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it is possible to make the number of free channels hard to be zero.

  More specifically, in the periphery control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation according to the big hit determination in the hold state is digested (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the symbol variation to be digested is Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is a vacancy in the channel, the rate at which the channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the vacancy of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is increased until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the channel limitation with such symbol variation as one unit is By performing this operation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and as the level values become higher, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of game sound becomes higher.

  FIG. 263 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for such processing for setting the channel restriction level.

  Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 within the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, as the processing in step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. In addition, about this reset process (step S3101), you may make it carry out, when symbol fluctuation is complete | finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the classification of the first half of the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of variation (for example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of reach effect, Specify "X" which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) with reference to the timing when the channel becomes most vacant in the period from when the fluctuation start to reach the symbol stop and so on) Do. In addition, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the presentation pattern of the second half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel in the second half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the symbol fluctuation stop) Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the free space is at its lowest.

  However, when an effect pattern that stops the symbol without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol variation is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process of step S3103 itself, or the maximum number that can be set as the number of empty channels “Y” in the process of step S3103 (a number that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

  Then, in step S3104, “X” specified in step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in step S3103. Among these “X” and “Y”, On the basis of the value on the side where the minimum number of empty channels is smaller (the side where the number of empty channels is not sufficient), the channel restriction level is set until at least the relevant symbol variation to be determined is finished. As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start to the end of the symbol variation to be determined. Therefore, it is expected that the number of vacant channels is hardly reduced to 0, and that it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to appearance of an unintended performance mode.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum free channel number” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half (step S3102) and the second half (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of symbol change to the start of reach production) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, the minimum number of vacant channels to be used for the determination of setting of the channel restriction level may not necessarily be separately identified in the first half and the second half of the fluctuation, and effects from the start of symbol fluctuation to the stop The number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is least occupied in the period in which the effect pattern is executed, with the pattern as one unit.

  In addition, the “minimum number of free channels” here is a sound that is automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined advances (a symbol stop related to BGM related or a big hit determination, a big hit determination It indicates how many channels are left as idle when they are assigned to each channel for the corresponding sound effects, etc.). Therefore, a button press sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound associated with winning at a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The effect pattern (representation content) to be judged is developed, such as the sound associated with the winning of the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the common electric effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol) Various kinds of sounds that are not necessarily executed simply by being included are not included as judgment targets.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a value of a channel restriction level set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104, and an example of restriction contents defined for the channel restriction level. .

  As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a block winning sound (a winning for a general winning opening) among various types of game sounds is first made as a sound to be subjected to channel usage restriction. Sound accompanying a), hold winning sound (sound accompanying a prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), general power effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no spare channel available, at least those game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) of various types of game sounds. Channel usage limitations may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to "0". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with an empty channel is performed, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of them are limited, and if there is a prize at the general prize opening during execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and played, and the first start port 2002 or If there is a winning at the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, The electric sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel for playback, and when the volume is adjusted while the symbol variation is being executed, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is sent to the vacant channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 6 to 11, the process of step S3104 performs the channel restriction based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which the pattern variation with a slight margin is executed in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction Sound)), a channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. In other words, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but the block winning sound is set to a predetermined value. It will process so that it does not allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to play the block winning sound itself without setting the sound generation schedule data according to the winning on the general winning opening.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "2". That is, in this case, four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect, volume adjustment, etc.) are considered to be subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation is executed with relatively little spare time in the empty channel. The channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of the block winning sound and the reserved winning sound among the completion sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation, the quantity according to the winning is detected Although the prize balls are paid out for a minute, and the above-mentioned first and second starting opening winning processes are carried out, the processing for holding on hold sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined vacant channel. At this time, it is preferable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and not to play the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with no margin in the vacant channel is executed. The channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on block winning sound described above and the restriction on holding winning sound, even if the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, this is the case for the general effect sound Is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol variation, although the volume adjustment according to this is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined vacant channel. It will be. At this time, also for the general effects sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them, and do not perform the reproduction for the general effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than the predetermined number while the game is progressed, the number of vacant channels is predetermined As compared with the case where symbol variation that is not less than a number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of at least a part of various types of game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, with respect to some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound), the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0 Since the execution of related processing is limited, and the rate of execution restriction is increased as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected that the occurrence of such a situation should be suitably suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction among various types of game sounds is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but the other "sounds associated with winnings". , “A performance sound related to normal determination”, and “a sound related to volume adjustment”. That is, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect on whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation can be suitably executed without being limited. The decrease in the game entertainment when the channel use restriction is applied is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, multiple types of game sounds that are candidates for restriction on channel use are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (as the minimum vacant channel number is smaller, the number of types of sounds subject to restriction on channel use is increased). However, a method of limiting the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of free channels decreases. For example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be employed.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating another example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 265, in this alternative example, the channel is used depending on the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. Make a limited lottery about whether or not to limit. However, here, a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) Etc.) is limited only to the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is set to 0/100, A restriction process for channel use is not performed on a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is increased as the value becomes larger, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum vacant channel The probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level is 50/100. The same probability in the case where is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0 and 1) is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction process concerning the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even with such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number while the game proceeds, the number of vacant channels is equal to The ratio of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of the various game sounds is increased compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed. That is, in this case, with regard to some game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds) of the game sounds, there is a restriction to the execution of the process related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. As the number of vacant channels is increased and the execution restriction rate is increased as the number of vacant channels decreases, it is preferable to generate a situation where the number of vacant channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected to suppress.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, the minimum free channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that there is no room in the number, and it is possible to prompt the game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) corresponding to the estimation.

  In the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, after the determination processing for various advance effects is executed based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of available channels is specified from the occurrence status of those advance effects, and the specified minimum free space Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to assume in advance for each effect pattern what amount of sound will be simultaneously channel-assigned at the same time during the symbol variation period, so the channel shortage occurrence probability is classified in advance separately for the effect pattern Keep it. Then, when the rendering pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be higher as the probability of occurrence of the channel shortage in which the rendering pattern is classified in advance is higher. That is, in this case, when a special type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels simultaneously is executed, there is actually no button operation or various winnings are not generated, and many channels are not used and empty channels. Even if there is a margin in the number of events, there will be situations where the execution of processing related to the output of game sound may be restricted while the symbol variation is being executed, but the empty channel can be achieved by simply performing the processing. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid that the number of objects becomes 0, and even when such processing is performed, "the number of free channels in the pattern change is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which the process related to the output of the game sound is limited is high, and when the number of free channels in the symbol change is relatively large, it is related to the output of the game sound It is only a phenomenon that the rate at which the execution of the processing is limited is reduced, and there is no particular sense of discomfort from the player's side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether the sound is limited, it becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to be short of channels.

  In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit. However, the channel is created while the production contents are developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction corresponding to the channel restriction level may be executed each time. Or, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific production mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, the channel restriction level remains unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel restriction level is set. Accordingly, channel restriction may be executed.

  By the way, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, the sound that is subject to restriction on channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, Only “sounds associated with winning prizes”, “production sounds related to normal judgment”, and “sounds related to volume adjustment” were adopted. However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize a restriction process that can secure an empty channel more effectively, It is desirable to adopt “effect sound” as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “effect sound related to the big hit determination”, there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in an effect lacking in excitement. In some cases, if the jackpot symbol is stopped, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  In this respect, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, among the "arrangement sounds related to the big hit determination", only the "arrangement related to symbol variation in the hold state and to be digested in the future" If the channel use of sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example thereof), for the effect relating to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt an effect sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a target of restriction without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 occurs during a period in which symbol variation is being executed and the corresponding big hit determination is put on hold, the hold is normally made A determination process is performed as to whether or not a pre-reading effect is to be performed with respect to the jackpot determination made into a state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) is suggested to suggest in advance the degree of anticipation as to whether the held jackpot determination is to be a big hit. Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1, symbol variation is being executed) In the case where “the effect sound corresponding to the effect relating to the symbol variation that will be digested in the future” is targeted, winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is suspended. Even if it is in the state, the determination process for the pre-reading effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot determination put on hold, and both the pre-reading effect and the effect sound corresponding to this are not performed. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not limited to the change on hold in the game board side effect display device 1600, but also in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) When it is executed to cause a change in effect (according to a change in hold, etc.), not only a change in hold in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) It is more desirable to restrict the predetermined effect change so as not to be performed in order to suppress a sense of incongruity (progressive deviation) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a countermeasure for channel shortage.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion to be used for rendition relating to the symbol variation in the future which is not the symbol variation in progress is being executed Because it becomes possible to supply to the production sound regarding the fluctuation of the character, the production sound with high frequency of occurrence can be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation under execution You will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only the "representation concerning the symbol change in the future in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is subjected to restriction, it will be restricted if it is reserve digested in the future Since the effect during symbol fluctuation not being turned on (content of the effect according to the effect pattern) is always executed, the decrease in the amusement of the game due to the restriction of the effect is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 265 or another example thereof, a process of restricting a specific sound not to be output when “predetermined effect condition” causing concern in the number of empty channels is satisfied is performed. did. However, even if the “predetermined performance conditions” are not satisfied and there is no concern about the number of empty channels, processing for limiting the specific sound from being output under a predetermined condition May be performed. For example, when a specific condition different from the “predetermined effect condition” is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which a specific sound cannot be output over a plurality of symbol variations is generated. According to such a configuration, a special production state (production period) in which the number of vacant channels has a margin over a plurality of symbol variations appears, and in the special production state (production period), only that much. Other performances can be performed more actively.

  In addition, when "rendering sound related to the big hit judgment" is the target of restriction, if only the sound of the effect (display of the effect, sound of the effect) is the target of restriction (no sound output), it will fall into the effect lacking in excitement In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties about the vacancy, the player wins and the jackpot determination is put on hold Judgment processing for pre-reading effect When this itself is not executed, it is made not to perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding pre-reading effect, therefore special result (pre-reading winning) is not obtained in pre-reading judgment The situation is the same as when playing (pre-displayed when pre-read effects are not executed), and it is preferable to suitably avoid a decrease in game interest due to the execution of effects lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when the winning combination and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process for the prefetch effect itself is not executed, and the effect display and effect regarding the prefetch effect are performed. Although I did not do both with the sound, it is not limited to this. For example, when "play sound related to the big hit determination" is a target of restriction, the judgment process about the pre-read effect is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained until the specific timing in the symbol change comes Restricts both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the pre-read effect without executing them, and when the specific timing during symbol variation comes, only the restriction to the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound To do this. That is, in this case, the effect display relating to the pre-read effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing) different from when "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination" is not the restriction target (at the time of normal) Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the decline in the game entertainment effect by not outputting the production sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform suitably.

In addition, as processing concerning future rendering in the situation where channel use is restricted,
・ The pre-reading effect judgment process is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect are not executed until the specific timing during the symbol change arrives. In order to limit these, when a specific timing arrives during a symbol change, the restriction display for the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is only released and this is performed. age,
-When the winning restriction is not executed, the game is progressed when the second restriction process is used, which does not execute the judgment process for the prefetch effect itself and does not perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the prefetch effect. In particular, when symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels with no sound assigned is less than a predetermined number, compared to when symbol variation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. The ratio of execution of either the first under-restricted process or the second under-restricted process is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first under-restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is “B”. When it It is more desirable that either the first restricted process or the second restricted process is executed so that these relations become a relation of “A <B”. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the greater anxiety arises due to vacancy, it is not the first under-restricted process that restricts only the effect sound but restricts both the effect display and the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second under-restricted process increases, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more appropriately suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the sounds assigned to the limited channels are the first group sound in which the effect volume can be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player, and the effect volume can not be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player. It is possible to distinguish at least from the second group sound (such as an error sound). In this respect, when the "predetermined effect condition" causing concern in the number of empty channels is satisfied, it is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 that only the sound distinguished in the first group sound is limited. It is desirable to suitably execute the process when it occurs.

  Further, the limited channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which a presentation sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the presentation sound can be assigned. If the number of vacant channels in the state where no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than the predetermined number, the execution period of the symbol effect display is vacant in the first channel group. Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display where the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio that the specific sound is not newly allocated to the channels of the first channel group is high Thus, when an error occurs, it is possible to execute the processing only for the first channel group. And performing the definitive processing more reliably desirable in terms of both possible to reduce the processing load.

  Further, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 265 or another example thereof, “the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels in the state where sound is not allocated is reduced to less than a predetermined number Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display where the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the specific effect sound not being newly assigned to the channel to the effect state being high is " There are features. In this respect, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “a effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel”, As soon as the execution period of the symbol effect display is ended, the "state of effect in which a specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel" can also be canceled (ended). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “a state of effect that the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel”, Make sure that the rendering state (a rendering state in which a specific rendering sound is not newly assigned to a channel) is always continued over a plurality of symbol variations including the symbol rendering display even after the symbol rendering display is finished. It is desirable to make it. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is treated as "effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is not completed and is prolonged, and in the meantime, no specific effect sound can be output. That is, in this case, a special effect (when the symbol effect display indicates that the number of vacant channels is reduced to less than a predetermined number), when "a effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel" appears. It is possible to add a presentation performance about “whether or not it is to be performed”, and it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  Further, in an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel, a specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the “specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel” by displaying the specific image.

  In addition, a specific image can appear at multiple timings in one symbol variation, and if it is displayed as an image with different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, one of the multiple timings Even if there is an image of contents (looks, forms, etc.) that the player does not grasp or there is an image that the player does not grasp (images, forms, etc.) As a result, it is possible to more reliably recognize that the “specification effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel”.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, A process of ending assignment of a specific game sound to a channel can be performed in a state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously assigned to the channel (channel special release process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at timing at which it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the aspect of the channel allocation of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). The number of channels in the channel is reduced (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, the number of channels in use is reduced even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds. This makes it difficult to be aware of this, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the fact that specific game sounds are no longer output.

  FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 266, there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “normal BGM reproduction” according to is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction) and according to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The “effect A playback” sound is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 for playback (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this point, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect At timing tk13 (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback ends. As described above, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the stage of effecting, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern is obtained by performing the process of terminating the assignment of the effect sound from the channel and changing it to an empty channel promptly. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to allocate and reproduce new sounds due to insufficient channels.

  However, as described above, when there is a predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) when the assignment of the effect sound is removed from the channel and this is changed to an empty channel The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is reduced, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the corresponding effect pattern may be reduced by the decrease.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, the sound of "reproduction A" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, and the timing tk13 before the reproduction ends comes. From “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after timing tk13, the sound of “effect B reproduction” according to effect B displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 The playback channels 08 and 09 are assigned to be in a playback state (in this case, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), timing tk13 in which “reproduction of A effect” is ended during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B reproduction” is put into the state of reproduction. In accordance with the arrival of the "effect B reproduction", a process of reducing the volume (volume reduction process) is performed while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" are allocated to the channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a rendition sound corresponding to a step effect that can be developed up to four times in the content of the rendition. After the effect content has been developed over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect as to whether the effect content is further developed according to step 4 is executed. In the state where a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” corresponding to the step effect are allocated to the channel, processing (volume suppression processing) to decrease the volume is performed. In addition, when the high expectation performance aspect which develops further to the production contents according to Step 4 appears when this volume reduction processing is ended and returned to the normal volume (a performance with relatively high expectation), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of the step 4 is outputted as the sound of “reproduction B reproduction”, it does not develop into the effect content according to the step 4 and the step concerned with the effect content according to the step 3 When the low expectation effect mode in which the effect is ended appears (effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “play A” is not played back. It is possible to make it difficult to notice.

  Particularly, in the example shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the content of the rendering with a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the rendering developing to step 4) and the content of the rendering with a relatively low degree of expectation (step The above-mentioned period (period in which it is unclear whether development will be made or not) in which presentation contents (representation of whether or not development to step 4) appears that leads to any of the presentation contents that do not develop to 4) A volume suppression process is executed, and the “production A playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends. According to such a configuration, not only in the situation where the volume of the effect sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (sound of “reproduction B reproduction”). Then, since the effect A (sound of “reproduction A reproduction”) comes to an end, the volume of the effect sound that has been targeted for volume suppression including the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” is then returned. Sometimes, even if the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced, the effect content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the effect content developed to step 4) and the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is no longer reproduced by drawing interest in which of the presentation contents not developed to step 4 appears.

  In addition, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume is lowered while each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” is assigned to the channel. The volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is continuously played at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is reduced while the sound volume of some effect sounds (“normal BGM playback” sound) is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sound is discriminated. Since the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound comes to an end while the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is no longer reproduced, it can be made more difficult to notice. It will be.

  Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is not terminated immediately, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is ended. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a possibility that the player will be interested in the production sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. Therefore, when the state that does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. Therefore, the sound of “production A reproduction” is aimed at such timing. By terminating the reproduction of the above, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process is gradually reduced in volume, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silenced). As a result, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice the fact that the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” sound is started in the state where the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppression state. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be ended.

  Further, the effects A and B are not necessarily the effects accompanied by the effect display in the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the effects A and B may be executed as sound effects only.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “effect B reproduction” is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (representation pattern) according to the big hit judgment, but It is not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is started to be started, and the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process may not necessarily be reduced stepwise. Also, conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silenced), and if it is suppressed to a volume lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) according to the effect pattern is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. Conversely, the sound of “production A reproduction” may be maintained without necessarily reducing the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is reduced. While the player is interested in the “production B playback” sound, the playback of the “production A playback” sound is terminated, and then the “production B playback” sound is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of the plurality of effect sounds that have been targeted for volume suppression is returned, the content of the effect with a relatively high expectation (step 4) We are interested in which one of the rendering content (which develops into 2) and the rendering content with relatively low degree of expectation (the rendering content that does not develop to step 4) appears, and the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is reproduced Can be made harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” is performed (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction” more appropriately, It is desirable not to reproduce the corresponding reserved winning sound. Further, even when a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of “effect A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the effect sound is reduced in volume, and when the period is ended, the channel is allocated to the channel in the state of reduced in volume. In addition to this, the special effect sound that has not been assigned to the channel until the end of the period is added to the channel. You may make it newly allocate and reproduce | regenerate (reproduction | regeneration with the normal volume). According to such a configuration, an interest is gathered whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the sound volume is returned, and it is further noticed that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced. Can be difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels being used after volume return is reduced compared to before the volume drop, there is a concern that it may seem as if the expectation for the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation has decreased, but special effect sound Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (reproduced with the normal volume), so that it is the same as before volume reduction and after volume return, or more (two or more effect sounds for the channel (When newly allocated), it becomes possible to keep the channel in use, and it is also preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the degree of expectation decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, the special effect sound may or may not be reproduced, and it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  When a special effect sound that was not assigned to a channel is newly assigned to a channel and played back when the volume is returned, a channel that has become idle because the sound assignment of “play A” is removed. It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  In addition, such channel special opening processing may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, the restriction target in the processing described with reference to FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 As “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of vacant channels is, the less symbol variation (when the number of vacant channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number) The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in the situation where there is a margin in the number of empty channels so as not to make the user feel uneasy about the lack of channels, the “production A” can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

  In the above explanation example, “volume suppression effect” that outputs at least a part of the game sound of the game sound in the suppression mode or silence is performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the effect pattern of the specific type is executed (selected And when the effect content is at a specific timing, it is executed over a partial period in the effect pattern. In this respect, the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “effect patterns of a specific type” that can generate such volume suppression effects are prepared as “other effect patterns” that do not generate volume suppression effects ( It is desirable to set so as to be smaller than the number of effect patterns stored) in order to improve the game interest when a volume suppression effect occurs.

  Also, when preparing a plurality of effect patterns as "effect patterns" that can generate volume suppression effects, those effect patterns are longer than the effect patterns that cause volume suppression effects to be executed over the first set time and the first set time It is desirable that an effect pattern for executing a volume suppression effect be included over the second set time, and that the expectation level that a jackpot symbol appears in these effect patterns is different. According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game sound of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silent state, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested depending on how long the state is continued. Will be able to

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (The process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "effect pattern capable of generating a volume suppression effect", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during pattern variation regardless of the effect pattern, the volume adjustment confirmation Since the player who sees the situation that the sound is not output comes to be aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game interest. In this case, although the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the effect display device 1600 does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound so as to display a message indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. It is desirable in order to make the person aware (be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed). The phrase “does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting this at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel .

  The expectation level (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested during the period when the “volume suppression effect” is set so that at least some of the game sounds are output in a suppression mode or in a silent state. It is desirable to perform the expected display (expected effect that causes any of a plurality of effect modes having different expectation levels to appear). According to such a configuration, since the player's interest is transferred to the expected display (expected effect), the sound of “effect A playback” is heard during the period when the “volume suppression effect” is being executed. It is possible to make it even harder to notice termination.

  When the “volume suppression effect” is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, the sound is returned to a state where the “effect B playback” sound is output in a non-inhibition mode. New effect sound data that is different from any of the effect sounds that are already in the output state (“normal BGM” or “effect A playback”) at a predetermined timing before the timing arrives is assigned to the channel, and the new effect sound A sound corresponding to the data may be output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in a non-suppressed manner while the “effect B playback” is output in a suppressed manner or silence. Since the sound of “Production B playback” is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode while being output in the non-suppressed mode, the sound of “Production A playback” has been terminated. Can be made more difficult to notice.

  In the period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is not displayed or is displayed in a suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that display images displayed on the effect display device 1600 include those not targeted for the processing.

  The period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed can appear a plurality of times within one effect pattern, and in those periods, “the time during which at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silence” is long. It is desirable to make the According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make a specific effect sound in a non-output state in a state that is difficult to be noticed by the player in any effect scene, and it is possible to improve the game interest. .

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing for advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel to reproduce Do the process of Then, when the display effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 advances to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is allocated to the predetermined channel and the state is output in the suppression mode or silence ( The volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and output. When an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as operation button 410) is detected in this state, the symbol fluctuation causes a big hit symbol A special effect sound that suggests an expectation that a special display mode appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressing mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. From this, it will be possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of a certain sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so as to start playback of the sound in accordance with this indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output in silence compared to other sections When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special It is made to become a time-series relation in which the effective period of the effect receptionist occurs within the period). In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  FIG. 267 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when such a process sound output process under suppression is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 267, a specific example when performing such a suppression operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing ts11, the specific effect being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the whole period (a part of the symbol fluctuation period) in the drawing including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and 267 (b), one sound data ("BGM playback" sound) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is special. Silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the timing ts13 when the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) for which an operation opportunity that causes the production of sound is given occurs. It is made to be in the reproduction state in a part section. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the “BGM playback” sound, the sound can be output without sound while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is a possibility that there is a margin in the channel usage status While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound in a state where anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and may not be able to output a special effect sound" is removed. Will be able to control the decline in game entertainment.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is ended even if the player does not perform the operation. At time ts15 before arriving, the period is ended so that the player's operation is not accepted for production. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the operation effective period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state in the partial section set as the silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. Note that the operation valid period is ended not only when the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned based on the acceptance of the effect. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period ends at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is possible to output the “BGM playback” sound as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted until the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output as the non-suppression mode is variable. The buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in the non-suppressing mode of the sound of "BGM playback" (The sound of "BGM playback" is restored in the non-suppressing mode by being mixed into the special effect sound By making it difficult for the player to notice that it is not possible to restore the sound of “BGM playback” as a mode of non-suppression when the operation by the player is accepted, and the sense of incongruity by returning after the predetermined time It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the production sound for BGM playback, the sound “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. In the state, the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended.

  In the above example, the “timing to start reproduction of special effect sound” and the “timing to end reproduction of special effect sound” are controlled by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). Depending on the timing to be accepted, they will be variable within the range shown by the dotted arrow, however, even if they correspond to any timing, timing ts16 comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state It is apparent that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is to be started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 267, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning after a predetermined time without returning the“ BGM playback ”sound as an unsuppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when an operation by the player is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation effective period is generated at the timing ts14, and the effect is accepted when the effect by the player is accepted within the operation effective period. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced. And, even if it is operated at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of BGM reproduction is densely reproduced to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, a silent period (according to the operation timing) after a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends and the sound of BGM reproduction is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set in such a silent period that a resurrection effect in which the expectation (or 100% may be high) can be generated, it will be expected to maintain the game interest.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. It is also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. It is desirable to make the sound of reproduction secretly transition to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and the aspect is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. As long as it is output at. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, the “BGM playback” sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-sequential period of silence in the sound data itself. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a suppression mode or a silent output state (special period) only by reproducing the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at time ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. If the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is finished. (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process is made to make it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16 at least. It is desirable to Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is a restriction target, and that the specific game sound that is the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech, etc.) and a timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppression mode or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable in order to alleviate the anxiety that the special directing sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound played on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not necessarily start to be played at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and after the timing ts12. And may be started before timing ts13. Even in such a configuration, when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or a silence state, if a specific performance sound is output in a non-inhibition mode (normal mode), “ Since the sound of BGM playback that is set to “suppression mode or silent state” can appear to have been returned to the playback mode in the normal mode, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or silent It is possible to make it hard to notice that

  Further, “for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before timing ts14 (or before timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or predetermined effect sound) is output”. "The output of a specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the player's operation is received within the operation effective period, or is automatically ended at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period)." It means that. That is, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated unless the effect by the player is accepted until the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period) arrives.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, the sound of BGM reproduction is from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including special effect sounds are output, the sound of BGM reproduction can be easily incorporated into those effect sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is normally It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the aspect.

  Further, such an under-suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265 “BGM playback sound” is used as the restriction target, and the smaller the number of symbols, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels. You may make it make the ratio by which the said operation sound output process under suppression is performed high. According to such a configuration, the BGM playback sound is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a surplus in the number of empty channels so as not to feel uneasy that the special performance sound is not output due to a lack of channels. Will be able to

  For the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 267, even if there is no operation, the effect reception always occurs (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the post operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do it.

  In addition, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 267 occurs, the stage reception is permitted while the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppression mode or in silence. You may make it output the "reception acceptance sound" which suggests that, in the non-suppressing mode. The “acceptable sound” is configured as a partial section in the “specific sound data” for outputting the “specific effect sound”, and the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel before the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific performance sound corresponding to the channel is output in a non-suppressing manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as a sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Note that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the effective period will occur soon) before the operation effective period occurs. In this case, “a reproduction section of a prelude effect sound” and “a reproduction section of an acceptable sound” are provided in one sound data allocated to a channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13. The “acceptable sound” may be a non-output state during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at timing ts15. Although it is good, when it is in the output state and the production is accepted, it is desirable to use this as a trigger for the non-output state.

  That is, “acceptable sound is output” means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing ts13, and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data in accordance with the timing ts13. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data is a concept that includes a transition to a period in which the sound (including silent data) is reproduced after the end.

  In addition, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 267, even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, the elapsed time from the time when the effect reception is made Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned.

  In this regard, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), a special effect display corresponding to the effect acceptance also appears as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, for the special effect display corresponding to the reception of the effect, “the execution state (viewable state) is continued until the elapsed time from the reception of the effect reaches the predetermined time value”. Instead, it is desirable to perform the operation so that “even if the presentation is accepted at any timing within the effective period, it is not displayed when a predetermined timing in the presentation pattern arrives”. As the “predetermined timing in the production pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. There is a timing that arrives before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, for the processing related to the special effect sound, the output state is not continued until the timing at which the “BGM playback” sound comes after the timing ts16 at which the sound is returned in an unsuppressed manner. However, since the special effect display can be finished before the special effect sound, the effect after the post-operation effect can be advanced at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is not displayed is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored or the timing before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted is predetermined, based on the fact that the effect is accepted. A process of processing the special effect sound that continues the output state until the time value is reached and a process of processing the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives Each will be started with.

  For example, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed over a relatively long period. Among the post-operation effects, the “process related to the special effect sound” ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the reception of the effect. On the other hand, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed only for a relatively short time. However, the “processing related to the special effect sound” among the effects after the operation is executed from the time when the effect is accepted until the timing at which a predetermined time value elapses.

  In other words, in this case, the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 267 is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the content of the effect as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “the output state is changed until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value. This function functions to execute the “process related to the special effect sound to be continued” and the “process related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives”.

  According to such an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period is generated, the execution state of the “process related to special effect display” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to be paid, the end timing of the “process for special effect sound” in the post-operation effect comes relatively early. That said, if you do not operate for a while after the effective period occurs and operate at a later time, the end timing of “processing related to special effects sound” of the post-operation effects will be a relatively late stage. However, there is a demerit that the execution state of the “processing related to special effect display” among the post-operation effects cannot be maintained for a long time.

That is, in the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), there is no one that is the most desirable operation timing for enhancing the effect.
・ Why do you enjoy the process by extending the execution state of “Process for special effect display” in exchange for accelerating the timing of completion of “Process for special effect sound”? Or)
・ In addition to shortening the execution state of “Processing related to special effects display”, whether to enjoy this process by extending the time until “Processing related to special effects sound” ends (at a later stage within the effective period) Operation), or
・ Simultaneously sacrifice the time that “process related to special effect display” is maintained in the execution state and the time until “process related to special effect sound” is finished, so that the overall balance is achieved. (Do you operate at the early or late timing within the validity period)
It is possible to provide a strategic operation performance such as that for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception performance that is difficult to get bored of, which allows the operation timing to be selected according to the player's mood. Will be able to.

  Here, in the above-described example, as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process relating to the special effect sound” and the “process relating to the special effect display” are lines Although the described example has been described, "processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or "processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body" instead of "processing for special effect display" "" May be performed. However, as for the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the "process for special effect display" described above, even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period. It is desirable that the operation state be terminated when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Here, "to end the operation state" is an effect to operate the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position to the original position It means to start processing to operate to return.

  In the example described above, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) and a “process for a special effect sound” that is continued until an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It was. However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined performance condition is not satisfied (for example, when the big hit determination is lost or the predetermined performance determination is lost) In other words, even if an effect is received within the operation reception effect, the “process for displaying the special effect (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition Compared to the case where the condition is satisfied (FIG. 267), the “process for the special effect sound” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short may be performed as a different effect sound. More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error) and the effect may not be accepted, and as a result, the effect is not effective. If the period is over, the player's interest in playing the game is that the player does not perform the processing for the special effect display (or the processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body) even though the operation is performed. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatic acceptance) in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. (Or a process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) and “a process of applying a special effect sound” which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value It is desirable to do so. As a method for automatically generating an operation reception (automatic reception) or a presentation mode related to this, it is possible to use any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 389, or an appropriate combination.

  Note that, as described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is being suppressed, if an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in an output state, the effect is received. Based on the reception, the post-operation effect is executed, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is canceled at this point. In this respect, even when a normal effective period that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is not suppressed, the reception allowable sound is set in the output state along with the generation. It is desirable that the sound be continued without canceling the output state even if the presentation is accepted when the sound is in the output state. In addition, with respect to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated, the effect sound that can be continuously reproduced for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound that is output when the normal effective period occurs. It is desirable to use it as a game entertainment device even when the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed and the normal effective period, the image display imitating the operation means used as the operation target, and the effective display A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is provided to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this regard, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs at least while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and “ A process related to a special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and an “elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted” It is desirable to start each of the processing for the special effect sound that is continued until the time value reaches a predetermined time value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will be finished immediately. In addition, as a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 385, or an appropriate combination, or even It is possible to use the content of the written description.

  In the example described above, for the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as a “specific type effect pattern” for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in silence or silence, the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed Alternatively, setting the number to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as “other production patterns” that are not output without sound is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. .

  In addition, when preparing a plurality of effect patterns as "effect patterns" for outputting the "BGM reproduction" sound in the suppression mode or silent mode, the sound pattern of the "BGM reproduction" sound suppression mode over the first set time in these effect patterns Alternatively, the effect pattern to be output silently and the effect pattern to output the sound of "BGM playback" in a suppression mode or silent over a second set time longer than the first set time may be included, and in these effect patterns the big hit symbol is It is desirable to make the appearing expectations different. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM playback" sound is output in the suppression mode or silent state, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation depending on how long the state is continued. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (The process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 that can select “an effect pattern that outputs the sound of BGM playback in a suppressed manner or silence”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern variation regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, since the player who has seen the state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. become. In this case, although the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the effect display device 1600 does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound so as to display a message indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. It is desirable in order to make the person aware (be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed). The phrase “does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting this at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the effect reception being made when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or silence state is that over a time twice or more of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) It is desirable to be configured to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is received immediately after the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed is It becomes possible to make it longer than the output time (special effect sound) until timing ts15.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is allocated to an empty channel to which sound data is not allocated is triggered by the detection by the detection means. Executable (channel assignment cancellation operation). In other words, in this case, an empty channel will be created in response to the player's operation. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite performance sound and special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

  The operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this explanation example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an action such as holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying with reference to FIGS. The point is that the contact or non-contact predetermined sensor can detect any state change that occurs when the specific action to be detected (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed. Any process may be used as long as it detects the sound assigned to the channel and removes the sound from the channel and ends the reproduction.

  FIG. 268 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when the processing related to such a channel assignment cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 "BGM1 playback" sound (for example, effect sound effect played during the execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (in this case, stereo playback), and The sound of “BGM2 playback” corresponding to the production mode (for example, one piece of music that is continuously played back across multiple variations in a short-time gaming state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback) ) Is in the situation.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) It is considered to be subject to forcible termination of channel assignment at the time when a symbol is detected, and during the period when the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is An acceptable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected such as “Operate a button and secure a vacant channel” in the display area of gaming board side effect display device 1600 (channel allocation cancellation operation) An operation instruction image prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation situation of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of the timing tw12 to the timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection unit is not performed. It shows.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 comes, the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. Even after timing tw13 arrives, this is continuously reproduced. In addition, at timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the operation instruction image (operate a button and secure a vacant channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduce it. In this example, the vacant channel is previously secured in another channel (reproduction channel 10, 11) even if the reproduction channel 02, 03 is not changed to the vacant channel by the detection by the predetermined detection means. A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned to the channel and played back. However, when the vacancy is not secured in advance in another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmed sound) can be assigned, and it becomes impossible to reproduce and output this. There will be concerns.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period of timing tw12 to tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection unit. Show.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channel 02, 03 is detected at the timing tw12a when the detection is performed. The sound “BGM2 playback” is removed. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure in advance a vacant channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) which can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) until timing tw 13 arrives. The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) cannot be reproduced and output is resolved. In addition, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly ended, and in this case, the music or the speech as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or Because it will be considered that the reproduction ends at a halfway point without being reproduced, until a good point), the player remembers the feeling that the vacant channel was secured in advance by the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced.

  It should be noted that at the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button and secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), at timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance as vacant channels, but other channels (reproduction channel 10, A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) is assigned to 11) and reproduced. However, when there is no space in another channel at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determined sound) is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on detection by a predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in another channel. Also, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) may be allocated to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, the effect sound (here, different from the predetermined effect sound) Even if BGM2) is allocated, the allocation state is canceled at that time triggered by a specific action detection (channel allocation cancellation operation) such as a button operation, and therefore one channel (specific channel) is assigned. It is possible to play “BGM2 playback” sound and a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) only by using them, and to effectively use a playback channel which is a limited resource. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing after the timing tw13. Then, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot definitive sound, an effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear, an effect sound that suggests that the player has lost the jackpot, and the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of the effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that the player has lost the jackpot, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound is output, and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, as a sound whose channel assignment is terminated when a specific action (a channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, it is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the reproduction state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to easily predict the content and there is no hindrance. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), although a predetermined period within the symbol variation has arrived, the reception period in which the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated. Not limited to. For example, at least while the specific sound as a target to be removed from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. You may make it cancel. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after the specific sound is put into a reproduction state, such as a predetermined timing after the predetermined time has passed, maintain the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be allocated and played back.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forced to be terminated, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. 0) may be used in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned empty channel at that time. It is also possible to cancel the channel assignment of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) in the form of overwriting the same channel. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound earlier when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the forced termination is not performed.

  In addition, a new sound is generated at least in a period from the acceptance of the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception. Specific game sound (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound, etc.) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation so that the channel is not used uselessly. It is desirable not to output the pre-reading effect sound or the like.

  In addition, the specific sound to be forcibly terminated ("BGM2 playback" sound) is played as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is played back only for a predetermined time without being looped. It is desirable to make it easier to remember that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Anomaly notification in the middle of the stage corresponding to the stage pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, the specific alarm sound according to this is not necessarily allocated to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that this occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, so that the channel has a margin and promotes reduction of the risk of empty channels disappearing. Is expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing at which the predetermined movable decoration body should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred”) and a game The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “abnormality occurred in the back movable effect unit 3200”) can be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. It may be an aspect that identifies which abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to which of the groups. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100 and the like) , The back-side movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-right movable effect unit 3400, the back-upper movable effect unit 3500, the back-under-movable effect unit 3700, etc.) The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refers to movable decorative bodies that have different drive sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by the failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly probable that the player side is likely not to make any mistakes, but it should be dealt with when notified. Because there is no, during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed and the notification process is sometimes executed and displayed, it is in the effect being executed However, it will have an adverse effect on the player, and it is an amusement for the player. In addition, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not enough in the number of empty channels, so that the player may be anxious not to be able to output a new sound. There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest.

  On the other hand, however, failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs frequently when the movable decorative body operates, and in some cases it is difficult to assume a situation where it suddenly fails when it is not operating at all. Then, when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, the case where the movable body abnormality occurs is that the movable decorative body is removed from the specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent act such as a dodging act or a wire entry. If there is a possibility of being in a detected situation, and it is possible not to output an alarm sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality even under such a situation, it may encourage cheating, From the point of view of players who are interested in the

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound, display at abnormal time in display area of game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern (effect pattern)) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 When a movable body abnormality is detected while a movable decorative body is operated based on a performance pattern during a big hit game or the like, a notification process (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the abnormal time in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed. Note that the external output of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (hall side notification) is not performed in an obvious manner and does not adversely affect the performance, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to cause a failure in the movable decorative body (due to the peripheral control board 1510 even within a period during which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed. Abnormality of moving object in process of moving movable ornament body by effect control (moving body driving process of moving movable ornament body based on variation pattern (effect pattern) or effect pattern during big hit game)) In the event that a failure occurs, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed, but at least in a situation where the failure of the movable decorative body is likely to occur (during the moving operation of the movable body) In the case of occurrence, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormal notification sound is not performed, so that the person who performs the illegal action is restrained from performing the illegal action. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, assignment control of effect sound to a channel, abnormality occurrence The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It becomes to be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing to operate the corresponding movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body is not yet recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormality notification sound according to the movable body abnormality is to be performed or not Regardless, it is possible to execute restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the corresponding movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state during the period of execution of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body is performed When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decorative body.

  In addition, although the restoration process is performed to perform a predetermined restoration operation (operation to move to a specific position (origin position)) with respect to the corresponding movable decoration, the movable decoration is specified within a predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 269 shows the allocation state of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination during the period when the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation by the side of a movable decoration object.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to timing ti14. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the effect), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for effecting the specific movable decorative body is performed (FIG. 269 (b)). (See FIG. 269 (a)). An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction.

  Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body drive processing is ended without performing any driving since the restoration processing has failed and no restoration can be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, when the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to a specific position (original position), and when driving for the specific movable decorative body is completed, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, The movable body driving process is terminated when it is determined based on the information that the state has been returned to the specific position (original position). However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position) in the movable body drive processing, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is performed. Then, the movable body driving process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration processing fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. In this example, the specific movable decorative body is applied to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period during which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and this can not operate. In FIG. 269 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). In addition to the determination of abnormality, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has occurred due to a failure of the decorative body, in this illustrative example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality has occurred. As it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the rendering in progress.

  Note that at timing ti18, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the usual movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery has failed. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued thereafter, the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing the predetermined restoring operation. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation after the next time, even when the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable ornament based on the effect pattern has arrived, The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body remain to emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, when the movable decorative body itself is not operated, the actuator (lamp) mounted thereon is operated (lighted) in the operation mode, and the movable effect is not performed. It is expected to curb the entertainment interest.

  As described above, when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body By not allocating the abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific production pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated by effect control (effect pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 270 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the pattern variation is performed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment condition of each channel at the time of being detected, and the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side rendering The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern being developed by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) at which the operation opportunity is given to the player is maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 when such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operation based on the rendering pattern) Therefore, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 270 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute a normal movable effect without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, causing an abnormality. The various light emitting units including the lamps mounted on the movable decorative body only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period of the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is determined by the restoration process. If it is eliminated, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is executed. In this example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is being performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a state where restoration processing is being executed, even if an operation by the player is accepted within a period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, a specific operation is performed. Although the effect operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. doing. Therefore, after timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined recovery operation is not performed and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation where an abnormality (a movable body abnormality) has occurred in a specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected when a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body has not been resolved by some external force even in the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced over a predetermined time in the reproduction channels 00 and 01. Will be assigned to Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern progressing and being executed as it is, an abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ "Abnormal occurrence in the movable effect unit 3200 in the back" and the like will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are in a normal mode in accordance with the progress of the production contents. It will be made to emit light.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 269 and 270, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, the period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the operation, it is unlikely that an illegal act has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the abnormality of the movable body suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, it is highly likely that an illegal act is performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. This is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 270, notification processing according to movable body abnormality is not performed at timing ti11b, and notification processing according to movable body abnormality is performed at timing ti13a when movable object abnormality is not resolved although restoration processing is performed. Decided to However, at timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that the specific movable decorative body can not operate based on the rendering pattern, and even if this is done alone, fraudulent acts such as dodging or entering a wire Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being interrupted, the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed.

  In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is in spite of the fact that the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "A failure has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the performance pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that it is possible for a person who performs a fraudulent act to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed, while being executed for a legitimate player It is expected to avoid having an adverse effect on the production. The condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decoration is not performed by the specific movable decoration body based on the production pattern. For example, “failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “occurring when the occurrence of an abnormality is in a specific situation” Etc. can be adopted as a further condition.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the specific movable decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated according to the production pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger. In the process of operating the decorative body according to the rendering pattern, it may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at predetermined timings or at predetermined time intervals.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decoration body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decoration body, Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 270, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the stage operation at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative body is displayed at the specific timing determined by the stage pattern. May be operated.

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the case where the abnormality notification is not executed on the condition that "a specific movable decorative body is abnormal based on the effect pattern and the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body", the condition is not determined. Also, it is desirable that abnormality notification is not performed as long as power supply is continued without clearing at least the RAM even if the abnormal state is not eliminated and is left. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the effect be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoring operation.

  After the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time and reproduced by the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the reproduction channels 00 and 01 are vacant channels even if the movable body abnormality remains. When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the production sound is output in a non-suppressed manner even if the movable body abnormality remains.

  In the above-described example, even in the situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, the restoring operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this respect, even if the restoration operation is successful in the restoration operation, the movement processing is performed to test whether or not the production movable body different from the presentation movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs is also properly operable. Good. In other words, as a result of performing a restoration operation on a moving movable body in which a movement abnormality has occurred, if this fails, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraud is being performed. However, as a result of performing the restoration operation on the production movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred, when it succeeds, it is difficult to understand whether there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed. It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, the fraudulent action is performed through the movement processing to test whether the production movable body different from the presentation movable body in which the movement abnormality is occurring can be properly operated. It is desirable to continue to determine whether the possibility is high. Such movement processing may be further performed even when restoration fails in the restoration operation.

  Processing contents related to the restoration operation in the restoration operation performed in a situation where the movable effect based on the production pattern is not executed and the restoration operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable production based on the production pattern is executed It is desirable that (for example, the number of retries) be different from one another.

[Recovery processing of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies with different drive sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality (Sound data) is assigned to a channel and played back, so that the number of channels used is not increased unnecessarily even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. The In addition, the movable body abnormality means that the movable body is in a state where it cannot operate properly, and is the same as that exemplified in “abnormality notification while an effect according to an effect pattern is performed”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on gaming machines has increased, and the game can be obtained simply by associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable ornaments. It is becoming difficult to properly inform the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and abnormality notification sounds that differ depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies have an abnormality are made to channels. By assigning and reproducing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  Also in this example, when the movable body abnormality occurs, it is as described in the above-described example of “the abnormality notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern being performed” (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). Processing is performed. Therefore, also in this example, even if it is generated during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) are being executed and this is detected, notification processing by pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, and the like are executable. Also, similarly, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being performed, processing (fluctuating pattern for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 In the case where a movable body abnormality is detected while (movable effect drive processing for operating the movable decorative body) based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc., notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( It is configured not to output an alarm sound, display an abnormal time in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, turn on an abnormal time by various lamps, and the like.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and made to be in the reproduction state is only one of the groups corresponding to the specific group. On the other hand, a process for performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that, even in the case where a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected that the channel has a margin and a reduction in the risk of empty channels disappearing. As well as being able to become a part, it becomes possible to make a rapid abnormal recovery for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel usage time through the efficiency improvement of the processing when an abnormality occurs. . In addition, about the contents of restoration processing, and each processing at the time of success and failure, the example of the above-mentioned "abnormal notification in the stage according to the presentation pattern" is performed (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). ).

  Here, as an aspect which divides a some movable decoration body into two or more groups, it is calculated | required that it is an aspect suitable for alerting | reporting the state as the said pachinko machine 1, for example, it is provided in the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable ornaments (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back Right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, it can be transmitted to the hall side whether or not an abnormality has occurred, or whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the panel side that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that fraudulent acts are performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by performing the notification sound output based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player side depending on the type (unpleasant feeling). Without any change), the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation of high possibility of fraud can be secretly transmitted to the hall side.

  And also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movable body abnormality occurs, as the notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display As described above, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this respect, in this explanation example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups even as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, and any of those groups It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, while the above “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality than the above “notification by sound”, it is excellent in the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality in more detail. It has the following characteristics. Therefore, in the above "notification by display", the above grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited in a mode different from the case of performing the above "notification by sound" by utilizing the difference in the nature thereof. In this case, it is desirable that different displays be provided depending on in which of the individually divided groups the movable ornaments belonging to the group are abnormal.

  That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on whether there is an "Any movable body abnormality occurs, the notification sound displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same as the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 160, even though the abnormality notification sound is assumed to be the same. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ”,“ a second notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are the same even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs. ”And“ a third notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are different from each other even when any movable body abnormality occurs ”occur. It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 271 shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel and the situation on the movable ornament side when a movable object abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (period of timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control is performed to operate a specific movable decorative body after timing tj15. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the demonstration operation is performed, and the channel An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force at a timing tj11 (operates without being based on the effect pattern), and the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform an effect operation. It is assumed that the movable body abnormality is detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271 (b) and later-described FIG. 272 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. In the relation to the restoration processing, even if the player's operation is accepted at time tj 14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 The movable body abnormality is generated for the frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side Each situation is assumed to occur.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the movable ornaments A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable ornaments are disposed in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. Thus, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other's operation, including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is simultaneously performed at timing tj12 so that rapid abnormal restoration of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, while the door frame 3 side is In the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided in the above, their restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) for giving the operation opportunity to the player is ended. It is assumed that neither restoration processing of A, B, C, nor restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is ended. Therefore, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the above operation is effective Even when the effect is received at any timing within the period (the effective period of the effect reception), processing is performed so as not to perform the effect operation triggered by the effect when the effect is received.

  In other words, in this case, if there is a production reception within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be produced using this as a trigger. Even if a production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is completed, it is possible to perform another operation with another board-side movable ornament that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process. The concern of interfering arises. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any one of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In other words, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processing has been completed (all restoration processing has been completed successfully), Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived, the execution of the effect operation is allowed.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect acceptance) the effect is accepted, it is processed to change whether or not the effect operation triggered by the effect is performed when the effect is accepted. It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation after the restoration process ends (success in the restoration process). Inevitably arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are in the process of restoration, there is no concern of interfering with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even in the case of being displayed, a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, and a display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed for the channel. In the light emission mode when the various effects are performed, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which is reproduced by being assigned the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the is performed are performed and the abnormality is generated Light is emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing when the restoration process is ended. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state. The effect operation of the body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced. Then, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even if it is in progress, normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) is also included, including production operations of specific movable ornaments. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is ended (success in the restoration processing). . Therefore, therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is selected, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed on the channel. The effect sound of the time (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decoration which has generated an abnormality are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed Will stay.

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side in notification of the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously in the panel-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur as a proper game is progressing, and cannot occur as a result of fraud. There is a high probability that all movable decorations have been tampered with manually, and so on. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification processing itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is detected that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration processing on the frame side movable decoration side are started simultaneously with those restoration processing, while the notification sound output is the frame side movable Assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decoration D, E, F side to the channel, and assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative A, B, C to the channel It is made to keep in mind to output.

  That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as a time until time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the “board-side movable decorative body A, By assigning only the panel side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative body A, B, and C side” is generated. The restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended while the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are being reproduced. Since the output request of the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F” after the output of “sound” is ended, it is avoided. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the panel side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F are being restored. The “board side common decorative alarm sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced over the period up to the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B, C are finished. As a result, the "common abnormal alarm sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-mentioned "information notification by sound" is performed utilizing the difference in property from the notification sound described above. In the aspect different from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited, and different display is performed depending on which of the individually divided groups belongs to the movable decorative body. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, The “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, assuming that the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed. The “informing by display” is maintained as it is, and the “informing by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is finished. Therefore, even if the restoration process of a specific movable decoration ends first, depending on the execution situation concerning the restoration process of the movable decoration that is grouped with the specific movable decoration, it may be more effective than the specific movable decoration. The “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed later may be terminated first.

  According to the example of FIG. 271, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process for these movable decorative bodies is executed simultaneously. As a result, for a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, the total time required for the restoration process can be made shorter than that of the movable decoration body that corresponds to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a panel-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is simultaneously performed. It is not limited to. The point is that a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated by two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and the like) which can operate without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. For a plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) that are classified into the frame side and that restoration processing can be performed independently for each of the groups, and at least one of them (the frame side in the above example) If it is possible to restore all of them simultaneously by selecting them as movable ornaments that can be operated without being influenced by the operation situation among them, refer to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the functions and effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and, for example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as performing detection may be employed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, but the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation at the specific timing determined by the rendering pattern. It may be made to

  In addition, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, movable body abnormalities occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Although the description has been made assuming that the situation is assumed, the symbol variation is not necessarily executed. That is, during the execution period of the big hit game, or when the special symbol game is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen, etc.), the board side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative body D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on the predetermined order in which all of the board-side movable decorative objects A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side It was. However, in the case where a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when operating simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative body is based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the movable-body abnormality in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination as to occurrence has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F Even when the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is ended at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B, C ends. As long as the relationship is satisfied, after the output of "the panel side common alarm sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative members A, B, C side" is finished, "frame side movable decorative members D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request for the corresponding frame side common alarm sound is required.

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. You may make it be the processing structure determined to have carried out. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are performed. And wait until it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and then correspond to the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side. It is desirable to perform restoration processing of the panel-side movable decorative objects A, B, C and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F while the notification processing is performed. In addition, as a result of waiting for the determination process whether the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. In this case, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed.

  In the situation where a specific movable body among the panel-side movable bodies is being processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the panel-side movable body itself is normal but has entered an abnormal state. It becomes possible to include a movable body which is not subjected to the rendering operation in relation to the specific movable body. On the other hand, in the case of the frame side movable body, even if any of the panel side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the “specific movable body” that is in the abnormal state There is nothing that can no longer be used in the production operation, and if this is normal, all of them can be used in the production operation. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the other frame-side movable bodies are rendered as long as they are normal. It is intended to be served. Moreover, even if any of the movable bodies on the frame side is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, all of the movable bodies on the panel side are normal if this is normal. Are to be provided for the rendering operation. That is, as the pachinko machine 1 adopts a configuration in which a movable effect is realized in a wider space, the number of movable bodies used for the rendering operation can be increased regardless of the abnormal situation of other movable bodies. It is supposed to be.

  With regard to each movable body illustrated in FIG. 271 and FIG. 272, in the case where a movable abnormality occurs in a rendering operation according to a rendering request or a demand for rendering such as a big hit rendering, a recovery operation performed accordingly has failed Even if this is the case, no abnormal alarm sound is output. However, even if the symbol is fluctuating, the recovery operation is performed on the movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred when a predetermined condition such as a detected fraud is satisfied, but the recovery operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormal alarm sound on the basis of the failure of the restoration even though the restoration operation has been performed.

[Automatic multi-operation function (automatic continuous hitting function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410). However, in recent years, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Auto multiple operation function (automatic) that makes it possible to show the appearance when multiple operations are performed simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hitting function.

  And, in such an automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), when an operation is performed in a long mode such as a so-called long press, a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) within a relatively short time The player who is not good at multiple operations to make the player remember the feeling (such as feeling that a fast double shot is being performed) as if the player is repeatedly playing) It can be said that it is important to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest of a player or the like, or to encourage the use of the function by various players. However, as in the case of the player, if the effect change (for example, the operation sound etc.) is made to occur simply when the effect acceptance is made each time a relatively short time elapses while in the operation state, the same as a player Even if it is intended to perform an operation by a single-shot push, the effect reception is made multiple times because the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single-shot push) is slightly lengthened or shortened. It may occur (a plurality of operation sounds are generated), or the effect reception may occur only once (one operation sound may be generated), and the number of effect receptions for one single operation may be stable. There is a concern that the amusement interest will decrease due to the uncomfortable feeling caused by not doing it.

  In this respect, in the case of the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, a change in presentation accompanying reception of an effect (for example, operation sound Etc.) only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound etc.) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) is repeatedly generated when the effect reception is made each time a predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since a temporal margin can be provided between the generation of the first effect reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second effect reception (operation sound), single-shot Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time only by performing the operation by a so-called long press while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the number of effects being received being unstable when the operation by is performed. It is possible to produce a presentation that looks like this.

  However, from the player's side, this gives itself a time allowance between the time when the first effect is received (operation sound) and the time when the second effect is received (operation sound). It is useless in operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing operations by so-called long presses) There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment may decline due to the slowness of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation with respect to the operation means is long. As in the case of being performed in the mode of operation (long press etc.), it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound accompanying the operation to the operation means. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. The player can be made to remember (such as feeling as if fast hits are being made). In this way, all the operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect when the single-shot operation is performed (whether it is one effect change or multiple effect changes). Even if it exists, it becomes possible to maintain suitably the frequency | count of occurrence of the production change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, description will be made assuming that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. Further, also in the other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the drawing indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception according to the operation on the button 410, The black specified sound output indicates a specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the drawing while no effect reception is generated when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. The volume and tone color of these specific sounds are not different from each other and are preferably the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given (single operation). In this case, it is assumed that one operation is performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that an operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same. A process of starting output of a display accompanying the operation (display pattern during operation) is performed.

  And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, “Picon”) accompanying the operation to the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx 11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 Even if a situation where no operation is performed (period of timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), in this situation, the specific sound (for example, "picone") accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is interrupted Can be output automatically.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until the grace time TY1 elapses, every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone By outputting “), it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), five times (N times) from when the grace time TY1 is started until it elapses. It is set to have a length of time that can output a specific sound (for example, "picone") for a minute. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound (a sound corresponding to the production reception) accompanying the operation Is at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection and thereafter 4 times (N−) when the automation time TY2 elapses even without operation. 1) (total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 is ended during the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone") (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the middle of the fifth specific sound is output) A process (output interruption process, etc.) for turning off a specific sound being output (for example, "pico") at timing tx13 even when timing tx13) when time TY1 is ended comes And the specific sound that has been output until that time tx13 (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) The output (sound waveform) in the same manner appears. That is, when the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes vague whether the operation has been accepted or not accepted several times, and eventually the operation feeling as if it were operated several times However, according to such a configuration, such a concern may be caused by the player becoming difficult to remember the game. It is expected to be solved appropriately.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined effective period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period, the situation where the new operation can not be accepted, Until the grace time TY1 is ended, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of effect receptions is not stabilized when the operation by the single-shot push is performed. Besides, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period beyond the predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game. In this sense, a display (for example, display of the remaining time in which the valid period is continued) is made to allow the player to recognize whether the predetermined valid period is in the continued state or in the ended state. It is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (for 1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is possible to recognize that it is in the terminated state.

  As for “specific sound output accompanying operation” in the figure, rather than a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound that is output each time the automation time TY 2 elapses (other sound output This is a conceptual illustration of the excluded waveform). As apparent from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the output of the specific sound of the previous output to end to the end, and the specific sound of the previous output is generated. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and continuously, as if fast repeated operation is being performed It is expected that players will be able to remember the sensation.

  Incidentally, as a specific sound reproduction type, in addition to a mode in which 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY 2 elapses, It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced every time the automation time TY2 elapses. Moreover, the aspect which reproduce | regenerates the several specific sound output intermittently as one sound data may be sufficient. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, all the specific sounds do not necessarily have to be output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), after displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 at timing tx 11, the operation button 410 is also displayed. Even if the player's hand has left the player and no operation has been performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in that situation It is something that can be done.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over a period from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 is up. By executing this, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

  The contents of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set as, for example, the mode shown in FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, “display scene 1” is a moving image depicting how an ally character holds a sword and is about to remove it, and “display scene 2” is an ally. This is a video depicting the situation from when a character is extracted until the character is cut off, and “Display Scene 3” is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the first mode. "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a third scene in which the teammate character and the enemy character are in a third state. This is a video depicting a state where a sword is being held in a manner.

  After displaying the operation display pattern according to the operation on the operation button 410 at timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently, and the friend character is an enemy. It is possible to make the player remember the feeling as if the effect contents to fight the character are being advanced according to a plurality of operations. The display scenes 1 to 5 may not necessarily be moving images, and may be still images. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of those effect displays, an image may be included that changes the effect (such as a color change) each time an effect reception is generated by an operation by the player, but it is recognized whether or not the effect reception is generated. In order to make it difficult to do so, it is important to be displayed as an image smaller than the operation display pattern.

  Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), between the time when the grace time TY1 is started and the time when this grace time elapses. It is set to have a time length that can sequentially display at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents). As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given, at least 5 (M pieces of display content of the operation display pattern ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and thereafter four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 sequentially displayed (progressed) even in a state without operation The display content will be developed over the total number of

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing tx13 when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). When it comes, unlike the case of the specific sound, the operation display pattern is ended by interrupting in the form of being crushed at that point without displaying the display scene 5 to the end. That is, the operation display pattern having progressiveity in the presentation content is different from the case of the specific sound having no progressionality, and the display content is displayed if the operation is continued by interrupting halfway in the display scene. It is expected that the player will be given an impression that it may have been able to be further developed, thereby prompting further operation by the player. In this sense, with regard to the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace time TY1 is started and then ended. It is more desirable to set it to 促 す to encourage further operations by the player. In order to prompt a further operation by the player, only a part of the display scenes of all the display scenes 1 to 5 is displayed from the start of the grace period TY1 to the end thereof. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined effective period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period from the start of the grace period TY1 until the lapse of the grace period TY1, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace period TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are displayed and progressed sequentially according to a predetermined schedule after the display scene 1 is displayed, regardless of the mode of operation. May be set in advance according to the time (automated time TY2) from when the specific sound is output until it is output again, or set regardless of the time (automated time TY2) It may be one. In this sense, display contents such as switching to another display or occurrence of a new display are included in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, the display scene 1 is “from a state where a sword is held, There is a display change due to “video depiction of a sword pulled out”, and a display change due to “an effect occurring when an ally character fights against an enemy character” is inserted in the display scene 3. It is more desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it can be thought as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the Further, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be displayed repeatedly.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained by is performed. Accordingly, at the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation is performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed based on the detection (determination). The process of starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display accompanying the same operation (display pattern during operation) will be performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13), it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, “picone”) can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). It periodically determines (whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) is ended (for example, falling edge detection in the detection signal)). As long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and the periodical monitoring is performed, “every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process for outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and a process for sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period from the timing tx21 to tx22), “when the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and it is determined that the operation is detected. Based on a process such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) based on “the operation detection state is determined each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and the operation detection state is indicated” Processing such as “progress display contents based on determination” is not performed, and “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”. And “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the (operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. Set grace time TY1. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The “sequential output processing” is continuously executed over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends after the timing tx22 at which the operation state is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22), the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the display pattern during operation can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the specific sound output mode at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the specific sound output mode at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively generated. The processing aspect (program) concerning the output of a specific sound can be made common among them. Similarly, the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively displayed. In creating them, the processing mode (program) for outputting the display pattern during operation can be made common among them. In other words, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been ended. Further, the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) is changed to the situation where the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) straddling the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. The operation-time display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

  As a result, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation button 410 is performed in a so-called long press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, the single push (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single push, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if it was being performed (such as a feeling as if fast hitting was being performed). In this way, while achieving stabilization of the responsiveness of the effect when the operation by the single-shot push is performed (whether it is one change in the production or the change in multiple effects), any operation mode (single-shot push, Even if long press) is employed, it is possible to favorably maintain the number of production changes (specific sounds) generated by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-pressing mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and in a so-called long-pressing mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change occurs in (b)), actually, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), one effect is accepted at timing tx11, and the white in the figure is specified accordingly. Whereas sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), four receptions are received every time the automation time TY2 elapses from timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without a cut is made four times. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. When the type of effect that causes the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), since only one effect reception has occurred, a specific effect result appears. Things can not be expected much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the reception of the specific sound without the black in the figure is intentionally performed even when the reception of the production is not generated, so that the reception of the production actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected very much that a specific production result will appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if a player who is not good at (such as slow hitting speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much production reception has occurred only by confirming one specific sound output at a time. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give a star of how much production reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is timed up, or By repeatedly displaying the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined effective period ends or the effect condition is satisfied and the specific effect results appear within the predetermined effective period, the ally character is an enemy character and a sword. It is made for the depiction to do the confrontation with the one by one alone appears. Therefore, as a specific effect result, it is desirable to describe how an ally character wins against an enemy character as a result of performing a battle with such a sword, and the specific effect result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display a rendering result at the time of failure in which a state in which an ally character has lost to an enemy character as a result of performing a battle with such a sword is displayed.

  Thus, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the long-press mode (FIG. In any of the cases with 273 (b), the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently for a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress By doing this, even a player who is not good at multiple operations can be urged to perform operations at ease. However, in practice, in many cases, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in a single-shot mode during the predetermined effective period, and when such continuous hitting operations are performed, 1 It is important to improve the interest of the game by making the player remember the operation feeling that the effect reception has been respectively generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling for which the effect reception is generated is made to be completely reflected as the effect by one operation once, the player who is good at the multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since there will be a rendering effect as if it exists, it is required to achieve both of the rendering elements (operation feeling, rendering fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operational feeling that the reception of the production has occurred by one operation at a time, the operation is performed as an immediate operation with respect to the operation. Focus on the fact that “whether sound is generated (or changed) when operated” is a more important parameter than “whether display is generated (or changed)”. Every time the operation on 410 is performed in a single-shot mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-push mode in the period of timing tx31 to tx32 of the predetermined effective period. I suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, every time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the detection is used as a trigger to output a specific sound (specific sound in the output state) newly output to the previous output specific sound. A new specific sound is output in a form in which sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even if the specific sound is intermittently output for a plurality of times even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode, such an output is performed. When an operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, the player is made to output a new specific sound in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is interrupted (stopped) halfway through the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound has been newly output and the production has been accepted at the timing when the performance is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode or when the operation is performed by a long press, the output of the specific sound of the previous output is completed to the end. The automatic time TY2 is digested before the time required for the time elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automated time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner. When the operation timing by an irregular player is reached, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It becomes possible for the player to preferably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), in a predetermined effective period, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, it is periodically determined whether the operation is continued (operation state). Thus, a process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this respect, in the period from time tx 31 to time t 32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-shot mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not it is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and according to this, it has a predetermined time length. A grace period TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when operation on the operation button 410 is newly performed before the grace time TY1 is ended (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Then, it is configured to return to a state where processing for periodically monitoring whether the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32, whenever operation button 410 is in the operating state or in the non-operating state, processing is periodically performed to monitor whether the operating state is in the operating state or not. A state transition is rapidly performed between the state in which the grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after six consecutive hitting operations are performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the user is tired of multiple consecutive hitting operations, and from then on to the repeated operations. It is assumed that the time required has become significantly longer. If the player is not good at such multiple operations, the player will not be able to perform multiple consecutive strike operations from timing tx 32 onwards, so the number of times for effect reception is greater than for players who are good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 after the operation state is ended. As described above, the output processing is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the delay time TY1 from the end of at least the previous operation state is obtained even when the time required for the repetition operation becomes significantly long after the timing tx32. As long as it is possible to repeat the operation within a shorter period of time, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed, enabling the specific sound accompanying the operation to be output intermittently and continuously. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodic monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. From then on, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly increased, a specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player. By performing the processing, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output continuously and intermittently. However, these specific sounds are output as specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) shown in black in the figure under the situation where the effect reception is not generated.

  In this respect, the specific sound with black outlines (7th to 9th specific sounds) can be generated only until the grace period TY1 from the end of the previous operation state has elapsed. In the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), for the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (do not time up) based on the operation. Along with that, at the timing tx34, a white specific sound (10th specific sound) is output in the figure accompanied by the generation reception being made in a form that breaks the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state where processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx 35 comes, and it is determined as a result of the monitoring as described above, and based on the determination, the grace period TY 1 having a predetermined time length is It will be set again. Then, when the automation time TY2 elapses while the operation by the player is not being performed, the specific sound in the drawing (the 11th to the 14th specific sounds) is again output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, When the player's operation is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is broken (suspended) In the form, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) will be output.

  Thus, even after time tx32, even if the time required for the repeat operation is significantly increased, the repeat operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 at least after the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound shown in white in the figure at the timing when the operation is performed by the player and the specific sound shown in black regularly in the situation where the operation by the player is not performed Is output, so that the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a fast continuous hitting operation is being performed as the specific sound accompanying the operation can be outputted intermittently and continuously. Therefore, according to the aspect concerning the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling in which the effect reception is generated by one operation once and, of course, by the player who is not good at multiple operations. Even if there is a specific sound output with black in the figure in the non-operation state, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output intermittently and continuously, so there is a trade-off relationship between the presentation elements (operation And fairness in the presentation) is expected to be achieved.

  However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in such a mode, a plurality of times are displayed in the operation display pattern which plays the role of notifying the rendering result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period. If a player who is good at operation and a player who is not good at multiple times of operation make a difference in the aspect of the progress of display contents, eventually it will be more than the player who is not good at multiple times of operation. There may be a performance as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the display time pattern for the operation is not advanced step by step in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly prolonged after the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period. However, until the set grace time TY1 expires, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again and the setting of the grace time TY1 is cancelled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined effective period does not arrive.

  When the operation is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at timing tx31. From then on, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 as the operation display pattern are determined in advance as the operation display pattern regardless of the operating conditions while the speed of the continuous hitting operation is largely changed as described above. It appears only as it is sequentially displayed and progressed according to the schedule, and this makes it appear that the presentation fairness between a player who is not good at multiple operations and a player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. Will be able to

  However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is the same, the number of times that the presentation reception accompanying the operation is actually generated is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that they will differ from the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. If there is a type of production that makes the production result appear, the player who is good at multiple operations is more likely to make a specific production result appear. Meaning will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the fairness of production between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained in the production of sounds and displays. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good in multiple operations by lowering the appearance of being played.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is accepted when performing the operation by the long press, the aspect depending on the progress of the operation display pattern is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which button deterioration is accelerated by performing a quick hitting operation too quickly.

  Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, a timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends and ends is reached within a predetermined effective period, and from the timing tx31 at the timing tx37 (specific end timing) Dynamic display output (processing of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends when in the output state is reached. Even if the specific sound in the output state is cut off at the timing tx37 (for example, “pico”), the process (such as the output interruption process or the process of interruption by overwriting with another sound) is performed. Even after the timing tx37 has arrived, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output so far appears as described above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) when the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is If the operation of the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can feel the feeling that a fast repeated operation is being performed so that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the black specific sound (tenth specific sound) shown in the figure output across the timing tx 37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the white specific sound is generated twice in the figure in the form of interrupting the tenth specific sound output, the specific sound accompanying the black is intermittently output again in the figure, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), while the specific sound is thus output intermittently and continuously, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily ended at timing tx 37. . After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is re-started from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx 38 at which the white specific sound in the drawing is output again.

  In FIG. 276, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic multiple-operation function (automatic double-stroke function) described in FIGS. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect which appears when operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when a specific effect pattern which generates H is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 276, at a timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given occurs, and at a timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, by the player Assuming that the operation is started, also in this production example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern at the time of operation), respectively. Processing to be started is performed.

  However, in this effect example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. Processing to be output can be executed.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output of the black outline in the figure is generated even under the condition that the operation to the operation button 410 is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. In this embodiment, it is difficult to distinguish between the specific sound output in black in the figure and the specific sound output in white in the figure generated at the timing when the effect reception occurs (in this example, the same mode It is supposed to be output in). Further, as described above, the operation display pattern displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display contents are advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in a long press mode or a plurality of operations is performed within a predetermined effective period, it is recognized how much effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this effect example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, the specific sound output of white in the figure is generated, and the special sound different from the specific sound has a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing processing of outputting at 50%, etc., it is possible to predict to some extent how much effect reception has occurred through the output situation of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when there is a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the start of the predetermined effective period, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43, and from timing tx44, Each time a long press operation is performed, a total of nine presentations are received, and a specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (in the figure, the first to ninth) (Whiteout specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started, it takes a long time that the operation in the single operation mode cannot be said to be repeated, and the timing tx46. , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the reception of the production for two times occurs, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice over time (in the figure, the tenth) , The eleventh specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when the output condition of the specific sound and the output condition of the operation display pattern are checked, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the above-described specific sound output of the blackout. It is continuously output in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these If you just check the output status, there will be a small number of production receptions per unit time. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of a special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when a white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of a predetermined effective period. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment of a player who is not good at multiple operations will be suitably maintained. In this sense, a special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on an output condition that is different from the generation of the specific sound output. Even if the specific sound output occurs, it is required to output the special sound in a manner that does not necessarily occur.

  Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect is received may be changed according to the number of effects received within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time from when the specific sound is output until the sound is muted, or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as one. In this example, the time value is set to twice the “automation time TY2”. In addition, when a new special sound is output when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effect can be enjoyed as when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation by a long press, the number of players performing the operation a plurality of times is reduced. There is a concern that the significance as an effect of requesting a plurality of operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), in the period after the player's operation is started at least at the timing tx42, the player's operation is long pressed. Of the state that is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and the state that is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48), the state is performed as the single operation mode. Only when a specific display condition is satisfied, display of a specific image (specific display) is allowed.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation mode, not at least a long press operation. Therefore, a plurality of automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) functions are not used. It becomes possible to give meaning in presentation to performing a round operation (such as a continuous hit), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this presentation example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not only the condition that the operation is performed as the one-shot operation mode, but the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself is increased, the operation (the continuous hitting etc.) is performed multiple times without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) function whenever the predetermined effective period occurs. Even if you try to do), it will seem as if you are challenged to display a specific image with high difficulty of appearance, and you can operate multiple times without using automatic multiple strike (automatic multiple operation) function It is expected to promote understanding of the surroundings.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice as long as the “automated time TY2”) has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect is received. The display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period as the above “specific display condition” that the effect hit is obtained in the predetermined effect drawing performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed Specific display). In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the big hit is determined in the big hit determination (or the production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period (high expectation degree of the big hit is high) When it is in the production situation), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, but when the big hit judgment is a big hit in the big hit (or the operation within a predetermined effective period No matter how much the game is performed, it is possible to obtain a production hit only with a probability of 30% in the case of a production situation where a success display can not be made to appear (a production situation where the big hit expectation is low). Therefore, when a display of a specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation level that a jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The above-mentioned “specific display condition” is not limited to this, and “a specific non-operation time (here,“ automated time TY2 ”without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect is received) is generated. Only twice that of “a time that is twice as long as it has been reached” and “a performance hit has been obtained in a predetermined effect drawing” is adopted as the “specific display condition”, and when this is satisfied A display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the types described above, the aspect of the predetermined effect lottery is, for example, in an effect situation where the success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined effective period (the effect situation where the degree of expectation of jackpot is low). An effect situation where a success per chance is obtained with a probability of 0% (or the effect lottery itself is not performed), but a success display cannot appear no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined effective period. When it is in a production situation where the degree of big hit expectation is low, an aspect in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined effective period. In this case, as the specific display, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined effective period ends without the success display.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect is received when a specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is displayed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on the condition that a state in which no operation is performed by the player (a state where no new production reception has occurred) is maintained. There is.

  In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, at least a specific number of production receptions are required in order to make a specific production result (success display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). The appearance condition is satisfied at timing tx47 when the eleventh production reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the success display to appear as the operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. As the contents of this success display, the content of the repetitive portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern, such as destroying enemy characters that had been fighting with swords in display scenes 3 to 5 It is desirable to be related. In addition, when the success indication appears, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit in the big hit judgment is high.

  In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output in white) occurs, the predetermined effective period is ended at that time, and the new production reception is It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at timings later than timing tx 47, no white specific sound or special sound is generated newly in the drawing, or no specific display appears.

  FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276. However, although the operation in the single operation mode by the player is at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it takes a long time which can not be said and is repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 277, even if the operation in the mode of the single operation by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined effective period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously output intermittently, and the display pattern at the time of the operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Progress. According to such a presentation mode, even when the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a presentation situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are being performed. become able to. However, from this point of view, there is a concern that the meaning of performing the continuous hitting operation can not be understood from the person performing the continuous hitting operation seriously, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific performance result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period. When “EU” is the minimum number of production receptions required to appear, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is repeatedly performed at the last minute when the grace period TY1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, The number of production receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) that is required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success indication) from appearing. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are present will be suitably maintained. In order to obtain such an effect more reliably, the number of times of production reception (EU) required at least for causing a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up the numerical value.

  In this respect, in this effect example, “Tx1 / Tx2” is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”, which is the minimum number of effect acceptance (EU) required to cause a specific effect result (successful display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. Since “11 times” which is twice or more times the integer value when the numerical value is rounded to an integer is set, a failure display is displayed at timing tx 56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, a failure display appears due to an insufficient number of operations, so that it is an effect situation in which it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment allows the display of a specific image only when it is in a state where it is performed as a single operation mode and a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this respect, in this production example, when the above-mentioned “specific non-operation time” required for displaying a specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these values is set to be In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause a specific display to appear every time an operation is performed within a predetermined effective period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of production receptions (EU) required at the minimum is required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear. In other words, in this case, a direct selection function for performing an attempt to make the specific display appear until the risk that the specific production result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. Since it is not possible to easily and repeatedly try to make it appear, it will be possible to improve the performance of the game, as the performance of the attempt will be enhanced. It will be.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( A process of causing a failure display to appear as an operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. As the contents of this failure display, the contents of the repetitive portion in the operation display pattern (display scenes 3 to 5), such as defeating the enemy character who had been in a battle with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5, and It is desirable to be related. Further, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low in the big hit determination.

  On the other hand, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, the specific sound in the output state when the predetermined effective period ends even if either the success indication or the failure indication appears. However, this is not cut off (interrupted) as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure display is being performed, and then the success or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set so as to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, the suspension time TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and until the suspension time TY1 elapses, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is displayed. Although the process is performed at least four times or more, the number of "specific sound output with blackout" generated in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set to be at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is at least twice or more in the non-operation state. As it is generated, it is possible to have a feeling as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) is continued even in the non-operation state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 and 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character makes a fight with the enemy character with a sword appears. Therefore, a specific display may be performed in which at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 indicates the jackpot expectation. According to such a configuration, if there is a case where a specific display is overlooked, the non-operation state cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace period TY1 elapses. However, it is possible to provide an effect of selecting between the disadvantage of being wasted in vain and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Also, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting operation is allowed in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (the automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by the long press is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize a highly flexible operation presentation by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progressing mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is made to be the same as when the long pressing operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the attraction not much felt by performing the high speed continuous hitting operation, and it is expected that the excessive operation on the operation button 410 is suppressed and the risk of breakage etc. is reduced. Will be

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing effects of a type that requires at least an effect reception required more than a specific number of times, an operation by long press is performed only within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times is generated only when the operation by the long press is performed over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice the “automated time TY2” has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect was received. Although the display (specific display) of the specific image is made to appear at the time when it is performed, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within a range that is at least twice the “automated time TY2” and that has a grace time TY1 as an upper limit (below the grace time TY1) is used. In the non-operating state, in the state where the specific sound with blackening in the figure is output more than once (the state that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the non-operating state) It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) has appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operating state (the number of outputs of a specific sound without black in the figure) has reached a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the game machine has been described in which the dish unit 320 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 that allows the player to perform the pressing operation and presents the effect image to the player. With reference to 278 to 329, a gaming machine which can further enhance the player's operation will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 279 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be appropriately omitted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 houses a sword part 5010 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, a sword part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword insertion direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a state where the sword part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020, and the sword part 5011 is in a sword state where the sword part 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword production. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the scrapped state can function as an operation unit that receives the setting operation by the player and returns to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an opportunity to perform a sword effect with the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be performed. It shows and shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of (B) stroke main effects.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which the sword book production is performed after execution of the sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which the sword book production is performed without performing the sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns, an aura-member-attached form and an aura-member-free form, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (A), according to the type of fluctuation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the presence or absence of execution of the scout preparation transition effect is drawn. Here, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit at the time of big hit, a fluctuation pattern for small hit at the time of small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation at the time of outfall, which results in advantageous results for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the scout preparation transition effect is performed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, and is performed with a probability of 30% in the case of a variation pattern for small variation, and in the case of a variation pattern for outlying variation It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the out-of-out fluctuation time change pattern may change the probability according to the presence or absence of reach production so that the probability that scout preparation transition effect is performed is higher than when the reach production is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), according to the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the scout preparation transition effect, the presence or absence of the scout main effect is drawn. If the scout preparation transition effect is executed even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, the probability that the scout main effect is performed is set higher than the case where the scout preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher as the variation pattern is an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of preference, it is set that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher if the scout preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when scout preparation transition effect is executed with the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern, the probability of scribbling main effect being executed is higher than when scout preparation transition effect is not executed with the small hitting fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, the sweepout main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sweepout preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the scout main effect is executed, the scout preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the scout main effect with the aura member is performed is higher as the fluctuation pattern is advantageous for the player. Is set to be Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member due to removal of the sword decoration body)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect (the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281). 282), an aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with a member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of the integrated decoration (FIGS. 283 and 284).

  FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram for explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself, wherein The state of removal of the sword, (C) state of removal of the second blade FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is housed in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword preparation transition effect is only visible from the player by removing only the portion of the blade 5011a that fits on the hand of the blade part 5011. It becomes the first best sword state to become. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword operation in the sword main production is a second sword that is largely visible from the player by further removing the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword insertion operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade 5011 is configured to be independently operable independently of the removal operation of the blade 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the sword portion 5011 changes from a knapsack state (FIG. 281A) to a first scout state (FIG. 281B). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 282 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) inside the portion 5020, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in a changing process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 281 (C)). Although described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011 even with the maximum operation, the player can not visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 are stopped at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to make the sword 5001 (the aura member 5030) emit light and decorate.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state, the closed state is opened and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. In the above example, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first extraction state to the second extraction state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (including not only the mode of maximum operation but also the mode of stopping the operation on the way) It should just be.

  FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the case where the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020, (A) a cutting state, (B) a first extraction state, (C) The second state of the sword is shown. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description will not be repeated.

  As shown in FIGS. 283A to 283C, the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for housing the sword 5010 (the sword 5011) is the above-mentioned sword 5010 (the sword 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the sword portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the knives state Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Thereby, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 284 (A). The aura member 5035 is a hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so that the upper end thereof is below the hook 5011 a of the blade 5011 in the completely housed state, and surrounding the aura member 5036; Right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, and right and left pinions 5037a and 5037b meshing with the right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged with each other. The rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are converted into upward linear motion, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 unites with the blade 5011 and stops at a position where a second extraction state is formed. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the change in state of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (set state-first cut state-second cut state). Although the example which unites with 5011 was shown, it does not restrict to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. The final aspect based on the effect pattern set by the time the sword decoration body 5001 in the second scraped state is set to function as the operation means (not limited to the complete appearance state formed by the maximum operation, the intermediate appearance formed by stopping the operation on the way It should just be able to become an aura member attachment form of a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the first sword insertion state from the sword insertion state.

(Example of scribbling effect using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 285 to FIG. 290, a sword effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decorative body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the scribble main effect is not executed and the effect patterns ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect pattern ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the extracted sword effect is executed. FIGS. 285 to 289 are transition diagrams of scribble effect effects. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts forming a reach state (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image that suggests execution of a scout effect (moving of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two warriors facing each other and starting to go on the image (Fig. 285 (X2)) is displayed, an image (Fig. 285) in which one samurai holds the handle and holds the sword in the sheath (Fig. 285 (X3) is displayed. Here, the effect which suggests that the sword ornament 5001 moves is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword state (FIG. 281 (A)).

  Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword preparation transition effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the samurai who holds the sword in the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed as time passes. At this time, the sword decoration transition effect is performed by the sword ornament 5001 changing from the sword state to the first sword state. In addition, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the sword book effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed. Therefore, the scout preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation degree effect that indicates the expected degree at which the scout main effect is performed by the movement of the sword decorative body 5001. In the sword preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player may be expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second sword state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decorative body 5001 may maintain the sword delivery state and continue to display the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) described above.

  Here, in the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent scout main effect is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of this scout preparation transition effect (FIG. 282 (A )) To the open state (FIG. 282B), the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword state is visible from the player from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the part of the blade 5011a. However, as described above, the aura member 5030 is formed of the blade 5011a of the blade part 5011a. Since it is provided below, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 operates maximum. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state functions as an operation means capable of accepting the player's operation of the sword, and at the same time, the expectation is increased by the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, if the scribbling main effect is not executed by the lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the scout preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Sweat sweats on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decorative pattern is left at the center of the screen with the image that the warrior gives up at the timing when the central decorative pattern displayed fluctuating is stopped and displayed And it is stopped and displayed in the stop mode different from the right side decorative design, that is, the release mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extraction state to the insertion state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the insertion state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, when the scout main effect is executed, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, an image in which the Ii is cut is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second scout. It becomes a state. Here, the form with the aura member with which the aura member 5030 can be visually recognized in the form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 can not be visually recognized. There is provided an aura memberless form in which the blade part 5011 that is not deformed can be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state has a form without an aura member will be described. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the light is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 287 (A1)), an image for cutting out the sword held and cutting the other warrior is displayed (FIG. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the blade part 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by a sword, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade portion 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 fits in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the scout operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that urges an operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same form as that of the second scout state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with a message of “Please put the sword!” (FIG. A3). In addition, in order to indicate that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation effective period, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011 c is blinked and emitted. In addition, it is preferable that the image in the operation promotion effect is an image related to a series of presences, so that the operation effect image is displayed on the front so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Ii break scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). (See FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

  When the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs a sword storage operation to place the blade part 5011 in the sheath 5020, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect ends with a symbol type winning notification (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, with the image of the opponent's samurai defeated and the conclusion of the Iai, the central decorative symbol is the same as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen, that is, the big hit (here "7") It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of place, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol at the center of the screen, together with an image in which the opponent's samurai is not defeated at the timing of the stop display and the conclusion of the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 289, a description will be given of the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is in a form with an aura member. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the light is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 289 (B1)), an image for cutting out the sword held and cutting the other warrior is displayed (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1), and the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Is visible to the player. Here, the blade 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time of the state change from the first state to the second state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state after only the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player in the second scraping state so that the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decorative body 5001 be in a configuration with an aura member in the second extraction state before the operation effective period starts. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second cutting state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that an erroneous operation by the player is induced. Therefore, the player can recognize the aura member 5030 while the series of movements from the first extraction state to the second extraction state is performed as in the present example, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second extraction state. It is preferable that the operation effective period is started immediately.

  The images in FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2) described above. It makes it impossible to judge whether it is not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp whether it is the aura member-attached form or the aura member-free form. Accordingly, the sword decorative body 5001 can be noticed before the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. Can. Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images that are similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in the warrior image (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation effective period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with the aura member as the sword decorative body 5001. It is displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). The subsequent effects are the same as those in FIG. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed flashy compared to the form without the aura member.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period in the scout effect in which the scout preparation transition effect and the scout main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an Ii effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is firstly set from the sword state as a scout preparation transition effect. The state changes to the extracted state (time t1). At this time, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state when the effect pattern in the form with the aura member is set, but the aura member 5030 plays a game in the first extraction state even when the aura member 5030 is in the open state. It is provided so that it cannot be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is further changed to the second removal state, and in the case of changing it, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is a form with an aura member. I can not do it. However, when the scout preparation shift effect is executed, the scribble main effect is executed, and the possibility of becoming a form with an aura member is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced. In addition, even if the scribble main effect is not executed, since the sword movable suggestion effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the scout preparation transition effect, the player can move the sword. As the movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, it is possible to capture a state change (movable) from the sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 to the first extraction state.

  When the sword preparation transition effect is finished, the sword book effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2). Thereafter, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means (time t3). When the operation effective period comes, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of the presence effects is performed. Then, when the player's operation is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), an effect is performed after the operation. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second state to the sword state by the player's operation of the sword. Then, when the operation valid period set in advance is ended and the reach state is ended (time t4), the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whereby a series of presence effects are ended ((4) Time t5). The operation valid period may end upon detection of an operation by the player, as indicated by a dashed dotted line in the drawing. If no operation is detected during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword state to the sword storage state as the operation effective period ends.

  Here, a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state until the operation effective period starts (time t3-t2) is a mode (aura member) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. As a mode confirmation period in which it is possible to confirm whether or not it is an attached mode, a light emission mode, etc., a period longer than the operation effective period (time t4-t3) is secured. That is, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player is in the operation position (second sword state) that functions as the operation means, the operation reception is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. Thereby, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and inflates the expectation in the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with the aura member, the expectation increases), or the mental preparation As soon as the second sword state is reached, the operation validity period starts and the state of the operation means cannot be confirmed, and it is not possible to confirm the aspect of the operation means. It can be wiped out.

  In addition, the scribbling effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of presence effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the movable effect (time t0 to t3) as the movable body of the sword decorative body 5001. The effect associated with the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is used. This makes it possible to impress the player with a variety of surprises and effects in switching the function of the sword decorative body 5001. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can.

  In addition, although the example of the above-mentioned effect demonstrated the case where the aura member 5030 was provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself, and the blade part 5011 deform | transformed by the aura member 5030, the aura member 5035 is a sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided with a frame side member (aura member 5035) and becomes an integral decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes operation means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the modes of the members (the sword portion 5010 and the aura member 5030) of the same kind as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (Kate state, first scraped state, second scraped state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is the game ball to the one starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display produces an advantageous result for the player by the change of the aspect of the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001). Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  Further, before the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state. doing. Further, the expectation is suggested by causing the aura members 5030 and 5035 to appear in the state change from the first sword state to the second sword state. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first sword state or the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword state to the second sword state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, the expectation is high when the operation position is moved after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance. In this mode, there is a concern that an erroneous operation that the player may operate even though the operation means is not yet in an operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the above-described erroneous operation can be prevented.

  In the first sword state described above, only the blade 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of extraction in the first extraction state is set to be less than the maximum extraction amount in the second extraction state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a fully appearing state when it enters the second extraction state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first removal state, the player can have a higher sense of expectation at the time of the first removal state. Increase interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first scraping state, the configuration with the aura member at the stage of the scrapping preparation transition effect (high expectation) Since the player can grasp and expect great expectations, the disappointment when the sword book production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken by the presence or absence of the scout main effect, and a highly entertaining effect can be provided.

(Variation 1-Extraction using a control button)
In the following, with reference to FIG. 291 to FIG. 294, scribbling effect is performed in reach production, and the sculpting operation of sword decorative body 5001 in scribbling effect is triggered by the pressing operation of operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. 291 to 293 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the scribbling effect of the first modification. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned blowout effect (FIG. 285-FIG. 290) is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  Here, the effect pattern (S1 (Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, and after the scout preparation transition effect is executed The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in which the main effects are performed. The transition and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

  When reach effect is started, presence effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and effect that suggests operation of the operation button 410 by display of the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, the image display of the operation button to be the operation target and the gauge display of the operation valid period are performed to perform the operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate (FIG. At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily operate the operation button 410. Note that the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is finished when the player does not perform the staging transition effect and the sword main effect, and if the player has detected a pressing operation on the operation button 410, in the case where the result is an out result. An image notifying the result of the deviation (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are not changed.

  In addition, when the sword main effect is performed after the sword preparation transition effect is executed, when the player presses the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the first sword state. A drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white character “Tengu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 292 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which a friendly samurai is about to touch the sword. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, a sword book effect in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) is started (FIG. 292 (F3), FIGS. 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) by the sword main effect, immediately before FIG. 292 (F2) and immediately after 293 (G1), the image of lightning running on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 292 (F3) is interrupted and displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 (whether it has an aura member or not) ) Along with the strength of lightning, the degree of expectation that will win in the Iai will be shown.

  The subsequent effects are the same as in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 288 described above, and when the sword decoration 5001 is in the second extraction state and the predetermined period elapses, the sword decoration 5001 is In order to function as the operation means that can effectively receive the operation of (1), an operation effective period for effectively detecting the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is prompted to operate the sword in the operation effective period (FIG. 293 (G2)), and notification of the symbol type (hit or miss) is performed by the player's sword operation (FIG. 293 (G3) or ( G4).

  Subsequently, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts a state change of the sword ornament 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts state change, and first, the state of the sword is changed to the first state of extraction. Here, in the first extraction state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first state to the second state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated to function as the operation means. An effective period occurs, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 (time t3 to t4) ((t3) At time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). When the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) of the operation button 410 set in advance, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (first You may make it deform | transform and change a state at a stretch in the form with the aura member of a double sword state. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword state to the second sword state changes according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, changes to the second sword state after the first sword state and a certain time has elapsed. You may When the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 set in advance (time t3 to t4), the sword decorative body 5001 It is returned from the state of the sword to the state of the sword.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. The extraction operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the insertion operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (time tx). As described above, according to which operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, the movement of the sword decoration 5001 is reversed (the extraction operation and the insertion operation). The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  Thus, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the form with the aura member with the sword decorative body 5001 deformed and changed in state) The second state of the sword can be shown. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

  Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 292 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 293 Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operational value of the operation button 410 can be further increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2-Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 295 to FIG. 299 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword effect of the second modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect as the above-mentioned.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 steps. The aura level 0 indicates a complete accommodation state (FIG. 284 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a fully appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the maximum extent by the player by combining the blade part 5011 in the second extracted state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state of the sword. 284 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

  Here, with the effect patterns (in the figure (Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, there is no scribble preparation transition effect Is a case where the scribble main effect is performed, and the effect pattern (form with aura member complete appearance state (aller level 3)) of the sword decorative body 5001 by one operation of the operation button 410 (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) and a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise Screen transition of the effect display device 1600, state transition of the operation button 410, and a sword decorative body for the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) Explain the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be determined by operating the operation button 410 once. A step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 is performed.

  First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed or the sword book production effect is not performed, that is, the sword decorative body 5001 does not change its state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, there is no sculpting preparation transition effect, but it is a case where scribble main effect is performed, and the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 In the effect pattern to be), after the same effect as in FIG. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-mentioned modification 1 (FIG. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected Then, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state, it completely appears. It becomes a state (aura level 3) (FIG. 296 (I1)). The aura member-attached form of the sword decorative body 5001 of the above-mentioned modification 1 is configured by the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, but other effects are the same as those of the modification 1 described above. The same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F1) (F2) → FIG. 293 is followed (FIG. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  Also, there is no scout preparation transition effect, but in the case where scout main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required a plurality of times, and in the effect pattern where the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise Until the operation of the first operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is traced (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)). In this state, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) in which the player does not visually recognize. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

  Next, an operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 of the operation target is illuminated and decorated Is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the next production will be performed according to the preset aura levels 0-3.

  First, when the aura level to be set is “0” (ie, in the case of the aura member absent form), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and it is informed that it will return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. An image (here, a white letter "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 297 (J3)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. 293 of the first modification described above in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0 in a form without aura member. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the aura level to be set is any one of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the 1/31 state from the fully accommodated state. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit green light indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, an operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Thereafter, there is no request for operation of the operation button 410, and an image (in this case, “I'm sorry” in the blackout screen) notifying that it will return to the scraped effect (presented effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state. (White character) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in the 1/3 appearance state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from 1/3 appearance state to 2/3 appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is decorated to emit light in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation presentation of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 of the operation target A light emission decoration operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). The luminescent color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red indicating the aura level 2. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, “Izai” on the blackout screen) And the image showing the aura level is displayed (Fig. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the appearance of 2/3, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed.

  When the aura level is “3”, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating an aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit light in rainbow color indicating aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect ends (after this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is obtained. An image notifying of the return (here, a white letter "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (Fig. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to FIG. 292 (F2) to FIG. 293 of the first modification in the presentation mode (color, sound, etc.) according to aura level 3. The effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed.

  In the above description, the aura member's unit 5035 changes the uniting degree with the blade 5011 at each operation timing when the aura level is raised to widen the range viewed by the player (increases the appearance degree). Not limited to. Even if the aura level goes up, the aura is decided when the aura level is decided without raising the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white letter of "is" is displayed on the blackout screen) You may be made to perform the stock-type coalescence which unites the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 at a stretch so that it may become the appearance according to a level. Further, the object whose degree of appearance is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011). For example, the state of the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in a movable state, it is surprisingly novel. Operation effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the stage is developed step by step by giving multiple operational opportunities to the player, it is possible to impress the player with great involvement in the stage and prevent the interest in the stage from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is reported so as to be recognizable even in subsequent effects, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation effects.

(Other effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted sword state functions as the operation means, and detects the extraction operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in a front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is a part of the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing pattern forms the reach state, the display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decoration member SDY (a potter's wheel) which can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stationary in a state (initial state) visible from the player above the display area. There is. In addition, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of cutting.

  In the princess reach effect, an image directed to the princess is displayed behind the eyebrow (FIG. 300 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggested image indicating an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is started and the operation effective period to receive the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001. A gauge indicating the operation promoting image and the operation valid period is displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are made to move up and down little by little from the display of the operation effect suggestion image until the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. It is also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, a sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection and informing operation may be an operation such as movement or vibration as the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moves up and down, or any other action that can be felt by the player via the handle 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (gripping again for detection confirmation, etc.) is reduced, and the movable body is prevented from being broken or broken. Can.

  Here, the player does not appear the aura member 5030 (5035) in the removal operation by the player, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible from the player when the player performs the removal operation according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when the player removes the sword operation, the specific decoration member SDY is stopped above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial state The state is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the removal mode "767" (Fig. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result in FIG. 301 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, it is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection and notification operation ends. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is centered on the front surface overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). The drop display is movable so that only the hold display area is visible (all fall state) (FIG. 301 (D1)), and then the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. 5001 is maintaining the second extraction state (FIG. 301 (D2)) Note that a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time may be provided. The shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterwards may be used to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the winning expectation and the game profit when winning)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the second scraped state by the player's scraping operation, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second scraped state is The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility. The image of the amazing princess is displayed with the bag removed (Fig. 302 (D4)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sculpting operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the hit with the princess of the smile when the result of the current variable display is the hit. An image is displayed (FIG. 302 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it becomes the detachment (FIG. 302 (F1) (F2)).

  It should be noted that although the detection and notification operation is performed as described above when the player removes the sword operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the front horizontal direction When the player can not move due to the player holding the key, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is performed. Although the effect itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the movable effect timing (FIG. 301 (D3) in the left-right direction of the sword decoration 5001). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether the left-right direction movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed or not, the effect to be performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY Because the game is configured to play, there is no stagnation in game progress. The sword decorative body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform movable presentation in the left-right direction when holding of the sword decorative body 5001 is released by the player, or is configured not to perform movable presentation. It may be

  In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that has suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword decoration operation (vertical movement) of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (in the operation position (at the operation position) the sword decorative body 5001 itself in which the operation is performed outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can move to the left). That is, it becomes possible to move the sword decorative body 5001 itself to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword removal operation was performed based on the sword removal operation by the player, enhancing the player's operation value, and the player's operation motivation You can control the decline of In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in different modes (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after operation) stepwise by the operation by the player, a presentation using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, the movable display of the sword decorative body 5001 in the left and right direction is a display of effects for the purpose of performing an integrated rendering with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decoration member SDY Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword removal operation is performed with the sword decorative body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved and positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the left-right direction (the left end of the frame), the movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed. In addition, since the operation by the player of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an operation in the up and down direction (strap operation to pull the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 performed after the operation is performed based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  Also, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305. FIGS. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect including operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used in multiple directions, state transition of the operation buttons 410 and operation transition of the sword decorative member 5001. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N) in which an expectation degree suggestion effect is performed that suggests an expectation that the variation being executed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 is a big hit (in the figure, the operation of the operation button 410 A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  Here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols reaches the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303A), the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is first An operation promoting effect is started that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance.

  First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by a player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting the big hit expectation is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 304 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character that changes the held display may be displayed.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is an effect image indicating that an operation rendition requiring the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (FIG. 303 (M1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message “Title chance to extract the sword” and the explanation of the operation “Take me a sword” message) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has an aura member-attached configuration in which the blade 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 305 (M4). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (Fig. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (a stop mode "767" of a decorative symbol) for notifying removal is displayed (Fig. 305 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or expanding the operation effect of the other operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) become possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify the subsequent deployment at the time of operating the. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and to suppress the decline in the operation desire and the decrease in the amusement of the game, which are concerned because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

  In addition, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (a pressing operation and a setting operation) at the first operation (a pressing operation of the operation button 410) and a second operation (a holding operation of the sword decorative body 5001) The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not appear instead.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decorative body 5001 rather than targeting the operation button 410 whose expectation is relatively lower than that of the first sword decorative body 5001. Is desirable.

(Another pattern 3 using the sword decoration 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310. FIGS. 306 to 310 are diagrams for describing screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect, state transition of the operation button 410, and operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001. Here, a pattern (in the figure (A), (B1), (B2)-> O) which becomes a big hit when the specific decoration member SDY (簾) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 In the case where the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 物 物 ず ず 物 物 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い) is not moved based on the pressing operation of, re-variation is performed from the symbol display of the displacing mode. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q if there is a chance to operate the sword decoration 5001 and R if a chance to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

  The reach effect here is the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, if the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306A)) And the message "Please move the movable body with one button hit" is displayed (FIG. 306 (B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is The prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 306 (C)). The display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the operation valid period, and the operation button 410 for the operation object is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, in order to make it easy for the player to grasp the target (the movable body) to be moved by the operation, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is movably moved up and down in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do it. When the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated later, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second state of the sword at this point.

  In the pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大It is dropped and moved so as to become (Fig. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (a decorative symbol of the type) for reporting a big hit in the display area of the effect display device 1600 from which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (簾) has been cancelled. A stop mode "777" and a message "good" is displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only allowed to move by being stopped in small steps. I will not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern with a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 308 (P1)). The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in a deviating manner (“767”) or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a revival start image ("Madaja") indicating that the variability display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state in FIG. (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 308 (P3)), the decorative symbol is again reached and reduced in the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is displayed at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face in which the eyes of the ally warrior have closed) is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of anticipation that the effect using the specific decoration member SDY (a prisoner's berthing) is performed. At this time, the operation button 410 may be lighted and decorated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decorative body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword. Then, according to the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means, and a specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmed image) in which sweat is blotted on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The light emitting decoration 410 is decorated (FIG. 309 (R1)). The operation of the operation button 410 is started while the operation button 410 is light-decorated while the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) continues to move in small increments, and an operation that prompts the user to press the operation button 410. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is no longer decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. As in the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is returned to the initial state from the full fall state, and the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 再 び 再 び 再 び 再 び 再 び 解除 解除 解除 解除 解除 解除). An image notifying the big hit at the center (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "good") is displayed (FIG. 309 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in a case where the result of the variable display is out of order, when the player presses the operation button 410, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative pattern of the shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 309 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the eye light (the sword decorative body The finalized image is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the knapsack to the second state of the sword with the aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be lighted and decorated. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective by the image of the display area, but at this time, the form such as whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 可 動 小) is moved in small increments, when the second scraped state is reached and a predetermined period elapses, and the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, In the area, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (FIG. 310 (FIG. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out, when the player's operation is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 309 (R5) is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

  In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned FIGS. 300 to 310, three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 are given, but various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided to further enhance the fun of the game.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword ornaments)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 311 to FIG. 325, a pseudo-series effect using the sword decorative body 5001 in which the form is changed in stages according to the number of continuation of the pseudo-series variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo rendition is a temporary reoccurring rendition that temporarily stops the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and is a bonus that is performed corresponding to the pseudo reciprocation together with the pseudo reciprocation in which the temporary stop and revariation are repeated one or more times Etc. Here, the above-described temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-series variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo series of effect patterns that can be selected by lottery of the presentation content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword decoration body)
First, with reference to FIG. 311, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The above-mentioned form of the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with two types of the aura member attached form and the aura member without form, but here, the form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle 5012 There are two types of

  FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. From the left and right side portions of the sheath portion 5020, the player And an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, and its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as in the aura member 5030 described above. 311 (A) to 3 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 is in any form of stage 0 form to stage 3 form according to the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIG. 281 (A) and FIG. 283 (A), and no operation is required for any of the constituent members. Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath part 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 spreads and moves from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form a decoration integral with the first decorative part 5012a. Indicates the form. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, the sword portion 5010 capable of receiving an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, thereby providing a more powerful operation means. Can.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 325, an example of effect transition of an effect pattern for performing pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 320 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the main control board 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. When one of the six variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-series effect is performed. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo-continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weakness) corresponding to each of six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is a sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), The sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (one to three times) of the pseudo continuous change (re-change), the presence or absence of the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the operation opportunity are given. The aspect of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is set (see FIG. 320 (B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) 1 to 3 times. Also, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances). In addition, “pseudo-sword LV1” gives the selection operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) and continues the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) by selecting not to operate by the player. Indicates that the performance can be obtained. In addition, “pseudo revival sword LV1” follows the same rendering transition as the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern of the basic effect pattern that provides the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo run variation (re-variation), It shows that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed again after the end of the falling effect of the special decorative member SDY (chairman) based on the first change operation opportunity. The details of the contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) increases, that is, as the shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decorative member SDY The lower the drop position of the object, the higher the degree of expectation. However, when the drop position of the specified decorative member SDY (circumferential object) is half-drop, the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 1 It is set so as to have the same degree of expectation in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) becomes full with the effect pattern which is less in number of times. Specifically, the expected number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 times and half-drop sword LV1 weak effect pattern is 29%, the number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 and a sword of full fall Expectation level of LV1 strong performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 times, expectation degree of semi-falling sword LV2 weak performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong performance pattern for the first and last drop is 50%, the expectation level of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern for the half-fall sword LV3 is 3% The expectation degree of the continuation number of three times of fluctuation) and the sword LV3 strong rendering pattern of the full fall is set to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation varies depending on the selected variation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the degree of expectation is set higher as the variation pattern has a higher expectation level. The expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% respectively when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern. It becomes. Further, the expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern is 47% and 74% respectively for the case where the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and the case where the selected sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  Below, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition example shown in FIG. 312 to FIG. 319 and the effect execution timing chart shown in FIG. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition of simulated continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given while the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 316 is a view showing a transition example of the rendering after the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (the falling rendering of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen)) during the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) common to all the rendering patterns. is there. FIGS. 317 and 318 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the false sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the false sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern. Also, FIGS. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) in the pseudo-series effect, and FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) Figure 322 is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (Sword LV2 strong effect pattern), Figure 323 is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (Sword LV3 strong effect pattern), Figure 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern) FIG. 325 shows a simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of a production | presentation transition in case a pseudo | simulation continuous production is performed in the production | presentation before a fluctuation | variation display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(All production patterns common)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the heel is visible from the player above the display area (initial state) ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword is in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image (the effect content notification “100 chances can be a great chance” message) showing the start of the pseudo continuous effect Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-series effect is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a quasi-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are changed again for the player. Inform you. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). The sword image which shows the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in advance is displayed. Thus, since the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) are notified at the time of temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) starts, the player Can identify and see what stage of pseudo-stationary fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 312 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 312 (D) described above. The pseudo linear figure pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. At this time, the form change of the sword decorative body 5001 is a timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decorative body 5001 from the effect display which is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 after the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). Note that the shape change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), for example, it is performed together with the display of the pseudo reciprocation symbol at the time of the above-mentioned FIG. The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state while being enlarged and displayed. The state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the second sword decoration sword decoration body 5001 that is enabled to be operated by the player being used as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with eyes closed) indicating whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. Subsequent effects include a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is effective in operation (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is not effective in operation (name). To “LV2” or “LV3”). Below, an example of an effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decorative body 5001 effective as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (G The operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of the warrior open) indicating that the operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“a good chance!” Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, an expectation degree notification effect by the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 316 (U1), when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) ) Is movable from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the total fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (B). An expected degree notification image (“100 body defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full drop state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half drop state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Here, the expectation degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Further, when the set production pattern is a “weak” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) Is dropped and moved from the initial state to a half drop state. The semi-dropped state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps with the upper half region of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. . Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (B). An expected degree notification image (“50 body defeat!”) Is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Similarly to the “strong” performance pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  In the case where the player's operation is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern. An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) has ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  When the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. Ru. As for the reach effect at this time, reach effects of the same effect contents are executed for the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. Thus, by operating when the sword decorative body 5001 is required to be delivered, the player can perform the reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object). I can meet you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation every time, so that the player's willingness to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the game interest for uniform production is suppressed can do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 320 (B) and 321, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the first stage is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. When there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ((1) See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is heightened, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2) )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The points at which images are displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)) are different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern / Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set which enables the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not provided at the operation opportunity provision timing of the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). After following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) described above, no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggested image shown in FIG. 312 (G) described above. The continuous image (image with samurai eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second state is returned to the state with the form maintained in the stage 1 form (figure 313 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 313 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the temporary stop display just before the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and effect level (number of quasi-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  When the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is cracked left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (Fig. 313 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stretch at the timing when the player's gaze is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 2 form), which can be operated by the player, is enabled as an operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the determination result of whether or not to give the operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) described above is displayed FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image ("Appreciable !!!" message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for asking for a positive operation is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing an operation direction and an operation valid period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. , And allow the player to grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. In addition, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an escape image ("Enemy, escape!") Is displayed, which indicates that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen). 318 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 322, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed. In the period T2 during which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. And when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The points at which images are displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)) are different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2 (FIG. (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 314 and FIG. 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set to enable the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  If the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body is provided at the timing of the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 314 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed, and the second extraction state is displayed. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 314 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode to inform the player that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is to be performed (FIG. 314 (V6) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Moreover, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. Thus, when the temporary stop display is displayed immediately before the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and attend at what stage of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012 b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012 a so that both decorative parts can be viewed as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state The state changes to (FIG. 314 (V8)). It should be noted that the shape change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword ornament 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed every time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be changed in a plurality of stages collectively when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stretch at the timing when the player's gaze is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 in the second state (step 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword can be made effective as operation means, ie, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result as to whether or not to give the user an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

  Here, when the set production patterns are the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. Figure 315 (X2). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for the player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)). . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 3 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. , And allow the player to grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). See FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 323, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo linked fluctuation (re-shift) is performed and the second pseudo linked fluctuation (re-change) are performed. During the period T2 in which the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T2 to be performed, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage is made effective as operation means Give them the opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV3 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, while maintaining the stage 2 form, the sword decorative body experiences the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 314 (V8)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second scraped state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The points at which images are displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)) are different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern / simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 317 and FIG. 318, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), but the pseudo continuous change is made by selecting that the player does not operate. An effect transition example in the case where a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level change effect) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity giving timing of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an operation positively as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) to FIG. 313 (T1), the operation area shown in FIG. 313 (T1) is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image (a message “Opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to perform an operation from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1 )). Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promoting effect for promoting selection of the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation valid period are shown together with a message “Please select whether you want to place the sword”. An image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Subsequent transition of effects greatly differs depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the player performs the operation of the sword during the operation effective period. If it is detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern is traced.

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed ends, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second sword state in the first stage to the initial sword state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate ("Have you been a good time ...") is displayed (Fig. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (glare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!” Indicating that the pseudo decoration variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the operation is detected in the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern) of the basic performance pattern as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is displayed in a normal manner with a decorative pattern (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the timing predetermined in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed is completed, the operation pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 317 (Z2) to the continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. Then, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern) of the basic production pattern, FIG. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIG. ) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5) is followed.

  As described above, in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern), the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected on the main control board 1310 is largely different. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and reach the reach production. On the other hand, if it chooses not to operate it, it will not only be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but will reach reach effect without being able to grasp the expected degree that could be known if the user was originally operating . Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the case of the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if an operation is performed, an effect (continuous change in the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 due to a level-up effect) caused by continuing pseudo-variation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is missed and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 is initialized It will return to form. The operation at the selection operation opportunity is the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 that is not known to the player, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. Provide a fresh rendition that brings the operation result to the disadvantaged person. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player comes to the operation at the selection operation opportunity with tension and a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) When the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the three stages are reduced from the stage 1 configuration to the stage 0 configuration (initial configuration) from the selection operation opportunity. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decorative body 5001, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, and the level is raised to the stage 3 form and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the operation of the number of times set in advance in the effect pattern is required, but in this example, the operation opportunity of 2 times (LV1 and L3) can be provided in advance, but the player performs one operation by operating. The granting ends at the opportunity, and a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear instead, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form It will reach reach production only to see the change up to. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected variation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and the decline of the game entertainment.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, it ends without being able to grasp the expectation, and the form further changes in level (levels up), and it operates in the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. Although the expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo-sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo-sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern in FIG. 320 (A), it is not limited thereto. For example, the expectation degree of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection feeling, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 324, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the first stage in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. Is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by an operation of the player is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern or a sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since three quasi-continuous variations (revariations) are inherently provided, a specific decoration is provided. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern. When the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variations (revariations) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period T2 during which (revariation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 during which the third pseudo variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And enable the player to have operational opportunities. And when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → FIG. 317). The operation valid period for accepting the player's operation effectively is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) continues (when the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern is set), the sword The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, while maintaining the stage 2 form, the sword decorative body experiences the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 314 (V8)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second scraped state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, if the player does not perform the operation of the sword during the operation effective period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo Resurrection Sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 319, the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed, and it looks as if it is rushed to reach effect as it is, and the pseudo resurrection in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored. An example of effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control substrate 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control substrate 1310.

  If the set effect pattern is the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above, the above-mentioned FIGS. 312 (A)-(G) → FIGS. 313 (T1)-(T3) Follow production transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern, FIG. 319 (the same effect as FIG. 316 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword design is resumed. If the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword as the operation effective period ends, as in the other effect patterns. Instead of the above-described FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2), the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not have the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that it has been done is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed at the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3) described above. Is temporarily stopped with a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, a pseudo-sword design in a form indicating the form and production level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. The notification is sent to the player (FIG. 319 (UA4)). A sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo rafter symbol at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001, and the initial form (sword storage state) is maintained. Thus, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the start of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the stage 3 form (FIG. 319 (UA4)), the form and effect level of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-skater pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) described above is enlarged and the sword display is such that the effect display acts on the sword decoration 5001. The display is moved toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form into a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative portion 5012a and the second decorative portion 5012b are operated from the initial form so that both decorative portions can be viewed as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state The state changes to (FIG. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form at once, it can impress a powerful operation and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state (step 3 form) which enables the player to operate the sword is made effective as operation means, and the above-mentioned FIG. 315 (X1) to (X5) When the player's operation is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) is detected according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of the fall effect of the 簾 (character) is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, since the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is once in a half drop state, the level is raised and the above-mentioned FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) An expectation degree notification effect is produced by the full fall effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (chairman) as in (U5), and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, in the case where the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation by the half-drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (clad object) same as FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

  If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to activate the sword decorative body 5001 in the second ejection state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the end of the operation effective period as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the state of the sword, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not have the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances), and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is terminated.

  In this way, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed, and when the quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, the level of the stage 2 form is jumped over and the stage 3 form The same level of performance as the third stage (the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) production in the basic production pattern) will be performed, so the player will be surprised and reach with greater expectations than the other production patterns. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or the subsequent fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) becomes a semi-fall, the player does not feel distracted. It is possible to enjoy the game in expectation of the resurgence of the pseudo random fluctuation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 325, the operation execution timings of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 of the stage 1 form is made effective as operation means in the period T1 in which the first simulated continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, Give players an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the drop effect (expectation notification) that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) falls half by the player's operation Production). Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) ends, and once it returns to the variation display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, a period during which the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) in other effect patterns is performed The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decorative body 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form change to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage form is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, when the falling effect of the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the period T1, the falling effect (expected degree notification) in which the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is completely dropped by the operation of the player Production). In addition, in the period T1, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the period T1, the falling of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is partially dropped by the operation of the player. Production (expectation notification production) is performed. Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 325, when the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in shape from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is heightened, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2) )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the half drop state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4)). )reference).

  Then, at the same time as the resumption of the pseudo link variation (re-variation), the form of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 319 (UA6)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second scraped state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the first pseudo reciprocation (reciprocal fluctuation), the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full falling state. A falling effect that changes is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the reappearance pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not illustrated, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the first pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (cousin objects) is from the initial state It changes to a semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image corresponding to the semi-falling is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the simulated reciprocation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous change frequency is 2 times and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed a plurality of times, respectively. If it is less than that, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state every time the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is made, and the player can operate, but an operation effective period is provided. It is characterized by being returned to the state of the sword (without giving the player an operation opportunity). For this reason, since the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is characterized in that the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a beneficial effect for the player by the player's operation. Make the player's operation selection carefully. Therefore, interest can be given to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the sword ornament 5001 can change in form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are increased step by step. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state and the second sword extraction state (operating position) to when the operation effective period is generated, the player operates the operating mode at the operating position (form, light emission, movable Etc.) is preferably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, so that the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is entered, and the mode of the operation means cannot be checked. It is possible to wipe out the fear that the game interest will be reduced by shifting to the operation effect as it is.

  In addition, although the step change of the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 was shown by the form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emission mode or operation mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in stages in correspondence with the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change).

(Application to pre-reading production)
In addition, although the scribbling effect in the pseudo-series reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a pre-reading effect. The case where it applies to pre-reading effect is described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the katana LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When the hold to be the object of pre-reading effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as the above-described FIGS. 312 (B) to (F) is performed in the variable display performed at the time of occurrence. The sword decorative body 5001 is different from the second decorative state in that it is limited when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next change display (that is, the change display of hold 1 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as the above-described FIG. 312 (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) is performed. Furthermore, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as that of FIG. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X3) described above Is called. As described above, the change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword in the pre-reading effect is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 to be the object of pre-reading effect is started, and the state of the operation promoting effect and the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. To the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

  Although the state change from the state of the sword decoration of the sword decorative body 5001 to the state of the second scout is limited to the occurrence timing of the operation effective period, the next change display is made even if the stepwise form change is performed at the end of the change display. It may be performed at the start. In the pre-reading effect, the same effect as the pseudo-reach reach effect is achieved.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggesting effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is enabled or the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object). . Specifically, an operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (crimson) is positioned at the initial position as a suggested pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (injury object) is moved from the initial position to the indication position. The sword decoration 5001 (from the operation button 410 In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggested pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) which generates the operation valid period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (chairman) is positioned at the initial position also in the operation valid period. In the case where is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (common object) is moved to the indication position. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern of a pre-operation suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion pattern is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIG. 326 and FIG. 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, an operation button that is determined in advance to be validated by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 when three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)). The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. In addition, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) determined to be operation effective is generated. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggested pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (簾 簾 簾 に に 初期 位置 初期 有効 初期 操作 有効 初期 初期 初期It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed with the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state (form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword insertion operation.

  When the operation to the operation effective operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D), the result of the current variable display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(Second Suggested Pattern)
In FIG. 328, when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above, the indication suggestion before the operation of the second suggestion pattern is It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production performed. In FIG. 329, although the second decorative pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is temporarily enabled after the sword decorative body 5001 is not activated, and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure shown about the operation pre-operation indication production of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (injury object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) determined to be operation effective in advance is generate. In this example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective, the second suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggested pattern as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is higher than the operation button 410 at a valid rate. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective in operation, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is operating at the suggested position. Is generated. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (the form with the aura), and the player can perform the operation of the sword. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation effective period with respect to the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is operating at the suggestion position. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. In the second suggested pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promoting effect, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the initial state. In addition, movement to the full fall state or the initial state of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) may be performed from the state of operating at the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

  Then, when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective in the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3) is detected, the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D) and Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) is dropped and moved from an initial state to a full drop state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggested pattern.

  It should be noted that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of operation patterns are provided so that the operation efficiency of the sword decorative body 5001 is different, the player's interest in the operation can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation indication effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
In the case where the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) is moved to the indication position, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operation effective, In addition to the basic pattern following the effect transition of FIG. 328 (AA1) → (AA3) described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 is temporarily activated, and then the sword decorative body 5001 is A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is performed before the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA1) and the small-step movement of the specific decoration member SDY (brasil product) are performed (FIG. 329 (BB1) ). Next, in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 described above is not performed, and switching indicating the switching of the operation valid operation means The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the end of the operation valid period of the operation button 410. After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the second state of the sword (the form with the aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operating means which becomes operation valid is the sword decorative body 5001 from the operation button 410. A switching notification image (a message of “scratching chance” and “I want to put a sword”) is displayed to notify that the switching is to be performed (FIG. 329 (BB4)). In the meantime, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) has been moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 327) in the second suggested pattern described above.

  In the case of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without activating the button operation 410 (without operation promotion effect). It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is enabled. ) Can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. In the second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 328 (AA1), the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state in which the expected validity is high and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, it is suggested before the operation. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, vertical small-step movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is performed in the indication effect before operation. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is also used for the result notification after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 327), a series of falling effects are made from the vertical movement of the suggestion effect before the operation. It is possible to show the stage effect and to suppress the decrease in the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. It may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective in operation is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is activated once (or after it appears that the operation is validated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is located at the suggested position, D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it can be expected that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 may become effective thereafter. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the indication effect before operation, the operation effect indication image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. (FIG. 326 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (a pottery) from the initial position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view It is also possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (still). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (chairman) in the first suggested pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggested pattern of the same timing, so the player can be instructed to perform the operation rendition by the first suggested pattern Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword decorative body 5001 is operated effectively. Then, since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period will occur in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated to the indication position, the suggestion before operation is suggested. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 Produce with a pattern. In an effect period in which a specific effect pattern is executed, it is possible to generate a specific effect reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific effect execution condition by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period. Based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation related to privilege provision). The degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation presentation may be 100% or 0%.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for providing a privilege when operated) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) other than this. In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There are cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (givenness expectation degree) related to privilege grant is higher than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for providing the privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in a previous stage where the stage has not yet been performed and the operation is just being performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) having such a dramatic property. In the case of providing such an operation opportunity, it is possible to execute common operation-related effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception enabled).
The operation on the operation button 410 is activated after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is activated (the effect can be accepted), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated (effect can be accepted ) The first effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be performed, and · The operation on the operation button 410 is activated (the effect reception is possible) without the “specific operation related effect” being started. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be played are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is activated by executing any of the effect modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs. Regardless of the case in which a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) can accept the production occurs, it is common (specification prior to the occurrence of those periods). ) Operation-related effects can be executed, so that it is possible to have an interesting aspect as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can be accepted. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect starts to be produced, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep secret.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such common (specific) operation-related effects will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any production reception period occurs after execution of a common (specific) operation-related production. In the case where any effect reception period occurs without the operation related effect of) being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, the content of the production in the case where any production acceptance period occurs without executing the common (specific) operation-related production is as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example. . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 appears without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each effect described above. Is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First presentation manner]
FIGS. 330 and 331 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive an effect during a period in which the specific operation-related effect is being performed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a production (1st production aspect).

  FIG. 330 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 330 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Display is made to move in the inside. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. You will be able to

  In FIG. 330 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 330 (b) is developed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, character display such as “operate”) prompting operation of any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) in a state of being stopped and displayed in the area, and reception of effects An effect situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although the operation can be received for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). It becomes impossible to determine which of the three is available for presentation. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 330 (c)) is the same in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation where the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001). Common (specific) operation-related relations as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c) over a period until an operation on at least one of (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted for production. I am trying to carry out the production.

  Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the content of the production of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c). Absent. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect Middle). With such a configuration, it is not clear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive effects, and at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001) It is possible to suggest that an operation on one is acceptable for presentation. For example, the plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, in order to more surely conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  Also, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) Even, the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is urged. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light-emitting state, or light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to provide a connection between the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this rendering example (first rendering mode), the rendering status in which the image shown in FIG. 330 (c) appears is only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Whether in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410) It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  In this effect example (first effect mode), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first condition (the operation button 410) or the third condition (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is present. Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when “GG” in the drawing is made progress), an effect is accepted and an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

  In the operation effect, regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and making any of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception , You may make it indicate the degree of expectation concerning grant of benefits. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), the operation is performed according to the reception of the effect even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decorative body 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and an operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-stage operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in the sword position in response to the performance reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the extraction position (extraction state) instead of returning to the (insertion state). As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword position (sword state) to the sword position (sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword state. When the operation will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 331 (e), a reach state can be formed and reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) Common (specific) operation related rendering is started and the rendering started (common) (specification), regardless of whether the effect reception is enabled 5001) or the effect reception is not enabled While operation related effects are being executed, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be made to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can not be made an effect acceptable. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the other operation means (for example, the operation button 410) have effects respectively. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is in effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Combined with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is enabled to receive effects, the sword decoration 5001 is allowed to receive effects. You will be able to mislead as if it were not. That is, in this case, when an effect is received, it becomes possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decorative body 5001, which is the side with a higher rate of expectation. It is expected to provide an interest as to which operation means should be operated when common (specific) operation-related effects are performed.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect reception period is digested and the remaining time is reduced by the amount of such an erroneous operation.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the acceptance of the effect required for the execution of the effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection itself of the operation is performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

  Further, in the example of the effect (the first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side is Although it was made to be performed, you may make the effect content at the time of these operation mutually different. For example, in the effect at the time of operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If a unique effect sound is generated or the like) further appears, it is possible to more appropriately improve the fun of the game when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received for effect.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). In either case, it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation effect will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The effect at the time of operation may be performed as effect contents different from the effect at the time of operation on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which effects can be received. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is produced when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, the operation is different from either the first condition or the second condition. It is desirable that a rendition or the other rendition mode described above (different from the first rendition and the second rendition at the time of operation) is displayed. However, in the above-mentioned effect example, the above-mentioned third situation may not be necessarily required.

  In addition, the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, but the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the other operation button 410 may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side on which the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 332 to 335 are to be executed as effects that indicate the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears, and the specific operation-related effect is the effect If the first effect result appears as a result of the effect, it is suggested that the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and if the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of presentation (2nd presentation mode) in which it is suggested that the presentation acceptance period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among them.

  In FIG. 332 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 332 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed in the inside, and it is depicted that the lightning image IZ is acting on those images BTG and SYG. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. You will be able to

  In FIG. 332 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b) is developed, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed There is an effect of pushing each other in the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

  In other words, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG press against each other, An effect is received for the operation button 410 when an effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and (c) are “the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of these periods”.

  Note that the left diagram in FIG. 332 (c) depicts how the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right diagram shows the sword decoration image SYG displayed. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 333 (d) shows that the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c) and the button image BTG is left in the display area. The effect that portrays is performed (the first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (Fig. 332 (b), (c)) is performed which suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive effects. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)) By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting effects (being in the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation to the operation button 410 is also prompted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the light emitting state.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is a case where the effect is developed and progressed through a specific operation related effect (such as FIG. 332 (b), (c)), or without passing through the specific operation related effect. In some cases, there is a case in which the rendering progress (for example, the rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) is made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for giving a benefit be higher than that.

  In addition, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio in which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without passing It is desirable to increase the value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  In FIG. 333 (e), as the result of the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means being performed while the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation This is a depiction of the performance during operation.

  The operational effect shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as in FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the presentation even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. The same is true in that the control for reciprocating between the positions (control for setting the operation state) can be executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 333 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed (the reach effect starts). Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-operation state (sword state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is within the display area. A presentation depicting the situation left is being performed (second presentation result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (Fig. 332 (b), (c)) is performed which suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive effects. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)) By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted among a plurality of operation means (a generation accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "Keep out sword" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Then, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (that is, during the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to emit light) having the sword decoration 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made to emit light. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  Incidentally, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is not limited to the case where the effect is developed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect. In some cases, there is a case in which the rendering progress (for example, the rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) is made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is possible that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits is higher than in the case where the expectation for the provision of benefits is lower than in the case where the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed after the specific operation related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 334 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed accordingly. It is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is being performed.

  Similarly to the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically similar to the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), while displacing the specific decoration member SDY to the front side of the display area At 1600, a predetermined display effect is performed. In addition, here, although it is made to display the production | presentation aspect such as "superheat !!" which is suggested that it is a relatively high expectation degree according to presentation reception, it is suggested that it is a relatively low expectation degree “Chance !!” may be displayed. Similarly to this, with regard to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation for displacing the display area to the front side is not performed is provided, and any of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception In this case, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), based on the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plural aspects ( From stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311, it is possible to change from stage 1 form to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for awarding a bonus such as a big hit The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even when the effect during operation (FIG. 334 (h)) is ended and the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driven position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the scrapped state, and thereafter (during the period when reach production is performed, etc.), the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the katto state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, it is possible to further execute an operation effect according to the operation to the knife state.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the scraping state) and the second step operation Since the effect at the time of operation comes to be performed according to each operation (operation to the state of sword), not only when the operation to the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) is performed, but also the first step In the non-operation period until the second-step operation (operation to the sword state) is performed after the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment for the operation Become so. Note that it is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation are operation modes different from each other (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). Moreover, it is desirable that the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step and the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the second step have different effect contents.

  In addition, when the effect at the time of operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 334 (h)) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extraction state, and is not maintained in the extraction state In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second operation opportunity. In the operation effect according to the first step operation, is it possible to maintain the sword decorative body 5001 at a position (surgery state) where it is possible to give the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the sword state to the sword state)? It may be performed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scraped state but is returned to the scout state, it is substantially impossible to provide the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the scout state to the scout state) It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of performing the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 334 (h)), when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scrapped state, when the predetermined time has passed (reach effect Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword state)). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side until it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to keep the operation or the maintenance in the cutting state). In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d). Thus, an effect depicting the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the predetermined time has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. Or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)). Here, the lightning image IZ is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), an instruction display prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. It is different from the case of the effect shown in). Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize something.

  In FIG. 335 (k), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG so that the button image BTG is encased in 靄 MY, and even its outline depiction is lost There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation to the operation button 410 is enabled to be accepted, the effect shown in such FIG. 335 (k) appears Thus, it becomes possible to give a suspicion that the production reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (is about to disappear), and the remaining time until it is clearly indicated to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  As the result shown in FIG. 335 (k) is developed, the outer shape of 靄 MY approaches not the operation button 410 (button image BTG) but the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). There is a performance that depicts the appearance.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed yet, it may be suggested that the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may occur instead of the operation button 410 due to the outer shape of the eyelid MY. You will be able to

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately disappearing) than in FIG. 335 (k), and it is clearly shown to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs. It is suggested that the remaining time of

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i) further progresses and 靄 MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 334 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will remain, so that the game entertainment is maintained. Will be able to

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed in the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)) The effect on the sword decorative body 5001 by confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ appearing in the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 332 (b), (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether the possibility that the reception period will occur is left, and this also makes it possible to maintain the game interest.

  In this presentation example (second presentation mode), when the presentation shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears, the button image BTG is not displayed by に よ っ て MY (FIG. 335 (k)), When the effect is developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) is not to display the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and to display the button image BTG. It can also be said that the effect suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is set so that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). The effect pattern approaching the outer shape of) may be set to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, then the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. When such a rendition pattern can be performed, the rendition shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and (k) conceals which of the plurality of operation means is available for rendition It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the production situation shown in FIG. 334 (h) in the production example (second production mode) with the operation button 410 provided as operable operation means, FIG. 333 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side on which the player has not performed the operation may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 336 to 339 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  In FIG. 336 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. With this, it is suggested that either of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 will soon be ready for rendering.

  In particular, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made to be recognizable. In this case, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but in comparison with the operation position to be operated when giving the operation opportunity Each one at a slower speed.

  According to such a configuration, the operation means still having time until the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means in which the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will each operate. Therefore, since there is still time remaining until the effect reception period occurs, or from the time when the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the end of the symbol variation, game interest for those operations is It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  And in this effect example (the third effect mode), not the effect display in the effect display device 1600 but the specific operation related effect is thus performed by each operation (FIG. 336 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. After the start, basically the same production progress as the second production mode is made.

  For example, among the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the state where the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from the initial position (position when not driving) It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), it is suggested that any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted as a result of such a movable effect as well.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), for the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, after the specific operation related effect is started, a position different from the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) respectively And it is made to position as an operation state (state to which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given, When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation unit on the side where the effect can be accepted at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended for the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are both in the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation related presentation is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and the effect receiving period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect receiving period has occurred is operated to the operation position only in a shorter time, or the effect receiving period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operation means on the other side to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the extension during the operation related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation accepting side of the operation target is positioned as the operating state at a position different from the operating position, so that the effect receiving period of the operating state is It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) is developed and the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed using the button image BTG Except for being displayed as corresponding to “410”, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively in the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position It is made to position as an operation state (state to which driving force was given) at a position different from any of the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the state when they are at the initial position (non-driven position). In contrast, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). As described above, by intentionally changing the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, their alignment can be achieved in the near future. It can be suggested that the effect to be made (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 operate) is generated.

  In addition, when the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is that the button image BTG The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d), except that they are displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 is in the state of operating at the operation position, and the sword decorative body 5001 is at the initial position. It is in the state operated at a position different from (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first performed. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display for generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 and prompting the operation (character display such as “press”, effect You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed as "a mode moved to the operation position", but the operation button at the time of the display 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is to be performed, and the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 333 (e). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state where it is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). The sword decorative body 5001 is operated at a position different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 337 (g), a reach state is formed and reach effect may be performed. Is also as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword decorative body 5001. Is the same as the one described with reference to FIG. 334 (g) except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode moved to the operation position". It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decorative body 5001 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed Will be

  In addition, even as the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode moved to the operation position)”. After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, while the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i) is to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. The sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 338 (j), a reach state is formed and reach effect may be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at one time, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively in the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is still no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will still occur. Will be able to

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) comes to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k) The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the heel MY is closer to the sword ornament 5001 at the operation position than the sword ornament 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) Is set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In this rendering example (third rendering mode), the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 is different from the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword decorative body 5001. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the operation on the button side is performed. Become. When a “sword decoration image SYG imitating a sword ornament 5001 (second display mode)” appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001 of the body 5001 and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received, an effect during operation on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is made to appear, even when the sword-playing side operation is performed, based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production at the time of success (specific decoration member SDY is operated) and the production at the time of failure It is supposed that either (with the specific decoration member SDY not operated) is made to appear, and the contents of those effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  In addition to effect on whether or not the specific decoration member SDY operates, operation effect on the button side and effect on the sword character side are the same as each other for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples related to a specific operation-related production, the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as pushing between the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state with respect to one operation means. The operation may be given to the operation means in a manner according to the result. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted state or the extracted state when the rendering result of the setting is indicated.

  Also, when the symbol variation in the holding state is digested, it is determined that a specific operation related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation when the symbol change is in the holding state (digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given only to any of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the design variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in the hold state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate each of a plurality of operating means provided.

  In the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images (button images BTG, etc.) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) Although the sword decorative image SYG is displayed, these images may not necessarily be displayed. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, those operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal with respect to which of the means the presentation acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, even when adopting the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation related effect is being performed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation related effect is ended. One of BTG (image corresponding to operation button 410) and sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect reception period occurs. It will be. Then, in this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation related effect. When the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ) that has been executed is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning falls on one of the rocks, a button image BTG is made to appear from the rock, and the other By making the sword decoration image SYG appear from the inside of the rock when lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to make the stage progress to the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. 334 (g) . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping the lightning toward one rock, and when the lightning falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to cause the effect to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. 334 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the effect progress as effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, a specific case is available in the case where the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and in the case where the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (execution of effects) to the occurrence of those effect reception periods to be the same. In addition, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs only for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and their other examples, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect When operating the operation means on the side (eg, FIG. 333 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side not operated to the initial position after the elapse of a predetermined time based on the time of the operation. You may However, from when the operation means is not used as a reference, depending on at which timing of the effect reception period the user operates the operation means on the side not operated, until the operation is ended. It is desirable to make the time lengths of

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the time remaining in the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from when the specific operation-related effect is started to when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably based on the stage reception within the stage reception period after the specific operation-related stage is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the rendering result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.) after the specific operation related rendering is started until the rendering result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate the effect reception period regarding the specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) While related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to create a special effect aspect as if the effect is shown and the effect is ended despite the fact that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect is performed. It is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while playing a game. In addition, when the operation with respect to one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means is received while the specific operation related rendition is being performed, a predetermined effect is to be performed based on the effect reception. Then, it is desirable to indicate a rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the high expectation side is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, in the middle of a stage where the specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means are being performed, when the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of those operation means, within the effect reception period When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in step S, a special operation effect is performed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is performed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the effect as the specific operation-related effect during the time from when the specific operation-related effect is started until the effect result is indicated, As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and it is possible to grant the privilege more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable that the degree of expectation be high.

  Further, in each of the above-described production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, an production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before is performed. According to such an automatic button effect state, an effect at the time of operation is generated without operation every time an effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. When the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 of the operation means is in the middle stage where the specific operation related effect is being performed. When the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period, it is desirable that the special operation production is not executed (automatic button function does not function). After this, even if the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable that the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (automatic button function to function) is executed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the specific operation related rendition is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function works, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game entertainment It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to on / off of the automatic button effect state, for example, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not performed by the operation of the operation button 410 but also during the period when the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the automatic button effect state is off and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated, if the operation button 410 is operated, the automatic button effect state can be set and changed from the off state to the on state. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs while the effect state is on, and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is performed in addition to the operation effect according to the operation being performed. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be cases where it is desirable to generate an effect at the time of operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on Within the effect reception period for the time operation button 410, when the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled as well as the operation button 410 and the operation for the other operation means is performed, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is switched from the off state to the on state and when it is switched from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 as an effect result of performing a specific operation-related effect. In the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (effect reception for operation button 410 is received If the operation opportunity (rendering acceptance period) is given to the sword decorative body 5001 when the second display mode is given and the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 340 (a) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e). Display mode) and display the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly switched to the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is Therefore, a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword in the display area shown in FIGS. 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h) is used. Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as a background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested) is displayed. To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), the first image having a shield (button image BTG simulating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design is held. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) do not need to be prepared as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating an aspect such as at least a partial shape or a partial design of the operation means.

  Further, with regard to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this manner, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG You may make it perform also as the production | presentation which suggests a different expectation degree depending on which (2nd display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may also indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears when displayed in a specific display mode. You may

  In addition, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (desired to have a relatively high expectation), a specific When an operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after a later-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect) is displayed (it is desirable that the effect state is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed (for example, after a prelude effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect) is not executed. When displayed, the operation reception period for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG as well as another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give an interesting aspect of the operation different from the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively highly expected production situation, and to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is performed. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and the relative It is desirable that it is suggested that the presentation status has a higher expectation than in the production status in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production status with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the button image BTG appears in the effect status with a relatively low degree of expectation, the operation means (operation button corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period) When 410) is operated, the special effect presentation period is not executed by ending the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410) It is desirable that an effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is to be executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not performed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is not performed. Even when the operation means different from the means is operated, the effect at the time of operation when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when the effect reception period occurs with respect to the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both of the operation means and the operation means other than the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is used even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation-time effects as when operated are executed, and the special operation effects that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation time effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-described automatic button function before another timing. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and a specific timing has arrived. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and each of the effects described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes described above and other examples thereof, “a button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” or an effect result of performing a specific operation related effect, or In the case where any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration 5001" is displayed, and the effect is accepted by the displayed operation means, relative The first operation effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggested to have a relatively low degree of expectation. One of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation time effect, which is the effect content that suggests the, is to be executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first When the display mode is displayed is executed based on the effect reception on the operation button 410 and when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception on the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set “the assignment of the operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect object (one of the plurality of effect modes to be the timer object) is there. That is, in the timer effect directed to "providing an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means This makes it possible to enjoy the effects at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operation with respect to the operation means is performed, the effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery Make it possible for any of the adverse effects to appear. However, when the “operation opportunity to the operation means” is given as the target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect result that is advantageous for the player is high, as compared with the case where the timer effect is not the target. It is more desirable to The percentage may be 100%.

  In this respect, when the effect pattern for which the timer effect is performed for which the effect is directed to the operation means (for example, the operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is given) appears, the action object for the operation means In addition, a specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect on which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It is possible to improve the fun of the game when played.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the one effect target (the operation of the sword decoration 5001). There is a concern that it is not possible to understand which of the effects should be closely watched, the attention is distracted, and the entertainment interest drops in reverse.

  Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is set to an unexecuted state, and the count value It is desirable that the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced after it becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”).

  FIG. 341 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively performed on one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-described notice-side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processing according to the timer effect.

  In FIG. 341 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 341 (b) shows an effect that the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not yet been executed, and it is unknown which effect the timer effect is targeted for. There is.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (unknown state) in which it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0" is reached and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. In addition, when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not "0", and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect on which one of the two is displayed is performed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (the assignment of the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), those effects are still Since overlapping in sequence is avoided, it is possible to enjoy each of the different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), until a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect is suggested that indicates the type of effect (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001) that the timer effect is directed to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is “the provision of an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 (operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword storage” ”Will be given the opportunity to operate”), the “specific operation-related effects” will begin to be produced in the production situation recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the display “1” is performed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the sword decorative body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction) is performed, and this also indicates that "the opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 (operational opportunity by I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

FIG. 341 (d) shows an effect situation in which “specific operation related effect” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, in addition to the fact that the count value has already been hidden, the effect that suggests the type of effect for which the timer effect is the effect is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, with regard to effects that indicate the type of effect that the timer effect is targeted for, or a predetermined action by the sword decorative body 5001, it is important to execute before a specific operation-related effect is started, so The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the effects are developed in the order of FIGS. 341 (e) to (h). The contents of these effects are shown in FIG. 332 (c). ), FIG. 334 (g) to (i), or FIG. 336 (d) and FIG. 338 (h) to (j), the details are omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in relation to a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 or a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, another timer effect is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 in that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, but the specific operation-related effect is an effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly before this), and continues after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( Expectations for the jackpot) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect will be simultaneously developed, but at the same time when the effect situation where the effect is simultaneously developed appears, the specific operation-related effect is Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering value is the same as the expectation for the same bonus award (big hit) The same). That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to substantially lose the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, any of the effects It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand what should be watched, and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the game interest, in the case where an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, it is more advantageous than in the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, a display that suggests the type of effect target (in the effect display device 1600) “Sword”) is performed, but such a display that suggests an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be a timer object, a display that suggests which effect is a timer effect may not be performed.

  In addition, in each of the effect modes described above and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it was granted. However, prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 It does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period). An effect pattern for performing a second precursor effect may appear. In the case of performing these omen effects (first omen effect, second omen effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for awarding benefits when a rendition appears, in order to enhance the fun of the game when a specific operation-related rendition is performed.

  Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating an operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given, for example. Display a specific image, such as expressing the appearance of entering. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) having different degrees of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears in while the precursor image gradually developing the button image BTG is developed.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 It is important that each is executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a high-level concept that includes. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, a plurality of effect modes are prepared and the sign effect is performed in any of these effect modes as described below with reference to FIG. 342. Depending on whether or not the indication reception period that occurs in response to the indication effect has a length, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the indication effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it happen.

  FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of the contents of effects for each type of effects when a plurality of types (prediction effects A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the warning effects.

  First, in the example (provisional effect A) shown in FIG. 342 (a), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the predictive effect A is started. The precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (prediction effect A), when prognostic effect A is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is to be given the operation opportunity. The effect reception period (effective period) T1 that is held will occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign effect A (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (predictive effect B1), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed, The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Be done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign effect B1 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thereby, it is suggested how long the production reception period generated corresponding to the precursor effect has a length depending on which mode (the precursor effect A and the precursor effect B1) was performed. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (c) (precursor effect B2), when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the progant effect B2 is started to be produced. Like the omen effect B1, this omen effect B2 is also executed prior to the operation when given an operation opportunity to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not the “specific operation related effect”. (Which is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the omen effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from that of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the omen effect B1. Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the sign effect B2 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed in spite of the execution of the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for granting a bonus (big hit) Since it is suggested that the production reception period (effective period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is generated, and the sign production B2 is It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. For the operation means of the above, it may be possible to have an effect on which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of starting the presentation effects B1 and B2 is also started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The precursor effects B1 and B2 may have mutually different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the precursor effect C is started to be produced. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect C When C is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (prediction effect C), when the prediction effect C is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is given to the operation means. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. To be done.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the accompaniment effect C is an effect reception period corresponding to the adjective effect A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect described above” Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the accompaniment effect A occurs, the game entertaining when the admonition effect C is performed is suitably maintained You will be able to

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 342, the effects of the effect reception period (effective period) are associated with the types of the accompaniment effects A, B1, B2, and C by a one-to-one relationship. The length of (validity period) was suggested. However, the effect reception period (the effective period (the effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length to be different for each type of precursor effect ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to simulate the same state as that of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operation position in accordance with this, FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state at the operating position (strap state), but the sword decorative image SYG is also displayed as the state (strap state) operating at the operating position. Has been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating that appearance. If a certain operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the width as the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the game interest will be lowered. Concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of effects of the accompaniment contents when the accompaniment effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the accompaniment contents when the accompaniment effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, in FIGS. 343 (a) to (c), the contents of effects when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed are shown. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), not the “specific operation-related production” but only the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 side. If the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword ornament 5001. It should be noted that in the prelude effect (the predecessor effect in another example is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is to be provided is given, an effect image imitating the operation means Does not have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

  In the aura of effect shown in FIG. 343 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa covering a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb covering a red ala with a relatively high degree of expectation Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents about which one of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this rendering situation, although it can be recognized that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon, the sword decorative image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decorative image SYG or an expectation of Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 343 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in an effect state with a relatively high expectation. It will be suggested that the presentation acceptance period for In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 343 (c) shows an example of effect when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, the instruction display for prompting the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, but the sword decorative image SYGb is also extracted from the state of the sword according to this. The state is changed to the state. In addition, when the effect reception is made within the effect reception period, a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of the sword Maintained. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the accompaniment effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, if the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword ornament 5001) Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a prognostic effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), if the sign production as “specific operation-related production” has started to be produced, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to this.

  FIG. 343 (e) shows a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition as the “specific operation related rendition” has progressed and the rendition result has appeared. In this effect situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 as the effect result of the “specific operation-related effect”. Has been. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), the final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

  FIG. 343 (f) shows an example of effect when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, the instruction display for prompting the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 (“push down The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the state of the sword.

  In this example, in the example shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the state of the sword in the effect reception period. While the sword decorative body 5001 continues to be displaced upward gradually over the period until the end of the effect reception period, and different from each other. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when an operation to the sword state is performed on the operation subject accessory 141. While a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is kept in the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration 5001 is continuously operated, but the invention is not limited thereto. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are While in the stopped state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is put in the stopped state. The other side is continued in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation reception period for the operation button 410 is generated after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is put into a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction thereof is continued, a specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is expected that the width of the production when the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red ala with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a prognostic effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a prediction effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, any one of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative image SYG imitating the sword decorative body 5001 will be displayed, When the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (the button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation Can be provided further. About this method, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each presentation aspect mentioned above other than the example of a production | presentation of FIG. 343, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unclear whether the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the contour is drawn) Display in a recognizable display state, etc.) so that it appears as the production progresses. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is a high expectation (for example, the white of the effect image imitating the operation means It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear in sequence as the production progresses further. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such effect development, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is a high expectation (for example, the operation means The button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG can be recognized as appearing as a result of the specific operation-related effect. Whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high in expectation or not is unknown (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). Further, it may be possible to generate an effect pattern for further effect development. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to confirm the color. In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), the display mode on the side where the expectation is low (for example, blue) is more However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (e) are diagrams showing other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 344 (a), a pro-end effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, but in the pre-end effect, a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is held. The first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) possessing a sword imitating the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG) Is depicted, and suggests which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 344 (b) is in a rendering situation in which the rendering result of the precursor rendering as “specific operation related rendering” appears. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display that prompts the sword decorative body 5001 to be operated is in a non-displayed state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (characters facing each other) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 344 (c) to 344 (e) show examples of effects when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 344 (c) In addition, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to operate (character display such as “press down” or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), when the effect reception period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state. As shown in FIG. 344 (d), the sword decorative body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the presentation reception period ends, and the player It will wait for the operation (operation from the cutting state to the cutting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to (e), the movement (rotational movement) is completely different from such movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decorative body 5001. In the lowering operation), the second character draws the sword decoration image SYG down, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword removal state. The operation is to be performed. The sword decorative image SYG according to this production example is a series of displays from the start of the swing down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) in a loop within the production reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop process is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by this, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 also enters the sword state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)). However, even if loop processing is performed, it will be maintained as it is without being affected. In addition, when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the operation object role 141 within the effect reception period, the effect is received, and a predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above The loop processing is ended, the sword decorative image SYG is hidden, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period, but The operation modes (operations for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations for moving to the operating position) and loop operations provided for rendering) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is ended. Even after that, the sword decorative image SYG is allowed to continue without ending its operation. Thereby, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) occurs after the specific operation related effect occurs, the effect contents of the specific operation related effect continue until after the effect reception period occurs ( For example, the background can be continued and executed, and the range of the production can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, the contents of the effect (display where the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect was performed. The effect (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs is performed in a form in which both of the background image and the background image are changed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) differing from each other while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both of the image and the image), it is possible to improve the presentation during the effect reception period. In this sense, also in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to have a connection between stage effects and to further improve the stage effect. The dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for awarding a benefit, and may be displayed by any of these display modes.

  In the aura of production as a specific operation-related production, and in the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as the production, and depending on which one of the production modes appears, the production reception You may be made to suggest whether a mode with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when a production reception is made in a period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, when a pro-end effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect is received in a form that changes both the contents of the effect and the background image that were appearing in the pre-effect effect. When it is decided to execute the effect within the period, but the above-mentioned admonition effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a form in which both the effect contents and the background image that appeared in the admonition effect are changed It is also possible to execute an effect when an effect reception period occurs.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 that was started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The operation performed may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001), a display for changing the background image when the effect reception period occurs, and a change of the background image In some cases, there may be a case in which no display is made. Then, in this case, if display is performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation regarding benefit provision is higher than when display is not performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to make it.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception is made, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an effect at the time of operation based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 331 (d), 333 (e), and 334 (h), a sword decorative body 5001 (or an operation button) is provided as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. By also operating 410), it is intended to improve the effect of the operation-related effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not the operation related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  In addition, in the specific operation-related effects according to each of the above-described effect modes and their other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, a button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher. In this respect, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (a), the button in the mode (specific effect mode) to which the princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for giving a privilege than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect When the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 345 (b), the mode (specific rendering mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decorative image SYG. In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for awarding a privilege is higher than when it is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (see FIG. 1) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed). 345 (a) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation related effect being performed. And) may be prepared respectively. And in this case, the case where the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, and the case where the second effect pattern appears, it is set so that the degree of expectation for awarding of benefits becomes the same. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed. It becomes possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific rendering mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which one of the decorative image SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the effect result of a specific operation-related effect (which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific effect mode This may be displayed in advance (for example, during the production of a specific operation-related effect). According to such a configuration, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed even though the specific operation related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed. ) Appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, since the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it may be said that "precursor effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide an effect with a completely different meaning.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples is configured such that the sword portion (the handle 5012 and the blade 5011) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated vertically. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the effect modes described above, and in other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode gives an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit? You may make it perform the said specific operation related effect as an effect about. The sword part (the handle 5012, the blade 5011) and the sheath part (the sheath 5020) are both supported by the main body supporting part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle 5012, the blade 5011) and the sheath part (the sheath 5020) is in the operation (operation) state, the other side can be operated (operation) Is formed.

  However, when a specific operation related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different even if any effect result appears, and the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even when an operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, a rendering image (and its image imitating a sword region in the sword decoration 5001) In the case where the instruction display for prompting the operation is displayed, there is a further concern that the player side may cause an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error while the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If it is difficult to do so and the effect reception period ends before the effect reception is made even though the specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. , There is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001, there are an aspect such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword part and an aspect such as “movement in the lateral direction” by the sheath part. In the operation unit capable of providing an aspect, if an operation on the wrong side is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an operation on the appropriate side, and the effect reception period ends. Risk of loss of operation opportunities.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect on whether an operation opportunity according to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is performed properly and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  FIG. 346 and FIG. 347 show an effect example when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  In FIG. 346 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 346 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 is operated from the sword state to the sword state. An image OX and a second effect image TX imitating a second operation mode for moving the sheath part of the sword decorative body 5001 in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 346 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b) progresses, the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to perform an effect of pushing the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  Note that in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), a display such as “push” can be visually recognized if the first effect image OX remains dominant. Thus, the display such as “slide” is made visible when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the state of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that the display is erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 346 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is within the display area. An effect depicting the state left in is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), an effect reception period relating to a specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) is displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword state to the sword state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 347 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) in the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even in the case where the effect reception period regarding the specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side among the first operation mode and the second operation mode, Operation mode 2 The operation detection itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected in the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification can not appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received. (Here, "As it is good") is done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed over time so that the player can regain calmness (here, “settled and pushed in”). It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, since it becomes possible to sequentially notify in short words, it is preferable even if the player side is in a panic state. It will be expected to suppress. As a result, even if an operation by the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player can appropriately receive the effect. You will be able to make them aware.

  FIG. 347 (g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production state (production reception period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIG. 347 (e) and FIG. 347 (f). As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even when the game is performed from the state (the operation error state), the effect reception is properly made, so that the decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so it may be counterproductive to report complex contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, although there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that an operation error has been made, a special situation is confirmed that a specific notification is performed and no effect at the time of operation is performed based on the operation being performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect to switch the operation to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (in particular, an elderly player or the like), it may be assumed that a situation may occur in which an operation is mistakenly performed before the generation reception period of the specific operation related effects occurs. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed on the second operation portion although the operation instruction for the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is not made. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the operation unit (for example, sword part) of the case, and also in this case, There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize what is good.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is given to which of the first operation unit (sword portion) and the second operation portion (sheath portion) the operation opportunity is given, The second operation unit is in the situation (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and (c)) in which the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) to the operation unit 2 side is not made Even when the operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that can not appear when an operation in a proper manner is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by checking a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, while the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed (the sword decorative body 5001 is moved in the left direction), for example, the first operation unit (for example, A state (sword decoration body) in which an operation on a second operation unit (for example, a sheath portion) is performed even when the effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the sword portion) When the first operation unit (for example, sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 has moved leftward, the effect reception is made and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. Even when a game occurs, the decline in gaming interest is suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication, etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern Therefore, in the period until the production result is displayed when the production result that suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the final production-related production that is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation for giving the benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. Step 0 form shown in FIG. 2) is possible to change from Step 1 form to any of Step 3 form. In this respect, after the specific operation related rendition is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 in the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “press down” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period); The sword decoration image SYG imitating the is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode (step 0 form to step 3 form shown in FIG. 311) as the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to have any interest in checking the sword decoration image SYG. In other words, the performance is poor when there is a production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from that of the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance when there is a performance reception period.

  At this time, making the aspect represented by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 makes the stage performance during the stage for accepting rendering more It is desirable for ensuring it suitably. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Make it visible. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, by confirming the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher. As a result, the amusement of the game when being in the effect reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such operational effects, it is only necessary that the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Moreover, when preparing a several production | presentation aspect as the sword ornament 5001, it is not necessary to change a form as these several production | generation aspects.

  However, if the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG are simply made to differ in this manner, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, as a mode of sword decoration image SYG, a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as a mode of sword decoration 5001 (here, stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 311). Are prepared, and when the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword are displayed by displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the aspect of the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the external appearance is changed by further deforming and uniting the sword decorative image SYG, or the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a mode not appearing or the sword decorative body 5001 It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the display is false. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance beyond the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here shown in FIG. 311) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Further, as to the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 312 to FIG. 319) You may make it apply.

  For example, if it is now in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 315 (X1), then, as the next rendering progress destination, in addition to the rendering situation shown in FIG. 315 (X2), to the rendering situation shown in FIG. A presentation pattern will be prepared to be produced. Then, when the effect is advanced to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation is performed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. A continuous image (image with samurai's eyes closed) showing that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second state of extraction is in the state of insertion while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 348 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment.

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo-sequential change (re-change). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed. This special aspect can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot change. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath part is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) in the display area is changed to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 has three stages. It will change from a sword state to a 2nd sword state while maintaining.

  After that, an operation effective period for generating the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and at the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) simulating the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when the player's sword operation is detected during the operation effective period, the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is caused according to the set effect pattern. While the expectation degree notification effect is performed, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation decoration is not given to the sword decorative body 5001 can be performed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different contents of the effects, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears before the effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display region,
-After that, display an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side to which an operation opportunity is given at a position that is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image,
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is changed from the display area to non-display gradually (by increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or reducing the area in which the specific image is displayed). You may make it For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second sign effect, “flame” is displayed as the specific image. Display effect by “effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, the display effect by the “water effect” (the effect image imitating the operation means is used as the specific image) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third warning effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will be

  And when performing the precursor effect (at least one of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means with the specific image is obtained. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize. When such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and low expectation. An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. Can be improved. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it can not be held, it is possible to improve the rendering when it is in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 350 is an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with the same contents. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 349 and FIG. 350, an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed will be described. However, this effect example is not the first sign effect but the second sign effect or the third sign effect. It is also possible to apply to omen effects.

  FIG. 349 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 349 (b) shows the effect status in which the first precursor effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a) is being executed.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to non-display after the start of the effect at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (the specific image itself has a higher transmittance). Or the area where the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 350, at time t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is A button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively. FIG. 349 (c)).

  In this presentation example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, the second display mode) , And blue), the ratio at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this respect, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), the “cloud effect” can not be confident that the button image BTG is displayed in either the first display mode or the second display mode. Even though the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is accepted when the operation is performed on the operation button 410, and the effect at the time of operation according to the effect acceptance is performed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a omen effect, the button image BTG has a first display mode and It becomes possible to advance the rendition without being sure of which of the two display modes.

  In addition, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” occurs while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the effect at the time of operation comes to be executed in a form in which the content of the effect is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

  According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden from being displayed (timing t2 to t3) after the button image BTG is displayed. ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the production acceptance period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the occurrence of the effect reception period. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in a rendering situation where the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize before the rendering reception period occurs, a rendering pattern in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor In the case of the effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG may be made to appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that its visibility would be maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 under the influence of the "cloud effect". That is, in this case, it is possible for the player to have a conflict as to whether or not the operation button 410 should be operated without certainty of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period can not be grasped well. It will be able to provide unprecedented new stage effects.

  In addition, in any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, when such a performance is applied, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the sign effect is started. Even if the length of time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clearly displayed after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is not displayed) to the same time. Further, when such a performance is applied to any one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started As for the length of time until the image can be clearly seen (time until the specific image is hidden), a plurality of these are prepared so as to have a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to time.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to necessarily use another image (specific image) as a method of making it hard to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means. For example, the effect image imitating the operation unit itself may appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. It may be made to change gradually towards the display mode (timing t3) which is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, it appears in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or an effect image imitating an operation means may be displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as a precursor effect. It is also good.

  When a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 350 are described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state described later). ) May be executed only when it occurs. That is, at the time when the production of the specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. Since an effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if there is a case in which it is delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player It may be possible that the presentation reception period will end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the player's operation on the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, Even if the player's operation is not accepted for the production, the processing (automatic production function) that causes the same change to the production as when the player's operation is accepted within the production acceptance period can be executed. Yes. According to such an automatic button effect state, a post-operation effect is generated when an operation is performed, without being operated every time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate it. Will be able to. As for the automatic production function, when this function is activated, the same production reception is performed as when the operation was actually performed, so that processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed, or the production reception is generated. The same processing as when there was an acceptance of production may be performed.

  In the embodiment relating to the “automatic effect function” described below, each technique, effect, setting, and the like of the operation relationship described above may be appropriately combined and used, or may be used in place of being replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during a period in which the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. It is made to be able to set to the production state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “automatic button effect state setting” is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or may be operated a plurality of times in combination with an operation with respect to the operation button 410 and an operation with a different operation means.

  On the other hand, while the symbol variation is in the execution state, setting to the automatic button effect state can be made by only one operation of the operation button 410, and such operation is simplified. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred, and if such a person does, the operation button 410 If there is a case where the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game entertainment may be lowered. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation state of the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time (in order to set the automatic button effect state while the symbol variation is in the execution state). In this case, it is required to be operated once in a mode (so-called “long press mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. As a result, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is positively performed regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is entered. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a mistaken setting. It should be noted that it is desirable not to be set to the automatic button effect state even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period has occurred during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is used as a method of canceling the setting. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not yet executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). When "cancel button status of automatic button effect" displayed in the inside is selected, setting of the button status effect of automatic button is canceled.

  On the other hand, while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. By such operation simplification, The setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, unlike when setting to the automatic button effect state, even if the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long press), the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state. The automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that this has been done (just by operating in a single operation mode). That is, since the fact that some operation has been performed on the operation button 410 can be said to be in a situation where a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears, the automatic button effect is produced when the operation is performed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be favorably maintained by canceling the state setting and quickly returning to the normal performance state.

  Note that, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation buttons 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment differs from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 or the like is set) Even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decorative body 5001) is not received during the effect reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is received during the effect reception period. It is possible to execute processing (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the presentation is received. According to such a configuration, a period occurs in which an operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) on whether a period in which the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed to be effectable occurs is performed, the effect result As there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made available as such, it becomes possible to safely enjoy such a specific operation-related effect .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When no operation on the first operation means is performed within the first side effect reception period, an automatic process can be performed which causes the same change as that when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic presentation means),
-The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when an operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process is performed that causes the same change as that when the operation on the second operation means is performed. Possible (second automatic presentation means)
Even if any of the first-side effect reception period and the second-side effect reception period occurs, the first specific effect reception period and the second side effect reception period occur, and the same specific time elapses after the period occurs. Automatic processing by one automatic presentation means or automatic processing by a second automatic presentation means is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the first side production reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. The automatic production function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of any of the second side production acceptance periods set as Because you become, you will be able to enjoy the production with confidence.

  However, when the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect receiving period has occurred, the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed. As is the case, the effect may be developed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, when it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side rendering acceptance period, a timing different from this is assumed. Since the effect is accepted and the effect is automatically generated after the operation, it can be functioned as a surprise effect.

  In addition, when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The ratio at which the effect reception period is generated may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period is increased, so that the frequency of forgetting operation within the production reception period is also increased. Since the post-operation production is executed by the function functioning, the production reception period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the generation ratio of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the generation ratio is different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance conditions are satisfied within the production acceptance period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means),
A process for establishing the condition for receiving the presentation based on the operation performed by the player within the period for receiving the presentation is executable (player operation receiving means),
When the player does not perform an operation within the production reception period, a process for establishing the production reception condition can be executed without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period elapses after the production reception period starts. To do. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself to operate until the automatic performance function is functioned, and the option for causing the reception of the performance by the operation of the player is left. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this case, when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period, an automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed, and a specific time after the first-side effect reception period occurs. When the progress of the presentation within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means may be executed when a time different from the above has elapsed, the “specific time” or the “specific time” Any time different from the above may be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

  Here, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period, A process of generating an effect after the operation according to the effect reception is to be executed. However, in this case, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

  Also, similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period for the operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect acceptance Even when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the period, a process of generating an effect after the operation according to the effect reception and a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are respectively executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, as for “post production after operation according to production reception”, a production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during a period when the automatic button production state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the production reception period. This is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when an operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire (specific effect) to be returned to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end the situation). Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both an operation for terminating a specific rendering state and an operation for accepting an operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period regarding the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period A process that can cause a change in processing for terminating the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) and rendering only by performing the operation on the 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 only once (operating only in a single operation mode) Since (the processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, the desire to make the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) end and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the production state.

  However, regarding the setting change (setting change to the automatic button effect state or cancellation of the automatic button effect state setting) for the automatic button effect state during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting can be changed without the need to operate the sword decoration 5001. That is, the sword decorative body 5001 has a frequency of giving the operation opportunity lower than that of the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that much, the big hit is expected than the operation button 410 The degree will be increased. Therefore, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted for the purpose of only setting change in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to enhance the sense of premium at the time of play and maintain the game interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means (operation buttons other than the sword decorative body 5001) among the plurality of operation means is displayed while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. Setting or canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state can be performed by operating the operation unit 410 or the like or another operation means different from this a plurality of times.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessary, and the automatic button effect state is obtained. The setting can be changed. That is, as described above, when the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For the purpose, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 refers to the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding thereto appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword ornament 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It becomes like this.

  The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes “automatic operation that generates an operation-time effect without operation within the effect reception period” when in an automatic button effect state. In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be the target of the “production function”, the special operation means that are not the target of the “automatic production function that generates the production effect during operation without operation within the production reception period” May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and if an operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, After the operation according to the effect receptionist, the expectation for the big hit will be suggested by the effect. However, even if there is a situation in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted will appear if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if it is an effect different from that when the effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  Moreover, about the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect reception period with respect to the operation button 410 has occurred in the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state Not only when, but the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 (when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the effect reception period during which the expectation degree is suggested, or when the special operation means is operated, the expectation degree is suggested It is desirable not to allow this even when there is an effect reception period, etc.). That is, when the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode) when within the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 In the middle stage of the effect reception period, "the automatic effect function to generate the effect at the time of operation even without operation in the effect reception period" is activated by activating the original effect reception (operating the operation means different from the operation button 410 If the player who is not familiar with such an automatic button effect state occurs, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 may have occurred, or the operation button 410 may have occurred. It may be confusing that there has been an effect reception period for the operation means different from the one described above, and this may reduce the game interest This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the warning effect prior to the generation of the effect reception period, but control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when not being performed, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) May be implemented as a different display mode. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic rendering function is in a rendering state in which the automatic rendering function can function within the specific rendering reception period, and it is possible to enjoy the rendering with confidence.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a specific image (for example, "bar display" indicating the remaining time) suggesting the remaining time in the effect reception period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, at least the specific image (for example, “bar display indicating the remaining time”) is displayed so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed (predictive effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the user gazes at a position where the “specific image suggesting the remaining time” in the non-display state appears from now As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where the specific effect reception period ends without the operation by the player being in time, and further, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, after the operation effect is executed by the automatic effect function functioning, it is expected to preferably maintain the game interest.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination including the following explanation examples are included. Based on the progress of the game or effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation may be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or production, for example, “While being controlled in the normal gaming state, it is controlled as an automatic button presentation state, but the big hit gaming state Control mode such as “Auto button effect state is canceled when transitioned to high probability short-time state” or “Auto button effect state is generated within the symbol variation execution period, and symbol variation in the execution state is completed Control mode such as “Generate an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence” or “Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are performed” It is possible to adopt an aspect such as a control aspect or the like. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 that is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled and the automatic button effect state is not set. Such processing itself will disappear.

  Further, as the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the remaining time of the rendering reception period may be digested, or a predetermined timing after that may be taken, or the remaining time of the rendering reception period is left It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the predetermined timing after the remaining time of the effect reception period is digested, or after that, the post-operation effect is as if the effect reception was made after the effect reception period is over. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions similarly to the case where the operation is actually performed. At the time (specific timing), the effect reception period is ended, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation production will occur even if no operation is performed when the automatic button production state is controlled, the period until the production reception period ends (production reception It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic rendering function function at a specific timing in a period) and to start the post-operation rendering according to this. In other words, in this case, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function despite the arrival of a specific timing within the performance reception period, a post-operation effect is generated by the player operating after the specific timing has arrived. Anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, “If the automatic button effect state is not controlled, it is erroneously controlled. It may be difficult to confirm the presentation after the operation ”or“ The automatic presentation function may not work due to some trouble and the presentation may not be confirmed after the operation ”). You will be able to

  And in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, it has a characteristic technique relevant to such an automatic button production state. In the following, characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use combining suitably.

  In the following description of each characteristic technique, it is assumed that, in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not usually controlled. Even when an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be performed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, If a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. You may According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) (i.e., to improve the effect by permitting the generation of a specific display effect). From the beginning, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, there may be cases where the automatic effect function can not function in another effect reception period set when a specific display effect is not being performed. However, in the specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, it becomes possible to taste the VIP feeling by the fact that the time and effort to operate can be saved by the automatic effect function functioning. Therefore, it is expected to suitably enhance the game interest. In addition, it is not necessary that the automatic rendering function can not always function in all of the other rendering reception periods set when the specific display rendering is not performed, and the automatic rendering is performed in at least some of the rendering reception periods. If the function can not function, the above-mentioned operation and effect when the specific effective period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed (when the effect acceptance period where the automatic effect function always functions) occur It is possible to expect. Also, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if the player does not perform an operation before the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start rendering after operation according to this.

In addition, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
-If the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect will occur at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the first specific effective period has occurred. While the function is activated to end the first specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect according to this,
If a second specific effective period occurs when the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific effective period occurs The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing when elapses to end the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation performance in accordance with this,
-If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) If there is no operation until the end of the same operation, the same effect after the operation as when there is the operation may not be performed. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is generated from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions when the predetermined time has passed, or the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function unless the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above cannot be performed in the first place. Therefore, even when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs. When the above-described automatic rendering function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, for example, when the second predetermined time has elapsed It is possible to make the presentation progress with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic presentation function is functioning or whether the above-described automatic presentation function does not function in the first place. The first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operation state (so-called The effect is accepted after the single-shot operation is performed and the effect is generated after the operation.

  In addition, about the 1st specific display production, the 2nd specific display production, and the 3rd specific display production, when it is controlled to the specific production state (automatic button production state) with being something which can be done There may be. Thus, when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that can not appear when not being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) may be displayed. In such a case, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). In addition, the first specific display effect (the first specific effective period) and the second specific display effect (the second specific effective period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (the third specific effective period) Does not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may be different from each other.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, at which timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function worked (when the effect is accepted, as the effect acceptance period The automatic presentation function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (the area changes in this case) over time) that shows the remaining time of the production reception available period so that it can be recognized. You may make it generate | occur | produce the post-operation production in the state which displayed this instead of making it non-display. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” that is continuously displayed when the automatic performance function functions, the production reception period is set to the first specific effective period ( The period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period has occurred, and the second specific effective period (relative to the generation of the production reception period). It becomes possible to recognize whether the automatic production function is functioning when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation acceptance period occurs) and the second specific effective period ( The degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the occurrence of the automatic production function when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the production reception period has occurred (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be performed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It will function as different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case of functioning, the “bar display” may not be hidden, and the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where it is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. It is also good.

  In addition, when the effect after the operation is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning, the player does not participate in any operation means (for example, the operation button 410) which is the operation object after the operation Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is not possible for the player side to know which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated after-operation effect. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function and generation after the operation is generated, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, the operation to be the operation target) suggesting the operation means to be the operation target within the effect reception period. While displaying the image display imitating means, etc., even if the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is functioning, the post-operation rendering is generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being displayed. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image may not necessarily be the same before and after the generation of the effect after operation. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one of the two has been generated even after the operation has been performed. On the other hand, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be made non-displayed in the state where the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the rendering function functions, the post-operation rendering may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but is displayed. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, such as when the automatic rendering function functions within the above-mentioned first specific effective period, or when the automatic rendering function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, etc. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different big hit expectation degrees, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode Can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect need not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. It may be.

  In addition, when an operation that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is an “operation system effect”, the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, or the like) without an image. However, in this case, when “Operation system effect” is executed but “Other specific effect unrelated to this” is not executed, “Operation system effect” and “ It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “specific production” is in the production situation in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the "operation system effect" is not accepted and the post operation operation is not performed. In addition, since “another specific effect unrelated to this” is in the execution state, the decline in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed, whereas the “operation system effect” is executed, but “another effect not related to this” When there is a production situation where the "specific production" is not being executed, if there is a case where the production reception is not made in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not performed, it will be in a situation where no production is performed. Therefore, the decline of the game interest is inevitable. Therefore, when there is a performance situation in which “operation-related effects” are executed but “other specific effects not related to this” are not executed, “operation-related effects” and “other specific effects not related to this” are specified. By setting the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions to be higher than when the rendering is in parallel, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the operation-based rendering occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, with regard to the prognostic effect that is performed from before that as the effect reception period occurs, and the effect that the operation means to be operated operate, etc., it is executed as “operation-based effect” or the effect related thereto It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. You will be able to In this case, it is desirable to be executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is high, and it is possible to provide the performance in a sense of tension. In this regard, if the “other specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the predicate effect), the “other specific effect” may be repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when “another specific production” is executed is high This makes it possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not the production reception period occurs.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously, Until it reaches the 1000th change in loss), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the production reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the above-described automatic production function is made to function and a case where the above-mentioned automatic production function is not made to function. On the other hand, when there is a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously) In the case of reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation), when the symbol fluctuation (production pattern) reaches the specific value, the operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is operated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the reception period, the above-described automatic performance function is operated and there is an operation by the player within the reception period. A process may be executed to always generate the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time an effect reception period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though there was no operation by the player as if he felt the responsibility so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself must function automatically. Since it is realized as an effect to be played, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss variation is digested sequentially and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss variation), the loss variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, “operating”, etc.) that is different from a display image (for example, “operate”) that has appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 loss fluctuations) It would be desirable to make it appear, such as “If I am troublesome, I will act for you”. In addition, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit gaming state) is satisfied. Within the (effect pattern), an effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the big hit determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is bothersome, I will act on behalf of the user, etc.)), and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned to respond to the effect reception It is desirable to execute a process that always generates an effect after an operation.

  In addition, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the lost fluctuation according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is executed a specific value (for example, 999 times continuous lost fluctuation, It is also possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation).

  In addition, when the lost change according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and until the number of times of execution reaches a specific value, during the symbol change, the first operation Although both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can be generated, in the case of the symbol change when the lost change is sequentially digested and the number of times of execution reaches a specific value Alternatively, only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means may be generated at all times, and the other side may not be generated. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is suitably suppressed that the occurrence of the effect reception period has an expectation for itself. It will be possible. However, in this example of the effect, "Even though the player has been urged to operate the game every time the effect reception period occurs while the lost change is being executed continuously, there are no results. "If there was no operation by the player as if I felt the responsibility in the past, the pachinko machine 1 itself would be realized as an effect that always causes the automatic effect function to function. The second operation means (e.g., the second operation means) is generated by generating an effect reception period for the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) having a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence. It is desirable not to generate an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001).

  Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It can occur both when it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means. The second effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user cannot occur when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when in the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interests of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Display a spear image imitating the operation means (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) (a spear image display means)
-After the production reception period has occurred, if an operation by the player is performed while the spear image is displayed, a post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・ After the production reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any player operation while the spear image is displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( Automatic production acceptance means)
However, the 摸 image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the post-operation effect is executed in the “mode advantageous to the player” when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the expectation can be recognized whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It is possible to generate an effect after the operation while being considered.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, a spear image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the above-described automatic rendering function is functional, it is desirable to generate a post-operation rendering in a state in which the overhead image is not displayed but is displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. The effect after operation may be performed using an area different from at least the area where the overhead image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, or the light emitted by the lamp provided in the game board 5 or the movable decorative body It may be executed as an operation according to.

  In this case, when the overhead view image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the degree of expectation suggested within the performance reception period (overview image even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation) Can be checked.

  The overhead view image thus continued to be displayed is not displayed after the effect is generated after the operation. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when different times have elapsed, the times from when the rendering after operation is performed until the overhead image is hidden may be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic process when the specific time has elapsed or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic process when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is not, it is possible to recognize at which time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect until the haze image is hidden. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, May be different.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Either a mode (for example, a low-expected display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation level or a high-expected display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation level) can appear, and a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if no operation is performed within the period for receiving the production, the production is always accepted (the automatic production function is always functioning), and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when an operation is not performed within the effect reception period, an effect is received (the automatic effect function is functioned), and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. And when Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if forgetting to operate when a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the user forgets to operate it, it is assumed that the game entertainment will not decrease so much, so a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. If forgetting to operate sometimes occurs, by making sure that the automatic production function is functioned within the production reception period, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate, but a low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation) If you forget to operate when an image) appears, play the game so that you do not forget to operate it by not allowing the automatic production function to function during the production reception period. And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) It may not be possible to appear. In addition, any of three or more display modes may appear during the effect reception period.

  And in each characteristic technique explained below, it may be made to apply suitably also about the example concerning these automatic button rendition states, and to carry out.

[Suggested degree of expectation by automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied), It is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the operation was performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when an operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted An effect pattern in which a process (automatic effect function) for generating an effect is not executed can also be generated. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the symbol variation is larger than when the automatic effect function functions. , The process of producing the effect within the symbol variation can be executed so that the expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the expectation degree (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation on the operation button 410 is not intentionally performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). The above-mentioned effects (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 330 to 350) about whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted) occurs. )) Is made executable. In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects are compared to the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the above-described ratio of the automatic effect function is increased when there is no operation (acceptance effect) within the reception period. At this time, the rate at which the automatic performance function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs is also a function that indicates that the above-mentioned automatic effect function is likely to function at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, the operation opportunity is provided to the sword decorative body 5001 in the specific operation related effect rather than the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as the result of the effect. In the case where it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, when there is no operation (effect acceptance) within the effect acceptance period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect, for the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same in the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given with respect to the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001.

  According to such a configuration, an effect situation with a relatively low expectation (implying that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic performance function to function It becomes possible to maintain suitably. In this way, the game entertainment can be enhanced by paralleling two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of an effect whose expectation level is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353.

  FIG. 351 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600 This shows the performance status being performed. As shown in the figure, a display showing that the automatic button effect state is being controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, the “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  FIG. 351 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351 (a) is being executed. As shown in the figure, in the specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, “press The character display such as “” and the bar display showing the remaining time of the specific effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), a specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed as an effect after the operation according to the effect reception. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation and “hot heat!” With a relatively high expectation). Either one will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production state shown in FIG. 351 (b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within a specific production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. Thus, the automatic production function described above does not function, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted for the production within the specific production acceptance period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 351 (d) despite the fact that the operation button 410 has not been operated within the specific rendering acceptance period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within a specific effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area Although one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Or “excessive heat!”, Etc.) is displayed, post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within a specific rendering reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 351 (e), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the above-described automatic production function functions” or “the above-described automatic production function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of jackpot determination when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in the specific effect reception period. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at the ratio of, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the ratio of 40%. For example, when the jackpot is elected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding election, Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" are generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 60% in the specific effect reception period, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the automatic production function described above functions”, The period of occurrence of the jackpot symbol is higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when the symbol variation is stopped than when it is generated as the “Performance reception period during which the automatic production function is not functioning” Are determined (selected) based on the result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received, when an effect reception period in which it is determined that a high-expected aspect (such as “Intense heat!”) Appears as a post-operation effect, the automatic effect function functions. Although the ratio to perform becomes relatively high, when the effect acceptance period where it is determined that the aspect with low expectation (such as “chance!”) Appears as the effect after operation when the effect is accepted occurs, the automatic effect The rate at which functions work is relatively low. Therefore, if an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect reception period By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even if the automatic presentation function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the presentation reception period, the post-operation presentation is expected. Low-level aspects (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, so even if the automatic production function is functioning, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Such stunning expectations (suggestions due to the functioning of the automatic performance function, suggestions based on the mode of post-operation effects) will realize a stunning performance, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming entertainment Expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35C, even when the automatic rendering function does not function when the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect receiving period, the effect receiving is not Since it is possible that the high expectations have appeared in the post-operation presentation that should have appeared, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, when the rendering situation shown in FIG. 351 (c) (the automatic rendering function does not function and the rendering does not appear after the operation) appears, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 351 (d) (the automatic rendering function) However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be lower than when an appearance with a low degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect.

  FIGS. 352 and 353 show that, when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the effect level is suggested by the automatic effect function. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 352 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600 Show the status of the production being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that control is performed in the automatic button effect state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled (here , “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously.

  FIG. 352 (b) shows the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335 (specific operation-related examples illustrated separately from this) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 352 (a) The effect may be the effect status) in which the effect is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation related effects illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. And the common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given . However, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, whether an effect status indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation, The appearance status indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 should be operated appears as the second rendering result with a relatively high degree of expectation, whereby the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the degree of expectation relatively It becomes to be shown which of the tall sword ornaments 5001 the operation opportunity is given to.

  FIG. 352 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 352 (b) being performed. An effect state indicating that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred is shown. In the effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, “press” A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is used as a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance. While the rendering operation is performed, any of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation or “superheat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation) or the like having different degrees of expectation also within the display area It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the production acceptance period (when production acceptance has not occurred), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic performance function is not functioning, and the automatic performance function described above is functioning at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is puzzled as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect reception period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs in the automatic button effect state (see FIG. 352 (c)), an effect that occurs without the specific operation-related effect being executed. The effect within the symbol variation is performed so that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions more frequently when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period as compared to the reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) It is possible to execute a process that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxious feeling such as "the appropriate operation can not be performed within the effect reception period and the effect corresponding to the operation may not appear". It is possible to provide the interest about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic performance function functions.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, “Auto button high accuracy”) indicating that the ratio of functioning of the automatic performance function is high continues. To appear.

  When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 352 (d), it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the effect accepting period, As long as the effect reception has been performed, the effect will not be performed after the operation that should have occurred. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time. However, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the rendering reception period (when the rendering reception does not occur) In the case of the effect shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is effective. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where it is not.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%, the rendering is performed as shown in FIG. 352 (e) even though the operation button 410 is not performed within the rendering reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed during the reception period and the effect was received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area Although one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Or “excessive heat!”, Etc.) is displayed, post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within a specific rendering reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), the rendering progressed in a form in which the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific rendering reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 353 (g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 is to be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). The effect situation which shows that there is appears, and a mode that the effect reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produced is shown. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ The words "Please put the sword" and the bar that shows the remaining time of the specific effect reception period will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in an operation state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410 and moves the sword ornament 5001 from the operation state to the original position. Operation is allowed.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect receiving period shown in FIG. 353 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect receiving period shown in FIG. 352 (c). The same post-operation effect as that performed is executed. However, when an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for an effect within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c). An aspect with a high degree of expectation among a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation, “superheat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation, etc.) The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted during the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and returned to the normal production state, and the specific production reception period also consumes the remaining time. It is the same as the case of the production reception period shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect state shown in FIG. 353 (g) (the effect reception did not occur). In the case), although the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c) occurs, the reception of the production is generated in the production situation shown in FIG. As in the case of not being performed, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a ratio of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a ratio of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation related rendition being performed, the rendition status indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first rendition result having a relatively low degree of expectation (see FIG. 352). Even when (c) appears, the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is not changed by this (the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering), so the above-mentioned automatic rendering With regard to the expectation for the function to function, it will be possible to maintain this favorably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and anticipation with the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by each other's effect results in parallel, and an adverse effect result appears in the effect on one side It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not generated) in the effect situation shown in FIG. In the case of the effect shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is Expectation will be lower than when it works.

  When the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 353 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 has not been received in the production reception period. The effect is not performed after the operation that should have occurred as long as the effect reception has been performed. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. Even in the case where there is not, the above-described automatic performance function is performed when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b) (when production reception does not occur). It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than when it does not function.

  Also, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 353 (i), although the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the rendering reception period, An effect is performed after the operation having the same content as when the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is made. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area When one of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" Or "Intense heat!", Etc.) is displayed, but post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within the rendering reception period The mode displayed in the display area is the same as each other in any case where the effect after the operation is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (j), the rendering progress is performed in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the rendering reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related rendering occurs.

  It should be noted that an effect reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ As in the case of an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed, whether or not it is generated as “the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function is not functioning” At the time of execution, the decision is made (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic performance function is allowed to function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a rate of 80%. For example, when the jackpot is elected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding election, Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" are generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related production, and 80% The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a ratio of

  Also in the same manner, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) is also generated as a “effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions”. If it happens, the percentage of the jackpot symbol appearing will be higher when the symbol variation is stopped than if it is generated as “a production acceptance period where the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function”. It is determined based on the result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment (selection) which of these periods it should occur as.

  The post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) and the specific operation-related effect is not performed. It may be executed as an effect different in the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)). However, even if it is executed as a different effect, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, the sword decorative body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be the sword decorative body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 352 and 353, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 332 to 335 will be described. The “effect using the function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 330 to 350.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted, the “setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted” state before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that it is generated at least when it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (b) (the production situation in which a specific operation-related production is started), and this is continued over the production reception period. According to such a configuration, since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is confirmed after confirming that the specific operation-related effect is started, the automatic button effect state is not accepted. It is now possible to provide “directing using the automatic directing function” for only those who are continuously playing games while maintaining the state of the game. It will be able to provide dramatic value for doing.

  Further, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )) In the first display mode (for example, the blue button image BTG or the blue sword decoration image SYG) or the second display mode (for example, the green button image BTG or the green sword decoration). The image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “production reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function functions” is generated compared to when the first display mode appears It is desirable that a certain ratio be higher.

  Further, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. ), The third display mode (for example, the red button image BTG or the red sword decoration image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, It may be made to be in the state where the effect reception period in which the function functions is always generated.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, "if the effect reception (operation to the operation button 410) is performed within the effect reception period, the effect after the operation which should have been confirmed can not be confirmed either. To provide a source of judgment as to whether or not to use a dramatic selection such as “does not intentionally operate the operation button 410 within the effect reception period” while there is a risk that a dramatic demerit such as may occur. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 330 to 350, 352, and 353. Is preferably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect receiving period (such as FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is puzzled as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect reception period. A situation may occur where it becomes impossible to perform the operation, but by giving a long time to the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation related rendering”, it is possible to suppress such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

  In particular, in the example of FIG. 352 and FIG. 353, in view of the fact that the ratio at which the automatic rendering function functions is set to be relatively high in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation related effect”. For example, whether the automatic rendering function functions by setting the rendering reception period to have a time longer than the rendering reception period that occurs without the “specific operation related rendering” being performed It can be said that it is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game by maintaining the performance of the game for a longer time. In this case, with regard to the timing at which the automatic rendering function functions, in the effect reception period which occurs without the “specific operation related rendering” being performed, the timing arrives when the first time has elapsed after the period occurs. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the automatic effect function is to be reached when the second time longer than the first time has passed since the period has occurred. It is important to maintain the performance of whether or not the function is longer.

  In addition, the period from the start to the end of the period for the stage reception period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related stage" and the stage for reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related stage" Even if it is made to differ, about the bar display which shows the remaining time of a production reception period, this is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is decreased. It is desirable to only vary the speed. That is, in this case, even if the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production” occurs, the duration continues for the same time as the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. As a result, it is possible to make it seem like it is, and coupled with the “fuzziness” of being continued for a longer period of time than expected, it is possible to maintain a stunning performance as to whether or not the automatic performance function works. Will be able to

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) Even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily required. Although it is not necessarily performed, in the effect reception period which occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific display effect (specific operation related effect) is performed, the specific display effect is generated without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first effect reception period than the effect reception period 1 (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this respect, as such an automatic button effect state, the ratio ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") at which the automatic effect function functions depends on the type of the effect reception period as described above When the automatic button effect state to be set is set as the “first automatic button effect state”, the proportion at which the automatic effect function functions is different according to the type of the effect reception period (“50% −50%”, “10 "%-90%") is set to be different regardless of the "second automatic button effect state", and when the effect reception period occurs, regardless of the type as that period to set the automatic effect function to always function The third automatic button effect state to be played may be further prepared, and it may be possible to set any of the effect states including the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. Moreover, the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, but always played in the automatic button effect state (the first automatic button effect state, the second automatic button effect state, the third automatic button effect state) Or production may be executed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 351 to FIG. 353 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first effect acceptance period (first The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing within the production reception period) to end the first production reception period and generate a post-operation production corresponding thereto. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the first production reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first production reception period occurred (the first production time) The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing of the first production reception period), and thereafter the first production reception period is terminated without performing the post-operation production (after that, the post-operation production is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions in the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period. The production reception period is ended and a post-operation production corresponding to the production reception period is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic performance function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third performance reception period, and then the second performance reception period or the third time without performing the post-operation performance. The effect reception period of is ended (even after that, the effect is not executed after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function can function at a relatively early stage in the first production reception period where the ratio of the automatic production function to function is low. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time to allow the player to receive the production by his own operation until the end of the first production reception period. You can play games with heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the higher side where the automatic production function functions, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage. Providing a game with a sense of tension even though the proportion of the automatic production function is high, because there will be little time left for the player to operate when it does not function Will be able to.

  In addition, about the said modification, in the 1st production reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic production | generation function functions at the timing (timing in the 1st production reception period) when 1st predetermined time passed, and when it does not function However, in the second presentation reception period and the third presentation reception period, the automatic presentation function described above always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second presentation reception period). You may do so. Even in such a configuration, if the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function does not function by any chance (for some trouble), the time for the player to operate it Since it is considered that the player has a delusion that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  Further, in addition to the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other effect examples, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting to the automatic button effect state itself may not be performed, and the automatic effect function may be always provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined ratio.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (The automatic button effect state is to be terminated Desire) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period regarding the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception is received A process to end the automatic button effect state and an operation according to the effect reception only by performing the operation on the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) to which the operation opportunity is to be given within the period. Production (processing that can cause a change in production) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button production state). As a result, even if a desire to cause the automatic button effect state to end and cause the effect to be developed depending on the player's own operation is generated within the effect reception period, the loss of the operation opportunity is avoided to switch the effect mode. Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, only the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to be set. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. An operation for canceling the setting is permitted only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state in which the production reception period is occurring, when an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) to which an operation opportunity is given during the production reception period. Then, a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process that can cause a change in the effect) in accordance with the effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state where an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation is not received, and the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, among the players, we play a game by our unique gaming method, such as "advance operation is performed only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without generating the switching of the effect mode)". It can be envisaged that some people wish to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (or the sword decorative body 5001) within the effect reception period regarding the specific effect when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect Although processing for ending the state (specific rendering state) and processing for causing a change in the rendering are performed respectively (operation unification control in the automatic button rendering state), control to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) is performed When the operation for the special operation means is performed within the period for accepting the performance related to the specific performance, Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated during the effect reception period. If you want to perform rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the special operation means should be operated during the effect acceptance period. Thus, it is possible to realize a game desired by the player simply by properly using the operation means.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control when in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 354 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 1, and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. In the effect situation being performed, it is shown that the effect reception period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is being formed. As shown in the figure, a display showing that the automatic button effect state is being controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, the “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  Further, as shown in the figure, during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, Arrow display in the direction and a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change has occurred is also permitted.

  In FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d), although the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the effect reception period It shows a state in which the post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was accepted is executed. In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, and an operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and a special operation means (denoted as "PUSH" in the figure). Button) 1410 will be lost.

  That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any production results in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 354 (c) and 354 (d)) with different expectations are obtained. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of symbol variation (determined based on the result of jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. 354 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion) To display the smoke image. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 354 (c), the specific production image shown in FIG. 354 (b) (here, explosion) As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 354 (d), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b) gradually disappears. In the course of the game, an effect image (here, a fortune of "Nakakichi") is suggested to indicate that the effect is a result with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  Then, the flow of effects shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (d) appears as basic effect development when the effect reception period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function After the post-operation effect (FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being ended unless the player performs an operation. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state There may be a desire to end it. Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the game interest may decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position, a process for terminating the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in the button presentation state). It should be noted that at the time when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. The operation opportunity for the button 1410 (“PUSH” in the drawing) is also lost.

  When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 355 (e), the operation is performed in the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed. First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact. After that, when the rendering is progressed to a rendering result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 355 (f), a specific rendering image (here, an explosion shown in FIG. 355 (e) While the smoke image by) gradually disappears, it will be displayed an effect image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the effect is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the stage is advanced to a high stage rendering result, as shown in FIG. 355 (g), the specific stage image (here, the smoke image by explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e) gradually disappears In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed.

  However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of terminating the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355 (e) to 355 (g), after the operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this example, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggested display (here, “auto button release”) is made to appear (see FIG. 355 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emission state but also special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) in which no change has occurred is described. The operation on the button 1410 is also allowed. And this special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 “operates itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode to be switched). It is mentioned above that it is prepared in order to make possible our own game technique such as “progress the production”.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356 (h), the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a). In addition, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) comes to be displayed as a post-operation effect according to the operation being performed within the effect receiving period and the effect receiving being performed. After that, when the rendering is progressed to a rendering result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), the specific rendering image (here, the explosion shown in FIG. 356 (h) As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the stage is advanced to a high stage rendering result, as shown in FIG. 356 (j), the specific stage image (here, the smoke image by the explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h) gradually disappears In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is accepted, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, and the above-mentioned automatic effect is As the function becomes inoperable, the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is also lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the automatic button effect state based on the operation The process of ending is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356 (h) to 356 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for rendering, it is indicated that the automatic button rendering state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this case, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. When the operation is performed, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions (FIG. 354 (b)), or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355 (e)) The production can appear. Such special effects may be effects using a movable body, a lamp, etc. However, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 356 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned in the effect display device 1600 In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 354 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355 (e)), a sparkling effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to Instead of the glitter and sparkling effect display, effects using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period regarding the fortune effect when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the change contents of the effect to be generated When an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, an operation is performed on special operation means (button labeled “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 during the effect reception period related to the fortune effect. It will be made to differ mutually from the change content of the rendition to be produced in case. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) appears, “the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It can be recognized while enjoying the post-operation effect that “the setting is not canceled and this is continued”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), even in the case of displaying a rendering image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the rendering result is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation, A production (here, a sparkling effect display) can appear.

  In addition, such special effects (here, glittering effect display) are made to appear additionally to the above-described post-operation effects at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit judgment, and the special When a rendition is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the proportion of the jackpot symbol appearing in the symbol fluctuation is higher than when the special rendition does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to operate not the operation button 410 but the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. There is a concern that the operation against Therefore, when the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the special effect (here, sparkling) If the effect display does not appear, any effect results appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a) or by the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation is lower than in the case where it occurs.

  According to such a configuration, “the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button indicated as“ PUSH ”in the drawing)” 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued ”, there is a dramatic demerit such as“ it may be suggested that the rate of jackpot symbols appearing significantly due to symbol variation ” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained by causing the player to exercise such a stunning selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), the above-described dramatic disadvantages are generated even though the same production mode as in the example shown in FIG. 355 (f) appears. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the degree of expectation is low, the production mode is shown in FIG. 354 (c) and FIG. 355 (f). By making it the same as the case, the third party who is not operating the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection has failed. Is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, no matter which effect selection is made within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), FIG. 354 (b) and FIG. e) As shown in FIG. 356 (h) and the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. It may be made to be displayed in either of two or more modes from which the rate in which the appearance mode (here, the fortune of “Nakakichi”) appears with a high degree of expectation, or the rate in which the special effect appears is different.

  In addition, even if any production selection is performed within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and production modes with different expectations. Here, either of “Okichi” or “Nakakichi” fortunes may be made to appear directly as an effect after operation. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 356 (i)) in which the production selection has failed appears, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when making "Okuji" or "Nakakichi" (Omokuji) appear as effects after operation.

  In addition, it is made possible that the effect that the expectation degree is suggested can be performed even within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), and by this, it can be used for the judgment as to whether or not to take the above-mentioned effect risk. May be.

  In addition, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, other operating means already prepared may be used.

  In addition, in the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), is a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be production reception occurs? Or, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) is executed as to whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted is generated. It may also occur as a result.

  In addition, during the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity for special operation means (a button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is also given. Even if a reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity for the special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect described above (FIGS. 330 to 350) than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate of occurrence of symbol variation is high before symbol variation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears depends on which of the first effect receiving period and the second effect receiving period is occurring. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Stable side automatic rendering process]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. It is possible to generate an effect reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, and any operation means is operated within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, for which of the plurality of operation means the automatic rendering function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change as when the rendering was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means are permitted to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" If there is a production reception period of the "is there a possibility that the higher expected results will appear" rather than "the lower expected results may appear" Processing that enables the automatic rendering function for the operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate the effect that the appearance result with lower expectation may appear" on the basis of (the stable side automatic effect Process).

  According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not appear when the automatic production function is activated, the occurrence of a situation such as “the production mode with the lowest expectation appears by the automatic production function when you forget to operate” It can be preferably avoided.

  Hereinafter, the stable automatic production process in the automatic button production state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

  First, an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs while the automatic button effect state is not controlled but in the normal effect state will be described. In FIG. 357 (a), in the normal performance state, the number of holds is 3 and the variation display of the decoration symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 under the reach state being formed. It shows an effect situation in which an effect indication that suggests that a special effect acceptance period starts is shown. In this production situation, although both the production reception for the operation button 410 and the production reception for the sword decorative body 5001 are not yet effective, the operation button 410 and the sword have been used since that situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the extracted position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorative body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed.

  FIG. 357 (b) shows that the player receives either a special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 357 (a) (press operation of the operation button 410 or sword operation of the sword ornament 5001). The production situation in which the production reception period (which can be selected by the user) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. While the state of 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG is displayed). Corresponding downward arrows, which are displayed respectively, and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period, etc., appear.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 357 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means can receive effects.

  That is, in this example of the effect, when the effect for the operation button 410 is received within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b), the effect for the operation button 410 is received first as the effect after the button side operation. After being displayed (Fig. 357 (c)), "50 bodies are destroyed" as a rendition result which suggests that the degree of expectation is lower as the number of defeats is smaller and the degree of expectation is higher as the number of defeats is larger. And the effect (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e)) for causing any one of “100 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the effect after button-side operation when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and in FIG. 357 (e) at a rate of “60%”. The effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a rate of "60%" and the rate of "40%" appears in the effect after button side operation in a case where the shown effect mode appears and is dropped to the big hit Thus, it is possible to cause the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) to appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 within a special effect reception period, first, it is displayed that an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 as an effect after the sword side operation ( FIG. 358 (f)), “1 body defeated”, “100 body defeated”, “100 body defeated” and “ An effect (FIG. 358 (g) to FIG. 358 (i)) is made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination of any of 777 body destruction. For example, in the post-sword side operation when winning a jackpot, the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and the rate of “50%” is shown in FIG. 358 (h). The production mode shown in the figure appears, and the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”. In the production after the sword side operation when the player is defeated in the jackpot, the rate of “40%” 358 (g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 358 (h) appears at the rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 358 (i) at the rate of “0%”. It is possible for an aspect to appear.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect mode with a small number of defeats regardless of which of the effect after button-side operation and the effect after sword-side operation appears as a result The degree of expectation is lower than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Also, in the case of the same effect mode (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), the effect mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) described later) Although the degree of expectation may be different, it is desirable to make it the same.

  In such a configuration, a special production reception period allowing the production reception is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special production reception period is generated. Because it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the production reception period of As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In particular, the same expectation is not shown regardless of which one of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means) is operated, but the sword ornament 5001 (first Only when the operation means 2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 358 (g) shown in FIG. 358 (g)) suggests that it is difficult for the jackpot symbol to appear due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state). "I want to see the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (effect after the sword operation) until such a risk is taken. It will be expected to maintain the game interest by giving conflict and stimulation about the game.

  And in this case, after the button side operation production is selected from among the effect modes among the effect modes that appear when any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated within the special effect reception period. In this case, it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect in the sense that the appearance risk of “the effect mode of“ 1 body defeat ”shown in FIG. 358 (g)” is excluded. In addition, the effect after sword side operation is “a specific effect mode (here, the lowest degree of expectation) among the effect modes that appears when any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense of having the appearance risk of “the rendering mode of“ one-body defeat ”)” shown in FIG. 358 (g), it functions as a post-operation presentation that relatively includes disturbance.

  Furthermore, in this production example, during the period from when the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (a) appears until the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (b) appears (in this case, during the special production reception period) The production mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination. When the production mode appears, the production mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation level (here, a production mode of“ one body destruction ”shown in FIG. 358 (g))” is low. The production progress can be executed in this way. This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, up to the risk that the “specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the presentation mode of“ one-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 358 (g))” may occur, As a judgment material as to whether or not to operate the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the rendering result as to whether or not the rendering mode shown in FIG. 357 (a-b) has appeared. 357 (b) is expected to suitably improve the game entertainment when the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs.

  In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs but no production production is received within the special production reception period, the automatic production described above is performed. The function does not function, and the effect is advanced without any of the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation being performed.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 359 (a) to 359 (e) show examples of effects when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (a), FIG. 359 (ab), and FIG. 359 (b), even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. An effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started appears, except that a display indicating this (in this case, “auto button is being set”) appears continuously in the effect display device 1600. Until the end of the special performance reception period until the end of the special performance reception period (FIGS. 357 (a), 357 (ab), and 357 (b)). Progress.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), “the effect result with lower expectation (here, the figure) 358 (g) is activated for the operation button 410 that is different from the sword ornament 5001 on the side that can produce an effect that may cause the appearance of “one body defeat” shown in 358 (g). It is possible to execute a process (stable side automatic rendering process) to be performed.

  That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b). Thus, the same change as that in the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the special effect reception period is caused to the effect. Accordingly, as the post-button side operation, first, it is displayed that the operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 359 (c)), and the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, an effect of causing either “50 defeats” or “100 defeats” based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 359 (d) and 359 (e)) ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the lowest degree of expectation is among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the effect is accepted for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 within the special effect acceptance period. The effect mode (in this case, the effect mode of “1 body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (g)) can not appear when the automatic effect function is functional, “when there is a failure to operate it It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as that the presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears by the automatic presentation function.

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic rendering function, there is a concern that the player will not operate any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button rendering state. However, as described above, in the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 359 (ab) can appear based on the result of the big hit determination, and when the effect mode appears , The sword-side post-operation effect while the ratio of occurrence of the “low-expected specific effect mode (here, the“ 1 body defeat ”effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (g)”) is low. Since an opportunity to enjoy the game is given, it is expected that the sword decorative body 5001 is preferably urged to be operated.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 357 to FIG. 359, a special period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for production and a period for which an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is produced is simultaneously generated and terminated simultaneously. Although control is performed as the effect reception period, those periods may not necessarily be generated simultaneously. For example, if the period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for production and the period during which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted for production are overlapped in some of those periods, the periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects depend on which operation means is operated. The above special presentation acceptance period may be generated without fail. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern, “Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and also a special effect reception period occurs. You should be able to come up with a stunning strategy that presupposes that a special production reception period will occur, such as `` Do you need to set the automatic button production state before you do? '' . For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice effect was performed in what kind of effect (expected degree)" before the special effect acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a judgment material for “which of a plurality of operation means should be operated within the special production reception period”, and the game until the special production reception period occurs This also makes it possible to maintain this favorably.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period, or when there is an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, furthermore, an automatic effect function As to which presentation mode is to appear when the character functions, it is determined by drawing (judgment) based on the result of the big hit judgment at the start of the symbol variation or the occurrence of the presentation reception (or the function of the automatic presentation function). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even if there is a production situation in which a special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001. When there is an effect state in which an effect display (FIGS. 357 (a) and 359 (a)) suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started, the setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to occur. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that “a special production reception period in which the player side can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started. Even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button effect state It is now possible to provide “stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state” only for those who are in the state, and the production for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state To provide valuable value.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 358 (g)” that can appear when the post-sword side operation is performed is displayed on the button side operation. Although it was decided to execute as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production is performed, for the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation”, the post-button-side operation production is It may be executed in the same manner as the performance mode that can appear when it is performed (for example, “50 body defeat” shown in FIG. 357 (d)). Even if “the specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears as a result of the action, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the post-button operation is performed appears for the purpose of viewing. Operation buttons It becomes difficult for a third party who does not know which of 410 and sword decorative body 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is a remarkably low performance situation. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect state such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” appears. Nevertheless, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state depends on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or by the operation on the sword decoration 5001. Because the degree of expectation that the big hit design appears in) becomes different, it has more interesting as a rendition using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, this is the case where the “specific effect mode having the lowest expectation” in the post-sword operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear even when the post-button operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “highest expectation special effect mode” in the post-sword operation, a unique effect mode (for example, different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-button operation is performed) (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (i)) It is desirable to execute this.With such a configuration, “the specific performance mode with the lowest expectation” is the post-sword side operation. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that the third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 has been operated is in a production situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. And, when the "most special presentation mode with the highest degree of expectation" appears in the post-sword operation, even if it is a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that there is a production situation where the degree of expectation is extremely high, so the player can take the above risks without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the sword side operation). It may be any as long as it can be recognized, and for example, uniqueness between other presentation modes may be ensured by executing movable body operation and lamp light emission.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 357 to FIG. 359, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” as a result of performing effects after the sword side operation (FIG. 358 (f) to FIG. 358 (i)) (FIG. i) is made to appear, and when the effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) of the "777 body destruction" appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 357 (d), 357 (e) The ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than when the symbols 358 (g) and 358 (h) appear. This percentage may be 100%. However, the effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) of the "777 body destruction" may not necessarily be made to appear. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) is not shown. The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g) It becomes.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the post-button operation effect (FIGS. 357 (c) to 357 (e)) and the post-sword operation effect (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)). ), A common performance mode (here, a “100 body defeat” performance mode) can appear, but a common performance mode should not appear. It is also good. In addition, only the display change appears in the post-button-side operation, whereas in the post-sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, a movable body operation, lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. Further, the post-button-side operation and the sword-side post-operation may not be common as the content of the effect regarding the number of defeats, and the content itself may be executed as different effects.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 357 to FIG. 359, when the effect reception is generated, including when the effect is accepted by the function of the automatic effect function, first, to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 Although it is assumed here that the display (FIG. 357 (c), FIG. 358 (f), FIG. 359 (c)) is suggested to indicate whether the effect has been accepted, the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 357 to FIG. 359, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” as a result of performing effects after the sword side operation (FIG. 358 (f) to FIG. 358 (i)) (FIG. When i)) appears, it is related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIGS. 357 (d), 357 (e), 358 (g), 358 (h)) appears The rate at which the production (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears before the symbol variation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related production appears, the operation means (the sword decoration body) on the higher expectation It is desirable to increase the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to favorably perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the production risk is high.

[Production reception process according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the first display effect is displayed And processing for generating a first expected effect (effect after operation indicating an expected degree) based on the effect received by the operation, and · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · processing processing to generate the first expected effect The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the middle of the second display effect being displayed, the above-described second display effect is received based on the effect received by the operation. It is possible to execute processing related to a plurality of different operation effects, such as processing to generate a second expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) different from the one expected effect There is.

  In such a configuration, the type of effect as an expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs according to the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed within the effect reception period. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the game entertainment at the time of operation, but also to increase the game entertainment from the generation reception period to the operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When an effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed, or an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed within an effect acceptance period in which an effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, the effect acceptance is performed. Processing for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period Is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect of displaying the first display effect appears in the effect reception period. Whether or not the first display effect is executed, and the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed in the effect reception period appears, whether or not the operation button 410 is operated Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect reception period, the operator is worried about forgetting to operate Will be able to enjoy the production without

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first display effect can not be displayed only when an effect reception period for generating an effect after operation occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. And
· A production situation in which a production reception period that is controlled to an automatic button production state (a specific production state) and allows production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has occurred and the first display production is displayed When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in, a process of generating a first expected effect (effect after operation) and a process of ending an automatic button effect state are performed respectively (an effect shown in FIG. 360 described later See progress),
· A production situation in which a production reception period that is controlled to an automatic button production state (a specific production state) and allows production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 is occurring and the second display production is displayed If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in, processing for generating a second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but processing for ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 361 described later) See the development progress),
· An effect that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and does not generate an effect reception period allowing effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 and that a second display effect is displayed When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the situation, neither the process for generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process for generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. Also, the process of ending the rendering state is not performed (see the rendering progress shown in FIG. 362 described later),
・ No effect reception period which is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect Processing for generating a first expected rendering (post-operation rendering) and processing for generating a second expected rendering (post-operation rendering) when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a rendering situation in which none of them is displayed None of the above is performed, and each processing such that processing for terminating the automatic button rendering state may be performed is executed according to the respective rendering status (representation receiving processing according to display type).

  According to such a configuration, the first display effect appears when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear. In the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed when the second display effect is not present and the second display effect appears, the type (the first after the operation effect) according to the operation (the effect reception) The expectation presentation (the second expected presentation) is different from the first, and the expected presentation (post-operation presentation) itself does not appear even if the second display effect appears and it operates only There is a possibility that the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type when in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364.

  FIG. 360 shows the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period while the automatic button effect state is controlled. The example of an effect when the 1st effect pattern which can be set as "the effect reception period which accepts" is performed is shown.

  In the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. The button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears (First display effect).

  Then, if an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted at the timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (c), the symbol fluctuation (in the execution state) is performed based on the presentation reception A first post-operation effect (in the figure, “Nakakichi” fortune) is executed (first expected effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear in the symbol variation). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 also has the effect reception without digesting the remaining time. It will end at the time. Therefore, at timing tb12 at which the effect was received, a display showing that "the automatic button effect state is being controlled" (here, "the automatic button is being set") appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 so far ) "Is also hidden.

  In this case, however, the first post-operation effect (the first post-operation effect generated by the effect reception) is generated at the timing tb13 as shown in FIG. 360 (d), regardless of which effect is received during the period of the timing tb11 to tb13. The first expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the midst of execution so that the game entertainment is suitably maintained over the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to do.

  In FIG. 361, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, a period (see FIG. 361 (a)) of timing tb21 to tb23 of the execution period of the symbol variation is “received effect for operation button 410 (operation) The example of a presentation when the 2nd presentation pattern which can be set up as a presentation acceptance period which permits is shown is shown.

  In the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. , "Ghost OBK with a present box" to appear (second display effect).

  Here, when “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect that indicates the degree of expectation is necessarily generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (an arrow display in the downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 361, the ghost OBK having a present box can be displayed within the period of timing tb21 to tb23, and the period before the timing tb23 is displayed in the period during which the ghost OBK is displayed. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 at the timing tb22, this is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 361 (c), the jackpot symbol is changed by the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the running state) based on the effect acceptance. A second post-operation effect (character display of “hot heat” in the figure) suggesting the expected degree of appearance is executed (second expected effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period occurring from the timing tb21 is ended at the time when the effect reception is received without the remaining time being consumed, but the automatic button effect state is not set without being canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at timing tb22, the "display showing that the automatic button effect state is controlled (in this case," auto button setting in progress ") appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 also continues its display. It will be done.

  It should be noted that, regardless of which presentation is received during the period from timing tb21 to tb23, at timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 361 (d), the second post-operation presentation (second) generated by the reception of presentation. In order to maintain the game entertainment favorably over the period from timing tb21 to tb23, regardless of the timing at which the presentation is received, it is assumed that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution. Is desirable.

  FIG. 362 is for controlling the automatic button effect state to generate the second post-operation effect in the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362 (a)) in the symbol change execution period. The example of an effect when the 3rd effect pattern which displays "a ghost OBK with a present box" is performed, although the production reception period of no.

  In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb 31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362 (b), in the effect display device 1600, a ghost OBK with a present box is made to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, in the effect situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the effect after operation is suggested that the degree of expectation is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated. Since generation is not necessarily limited, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (arrow display in the downward direction or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 362, the ghosted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 362 (a), the ghost OBK is displayed In the relevant period, the "effect reception period for accepting the effect reception (operation) on the operation button 410" is not generated. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361 (a) and (c), even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed, after the operation according to the operation The effect (effect after the first operation, effect after the second operation) will not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box will be displayed over the period of the timing tb31 to tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred. In this case, basically, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (setting release) is performed, but even if the effect reception period regarding the effect after operation is not generated, it is shown in FIG. 362 When the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (the production situation where the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed), the process of generating the post-operation production and the automatic button production state It is assumed that the effect is advanced so that none of the processing to be terminated is performed.

Therefore, when the mode shown in FIG. 362 (b) (the ghost OBK with a present box) which is the same mode as FIG. 361 (b) is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 361 (c) Even if the operation button 410 has been operated in anticipation of the occurrence of the second effect (the second expected effect), although the effect change does not occur, the automatic button effect state is not canceled without being set. This can be continued. In this case, as a method not to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even in the state where the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred, only detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled, and this is not performed when the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred If there is a detection, it is judged whether or not the timing at which the detection has been made is "within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33 at which the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed", and "the present box is held When it is within the period of time tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK is displayed, the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed is displayed. If it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23, a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed. Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
-A method of detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated within the period from the timing tb21 to tb23 when a ghost OBK with a present box is displayed, and the like is adopted. Is possible, and any implementation method may be used.

  FIG. 363 shows that the period for timing tb11 to tb13 (refer to FIG. 363 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is “controlled for the operation button 410 (operation)” while the automatic button effect state is being controlled. Although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as “allowed effect receiving period” is executed, an example of effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception acceptance period for permitting the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410” is generated, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Display) appears (first display effect).

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 363, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12 ′ before the timing tb13 arrives, the automatic effect function described above Is made to function so that the same change as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (c), at the timing tb12 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the running state) based on the function of the automatic effect described above. A first post-operation effect ("Okyoshi" fortune in the drawing) to be suggested is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, continues. It will be displayed.

  In addition, even when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing tb12 ', the first after-operation rendering (the first operation generated by the above-mentioned automatic rendering function) is performed at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 363 (d). It is desirable that the expectation effect (a) is not finished yet, and is in the process of execution, in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment over the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  FIG. 364 shows that the period for timing tb21 to tb23 (refer to FIG. 364 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is “controlled for effect (operation) for the operation button 410 while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as “acceptable effect receiving period” is executed, an example of effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23.

  As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb 21 for generating the “effect reception acceptance period for permitting the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” is generated, as shown in FIG. 364 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, “a ghost OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when the “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display (an arrow display in the downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) appears. There is no.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 364, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22 ′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function Thus, the same change as that when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364 (c), at the timing tb22 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the automatic effect described above. A suggested second post-operation effect (character display of “hot heat” in the drawing) is executed (second expected effect). However, in this case as well, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is continued. Will be displayed.

  In addition, even when the above-described automatic rendering function functions at the timing tb22 ′, the second after-operation rendering (the second operation generated by the above-described automatic rendering function) is performed at the timing tb23 as illustrated in FIG. 364 (d). It is desirable that the expectation effect (a) is not finished yet, and is in the process of execution, in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment over the period of the timing tb21 to tb23.

  By the way, although illustration is omitted, although the above-mentioned third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is executed within the period of the timings tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, since the production reception period for generating the second post-operation production does not occur in the first place, the automatic production function described above cannot function, and the automatic button production state is also canceled. Needless to say, it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 364, effects that are developed with different contents are executed by the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIG. 361 and FIG. 362 Type as a post-operation effect when the operation is performed according to which of the first display effect and the second display effect is displayed according to whether the operation button 410 is performed (first In addition to being expected to be different from the second expected presentation), the expected presentation (post-operation presentation) itself may not appear even if the second display effect is being operated There is a possibility that the processing to end the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  In addition, about a 1st display effect, there exists a some effect aspect from which a degree of expectation differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second display effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect be executed as display contents having contents having nothing to do with each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the button image BTG and the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, a button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (haunted with a present box) not displayed when the first display effect is performed is displayed. It has become.

  Moreover, about the 1st expectation effect, there exist a some effect aspect from which an expectation degree differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected production, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected production, and the expectation degree due to the character display Is suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as an effect by a movable effect or a lamp display, the contents may not be related to each other.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 364, when the second display effect is appearing as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, “the effect for the operation button 410 A second effect pattern and a second display effect appear in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that the effect acceptance period for accepting acceptance (operation) occurs. When there is a third effect pattern that is determined beforehand (for example, by the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that “the effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” does not occur It was decided to prepare. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that “the effect receiving period for accepting the effect receiving (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” occurs when the second display effect appears. A determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to generate a second expected effect based on the fact that the effect acceptance has been made within the “effect acceptance period for accepting the effect acceptance (operation) with respect to the operation button 410”. The second expected effect is generated when a specific result is obtained in the determination, and the second expected effect is not generated when a specific result is not obtained in the determination, as shown in FIG. 360. The effect example shown in FIG. 364 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, "the effect reception period for accepting the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. The above-described third performance pattern may be further prepared in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of symbol variation).

  When the second expected effect occurs as a result of the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. As a result of the presentation acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) may be higher than when the first expected rendering occurs. desirable.

  Moreover, when the second display effect is performed, the above-described specific operation related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is performed until the symbol variation is stopped more than when the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing during the period higher. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) being performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for the related rendering (see FIGS. 330 to 350) to be performed, and it becomes possible to preferably suppress the game entertainment.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed, the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b), FIG. 362) The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function at any time when (b) is displayed. However, when the second display effect (see FIG. 361 (b) and FIG. 362 (b)) is not necessarily displayed, even if the operation is performed, the second expected effect does not necessarily occur. When the rendering function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIG. 361 (b) and FIG. 362 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic rendering function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b), FIG. 362 (b) When the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function when the reference is displayed, and even if the second display effect is displayed, it is not understood that the second expected effect will occur, but at least the operation has to be performed. For example, the second expected effect may not be generated.

  Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when displaying the haunted OBK, a “demonstration reception period allowing the reception of an effect (operation) on the operation means” is generated while the haunted OBK is displayed. You may do so. In addition, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 364, when displaying the ghost OBK, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect acceptance period for accepting the effect acceptance (operation) with respect to the operation means”. Even when the operation is performed, the ghosted OBK may not be displayed, and the effect that the ghosted OBK is displayed may be continued also at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto-strike function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the user is requested to perform a plurality of operations (such as pressing the operation button 410 continuously) to a predetermined operation means, and the effect reception is generated each time there is an operation. There is something I can do. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes a problem how to make the above-described automatic effect function function when a specific effect acceptance period in which such an operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Even if the predetermined operation means is maintained in the operation state for a relatively long time without performing the operation multiple times, an effect when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is performed by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long operation mode. When the operation state is maintained, a presentation is accepted every time a predetermined time elapses, and a post-operation presentation corresponding to these is generated multiple times. It is set to be executed.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated during the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. As in the case where the multi-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is activated, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has an automatic continuous hitting function activated when an operation by so-called long press is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. When the automatic button effect state is controlled at least, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the operation by the long press is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is functioned when the specific effect reception period requiring multiple operation reception occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period The player is not dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of the character and can enjoy the effects.

  FIG. 365 (a) is an operation opportunity of “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit etc.) operation to the operation button 410 in the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a specific effect reception period to which “is applied” is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed multiple times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained only for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. The example of the production when performed over is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in this effect example, each time the operation button 410 is operated in the single operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Whenever it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (in this case, rising detection is performed), an effect is received according to the operation, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the reception. . Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), the specific time from the start of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception to the end thereof. There may be a new production reception (operation detection). In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed when the effect is received is interrupted, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. Thus, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operational feeling (effect responsiveness) when operated by the player. Note that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time has elapsed since it was started unless a new effect is received again during execution of the specific effect. Become.

  FIG. 365 (b) shows the operation period of the timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the control is not in the automatic button effect state. A specific production pattern that can be set as a “specific production reception period” is executed, and an operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific production reception period An example of rendering when an operation on the button 410 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (b), in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), while the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is maintained in the long press mode, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) occurs based on the operation detection (effect reception) when it has become Auto-strike function) is executed. As this process (automatic consecutive hit function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed under the condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t 1 elapses, and those operation detection (effect It is possible to execute the process as “a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on reception” ”. Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 366 (a) shows a period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect receiving period to which“ is given ”is executed, and an example of the effect when no operation is performed within the specific effect receiving period is shown.

  First, when no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed once and at time tc13. When it reaches, the specific effect reception period will be ended.

  On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, as shown in FIG. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at timing tc12 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the generation acceptance period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function generates a new specific effect (e.g., every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described auto-strike function functions. Processing to generate post-operation effects) is executed.

  In addition, as this process (automatic effect function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t 1 passes, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute as processing such as "to generate an effect after operation". In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is functioned at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous hitting function is functioned to use it to “detect operation every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and to detect those operations A process may be performed to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on (effect reception). Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  In FIG. 366 (b), when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation opportunity of the operation “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit or the like) of the period from timing tc11 to tc13 of the execution period of symbol variation The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect reception period to which“ is applied ”is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is long-pressed in the state where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning in the specific effect reception period. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 366 (b), the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function at timing tc12 as in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 366 (a), whereby the first specific effect at timing tc12 After generating a new special effect (post operation effect) is generated each time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The process to make it be executed.

  However, in this rendering example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long press mode at timing tc 12 a when the processing by the automatic rendering function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected when the automatic button effect state is set, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). However, in this effect example, the reception of the effect is not made even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. Then, after the specific effect (effect after operation) according to the effect reception is not generated at the timing tc 12 a in this way, a process (predetermined time t 1) which has been executed before the automatic button effect state is released. This process is continued without ending a new specific effect (process to generate an effect after operation) each time e.

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by the long press at any timing in the state. Even if is started, there will be no change in the rhythm or tempo for the occurrence of a specific effect (effect after operation) triggered by the operation and no delay in the progress of the effect, and it was already in the running state The process (process for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form that is taken over after the operation mode by the long press is started. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a functioning state within the specific effect reception period, the player operates the operation without concern about the adverse effect on the effect in the executing state. It will be possible to do so, which will preferably prompt the player to operate. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), although the player is in the effect status different from the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at timing tc12a. The same aspect will appear as the aspect of the specific effect appearing within the specific effect reception period.

  In this case, the process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) which has been in the execution state is taken over after the operation mode by the long press is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an automatic double-stroke function that functions when a long press operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, and a function when not operating within the specific effect reception period The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed functions. It is none other than.

  However, after the start of the long press operation by the player at timing tc12a, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the operating state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, and the operating state is in the operating state On the condition that the determination is made, the processing being executed from the time of being in the automatic button effect state (processing to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the specific effect performed last time is digested, a new specific effect (action after operation) is generated at that time Instead, the process being executed since the automatic button effect state (process for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is ended.

  In the example of production using the automatic repetitive function shown in FIG. 365 (b) and the automatic production function shown in FIGS. 366 (a) and 366 (b), the predetermined time t1 is set with reference to the timing when the specific production ends. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of time (the first mode as the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic effect function) is executed, but instead, the timing at which the specific effect starts is used as a reference As described above, a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of the predetermined time t2 (second mode as an automatic repetitive function and an automatic effect function) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end, but preferably, from the start of the specific effect to the end. Is set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in a manner that is interrupted. Even though no operation is performed, it is possible to feel the sense that a single operation is repeatedly performed at high speed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing tc12 at which the automatic rendering function functions (within the period of the timings tc11 to tc12), at that time The automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). At this time, the first specific effect is generated according to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses if the operation is a long press mode. A process (automatic continuous hitting function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state Each time a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 365 and FIG. 366, when the effect reception is made when the specific effect is in the process of being executed, the specific effect in the process of being executed is interrupted according to the effect receiving Although the new specific effect is generated, a new specific effect corresponding to the reception of the effect may be generated in parallel with the specific effect that is in the middle of execution without ending.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when the previous specific effect generated by the one-shot operation is in the process of being executed and the new one-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted, When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or the automatic double-stroke function) functioning is in the process of being executed Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from the original position to an operation state by a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection. It is decided to continue the processing (processing to generate a specific effect every time a predetermined time has elapsed). After this, if the operation state is maintained when a predetermined time has elapsed with reference to the previous specific effect (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is changed to the predetermined time). Since the processing to be generated each time it has been continued is continued, it is possible for the player to end the automatic button effect state while suitably continuing the operation system effect being in the execution state from the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation of, and it is expected that the player participation consciousness will be raised.

[Setting process related to automatic button effect state according to effect pattern type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) Settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be maintained while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during symbol variation. I am trying to do it.

  However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol variation, the processing load increases due to the setting change not assumed at the start of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is started at the start It is feared that it will adversely affect the determined progress of presentation. In this respect, as the type of “effect pattern to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination”, at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”; Since the second effect pattern "that can not set the specific effect reception period where the prompting instruction display appears can not be set" is set, depending on the type of effect pattern, the setting or cancellation concerning the automatic button effect state is not necessarily executed promptly There may be cases where no problem arises. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, it is in the execution period of the symbol variation. By making the processing mode according to the setting or releasing according to the automatic button effect state different, the increase of the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

  FIG. 367 is a symbol variation in “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three. It is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation (cancellation operation) for canceling an automatic button effect state or an operation (setting operation) for setting is performed within an execution period of the symbol variation. . Note that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a lost variation.

  As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the “specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation is started with the “effect pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the progress of the effect as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state is in a state where the automatic button effect state can be released (a state in which the release operation is allowed). .

  In this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Be done.

  Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure. ) Is assumed to be detected. When an operation on the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect is received, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without digesting the remaining time Will be. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received. It can not be accepted as the setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect receiving period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received and the effect after the operation is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. The operation as an operation is also accepted, and the automatic button effect state is canceled (ended).

  Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period ends in this way, although the symbols are changing. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with the operation button 410 in the operating state. It is supposed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation may also be performed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

  In this production example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the automatic button production state is set, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped, The next symbol variation is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the performance progress is made with the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  In this manner, in the effect example shown in FIG. 367, the specific effect is included in the period during which the first effect pattern is executed in a state where the automatic effect effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that symbol variation has been started in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is controlled. In addition, by performing the release operation before the specific production reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific production reception period to be generated in a state where the automatic button production state is released, and the player himself operates It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when a desired desire arises. In the production example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific production reception period is started, but the release operation is performed after the specific production reception period is ended. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

  Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect receiving period in which the instruction prompting operation is displayed” can be set, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state Is also allowed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the end of the specific effect acceptance period, but the setting operation by the player within the period before the start of the specific effect acceptance period. The setting operation can be accepted even if the operation is performed. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. This is also possible, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when it is desired to enjoy the rendering after the operation by the automatic rendering function.

  In addition, in order to obtain such effects, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) according to the effect contents in the first effect pattern Even if it is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific performance reception period. In addition, the specific effect display can be made to appear in the period of symbol variation, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect reception period always occurs before the symbol variation in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs by confirming the content of the effect appearing within the execution period of the symbol variation, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. It is possible to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  At this time, as for the specific effect display, it is possible to give an indication as to whether or not the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a highly expected manner when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the determination is made for selection regarding whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Furthermore, for the specific effect display, there is at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears It may be permitted to set (or release) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from when the specific effect reception period occurs to when the second specific effect display appears. If it is not permitted to set (or release) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from the appearance of the second specific effect display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect will not occur. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period.

  In FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the three effect states, “the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set ") Starts the symbol variation, and the processing example when the operation (cancellation operation) or the setting operation (setting operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect states, “a specific effect reception period for which an instruction display for prompting operation appears can not be set. Assume that symbol variation is started in “2 effect patterns”. Then, in this effect example as well as in the case shown in FIG. 367, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed), although the symbol variation is being executed. Progress of presentation as the second presentation pattern will be made.

  Then, in this example of effect, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting release of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Be done.

  That is, it seems that there is little merit to end the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the symbol variation in the on-hold state is digested, there is a high possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set” appears. At this time, there may be a desire (a desire to end a specific rendering state) to return to the normal rendering mode in which the player can make a progress depending on the player's own operation.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set is being executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. In addition, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance when the “first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set” is still on hold. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect acceptance period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) has to be performed without rushing.

  Furthermore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is performed at timing td23 shown in the figure after the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is not being controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set, it is within a period being executed. At least the second effect pattern, even if the player has performed an operation (even if the operation button 410 has been operated from the original position and the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)). During a period in which the player is executing, the setting operation by the player is not accepted (setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed). Note that, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol fluctuation is performed even when it is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state Within the period when the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

  In other words, even if “setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state” is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect reception period. Or, even if the operation is performed, the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is executed. In view of such a fact, it is necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. However, it is considered that there is no problem if the automatic button effect state is set before the specific effect acceptance period that can occur after the next symbol variation is digested.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed, the setting operation by the player was performed within the period. However, until the end of the period (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation corresponding to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol stop (losing) When in the symbol stop state (timing td24 in the figure), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, even if an operation by the player is performed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted, and the set timing is Since it was carried over after being stopped, the processing load increases due to a setting change related to the production state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player) Such can be suitably suppressed.

  Then, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set, and the on-hold state is set. The next pattern variation that has been there is to be digested (variation start). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the rendering progress is made with the state being set in the automatic button rendering state unless the release operation by the player is performed.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, in a state where the second effect pattern is in the execution state in a state where the second effect pattern is not being controlled and the second effect pattern is being executed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, control to the automatic button rendition state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in processing load due to a setting change relating to the effect state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player). It will be.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the next symbol variation in the hold state is started after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is stopped. However, when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (losing symbol stopped), even if the next symbol variation is not in the hold state, the automatic button is used when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped). The production state is set.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when the setting operation by the player is performed within a period in which the second effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern The automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is stopped. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in short, the automatic button within the period during which the second effect pattern is being executed. Any setting may be used as long as the setting timing is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped) or within the period during which the next symbol variation is being executed. In other words, when the next symbol variation is started, if there is a production situation such as “It is decided to change the setting related to the production state within the symbol variation”, the production is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it only needs to be advanced, an increase in processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of symbol variation is preferably avoided.

  In this case, even when the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when it is in the state of symbol stop (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol variation is executed It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the set period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed in. It is possible to carry over the timing at which the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing the.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is in the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect pattern was ended. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol variation is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation. If the second effect pattern is terminated while the button is not in the on-hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop).

  In addition to "the second effect pattern (the change in lost) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set", the specific effect reception period in which the instruction for prompting the operation appears can not be set When the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol stop state or the execution period of the big hit game is further prepared. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed inside.

[Prohibited period for setting automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  However, if the specific process related to the production such as the production setting is allowed at any time during the symbol change execution period including the setting process to the automatic button production state, the tension will be reduced. There is a possibility that the entertainment interest may decline due to the lack of stage. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when a specific production reception period has not occurred, a specific process related to production such as production setting is performed by an operation by the player. In an allowed gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibition period during which a specific process relating to the above-described effect is not allowed to start during a period from when the symbol change is started to when the specific effect acceptance period occurs is preferably started. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, even when the specific production reception period has not occurred, the operating means (such as the operation button 410) while the prohibition period has not occurred. ) Is required to be performed, and it is possible to favorably maintain player participation consciousness with respect to games and performances.

  Hereinafter, although an example of a presentation adopting “setting processing to an automatic button production state” as “specific processing related to presentation” will be described in detail, “specific processing related to presentation” is not limited thereto. The process may be applied as another process, such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character is the leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character is the main field).

  In FIG. 369, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific effective period) in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears appears (specific effective period) can be set) FIG. 370 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of fluctuation, and FIG. 370 is an effect example when the effect is advanced with the third effect pattern. FIG. Note that the third effect pattern may be either a hit change or a loss change, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (a), when the effect state is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, "the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears may be set now. It is assumed that symbol variation is started in "pattern". Then, although it is in the execution period of the symbol variation, in the state where the automatic button effect state can be set (the setting operation is allowed), the effect development as the third effect pattern is made .

  However, in this production example, when symbol variation is performed in “the third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears appears can be set”, timing te11 before the specific effect reception period occurs In FIG. 369), operation acceptance for setting to the automatic button effect state itself or generation of a prohibited period in which setting processing to the automatic button effect state is not permitted is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (in-prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect shown in FIG. 370 (b) (an image in the process of being prohibited), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed, and a character such as "auto setting invalid" is displayed. It is done.

  The prohibition period thus generated is terminated when a timing te12 at which a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 has arrived. However, even if an operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. ) Is designed to prevent any changes.

  When the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not displayed, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is permitted. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned “prediction effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 370 (e)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (Refer to FIG. 370 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 370 (f), the stage is set as the stage for accepting an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001, but the stage for receiving an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (f), since the specific effect reception period is generated in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set, the specific effect reception period is The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a specific timing. However, even before “the third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can be set” is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 369, it is before the prohibition period is started. It is possible to cause the specific effect reception period to be generated while the automatic button effect state is set by setting the automatic button effect state to the automatic button effect state. In this case, the specific effect effect is generated. The automatic production function described above can be made to function at a specific timing within the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting for the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 369, the timing te11 is generated and thereafter. Thus, the setting to the automatic button effect state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (in-prohibited image) is not generated at timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the example of effect shown in FIG. 369, but is generated delayed at timing te11. Is desirable.

  FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 are diagrams showing a modification example of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period concerning setting of the automatic button presentation state) according to the “specific processing related to the presentation such as presentation setting”.

  That is, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370, if a prohibition period occurs at timing te11 (see FIG. 369), the first specific time (for example, 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed after the second (second) elapses, the setting operation is not accepted and the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. Is designed to prevent any changes.

  However, in the following modification example described in detail with reference to FIG. 371 and FIG. 372, the prohibition period is “one requiring a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from the occurrence to the end”. Are the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, an operation (operation button) by the player to end the prohibition period early This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 in that a process that can allow an operation (operation 410) is executable.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (a), when there is an effect state that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, a “specific effect reception period during which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started with “3 effect patterns”. Then, in this modification as well, during the symbol variation execution period, the progress of the presentation as the third presentation pattern is in a state where the automatic button presentation state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be done.

  Also, at timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception for setting to the automatic button effect state itself or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. In addition to starting the generation of the prohibited period that is not performed, a specific effect (in-prohibited image) that can only appear when this prohibited period occurs is also displayed in this prohibited period, as in FIGS. 369 and 369. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to 370.

  However, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 371, a period until a timing te11a when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the timing te11 in a prohibition period (a period in which the cancellation is not possible) Then, even if the operation (the operation to the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (the prohibited image) (see FIG. 372 (c)). Refer to the operation from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the prohibition period) (period in which the cancellation is permitted), the operation by the player When (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute processing that can end the prohibition period early.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibition period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), the timing te11a arrives first in the effect display device 1600. The special image which has not appeared is displayed in the period up to (period in which it is determined that the cancellation is not possible). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (d), an image NJG that suggests the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a comes (see FIG. 372 (d)), a period during which the prohibition period can not be canceled (not possible). From timings te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that transition to a period in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted (timings te11a to te12) is allowed, and this indicates the prohibition period in the remaining time is indicated. Can be functioned as an effect on whether to end early.

  Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed in a period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted among the prohibition periods, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Based on this, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not arrived yet.

  Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period ends early due to the first operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. Processing can be performed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (e), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is destroyed and characters such as “successful release” are displayed, thereby causing an effect change. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period is ended early in this way, when the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 comes, as shown in FIG. 371, When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here “auto button is being set”) accompanying the effect setting appears.

  After that, when the above-mentioned "prediction effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 372 (f)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period appears in which an instruction to prompt an operation appears (See FIG. 372 (g))). In the example shown in FIG. 372 (g), although it is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (g), since the specific effect reception period occurs in the state set to the automatic button effect state, If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic rendering function will function. However, even in the effect example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (g), the first operation is performed within the period (the timings te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the ineffective period is permitted. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (f), if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not performed by performing the second operation in the state where the early termination is performed and the early termination is performed. It goes without saying that the same presentation situation will appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific production reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is ended. A specific effect reception period may be generated immediately after the “prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended (in a manner linked to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs while the opportunity to set the automatic button effect state remains disabled. It is possible to increase the player participation awareness when the effect reception period is not occurring.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted”, the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period occurring thereafter. It is also possible to cause one of a plurality of effect modes that differ in the appearance ratio of a relatively high expectation degree as the effect after operation, or the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol due to symbol variation in the execution state.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372, based on the result of the big hit determination,
When in the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 372 (e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, “padlocks” having different ratios (expectations) in which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. Appear in any of a number of different presentation modes, etc.) where the destruction of the image in which the chain is attached is different.
-When it is in the 2nd state where the production image of Drawing 372 (d) appears, when it will be in the above-mentioned 3rd state, "a specific 3rd production mode (a plurality of 3rd productions") Among the modes, a plurality of second performance modes (for example, “a plurality of performance modes with different colors of the image NJG”) having different ratios (expectations) of “appearance that is most advantageous to the player”. Make one appear,
-When it is in the 1st state where the production image of Drawing 372 (b) and (c) has appeared, when it will be in the above-mentioned 2nd state, "specific 2nd production mode (multiple Of the second presentation mode, a plurality of first presentation modes (for example, “a plurality of presentation modes having different background image colors”) that have different ratios (expectations) appearing. It is desirable to execute processing such as “appear” etc.). According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be suggested in stages by the effects related to each other while the effects are advanced within the prohibition period or the process for early termination of the prohibition period is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaming interests during the prohibition period can be suitably maintained, and that the player's participation consciousness is increased by promptly ending the prohibition period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as an effect that the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period is movable. It is desirable to be able to be implemented as an effect aspect which operates a decoration. A predetermined movable decoration body is operated when a specific third performance aspect among a plurality of third performance aspects appears, and a predetermined movable decoration is displayed when a third performance aspect different from the specific third performance aspect appears. You may not move the body.

  In addition, with respect to the effects illustrated in FIGS. 370 (e) and 370 (f) and FIGS. 372 (f) and (g), the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) is displayed. The above-described effect (specific operation) regarding whether a period in which an operation can be accepted occurs or whether a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted occurs. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350).

  Moreover, in the example of an effect shown in FIG. 369-FIG. 372, after generating a "prohibition period in which setting processing to an automatic button effect state is not permitted", it has been described that a specific effect reception period is always generated. However, it does not necessarily need to occur for the specific effect reception period, and after generating the "prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted", the symbol variation stops without the generation of the specific effect reception period. You may make it prepare the presentation pattern which can be done.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 369 to FIG. 372, an effect pattern with relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super reach state) in the “prohibited period in which setting processing to the automatic button effect state is not permitted”. It is desirable that the appearance ratio be higher in the effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern in which the super reach state occurs) in which the jackpot expectation degree is relatively higher than the effect pattern in which the occurrence of the effect does not occur. That is, in this case, although the effect pattern having a relatively high hit probability appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state is forcibly lost for a predetermined period. It becomes possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness for winning the big hit will be increased.

  However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, the decrease in interest of the player who desires the generation of the automatic button effect state can not be avoided, as shown in FIGS. 371 and 372. As shown, when there has been a certain amount of time, it is possible for the player to enable the early release of the prohibition period, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button presentation state is returned again to the permitted state. It is desirable to

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as a touch panel, a sword decorative body 5001, a cross key, etc. besides the operation button 410. In addition, the prohibited period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used for setting to the automatic button rendering state, and the setting to the automatic button rendering state may be performed. The prohibited period may be ended early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibition period is ended early by operating the operation target used in setting to the automatic button effect state, the modes (single press, long press, etc.) at the time of operation should be made different from each other. Is desirable.

  As described above, in FIGS. 369 to 372, an example of an effect that employs “automatic button effect state setting process” as the “specific process related to the effect” is shown. It is not limited to. However, with regard to the “specific processing related to the effect”, regardless of the type of symbol variation performed as the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means may be operated within the symbol variation execution period. It is desirable that it can be executed by operation.

[Automatic rendering function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation provided between the original position and the operation position so as to be operable by a predetermined driving force. In the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided by the player within the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed to the rendering can be executed.

  By the way, when the production reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 293 (G2), the movable operation means is moved to the original position by a predetermined driving force. In some cases, the player is given an opportunity to operate to move to the operating position first and operate the movable operating means in the moved state. In this operation opportunity, the production reception may be performed by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position instead of an operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

  However, at the time of occurrence of such an effect reception period, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), whereby the movable operation means (here, If the sword decorative body 5001 can not be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) can not be properly provided, and the effect receptionist is There is a concern that it will not be possible to produce an effect after the corresponding operation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), whereby the movable operation means (here, Even if the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) occurs while the sword decorative body 5001 can not be driven from the original position to the operation position, the automatic button effect state is controlled. If a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the production reception period, a process (automatic production function) that causes the production to produce the same change can be executed. .

  According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, the movable directing function can be used by using the automatic effect function. A post-operation effect using the operation means can be appropriately made to appear.

  However, when some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and it cannot operate, the operation itself on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) Since it is in a difficult situation, if an operation to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button The setting to the effect state (specific effect state) cannot be performed, and eventually the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) No matter which production reception period occurs, the same production change is caused as when the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 here) on which the operation opportunity is given is operated. Processing can be executed (automatic rendering function). On this basis, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be set only by operating the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). It is supposed to be.

  That is, in this case, not only on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) that may not be able to operate when an abnormality / failure occurs, only by operating the general push-type operation button 410, An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) during the symbol variation execution period, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set by operating the operation button 410. By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001).

  In order to suitably ensure the operability at the time of such an abnormality / failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) used for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It is important that it is provided as an operating means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the restoration process described above in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say that.

  However, even if an abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) remains in a stopped state, an abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player side to recognize that it is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) will be set.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when there is an abnormality / failure in the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of symbol variation. The restoration operation for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to normal (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-described processing content. For example, a restoration operation (an operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to the original position is performed. The process is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it properly returns to the original position.

  According to such a configuration, the movable operation is confirmed by confirming that the restoration process is started with respect to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state or failure. Furthermore, as a result of the restoration process being performed, it is confirmed whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position, so that the movable operation means (here, the sword is displayed). The player side determines whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the successful restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has been resolved, or whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the failure of the restoration process is continued. It will be possible to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality / failure has continued continues, the operation on the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Thus, even if there is an abnormality / failure in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is not affected. It is possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

  However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in a state where an abnormality / failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, an effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be properly generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special performance reception periods can be generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). No matter which production pattern is selected and executed based on the result of the big hit determination, the maximum time required for the restoration processing for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) (restoration operation (5 Addition time between the time when the operation in seconds is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for setting operation to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) (2 seconds in this case) It is possible to execute processing to make the presentation progress so that the special presentation acceptance period is not generated only after the lapse.

  According to such a configuration, when symbol variation is started with a rendering pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operation Even if the means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or failure is occurring before the special effect reception period occurs. Since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the effect after operation according to the operation acceptance to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is appropriate Can be generated. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs in a state in which an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (the sword decorative body 5001 here), the special effect In the reception period, the same effect as when the operation on the movable operation means is performed is caused to the effect.

  FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 373, in this example of the effect process, when an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operation means (here) Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. The setting operation for the automatic button effect state requires 2 seconds. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is included. It is supposed to take 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect acceptance period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect acceptance) Period) and 10 seconds (post-operation effect) are allotted a time longer than “30 seconds”, and 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added to “17”. Unless the effect is advanced so that the special effect acceptance period is generated at a timing later than “second”, the pattern variation ( It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned effect when the effect pattern that can cause the special effect reception period is started.

  Therefore, in the figure, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (design variation times of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is allocated, only the effect progress in which the special effect acceptance period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the production patterns D and E to which a time longer than “30 seconds” that is the above-described addition time is assigned, a special production acceptance period can be generated, but symbol variation is started. By making it possible to execute only the performance development that cannot cause the special performance reception period at the timing before “17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation))”, To ensure the above-described performance when the design variation (the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period) is started in a state where abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). I have to.

  In the example related to the effect process, the special effect acceptance period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in fact, if there is a case that the special effect reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) from the start of symbol variation, restoration processing fails If you do not perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) immediately after recognizing that it has been done, the special effect reception period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It can not be realistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above-mentioned time setting values are not designed on the assumption of such time values, it can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective.

  In this respect, the design including such a time value is that a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 Seconds), or a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received when an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time or more and a post-operation effect is generated. In the effective period (production reception period), even if the operation is started after the effective period is started, the operation and the long press are repeated a plurality of times / appropriate times until the effective period ends. It is possible to do over the

  In view of such facts, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation) among the above-mentioned time settings, a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) may be used It is desirable to That is, in this case, “15 seconds (restoration process)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)”, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (action after operation)" is allocated, and "15 seconds Generate special presentation reception period at a timing later than "23 seconds" or "25 seconds" added with (restoration process) and "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)" As described above, the effect is to be developed, and among the effect patterns A to E, only the effect pattern E can be implemented as an effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

  In addition, for multiple operation effective period (for example, 8 seconds) and long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), it does not necessarily occur among the effect patterns (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated by another effect pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds). Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) can generate both a valid operation period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), these effective periods It is desirable to set the long side of in place of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to absorb the symbol variation one after another in a shorter time, so in the gaming state in which the time shortening function is effective, each time setting described above It is not always necessary to design such a system. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special effect reception period may occur while the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player. It is desirable to be able to obtain. According to such a configuration, although the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the post-operation effect as the effect using the movable operation means Can be implemented, and efficient processing can be realized in which both restoration processing and post-operation presentation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) are performed in parallel. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, but may be applied to a gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design according to each time setting described above Will not be performed.

  Further, in the example according to the rendering process described with reference to FIG. 373, the rendering using the movable operation means may be executed as any of the renderings shown in FIG. 279 to FIG. 350. . When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the “effect using the movable operation means” shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs the specific operation-related effect, the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect. The Rukoto.

  Further, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if no operation is performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means is always performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at least during the symbol variation in the normal game state. The special reception period that is given does not occur, but the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality or failure is generated. Is possible. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration process in the case of abnormality / failure is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) may be provided without performing the design for each time setting described above. It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

  Moreover, in the example according to the effect processing, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by setting operation by the player, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) The game does not necessarily have to be made by the player's operation. For example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit judgment, or the setting to the automatic button rendering state itself is not performed, and the automatic rendering function always functions It may be provided as a possible game machine.

[Post-operation presentation that suggests the automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (the effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) according to the establishment of a predetermined effect condition is executed. Even if no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the period, when a predetermined timing arrives within the period during which the first reception effect is executed, the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation button 410 is operated. The same post-operation effects are executed. In addition, an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is performed within a period in which a second reception effect (an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) according to establishment of an effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition is executed. Similarly, when the second reception effect is executed, when the predetermined timing arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the sword ornament 5001 is operated is performed. It is supposed to be executed. Accordingly, even if the operation means on the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is not given is erroneously operated when the reception effect occurs, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation. It is suppressed that the situation where it becomes impossible to confirm a post production will occur. The “predetermined production condition” and the “production condition different from the predetermined production condition” can be established separately as a result of the production determination based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, if there is a case where the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know due to “look away” and the effect is executed after the operation according to the effect reception, the effect after the operation becomes the operation target The player is generated without any involvement with the operating means (for example, the operation button 410). That is, in this case, the player can not recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect generated due to the operation, and thus the first reception effect and the second reception effect If the degree of expectation is different, it may be impossible to recognize it, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the ratio of the predetermined performance condition being satisfied (the ratio of the first reception effect is executed) when the symbols change, The determination concerning the various effects (effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination) is performed so as to be higher than the ratio that is satisfied (the ratio at which the second reception effect is executed), and within the symbol variation based on the result of the determination Control related to production is performed. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated at a place where the player does not know, it is possible to predict that the first reception production is likely to be executed in proportion. Become.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, “image suggesting the type of the operation target (the first image) which appeared during the period when the effect reception is permitted when the effect reception is automatically generated. If it is the reception effect of 1, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the second reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG), and the above-mentioned automatically generated effect is maintained as it is in the display state. The post-operation production based on the reception is started. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after operation is executed while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably suppress not being able to recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect generated due to the operation.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color and transmittance) and the display position of the “image suggesting the type of operation target” may be the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. However, what is important is that the type of the operation means that is the operation target is expressed as a display on the effect display device 1600 when the effect after the operation is started. That's fine. Further, when the post-operation effect is generated based on the reception of the effect generated by the operation by the player, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the above-described production reception is automatically generated, the post-operation production based on the operation by the player is started while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state. You may do it. However, in view of simplification of design and processing load, regardless of whether or not the production reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state. Then, it is desirable to start the effect after the operation based on the operation by the player.

  FIG. 374 shows an example of production progress when the post-operation production is started while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state when the production reception is automatically generated. It is a time chart which shows. FIGS. 375 and 376 are diagrams showing an example of effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern to be developed in the manner shown in FIG. 374 is executed. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  That is, the specific effect pattern that can be set as the “effect reception period allowing the reception (operation)” of the timing tf1 to tf3 in the symbol change execution period while being controlled in the automatic button effect state. Is started based on the result of the big hit determination, as shown in FIG. 375 (a), the effect display device 1600 first displays a variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol).

  In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 375 (b), it is expected that the effect reception (operation) will be permitted shortly before the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 374) in the execution period of the symbol variation. As the suggested precursory effects, the specific operation related effects (which may be a specific operation related effect illustrated separately from this) illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335 and the like are performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation related effects illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. And the common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given . However, when timing tf1 (see FIG. 374) comes after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. It is expected that the rendering situation indicating that it is in the state appears, or that the rendering situation indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state appears as the second rendering result having a relatively high degree of expectation. It becomes to be indicated which of the low degree operation button 410 and the relatively high expectation sword decoration 5001 the operation opportunity is given.

  FIG. 375 (c) shows the result of the specific operation related rendition shown in FIG. 375 (b) being operated as the first rendition result having a relatively low degree of expectation at timing tf1 (see FIG. 374). A presentation situation indicating that the button 410 should be operated appears, and a first reception presentation where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started (on the basis of the result of the jackpot determination) The first rendering condition (a rendering pattern in which the rendering result shown in FIG. 375 (d) appears later) or the second rendering condition (a rendering result shown in FIG. 375 (e) below appears in the rendering determination to be performed The presentation situation when the pattern is satisfied is shown.

  In this production situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period (FIG. 374: timings tf1 to tf3) that is set so as to allow the production reception, and a predetermined timing (here) Then, it is assumed that the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 374).

  That is, in this case, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the period (FIG. 374: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. It becomes. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect (the figure is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the chance!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600). 375 (d)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and a high-expected aspect effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 375 (e)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  However, even if the effect after operation is executed in any mode, the overhead image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden and is maintained, and the effect after operation is started. Even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the operation button 410” (relatively high expectation Can be recognized as being on the lower side after the operation).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 374, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated for a period in which the effect reception is permitted, and is terminated early at timing tf 2 when the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be. Then, after the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 being displayed, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The haze image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing tf5 at which the post-operation effect ends.

  According to such a configuration, in the period from the start of the post-operation effect to the end of the operation, the bag image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed. Period (timing tf2 to tf4) and a period (timing tf4 to tf5) in which no cohabitation image is displayed appear. Therefore, even when the post-operation effect is started with the haze image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target being displayed, the haze image is not displayed. It is expected that the tension feeling due to the fact that the post-operation effect must be confirmed before being performed is suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this example of presentation, it is supposed that the period of timing tf2-tf3 and the period of timing tf3-tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when a time that doubles the “remaining time indicated by the bar display” has elapsed when the production reception is automatically generated, the operation means (in this case, the operation button) 410), it is possible to recognize that the haze image is hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the haze image from being missed (the haze image is hidden during the post-operation effect). It is expected to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest when played. In this case, also for the bar display, when the effect reception is automatically generated, the display may be continued without hiding the display.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 374) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 375 (b) is performed, not the effect situation shown in FIG. The production status shown in 376 (f) (the third production condition (the production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 376 (g) described later appears) in the production determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination), or the fourth There may be a case where an effect condition (the effect situation when an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 376 (h) described later appears) is satisfied.

  Also in this effect situation (FIG. 376 (f)), as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bird's eye image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area, An instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, character display such as “press”, arrow display downward, and bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. Under the present circumstances, the point that the operation button 410 made into the provision object of the operation opportunity is in the light emission state is also the same as that of the presentation condition shown to FIG. 375 (c).

  However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 376 (f), the button image BTG (a spear image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in a specific manner (here, a manner of wearing a flame). Compared to the normal mode (in this case, the mode that does not wear a flame) that appeared in the production status shown in 375 (c), the ratio of the big hit symbol that appears in the symbol variation (relative expectation as the post-operation production) It has been suggested that the situation where high rendering results (here, the rate at which “super heat !!” appears) is high.

  In this production example as well, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period (FIG. 374: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that acceptance of the production is permitted, and a predetermined timing within the effective period (here. Then, it is assumed that the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 374).

  In this respect, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is displayed in the specific mode, as shown in FIGS. 376 (g) and (h), the button image BTG is in the normal mode. Similar to the above-mentioned case (FIG. 375 (d), (e)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the displayed effect situation is present, "the specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) does not operate, effect display device Is displayed in the chance display mode 1600 (see FIG. 376 (g)), or “the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is operated, and intense heat !! in the effect display device 1600 is The displayed high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 376 (h)) is executed as an effect (the same change as when effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410) after the operation.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 376 (g) and (h), the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner. While this is displayed in the specific mode (here, the mode in which the flame is lit), the post-operation effect is started. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated at a place that the player does not know, the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”, and a highly expected specific aspect It is possible to recognize that the button image BTG has been displayed in (here, a mode in which a flame burns).

  That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the bag image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific mode. When the post-effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 376 (g)), when the post-effect is started while the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example, (See FIG. 375 (d)), the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is higher, so that it is possible to recognize such differences in performance even after the start of post-operation effects. Will be expected to maintain.

  In this production example as well, the timing when the period during which the production acceptance is permitted ends, the timing at which the haze image (specific mode) imitating the operation button 410 is hidden, and the period from timing tf2 to tf3 The point where the period of the timings tf3 to tf4 is set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 374, which is the same as the example described above with reference to FIGS. 375 (c) to (e). is there.

  On the other hand, in this rendering example, the timing tf1 (see FIG. 374) after the specific operation related rendering shown in FIG. 375 (b) is performed is shown in FIG. 375 (c) or 376 (f). It is not any rendering status, but the rendering status shown in FIG. 376 (i) The fifth rendering condition (the rendering result shown in FIG. 376 (j described later) appears in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination There may be a case where the effect pattern when the effect pattern) or the sixth effect condition (effect pattern showing the effect shown in FIG. 376 (k) described later) is satisfied.

  In this rendering situation (FIG. 376 (i)), as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG (a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 (here, a character display such as “put a sword”, an arrow display to the lower right, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) Is supposed to appear. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 to be given an operation opportunity is moved to the operation position, thereby allowing the player to operate the original position.

  Also in this effect example, the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) that is the operation target within the period (FIG. 374: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that the reception of the effect is permitted is operated. Instead, it is assumed that the automatic performance function for the sword ornament 5001 is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 374)).

  In this regard, even when the production reception is automatically generated when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the production situation where the button image BTG is displayed as shown in FIGS. 376 (j) and (k). As in the case described above (FIGS. 375 (d) and (e) or FIGS. 376 (g) and (h)) in which the production reception is automatically generated, First, a low-expected aspect effect (see FIG. 376 (j)) in which the chance display! Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or “the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” operates, and in the effect display device 1600 “Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 376 (k))” is displayed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect was accepted by an operation on the sword ornament 5001). It has become.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 376 (j) and (k), the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed even if the effect is performed after operation in any mode. It is made to start the production after operation with the state displayed without turning it on. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it can be recognized that the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the sword decorative body 5001”. Become.

  That is, in this example, even if the same effect mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the effect after the operation, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. When the post effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 376 (j)), the post effect is started in the normal mode or the specific mode in which the overhead image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed As the percentage of big hit symbols appearing is higher than that of (see, for example, FIG. 375 (d) and 376 (g)), it is expected to maintain game interest favorably. .

  Also in this effect example, the timing when the period during which the reception of the effect is permitted ends, the timing when the spear image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden, and the timing tf2 to tf3 The period and the period from timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length as shown in FIG. 374, and in the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 375 (c) to (e) Is the same as

  According to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 374-FIG. 376, since the effect after the operation is generated in the state where the operation object suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different big hit expectation degrees, the operation object suggestion It is possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the image and the mode of the post-operation effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 374-FIG. 376, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 375 (c) appears, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 376 (f) appears, FIG. 376 (i) When the production situation shown in the above appears, the same production content appears as the post-operation production. However, instead of this, the production situation shown in FIG. 375 (c) (the situation where a reception production where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has occurred) and the production situation shown in FIG. 376 (f) are shown. In FIG. 376 (i), the same post-operation effect is generated, but in the effect situation shown in FIG. 376 (i), an operation different from this is performed. A post effect (for example, a post-operation effect shown in FIG. 358) may be generated. Also, different post-operation effects are produced for each of the effect situations shown in FIG. 375 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 376 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 376 (i). You may make it appear. When these other examples are employed, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 375 (b) may not necessarily be executed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 374-FIG. 376, after performing the “prediction effect shown in FIG. 375 (b) (here, specific operation related effect)” which suggests that the reception effect will occur soon, “Reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (production situation shown in FIG. 375 (c) and FIG. 376 (f))” and “Operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. "Reception effect (the effect status shown in FIG. 376 (i))" is generated, but "Reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (in FIG. 376 (i)). It is not necessary to generate "the presentation situation shown)". In other words, in this case, after the sign effect that suggests that the reception effect will be generated soon, the reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 at the timing tf1 is shown in FIG. 375 (c). One of the effect status and the effect status shown in FIG. 376 (f) is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect after the operation is started. The degree of expectation for the post-operation effect will differ depending on whether the imitation image is displayed in the normal mode or whether it is displayed in a specific mode with a high degree of expectation (in this case, a mode of wearing a flame) Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained properly.

  In this case, it is desirable that the content of the sign effect is executed as a sign that cannot appear in the sign effect when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. In addition, a common sign is displayed when the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode and when the haze image is displayed in a specific mode with high expectation (here, a mode wearing a flame). It is desirable to execute the effect and to develop the effect so that the habit image imitating the operation button 410 appears in the normal mode or the specific mode as a result.

  In addition, a bird's eye view image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in any of three or more modes including the normal mode and the specific mode, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of these modes is displayed. You may do so. However, in the above presentation example, even if a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in any of these modes at timing tf1, post-operation presentation is started while the mode of the bird's-eye view image is displayed. It will be.

  In addition, after a specific precursor effect appears, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 375 (c)”, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 376 (f)”, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 375 (c) As in the case of the effect display device 1600, the spear image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner. However, when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated and the effect after the operation is performed. Any of the production situations (not shown) may not be executed. In other words, in this case, when a reception effect is generated in which a spear image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner, it is understood whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated when there is no operation by the player. Since it can be made difficult, it is expected that the feeling of tension when the reception effect occurs (a feeling of tension about whether the player should operate and start the operation after the operation) should be suitably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the spear image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific manner, even if there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and a post-operation effect always occurs. As a result, combined with the suggestion that the degree of expectation is high, it becomes possible to preferably improve the game entertainment.

  It should be noted that the effect display device 1600 imitates the operation button 410 in the same manner as the effect situation shown in FIG. 375 (c), not the effect situation shown in FIG. 375 (c) based on the result of the big hit determination. An overhead image is displayed in the normal mode, but when the player does not perform an operation, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is not activated, and a rendering situation (not shown) is generated after the operation. If no operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the effect reception period ends, the effect after operation is not performed. However, also in this case, when the effect reception period is over and the effect state in which the effect reception is not permitted is reached, the overhead image imitating the operation button 410 is not displayed but is displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, although a reception effect is generated in which a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode, the effect is not executed after the operation is not performed by the player. It becomes possible to recognize that it has become, and when a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode in the next reception effect, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. In particular, it is expected that the player is urged to operate without excessive expectation.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 376, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, the display mode of the spear image imitating the operation button 410 or the spear image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is changed. Although the post-operation effect is started in a state in which these simulated images are displayed in the changed display mode, the operation button 410 is imitated with the display mode and the display position in the effect reception period. The effect may be started after the operation in a state where an image or a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed.

  The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the spear image imitating the operation button 410 or the spear image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is a display effect on the effect display device 1600 and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. Any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative accessory may be used, or an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, although it will be described later, a first after-operation effect starting with a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation button 410 and a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decoration 5001 and a bird's-eye view image and sword decoration imitating the operation button 410 A second post-operation effect that is started after the timing tf4 when the haze image imitating the body 5001 is not displayed may be executed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 376, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, an operation is performed while displaying a spear image imitating the operation button 410 or a spear image imitating the sword ornament 5001. The post-production was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started while the spear image imitating the operation button 410 or the spear image imitating the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. In this way, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

  Also in the above-described effect examples shown in FIG. 374-FIG. 376, a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation button 410 and a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 are dynamically displayed as in the case of the effect example described later. The post-operation effect may be started in a state where the dynamic display is maintained.

  The operation button 410 is also pressed when the warning effect shown in FIG. 375 (c) is generated soon and the warning effect shown in FIG. 375 (c) is executed. The post-operation effect may be started while the imitation image is displayed.

[Post-operation effects that make it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, if it is desired that the player perform an operation after the operation by the player's own operation while such an "automatic effect function" can be activated, a predetermined period of time during which the reception effect is performed will be made. It is necessary to operate before the received timing (the timing at which the automatic rendering function is activated) comes, and if the player is trying to operate it, the effective period as the reception rendering is that much It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in such a situation where the reception effect is being executed, it is not possible to recognize what operation should be performed, or an image suggesting the elapsed time (remaining time) after the effective period has occurred If there is something to be confirmed one by one, when the player himself tries to operate, the effect reception may be automatically generated, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be lowered.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of bird's-eye-view images (for example, the operation button 410) are displayed as bird's eye images simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) targeted for effect reception. "How to move a specific operation means" by displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of bird's-eye-view images drawn so that the operation state (operation state) as each is different The method of operation is to be suggested. In addition, when displaying a bird's-eye view image as a moving image in this manner, a predetermined bird's-eye view image determined in advance among a plurality of bird's-eye view images is displayed as an image to be displayed first. By sequentially displaying the bird's-eye view images, it is only necessary to see how much the display as the moving image has progressed, and an elapsed time since the specific reception effect (effective period) occurs It is also possible to recognize.

  That is, in this case, only by looking at the bird's-eye view image imitating the specific operation means to be subjected to the effect reception, the operation method about "how to move the specific operation means" and the specific reception effect are executed It becomes possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time since the period (the effective period) has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the time required to grasp the operation method and the remaining time after the player thinks that he or she wants to operate, and as a result, it can be operated before automatic reception of the effect reception occurs. It is expected to be encouraged.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of automatically generating the effect reception at a timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed. Also by this, it is made to urge to be able to operate before the production reception is automatically generated.

  However, even if these processes are performed, it is not possible to completely avoid a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated before the player himself operates. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to make it difficult for the game entertainment interest to be lowered even if the situation occurs. Note that, when the countermeasure is taken, the above-described process of “prompt to be able to operate before the production reception is automatically generated” may not be necessarily performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even if the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the overhead view image as a moving image is continued without stopping. That is, by continuously displaying the overhead image as the moving image continuously after the effect reception is automatically generated and the effect is started after the operation, a predetermined time after the generation of the effect reception is automatically generated (moving image It is difficult to recognize that the effects are started after the operation while the image is continued), and the player performs the operation while the overhead image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression that the post-operation effect has been started by the operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the player is performed after the “automatic generation of the effect reception”, it seems as if the effect change has occurred due to the operation. In order to give a good impression, the post-operation effects are executed as stepwise effects. This makes it possible to give the impression that the stage change after the second stage is caused by the player's operation, and the player's operation opportunity is deprived by the “automatic reception of the stage reception”. It is expected to make it difficult to have a strong impression.

  FIG. 377 shows a samurai image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates a specific operation means (here, a sword decoration body 5001) that is a target of the effect reception when a specific reception effect occurs. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example when images are displayed as moving images by sequentially displaying images (here, a plurality of cocoon images depicted so that the operation states (operation states) as the sword ornament 5001 are different). is there.

  Now, assuming that a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the big hit determination and a period in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a specific operation means (here, here) that is the target of the effect reception First, the sword decorative image SYGa (predetermined bird's-eye view image) shown in FIG. 377 (a) is displayed as the “first displayed image” as a bird's-eye view image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the sword decorative body 5001). At this time, a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed is also displayed in a state where the gauge is full.

  Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 377 (a) is a moving image of “a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decoration 5001” when a reception effect is given to the sword decoration 5001 where an operation opportunity is given. When displaying as an image, it is always selected as the "image to be displayed first." That is, the state in which the bar display of "gauge full" is displayed within the period in which the effect reception is permitted may be regarded as the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

  And thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 377 (b) to (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is depicted as a moving image whose gauge amount is reduced with the passage of time (a plurality of gauge A plurality of bird's-eye view images (in the figure, the sword decoration is displayed so that the motion amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG is represented as a moving image that increases with time). The images SYGb to SYGf) are displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to such a configuration, just by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs, an operation method for “how to operate the sword decoration body 5001”, It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time since the period during which the performance acceptance is allowed (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It will be. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to generate a timing at which the production reception automatically occurs before the player performs an operation, even though the player himself has attempted to operate it. become.

  Here, in a specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 377 (d) of the period during which the effect reception is permitted (the timing after half of the period in which the specific reception effect is executed has elapsed) The production receptionist is automatically generated at. Therefore, when the player tries to operate it, it is required to operate the sword decorative body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and developed in the "sword decoration image SYGd". It becomes.

  By the way, if it is decided to execute a specific reception effect so that the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (d) even if there is no operation by the player, “Sword decoration image SYGe” and "Sword decoration image SYGf" can be said to be an image that can not be originally displayed regardless of whether or not the player has performed an operation. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (d), “sword decoration image SYGe” or “sword decoration image SYGf Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

  In FIGS. 378 to 380, although a specific reception effect is generated in which a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is dynamically displayed, the operation by the player is performed until the timing when the effect reception is automatically generated comes. It is a figure which shows the example about the rendition which appears when it is not in time. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  FIG. 378 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 2 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination Indicates the situation.

  FIG. 378 (b) shows that the specific moving image TDG is based on the fact that a predetermined rendering condition (first rendering condition) is satisfied during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 378 (a). The production status that has been displayed is shown. The “predetermined production condition” includes, for example, accumulating a certain value of scores accumulated in the production.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect mode that causes the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity is set as the execution waiting state (up to three times ) It is possible to execute a process to make it wait. In this respect, in FIG. 378 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the display of “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is started within the frame obtained by shaping the first coin and “sword stock” By performing a display for changing the count value from “0” to “1”, the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001” is in a performance state newly waiting for execution. Is supposed to be suggested.

  Here, with regard to the specific moving image TDG according to this effect example, the moving images are displayed by sequentially displaying the respective images shown in FIGS. 344 (b) to (e) within the frame where the coin is formed. It has become. Then, after “the image shown in FIG. 344 (b)” is displayed and the images shown in “FIG. 344 (e)” are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIG. 344 (b) e) is repeated by loop processing.

  In FIG. 378 (c), after the display of the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. Based on the fact that a new "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)", which is different from the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" already being displayed, has been started Is shown.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, “effect mode for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity” is set as the execution waiting state (maximum It is possible to execute a waiting process (up to three times). In this respect, in FIG. 378 (c), in the effect display device 1600 in which “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is displayed within the frame where the first coin is formed, the second coin The display of “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is started anew and display of changing the count value of “sword stock” from “1” to “2” is performed even within the frame that It has been suggested that the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001” for two times is in the stage of the production waiting state.

  Here, in this production example, when the display of “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly started in the frame formed of the second coin, the frame formed of the first coin. In this case, a process of displaying in synchronization with the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” that is already being displayed is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment performs processing for updating the timer value of the predetermined timer for the specific moving image TDG every predetermined time. , An image corresponding to the timer value (any one of the images shown in FIGS. 344 (b) to (e)) is selectively displayed as "first displayed image".

  For example, assuming that the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of “1” to “4”, when the above-referenced timer value is “1”, FIG. ) Is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”, and when the above-referenced timer value is “2”, the image illustrated in FIG. 344 (c) is displayed as “first displayed image”. When the timer value referred to above is “3”, the image shown in FIG. 344 (d) is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”. If the timer value referred to is “4”, the image shown in FIG. 344 (e) is selectively displayed as the “image to be displayed first”. Then, after the new display of the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, whenever the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, an image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly set as the “specific moving image TDG”. Display the image so that the previously displayed image is hidden. By performing such processing on the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDLb in the second coin, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image are obtained. TDGb will be displayed as moving images synchronized with each other regardless of their display start timing (in FIG. 378 (c), both specific moving image TDGa and specific moving image TDGb are shown in FIG. 344 (d) Displayed as an image shown). The method for synchronously displaying the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDLb is not limited to this, and other methods may be adopted.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not display at least one specific moving image TDG for the update processing for each predetermined time with respect to the predetermined timer (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a) In addition to the above, it is also carried out in situations where symbol variation has not been carried out, etc.), whereby "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is formed within the frame in which the first coin is formed. "" Is selected each time as to which one of the images shown in FIG. 344 (b) to (e) is selected as the "image to be displayed first" when the "" is started to be displayed. The “first displayed image” changes according to the timing at which a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. That is, although described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a “moving image as a sword decorative image SYG” in which “an image to be displayed first” is predetermined within a period when a specific reception effect is performed (FIGS. 377 (a) to (f)) and “moving images as specific moving images TDG (FIGS. 344 (b) to (e)) in which“ the image to be displayed first ”is indeterminate Are displayed respectively.

  After the specific moving image TDGb is newly displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 378 (d), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are each displayed as a moving image display synchronized with each other. .

  Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDLb are displayed as a moving image display synchronized with one another in this manner and are displayed in the above-mentioned execution waiting state, "a production mode for generating operation opportunities for the sword decorative body 5001 When the condition (second rendering condition) for executing “2” is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 378 (e). It is suggested that “rendering mode to generate operation opportunity for sword ornament 5001” is started by performing display that the rendering operation (predetermined movement) such as coin toss appears on “specified moving image TDGa” I am trying to do it. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs processing to change the "sword stock 2" displayed until that time to "during stock release", and a cointoss to "specific moving image TDGa" for the background image. It is made to produce the presentation change (effect) accompanying the appearance operation (predetermined movement) appearing.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when an effect operation (predetermined movement) like a coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”, as shown in FIG. 378 (f), the “specific moving image TDGa”. "Is performed without returning to the original position", and "the production mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001" is executed, whereby the player to the specific moving image TDGa is executed. The gaze by is encouraged. In this case, as the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001”, first, a display such as “chance to pull out a sword” and “a sword that has a sword placed” is performed on the effect display device 1600. A process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position is performed.

  From then on, the display of the specific moving image TDGa that has performed a predetermined movement is continued from the state before the movement, while remaining in the moved state. Therefore, the specific moving image TDGa is displayed and advanced as a moving image display synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin even in the moved state. In the moved state, the specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a mode different from that before moving (here, in a state of being slightly rotated sideways). It is suggested that “the presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity” is in a state of being started.

  Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the "effect mode for generating the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001", the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 is performed as shown in FIG. 379 (g). The specific reception effect to which is given is started. In a specific reception effect, a bird's-eye view image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is dynamically displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 377, and thereby the sword decoration image that appears when a specific reception effect is generated. Just look at the movement of SYG, how to operate "How to operate the sword decoration 5001" and the elapsed time from the time when the acceptance of the presentation acceptance is allowed (the sword decoration image SYGa As described above, it is possible to recognize both the starting point and the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG.

  Therefore, also in this production example, if an effective period corresponding to a specific reception rendering occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (h) and (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 377 (b) and (c)) after the bar display indicating the remaining time that is permitted is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 377 (a) The display is progressed in each mode.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the player does not perform an operation within the effective period corresponding to the specific reception effect, and is shown in FIG. 379 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 377 (d)). When the timing comes, the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and the effect is started after the operation according to the effect reception.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, the spear image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image even when the effect reception is automatically generated within the specific reception effect. It is supposed to continue without interrupting the processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 379 (j) and FIGS. 380 (k) and (l), the overhead image (sword decoration image as a moving image also after the effect reception is automatically generated and the effect is started after the operation By continuing to display SYG) as it is, it is recognized that post-operation rendering has been started for a predetermined period of time (while the moving image is continuing) after automatic reception of the rendering acceptance. If it is difficult for the player to perform an operation by the player while the sword decoration image SYG is continuously displayed ((379 (j) and (380) and (l) in FIG. 380)). By this operation, it is possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect has been started.

  Further, in this rendering example, after at least the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (within the period shown in FIG. 379 (j) and FIGS. 380 (k) and (l)), after the operation The same (common) effect mode (expected degree is the same even in the case of causing any of the first effect result (FIG. 379 (m)) and the second effect result (FIG. 379 (n)) having different degree of expectation to appear The aspect which is not suggested is made to appear (the stage change of presentation). Here, as shown in FIG. 379 (j) and FIGS. 380 (k) and (l), the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the “aura member 5040 appears” as the “same effect”. An effect corresponding to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

  Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, “the specific decoration member SDY (chairman's work) operates based on the result of the effect determination performed in the symbol change, and Is displayed in the display device 1600 (see FIG. 380 (m)), or “the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is operated, and intense heat is generated in the effect display device 1600! Is displayed as a post-operation effect (second stage effect change). Further, while the degree of expectation is suggested by the post-operation effect, drive control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 and the aura member 5040 to their original positions.

  Thus, according to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a step-by-step effect, the player's operation is “automatic reception of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 379 (j) (FIG. 377 (d)))”. Even when it is not in time, it is delayed while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (until the timing shown in FIG. 379 (l) (FIG. 377 (f))) If so, then the post-operation effect (the second-stage effect change) will be performed in a manner in which the degree of expectation is suggested, so the impression is as if the effect change was caused by the operation. As a result, it is expected that it is difficult to give the impression that the player's operation opportunity has been taken away by the “automatic generation of production reception”.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, in a specific reception effect (FIGS. 379 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 380 (k) and (l)), the effective period corresponding to the reception effect is The image to be displayed at the time of start (the image to be displayed first) is a predetermined "moving image as a sword decoration image SYG (Fig. 377 (a) to (f))" and the image is indefinite In each case, a different “moving image (FIG. 344 (b) to (e)) as a specific moving image TDG” is displayed. That is, the progress status in the "moving image as the specific moving image TDG (Fig. 344 (b) to (e))" rather than the "moving image as the sword decoration image SYG (Fig. 377 (a) to (f))" There is a possibility that the player side may recognize the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect when the player side confirms it, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect is generated. As a result of misrecognizing the elapsed time since the start of the game, the player's operation may not be in time for "automatic reception of production reception (timing shown in FIG. 379 (j) (FIG. 377 (d))" Even in this case, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 379 and 380 is also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 374. That is, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 379 (g) appears at timing tf1 shown in FIG. 374, and the rendering situation shown in FIG. 379 (j) appears at timing tf 2 shown in FIG. It has become. However, at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 374, only post-operation presentation not indicating an expectation is executed, and at timing tf4 shown in FIG. 374 the moving image kept as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed. It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 374 in that the effect after operation indicating the degree of expectation is newly started after the arrival of. In addition, in the example of this effect, the above-described other example regarding FIG. 374 may be applied.

  Also in this example of production, as in the case of the example of production shown in FIG. 374, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period And the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the non-display of the moving image (timing tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time desirable.

  In addition, a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are also prepared as a bird's-eye view image (here, a sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means to be operated Then, when the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of a plurality of modes is to be displayed as the specific moving picture TDG, and the specific moving picture TDG is displayed in any of those modes. Depending on whether it is done or not, an aspect with a high degree of expectation may easily appear as the overhead image (here, the sword decoration image SYG).

  In the above-described effect example, the case where the second effect condition is satisfied after “two specific moving images TDG” are displayed and “the effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001” is executed is illustrated. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. Further, even when the second effect condition is satisfied (when the specific motion image TDG has a predetermined motion), the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is not necessarily required. For example, any one of a plurality of effect modes including “an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” may be selectively executed. Further, in the above-described effect example, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception effect is started when a predetermined timing arrives while the symbol effect is being performed. It may be.

  Despite the fact that “same spear image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and “bar display with the same length” are displayed within the effective period during which the reception of the production is permitted, the acceptance of the production is permitted. The first reception effect and the second reception effect having different effective periods may be executed. In other words, in this case, regarding the “bar display”, the rate at which the gauge amount decreases in accordance with the length of the effective period is changed. However, for the “摸 image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” Regardless of which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, an operation method for “how to operate the operation target (here, the sword ornament 5001)”; Recognizing both the elapsed time since the period during which the production acceptance is permitted (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It is desirable that display progress as a moving image is performed in the same manner as possible. According to such a configuration, even in a situation in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, the “摸 image (here, the sword decoration) As long as the image “SYG)” is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since the acceptance of the performance. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed by checking whether the remaining gauge amount on the bar display is large or small. It will be possible to recognize That is, normally, the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in the expectation of the effect. Therefore, the post-operation effect is started by recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  When the first reception effect and the second reception effect described above are prepared, it is desirable that the time from when the valid period occurs until the effect reception is automatically generated is set as a different time. When the time is set differently in this way, the time until the stage reception is automatically generated is mistaken, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time even though the player himself has tried to operate. However, according to the production example in which the dynamic display by the “sword image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” is continued or the post-operation production is executed step by step, such a situation has occurred. However, the decline in the game entertainment will be suitably suppressed.

  In the above presentation example, when a bird's-eye view image (here, a sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means to be operated is displayed as a moving image in a specific reception effect, as shown in FIG. The operation from “position to be operated (see FIG. 377 (a))” to “position after operation (see FIG. 377 (f))” is matched with the length of the effective period as the specific reception effect. We decided to make the display progress. However, one operation from “the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 377 (a))” to “the position where the operation is completed (see FIG. 377 (f))” is not necessarily matched to the length of the effective period. For example, “the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 377 (a))” and “the position where the operation is completed (FIG. 377) are not necessary. (F)) may be displayed as a moving image that repeats the reciprocating motion. The point is that the image to be displayed at the start of the effective period corresponding to the reception effect (the image to be displayed first) is predetermined, and the moving image is in a predetermined order and progress rate thereafter as well. If progress (sequential display by a plurality of images) is allowed, an operation method for “how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decorative body 5001)” and an effect reception are permitted. Both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period (which can be grasped by the movement amount of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa (here, movement amount including the number of times of reciprocation)) are respectively It is possible to recognize.

  In the above-described production example, the “post-operation production executed stepwise” performed based on the production reception may be another mode. For example, in a state where a moving image as a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is continued, "a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5" Start as an effect after the operation of the stage. And after the moving image as a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is not displayed, and "the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5 In the situation where “is performed as the effect after the first stage operation,“ display effect in the effect display device 1600 ”or“ movable effect by the decoration role ”(or at least one of them) in two steps It is started as a post-operation effect for eyes (the post-operation effect in the second stage uses an effect target different from the effect target used in the post-operation effect in the first stage). According to such a configuration, "a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5" means "a display effect on the effect display device 1600" or "a movable effect by a decoration role" (or at least one of them). It is expected that it will function as a prelude effect of the stage effect, so even if it is recognized that this is the effect after the first stage operation, the sense of incongruity (the effect is accepted and the predetermined time has passed Until then, it is possible to provide the post-operation presentation without the post-operation presentation using the presentation display device 1600 and the uncomfortable feeling that the presentation is not performed after the operation using the decorative combination.

  In addition, the same production target (for example, a light emission production by a lamp provided on the game board 5) is used for the first stage post-operation presentation and the second stage post-operation presentation. In the state where the moving image as a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is continued, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) is performed in a form that does not indicate an expectation. In this way, after the moving image as the haze image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be developed as an aspect in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

  A plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as modes of a moving image as a spear image imitating the operation means to be operated (here, the sword ornament 5001), and the moving image is displayed in any of these modes. Even in this case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the effect reception has occurred in any of the modes.

  Even if the bird's-eye view image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is displayed as a moving image, if the operation means is not performed within the effective period, an effect is produced A special reception effect without any reception may be generated by the establishment of another effect condition different from the effect condition for generating the specific reception effect. That is, in this case, the effect reception is automatically generated by displaying “a moving image by the same bird's-eye view image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and “a bar display with the same length”. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which “specific reception effect” or “special reception effect” in which the effect reception does not occur automatically, and provides a reception effect with a sense of tension. Will be able to However, in the case of a “specific reception effect” in which an effect reception is automatically generated and a “special reception effect” in which an effect reception is not automatically generated, it is possible for the effect reception to occur so that different effects appear as post-operation effects. It is desirable in order to make it possible to recognize which reception effect was given. In addition, the production pattern that allows only one of the “specific reception production” where the production reception is automatically generated and the “special reception production” where the production reception does not automatically occur, or both of them occur at different timings. By preparing a possible effect pattern and performing any one of a plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination at the time of pattern change, at a predetermined timing within the pattern change “ A “specific reception effect” or a “special reception effect” may appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 378 to 380, a moving image as a spear image simulating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated when production reception is generated by the automatic production function. In addition, the post-operation effect is started while continuing the progress of the dynamic display, and the post-operation effect is executed step by step. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the moving image as a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation means (in this case, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is It is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while continuing the progress of the target display, and that the post-operation effect is performed in stages so that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

[Post-operation effect that suggests the type of the automatically accepted reception effect effect]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 having such an "automatic effect function", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, the player has an operation opportunity. It is feared that it will be reduced to a mere display effect where only a predetermined moving image flows, as well as the sense of tension at the time of being given disappears.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate the first reception effect and the second reception effect that have different times from when the period during which the reception of the production is allowed to occur until the reception of the production automatically occurs. Above, regarding the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the bird's-eye image (for example, button image BTG) displayed in the effect reception, respectively, the same image is used. In other words, in this case, it is urged to be misrecognized that the second reception effect has occurred despite the fact that the first reception effect has occurred. , “Due to the time when the stage reception is allowed, the stage reception should not automatically occur even though the stage where the stage reception should automatically occur has arrived (or the stage where the stage reception should automatically occur has not yet arrived. It is possible to maintain the tension until the reception of the production automatically occurs. It will be expected.

  However, even if the first reception effect is generated, what kind of effect will be generated if it is misrecognized that the time until the effect reception is automatically generated is different from the second reception effect being generated. It is not possible to understand whether progress has been made, and it is feared that the game entertainment will decline in the opposite direction. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the effective period is continuously displayed even after the effect reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, at the occurrence of an effective period in which the production reception is allowed, even if the first reception production or the second reception production is not recognized, the production reception is automatically generated (post-operation production starts. ) By making it possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect was being executed by confirming how much gauge remaining is left as a bar display when performing After the operation, the production can be started.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the same effect is produced and the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed even when the effective period occurs, the same. It is possible to execute the progress of the effect which has the case where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period and the case where the effect reception is not automatically generated. In such a configuration, even if a omen effect or a reception effect is generated, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether or not the automatic reception is received within the effective period, so that the reception effect can be performed with a sense of tension. become able to.

  FIG. 381 and FIG. 382 are diagrams showing an example of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which differ in time from the occurrence of a period (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception. is there. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  FIG. 381 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 381 (b) shows a presentation reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 381 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). This shows a production situation in which a precursor production suggesting that is soon to be permitted.

  FIG. 381 (c) shows the production situation (result of jackpot determination) in which the first reception production in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor production shown in FIG. 381 (b) is performed. The first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 381 (e) described later) appears in the effect determination performed based on the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 381 (f) described later). The production situation) when the production pattern (which appears) is satisfied is shown.

  In this production situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the reception of the rendering, and the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. The case is assumed. FIG. 381 (d) depicts a portion where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (effective period) of the first reception effect, and the automatic rendering function is activated. Then, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to allow the effect reception will be produced on the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 381 (e)) or “High expectation mode effect (see FIG. 381 (f)) where intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) operates. ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 381 (e) and (f)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is indicated. The bar display is made to start the post-operation effect in a state where it is not hidden and maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  On the other hand, in this production example, after the presentation situation shown in FIG. 381 (a) appears, the presentation situation in which the prog-off presentation shown in FIG. 382 (g) appears, not the prophecy effect shown in FIG. (The third rendering condition (rendering pattern in which the rendering result shown in FIG. 382 (j) described later appears in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) or the fourth rendering condition (FIG. 382 (k) described below When the effect pattern in which the indicated effect result appears or the fifth effect condition (the effect pattern in the case where the effect condition shown in FIGS. 382 (l) and (m) described later is satisfied) appears There is.

  Then, after the precursor effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 382 (g), as shown in FIG. 382 (h), the second reception effect where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started Will be.

  However, in this second reception effect, although the time from the occurrence of a period during which effect reception is permitted to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than the first reception effect, As also shown in FIG. 382 (c) and FIG. 382 (h), the button image BTG (the bird's-eye image imitating the operation button 410) and the bar display suggesting the remaining time of the effective period ) And the same image as in the case of the first reception effect.

  That is, in this case, in either of the effect situations when the effect situation shown in FIG. 382 (c) is generated and when the effect situation shown in FIG. 382 (h) is generated, the first receptionist It becomes difficult to recognize which of the effect and the second reception effect is occurring, and it becomes possible to give a tense feeling as to when the effect reception occurs.

  In this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the production reception, and the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period. The case is assumed. FIG. 382 (i) depicts a state where the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated in the execution period (effective period) of the second reception effect, and the effective period has occurred. When the automatic effect function is activated at a timing earlier than the second reception effect, the same change as that in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 382 (j)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and a high-expected aspect effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 382 (k)). ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 382 (j) and (k)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is indicated. The bar display is made to start the post-operation effect in a state where it is not hidden and maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, in this effect example, even when the prognostic effect in the mode shown in FIG. 382 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 382 (h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. As shown in l), it is possible that the effect situation (fifth effect condition) in which the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated if the operation by the player is not performed. ing.

  That is, in this case, the same effect of the precursor (see FIG. 382 (g)) occurs, and the same bar image and the same bar display (including gauge length and how to reduce the gauge are included) even when the effective period occurs. )) Is displayed as a second reception effect that is automatically generated within the valid period (see FIGS. 382 (i) to (k)). There is a case where there is a case where there is a case where it is executed as a third reception effect that does not occur automatically (see FIGS. 382 (l) and (m)). In such a configuration, even if a warning effect in which a specific aspect appears or a reception effect in which a specific aspect appears is displayed, it is impossible to distinguish whether or not the automatic reception is made within the valid period. It will be possible to perform receptionist effects by

  Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 382 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is accepted. While this is not permitted, "bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not activated by confirming that the effect situation that the effect after the operation did not occur even though the gauge remaining amount was “0” occurred. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In the drawing shown in FIG. 382 (m), “?” Appears, but it is also possible not to cause any effect change.

  Also, in this example, although the type of precursor effect (see FIGS. 381 (b) and 382 (m)) is different, the same spear image and the same bar display are displayed when an effect is received. However, the time until the automatic performance function is activated is different (see FIGS. 381 (c) and 382 (h)). It is possible to provide a directivity for whether the automatic production function is activated at an early timing, whether the automatic production function is activated at a relatively late stage, or whether the automatic production function is not activated in the first place. Thus, it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the precursor effect has been performed in the mode shown in FIG. 381 (b), it can be recognized in advance that a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is necessarily activated will occur. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In this example, the display mode is different between the precursor effect shown in FIG. 381 (b) and the precursor effect shown in FIG. 382 (g), but these are executed in the same display mode. You may In other words, in this case, even if both the warning effect and the reception effect are confirmed, an operation opportunity is kept in a state in which it is concealed at which timing the automatic performance function is activated, and further, whether the automatic performance function is originally activated. It becomes possible to grant.

  Incidentally, the reception effects described above with reference to FIGS. 381 and 382 are also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 374. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 374, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 381 (c) or FIG. 382 (h) appears, and at the timing tf 2 shown in FIG. ) Or the production situation shown in FIGS. 382 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 374, there is a possibility that the automatic rendering function can not be activated, or the timing tf2 at which the automatic rendering function is activated is delayed according to the established rendering condition (rendering pattern) It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 374 in that the effect may be delayed or the effect will be started after the operation while the bar display remains. In addition, in the example of this effect, the above-described other example regarding FIG. 374 may be applied. In this effect example, in addition to the bar display, the post-operation effect may be started with the haze image imitating the operation means remaining. In addition, when the effect is started after the operation while the overhead image imitating the operation means is left, the overhead image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 379 and 378.

  Also in this example of production, as in the case of the example of production shown in FIG. 374, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (timing tf2 to tf3 ) And the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the time the bar display is not displayed (timing tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time desirable.

  In addition, also in this effect example, when the effect after operation is started while leaving the bar display, a stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 379 and 378 may be performed.

  In addition, the time from the occurrence of the second acceptance effect to the automatic occurrence of the effect acceptance and the bar display not being displayed is from the time from the occurrence of the first acceptance effect to the automatic occurrence of the effect acceptance It is desirable to set as a short time. According to such a configuration, it is made clear that the second reception effect is not automatically generated at a relatively early timing when the bar display is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 381 (d). (In the case of the second reception effect, it should already be hidden), so that it is possible to enjoy the remaining effective period while being aware of the possibility of being the first reception effect.

  In this example, when the reception effect for which the automatic effect function is not activated is regarded as the third reception effect, the effect pattern (FIGS. 382 (l) and (m)) for generating the third reception effect is not necessarily prepared. May be.

  The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be sequentially generated within one symbol variation. However, when the second reception effect is executed for a relatively short time until the automatic effect function is activated, the first reception effect can occur before the symbol is stopped, When the first reception effect is executed for a relatively long time until the automatic effect function is activated, the second reception effect cannot be generated until the symbol is stopped thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that the time until the effect is accepted by the execution of the first acceptance effect is relatively long is at a relatively early timing when the second acceptance effect occurs. It is expected that the situation where the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the effect receptionist of will be suitably suppressed.

  Also in the production example, the cocoon image simulating the operation means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. When the first mode with a low degree of expectation appears, the automatic performance function is not necessarily activated (third reception effect). When the second mode with a high degree of expectation appears, the automatic performance function is necessarily activated. (First reception effect or second reception effect).

  In the production example, when the first reception production (see FIGS. 381 (c) to (f)) occurs and when the second reception production (see FIGS. 382 (h) to (k)) occurs. When the third reception effect is generated (see FIGS. 382 (l) and (m)) and when the effect is received, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)) Is supposed to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 381 (c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 382 (h) to (k)) occurs, Different post-operation effects may be performed when the reception is performed when the reception is performed (see FIGS. 382 (l) and (m)).

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 381 and FIG. 382, after operation is performed with the bar display remaining, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function or when the effective period is ended without the automatic effect function being activated. The effect was made to appear or the effect was not started after the operation was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Precursor effects that also function as effects to indicate whether they are automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic effect means", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, an operation opportunity is given to the player There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of disappearing may be lost, and that it may become a mere display effect that only a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, non-automatic reception effects not targeted for the “automatic effect function” and automatic reception effects targeted for the “automatic effect function” can be respectively generated. That is, in this case, since the effect reception does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic performance function” has occurred, there may be cases where it is not operated as a result of misrecognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunity to receive the production, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a special manner, an automatic reception function is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is made possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game due to the loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception without understanding whether the game is activated.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the prognostic effect is executed in the special mode, an automatic reception effect in which the receptional effect corresponding to the prognostic effect is an object of the “automatic effect function”. Even if it is possible to recognize that it will be executed, the indication effect is ended, and when the reception effect (automatic reception effect) is actually generated (effective period), the reception effect is “automatic effect It is made difficult to recognize which of the automatic reception effect directed to the function and the non-automatic reception effect not directed to the "automatic effect function". For example, in any of the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, displaying the same operation means as the operation target and displaying a schematic image imitating the operation means, a bar display with the same length of gauge amount, etc. It will be difficult to recognize which reception effect is occurring.

  According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which aspect the precursor effect is being executed, whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is once started. It is difficult to recognize. Accordingly, it is expected that the tension until the reception of the effect is automatically generated is suitably maintained while the effect indicating whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated is executed. .

  FIGS. 383 to 385 are diagrams showing an example of an effect which is suggested whether or not a reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated is generated depending on the aspect of the adversary effect. Here also, although an example of rendering when the automatic rendering function can be activated (automatic rendering mode or a gaming machine in a state in which automatic rendering can always be performed, etc.) will be described, in this rendering example Since the reception effect that is not considered to be activated can also be generated, the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed.

  In FIG. 383 (a), the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state Shows the production situation that formed the.

  FIG. 383 (b) shows a presentation reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 383 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state) Indicates a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition is being suggested, suggesting that it will soon be permitted.

  Here, the prognostic effect shown in FIG. 383 (b) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 385 (a)) arrives, and a simulated image imitating the operation button 410 to be operated is It is displayed as an effect image (special aspect) that moves so as to make a vortex toward a place that appears later. Then, when the accompaniment effect is executed in such a special mode, an automatic reception effect to be an object of the "automatic effect function" is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the adjective effect, Thus, it is possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic effect function” is activated in the subsequent reception effects during the period in which the indication effects are performed. In addition, although a display such as "auto button!" Is also displayed in the prelude effect according to this effect example, this may not necessarily be displayed.

  In FIG. 383 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 383 (b) and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 385 (a)) comes, the effect performed based on the result of the big hit determination Indicates a first determination condition (a presentation pattern in which a presentation result shown in FIG. 383 (e) described later appears) or a second determination condition (a presentation pattern in which a presentation result shown in FIG. 383 (f) described below). It is depicted that the reception effect where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has just started.

  In this production situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  And as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 383 (c), the effect reception is automatically generated (“automatic effect function” is activated) when a predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player. The same post-operation effects appear when the player's operation is performed. However, although it will be described later, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 383 (c), is there an automatic reception rendering in which the “automatic rendering function” is activated or a non-automatic in which the “automatic rendering function” is not activated? It is difficult to recognize whether reception effects are occurring. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which aspect the indication effect is being executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is once started. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is preferable to maintain a sense of tension until the reception of presentation is automatically generated while performing the presentation (prediction presentation of the special aspect) indicating whether or not the “automatic presentation function” is activated. Is expected.

  And in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period set to allow the reception of the presentation, and the operation button 410 is operated at a predetermined timing tg3 (see FIG. 385) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic performance function is activated. FIG. 383 (d) shows that at timing tg3, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated, and when the automatic rendering function is activated, the acceptance of the rendering is permitted. The same change as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set to be set is produced on the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 383 (e)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 383 (f)) in which the intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) operates. ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example (including an effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 384), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any mode (FIGS. 383 (e) and (f)). , “Bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted” is not hidden and is kept after this, and the post-operation effect is started. That is, although detailed description is omitted, in this example of production (including the production part described later with reference to FIG. 384), the production reception is automatically performed after the period during which the production reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different time until occurrence are prepared, and by checking how much gauge remaining is left at the time when the post-operation effect is started, It is possible to recognize whether the reception effect is “the first reception effect and the second reception effect whose time from when the period during which the effect reception is allowed (effective period) occurs until when the effect reception is automatically generated” It is supposed to be. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. In this production example as well, the above-described configuration (“bar display” is not hidden but is maintained in the state of “post-operation production that suggests the type of reception effect automatically accepted” is also maintained. You may make it employ | adopt suitably also about each structure other than making an effect | play after operation).

  In addition, in the example of this effect (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 384), the overhead image display described in the item of “post-operation effect in which the automatically accepted operation object is suggested” is left You may make it employ | adopt the structure of starting presentation after operation as it is. In this case, each configuration other than the above-described configuration (starting the post-operation effect while leaving the haze image display) described in the same item may be adopted as appropriate. In this case, the configuration for generating the post-operation effect while leaving the bar display hidden is not necessarily adopted and may be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 383 (a) (here in the reach state but may be the non reach state) is being executed, FIG. 383 (b) Instead of the admonition effect of the special mode shown in the production situation where the admonition effect of the specific aspect shown in FIG. 384 (g) appears (a third judgment condition (figure described later in the presentation judgment performed based on the result of the big hit judgment) An effect pattern in which the effect result shown in 384 (j) appears, or a fourth determination condition (an effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 384 (k, described later) appears), or a fifth determination condition (FIG. There are cases where the production situation) in the case where the production pattern (in which the production situation shown in l) and (m) appears is satisfied.

  Here, the prognostic effect shown in FIG. 384 (g) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 385 (a) and (b)) arrives, and the operation button 410 to be operated is simulated The two simulated images are displayed as effects (a specific aspect) until they approach and overlap with each other, but in the precursor effect, the image representing the operation button 410 to be operated is not necessarily used. It is also good. Then, when the accompaniment effect is executed in such a specific mode, an automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the abbrd effect, and in the “automatic effect function”. There is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the accompaniment effect, so that during the accompaniment effect operation is performed during this accompaniment effect, the "automatic performance function" It is not possible to grasp in advance whether or not In addition, in the precursor effect according to this effect example, a display such as “auto button?” Appears, but this need not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 384 (h) shows an effect situation when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 384 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 385 (a) has arrived. It is depicted that the receptionist presentation with the opportunity has just started.

  In this production situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  And, as described above, in the case of the reception effect shown in FIG. 384 (h), the case where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (the “automatic effect function” is activated) even if there is no operation by the player. There is a case where the effect reception is not generated (the "automatic effect function" is not activated) within the effective period if the player does not perform the operation. And, as described above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 384 (h), the button image BTG (the overhead image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 and the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted The bar display which shows each is only displayed, and it is made difficult to distinguish with the production condition shown to FIG. 383 (c). This makes it possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension until the reception of presentation is automatically generated while performing the presentation (prediction presentation of the special aspect) that suggests that the "automatic presentation function" is activated. Expected.

  In this regard, when an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated has occurred, when the timing tg3 (see FIG. 385 (a)) arrives without any operation by the player, As shown in 384 (i), a rendering situation appears in which the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. It will Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 384 (j)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) operates, and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 384 (k)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, even in this example of the effect, even if the effect is performed after operation in any of the modes (Fig. 384 (j) and (k)), "the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is permitted. The “bar display” indicates that the post-operation effect is started without being hidden. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as described above, in this production example, the indication effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 384 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 384 (h) are sequentially displayed. Even if there is an operation by the player, the effect reception may not be generated within the effective period (the "automatic effect function" is not activated). In this case, when the timing tg4 arrives without any operation by the player, as shown in FIGS. 384 (l) and 385 (b), the automatic presentation function is not activated and the reception is performed. An effect situation (at the time of selection of an effect pattern according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) in which the effective period as the effect ends is to appear.

  That is to say, in this case, when the prognostic effect of the specific aspect (see FIG. 384 (g)) is performed, the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed in the reception effect corresponding to the prognostic effect. In other words, there are cases where the production reception is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 384 (i) to (k)) and when the production is not automatically generated (see FIGS. 384 (l) and (m)). Therefore, it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 384 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is accepted. While this is not permitted, "bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not activated by confirming that the effect situation that the effect after the operation did not occur even though the gauge remaining amount was “0” occurred. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In the drawing shown in FIG. 384 (m), “?” Is made to appear, but no effect change may be made to occur either.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 374, the time from the automatic generation of effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (FIG. 385 (a) The indicated timings tg3 to tg4) and the time until the bar display is not displayed from the timing when the period originally set as the effect reception period is ended (timing tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 385 (a)) Are preferably set as the same length of time.

  In addition, also in this effect example, when the effect after operation is started while leaving the bar display, a stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 379 and 378 may be performed.

  In addition, the time when the bar display is left when the automatic rendering function is activated (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 385 (a)) and the time when the bar display is left when the automatic rendering function is not activated ( It is desirable that the timings tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG.

  About the above-mentioned non-automatic reception effects (Fig. 384 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the above automatic reception effects (Fig. 383 (b) to (f)) May occur in the However, when the non-automatic reception effect is performed, the automatic reception effect may be generated after that, but when the automatic reception effect is performed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the automatic reception effect being executed may lose the opportunity for the occurrence of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Also in the production example, the cocoon image simulating the operation means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. And about the 1st mode with a low degree of expectation, although it may be displayed in any of a receptionist effect in which an automatic production function is activated, and a reception effect in which an automatic production function is not activated, about a 2nd mode with a high degree of expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated is occurring.

  In the above example of production, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 383 (d) to (f)) generated through a prelude effect of a special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 384 (i) of FIG. 384) generated through a prelude effect of a specific mode. (See (k)) and non-automatic reception effects (see FIGS. 384 (l) and (m)) that occur after the sign effect of the specific mode, the same post-operation effects ( For example, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (strap) is performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 383 (d) to (f)) that occurs after a prelude effect of a special mode and an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 384 (i) to (k) of FIG. )) And a non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 384 (l) and (m)) that occurs after a predecessor effect of a specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effect is accepted. You may

  In the above example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 383 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special mode and an automatic reception effect which occurs after the aura of the specific mode (FIG. 384 (i) For the non-automatic reception effects (see 384 (l) and (m)) which occur through the precursor effects of the specific aspect (see (k)) and the adjective effects of the specific aspect, the sign changes at the same timing tg1 after the symbol variation is started The production is started and the reception production is started at the same timing tg2, but the start timings are not necessarily the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed with different effect patterns.

  The effect time may be different between the warning effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 383 (b) and the warning effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 384 (g). For example, for the special effect shown in FIG. 383 (b), a relatively long production time is used so that it is difficult to overlook this, and for the specific effect shown in FIG. 384 (c), this is overlooked. If the presentation time is relatively short so that it is easy, it will be easy to overlook only when a sign production that is inconvenient for the player appears. Can be suppressed.

  Although the above-described effect example has been described as the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 383 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special mode (see FIG. 383 (d) to (f)) The operation button 410 is an operation target in FIGS. 384 (i) to (k) and non-automatic reception effects (see FIGS. 384 (l) and (m)) that occur through a prophetic effect in a specific mode. You may do it. Furthermore, in the case of the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 383 (d) to (f)) which occurs through the aura of the special aspect (see FIGS. 383 (d) to (f)), the case where the reception effect targeting the sword decorative body 5001 occurs and the operation button 410 There may be cases where there is a reception effect with an operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect for operating the sword decorative body 5001, the overhead image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the sign effect (special aspect, specific aspect) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part (for example, a part of a spiral effect) of the precursor effect is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, and it gradually disappears, Even after the effective period is started, it is possible to grasp that the automatic performance function is activated in the early stage. Note that among the prognostic effects of the special aspect and the prognostic effects of the specific aspect, only the prognostic effects of the special aspect may be left after the reception effect is started.

  In this effect example, when a precursor effect (FIG. 384 (g)) of a specific aspect appears, a non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the “automatic effect function” always occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the adjective effect. By doing this, it may be possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic rendering function” is not activated in the subsequent reception rendering during the period in which the precursor rendering is performed. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 384 (h) is generated, if the operation by the player is not performed, FIGS. 384 (l) and (m) will sequentially appear, and FIG. 384 (i) (K)) will be omitted.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 383 to FIG. 385, the bar display remains after operation when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period ends without activating the automatic effect function. The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Registration effect that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be accepted automatically]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic effect means", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, an operation opportunity is given to the player There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of disappearing may be lost, and that it may become a mere display effect that only a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the prognostic effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic acceptance effect not subject to the "automatic effect function" is generated as the acceptance effect corresponding to the accompaniment effect. In some cases, an automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function” may occur. That is, in this case, since the effect reception does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic performance function” has occurred, there may be cases where it is not operated as a result of misrecognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunity to receive the production, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the warning effect is executed in a specific manner, the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect occurs in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect. Although it is difficult to recognize, within the effective period after the reception effect is started, a display that can recognize that the reception effect is generated by the automatic reception effect can appear. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception without understanding whether the automatic production function is activated.

  FIG. 386 to FIG. 388 are diagrams showing an example of effect that makes it possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is activated only in the acceptance effect among the pro-event effect and the acceptance effect. Here also, although an example of rendering when the automatic rendering function can be activated (automatic rendering mode or a gaming machine in a state in which automatic rendering can always be performed, etc.) will be described, in this rendering example Since the reception effect that is not considered to be activated can also be generated, the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed.

  FIG. 386 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state is reached. Shows the production situation that formed the.

  FIG. 386 (b) shows that an effect is received (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 386 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). This shows a production situation in which a precursor production suggesting that is soon to be permitted.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 386 (b) is generated when the timing th1 (see FIG. 388 (a)) arrives, and two examples simulating the operation button 410 to be operated. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the images approach each other and overlap. In particular, in this production example, the first image that displays “reliable” suggesting that the “automatic production function” is activated, and the “automatic production function” is activated or concealed. It is displayed as an effect (a specific aspect) until the second imitation image on which the display such as "dodokidoki" is displayed approaches and overlaps each other. When the warning effect shown in FIG. 386 (b) appears, as the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect, an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated occurs, and the “automatic effect function” is Since there is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not activated occurs, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed while the precursor effect is performed. It is difficult to recognize what happens. In this precursor effect, the simulated image imitating the operation button 410 that is the operation target does not necessarily have to be displayed. Which of the automatic reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect occurs after the precursor effect is performed? As long as it is difficult to recognize the

  FIG. 386 (c) is a first schematic image in which “safe” is displayed indicating that the “automatic rendering function” is activated as a result of the precursor performance shown in FIG. 386 (b). , Among the second simulated images that are displayed as “Dokidoki” that is activated or concealed, the first simulated image that is displayed as “reliable” is left, The production situation in which the second image, which is displayed as “Dokidoki”, is not displayed (the first determination result (the production result shown in FIG. The production pattern that appears) or the second determination result (the production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 386 (f) described later appears) is shown. Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 388 (a)) arrives, and at the timing th2, a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started. It will be done.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first schematic image displayed as “reliable” as the button image BTG (the overhead image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is in the display area And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appear. It is like that. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this respect, when the first image (reliable) is displayed in the reception effect, “the reception of the effect is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives even without any operation by the player (the“ automatic effect function ” Only when the player is in a situation where an “automatic reception effect where the same post-operation effect appears as when the player performs the operation” is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the first image (reliable) is displayed when the reception effect is generated, it is confirmed that the “automatic effect function” is being executed as an automatic reception effect. It will be possible to recognize.

  According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 386 (b)) is being performed, the “automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated” is the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is possible to grasp that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic performance function is activated" is being executed when the reception effect is started, while keeping the subsequent occurrences secret. Become so. In other words, in this case, until the reception effect is started, the “automatic effect function” is kept secret until the reception effect starts. By making it possible to grasp this, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity for the production reception without understanding whether the “automatic production function” is enabled.

  In this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period set to allow the production reception, and at a predetermined timing th3 within the valid period (see FIG. 388 (a)). It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated. FIG. 386 (d) depicts a situation where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at timing th3, and the presentation acceptance is permitted when the automatic rendering function is activated. The effect is the same as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 386 (e)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 386 (f)). ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 387), even if the effect after operation is executed in any manner (FIGS. 386 (e) and (f)). The haze image imitating the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is not hidden, and the post-operation effect is started in a state in which it is maintained. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is performed in response to the “effect reception for the operation button 410”. In addition, since there is a description such as “reliable”, it is possible to recognize that the “post-operation effect is automatically generated by the automatic effect function being activated”.

  In this effect example, for a period in which the effect reception is permitted, as shown in FIG. 388 (a), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the effect reception is automatically generated at timing th3 which is automatically generated. Will be terminated. Then, after the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 being displayed, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) is not displayed before the timing th6 at which the effect after the operation is ended comes.

  According to such a configuration, a bird's-eye view image imitating the operation means (here, the operation button 410) which has been the operation target is displayed within a period from when the effect after operation is started until it is ended. A period (timing th3 to th5) and a period (timing th5 to th6) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, even when the post-operation effect is started with the haze image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target being displayed, the haze image is not displayed. It is expected that the tension feeling due to the fact that the post-operation effect must be confirmed before being performed is suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 386 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 387 (g) is generated instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 386 (c). There is also a case where it is possible.

  That is, in FIG. 387 (g), as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 386 (b) being performed, a display of “relief” indicating that the “automatic effect function” is activated is displayed. Among the images and the second imitation image on which the “automatic rendering function” is activated or concealed, the second imitation image on which the “imitation” display is made is left. , The first situation where the display of "relief" is made is not displayed (the third judgment result (the effect shown in FIG. 387 (i) described later in the judgment of the effect performed based on the result of the big hit judgment) An effect pattern in which the result appears, or a fourth determination result (an effect pattern in which the effect result in FIG. 387 (j) described later appears), or a fifth determination result (in FIG. 387 (k) or (l) Production patterns appearing It shows the case) the emission) is obtained. Such a rendering situation appears when timing th2 (see FIG. 388 (a) or (b)) arrives, and at this timing th2, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The reception effect will be started.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, a second schematic image in which a display such as “fuzzy” is made as a button image BTG (an overhead image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area. And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appear. It is like that. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this regard, when the second image (dokidoki) is displayed in the reception effect, “the reception of the effect is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player (the“ automatic effect function ” Enabled), when there is a situation where an “automatic reception effect where the same post-operation effect appears as when an operation by the player is performed” is executed, and “there is no operation reception without an operation by the player” In addition, there is both a situation where a “non-automatic reception effect where no post-operation effect is executed” is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the second simulated image (pounding) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated. To be able to understand and to maintain tension.

  According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 386 (b)) is being performed, and while the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 387 (g)) is being performed. In both cases, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the “automatic rendering function” is activated, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

  When the reception detection shown in FIG. 387 (g) is executed as “automatic reception effect in which the automatic performance function is enabled”, the operation by the player is not performed and the timing th3 (FIG. 388 ( When (see a)) arrives, as shown in FIG. 387 (h), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated now appears. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. It will Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 387 (i)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”is operated, and a high expectation mode effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 387 (j)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, even if rendering after operation is executed in any mode (FIGS. 387 (i) and (j)), a bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 ) Is not hidden and is maintained so that post-operation effects are started. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it can be recognized that the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”. , "Dokidoki" and the post-operation effect as a result of the automatic production reception while it was kept secret that it was in the state of "automatic reception production is activated to enable the automatic production function" Will be able to recognize that they are in a situation where

  On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 387 (g) is executed as “non-automatic reception effect not activated automatic presentation function”, the timing th4 (FIG. 388 (FIG. 388 (FIG. When b) is received, as shown in FIG. 387 (k) and FIG. 388 (b), the presentation situation in which the effective period as the reception presentation is ended without the automatic presentation function being activated. (When the effect pattern is selected according to the fifth determination result obtained) appears.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 387 (l), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is received. Is not permitted, the “saddle image imitating the operation button 410 (button image BTG)” is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, the post-operation effect is not performed as a result of the fact that the effect reception was not automatically generated while it was kept secret that "the automatic reception effect where the automatic effect function is activated" has occurred. You will be able to recognize the situation. In addition, although “?” Appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 387 (l), no effect change may be caused.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 374, the time from the automatic generation of effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (FIG. 388 (a) Timings th3 to th4 shown) and the time from the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period until the haze image is hidden (timing th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 388 (a)) It is desirable to set as the same length of time.

  In addition, the time when the overhead image is left when the automatic rendering function is activated (timing th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 388 (a)) and the time when the overhead image is left when the automatic rendering function is not activated ( It is desirable to set the same time as the timings th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 388 (b).

  The non-automatic reception effects (FIG. 387 (g), (k), (l)) and the automatic reception effects (FIG. 386 (b) to (f)) may occur sequentially in one symbol variation You may do so. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is performed, the automatic reception effect may be generated after that, but when the automatic reception effect is performed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the automatic reception effect being executed may lose the opportunity for the occurrence of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Also in the production example, the cocoon image simulating the operation means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. And about the 1st mode with low degree of expectation, although it can be displayed in both the reception stage where the automatic production function is activated and the reception production where the automatic production function is not activated, about the second mode with high degree of expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated is occurring.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 386 (c)) in which a first simulated image displayed as “reliable” is displayed and a second simulated image displayed in a “dokidoki” are displayed. There is an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 387 (h)) and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 387 (k)) in which a second image with a display such as “Dokidoki” is displayed. When done, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)) are performed. However, an automatic reception effect (refer to FIG. 386 (c)) in which the first simulated image displayed as "safe" is displayed and an automatic reception in which the second simulated image displayed as "dokidoki" is displayed. When the production is accepted for the production (see FIG. 387 (h)) and the non-automatic reception production (see FIG. 387 (k)) in which the second simulated image that displays “dokidoki” is displayed. The effects may be performed after each different operation.

  In the above presentation example, an automatic reception presentation effect (see FIG. 386 (c)) in which the first mock image on which the display of "relief" is displayed is displayed and a second mock image on which the display of "flickering" is displayed Pattern changes for automatic reception effects (see FIG. 387 (h)) and non-automatic reception effects (see FIG. 387 (k)) in which a second mock image on which a display such as “dokidoki” is displayed is displayed. Although the indication effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, these start timings may not necessarily be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed with different effect patterns.

  A reception effect (see FIG. 386 (c)) in which a first mock image with a display such as "relief" is displayed and a reception effect in which a second mock image with a display such as "glowing" is displayed (FIG. 387) (See (h) and (k)), the length of the valid period in the reception effect may be different. In particular, in the reception effect (refer to FIG. 387 (h) and (k)) in which the second mock image on which the display such as "flickering" is displayed is displayed, the first mock image on which the display of "safety" is displayed is displayed. By setting the effective time shorter than the reception effect (see FIG. 386 (c)), tension in the effective period can be maintained more suitably.

  In addition, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 387 (h)) in which a second mock image with a display such as “Pokidoki” is displayed and a non-automatic display in which a second mock image with a display such as “Pakidoki” is displayed. The length of the effective period in the reception effect may be different between the reception effect (see FIG. 387 (k)). In particular, in a non-automatic reception effect where the "automatic effect function" is not activated (see FIG. 387 (k)), rather than an automatic reception effect where the "automatic effect function" is activated (see FIG. 387 (h)) By setting a short effective time, tension in the effective period can be more suitably maintained.

  Although the above-described effect example has been described as the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case of an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 386 (c)) in which the first mock image displaying "relief" is displayed (refer to FIG. 386 (c)), the sword decorative body 5001 is targeted for operation and the second displaying An automatic reception effect (see FIG. 387 (h)) in which a mock image is displayed and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 387 (k)) in which a second mock image in which a display such as "dookidoki" is displayed In this case, the operation button 410 may be an operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect for operating the sword decorative body 5001, the overhead image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the sign effect (special aspect, specific aspect) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, only for a predetermined time after the start of the reception effect, at least a part of the sign effect (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) is left in the form of being entirely or partially overlapped with the bag image, and this is gradually If it disappears, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp that the automatic rendering function is activated in the early stage, even after the effective period of the reception effect is started. It should be noted that a reception effect (see FIG. 386 (c)) in which a first image with a display such as “reliable” is displayed (see FIG. 386 (c)) and a reception effect in which a second image with a display such as “Throws” is displayed At least a part (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) of the aura effect overlaps with the overhead image in whole or in part only in any of the reception effects shown in FIGS. 387 (h) and (k)). It may be left in the form.

  In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second simulated image that is displayed as “Dokidoki” is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic effect function”. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 387 (g) is generated, if the operation is not performed by the player, FIGS. 387 (k) and (l) appear sequentially, and FIG. 387 (h) ~ (J))) will be omitted.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 386 to FIG. 388, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the operation is performed with the overhead image left The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the overhead image remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. Is desirable.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 386 to FIG. 388, a second imitation image in which a prophetic effect corresponding to a reception effect in which a first imitation image on which a display such as "safety" is displayed is displayed is displayed The sign effect corresponding to the reception effect that is displayed is the same. However, under the condition that a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, a normal effect (FIG. 386 (b) is performed as a precursor rendering corresponding to a reception rendering in which a first mock image on which a display such as “relief” is made is displayed The content of the production different from that of the reference) may appear. For example, if a flame effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is high is added to the accompaniment effect, "the degree of expectation is high" and "the automatic rendering function is enabled" are predetermined. Since it is suggested in advance only when the rendering conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while maintaining tension when the effective period occurs.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 386 to FIG. 388, a habit imitating the operation means to be operated when the effect reception is generated or the effective period is ended without activating the automatic effect function. The display mode of the image is changed, and the effect is started after the operation (or the effect is not started after the operation) in the state in which the model image is displayed in the changed display mode, but the effective period After the operation, the effect may be started (or the effect may not be started after the operation) in the state where the overhead view image is displayed with the display mode and the display position in the period).

  A post-operation effect that is started while displaying a spear image imitating the operation means to be operated is a display effect in the effect display device 1600, a light effect by a lamp provided in the game board 5, an effect by sound, and It may be any one of the movable effects by the decorative role, or may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, the first post-operation effect that is started while displaying the eyelid image simulating the operation means to be operated, and the timing th5 when the eyelid image simulating the operation means to be operated is hidden A second post-operation effect to be started thereafter may be respectively executed.

  Also in the production examples shown in FIGS. 386 to 388, as in the case of the production examples described above, the bag image imitating the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed and the dynamic display is maintained. You may make it start the post-operation production in the state performed.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 386 to 388, when the reception effect is performed by adding a notation such as “relief” or “dokidoki” to the cocoon image and changing the mode as the cocoon image. We suggested that "automatic presentation function" be activated. However, a special image that is displayed only when the “automatic rendering function” is activated may be displayed within a period during which the reception rendering is performed (valid period). You do not have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image that is displayed separately from the haze image, but to start the post-operation effect while leaving it untouched. Similarly to this, the notation “dokidoki” may be displayed separately from the cocoon image, and the post-operation effect may be started with the image remaining (or the post-operation effect is not started).

  In the above example, the display of “Reliable” and “Dokidoki” is changed during the period when the reception effect is performed. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode (light emission mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) of the operation means to be operated, an automatic reception effect is generated in which the “automatic effect function” is activated. You may be made to suggest whether you are doing. Alternatively, during the period when the reception effect is performed, both the display of "relief", "surrounding" and the mode of the operation means to be operated (such as the light emission mode and the operation state (presence or absence of vibration)) are differentiated. In this case, one of the display such as "reliable" or "deep" or the mode of the operation means to be operated (such as the light emission mode or the operating state (presence or absence of vibration)) It is desirable that only the state be continued and the other end the state and the post-operation effect be started in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

  In the above example, when an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated occurs, a display such as "relief" is made in a period before the occurrence of the predictive effect in the automatic reception effect. A specific display mode that suggests that a reception effect in which the first schematic image is displayed may appear. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode be hidden at least before the reception effect is started, such as within a period from when the precursor effect is started to when it is ended.

  In the above presentation example, after a specific image (drowsy) is temporarily displayed which suggests that the “automatic effect function” may not be activated within a period in which the adjective effect is being performed, the specified image (deep throat) is The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (reliable) which has been hidden until the start. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the "automatic presentation function" is enabled within the period in which the admonition effect is being performed, and the tension when the active period occurs is suitably maintained. Will be able to

[Improve performance using the automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a device for enhancing the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be provided by creating such novel rendering using the “automatic presentation function”. I have to.

  FIG. 389 is a diagram for describing a novel rendering effect using an automatic rendering function. More specifically, the reception effect is generated based on the number of suspension (0 to 3) maintaining the unexecuted state when the symbol variation is newly digested, or the automatic effect function is activated. It is a distribution table of random numbers to be provided for the effect determination of the object. The total number of random numbers is "100", and one of these random numbers is acquired, and the reception effect is generated by referring to which distribution table the acquired random numbers are distributed to. An effect determination as to whether the automatic effect function is to be activated is performed. Also in this case, an example of effect when the automatic effect function can be activated (automatic effect mode or a gaming machine in which automatic effect can always be performed) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 389, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first performance situation (for example, specified) is still small (the game has just started). The ratio that this is a “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation (direction pattern) digested when the number is less than “2” However, the reception effect is within the symbol variation (effect pattern) digested when the second effect situation (for example, more than the specific number “2”) is high (the game is continued to some extent). The control according to the effect is performed so that the rate is higher than the ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" when the event occurs.

  In addition, here, in symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is still small, to relatively increase the ratio of generating “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” On the other hand, in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the ratio for generating the “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” is relatively lowered. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is also the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is small. While the generation rate is relatively high, the generation rate is relatively low in the design variation (effect pattern) started when there is a large number of suspensions. However, the degree of change in the occurrence rate is considered to be milder (mild) than in the case of non-automatic reception effects that are not targeted by the “automatic effect function”, and when the reception effects occur, The ratio of “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the effect function” is made lower as the number of holds increases.

  According to such a configuration, when the reception effect is generated, the ratio of the non-automatic reception effect to the non-automatic reception effect is higher when the reception number is generated than when the number of holdings is small. Therefore, when the game has just been started and the number of reservations is small, it is possible to increase the player's participation in the game and to encourage the enthusiasm. Also, if the game is continued to some extent and the number of pending is high, the proportion of non-automatic reception effects will be low, so another stage of performance ( It will be possible to provide a calm stage effect). Thus, by changing the stage performance related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained without being bored.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the player is bored in the above-mentioned other stage performance (the stage performance with calmness) and quits the game, the stage number is reduced, so that the stage for the participation in the game is enhanced. Since it comes to reappear, it is expected that such a change in stage effects will discourage game interruption.

  An important point as an invention relating to this production example is to change the rate at which the “automatic production function” is activated by increasing or decreasing the number of holds, thereby changing the production performance of the “automatic production function”. It is to produce. Therefore, the generation ratio of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation digested when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation digested when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how the rate at which the “automatic effect function” is activated for the reception effect changes when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation.

  For example, only "Non-automatic reception effect not targeted for automatic performance function" among "Non-automatic reception performance not targeted for automatic performance function" and "Automatic reception performance targeted for automatic performance function" The occurrence ratio differs between when the number of reservations is small and when the number of reservations is large, and for "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", the number of reservations is small The occurrence rate may be the same between a certain time and when the number of reservations is large. In other words, in this case, for the “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function”, for example, the random number distribution shown in FIG. In the pattern), the rate of occurrence is relatively increased, and in the case of pattern variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the rate of occurrence is relatively decreased. However, with regard to automatic reception effects targeted for the “automatic effect function”, the same generation ratio (for example, the value of “automatic reception function” shown in FIG. 389 is held, regardless of the numerical value of the number of holdings) Regardless of the number, all are set to “20”.

  According to such a configuration, it is ensured that the same post-operation effect as when there is an operation is performed even without the operation by the player (proportion of occurrence of "automatic reception effect subject to automatic effect function") As for this, it will be made uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the generation ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" is changed according to the number of suspension, the player does not depend on the situation of the game for the operation forgotten Security can be provided, and a sense of security is created.

  In addition, for “non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic performance function”, there are a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception effect generation, different post-operation effects, different operation targets, etc.) In addition to the case where a non-automatic reception effect is generated only in any one of the production modes based on the result of the production determination at the time of symbol variation, the non-automatic reception production is sequentially performed multiple times in two or more production modes. It may be generated. In other words, in this case, the occurrence rate of “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function” means the rate at which at least one of these effect modes occurs within the symbol variation execution period.

  In addition, for "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception effect generation, different post-operation effects, different operation targets, etc.) Are prepared, and the automatic reception effect is generated sequentially in two or more effect modes in addition to the case where the automatic reception effect is generated only in any one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect determination at the time of symbol variation. There may be cases. In other words, in this case, the occurrence ratio of “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function” means a ratio in which at least one of the effect modes is generated within the symbol variation execution period.

  However, when the non-automatic reception effect is performed, the automatic reception effect may be generated after that, but when the automatic reception effect is performed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the automatic reception effect being executed may lose the opportunity for the occurrence of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, only one of “non-automatic acceptance rendering not targeted for the automatic rendering function” and “automatic acceptance rendering targeted for the automatic rendering function” is performed within a period in which symbol variation is performed. Although described as an example of occurrence, “a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 389, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value “without reception effect” and the distribution value “with reception effect” exceeds “100”.

  Further, in the above example of production, the operation means to be operated is at least one of “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function”. There may be more than one. For example, a random number value of “20” that is assigned to “automatically accept function” when the number of holds is “0” is given to the first operating means, and the second operating means On the other hand, it may be further distributed according to the case where an operation opportunity is given.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether or not to generate a “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and the determination of whether or not to generate the “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” are performed when the pattern changes It is desirable to be executed as one of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination.

  As described above, in the above-described example of rendering, when there is a large number of reservations, "non-automatic reception rendering not targeted for the automatic rendering function" is difficult to occur. In this regard, when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs in spite of such a large number of holds, the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs when the hold number is low, If the rate at which the "automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function" is further generated is high within the one symbol variation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, only when the number of reservations is large, The “non-automatic reception effect” can be made to function as an effect that suggests the occurrence of the “automatic reception effect” (an effect that suggests before the sign effect for the automatic reception effect). Depending on the situation, it is possible to vary the performance of the automatic performance function. In addition, as a method of increasing the rate at which “automatic reception effect” is generated within the symbol variation in which “non-automatic reception effect” is generated, “automatic reception effect” itself is not raised but the generation ratio of itself is increased. It is desirable that the rendering condition for generating the "automatic reception effect" be easily established in response to the production condition for the "non-automatic reception effect" being satisfied.

  In addition, when there is a situation where the number of reservations is the largest (a situation where "non-automatic reception effect production" is the least likely to occur), if "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs, one of the symbol variations in which "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs The “automatic reception effect” may also be generated within. According to such a configuration, "non-automatic reception effect production" can be made to function as a prognostic effect for "automatic reception effect production", and also by this, it is possible to make the effect related to the automatic performance function different. become.

  A bird's-eye view image or a background image imitating the operation means in the situation (effective period) where the "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs and in the situation (effective period) where the "automatic reception acceptance effect" occurs It is desirable to make the display contents different. In this case, of the display images displayed when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period) and when the "automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period). It is desirable to generate an effect reception and leave an effect reception after operation while leaving this as non-display for at least a different part, and for this, “an operation whose operation object is suggested to be received automatically is indicated This is as described in the example of the “post-production”. If you want to generate effects and leave effects for different parts (such as bird's-eye images imitating the operation means) without making them non-displayed, then the "automatically received The configuration described in the “post-operation effects suggested” and other examples may be adopted as appropriate.

  About each structure mentioned above concerning the said production example (production improvement using an automatic production function) and its modification, the non-automatic reception production which is not made into the object of an automatic production function, and the automatic reception made into the object of an automatic production function You may make it apply with respect to each production example mentioned above which can produce each.

[Useless use of channels by automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot determination according to the winning, the channel to which sound data is to be assigned. In a situation where there is no space (a situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the fact that a special result is obtained, and this can not be output (or sounds already in playback state) There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment may be reduced by

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the process of causing the display effect to progress according to the specific effect pattern in the effect display device 1600 is performed, and the process of assigning and reproducing the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel is performed. Do. Then, when the display effect in the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is allocated to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state, this state The reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) is generated. As a result, when the effect reception is generated, the sound of "BGM reproduction" maintains the state of being output in the suppression mode or silence, while the big hit symbol (special display mode in the effect pattern) A special performance sound that suggests an expected degree of appearance is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output processing). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the effect reception, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. In this way, it is possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use in the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  Note that data related to various effect sounds such as a plurality of BGM data is stored in predetermined storage means, and various effect sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to channels. Become.

  By the way, when specific BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") according to a specific effect pattern is allocated to a channel and this is to be output in a suppression mode or silent, it is generally allocated to a channel It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound being played (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of changing the volume initial value defined in the sound data to reduce the same) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of “BGM playback” in advance so that the specific music is cued at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced. In short, considering that "the remaining time from the occurrence of the effect reception to the end of the symbol variation is also undefined", the length corresponding to the remaining time determined to be indeterminate at the timing when the effect reception occurs. It can be said that it is also difficult to newly assign BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") to a channel.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, processing concerning the sound output with a suppression mode or silence as compared to the other sections If the data content that defines that is to be performed is preset (stored as silent data) and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, It is made to become the time-series relation in which the effective period of production reception occurs in the partial section (special period). In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  As described above, “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern is a partial section (special period) when viewed in time series, and is output in a suppressed manner or silently compared to other sections. The data content (silence data etc.) that prescribes that such processing is to be performed will be set in advance, but the volume from the initial value is set in the "suppression mode or the state of silence output (special period)". The volume may also be reduced by adjustment. According to such a configuration, an adverse effect due to noise or the like from the channel to which BGM data is allocated can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific performance pattern is being played, in a section (normal section) different from the special section described above. Also, the reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) is generated.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a reception effect occurs in a situation where there is no vacant channel to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of empty channels is 0). When an operation by the player is accepted for the production, the production sound corresponding to the production reception is output in the form of stopping output of any production sound in the playback state, or according to the production reception It is necessary to stop the output of the produced sound itself. And in this case, there will be a production situation that lacks excitement, such as when the production sound is forcibly terminated or no production sound is played even though the production is accepted, such as when you are defeated in the big hit judgment Therefore, even on the player side, a consciousness (a consciousness that an operation reception should not be generated by an operation) that does not want to generate such an awkward performance situation works.

  Then, although the reception effect is generated, the operation by the player is not easily performed, and there is a concern that the improvement of the game entertainment can not be performed well. If you try to simply apply the above-mentioned "technique for automatically generating reception effects" against the player's intention of "does not want to generate effect reception", the game interest will be reduced conversely. It can also be done.

  On the other hand, as for the developer side, in the reception effect with confidence or conviction, regardless of the state of use of the channel, “The effect reception is generated by the player's active operation and the effect is given after the operation. It can be assumed that there is a speculation such as “I want you to have fun”.

  Therefore, as described above, in the above-described configuration, first, the special BGM effect sound can be output in a suppression mode or silence in a section from when the specific BGM data is allocated to the channel until the allocation is completed. There is a normal section different from the special section. In the normal section, “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” can be generated as the reception effect, and in the special section, “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” is received. It can be generated as a production.

  That is, in this case, in “a normal section in which a specific BGM effect sound can be output in a normal mode without being suppressed or silenced”, whether or not to generate an effect (predicting channel availability) Since the selection right is entrusted only to the player, the reception effect is automatically generated against the player's intention, such as “There may be no free channel, so do not generate the reception” Will be suitably avoided (preventing use of the channel by the automatic rendering function).

  On the other hand, in the “special BGM effect sound can be output in a suppression mode or silent mode”, an impression (as seen from the player side) as if the specific BGM effect sound deviated from the channel assignment and a margin was created in the empty channel Even if the channel feels empty). Therefore, it is possible to actively prompt the player to operate the game while removing the anxiety such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound". From the beginning, even if the player does not perform the operation, the reception effect is automatically generated. "If the effect reception is somehow generated, the next time the player will generate the effect reception by the operation of the player themselves" Can be encouraged to become.

  FIG. 390 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such a process is performed will be described with reference to FIG. Although the special section is described as a silent section in which silent data is set in this example of effect, the special section may be a suppressed section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

  As shown in FIG. 390 (a), during a period in which a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the effect determination is being executed, the timing tm11 corresponds to the specific effect pattern in which the effect has been developed. The sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already played back (here, stereo playback). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 390, one sound data (one sound) as a sound of “BGM playback” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and is in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 390 (a) and 390 (b), one sound data assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state ("BGM playback" sound) When tm 14 is reached, playback is made in a silent section in which silent data content (silence data) is set. As a result, the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific performance pattern can be set to a state in which it is output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel without performing volume adjustment from the initial value. .

  According to such a configuration, in the silent period after the timing tm14 occurs, an atmosphere is provided in which the channel usage state seems to have a margin as much as the sound of “BGM playback” seems to be removed from the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, an atmosphere in which there is no room in the channel usage status is provided as much as the “BGM playback” sound occupies the channel. Will be

  That is, although illustration is omitted, timing tm 14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of “BGM playback” (for example, a notice effect sound, an effect sound accompanying the occurrence of a valid period, a winning sound, etc.) In any of the subsequent silent sections and the normal section before the timing tm 14 occurs, they are respectively assigned to appropriate channels to be brought into a reproduction state. In particular, in a normal section, a plurality of sounds are often output at the same time in order to stimulate the effects or to suggest that the gaming situation such as winning or paying out has occurred, so how many channels are required It is difficult to know if it is in use (whether there is a spare channel or not), and combined with the fact that the sound of "BGM playback" is always in playback state, it seems that there is no spare channel usage status. A new atmosphere will be provided. Also, the reproduction channels "00" and "01" are dedicated channels for assigning the various error sounds described above, and the number of channels that can be used as effect sound is also reduced by this.

  Then, in this example, when the timing tm12 arrives in a normal section where the channel use status seems to be insufficient, the normal operation of giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) A reception effect is generated. As shown in FIGS. 390 (a) and (b), when an effect is accepted by the player performing an operation by the player within the operation effective period A (timing tm12 to tm13) with respect to the normal internal reception effect, as shown in FIGS. As one of the effects after the operation according to the effect reception, "special effect sound A" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "08" and "09" in the drawing) and reproduced. On the other hand, when all the channels to which “special effect sound A” can be assigned are in use at the time when the effect is accepted within the operation effective period A, any of the sounds in the reproduction state is forced along the way In this way, "special effect sound A" is assigned to the channel in the form of ending, or processing is not performed without assigning "special effect sound A" to the channel.

  However, as described above, in a normal section where there is no room for channel usage, some players may be aware that it should not generate an effect. Therefore, in this production example, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) that occurs in the normal section where there is no room in the channel usage status is referred to as “non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the automatic performance function”. Is supposed to generate. As a result, since the right to select whether or not to produce an effect within the operation valid period A is left to the player only, “there is no room for a free channel, so no effect is accepted. It is preferable to avoid automatically generating a reception effect against the player's intention such as “Let ’s do it” (preventing channel wastage using the automatic effect function).

  In other words, if the player does not perform an operation on the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A), the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) remains without generating an effect. Will be ended, and after the operation including the “special effect sound A”, any effect will not be executed, and the effect will be developed thereafter.

  On the other hand, in this rendering example, as described above, when the timing tm 14 comes, a silent section appears to be felt that there is room in the channel usage status. Then, when the timing tm 15 arrives in such a silent section, the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) for giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 etc.) is generated. The player is positively urged to be accepted by the operation by the player with anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output a special effect sound". That is also as described above. In addition, if production reception occurs in operation effective period B (timing tm15-tm16) to reception production in silence, as shown in Drawing 390 (a) and (b), after production according to the production reception, as for production As one, "special effect sound B" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "10" and "11" in the drawing) and reproduced.

  In this respect, with regard to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, the anxiety such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" has been removed In view of being in a state, this is to be generated as “automatic reception effect subject to automatic performance function”. That is, in this case, there is no intention that the player "does not generate an effect reception because there may not be enough free channels", so reception effect is automatically generated against the player's intention. Thus, the post-operation effect according to the effect reception within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can be surely executed while avoiding the occurrence of the sound appropriately.

  In addition, in the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, until a predetermined timing tm15a in the operation effective period B arrives (operation When the timing tm 15a arrives at the latest (when the automatic rendering function is activated), the effect acceptance always occurs. As shown in FIGS. 390 (a) and 390 (b), while the “special effect sound B” is in the playback state as one of the post-operation effects in response to such an effect reception, the “BGM playback” is performed. The relationship is such that a timing tm 17 at which the sound of "" changes from a silent section to a normal section comes.

  According to such a configuration, the silence interval of the specific sound data (sound of "BGM playback") is ended and others are added in the form of being incorporated into the "special effect sound B" being played back. Since the data content of the section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly restore the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is generated in a state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as silent data, reproduction of "special effect sound B" is started in the non-suppressed mode by high immediacy processing triggered by this. While causing the sound to be generated, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift in the BGM between the various effects and the timing of stopping the design after that. Thus, also in order to secretly return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, the above-mentioned in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is set as the target of the “automatic effect function. It can be said that it is important to generate it as “automatic reception effects”.

  In addition, within the operation effective period B (timing tm15 to tm16) according to this production example, the symbol to which “special effect sound B” can be assigned is not in use state, so that the symbol is being changed. Execution periods such as various advance notice effects are set respectively.

  FIG. 391 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 391, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) will be described in more detail.

  As described above, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is normally within a period during which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as "non-automatic reception effect not subject to automatic effect function". Although illustration is omitted, when the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is generated, a prophetic effect (for example, FIG. 382 (g) is suggested to give the player an operation opportunity. It is desirable that the precursor effect is executed as display content different from the precursor effect performed upon occurrence of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B).

  When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal internal reception effect occurs, the operation valid period A is ended due to the effect reception occurring accompanying the operation in the operation valid period A, or the operation valid period A is ended. The mode (or another example) described with reference to FIGS. 382 (h) and (l), for example, until the operation effective period A is ended while the operation is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. For example, an image prompting an operation or an image indicating the remaining time is displayed. Then, when an operation is performed within the operation effective period A and the effect reception occurs, in addition to the output of the “special effect sound A” as one of the effects after the operation, FIGS. 382 (j), (k Another post-operation rendering is further performed in the aspect (or another example) described with reference to FIG. In addition, when performing effects after operation in stages, it is desirable to first output "special effect sound A" first. On the other hand, when the operation effective period A is ended with no operation being performed in the operation effective period A and the effect reception being not generated, the mode (or its aspect described with reference to FIG. 382 (m), for example In other cases, etc., the rendering situation after the operation effective period A is ended will appear.

  Here, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm12 to the timing tm13 when "time Ta" has elapsed, and the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period When an effect is received within A), the “special effect sound A” is output over a “time Tc” longer than the “time Ta”.

  That is, in this case, even when the player performs an operation immediately after the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) occurs at timing tm12 and the effect reception occurs, the “special effect sound A” is As shown in FIG. 391 (a), the channel is allocated and output until timing tm13a after timing tm13. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation immediately before timing tm13 when the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is ended and the effect reception occurs, “special effect sound A” is displayed as shown in FIG. 391 (b As shown in), the channel is allocated and output until the more delayed timing tm 13 b.

  According to such a configuration, the “special effect sound A” corresponding to the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) is distributed over a range that is at least twice as wide as the operation effective period A, such as timing tm12 to tm13b. It can be understood that it can be used. This means that at timing tm12 to tm13b, at least four channels (stereo BGM, stereo special effect sound A) can be used, and there is no more room in the vacant channels.

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 together, in the normal internal reception effect according to this effect example, “time Ta” as the operation effective period A is converted into the silent operation acceptance effect described below (operation effective period B ) As a time shorter than “Time Tb”. This makes it possible to relatively shorten the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of "special effect sound A" is ended, and by the generation of the effect sound accompanying the normal reception effect. The occurrence of a situation where the number of channels becomes insufficient can be suitably suppressed. Also, by making the time as the operation effective period A relatively short in this way, it appears that there is not enough room in the free channel, and it is possible for the player to be in a period when the automatic rendering function can not be activated. It also makes it possible to create a stage effect that makes it possible to choose whether to operate or not.

  In this example of rendering, the output applied to the “special rendering sound A” is terminated before the timing tm 14 at which the switching to the silent section is made at the latest (FIG. 391 (a), ( see b)). In this respect, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, silence is generated relatively early after normal reception reception effects are generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It will also be possible for a section to appear, and a dramatic interval may also be suitably eliminated.

  FIG. 392 is a diagram for describing the technical feature of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to the example of the effect in more detail. Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) will be described in more detail.

  As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is silent within the period in which specific sound data (sound “BGM playback”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as "automatic reception effect directed to the automatic performance function".

  As described above, although illustration is omitted, a prophetic effect which suggests that an operation opportunity is given to the player upon the occurrence of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) (for example, FIG. see b)).

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, even when symbol variation is performed with a predetermined effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination, the predetermined timing When B. comes, BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppression mode or silence. However, when a “period of output in a suppression mode or silence” is generated in a predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated when a predetermined time (a fixed period) elapses from the generation of the period. Then, it is arranged that the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is progressed to be returned to the effect state output in the non-suppressed mode.

  In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect progress (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned sign effect (for example, FIG. 381 (b)) is started after the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, so that it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect is generated at the time when the silent section appears. It is desirable to maintain a feeling. At this time, it is desirable that the expectation progress is higher in the effect of the reception effect in the silent section than in the effect of the effect of the reception effect in the silent period.

  By the way, as a method of outputting BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") in the suppression mode or silent in the above predetermined effect pattern, it is limited to the method of setting the data contents (volume initial value) itself as the suppression mode or silent Instead, this may be realized by adjusting the volume from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect can not be generated while the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in the suppression mode or silent, and the BGM data (of "BGM reproduction" Since the timing at which the sound should be returned in the non-suppressed mode is also not fixed and is predetermined, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is performed, such as the above-mentioned sound shift etc. There is no inconvenience.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 392 (a), if the operation effective period B corresponding to the silent reception reception effect occurs, the effect reception accompanying the operation within the operation effective period B occurs. For example, until the operation valid period B is ended by the fact that the operation valid period B is ended or the operation acceptance is performed without the operation being performed within the operation valid period B, for example, as shown in FIG. 381 (c). In the mode (or another example) described with reference to (d) and the like, an image for prompting an operation, an image showing a remaining time, and the like are displayed.

  Here, the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from timing tm15 to timing tm16 when "time Tb" has passed, and the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period). B) When the effect reception has been generated within the B), the "special effect sound B" is output over the "time Td" longer than the "time Tb".

  That is, in this case, even if the player performs an operation immediately after the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs at timing tm15, the “special effect sound B” is generated. As shown in FIG. 392 (a), the output is assigned to the channel until the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 returned to the normal section. On the other hand, at the timing tm15a (the timing when the specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation effective period B occurred) within the silent reception effect (operation effective period B), the automatic effect function is enabled. When the effect reception is automatically generated, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to the channel and output until the delayed timing tm17b as shown in FIG. 392 (b).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the setting process by the player in the “automatic production mode” is not installed, and the operation by the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs. If there is not, at timing tm 15a, the "automatic rendering function" is always activated to automatically generate a rendering acceptance. Accordingly, the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16, but is substantially continued only from the timing tm15 to the timing tm15a. It can be said that it is a period that cannot be obtained. In other words, in this case, it is impossible for an effect to be received within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, such a disguise period (timing tm15a to tm16). And the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is intentionally generated as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16).

  According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-described normal reception effect (operation valid period A), both the number of empty channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B have a margin. In the atmosphere with a sense of security that looks like this, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity to the player, thereby improving the game entertainment.

  In order to make the remaining time as the operation effective time B have a margin, the gauge amount applied to the bar display indicating the remaining time of the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is filled at timing tm15. It is desirable that after displaying as a tongue state, it is displayed so as to decrease in such a manner (speed) that this becomes 0 as timing tm 16 comes. Further, in this case, since the timing tm15a arrives with the gauge amount for bar display remaining and the reception of the production is automatically generated, the mode shown in FIGS. 381 (e) and (f) (or As in the other example, the bar display is not hidden, and the “special effect sound B” is started to be output while the bar display is continuously displayed. As a result, within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) It is desirable to be able to recognize that the “automatic rendering function” has been activated. The bar display left in this way will be hidden when "special effect sound B" is in the output state.

  Further, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened than the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if there is a case in which an operation by the player may be performed immediately before the timing tm16 when the silent reception reception operation (operation effective period B) ends, the special reception sound B may occur. As shown in FIG. 392 (c), "" is assigned to the channel until the delayed timing tm17c and outputted. Then, the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) has a possibility that the channel can be used over a very wide range of timings tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that the margin of the empty channel is lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened (timing tm15 to tm15a) with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16). As a result, the period during which the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) can use the channel is shown in the range (timing tm15 to tm17c) shown in FIG. 392 (c). It becomes possible to narrow it to the range (timing tm15 to tm17b) shown in 392 (b), and it becomes possible to give extra space to the vacant channel by that amount.

  However, in the above-described effect example, even if the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) is viewed as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), This is set as a time longer than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation valid period A). It is important to adopt such a configuration to create a safe atmosphere that seems to have room for both the number of empty channels and the remaining operation time B. You can say that.

  In addition, in the production example related to the silent section, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning the sound of“ BGM playback ”as a non-suppressed state when an operation by the player is accepted without returning the sound after a predetermined time” is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is focused on the special effect sound B having a large volume initial value.

  Moreover, in the production example related to the silent section, the special production sound B is generated based on the production reception. However, only when specific production conditions according to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination are satisfied. The special effect sound B may be generated based on the reception of the effect. Even when a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation effective period is generated at timing tm15, and when an effect is received within the operation effective period, a predetermined operation is performed based on the reception of the effect. Play the production sound of (eg failure production sound). Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make it the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example of the point to which it is made to shift to.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. Also good. In this case, at timing tm14, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  Further, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body are performed together based on the acceptance of the effect so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction. It is desirable to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is desirable that only the display change is generated based on the reception of the effect, and the movable effect that operates the predetermined movable body is not executed.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the invention is not limited thereto, and is output in a mode suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. Anything is acceptable. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is set by setting a time-sequential period to be a suppression mode or silence to itself. It is possible to create a suppression mode or a state (a special period) in which sound is output without any adjustment just by playing it. However, the sound data of "BGM playback" allocated to a predetermined channel does not necessarily have to set the time-sequential period set as the suppression mode or silence to itself, for example, at timing tm14 of "sound of BGM playback" You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception is generated at timing tm 15a, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (processing to return to the initial value of volume) is not performed. . Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing tm 17 comes, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is raised from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is finished. (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the above presentation example, a restriction process is performed to make it more difficult to generate a new sound for an empty channel, at least from a predetermined timing before timing tm14 comes to timing tm17. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game having nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a hold winning sound, a general sound effect sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. It is desirable that the sound be a target of restriction, and that the specific gaming sound that is the target of restriction not be reproduced without being newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech), and the timing tm14 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before timing tm15 at which the special effect sound B (or predetermined effect sound) can be output (timing tm15 or before timing tm15). This is desirable in order to relieve anxiety that the special effect sound B is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM playback is generated from the timing at which the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output through a plurality of channels until the timing tm17 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound B are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback It becomes possible to secretly shift to the playback state in the normal mode.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, a setting process by the player according to the “automatic effect mode” may be installed. That is, in this case, when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect reception occurs when the predetermined timing arrives even in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A). . On the other hand, when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated when the predetermined timing before the timing tm 15a comes. It is desirable that the production acceptance is made valid.

  In the above-described effect example, the execution periods of various notice effects during the symbol change are set so that the number of empty channels does not become zero even during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). You may make it do. The point is that the sound of “BGM playback” is continuously output in a non-suppressing manner, so long as it provides an atmosphere in which there is no room in the free channel. Also, conversely, the number of free channels may be 0 during the execution period of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B). In short, it is only necessary to provide an atmosphere in which an empty channel can be felt as much as possible by allowing the sound of “BGM playback” to be output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  In the above example, “special effect sound A” is assigned to channels “08” and “09”, while “special effect sound B” is assigned to channels “10” and “11”. The “special effect sound A” and the “special effect sound B” may be assigned to the same channel.

  In the above-mentioned example of presentation, it is decided to start the prognostic effect with respect to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) after the arrival of the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears. However, the precursor effect may be started before timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, and timing tm14 at which the silent section appears may occur while the precursor effect is being performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect such as whether or not a silent section appears while the precursor effect is being performed.

  In the production example, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the silent reception effect (operation effective period B). In the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the operation is performed as a reception effect with the operation button 410 as an operation target, whereas in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. It may be executed as a reception effect. In this case, different heel images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are generated during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation effective period B). Therefore, when the post-operation effect is started with those reception effects, the bag image is not displayed as in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 374 to 376 (or another example thereof). Instead, the post-operation effect may be started while the display is continuously displayed.

  In the above-mentioned effect example, in the specific effect pattern, the internal reception effect (operation valid period A) is generated only once when in the normal section, but when it is in the normal section, the non-automatic reception is performed. The normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) as the effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, it is desirable to perform different post-operation effects in the normal internal reception effects. On the other hand, in a silent section in a specific performance pattern, the “BGM playback sound” is secretly output in a non-suppressed manner while the “special performance sound B” is being played back. It is desirable that the effect (operation effective period B) be generated only once. Then, it is desirable that the after-operation effect by the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the after-operation effect by the silent internal reception effect (operation effective period B) have different effect contents.

[Moveable performance triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions for design games]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained after executing the symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed is executed, and after the big hit game, the player is advantageous. It is possible to control the game state (short time state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides effects according to the result of the determination related to winning (for example, various other notice effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-read effects, in addition to effect patterns) As described above, the game entertainment is maintained until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate over a long period of time.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable in the effect display device 1600 are also performed when another condition that is not related to the determination processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (the symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, display change and movable body movement appear in a mode beyond the category of symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, thereby maintaining the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate for a long period of time Can be expected.

Here, it changes to the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the judgment processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (symbol game start condition) according to it is satisfied. As a method of causing, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. It should be noted that any of the following methods can be used to cause changes in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied. It is also possible to adopt a method different from any of the methods listed below, but the situation where symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0” and the number of reservations) Even if the condition is “0”, the above-mentioned other condition must be satisfied, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It should be possible to make changes in the behavior of the movable decoration.
・ A technique to regularly execute an effect lottery not related to symbol variation, and to obtain that a specific result is obtained in this effect lottery as the above “satisfaction of another condition” • The number of times of cumulative operations for a specific operation means The above-mentioned method of making it reach the predetermined number as “the establishment of another condition” The time is measured (for example, the power is turned on) by the RTC (real time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Method of measuring the time from the end of

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is used, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the change timing will arrive In general, it takes a relatively long time (for example, several hours), so that the display content or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite the long time. It is feared that the entertainment interest may be reduced if a situation that can not be made occurs.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is preset is a symbol game start condition. Can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the design fluctuates. When the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decoration body can be started to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state can be started without starting a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game is established, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state can be started, the movable body abnormality is detected in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed by being restored.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 393, an example of the processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 393, for convenience of explanation, “RTC state in which display contents different from before appear when it is determined that the elapsed time since power on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function ( "It is possible to execute the process of causing the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C to operate sequentially in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state)". It is not limited to this as a method of causing a change in the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) not related to the game start condition is satisfied. Even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately employ each technique described below.

  Assuming that there is a state prior to the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time (until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. The remaining time of) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 393, at timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the flow of the game so far is achieved by sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the basis of the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation. You can have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes). If a big hit is won between the occurrence of the period (RTC state) and the end of the period, the progress of the production by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) has not occurred (normal state) ( It is more desirable to provide presentation benefits such as enabling special presentation mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 393, a condition that is not related to the situation of symbol variation is established at timing Rt1 slightly earlier than such timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before). Based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the first condition), it is possible to execute the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is met). That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example, whether the timing Rt1 has arrived or not in addition to the timing Rt2 is determined by periodically checking the lapse of time since the power is turned on, and the timing Rt1 is determined. When it is determined that the has arrived, the previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decoration) corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed . The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “immediately RTC status” or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body motions are the result of the big hit determination Because it is suggested in advance to the player that they are not based on (no big hit expectation), it is suitably avoided that the game's interest is reduced due to a recognition error by the player Will be able to.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 393, only a display (a display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears without any expectation as a display content in the effect display device 1600 at least in a period of timing Rt1 to Rt2. The decorative pattern (rendering pattern) is not displayed so as not to be displayed. That is, in this case, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears as the display content in the effect display device 1600 without any expectation. Since the processing to be started is started, it is expected to more suitably avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player.

  Here, “pre-display that appears at timing Rt1” and “movable body operation that appears at timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display that does not conform to symbol variation” and correspond to “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. It is Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated regardless of the execution state of the symbol variation at those timings (including the execution / non-execution). However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation in which the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are not ready to operate (the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are in the original position despite the timing Rt2 has arrived). It is feared that the process of sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be performed even when the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

  For example, when any of several variation patterns is selected as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, Although a movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, the movable body operation time (in this case, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above is reached during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least the movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C which is in the process of execution can not be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to design variation" Can be assumed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as well as various movable modes provided in the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to execute a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, if it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state (abnormal determination) in this movable abnormality determination, the movable decorative body to be determined is determined in a predetermined manner following the processing of the abnormal determination. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to recover the movable decorative body in an abnormal state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-mentioned RTC state comes in the middle of executing the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the original position, etc.) to the movable decoration. If there is at least one of the movable ornaments A, B, and C at least in the middle of the restoration operation, it can not be used as the above-mentioned “behavior of the movable ornament not conforming to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, as "restoration operation time corresponding to design change", for example, start time of design change (time to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when design change is started), and design change It can be executed (execution of restoration processing based on acquisition of a command) at least one of the stop timing (timing to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 393, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives. When it is in the period until the movement in the mode (in this case, the sequential movement by the three movable decorations A, B and C), the movable decoration used in the period (movable decoration A, movable decoration B) By prohibiting the movable decorative body C) from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side.

  However, at this time, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 393 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display that does not show any expectation as a display content on the effect display device 1600 (a display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears. As described above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 393, when there is a symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the process of being executed) when the timing Rt2 arrives, it has been displayed until then "any expectation Do not hide the display (display from timing Rt1) that is not shown at all at this point in time, and keep this over the period up to the timing Rt2a when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) is stopped) I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt <b> 2 to Rt <b> 2 a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 has a decoration. Only the display in which the design pattern is not displayed and no expectation is shown. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C) is advanced. It can be expected that the lowering of the game entertainment due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is suitably suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 393, when the symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the figure) is ended (stopped) when timing Rt2 arrives (when timing Rt2a comes) , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display without any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)" which has been displayed until then is not displayed at this time Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. Then, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started after that, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation The display showing the expected degree of the production pattern and the notice production is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started in this way and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes After that, as long as the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, sequentially operated by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body movement time in the RTC state, It goes without saying that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, although the movable effect on the symbol variation side is strictly prohibited, since the movable body operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether the situation should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and if it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, the C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (a movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, the moving decorative body is moved according to the movable body operation time in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure). Even if the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in a specific manner is completed, the movable effect ( At least the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, and the movable decoration C) can not be performed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 393, the timing at which the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state appears is the timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. There is a concern that the However, although the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if the big win is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) is not generated at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol variation (C, D variation in the diagram) after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, during the period until the timing Rt2a comes (during the timing Rt2 comes) the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) which was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 comes is finished (stopped) ), “The movable decorative body operates in a specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state since the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that "the period until the end of the sequential operation by C" ends. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display showing no expectation degree (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is an example shown in FIG. 393, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) Because it is not.

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 393, at least “after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state. In this case, the restoration process is triggered even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived (the period until the completion of the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). By prohibiting this so as not to be performed (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the movable decorative body) cannot be performed by the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the symbol variation side is performed. The processing to be performed is prohibited, and the processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the abnormal operation of the movable body is restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably executed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 393, it is controlled to the normal gaming state, and when it is in the middle of the stage where symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (loss)) is performed according to the big hit determination. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 arrives. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, a display such as “immediately RTC status” appears on the background display on the effect display device 1600 as a display not conforming to the symbol variation, for example. Then, the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (losing)) is ended and a new symbol is displayed from the time when the display such as "immediately RTC status" is performed until the timing Rt2 at which the RTC status occurs comes. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 comes when the symbol variation is being performed, and at the timing Rt2, as the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation, three movable A process of operating the decorative bodies A, B and C sequentially is performed. Note that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued for a period until a new symbol variation (in the drawing, variation B (loss)) is stopped.

  Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 393, “three movable decorative bodies A, R2 are generated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, It is decided to prohibit this so that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are not performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 393, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (losing) in the diagram) is being executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display in which the degree of expectation is displayed), the movement effect on the symbol fluctuation side (movable body operation in which the degree of expectation is indicated), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side are controlled as a period in which none is executed (first) One limitation). In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 393, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation) It is controlled as a period during which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is shown nor the symbol fluctuation side restoration processing is performed (the second limitation).

  It should be noted that the control at such timings Rt2 to Rt2a (no effect display on symbol variation side (display showing expectation) and movable effect (movable body operation showing expectation) is not performed) Even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation, but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation), it is executed. That is, in this case, no expectation effect is executed, and when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is at the stage of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, the player who was expecting to be in the RTC state can enjoy the fun as a surprised performance exceeding the expectation. In addition, after the jackpot symbol appears in this way, a jackpot gaming state will occur while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are sequentially operated.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, with respect to the display from timing Rt1 (only the display in which no change in the decorative symbol is performed and any expectation is not shown), the symbol fluctuation in the process of being executed when the timing Rt2 arrives The display is not displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as “RTC state”) after the occurrence of the RTC state is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (in the diagram, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as “RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display (expectation level indicates the variation pattern) is started. Display will be executed as usual. However, after the timing Rt2a has arrived for the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable ornaments A, B, and C, unless the process of operating the three movable ornaments A, B, and C sequentially is completed. Will also be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the big hit determination, The in-liquid-crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are normally performed, but the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  Further, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 393, three movable decorative bodies A and B according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes. And C, the restoration operation timing (here, start of symbol fluctuation) corresponding to symbol fluctuation in a period until normal operation by C, C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5 ') " Even if the time and the stop time have arrived, it is prohibited to carry out the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decoration in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) triggered by this. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 393, at timing Rt2a, stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss)) or symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loss) Although the start timing (restoration operation timing) of)) comes, at these restoration operation timings, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, restoration with respect to the movable decoration is performed. Processing is never executed.

  However, in the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (timing Rt2 to Rt5 ′ at the time of abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 393 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined presentation position (first position) and then at the predetermined presentation position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 393 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then at the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 393 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in the abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in the normal operation mode. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then at the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 393 (e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. “The behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state Can be executed. However, while a series of movable body operations (in this case, sequential operations by the three movable ornament bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are being executed, a predetermined value is applied to the movable ornament body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, the player will be awakened, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. The operation is not performed independently as an operation different from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C, but is performed as an operation in a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state itself can appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. Thus, it is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in gaming interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 393 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (operation at normal time) but an operation including an operation of restoring the movable decorative body B (restoration) It is possible to execute processing to operate (special operation) in the operation mode of. Then, after that, the movable decorative body B restored (restored) is not operated (normal operation) in the normal operation mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 393 (e) is not performed. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C A process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is performed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during the operation of the movable decoration A, etc.), the movable decoration B causing the abnormality While the timing to operate should be reached, regardless of the situation on the symbol variation side, it will be left in an abnormal state and left. Then, when the timing at which the movable decorative body B should be operated comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the operation mode at the time of normal operation. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while suitably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, C”. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state is executed, so that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state A drop in gaming interest when doing a game is preferably avoided.

  In addition, the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable ornaments A, B and C according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) come. When you do, because the prohibition state for restoration processing on the symbol fluctuation side has already been released, when there is a movable decoration that is in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is executed for the movable decoration The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 393 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” is “the normal operation”. The movable decorative body B may be restored (original position return) according to an operation mode different from the “mode”, and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 393, only a display (for example, “RTC state soon”) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600 at the timing Rt1. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display differs depending on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC ready state”). It may be switched to. However, even if the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, a display that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation) It is important to make it appear that it does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 393, although the case where abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described, the operation mode at the time of normal is also when abnormal judgment is made in operating the movable decorative bodies A and C. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special manner including a restoration operation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 393, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 393, “not conforming to symbol variation based on arrival of timings Rt1 and Rt2 satisfied based on the function (RTC function) not conforming to symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side It was decided to start "display" and "the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function not conforming to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "a display not conforming to a symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative object not conforming to a symbol variation" May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 393, “the movable decoration body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, 3T This is forbidden so that the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is not performed during the period until the completion of the "sequential operation by one movable decorative body A, B, C". It is made difficult to cause a situation in which the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the (specific state) cannot be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and as a result, the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is concern that it will not be earned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 393, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed even during the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2. It is desirable to prohibit this from being performed.

  FIG. 394 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 393. “In the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, at least three of the movable decorative bodies A, B and C among various movable decorative bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 are shown. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 393 in that the restoration process is not executed.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 394, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), the abnormality determination on at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, C The restoration process) is not executed itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state in a display (such as "soon, RTC state") not based on the symbol variation is restored. It will never be left in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 394, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state. It is determined that an abnormality determination (a first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any one of them is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived. As described above, the process (the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is performed separately, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 393 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 393 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the processing related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the processing related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a manner that delays the arrival of the movable body operating time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is “a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the above “special mode”. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 394 (f), at timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body It is assumed that it is determined that one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination when "a situation where is not yet started" is performed. Then, while maintaining the “situation in which the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is maintained. Will perform the restoration process for

  That is, in this case, as shown together in FIGS. 394 (e) and (f), compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are abnormal, in the RTC state The mobile operation timing is delayed (in the figure, from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but using the period (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) generated by such a delay Thus, the movable body operating time in the RTC state can be reached after the abnormally determined movable decorative body is restored. Thereafter, when the movable body operating time comes within the RTC state, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 393 is performed.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 394 (f) assumes a case where it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 393 (e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the normal state, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. The behavior of “1” is ended, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 394 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 393 (f). After the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in a mode according to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” at the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b) ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B also in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three Sequential operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 394, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at timing Rt2, restoration processing is sequentially performed on the movable decorative bodies in these abnormal states, and then the RTC state is It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C here). In this case, a series of movable body movements at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are performed as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored) increase. Although the timing at which the) is started is delayed for a longer time, it becomes possible to execute the series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state in the normal mode. The restoring operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be performed in parallel, and in this case, it is possible to suppress a delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 394, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it will be a mess. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 394 (f) and (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state”. It is difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, an indication (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 394 (f) and (g) as well as in the example shown in 393 (f), the restoration operation (restoration process) is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period during which the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode (in the special mode operation according to the second abnormality determination). There is no indication (such as an error code) to indicate that you are doing. Also, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is finished, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and further, FIG. The display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is finished. There is no such thing as causing any change. These also indicate that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only a “series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state” is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 393 and other examples, and in FIG. 394 and other examples, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) which is not limited to the above but is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side, based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is to operate in a specific mode at the movable body operation time within the specific state that occurs.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation time in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided body). Operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, and the like, and board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (a spear accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 393 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 394 and other examples thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. A situation may occur where "operation not conforming to symbol variation" is taking place.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display that does not indicate any expectation level (until the timing Rt1 is displayed). "Display)" is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is used within a period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed. In spite of being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the production pattern, There can be a situation where the production is confusing. In the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

  Therefore, although the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being provided for the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, according to the result of the big hit determination for the specific operating means When the effect time for providing the operation opportunity has arrived, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) prompting the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means, It is desirable not to accept the effect even if the specific operation means in the state of performing the specific operation is operated. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, it is possible to play the game that the operation operation was originally provided to the specific operation means. It is possible to suggest to the In addition, by not accepting an operation for a specific operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation to the specific operation means is performed. If such things happen frequently, the entertainment interest may decline due to the fact that the presentation is not developed. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably, the sword decorative member 5001, etc.), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) It is desirable to do. In this case, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high operation effect generation rate within the symbol variation within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. When it is applied, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the reception of the effect when it is operated (the predetermined effect according to the reception of the effect) be performed as usual.

  That is, of the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably (for example, vibration or the like), the sword decorative member 5001, and the like) The movable decorative body in which the specific operation means (for example, sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low generation ratio of the operation effect in the inside is operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the presentation time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the big hit determination to the sword decorative body 5001) will occur.

  In addition, a frame-side movable decorative member provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operating means having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in the symbol variation) is movable in the RTC state (specific state) When it is used as one of the movable ornaments that can be operated at the operation time, an operation independent of the sequential movement by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is performed when the RTC state occurs. It is desirable that the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. According to such a configuration, the special operation (see FIG. 393) or the restoration operation (see FIG. 394) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Also, it is possible to perform the operation not conforming to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without receiving the influence (such as delay) by the operation. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C be used as a board-side movable decorative body. Thereby, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference occurring with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and provided on the door frame 3 side. It becomes possible to execute the operation by the frame side movable decorative body in parallel.

  Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in symbol variation) When the time taken to complete the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) not conforming to the symbol variation according to 5001)) is made “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit judgment are executed Even in this case, a predetermined operation opportunity provision timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the effect pattern, unless “specific time” has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation (the effect pattern starts). It is desirable to make settings related to each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 393 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 394 and other examples thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, When an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the production can be accepted, the production at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be improved without sacrificing the production on the symbol variation side.

  Further, as described above, in view of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only by the symbol variation after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation to be digested first after that is inevitably started, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is equivalent to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), It is possible to provide a margin for completing operations that do not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Further, when the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, When performing the determination, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is used instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation in the normal state in the form of performing the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the above-mentioned operation, or performing the restoration operation and subsequent to this. In this case, the “special mode including the restoration operation” also restores (returns to the original position) the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, a minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including the recovery operation”, and “restoration operation”. As long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is used as long as the operation is not completed. It is more desirable that the setting according to each effect pattern be performed so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated when the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in a normal mode or an abnormal determination mode, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, an operation opportunity can be given.

  When an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the presentation reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC) by the frame-side movable decorative body is given. Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It becomes impossible to receive the production, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the time from the above-mentioned timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C in the normal mode is “special time”, the big hit determination As long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” have elapsed since the symbol variation started (the effect pattern started) Each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable ornament (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive). It is desirable to make settings for

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

  On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B and C, this is the case for a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A with a fast operation order, a movable decorative body with a long time required for the restoration operation, etc.) If an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but a movable decoration different from a specific movable decoration (for example, the operation sequence is delayed) With respect to the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C, a movable decorative body requiring a short time for the restoration operation, etc.), when this is an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration for the movable decorative body The processing (restoration operation) may be performed without being prohibited. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not have to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC is generated. It is because it is possible to execute the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal mode if it can be completed during this period.

  Also, the timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Recovery processing for movable abnormality with less influence on movable presentation]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the restoration operation time to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of production, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "pattern change start time" is set as "the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 395, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes: Will be performed.
-Based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a is acquired when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern Processing to make the effect progress in the inside ・ Identify based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is acquired when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) Of performing predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 395, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 comes, progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” and a predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, the performance pattern (relatively expected) that is pairwise with the specific performance pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a pair relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expectation effect pattern) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of performance, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display about whether to operate) or not. Is made feasible, and such entertainingness is suitably maintained by such an expressiveness.

  However, if there is still a situation where processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation even at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the start of the symbol variation, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not possible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect with the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 395, the progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that can cause a specific movable decorative object to operate at a specific timing tm2” in the effect pattern, and a predetermined for the specific movable decorative object. When a situation occurs in which the process of performing the restoration operation (the restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) appears in parallel, the “specific” process is performed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration condition. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended. In addition, although it is possible to employ | adopt various methods as "the process which performs a predetermined | prescribed decompression | restoration operation | movement with respect to a specific movable decoration body", in the following description, "an abnormal state is eliminated, or A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decorative body is abnormal. The time required to be different will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is eliminated and the original position is restored by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, “a predetermined restoration for the specific movable decorative body is performed. The timing tx at which the processing to perform the operation is completed will also arrive relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated before the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restoration) The more the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is completed, is advanced in a delayed manner to a later time. And at the latest, if the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and it is not yet restored (restoring) but another restoration operation is executed, the timing tx will be exceeded. By ending the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in the abnormal state, the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation during the specific timing tm comes to an end regardless of the state of the restoration. It becomes like this.

  In addition, if it takes x hours to perform one restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, one pattern is performed so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoring operation within the fluctuation is set, and the processing for causing the predetermined restoring operation to end even if not restored (restoring) when the upper limit number n is reached is ended. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in the stop state, it can be suitably maintained as to the effect on whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 comes. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, it may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (in the case where the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined performance is being performed, there is a directing effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It is more desirable to maintain the game interest.

  In addition, as a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative object operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears ''. When it is provided as “acting based on the reception of an effect by an operation by the player (or receiving an effect but not operating)”, “the effect of causing a specific display to prompt an operation by the player” Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 395, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state. Is assumed to be normal. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of fluctuation (or the “restoration operation time” such as when the previous symbol is stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the specific movable decoration can not be restored (restored) from the abnormal state, and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation timing comes. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable ornaments that perform multi-step movement with more complicated structures, and such movable ornaments have a longer process until their completion as their restoration processing. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation or a effect pattern that is paired with this, etc., when those effect patterns are started Within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive (more preferably, the time for the predetermined effect to be performed) even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, it is only possible to restore the specific movable decorative body in an emergency and simple manner every time it becomes abnormal, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It may also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started. When the special production pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, while the special production pattern is produced, while the special production pattern is developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed) Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 396 (a) and 396 (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the progress of the rendering related to the special rendering pattern. And when a situation in which a predetermined restoring operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least during a special performance pattern (period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process, but continues it.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body. Even if this is the case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special rendering pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is performed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, restoration processing in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state Since it becomes possible to perform additional implementation, etc., this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way as well. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent performance with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, as a display content on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to make a unique display mode such as "It is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while".

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 396 (a) and (d), the timing tm 11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is continued without ending it even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that "the recovery processing is forced to be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed although the abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body" is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case that the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed without interruption of the reserve process, the next restoration operation time (here, next time The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). It will be done. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately handle abnormalities may also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 396 (b) and (d), the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated, but this is continued in the form of the next restoration operation time. . According to such a configuration, "despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the specific movable decorative body, regardless of the status under which the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is being performed is under any circumstances. Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process in a more serious manner can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 396 (c) and (d), as a result of starting a new symbol variation when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed, the new symbol variation is performed. As, "a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 396 (a) to 396 (c), the game starts from the timing tm11 regardless of the state of the game and the effect after the special effect pattern is ended (and the situation of the restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 in the next symbol variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the decoration.

  In addition, after a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is finished, a situation in which a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed appears. Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in a form in which the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 396, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from an abnormal state and is normal at the timing tx when the "process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in the state. As described above, by continuing the one restoration process in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be made to produce an effect at a specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, in spite of the fact that one restoration process is continued in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), at the time tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from the timing tx until the next fluctuation operation is finished and the next restoration operation timing comes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  It should be noted that in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific operation is performed each time the restoration operation time (here, symbol fluctuation start time) arrives. If the restoration process for a movable ornament of a certain number of times is started several times, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. There is a concern that the fun of the game may be reduced by repeating the recovery process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state, the number of execution times of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number although the restoration operation timing has arrived for the predetermined upper limit number Although it is not restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

  However, on the other hand, only after a specific effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state. If there is a situation where an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and its condition One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put in the abnormal state, although the restoration operation timing has arrived by the predetermined upper limit number, it is not restored from the abnormal state. Even when the “1” th restoration operation time has come, this will be continued without ending the restoration process for the specific movable decoration. In this manner, with regard to the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set even if the number of times the restoration operation time arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat as one count of recovery processing so that it is not terminated so as not to prevent the recovery processing in a more serious manner from being prevented.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. Ru. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 that are operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (restoring) may be performed in a manner different from that in the case of the specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol variation is performed. An effect pattern of a system (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. In addition, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position with a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “Character display for prompting operation (“ press ””), and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ”(See FIG. 341 (f))”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, an operation to push in) and an effect is received, the “specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ) And the like (see FIG. 341 (g)) and “Process for causing display content to change (see FIG. 341 (g))”. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body subjected to the rendering operation in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 395 or FIG. 396.

  However, “operation for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state with respect to the “processing to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001” and “the processing to display prompting for operation”. It can be executed at any time and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and received an effect, A process of performing a rendering operation of a panel-side movable decorative body such as a specific decoration member SDY (a jumbo object) and a process of causing a change in display content in the effect display device 1600 are respectively performed. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force due to an operation by such a player, and the operation part moves, so that the abnormal state It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 etc. provided movably provided) which is also used as operation means In the state described with reference to FIGS. 395 and 396, a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) to the original position is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) when an abnormal state occurs. The restoration process) is performed at each timing of “the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)” and “after the effect is accepted by the player operation in the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the panel-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the panel-side movable is aimed at timings such as start time and stop time (more strictly, after start and stop) of the symbol variation. When the frame side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state while the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, the original timing (during the fluctuation period) is different from the original timing of the start or stop of the design change. The frame-side movable decoration (operation by the player) may be applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means), and the frame-side movable decoration (operation may be canceled). Since the process of restoring (removing) means is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized early. .

  FIG. 397 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword decorative body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decorative body (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 397, an effect pattern of a movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during a period in which symbol variation is performed) is executed. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect is accepted while the bar display showing the remaining time of the is being executed (timing tm 22), “specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 397, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 395 and 396 is performed as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 397, an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 at the timing tm22 at which the presentation is accepted in this way, and the sword decoration 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and this cannot be restored to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made. However, an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notification be performed. This is because the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)”, and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decrease in the gaming interest. However, it is desirable that such notification be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 397, an abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body while performing “the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation” based on the fact that the effect is received at timing tm22. Although this will occur, the process of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 is performed as usual, thereby recognizing that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, with the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body both kept in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 397, when the timing tm23 is reached, the symbol variation that has already been put on hold is digested (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 395 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time). The timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” started at) is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status) As described above, the process ends until the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol variation starts) has arrived for the sword ornament 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the body and an operation (applying a driving force) so that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started)).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rise when the restoring operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 397, the timing when the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is started and ended is the same as the timing when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started and ended. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 396, “a process for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears It is possible to continue even after the special effect pattern is over, and of course, the symbol variation that is on hold after the special effect pattern is over is immediately digested (started after 0.6 seconds, for example) In the situation where it is possible to carry out by continuing this process (one restoration process) without ending it when straddling the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol variation start time), It is desirable that “the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation” can also be performed in the same mode (the mode described with reference to FIG. 396). That is, in this case, also in the "process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoring operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be finished regardless of the situation of restoration between the start of the next symbol fluctuation and the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made abnormal, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis appears is executed, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. It is also possible to continue one restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 in question.

  In the example shown in FIG. 397, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are finished at the timing tx, respectively, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. As a result, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even when returning to the original position (in a normal state) due to, the rendering operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such a low-reliability situation, it is highly possible that it will not fail even if the rendering operation is performed by a specific movable decorative body, so that not doing this suppresses the decline of the game entertaining It is desirable to do it.

  Moreover, when the restoration process with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated with this be performed. That is, if there is a case where the recovery process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and notification is made every time the abnormal state occurs again, a misunderstanding is given as if it is the player's responsibility that the abnormal state is not eliminated. Therefore, the above-described notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 397, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body has returned from an abnormal state. And now, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again while only the sword decorative body 5001 is in the abnormal state, and as shown in FIG. 397, the sword decorative body 5001 which is in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is Assuming that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality occurring in the sword decorative body 5001 is eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is accepted for presentation by the operation of the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is possible to apply a driving force so as to return to the position (retain in the original position). In this case, in view of the fact that the movable decorative effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when it succeeds in the return operation) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position) It is desirable that the process be terminated before the process is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that there are few chances for recovery of the sword decorative body 5001 that has been unable to return so far due to such external force (operation by the player), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to its original state (return operation to the sword decorative body 5001) fails, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended. By continuing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (execution of the return operation to the sword decorative body 5001 again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, thereby the player It is desirable to prompt for help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification accompanying this be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 397, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter While the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are kept in the normal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 397, the frame side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operation means is set with respect to the board side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after the presentation is accepted) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operating means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by a player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (modes that return only by applying driving force, modes that return using at least external force) are used, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility of game play is also high, and the decline in

  Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted by the player's operation, the symbol variation start is started. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different contents (different operation modes) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since the sword decorative body 5001 is restored using external force (operation by the player) for the process, it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable that a proper recovery process be performed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 397, the restoration operation timing (here, symbol variation start timing) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing on the sword decorative body 5001 has been executed the number of times. Even if the situation is not restored from the abnormal state, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect-related effect pattern of the operation system is started and effects are accepted by the player's operation on the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state at timing tm 25, after the effect is received, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after the effect is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 which has not been able to return so far due to an external force (operation by the player) is increased. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, “process to generate effect reception period for sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))” and “display for prompting operation (“ press down ”character display or bar indicating remaining time of effect reception period It is important that the processing (see FIG. 341 (f)) ”is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in a state of being located at the operation position (when moving to a specific detection position) when a first operation opportunity is given and when it is in an original position (pushing to a specific detection position When the operation means is provided such that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given so as to operate), even if the effect reception has occurred in the second operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the effect reception is generated at the first operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the second operation opportunity is given, even if the effect is accepted, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, and the possibility that the abnormal state is eliminated is also expected to be naturally low.

  In addition, after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state has been accepted for production by an operation by the player, the processing for providing the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily accepted. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 393 to 397, the symbol variation start timing (further, the timing after receiving the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. The predetermined timing may be determined on the condition that symbol variation is executed at least as a condition. For example, it may be used as at least one of symbol variation start timing and symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start Allowing the restored processing to end until the timing tm 2 in the specific effect pattern that has been reserved is reached, or to execute it so as to extend over after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved The above-described respective processes are performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable to make the game possible so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 etc.) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is sometimes performed, as shown in FIG. 396, the abnormal state is observed over a period until the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in the above. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. It is not started, and one restoration process that is already in the running state is continued without being terminated. Therefore, the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is movable. When the decorative body newly becomes abnormal, it becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 396, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends, after a new restoration operation timing (next time). This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this respect, an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm 11 elapses and the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) comes In the case where at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or “both method 1 and method 2” or “both method 1 and method 3” is used, the restoration process for the other movable ornament It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) ) Is newly started, restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state, It will be treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which restoration processing is not yet executed, and the other movable decorative body will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing) It is possible to newly start the restoration process on the body (frame-side movable decoration). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously performed, There is no concern that interference may occur between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: When at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) arrives during the execution, at that time, the specific movable process (frame side movable decoration) is not started and the specific process is not started. After waiting for completion of one restoration process for the movable decoration, another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) Start the restoration process for the body).

  According to the method 2, although the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state, It will be treated as an effective thing with respect to another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) in which the restoration processing is not yet executed. In this respect, when starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration), the process waits for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decoration. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments will be expected.

  Method 3: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time). The restoration process is not executed, but after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed, the restoration operation time that comes after that is triggered by another movable ornament (frame side movable Start the restoration process for the decoration body).

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is the same as the restoration process for the specific movable ornament already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for an abnormal state is performed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body becomes abnormal when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

(Operation check period of operation button)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) can be operated by driving the operation buttons 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) as effects according to the pattern game by the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect using a drive-type operation means (such as an effect in which an expectation level related to privilege provision is suggested not only by an operation but also by driving). However, if such operation-time effects can be executed, but if any abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the operation-time effects can be experienced by the player in the manner intended by the designer. It becomes difficult to make it happen, and as a result, there is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in the game interest. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, as a part of the maintenance related to whether or not the operation-time effect can be performed, an operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period and an automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is confirmed that the player can feel the effect at the time of operation of the mode intended by the designer, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  Specifically, an operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. It should be noted that the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize a more reliable confirmation operation for each member, there is no overlapping period between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). Preferably) sequentially. FIG. 398 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is moved to the normal state by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projection position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projection start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the projecting state, and in such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projection position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. Such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440 makes it possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state or that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state. .

  Further, as effects set in the fluctuation pattern, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state and effects using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, by pressing or continuously hitting the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction, during the execution of the effect in the game board side effect display device 1600, The pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, for example, while the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 is being executed, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruded state and By pressing the operation button 410 in the projecting state to the normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Note that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is a effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with expectation than in the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 398, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operation confirmation of whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in the state of protruding from the normal state is made by the worker (player or player It is possible to realize it at the discretion of the administrator. Specifically, when the occurrence condition of the operation confirmation period described later is satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 is in the normal state for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) which is the occurrence period. When the pressing detection status (operation detection status) is monitored and pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the state where the operation button 410 is protruded based on the pressing detection (operation detection) Change to On the other hand, pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time even after the occurrence condition of the arbitrary operation confirmation period is satisfied (while generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period) In this case, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended by the passage of a predetermined time. According to this, for the player who wants to confirm whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated or the hole manager, it suffices to press the operation button 410 during the occurrence of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and by the depression The confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be given, and the operation effect using the operation button 410 can be executed and provided with peace of mind.

  Then, after pressing the operation button 410 to make it protrude, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed and a normal state is detected before a predetermined time elapses. Then, it returns to the normal state again, and ends the optional operation confirmation period when a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the pressing of the protruding operation button 410 is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcedly returned to the normal state by driving after the predetermined time elapses. It will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to be in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended. In such a case, unnecessary time until a predetermined time elapses after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be prevented.

  The above-described operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) occurs when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the generation condition of the operation confirmation period is configured such that the generation condition is satisfied when the demonstration effect is executed in order to avoid occurrence of overlap with the operation effect. Specifically, in the demonstration production, there is no entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for a certain time after the production set in the fluctuation pattern is finished, and the production set in the fluctuation pattern is performed. This is an effect waiting for the customer when it is not started (the information regarding the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received for a certain period of time on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side), and is suitable for avoiding the occurrence of overlapping with the effect during operation. In this way, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect, the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period is generated, and thereby the boring time that the effect set in the variation pattern is not started is displayed on the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time whether or not it normally detects and operates.

  In addition, the start of the demonstration effect is an instruction by the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the demonstration effect when the ball entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 does not take a certain time while the symbol game is not progressing The start command may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a may generate a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) by receiving the start command. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and by receiving it, a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation) is performed. Period may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the effect during operation and confirming whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts playing the game It is possible to perform and provide an operation-time effect using the operation buttons 410 with more peace of mind.

  In addition, an LED (each LED of the decoration member 432 in the operation button) is mounted on the operation button 410, and it is determined whether or not the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred, or the progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period In accordance with the state of the operation button 410), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when an arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is of a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (emission period A for confirmation period indicating that an arbitrary operation is possible Light up with). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, after the occurrence of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed to protrude, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed even once. However, light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is being performed). As a result, even after the operation button 410 is pressed and projected, it is possible to notify the outside that the pressing of the operation button 410 is further requested. Thereafter, when the operation button 410 is brought into the normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 once are performed at least until the remaining optional operation confirmation period (predetermined time) has elapsed. Light is emitted in the mode (the light emission mode C for confirmation period which suggests the completion of the arbitrary operation) in which the light amount is weaker than that of the light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period described above. Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Note that even when the optional operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, for example, light is emitted in a manner different from any of the operation confirmation period light emission aspects A to C Can be illustrated.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 398, after a predetermined standby period has elapsed since the end of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the depression of the player, and the position of the operation button 410 is normal. An automatic operation confirmation period is provided to confirm the origin so as to be located at. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirmation of the origin, the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, and is operated to return from the projecting state to a normal state. At this time, when the normal position sensor detects that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, it can be understood that the operation button 410 is operating at the normal position. According to this, it is possible to secure that the operation button 410 operates at the normal position, and to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced when the effect using the operation button 410 is executed.

  The arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the predetermined time of "10 seconds" is set as the arbitrary operation confirmation period as described above, a short time of "5 seconds" as the time taken for a series of operations as the automatic operation confirmation period Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates to confirm the origin regardless of the depression of the player. In other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system is automatically advanced. On the other hand, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, if the player does not press the button, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the projecting state, and if the player does not press in the projecting state, The protruding state is maintained until the optional operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by changing the arbitrary operation confirmation period to be longer than the automatic operation period, the pressing of the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the projecting state, etc. is changed by driving. It is possible to allow players and hall managers to check carefully over a long period of time without having a problem, but to quickly end the operation check (automatic operation period) of the drive system with a low need for such long-term check. This is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation operations of the drive type operation means can be increased.

  In the standby period between the optional operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 or the second provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 A periphery confirmation period is provided in which lighting confirmation can be performed as to whether or not the button decoration part 411b (each LED of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423) is lit. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted at the time of effect presentation. Further, in the peripheral confirmation period, when one of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are lighted, but either is pressed Depending on how the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on (for example, light emission modes such as brightness and color) are different. Therefore, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is recognized normally, and at the same time, the frame side lens 417 or the It can be confirmed whether the two-button decoration part 411b lights normally, and a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period) confirm the drive type operation means itself In addition, it is possible to execute confirmation of related members in the vicinity thereof.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is not pressed in the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the projection state is not made, the periphery confirmation period may not be provided after that. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are not lighted, and a series of operation check periods are shortened. It becomes.

  In addition, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 is operated by operating the operation button 410. There is. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates to vibrate the effect operation unit 400. For this reason, in the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether the vibration motor 424 operates and the rendering operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by vibration during the vibration confirmation period, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

  In addition, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is established in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a normal state. The normal state may not be detected, and the operation button 410 may not be in the normal position. As a cause, for example, when a malfunction occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. If you do In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, and control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 399 (A), during a period other than a series of operation confirmation periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of an effect based on the variable pattern), or a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally at the end of the symbol variation (when the production based on the variation pattern is completed) or at the timing when the demonstration production described above is started (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded (not the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. It will be. According to this, even if the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the change pattern, and the change pattern This prevents the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 has operated as part of the effect based on the above. In addition, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates normally, and there is a decrease in interest in the effect. To prevent.

  In addition, when it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period using the execution time of the demonstration effect as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when starting the demonstration effect. When the control is in the protruding state and the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start timing of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of the series of operation check periods), the operation check period even at the start timing of the series of operation check periods When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when it returns to the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed with priority. Alternatively, the entire series of operation confirmation periods may be started in a delayed manner based on that.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 399 (B), in a series of operation check periods, it corresponds to the start of variation of special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of effect based on variation pattern) and the end of symbol game At the timing of the end of fluctuation of special symbol (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), it is not judged whether the operation button 410 is in the abnormal projecting state (is not the normal position) or not. Even in a protruding state (not a normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is in order to give priority to the operation confirmation as to whether or not the operation button 410 in the above-described optional operation confirmation period is pressed and projected in particular, and the operation button generated arbitrarily in the arbitrary operation confirmation period It is for maintaining the projecting state of 410 so as not to end by progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded in the operation confirmation period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation confirmation period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 will be performed. If the operation button 410 in the abnormal state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation check period elapses, the abnormality does not have to wait for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruded state is to be returned to the normal state.

(Detection of abnormality of sword decoration)
Next, although the blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword production operation unit 5000 described above should be in the sword insertion state, the abnormality is not in the sword insertion state. Detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 and abnormality detection.

  The sword decorative body 5001 can be changed into an inserted sword state in which the blade portion 5011 is stored and a removed sword state (second removed blade state) in which the blade portion 5011 is exposed. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the state between the knapsack state and the sculpting state (first scraping state) is used as the effect using the sword decorative body 5001, but in this example, such a state is Do not use. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an insert position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the inserted state, and a removal position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the removed state. ing. In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the removal state to the removal state. In this example, the state of the sword corresponds to an operable state in which the player can remove the sword 5011, and the state of the sword corresponds to the inoperable state in which the player can not remove the sword 5011. .

  In addition, an effect using the sword ornament 5011 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 400 (A), in the effect using the sword decorative body 5001, an operation reception period in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the knapsack state can be removed is generated within the rendering time, and Within the operation reception period, a predetermined effect is achieved by setting the blade 5011 in the katakana state according to an instruction (for example, display of "Shut up sword", etc.) in the display area etc. of the game side effect display device 1600. You can get the result. When the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 and puts the blade part 5011 into the sword state within the operation reception period, control for returning the blade part 5011 to the sword state at the end of the production time is performed. To be done. Also, if the player does not extract the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period and the blade part 5011 remains in the sword state, the sword state of the blade part 5011 at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in at least the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410 described above. There is. That is, when the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 can be removed with more expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 400 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be positioned in the bladed state outside the operation reception period, but a period other than the operation reception period in which the blade part is not in the bladed state is a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 when the blade part 5011 is in the sword state or in a state between the sword state and the sword storage state outside the operation reception period. It has become. In this example, the state of the sword position sensor described above is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the state of sword insertion), and the state of sword insertion in the above-described predetermined period (outside of the operation reception period). Measurement) is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 400 (C), in the operation acceptance period, unless the player removes the sword decorative body 5001, the blade portion 5011 should be positioned in the sword state. Is determined to have reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. Done. That is, in the operation acceptance period, when the player removes the sword ornament 5001, the blade portion 5011 is positioned in the sword state, so that the sword ornament is only in the state between the sword state and the sword state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword position sensor is in the ON state (the state where the blade portion 5011 is in the sword insertion state). . In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade part 5011 to the state of the sword in the sword restoration control is set to “0.5 seconds”.

  Further, as the operation reception period, a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is set. During the operation reception period, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, the restoration recovery control for returning the blade 5011 to the state of the sword is performed, but after returning to the state of the sword The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can remove the sword decorative body 5001. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of extracting the sword ornament 5001 from being hindered.

  As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) is determined at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above. That is, during the operation reception period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Not. On the other hand, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is determined during an operation reception period during which the sword decorative body 5001 can be extracted. For this reason, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player cannot remove the sword ornament 5001 as much as possible. Further, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410. , It is possible to prevent the omission of the rendering result in the rendering with such a high degree of expectation.

  In this example, the period when the blade 5011 is not in the state of the sword has reached a predetermined period (two seconds in this example), except in the case where the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, but among them, the abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001 only when the blade 5011 is not in the state of the sword at the start of the operation reception period. It may be determined. For example, at the start of the operation reception period, the blade 5011 is in the inserted state, and after the start of the operation reception period, it is unclear whether the player should completely remove the sword decorative body 5001 or not. There is a possibility that the blade is left for a predetermined period in a state between the state and the sword storage state. .

  In addition, when giving an instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 and the like regarding the removal of the sword decorative body 5001, the instruction is continuously continued regardless of the occurrence and cancellation of the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period. It may be performed. For example, in the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, a restoration recovery control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the state of the removal knife is performed. The instruction in the display area or the like of the game side effect display device 1600 is continued even during “until time” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the sword state”. Also, temporarily, if the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 according to the instruction “before the end of the restoration control of the sword”, the sword portion 5011 is in the removed state, so that the restoration of the sword is performed. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the effect of removing the sword decorative body 5001 from being disturbed by the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, although the restoration restoration control for returning the blade 5011 to the state of the sword is performed in this example, it is possible that the blade 5011 can not return to the state of the sword due to the catching of a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of the restoration control of the cycle, which should normally be completed in “0.5 seconds”, may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the restoration restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the state of the sword continues beyond the operation reception period, but in such a case, the operation is performed while the restoration restoration control is being performed. The result presentation may be derived at the end of the reception period, and further, the blade restoration control may be continued after the result presentation is derived. Thereby, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered without hindering the progress of the production.

(Error judgment timing of operation button)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that cannot be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. And can be changed. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 401 (A), when a special symbol corresponding to the start of a symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when a special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (a variation pattern). At the time of starting the demonstration production described above, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in a normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Control is performed to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the change of the special symbol is started, so that an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the change pattern. When being turned on, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being inhibited.

  In the game board 5, around the game board-side effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-center movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as a front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that the player cannot operate (cannot touch), and are in a non-operating state (standby position) where the player stands by around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (exposure position) exposed to the front of the display area 1600. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) is provided for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 401 (B), at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of presentation based on the variation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of symbol game (variation pattern (At the end of the rendering based on), at the timing of the start of the demonstration rendering described above, the movable decorative body should be positioned in the non-operating state without a predetermined operation start condition being established, but at those timings If it is determined that the movable decorative body is in the non-operating state (whether or not it is the normal position), and it is determined that the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state (not the normal position) Control is performed to determine and return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. As described above, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least at the start of the variation of the special symbol. When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the production from being cut off. In addition, during the execution of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the visual recognition of the display area is hindered. However, the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by returning to the non-operating state at least when the change of the special symbol is started.

  The operation button 410 is a member which can be touched by the player, and the player can inhibit the change to the normal state or the timing of controlling the projecting state, while the movable decorative body It is a member which can not be touched by the player, and the player can not inhibit the change to the state at the timing of controlling to the non-operation state or the operation state. For this reason, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this respect, the operation button 410 increases the chances of the abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred more than the movable decorative body, so that even if the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. For this reason, there is a high possibility that an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, but when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on a fluctuation pattern, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 is It can be prevented from being inhibited.

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and an effect using a movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is controlled to a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high probability that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. For this reason, while the frequency of using the operation button 410 is high, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, participation in the effect is hindered due to the occurrence of an abnormality. It can be prevented.

(Abnormal occurrence of the operation button in the operation production)
Next, an effect at the time of operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 402 and 403. FIG. 402 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, and FIG. 403 is an operation effect when the operation button 410 in the normal state is used It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is moved to the normal state by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projection position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projection start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the projecting state, and in such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projection position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. Such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440 makes it possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state or that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state. .

  Further, as effects set in the fluctuation pattern, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state and effects using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. Note that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is a effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with expectation than in the normal state.

  First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a projecting state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start time, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether it is the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 402A, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (is in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state 410 is changed to a protruding state. In addition, in the operation reception period, an instruction by display on the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, an instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation instructing the operation of the operation button 410 in the projecting state An indication of copying the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "Push the operation button pushed out!", An instruction by sound from a speaker (for example, a voice of "Push the operation button pushed out!", Etc.) Is performed in combination.

  In the above-described operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the projecting state to the normal state, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. When the operation button 410 in the projecting state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed when the operation reception period ends. To be done. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation described above may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 402 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Further, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as the case where the abnormality does not occur. The instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is to notify the player that the abnormal projection is equivalent to the regular projection, but for example, an instruction by the display on the display area of the game effect display device 1600 (For example, a display that duplicates the operation button 410 in a projecting state, a message display such as "This is a real thing! Press the operation button without worry!", Etc.) , "This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying!" As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 that is in a normal state does not change to a protruding state. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using an operation button 410 is being performed or an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state can not be recognized, and an operation in a further protruding state There is a possibility that the player may be hesitant to operate the button 410. However, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation is performed by the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 or the sound from the speaker, so that the operation button 410 that is at least protruded from the display or the sound. It is possible to recognize that the used effect is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the expectation of the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. Note that the indication effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those configured with different effect contents as described above, but informing the player that the abnormal protrusion is equivalent to the regular protrusion. The instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect contents, as long as

  In addition, at the time of execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to the normal state By doing this, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism, and the normal state is restored. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is normally displayed at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect B at the time of the above-described protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of the process, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether it is the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 403 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (is in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. Maintain. In addition, in the operation reception period, an instruction by display on the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal The display showing a copy of the operation button 410 in the state, the message display of “Press the operation button!”, Etc., and the voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the sound of “Press the operation button!”) It will be. Further, in the operation reception period, when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 403 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Further, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as the case where the abnormality does not occur. The instruction effect D for the normal operation is to inform the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion, for example, the instruction by the display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (( For example, a display showing a copy of the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as "This projection is not related but press the operation button!", Or an instruction by voice from a speaker (for example, this projection does not matter) Etc. ”is performed in combination. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation in which the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded occurs, but the display in the display area of the game effect display device 1600 is performed. Or, by performing the instruction effect at the time of normal operation by the sound from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display or the sound that at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. . In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the normal operation described above may be ended. In addition, the indication effects C and D at the time of the normal operation can inform the player that the present protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion without being limited to the one configured with different effect contents as described above. In this case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect content.

  In addition, at the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormal projecting state is pressed to the normal state By doing this, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, the operation is performed even when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period. The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In addition, even at the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is displayed within the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period. The mechanism is not locked, and its abnormally projecting state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, is the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? The operation button 410 in the protruding state cannot be recognized, but depending on whether or not the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state when it is pressed. It can be recognized that the effect of is being performed.

  It should be noted that when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally projecting state is generated outside the operation reception period, as in the operation reception period when executing effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even when pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projecting state is maintained. In this manner, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, as described later, at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of effect based on the variation pattern), symbol game At the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above.

  Further, in the present example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. However, such an instruction effect during normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is a effect with a lower degree of expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and therefore, the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the expectation degree for the performance cannot be confirmed due to the fact that it is not, the player will hardly suffer any disadvantage.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in a normal state during the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. The operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism to return to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked. It is possible to keep the abnormally protruding state from being locked. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an abnormal protrusion occurs regardless of whether an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state or an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state. This is because, for example, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred in the operation button 410, You can call attention.

(Notification when operation button abnormality occurs)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. And can be changed. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 404 (A), when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a projecting state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored. Dont return. In such a case, although the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Even when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done.

  Even when the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the operation acceptance period, the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts at the start of variation (based on the variation pattern, as will be described later). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), the timing at the start of the demonstration production described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods) Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. That is, in the operation reception period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player is not intentional. It is trying to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence conspicuous.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 outside the operation reception period, the response is different from that in the case where an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, at the time of executing the demonstration effect described above, other than the operation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic operation confirmation period is also provided, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's depression. The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is positioned at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 404B, in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that it is in a normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is projected, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating to return from the projected state to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruded state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, Does not return to normal. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in the abnormal projection state, and the abnormal projection operation button 410 is returned to the normal state unless the operation button 410 in the abnormal projection state returns to the normal state. Control is repeatedly performed. Then, when control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 back to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state, The automatic operation confirmation period is ended, and after the automatic operation confirmation period is ended, control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to a normal state is not performed. That is, even if the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, and the abnormality continues after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period, the symbol is as after the end of the operation reception period described above At the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern) At the timing at the start (the timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state to the normal state is not performed.

  In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of “an error has occurred in the operation button”), and blinking of a lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 Is notified to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 (for example, by flashing the lamp / LED more intensely than in the normal performance).

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to a normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. It does not happen. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 is performed. That is, except for the operation confirmation period, although the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested as in the automatic operation confirmation period, there is a high possibility that the player operates the operation button 410 and an abnormality occurs. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 leaves a trace that a state of abnormal projection has occurred, and warns such an actor.

  In this example, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed. It may be. However, in such a case, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appealing to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect that is notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the automatic operation confirmation period. Thereby, even after the end of the operation reception period, it is possible not to be disturbed by the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 and to pay attention to the effect related to the game progress (effect based on the variation pattern). it can.

(Confirmation effect at the time of abnormality occurrence of movable decoration)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 405 is a time chart illustrating the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  In the game board 5, around the game board-side effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-center movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as a front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that the player cannot operate (cannot touch), and are in a non-operating state (standby position) where the player stands by around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (exposure position) exposed to the front of the display area 1600. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) is provided for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 405, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (based on the variation pattern) At the time of the start of the demonstration production described above (at the end of the production) (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition. However, at those timings, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position). In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed.

  However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the movable decorative body can not move back to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body is performed. Specifically, the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image being displayed are changed to non-display. Further, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is flashed violently. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the occurrence of the abnormality in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  Also, if the movable decorative body has not returned to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect notifying that the movable decorative body has an abnormality, it is confirmed whether or not to proceed the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, a display such as "Please press the operation button when ending the abnormal notification and continue the game" is performed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is depressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but the display contents such as the decorative symbol and the background image remain undisplayed in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. In addition, effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided in the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker are not performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is depressed in the confirmation effect, an effect notifying of the occurrence of an abnormality in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect confirming whether to advance the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred End the Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as a decorative symbol and a background image are displayed in the display area of the game effect effect display device 1600 As a result, the display contents such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided on the body frame 4 and sound from the speakers are produced. For example, when an effect for operating the movable decorative body is performed after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, display of the display area, the lamp, and the like, as compared with the case where no abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker are not changed, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the confirmation effect is performed, and it is recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed, and then the game is advanced. Thereby, the fall of the interest by the movable decoration body not operating can be suppressed. In addition, not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality occurs such that the movable decorative body stops operating from the non-operating state, the same confirmation effect is performed. It is

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation reception period for the effect using the operation button 410 (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed). Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be displayed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the used effect is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that a predetermined effect result can be derived without moving the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. The effect that is not present can be the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

  Also, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is An effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred and a confirmation effect to confirm whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred, but when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, You may make it perform an effect. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operation state.For example, when the movable decoration body returns to the non-operation state during the execution of the confirmation effect, Even before the operation button 410 is pressed, the confirmation effect may be ended.

(Interference avoidance operation of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoiding operation when an abnormality occurs in any one of the plurality of movable bodies in a state in which they can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 406 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 which can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member as to whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. As shown, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  Further, as the effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 is set. As shown in FIG. 406 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operating button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to the instruction.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state. If the user does not press the button, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state when the operation reception period ends. At the end of the operation reception period, if it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded, and the operation button 410 in the protruded state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the opened state. That is, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be protruded without the operation button cover 419 being opened, the operation button 410 to be protruded and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other. Further problems may occur in 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control for avoiding the interference is performed so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 406 (B), when the operation reception period occurs, control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, If it is determined that there is no error, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and control is not performed so that the operation button 410 in the normal state protrudes (control for setting the operation button 410 to protrude). Is prohibited). Thereby, when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state, interference between the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 can be prevented. Note that even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not enter the open state when the operation reception period occurs. In this case, the control for causing the operation button 410 in the normal state to protrude is not performed (the control for causing the operation button 410 to protrude) is prohibited.

  In addition, even when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, thereafter, when the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the finger touch of the player itself, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been eliminated, and control is performed to allow the operation button 410 in the normal state to be in a protruding state, while allowing the operation button 410 to be in a protruding state. As described above, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a situation where they interfere with each other, when the situation where the interference occurs is eliminated by the contact, the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded. Then, in the remaining period of the operation reception period, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the protruded state. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruded state is performed by the player's self-help effort. It is possible to prevent the participation from being hindered. After pressing the operation button 410 in the projecting state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the abnormal state to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state, and the operation is performed later. The situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented in advance.

  When the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the finger touch of the player itself even though the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, normally When the operation button 410 in the state of is projected but not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation reception period are sequentially terminated. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state, and thereafter, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button in the released state Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents, in advance, the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other again.

  On the other hand, when the operation reception period occurs, the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state, and when the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not in the protruding state. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Further, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred back to the closed state, so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved. And the operation button cover 419 prevent the occurrence of interference.

(Operation at the time of abnormality occurrence of the operation button according to the game state)
Next, an operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is made different according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 407 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time-short state and the time-short state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 which can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member as to whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. As shown, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude and is positioned in the normal state, whereas in the short-time state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 protrudes by the spring mechanism. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), it is possible to perform an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state is performed when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. Then, in the operation reception period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state in accordance with the instruction. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-short time state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation acceptance period. However, as shown in FIG. 407 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state, the control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the opened state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in a normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in an open state, only control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to a closed state is available. Is done. In addition, with specified abnormality decision timing, same as other than this example, at the time of the fluctuation start of special symbol which corresponds at the time of the start of the symbol game (at the time of the effect start based on fluctuation pattern) This is the timing at the start of the demonstration effect described above, at the end of the change (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern).

  On the other hand, in the time-short state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be performed. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and the operation reception period is in the protruding state when the operation reception period occurs. A predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction. In addition, as long as it is in the short time state, even if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state, the lock is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the operation button 410 is returned to the protruded state. Become.

  Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in an open state and the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 407 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the projecting state Only done.

  As described above, the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state in the non-short-time state (normal state), whereas the operation button cover 419 is in the open state in the time-short state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-short-time state and the short-time state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is determined. When an abnormality occurs as described above, the operation button is used when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed at a position corresponding to the gaming state by changing the return destination position of the member where the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating 410 from being blocked.

[A penalty when operating the operation unit that can emit light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be treated in a miscellaneous manner. As a result, one of the operation units At the same time, if it breaks down, operability and rendition will drop significantly, so it will be inevitable to reduce the fun of playing games.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
A sword decorative body provided so that the sword part 5010 (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the heel part 5013) can be moved (variably) by a predetermined operation (striking operation and sword operation) between the sword position and the sword position. 5001 (see Figure 281, Figure 311, etc.)
Although the operation opportunity is not given, the “operation to extract the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011, handle portion 5012, heel portion 5013) from the sheath portion 5020 (extraction operation)” or “sword Repeated operation may cause a failure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a rendering light emitting unit (not shown) is disposed to each of the blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013, and the sword 5010 (blade) A special detection unit (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the reference numeral 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) is at a specific position (original position) in which the sheath 5020 is in the storage state. And, at least during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed (non-playing state with no game effects or symbol variations according to the big hit determination), the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. If it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in a non-game state in which no symbol variation is performed, the sword portion 5010 is used together with the effect light emitting portions (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) by a predetermined operation. As a result of being displaced, it becomes possible for the effect restriction period to occur when it is detected that the operating portion is not located at the specific position, so that it is possible to suitably suppress the handling of the operation unit.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-described “change in the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound” and the “set value (luminance set value) related to the light emission luminance” described above. The above-described effect restriction period is generated while all of the above “changes” are accepted by the operation of the player. However, although this will be described later, in this production restriction period,
・ Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-Regarding the effect lamp, when the setting value (luminance setting value) related to the light emission luminance is changed, the effect light emission unit included in the sword unit 5010 as the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 (The blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) are not emitted at a brightness according to the brightness setting value, but are provided at a site different from the sword 5010 to be detected. For the effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), the process such that the effect light emission with the luminance corresponding to the set value is made executable is performed. Can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the production restriction period occurs, the setting value change related to the sound volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can both be accepted, but the sound volume setting is related. The degree of restriction is different between the process and the process related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe they have done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, with regard to the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting part (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012 and the collar part 5013) included in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light emission is not performed in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, the effect lamp provided at a site different from the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player is changed By making it possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission in accordance with the timing at which a specific notice effect is performed) in a manner in which the luminance setting value is reflected, The pachinko machine 1 as a whole can appropriately appeal that it intends to continue the game and the production, while warning that it is possible to recognize that the production restriction is imposed. It made. In this sense, for the effect lamp on the game board 5 where the game ball flows down or wins, the effect light emission is executed in a manner that reflects the changed luminance setting value as usual. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning for handling the operation section in a rough manner while preferably avoiding “the player's willingness to start the game or prompting the end of the game”. become.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the restriction condition for the process related to the sound volume setting and the restriction for the process related to the luminance setting are made different from each other. . In particular, the “process related to volume setting” on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions strongly encourages continuation of the game by making significant improvements to the normal state relatively early. On the other hand, the “Brightness setting-related processing” on the side that originally imposed relatively sweet restrictions showed an improvement trend, but slowed the overall improvement speed, In other words, it is expected that a sense of tension is maintained appropriately over a long period of time to prevent a mishandled operation from being re-executed.

  FIG. 408 is a time chart illustrating an example of restrictions on volume setting and luminance setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword portion 5010.

  Assuming now that the game is in a non-playing state in which a game is not being executed, such as in a demo screen, and in a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in this state, as shown in FIG. Execution of processing for changing a setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is permitted. When the volume setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume The volume adjustment confirmation sound will be output.

  In the same state, execution of processing for changing a set value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. When the luminance setting value is changed, processing of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (processing of reflecting the luminance setting value as light amount) is executed, and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

  In the same state, the handle LED (the effect light emitting portion in the handle portion 5012), the heel LED (the effect light emitting portion in the heel portion 5013), the blade LED (the effect light emitting portion in the blade portion 5011), and the LED outside the operation unit (game) All of the effect lamps on the panel 5 are in the “normal light emission” state. The “normal light emission” state corresponds to the “state in which light emission is maintained” as long as it is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of the effect. However, if the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the “light emission waiting state in which a light emission state is permitted when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied” It is a concept including “the light off state” and may not necessarily be in the light emitting state. Further, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 is provided in such a manner that it has translucency so that the light emission mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the state of the sword.

  However, as shown in FIG. 408, the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011, the handle part) is obtained as a result of the predetermined operation being performed at the timing to1 despite the non-game state where the operation effect cannot occur. 5012, hook part 5013) is detected with respect to the sheath part 5020, it is detected that it is not in the state of being sharpened (detected that it is not at a specific position (original position)). First, the first effect suppression state is generated.

  In the first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 408, the execution of the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is permitted. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process for adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is performed. No confirmation sound is output.

  Further, in the same state, execution of processing for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player regarding the luminance is also permitted. In this regard, when the brightness setting value is changed, among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1, the pattern LED (effect light emitting unit in the pattern unit 5012) in the sword unit 5010 moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation. , For the heel LED (the effect light emitting portion in the heel portion 5013) and the blade LED (the effect light emitting portion in the blade portion 5011), a process for adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (the luminance setting value is a light quantity) For the outside operation unit LED (the effect lamp in the game board 5) that is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, based on the changed brightness setting value. Processing for adjusting the light emission luminance (processing for reflecting the luminance setting value as the amount of light) is executed. In the same state, the emission brightness of some of the plurality of effect lamps (the LED outside the operation unit) can be adjusted, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. It is like that.

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can be accepted, the volume setting is related. The degree of restriction differs between the process and the process related to the brightness setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe they have done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting unit (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) provided in the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected, but the effect lamp (the operation lamp provided on the game board 5 on which the game is played is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation) The outside LED) produces an effect light emission in the form in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected (for example, if a game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific notice effect is performed. Light emission in accordance with the timing). Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production while warning about miscellaneous handling of the “sword part 5010”.

  More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the pattern LED (the effect light emitting part in the pattern part 5012) continues the light emission state (penalty light emission) in a predetermined light emission luminance and light emission mode. For example, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed luminance setting value is not reflected, and depending on the result of the jackpot determination when the symbol variation is started Even if a light emission request is generated, a light emission mode corresponding to the light emission request does not appear.

  In addition, the weir LED (the effect light emitting unit in the buttock unit 5013) can emit light as normal even in the first effect suppression state, and the effect lamp always maintains the light regardless of the condition of the effect If it is provided as "a state in which light emission is maintained", it is considered as a "predetermined effect" if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is established. The light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is permitted when the condition is satisfied is set. However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the amber LED does not emit light in such a manner that the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Even in the section 5010, while allowing the light emission effect to promote the continuation of the game, it is possible to warn of rough handling of the "sword portion 5010".

  Further, the blade LED (the effect light emitting unit in the blade part 5011) is controlled so as to continue the light-off state in the first effect suppression state, for example, a light emission request according to the result of the jackpot determination when the symbol variation is started. Even if it occurs, it does not respond to this. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, it is impossible for the effect light to be emitted in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected.

  On the other hand, no limitation is imposed on the outside-operation-unit LED provided outside the sword unit 5010 that is moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and the above-described “normal light emission” state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed luminance setting value can be reflected (if it is in the light emission state), and the light emission corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is started when the symbol variation is started. When a demand arises, the light emission aspect according to this will appear.

  In such a configuration, since the restriction is imposed only on the effect lamp provided in the “sword part 5010” that is moved by a predetermined operation, the game board 5 on which the game is performed is applied. If there is a case where only the gaze is gathered, it seems that the light emission luminance can be adjusted as usual when the luminance setting value is changed, so that the first effect suppression state is occurring. There is a concern that this will not be recognized. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the luminance setting value is changed by the operation by the player in the first effect suppression state, and the light emission luminance of some of the effect lamps (outside the operation unit LED) Even if the adjustment is performed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Thereby, even when “sword part 5010” is not visually recognized, the player can be made aware that the performance is in a restricted state, and “sword part 5010” is returned to the original position. Can be encouraged to.

  Then, after the occurrence of such a first effect suppression state, at timing to 2, an operation to position the sword portion 5010 to the sword state is performed, and it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the knife state (specific If it is detected that the user is in the position (original position), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs processing to shift from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

  In this second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 408, with regard to the volume, all the restriction contents when in the first effect suppression state are released and processed normally. Not only the execution of the process of changing the volume setting value is allowed, but also the execution of the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the execution of the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound are permitted. It has become.

  On the other hand, with regard to luminance, although the "restriction to the luminance adjustment confirmation sound" is released among the restriction contents in the first effect suppressed state, the "partial restriction to the luminance adjustment" is continued without being cancelled. It has come to be. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, the execution of the process of changing the brightness setting value, the execution of the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and the output of the brightness adjustment confirmation sound Although the execution of the process is permitted, the process of adjusting the light emission luminance of the effect lamp included in the sword unit 5010 among the plurality of effect lamps is not permitted to be performed (restricted state). It will be maintained as it is.

  That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that is generated based on "the fact that the sword 5010 is in the state of being inserted" is detected in the first effect suppression state, and the sword 5010 is already at the specific position (original Position), and it can be said that the rough handling has been eliminated. In response to this, with regard to "processing related to volume setting" that had imposed relatively strict restrictions at the beginning, it is strongly urged to continue the game by making it quickly and greatly improved to the normal state. Is the main purpose.

  However, if all restrictions are immediately released by simply returning the sword 5010 to a specific position (original position) after the first effect suppression state has occurred, the function as a penalty is insufficient. Yes, miscellaneous handling of “Sword 5010” may recur. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, in the first effect suppression state, when it is detected that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword state, transition to the second effect suppression state is made. Then, regarding the luminance, although the "restriction to the luminance adjustment confirmation sound" is released among the restriction contents in the first effect suppressed state, the "partial restriction to the luminance adjustment" is continued without being canceled. It is like that.

  In other words, in this case, the “sword part 5010”, which is the target of miscellaneous handling, is left with a production restriction, and therefore the atmosphere (“ It will be possible to provide a “breakage”, etc., and as a result, prevention of recurrence can be expected.

  On the other hand, in the second effect suppression state, since the rough handling of "sword part 5010" has already been eliminated, the situation where the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is played It can be said that the situation where concentration on games is in a desirable situation. In this point, in the second effect suppression state, the luminance setting value is changed when the player is watching the game board 5 on which the game is performed (the situation where the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized). The brightness setting value is changed by the operation of the player to make it appear that the light emission brightness can be adjusted as usual (it seems to be in the normal state), and a part of the plurality of effect lamps (operation When the emission luminance of the extra LED is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output. As a result, the player is concentrated on the game to avoid reoccurrence of misuse of the sword portion 5010.

  According to such a second effect suppression state, the “processing related to the brightness setting” on the side that originally imposed a relatively sweet restriction, although showing an improvement trend, is subject to rough handling. As long as the “sword part 5010” becomes limited, the player can play the game while keeping the tension moderately over a long period of time and preventing the mishandling from happening again. It is expected to concentrate on.

  Moreover, in the second effect suppression state, some of the effect lamps (pattern LED, amber LED, blade LED) among the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment targets of the light emission luminance, but other than that When the light emission luminance of the effect lamp (LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output as in the case where the light emission luminance is adjusted in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation where the operation by the player can not be accepted, but it is possible to react by the operation by the player as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it is possible to suitably promote the continuation of the game by the player.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the light emission luminance is adjusted only for a part of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the normal state is maintained. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as that at a given time is assigned to a channel and output. As a result, even in a situation where only partial adjustment is possible, it is expected to give a sense of security as if the player has already returned to the normal state and to encourage motivation to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is ended and it shifts to the normal state, the brightness in the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the brightness setting value at that time is collectively reflected, but in this case the brightness It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it appear as if it had already returned to normal.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 408, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to3), it is possible to execute processing for terminating the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state.

  In other words, regarding the transition condition from “the first effect suppression state with a relatively severe effect restriction degree” to “the second effect suppression state with a relatively restrictive effect restriction degree”, “the operation by the player is an opportunity”. This makes it possible to establish this early, so that the willingness to continue the game is not lost. However, regarding the transition condition from “second effect suppression state with relatively limited effect restriction” to “normal state”, “a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred”. It is not permitted to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it will be possible to effectively warn about miscellaneous handling while appropriately maintaining the willingness to continue the game, and as a result, prevention of recurrence can be expected. It becomes like this.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Regarding some of the effect lamps (here, the LED, the blade LED, and the blade LED), the second effect suppression state is terminated and returned to the normal state. Also, only "limited" emission is permitted.

  More specifically, although it is possible to perform light emission as normal with regard to the amber LED and the sword LED, even if the luminance setting value is changed, the changed luminance setting value is reflected. However, the effect light emission can be performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value. That is, in this case, in particular, only the effect light emission under the same restriction is continuously performed after the occurrence of the first effect suppression state for the indigo LED, which may cause a failure in part. It will be expected that it will be made to be conscious and it will be suppressed that the rough handling with respect to "Sword part 5010" is relapsed. Alternatively, even after the effect suppression state ends and becomes the normal state, it can be made to function as a history in which the effect suppression state has occurred before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. Will be able to In addition, about the said production | presentation restriction | limiting left with respect to a coffin LED and a blade LED, you may make it maintain impossible with cancellation, for example, conditions different from before, such as RAM clear and power-off etc. It is desirable to be made releasable.

  According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppression state ends and the process related to the volume adjustment returns to normal, the process related to the brightness adjustment needs to be further improved in stages. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension over a longer period of time while maintaining the willingness to play.

  As for the first effect suppression state (further, the second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-game state (such as in the demo screen), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit determination) It can be generated based on the fact that the sword portion 5010 is not in the sword state (detected that the sword portion 5010 is not in the specific position (original position)) even when it is changing or in a big hit game state. It is desirable to do. In other words, the sword portion 5010 should not be dealt with in a game state (such as when the symbol changes according to the result of the jackpot determination), in which the operation opportunity is not given. It is because it is desirable to be treated properly.

  However, even if it is in the state controlled to the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 408, the reception regarding the change of the luminance setting value is made when it is in the game execution state (the symbol variation is in the execution state) Therefore, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound when the brightness adjustment corresponding to this is performed. That is, when the “first effect suppression state” is shifted to the “second effect suppression state”, at least the processing side related to the volume adjustment is released from all restrictions, so the sense of tension is well maintained. There is a concern that you will not be able to Anyway, in order to strongly encourage game continuation, it is important to greatly improve the restriction on the "processing related to volume adjustment" which has been so strict.

  In this regard, “when the tension cannot be maintained well” means that the situation where the second performance suppression state has occurred (the situation where the first performance suppression state with strict performance restrictions has ended) is disregarded and the game is resumed. It is also assumed that the situation is such that the tension is well maintained in a situation where the game is not resumed. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when in the symbol variation execution state (game resumption) where it is assumed that tension cannot be maintained well, do not output the brightness adjustment confirmation, By looking only at “processing related to adjustment”, it can be expected that moderate tension will be imparted by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved.

  In this sense, in the situation where it is controlled in the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 408, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the reception regarding the change of the volume setting value is made, and the volume adjustment according to this Even when the operation is performed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound may not be output. In addition, for such special processing (processing not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound, processing not to output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the restriction is one. You may make it apply also when it is in the condition returned to the normal state in the form which is left behind. That is, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output while the game execution state is in progress, or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning can not be understood and the game is performed. It is because there is a possibility that it can not be concentrated.

  In the above explanation example, the handle LED, the heel LED, and the blade LED are provided. However, the sword portion 5010 may be provided with at least the handle LED as an effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain game motivation by showing step-by-step improvements while warning the rough handling of the “sword part 5010” in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. It is possible.

  Further, in the above explanation example, as soon as “detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword state” is detected in the first effect suppression state, the state is shifted from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the “detection that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword state” in the first effect suppression state. A process may be performed to shift from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. According to such a configuration, while allowing relatively early transition from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”, at least a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is a effect restriction It can be maintained in the strict first effect suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) may be set as a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof. Although desirable, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  In the example described above, the cause of the production restriction is the predetermined operation for the operation means (sword unit 5010), but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not an operation target by the player (for example, an object that can move between the first state and the second state, such as a decorative movable body and the door frame 3), this is subject to rough handling. If it is forced to be displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, based on the fact that at least a “lamp that is subject to effect restrictions such as the above-described pattern LED” is provided at least as an effect lamp for the specified object, and it is detected that the specified object is not in the original position. It is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether the game is in the non-game state or the game state, the first effect suppression state as described above is set based on the detection that the specific object is not in the first state (original position). After that, the second effect suppression state as described above is generated based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), and a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence. It will be returned to the normal state (or the restricted normal state) based on that.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Further, in the above example, after the change to the sound volume setting value is received for a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state”, the “second effect suppression” is performed when transitioning to the “second effect suppression state” At the time of shifting to the “state”, the volume is adjusted in such a manner that the contents of the plurality of changes to the volume setting value so far are reflected at once. In addition, if the change to the luminance setting value is received multiple times in the “first effect suppression state” or the “second effect suppression state”, when the state is returned to the normal state at timing to3, the “normal state” is performed. When the transition is made, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the contents of the plurality of changes to the brightness setting value so far are reflected in a lump. About the method (including the existence of the output of the adjustment confirmation sound in that case) which is collectively adjusted at “a timing” such multiple setting value changes, the contents described with reference to FIGS. This can be realized by appropriately adopting Also, in this case, since the timing to2 when the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing to3 when the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, it is possible to gradually show the way to return to the normal state. As a result, the player can be motivated to continue the game by making it look as if it had already returned to normal time or making it appear to be recovering.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

[Brightness adjustment at notification of abnormality]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, illustration is omitted, but various types of pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button for an effect lamp (lamp that is subject to effect control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) is provided, and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, a game relating to the brightness applied to various effect lamps It is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the user (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Usually, if there is an effect lamp that is in a light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the light emission brightness in the effect lamp based on the changed brightness setting value ( A process of reflecting the luminance setting value as the light quantity is performed. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, with regard to the effect lamp that is not in the light emission state when the brightness setting value is changed, when the light emission request based on the result of the big hit judgment is made thereafter, the brightness according to the changed brightness setting value The light emission state is set. More specifically, if it is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of effect, light emission according to the changed brightness setting value as soon as the change of the brightness setting value is accepted If it is to be changed to a light emission mode with luminance, but is provided as a rendering lamp that emits light based on that a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied (representation request according to a big hit determination), the predetermined The effect light emission is performed as the light emission luminance corresponding to the changed luminance setting value at the timing when the effect condition is satisfied. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission with the light emission luminance according to the changed luminance setting value is maintained in the state (light emission waiting state) that is enabled.

  In addition, regarding the acceptance of the change relating to the luminance setting value and the adjustment processing according to the changed luminance setting value, the player can be used in both the state where the symbol is not changing and the state where the symbol is changing. Each can be executed by the operation of.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, when a specific anomaly detection as illustrated in FIG. 245 occurs, an anomaly notification according to the anomaly type will be performed, but on the hole side, an illegal act is performed If there is a type of abnormality detection that is unlikely to occur, there is a possibility that the player may want to continue the game as it is. That is, even if the minor abnormality is not serious, as a result of giving an abnormality notification as a result of giving an abnormality notification and the player may end the game, the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is increased. There may be disadvantages due to the decline.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-short state) Among the plurality of effect lamps, a part of the effect lamps (for example, the effect lamps provided on the game board 5) can emit light by the effect (during the effect light emission or the condition light emission conditions are satisfied) It is possible to execute abnormal notification light emission using at least the special effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided on the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps while keeping the waiting state (off state) up to And

  And even during the execution period of such anomaly notification light emission, every time a player accepts an operation, the change of the brightness setting value can be accepted, and the state in which the light emission by the production is possible is left. In the some effect lamps, the emission luminance can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value, whereas in the specific effect lamp, the changed luminance is obtained. The abnormality notification light emission is executed only at a predetermined luminance setting value regardless of the setting value.

  According to such a configuration, even when the abnormal notification light emission is being performed, the luminance setting value is changed each time the player receives an operation that is partially among the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and effect light emission with the reflected luminance setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably promote the continuation of the game by the player while notifying the hole side of the abnormality.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormal notification light emission is performed during the period in which the target of the brightness adjustment is partially limited as described above, the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. Even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily output, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the period for which the brightness adjustment target is limited is completed is short So that it is possible to suggest to the player that the abnormal notification light emission has been completed and that the normal light emission will be allowed soon. I have to.

  FIG. 409 is a time chart showing an example of the light emission mode of the effect lamp in the abnormal notification period according to the specific abnormality detection.

  As shown in FIG. 409, at a timing tp1 when a game is not being executed, such as during a demo screen, a specific state (for example, passing through the right gate in an untimed state (abnormal game)). Is detected), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

  In this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the effect light emission is performed for some effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-A group” in the drawing) among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1. As it is possible, the abnormal notification light emission is performed using the other effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-B group” in the drawing). Note that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be performed using all of the other effect lamps, and a part of the other effect lamps (for example, a specific effect lamp provided on the door frame 3). You may make it perform using only.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific state (for example, a state in which right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-short state) occurs, a part for effect With regard to the lamp (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure), the light-emitting effect is performed in the same manner as when the specific state is not occurring, and this makes the hole side abnormal. While notifying, the player is preferably encouraged to continue the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is occurring, change acceptance relating to the luminance setting value is allowed. Then, in some production lamps (which correspond to “LED-A group” in the figure) that are set to “not perform abnormality notification light emission”, the light emission luminance is the same as when the lamp warning period is not in effect. , And can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value (changes immediately if light is always emitted, light emission waiting state with changed luminance setting value if light is emitted in response to a production request) Has been adjusted (can be adjusted).

  On the other hand, for the other effect lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure), even if the luminance setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the lamp is changed. The luminance setting value is not reflected, and the anomaly notification light emission is performed only at the predetermined luminance setting value (adjustment reflection impossible). That is, in this case, light emission can be performed at the same time in which different luminance setting values are reflected between some of the effect lamps and the other effect lamps, which makes it possible to perform effects separately from the effect light emission. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the abnormal notification light emission, which is not related to the above, is being performed. In this sense, for effect light emission, it is desirable that the luminance set value can be changed only in the range equal to or less than the luminance set value adopted by the abnormal notification light emission.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily generated even when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. I do not output. That is, until a timing tp2 has arrived (timing tp1 to tp2) that the remaining time until the period in which the brightness adjustment target is limited is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) comes. Even if the luminance setting value is changed and the light emission luminance of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, control is performed so as not to output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted (when the light emission brightness of some effect lamps is actually adjusted), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again. To create a situation that

  According to such a configuration, if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output despite the change of the luminance setting value during the execution period of the abnormal notification light, the remaining time until the period is ended is While it can be recognized that the situation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is ended. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, even if the abnormal notification light emission itself has no change and continues in this state, it is suggested to the player internally that it is in a state of proceeding to a normal state (improvement) As a result, even when abnormal notification light emission is performed for a relatively long time, it is expected that a desire to continue the game is preferably promoted.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all the effects are produced even during the execution period (timing tp2 to tp3) of the abnormal notification light emission in which the luminance setting value is only partially reflected (the LED-A group). The same sound as in the normal state where the lamp is able to reflect the luminance setting value is output as the above-mentioned luminance adjustment confirmation sound, thereby giving a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state, It is intended to suppress a decrease in game entertainment during the period in which the abnormal notification light emission is performed. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 409, at the timing tp3 when the execution period of the abnormal alarm light emission ends, even if the luminance setting value has been changed a plurality of times until that time, the luminance setting value at that time is set. The effect light emission will be performed in the form of being collectively reflected to the other effect lamps (“LED-B group” that had been emitting abnormal notification light until then), but at this time the brightness adjustment confirmation sound It is important to prevent the output from being output as if it had already returned to the normal state.

  In the above example, when in a non-gaming state where a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, in a specific state (for example, a state where right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-shortened state) The lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated as an example based on the fact that it has been detected. However, it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) is detected when in the gaming state (such as symbol fluctuation state) in which the game is being executed In this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection.

  Also in the case of generating a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) when in a game execution state in which a game is being executed (such as a symbol variation state or a big hit gaming state), basically the same as in the above example. It is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to timing tp1 to timing tp2 to timing tp2 regardless of whether the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has arrived. It is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound at tp3). That is, since the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is just being continued by the player, it is assumed that the possibility that the game will be ended is extremely small. Therefore, even if a situation (timing tp2 to tp3) that can be returned to the normal state soon comes, by maintaining the control that the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output, it is still in the execution period of abnormal alarm light. It is more desirable to make it possible for a player to recognize accurate information such as Further, in this case, even after the execution period of abnormal notification light emission (timing tp1 to tp3) is ended and the normal state is established, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained while the game execution state is continued. You may do so. If the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the game execution state, the meaning may not be understood and the game may not be concentrated.

  In the above example, when it is in the game execution state from the non-playing state (due to the start of the symbol variation), during the period from tp2 to tp3 in which the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output. In the case where the game is performed, etc.), "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (inaudible control at timings tp1 to tp2)" is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives, or until the game execution state is ended.

  Further, in the example described above, for example, even when the time after the timing tp2 when the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has come (timing tp2 to tp3), If it is rediscovered that it is in a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) when it is within the period, it It is desirable that the process (process after the timing tp1) concerning the abnormal notice light emission be performed again. That is, in this case, even if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output, the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is returned to the non-output state.

  In the example described above, when the timing tp3 arrives, the transition to a normal state in which all effect lamps can be adjusted based on the brightness setting value is performed. However, in the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of effect lamps are prepared as effect lamps which can not be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, and when the timing tp3 comes, Only a part can be adjusted based on the luminance setting value, but at least a specific effect lamp cannot be adjusted based on the luminance setting value even in a normal state after the timing tp3 arrives. You may do so. According to such a configuration, since a restriction on brightness adjustment is left for a specific effect lamp, even after the lamp warning period ends and becomes normal, a lamp warning is issued before that. It becomes possible to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and it becomes possible to expect stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 concerned. Note that the restriction remaining for a specific effect lamp may be maintained in an unreleasable state. However, for example, it may be made releasable by clearing the RAM or shutting off the power. Is desirable.

  The brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and although it can not be confirmed which “confirmation sound” has been output, some “confirmation sound” is output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

  In addition, it is desirable that, during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission according to the above-described example, acceptance of a change of the setting value for the volume of the effect sound is also permitted based on the operation acceptance by the player. Then, in this case, the “processing related to the notification sound and volume adjustment” during the execution of the abnormal notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the “processing related to notification sound and volume adjustment” described with reference to FIGS. 255 to 257 may be ended (collective reflection of volume) when timing tp3 comes, When tp2 arrives, it may be terminated (collection of sound volume). In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing tp3 at which the luminance setting value can be collectively reflected are different from each other. The player can be motivated to continue the game by making it appear as if it had already returned to its normal state or making it appear to be recovering.

  Further, in the above-described example, although the specific state is illustrated as “the state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) is generated in the non-short time state”, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be the same as the case of the example described above (such as a door opening abnormality or a state in which a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred).

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the game machine, various effects are performed during the game by voice output, lamp lighting / blinking, image display, etc., and various effects are attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is an effect control device based on the command output from the main control substrate 1310 and executes effects according to the gaming state of the game To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in a single direction.

  In order to cooperatively execute a plurality of types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technology for realizing various effect displays using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with the scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect display can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data may include BGM designation. In this case, by outputting the BGM designated by the sound source IC, it becomes possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

  However, game machines are demanding more elaborate effects. In the above-described conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as sound output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, BGM could not be changed while executing image display according to scenario data. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during image display, the image display and BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effects is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and it is an effect that gives a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp are controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display according to the game state, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking in conjunction with the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and Outline of Each Function]
FIG. 410 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of the function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080 is provided.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). A layer will be described. In the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as background or character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (action) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer for displaying the character. Thereby, the capacity of the effect data (scheduler data) can be reduced, and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing effects. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required in accordance with the rendering device in order to be performed in order to control the rendering in each rendering device. It is data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing effects to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal symbol block data” for fluctuating display of identification symbols on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of “sub-effect block data” for controlling lamps, accessories and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and the rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the production control unit 5020 is configured in software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. Note that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured as a separate arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each function described above will be described. FIG. 411 is a view showing an example of a configuration of a module and the like in the periphery control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules regarding effects. Further, a presentation control unit 5020 is included to create presentation device control information for driving each presentation device based on the main command.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one set information, and the command status value, the command mode value, and the check status value of the command status and the mode value are sequentially arranged from the first byte, and divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110, which is output in response, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command, If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information representing the contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, presence / absence of a game ball at the start winning opening, the result of special drawing lottery, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time), and the like can be included in the main command. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a stop, and the like can be mentioned. In addition, the command mentioned here is an illustration and can contain various commands according to the model of a game machine, and the contents of an effect.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether the command is related to the effect. When it is determined that the command is related to the effect, the command is transferred to the effect control unit 5020.

  Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 identifies a layer to be subjected to effect control from the layer data table. Then, a block data number (rendering block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and a block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the rendering block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing an effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, action of an accessory, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal rendering block data is block data for performing liquid crystal display rendering, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) object, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. included.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) through the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540 a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method in which character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command is developed on a frame buffer at a specified position.

  When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 executes sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for performing effects of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub rendering scheduler data, each rendering device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub rendering scheduler data.

  The sub rendering block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various rendering devices, and executes the sub rendering scheduler data included in the sub rendering block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various production devices includes a sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the production device at intervals of one frame and a sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the production devices at intervals of 1 millisecond. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specification of the rendering device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it becomes possible to synchronize sound output and the action of a character with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms unit, it is possible to promptly cope with a problem in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, for example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lamp lighting / flashing, and action of an accessory are performed. explain. The production control by the sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

  First, the case of executing effects by sound output will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. When a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. In addition, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers. For example, by controlling output of BGM and effect sound effects with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, the case of performing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs the data to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600 and outputs the data to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the output of the lamp data is the next operation to create the lamp data against the increase in the lamp control processing time due to the increase of the lamp system or the overlapping of the lamp layers. With the cycle, the process relating to the creation of lamp data may be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the ramp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated ramp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to output the previously generated lamp drive data, and the respective lamps are lit and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling lighting / flashing of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

  Finally, the case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If scheduler data for driving device control is included in the sub effect block data, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a drive control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The driver module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In the present embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output at the next cycle of all motor data transmission. Output. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after completion of serial transmission of all motor data, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission becomes overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame period It is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, by shifting the timing of latch signal output corresponding to motor data serial transmission, it is realized that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission is set to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used by the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and a latch signal is output by a DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission can be reduced to zero. At the same time as the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data configuration]
In the present embodiment, scheduler data can have various structures. For example, you may provide the call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once the other scheduler data specified by the call function is executed, the process of the original scheduler data is continued. Will run. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various scenes in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects specific to gaming machines, as will be shown next. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the contents of the presentation during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by the call function, such subtle differences can be eliminated, and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired.

  The scheduler data may include, as another configuration, a conditional branch function that switches the effect contents according to the gaming state. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes defined by the scheduler data, and at the time of execution of the conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command, and executes the contents of effects according to the gaming state . By doing this, it is possible to cope with variously diverging gaming states with one scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during a game, the presence / absence of a player's operation of a button, and the like. In the case of the roll-to-roll type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state to the start winning opening may be used. Further, the condition may be branched depending on the occurrence of an error in the game.

  The contents of the effect after conditional branching can be variously configured. For example, after the conditional branching, it may be configured to be completely separated into two or more processes. In addition, after the predetermined processing is performed by the conditional branch, the processing may be returned to the processing before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after processing for temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

  As described above, the gaming machine can include various rendering devices, and as one example, can also include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, a plasma display, and the like can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing apparatus is an apparatus that develops an image into a bit map in accordance with a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared on a screen by a bit map can be used.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 412 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output will be described as an example.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device at the time of effect execution. Scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of scheduler data will be described later.

  Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include “SPLAY” for reproducing a phrase, “STOP_PH” for stopping a phrase being reproduced, “VOL_PH” for setting a volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the function for sound, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data, and outputs the sound source drive data to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

  The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but in order to facilitate understanding, the number of channels will be described as four. The sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by channel management work 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated at the lower right of the figure. In the work 5507, a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute are stored. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is to be performed. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a specification of whether or not to repeat playback. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

  In the above, FIG. 412 shows the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment, taking sound output control as an example. The sub rendering scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub rendering block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, and driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Flow of data in presentation control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from when the main command is received until the scheduler data is acquired will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for presentation control]
FIG. 413A is a diagram for describing a configuration until data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. As described in FIG. 411, when the main command is received from the main control board 1310, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes it by the command analysis module 5200, and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020 is based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a hold effect), and a game instruction layer (game instructions). Based on the analysis result of the command analysis module 5200 for each of the communication layer, the communication error layer (the layer that performs communication error notification), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs abnormality notification). And performs acquisition and update management of effect block data numbers corresponding to each layer. Further, the obtained effect block data number is delivered to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a change pattern layer, the change pattern by liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by change pattern, the change pattern by liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table, the change pattern by sub effect block data Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) which are common effects in a series of effects (for example, effects executed from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop). In addition, block data including control information such as presentation contents for each presentation apparatus and presentation time is defined for each block. By controlling the effects in units of effect blocks based on the effect block numbers, effects by the respective effect devices can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layer on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is the rearmost, the anomaly notification layer is the frontmost, and this is displayed on the front as important information It is a configuration for

  When the effect block control unit 5040 receives a block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, a scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub effect block corresponding to each layer) The corresponding block data (liquid crystal rendering block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub rendering block data 5053) are acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block data contains, as described above, scheduler data for executing effects.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the holding layer is specified, and liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for displaying a hold on the liquid crystal display screen or sub effect block data for outputting sound effects at the time of starting winning. 5053 is obtained. In addition, at the start of change of the special symbol, a change start command or the like is transmitted to specify a change pattern layer. Furthermore, when reporting the occurrence of an error or a warning, a command is transmitted to specify an abnormality detection layer. Moreover, a plurality of effects can be performed simultaneously by performing effects for each layer.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal rendering block data 5051 from the liquid crystal rendering block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal rendering block data number, and then the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs the liquid crystal. Activate the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. Then, the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071 is executed on the liquid crystal rendering 1 f scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to process the function defined in the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal rendering 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 is acquired from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, liquid crystal symbol block controller 5311 executes liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution portion 5332. The liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated by The liquid crystal symbol 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is executed on the liquid crystal symbol if scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to perform the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  After obtaining the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053 or the like. When the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 causes the sub-effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

  Furthermore, the sub rendering 1 f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub rendering schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub presentation schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data to be commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data volume. In addition, it is possible to respond promptly to changes in the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be simultaneously executed by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the occurrence of the same kind of problem at a plurality of places, and realize the reduction of data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 413B is a diagram for explaining the liquid-crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. There are four types of step-up notices, step-up notices 1 to 4, which can be executed. By executing an effect that has been developed in stages, the player is expected to see the result of the variable display of symbols. Suggest a degree.

  In step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and after the step-up 2 effect ends, the notice effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the end of the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect, the advance effect is finished.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound production, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up production, and therefore, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progressing state (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the lamp presentation, in order to display the same lamp pattern at each stage of the step-up presentation, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  In addition, since the next step-up notice is started immediately before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage when the liquid-crystal effect of the step-up notice progresses to the next stage, a plurality of step-up effects are performed simultaneously at the same time. There is a period. As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for subsequent step-up effects in the lamp effect, but in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers It has become. Therefore, when performing the same effect at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 production, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 production that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 production occurs. The advance ramp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH 02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data redundantly, thereby producing the same pattern effects in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to carry out.

  The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control target effect device, and is defined in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function whose execution is instructed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 414 is a diagram for explaining the flow of execution of scheduler data according to this embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and various effect devices are provided by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 414 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referred to for setting this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each production number designated from the production block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect numbers is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table is provided with an effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the effect management pointer is prepared for the number corresponding to the effect number, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the production management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 414, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. indicate storage addresses of the effect management pointer [1], [2], etc., respectively. The production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured to associate the effect number with the effect management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data. It is sufficient to carry out the processing. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required to process the scheduler data can be reduced.

  Each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter as shown in FIG. The function is, as described above, an instruction for controlling the rendering device, and for example, is for instructing each module to operate the rendering device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. In addition, you may provide the function which does not need to specify a parameter.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (drives) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing production control, and the lamp, sound, and motor are functions for controlling each production device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. Specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 417 to 419.

  In the example shown in FIG. 414, the “call” function is designated at the address A2. The "call" function belongs to the group of sequence control, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer. The scheduler executor 5060 can temporarily return to the address specified by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-described saved pointer value.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, an audio operation number is set at A32, and a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3 n. When the rendering command ends these processes, it returns to the address A2 where the "call" is specified, and shifts to processing of the next address A3.

  Thus, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to capture the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the capacity of scheduler data and to reduce its creation load. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, according to the present invention, general-purpose effects can be utilized in various situations by calling, so that such subtle differences can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict lottery results and the like. It is possible to suppress the loss of the interest of the game.

  Thus, although it is possible to use the "call" function, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the program of the interpreter. As described above, the main function used in scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "character item operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "lamp operation number set". This is because it merely indicates the very limited functions that the scheduler execution unit 5060 can realize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 414, NOP (wait) is executed next at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the designated number of frames and continues processing of scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is awaited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] has elapsed. As described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily terminates the processing of scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing if the value of parameter Prm [031] is not 0, and if this value is 0. Perform processing to shift to the next address function.

  In the present embodiment, a work of the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 413A is used to specify a voice operation number or the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores voice operation numbers and the like in the work according to the specification of scheduler data. Also, a layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 413A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel among these layers.

  The scheduler data is similarly defined by the functions and parameters after the address A11 of the conditional branch. In the example shown in FIG. 414, the conditional branch is not provided after the address A11 of the conditional branch until the end of the rendering (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the above-mentioned block BL1, the bonus command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), etc. can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by a “call” function.

  In scheduler data, a conditional branch and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number may be generated to switch the effect contents, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 414, when the condition “random number value ≦ Th1?” Is attached to the address A2, the effect of the addresses A31 to A3n is executed when this condition is satisfied. In addition, if the condition A1 (random number value ≦ Th2?) Is added after the address A2 (address A2 + 1) and the address A41 (not shown) is called, the address A31 and subsequent ones are added according to the value of the random number. Different effects are performed. As described above, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to the random number, the effect contents can be switched at random by the random number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching of the contents of the effect in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in the present specification.

  In the effect lottery, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device may all be switched, or only a part may be switched. When switching all of them, all the contents of the display, sound, and lamp should be specified in the scheduler data called by the “call” function. When switching only a part, only the part to be switched is specified in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and the other parts are specified uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

  Further, in the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used so as to call different scheduler data according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device performing the effect lottery independently, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very colorful, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

  However, regardless of the result of the lottery of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize an effect without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be the selection target of the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. In addition, it is not an essential requirement that the effects end in the same time, and the effects of these effects may not be the same.

  The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has a variety of effects, and has the advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device. For example, when the effect lottery is instructed, the drive device is executing the figure-like distribution operation of 8 and the other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery on the drive device. May be. Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited according to the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In addition, in the effect lottery prohibition, the effect lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of a part of scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery switches the contents of the effect by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510 to the last, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize more various effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Outline of sound (sound) output control]
Subsequently, the function of the sound module for controlling the output of sound will be described. FIG. 415 is an explanatory view showing the function of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process designated by a function included in scheduler data, and outputs a voice. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from the plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for speech. Further, in each scheduler 5502, work 5507 for operation management is prepared. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When the voice operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table to specify scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which the sound pointer and the sound layer are associated with the voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. As the voice operation number, any identification information can be used, but as in the case of the effect number described above, the capacity reduction of the voice operation number table and the processing load reduction at the time of referring to the table are more effective Has the advantage of making it possible.

  The sound pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  Scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 418 and 419.

  In the example shown in FIG. 415, the “call” function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  In the address SA3, phrase reproduction is defined. Scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to phrase number 00H designated by the parameter, and reproduces this.

  The right side of FIG. 415 shows an example of the structure of the phrase data 5508. The phrase number is identification information attached to each piece of phrase data. Although any identification information can be used in this embodiment, the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as a phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel designated at the time of phrase reproduction. The left and right panpots and the upper and lower panpots are the left / right / upper / lower output balances of the speakers provided in the gaming machine. Volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b and reproduces the sound. A loop is a designation as to whether or not to repeatedly reproduce sound. Stereo is specification of whether or not to output stereo.

  A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is operating or not. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 which the scheduler 5502 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 415, as the processing proceeds, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2, SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data 5505 and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes zero.

  The number of call nests and the number of loop nests indicate the number of nests of calls and loops multiply specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the “call” function (second call) in the processing after address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of address SA2, call nesting is performed. The number is two. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same goes for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nesting. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the number of loop iterations. The loop top address or the like is provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Then, the function of the lamp module which controls the output of a lamp is demonstrated. FIG. 416 is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lighting / blinking control of the lamp. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with the lamp layer for the lamp. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table to specify scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which the lamp pointer and the lamp layer are associated with the lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referencing the table, as in the case of the effect number described above. It has the advantage of making it possible.

  The ramp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505, like the effect data (FIG. 414), includes functions and parameters. The function used by the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 416, the “call” function is defined at the address LA2. After executing a series of blocks subsequent to address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 next to address LA2.

  The gradation pattern setting is defined at the address LA3. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 associated with it. The lamps are turned on with the designated gradation data 1 and when the time designated by the timer value has elapsed, the gradation data 2 is used. Lights up. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are designated is shown, but even when three or more gradation data are designated, the lamp is lit while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes at the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp is terminated. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the processing of the next address until it reaches the stop (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether or not the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The ramp performs the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until execution of the next gradation data when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 416, when the gradation data defined at the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 is shifted to the gradation data 2 When the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing at the address LA11 is terminated and the processing proceeds to the processing at the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 which the scheduler 5602 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 416, as the processing proceeds, the values of the ramp pointer sequentially transition to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 which the gradation scheduler 5604 is executing. In the example in the figure, as the processing proceeds, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The loop count is the loop repeat count, and the loop head address is the head address of the loop range. As in the case of sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive module 5700 for controlling the operation of the drive will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600 and is not shown. The driving device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The driver module 5700 can also receive requests from multiple schedulers to perform processing.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, movement amount (stepping motor rotation step angle), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. In addition, an instruction to perform a return operation to return to the origin position or an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop in a state where the drive device is energized to a limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function when starting and stopping the rotation.

  Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by the scheduler data to control the drive will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for presentation control was demonstrated. Here, other functions will be described. FIGS. 417 to 419 are diagrams showing an example of the function in the effect control of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are classified into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. Hereinafter, functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of presentation. FIG. 417 shows an example of the function of sequence control. The outline of each function will be described below.

  "STOP" is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a function for waiting which waits for a time according to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the “NOP” function. In the case of execution in the frame cycle, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in 1 ms cycle, it will also wait for about 30 ms if the execution number is specified as 30. “NOP_F_VALUE” uses the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters. When the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are satisfied, the “NOP_F_VALUE” function is terminated. If not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters, and writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), specifies the top of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, when "0" is set to the number of loops, it becomes an infinite loop. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the “call” function is set in the effect management table. “CALL” is the above-described “call” function, which executes processing from a specified address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In “CALL”, the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after the process of the call destination is executed, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the callee process is completed by the “SUBC” function, the process returns to the caller process (the process next to the “SUBC” function).

  "SUBJ" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the table, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. It does not return to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the process of the callee as it is. “JUMP” sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

  "REQ" is a function for activating another scheduler designated by the parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. “REQF”, like “REQ”, is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. Prohibit launching. In “REQ”, control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" can be made to be independently executed during a designated scheduler data process, for example, other scheduler data to operate the bonus in the case of bonus initialization is executed and controlled. It can prevent becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of the lamp effect. FIG. 418 lists examples of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPLAY” is a function for executing lamp tone data reproduction processing to light the lamp based on the tone data specified by the parameter. In “HPLAY”, the lamp is reset even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is designated by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the gradation data timer in the work 5603 is cleared to instruct execution of the gradation data.

  "KPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data designated by a parameter, as in "HPLAY". In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp in progress is continued without being reset.

  “HPLAY2” is a function that executes a lamp tone data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the tone data using parameters. The processing is the same as “HPLAY”. "KPLAY2" is a function that performs a lamp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the gradation data by using parameters, as in "HPLAY2". The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  “HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a specified lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY" Continue playing without interruption. That is, while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY", no particular processing is performed.

  “HPLAY2” is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer to reproduce the lamp gradation data is designated by the parameter in addition to the function of “HPLAY” described above, and the process is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer is designated by the parameter.

  In addition to the function of “KPLAY” described above, “KPLAY2” is the same as “KPLAY” except that a layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is specified by a parameter and a layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (Sound)
The functions belonging to the group of sounds are functions for controlling the sound output. Examples of functions relating to sound control are given in FIGS. 418 and 419, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset, and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter, similarly to "SPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the sound continues to be reproduced without being reset. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping sound reproduction based on a phrase number specified by a parameter.

  “PAN_PH” uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the “PAN_PH” function execution for the phrase being played specified by the parameter, and the panpot end It is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time designated to the coordinate position. “PAN_PH2” can specify the pan-pot start coordinate position with a parameter in addition to the function of the “PAN_PH” function. Similar to the “PAN_PH” function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time specified from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position.

  "VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of "VOL_FADE_PH" function execution to the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter up to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase or decrease the volume value at the transition time. "VOL_FADE_PH2" allows you to specify the fade start volume value with the parameter in addition to the function of "VOL_FADE_PH" function, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution It is a function to increase / decrease the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated by to the fade end volume value.

  “VOL_PH” is a function that performs increase / decrease of the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function for muting the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function that cancels muting of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY” execute specified channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and reproduced from the beginning when reproducing by “SCPLAY”, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption when reproducing by “SXCPLAY”. That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played back, no particular processing is executed.

  “PAN_CH” performs a panpot for the phrase (ch), whereas “PAN_PH” performs the panpot for the phrase. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than "PAN_PH", processing is not changed. With regard to “PAN_CH2”, “PAN_PH2” described above performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas panning for a ch is performed, except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to “PAN_PH2”. The process does not change.

  "VOL_FADE_CH" fades to a phrase while "VOL_FADE_PH" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, ch is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the phrase is changed to a channel and designated by a parameter. Processing does not change. "VOL_FADE_CH2" also fades to a phrase, while "VOL_FADE_CH2" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, with "VOL_FADE_PH2" except that the phrase specified in the parameter changes to ch. Processing does not change.

  “VOL_CH” increases or decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas “VOL_PH” increases or decreases the volume value for the ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. The process is the same as "VOL_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mentioned above performs mute (mute) targeting a phrase, mute (mute) targets ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above performs cancellation of mute (mute) targeting a phrase, cancellation of mute (mute) targeting ch is performed, ch is a phrase specified by a parameter The process is the same as “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or solenoid. FIG. 419 gives an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes motor regeneration processing for causing the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process for causing the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function Details (User)]
The functions belonging to the group of users are functions for executing control which does not belong to the group described above. FIG. 419 gives an example of these functions, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes motor output buffer scheduler work value set processing for setting the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND 0" are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a or the like. For example, a command for starting drawing on the liquid crystal display device is issued. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND 0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process of copying the contents of the scheduler work area being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary to execute a series of processes are defined in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all schedulers can execute all functions, schedulers for sound can execute functions related to lamps, and schedulers for features There is no difference between the processing cycles (frame or 1 ms) other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) which can execute the function for sound and a plurality of schedulers provided for each application, and it is also possible to mix and execute all functions. Further, the number of executions of the schedulers is not limited, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 420 is a diagram illustrating an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. The scheduler can be classified for convenience according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The following outlines typical types of schedulers.

  First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transition, there is a special view state scheduler (special view state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling transition of the gaming state of the entire game. In effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, transition of the gaming state is controlled based on a command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special view state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  Also, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, etc. For example, when the player operates the effect button, wins an execution lottery for effect, or transits a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, it transits to another state To do. The processing cycle of the sub state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  In the scheduler for sounds, the background for controlling the output of sound output in accordance with the background display and the display of changes in the design, the scheduler for executing the design sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and output when the notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) for controlling the output of sound and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) for controlling the output of sound at the time of advance notice execution by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  Similarly to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes a background (LMP_SCH01) for executing the background and design lamp scheduler data for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamp in accordance with the background display and the change display of the design. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the ramp is 1 f (frame).

  Also, a scheduler that controls sound and lamps in conjunction with each other is defined. A sound / lamp notification layer that executes sound output and lamp lighting / blinking to notify such a scheduler as a notification such as ball breakage or ball clogging or alarm detection due to abnormality detection by a magnetic sensor etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) that is generally used to perform effects in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are interlocked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSSYS_SCH) for executing the motor system scheduler data for executing the system operation, and a scheduler for executing the motor ram clear scheduler data for setting the RAM clear ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of the accessory, and the motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory Scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing an action of an accessory by presentation etc.

  The scheduler for executing the action of the accessory by the production etc. is a general-purpose that is used without depending on the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific accessory or the kind of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the management of the game state and the sound and the ramp (this embodiment 1f = about 33.334 ms). It has become.

  Note that the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled so as to dynamically increase or decrease in accordance with the gaming state or notice. As a result, each scheduler can be started independently of the number of effects provided to the gaming machine or the number of effects, and the restriction for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
In the above, we have explained the outline of the types and functions of schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining functions used in production control, and below, specific examples of application of scheduler data and functions with reference to the drawings explain.

[18-7-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 421A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 421A, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, right star character 5002c), and a public character 5003. Is placed.

  A logo title 5001 is disposed at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the presentation is finished. Furthermore, in addition to the movement in the vertical direction, it is also possible for the logo combination 5001 to perform an effect of vibrating in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

  The star combination 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star combination 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star combination 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star combination 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star character 5002 is operable independently of one another, and one or more star characters 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the contents of the effect.

  The left star character 5002a moves downward to the left and is movable to a position slightly lower than the center of the game area. In addition, the middle star character 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star character 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to the center of the game area slightly lower right. Each star character 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the middle position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The prison cast 5003 is disposed at the upper center of the game area. The prison object 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and the lower position. Depending on the player's operation of the production button or the lottery result of the bonus announcement notice production, it moves from the initial position to the middle position, stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. An operation mode is set. As in the case of the logo character 5001, it is possible to perform the effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement of the prison character 5003.

  Next, a description will be given of the flow of a notice effect that is executed with one symbol variation. First, with reference to FIG. 421B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star object notice, and a button (BTN) logo object fall notice will be described. In addition, the flow of the preliminary announcement effect including the preliminary announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 421B shows an example of execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of fluctuation display from the start of fluctuation of special symbol to the stop in this embodiment, and a diagram for explaining scheduler and scheduler data used at this time is there. In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 421B, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. Then, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, group notice, star character notice, and button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed.

  Hereinafter, a part of scheduler data for executing each preliminary announcement effect will be extracted, and the control by the scheduler data and the function configured will be described. Specifically, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 422) for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 423) for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice, star product in the star product notice The motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 424 to 426) for controlling the operation of 5002 and the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 427) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting state of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 421B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

  FIG. 422 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for performing lamp lighting / flashing control in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_STP” and the step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”, and identifies the address of the scheduler data that is the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up advance work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the lamp is turned off when the advance notice is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. Scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY) by designating the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the background, symbol ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

  Thereafter, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the processing of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process is executed. Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked for 3 seconds in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 ramp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the process next to the caller (the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. First, it is possible to call the scheduler data for the lottery result in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result value). is there. Depending on the content of the advance notice, there are cases where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as an IF sentence, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complex and management of correction and the like becomes difficult. On the other hand, "SUBC" solves the above problems easily by using the work memory contents as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. The second one takes the form of "CALL", so it is possible to execute common scheduler data after the "SUBC" function is executed, and there is no need to list the number of scheduler data after branching, By describing one scheduler data, it is possible to execute the same process after every branch. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the “SUBC” function may be terminated without performing branch processing.

  That is, the function "SUBC" can select scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and can call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data of branch destinations, but with function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. This makes it easy to add and change production contents and improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control at button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of this embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled in accordance with the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. Since the step-up notice belongs to a different notice group and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

  FIG. 423 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated lamp is lit (flickers) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, a ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. In order to correspond to one frame per loop, 90 cycles correspond to 3 seconds. In loop processing, functions from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to a function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

  To describe the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and identifies the start address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF” is displayed. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is displayed. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is rewritten with a program for button processing other than the scheduler data.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button cut-in advance notice button OFF lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” The The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the caller. Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited and the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set to button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", button cut-in notice button ON button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" in button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" Is selected. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" Is executed as a parameter.

  An address of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data is stored in the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". Specifically, SUBJ_NON indicating the address of the scheduler data, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lighting pattern (color, lighting time) of the lamp corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores a lottery result value indicating a button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4 and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and wait processing of 150 frames is performed for 5 seconds. Let At this time, ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the notice group 02 ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

  Note that the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not called CALL but is called JUMP, so execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the caller scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT” do not do. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is.

  The button cut-in advance notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call scheduler data for the lottery result by one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result values) which are dynamically rewritten. Depending on the contents of the notice, there is also a thing that the range of lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in the bifurcation like IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage correction etc. . In “SUBJ”, the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since the format is “JUMP”, all different processes can be executed depending on the branched scheduler data after the “SUBJ” function is executed. Also, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to cope with problems in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, branch processing is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended. You may do it.

  That is, like the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" selects scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and the selected scheduler data It is possible to make the process transition to and obtain the same effect as the function "SUBC".

  In addition, unlike the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” continuously executes the process of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable for executing the process alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the effect from being executed redundantly by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the process by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the calling destination process is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

  Therefore, by using the functions "SUBC" and "SUBJ", the structure of the scheduler data can be simplified and the structure can flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it is easy to cope with additions / changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve development efficiency and to easily cope with specification changes of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control for star role notice]
Subsequently, control of the star character preview performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When reach occurs in the change display of the special symbol and shifts to the latter half of the change, a group notice is generated, and a star object notice is executed independently of the group notice. In the star role announcement, a plurality of types of star roles 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are provided. By operating, the expected degree of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star character 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 421B, the star character preview of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star role trailer motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star title scheduler data scheduler) as shown in FIG. Is done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH 02 to 04) for operating the star character 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09). .

  FIG. 424 to FIG. 426 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the star combination notice of the present embodiment. Fig. 424 shows scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" for controlling the whole flow and left star character 5002a, Fig. 425 shows scheduler data for controlling the right star character 5002c "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2", and Fig. 426 is a scheduler for controlling the middle star character 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3."

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star work preview work area “YKK_HYA” with reference to the designated star work advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”. . The star role notice work area “YKK_HYA” stores the lottery result value of the star role notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star role notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

  The address of star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON indicating the address of scheduler data, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to make the accessory non-operating when the preliminary announcement is not won. Yes. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are scheduler data addresses for executing star feature announcements. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only left star feature 5002a, SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is left star feature 5002a and right star feature 5002c SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star objects 5002.

  In this embodiment, a lottery result value indicating execution of a star character preview for causing the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character work work area "YKK_HYA" "3" is stored, and scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. When only the left star role 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role notice is “1”, and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star role notice is selected. The result value is set to “2”.

  The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies a parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star character 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor reproduction process. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

  Next, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” appearing as right star character 5002 c by function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter by the scheduler specified by a parameter as well. Here, the right star character 5002 c appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star character 5002 c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the mid-star character 5002 b appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed by the function “REQ” using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04”. In this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star object 5002c and the middle star object 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star object 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the schedulers to operate the respective star characters 5002 to be executed by different schedulers.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing “NOP: 300”. During this weight time, the left star character 5002a operates in a designated manner. After the end of the weight processing, the function "RET" is executed to return to the calling star character trailer motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1", and the function "stop" ends the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 425, control of the right star character 5002c will be described. The right star character 5002c appearing scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC03" for the right star character 5002c scheduler data designated at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

  When scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 425, a parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of right star character 5002c is designated to execute motor reproduction processing "MPLAY". . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the right star character 5002c. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  Finally, control of the middle star character 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. The mid-star character 5002 b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 426, a parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of middle star character 5002b is designated, and motor reproduction processing "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the middle star character 5002b. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star character 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star character 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the mid-star character 5002b are function "REQ". It is possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. That is, the operations of the respective prizes can be executed in parallel without special control by executing the individually defined scheduler data as necessary. The advantage of having scheduler data run in parallel is that, first, a single feature operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of prizes are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more prizes in parallel as long as there is no problem in the operation of the prizes. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of prizes in parallel without the need for complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize an effect rich in variations.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the notice of drop of logo and features]
Subsequently, control of the logo combination falling notice performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo feature drop notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star feature notice. The logo combination falling notice is a notice effect that operates so that the logo combination 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine vertically falls in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit than usual Indicates that is high.

  As shown in FIG. 421B, the logo combination drop notification according to the present embodiment is performed by driving the logo combination drop notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo combination part scheduler data scheduler). Executed. The general purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09) can also operate the logo combination 5001.

  FIG. 427 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that performs motor control in the logo combination falling notice according to the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo feature 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo feature drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. The

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of button logo combination preview work area “YKK_LGO”, the leading address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination Identify. The button logo feature notice work area "YKK_LGO" stores the result of the button logo feature fall notice lottery, and when the button logo feature fall notice lottery is out, "0: not executed", the button When winning the lottery for the logo object fall notice, “1: Logo drop notice execution” is set. The result of execution of the button logo combination falling notice execution drawing corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  While "0: not executed" is set in the button logo combination preview work area "YKK_LGO", the logo combination drop notice is not executed in the button logo combination drop notice lottery result branching call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and the motor scheduler is not executed. Data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" of the caller. Therefore, if the button logo combination falling off lottery is missed, loop processing is executed 90 times, and then the loop processing is exited, function "STOP" is executed, and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. .

  On the other hand, when "1: logo drop notice execution" is set in button logo role notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when it is elected to run button logo role fall notice lottery, button logo feature fall In the notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” at the time of executing the logo object fall notice is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo feature drop notice button branch call address table It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination product drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it has been set, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo / feature drop advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is set to "0: button OFF", the button logo notice of falling button button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the logo notice of falling button OFF button motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" of the caller. This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even when the button logo winning combination drop notice is won, if the production button input is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. This is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor logo when the logo combination falling notice button is ON in the button logo combination falling notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON". The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo combination 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_LGO_ON”. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Furthermore, the weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120". At this time, the logo character 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo character 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 90", while the logo character 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the end of the weight processing, the execution of the logo character falling operation is ended, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, and the button logo character preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed". Return to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN”. This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" returns to function "LOOP" but the button logo feature preview lottery result is rewritten as "0: not executed", so the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" for dropping button logo features is executed The remaining loop count processing is performed, and execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is ended by the function "STOP".

  As described above, when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, by issuing a command internally, an effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of rendering devices and execute as needed at appropriate timing, and it is possible to perform a more entertaining rendering .

  In this embodiment, although the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal in the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source using the function "COMMAND", control is performed from the scheduler to the program by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side. By temporarily returning, performing complicated processing that can not be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that can not be originally controlled by the function command can also be performed. Moreover, the merit of issuing a command in scheduler data is that time management and execution determination by a program are not necessary by setting the command issue timing as the processing timing as it is. Further, it is possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by a user that is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function “COMMAND”, and perform processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but the content of the work area is to be transmitted as a command by designating a work area instead of a fixed value. May be.

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 428 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data that is executed when the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board 1310 outputs a power on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 drives scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" with the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH" when the power-on command is received.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. With the progress of the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc. as shown in FIG. Is done. At this time, the main gaming state is in a standby state. When the standby state is ended, the game is started, and when the game ball is won in the start winning opening, the main gaming state and the sub internal state transition to the fluctuating state.

[18-8-2. Power on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 429 is a view for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the game machine is powered on or when a predetermined event occurs in game control on the main control board 1310, a main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. The As described in FIG. 411, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, etc., and activates the corresponding scheduler to execute scheduler data.

  Also, when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 418) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process, as with the main command. Is done.

  When the main command or the command output by the function “COMMAND 0” is received, a command for executing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include a command for activating the scheduler and a command for controlling various rendering devices (sub internal output command).

  In the command for starting the scheduler, for example, the main control board such as scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 or the change in the sub internal state due to the progress of the control in the peripheral control board 1510, the start winning etc. Scheduler data for executing an effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function “REQ” included in the scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command (sub internal output command) for controlling the effect device is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands for controlling the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer and processed in the order stored from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining the scheduler, various types of effects can be implemented in parallel, The development efficiency of gaming machines can be improved, such as making debugging work more efficient.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, command analysis processing can be shared by command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes a problem that a large number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. This can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data in the case of receiving a command at power-on from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 430 is a diagram for describing a process of executing scheduler data at the time of power on in the present embodiment.

  As described with reference to FIG. 429, when the gaming machine is turned on and the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received by the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis processing, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, execute the function "COMMAND 0" and issue a command to create a sub internal state, and further output a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub internal state as necessary. .

  The scheduler to be executed will be specifically described. First, the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”. In the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” that changes to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", a standby state is established for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" of the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the waiting state, the function "COMMANDOO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and state anti-goto scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state anti-goto scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, the reproduction of sound is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", a standby state is made for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, and the game is started, and this waiting state is looped until the gaming ball is won.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND 0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 has issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function “COMMAND0” instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is effective especially when there is a restriction on the capacity of the game control program.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which a saddle object fall notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo object fall notice. The fall notice of the samurai role is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as passing over the parameter used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 431 is a view showing an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from start of change to stop of special symbol in this embodiment, wherein (A) is an effect to be executed from start of change to end thereof It is a figure which shows the scheduler data for performing presentation, and the scheduler performed, (B) is a figure explaining the position of the prison object 5003 in a prison object falling notice.

  In the series of change displays shown in FIG. 431A, a button (BTN) first half drop notice of a step up notice and a first half of a notice of dropping a prison object is executed in the first half of change. After that, reach occurs, and in the second half of the change, the group announcement and the button prison object first-half drop notice continued from the first half are executed followed by the jail product second-half fall notice. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed. The details of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, the content of the winning combination fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 431 (B). As described above, the winning combination fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) winning combination first half falling notice and a winning combination latter half falling notice.

  In the first half, the first half of the button, the first half falling notice of a drop of a prison object, by operating the effect button, advance notice proceeds. Therefore, even if the player has won the execution lottery for the first-half falling notice of the button holding character, the falling effect of the holding object 5003 is not executed unless the production button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half, the second half of the second half, the second half falling notice is performed based on the result of the execution lottery of the second half of the second half falling notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  When the player has won the lottery for execution of the first half falling notice of the button prison object and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the prison object 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the winning combination for the second half drop notice of winning the winning combination is won while the winning combination 5003 has fallen to the middle position, the winning combination 5003 falls to the lower position. In other words, the winning combination 5003 falls from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the advance notice of the falling of the winning combination and falls to the lower part (lower position) in the second half. In addition, when it is elected to the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice, it falls to the lower part regardless of the position of the jail article 5003. In addition, when the prison notice is dropped, the prison control 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 431 (B), the announcement of dropping of the prison object is executed in six types of patterns. More specifically, when the result of lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination is not won, since it does not depend on the operation of the production button, the second half fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button prisoner first half falling notice and the prison second half falling notice are not won, the prisoner 5003 is not dropped and kept from moving from the top. In the case of pattern 2, since the prison object 5003 does not fall but is located at the upper part without dropping in the case of the prison official falling notice, and since the winning lottery is won in the second half dropping notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 goes from the top to the bottom It falls at a stretch.

  When the player has won the lottery for executing the first half falling notice of the button, the presentation mode of the first half falling notice of the button differs depending on whether or not the presentation button is operated. Therefore, the four types of presentation modes can be executed depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery for the second half falling of the prison object.

  If the player wins the first lottery drop lottery and does not operate the production button, and the result of the second half drop prior notice is not selected, the bonus player 5003 will not fall. Remain on top (pattern 3). When the button lottery first half drop notice execution lottery is won and the production button is operated, and the result of the second half fall notice of the second half fall notice is not won, the bonus item 5003 is displayed when the production button is operated. Drops from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the prison drop notice (pattern 4).

  If you win the first lottery drop lottery and don't operate the production button, and if you win the second half fallout announcement lottery, you won't operate the production button. The prison object 5003 is positioned at the top without falling until the second half falling notice of the object is started, and falls from the top to the bottom in the second half dropping notice of the second jail thing (pattern 5). If you have won the lottery for the execution of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner, operated the effect button, and further won the run lottery for the second half fall notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 from the top at the time of operation of the presentation button It falls to the middle, and further drops from the upper part to the lower part in the second half drop notice of the prison object (pattern 6).

  As described above, there are six patterns of appearances that can appear in the winning combination fall notice of the present embodiment, and scheduler data for controlling the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the winning combination fall notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 431 (A), a button prison object first half falling notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the prison object 5003 in the first half drop notice of the button prison object and the second half of the prison object The second half falling advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls the operation of the prison object 5003 in the falling notice will be described.

[18-9-2. [Various controls in the fall notice of a role]
FIG. 432 is a diagram for explaining the contents of a button combination first half drop notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for performing motor control in the button first half drop notice of the first half of a prison object drop advance notice of this embodiment. . As described above, when the player wins the first half drop notice for the button bonus item, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and the effect object 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Execute the effect to make it. In the case where the execution lottery of the first half falling notice of the button is not won, if the effect button is not operated even if it is won, the operation is ended without operating the prison object 5003. A motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the buttoned prisoner first-half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 causes the prison object 5003 to rattle. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the winning combination 5003 vibrates.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" takes as a parameter the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button interceptor first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" Executed.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first half falling notice randomization result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the contents of button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1” Specify the start address of. The result of the execution lottery of button first half falling notice is stored in the button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, and in the case of not winning the execution of the button first half falling notice of lottery, “0: In the case of winning the non-winning selection button and the first half falling notice of lottery execution of the button, "1: first half falling execution notice of the first half of prisoning execution" is set. The result of the execution drawing of the button first half falling advance notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button first half falling advance notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

  When "0: not selected" is set in the button prisoner first-half falling notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner thing The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” at the time when the first half drop notification is not executed is selected. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button Combo 1st half falling notice lottery is "not won". The execution of is terminated.

  On the other hand, when "1: First half drop notice is executed" is set to the button first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button lottery for first half drop notice is won. In the first half falling advance notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” of the button prisoner product, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is selected at the time of the execution time of the falling prediction of the falling prison object. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button forged part first half notice button branch call address It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first-come-first-served fall advance notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo feature drop notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and “0: button OFF when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button combination first half falling advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first letter drop first notice button OFF motor scheduler The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" of the caller (function "RET"). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”. Therefore, even if the winning lottery for the first notice of the drop of the button winning combination is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “1: button ON”, the button jackpot first-half falling notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first-half falling notice button ON When the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. First, the content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" executes the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issues a command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect at the time of dropping the prison object, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution section 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to an intermediate position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is performed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler wedge position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to record that the prison object 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  When the button first half drop notice which is the first half of the jail drop notice is finished, the second half fall notice of the jail drop is started. FIG. 433 and FIG. 434 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the second half falling advance notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the second half falling advance notice of the second half of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used for execution of the second half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" of the prisoner as in the case of the button first half fall advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect that suggests whether the prison object 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 or not. . Thereafter, weight processing “NOP: 90” of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of the big hit becomes large when the prison object 5003 falls, the player's sense of expectation is enhanced by performing the effect drawing for 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the second half late notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters .

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the prisoner, and based on the contents of second half drop notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination Specify the start address. The result of the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice is stored in the second half of the second half notice of work of the second half of the work area "YKK_NTA2". When the winning a prize for the second half of the jail dropping notice is selected, “1: running of the second half of the jail dropping notice is executed” is set. The result of the execution lottery of the second half falling notice of the prisoner corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the second half falling notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the second half.

  If "0: not selected" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half drop notice of the prisoner, the second half fall of the second half drop notice lottery result for the second run at the second row will be the second half drop of the prison object in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2". The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” is selected when no advance notice is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" executes the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON", and the value of scheduler eyelid position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the result of the second half falling notice lottery result of the prisoner object branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" Branch based on.

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the second half drop notice of the second half is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” The run-time motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

  When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the case of the second half falling advance notice not executed in the second half fall notice lottery result branching call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" The In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. Thereafter, the value of the scheduler saddle position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten on “0: initial position”, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is terminated.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the prison character objects fall in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. When no notice is given and no notice is given, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

  In the first half falling advance notice execution / second half fall advance notice non-winning condition of the prisoner, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” first executes weight processing “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds). In the weight processing executed here, as described later, when the prison object 5003 is at the lower position, it is a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the prison object 5003 is originally at the middle position, it waits for four seconds.

  After the end of the wait process, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the saddle accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operation time of the prison object 5003, the wait process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2."

  In addition, when “1: second half falling notice” is set in work area “YKK_NTA2” for second half late notice 2 of the prison character, the second half last notice lottery result of the second half of the jail item is branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” is selected when the second half falling advance notice is won. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch object fall notice 2 branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NT” are used. .

  When “0: initial position” is set in scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop notice of a prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” Motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of execution / second half falling notice.

  In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (Fig. 434), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed to issue a command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 240", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Then, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop of the prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2 DOWN” Notice execution, second half falling notice at the time of winning the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 434), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed to issue a command “COM_NTA_MID-END”. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the middle position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 from the initial position to the lower position with the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about (4 seconds) wait processing is executed. This time is the time until the prison object 5003 moves from the initial position to the middle position.

  After that, as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  When the prison character 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed to set the value of the scheduler eyelid position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to “0: initial position” And the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is terminated.

  In the winning combination fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, the position of the prison object 5003 can be specified by writing the position of the prison object 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. . As a result, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the prison object 5003, and by calling each corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the operation result of the rendering button.

  Further, also in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the prison object 5003, common scheduler data is called up by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when the scheduler data is executed and referring to it when other scheduler data is executed. In this way, it is possible to specify, at the time of execution of each scheduler data, a value indicating a state or the like that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data. The process can be completed only by the definition of the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processes depending on the state, and it is possible to streamline the creation and debugging of scheduler data and to facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is a function of writing a fixed value, but by designating a work name with a parameter of a function instead of the fixed value, data transfer from the program side or processing based on command information Therefore, more complicated processing can be performed by the scheduler. A unique feature of the function “MEMW” is that information that is not determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function “MEMW” can be processed if the information is determined before the function “MEMW” is executed. This enables control of effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Example of scheduler data configuration (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of notice effects has been described above. The contents of execution of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each announcement production.

  Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview effects, and a basic presentation related to the series of preview effects and variation patterns (regardless of lottery other than preview effects) The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect and an effect related to a symbol effect that is rendered and has a one-on-one variation pattern will be described.

  In this embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (rendering section) divided in predetermined configuration units. For example, until the reach occurs from the start of the symbol variation, or until the symbol stops when the reach does not occur (the first half variation), the block from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second variation) ), And the period from the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and an execution timing and an execution time of the advance notice effect within the allocated time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

  In addition, when the basic divisions related to the variation are compared with a plurality of variation patterns, the rule of block division divides the same basic representation part into common block data, and divides the part having a difference in basic representation of liquid crystal display into block data To do. Referring to FIG. 435A, in the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normally changed for 6 seconds. It is lost, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of lost is performed. Since the six-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss-stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into liquid-crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) for six seconds of normal fluctuation and liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of lost-stop.

  The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” is usually lost for 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the symbol effect of the loss is performed. Because the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, and the symbol effect of losing is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H" The liquid crystal effect block data of the stop of the loss is commonly used the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD 02_BLK) of the stop of the break which is divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the fluctuation pattern “10H01H”. As for the other variation patterns, similarly, with respect to the part which has already been block data-ized with respect to the basic effect, it is commonly used and block data-modification is newly performed with respect to the part having a difference.

  As described above, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data by performing blocking, and all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as big hit other than the variation are achieved by combining the unique liquid crystal effect block data. It becomes possible to realize all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as the big hit other than the variation. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the biggest purpose of blocking is to create a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when there is a change in a specific basic production. The change is to be reflected in all variation patterns using block data.

  With regard to the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, the format and function are completely different from the sound, lamp, and scheduler data of the feature in the present embodiment in order to control the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preliminary rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, and special effects. In addition, drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving picture material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, color, pictures and movies displayed in the background, and effects related to designs. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, such as information, alpha information, and the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect that occurs in the block data. The information shown is embedded.

  Further, in this embodiment, block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal effects, for example, even when displaying the variability by changing the shape of the identification symbol. It becomes possible to execute with a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effects. In addition, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for preview effect related to the symbol are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the aspect of the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 435A is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern commands in the present embodiment. FIG. 435B is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for storing a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 436 is a diagram for explaining a sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by change pattern storing combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, unique numbers identifying liquid crystal rendering block data to be configured are held in chronological order with respect to variation pattern numbers. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, it is configured by “LCD03_BLK” that indicates normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, “LCD04_BLK” that indicates normal short reach in the second half variation, and “LCD02_BLK” that indicates the time of out of range stop. Is done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. Thus, the configuration of the basic effect and the advance effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal rendering block data is used in all of the same rendering sections. For example, when the first half fluctuation is usually 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal rendering block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal rendering block data can be uniquely identified for each fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 435 B, the variation pattern-classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating combinations of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table. . Further, the sub rendering block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same rendering time) corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data of the same variation pattern number in a one-on-one manner.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 436, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is, like the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, information indicating combinations of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Next, a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern will be described. Here, an execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for executing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 437 is a diagram for describing an overview of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is identified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 receives the variation pattern number. Notice.

  As described with reference to FIG. 413A, the effect control unit 5020 determines a layer to be used, determines a block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) and the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) To do. By setting all block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it is possible to execute all the renderings of the respective rendering devices synchronously.

  Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the number of all layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

  After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit By 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal graphic block data "ZUG03_BLK The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal rendering block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal rendering 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the rendering content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, designates parameters according to the contents of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits the DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, whereby drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

  When processing liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated to execute drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as in the case of processing the liquid crystal rendering block data.

  On the other hand, when the processing of the sub production block data is started, one or a plurality of sub production 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub production block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the production content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the execution cycle may be set at startup as shared.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data specification function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp ("KPLAY"), a speaker ("SPLAY"), and a character ("MPLAY"). The designated effect is configured to be executed by sequentially executing the effect data designation function in the defined order. The effect data specification function is transmitted to the modules (the lamp module 5600, the sound module 5500, the drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects are performed by the various effect devices by each module.

  It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". By executing the effect data specification function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various effect devices. Further, by using the command transmission function “COMMAND” or “COMMAND0”, it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data specification function for controlling the movement of the character, the movement and drawing of the character cooperate with each other as in the case of the prison object falling notice effect described above. Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for executing effect control using sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data control start processing related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

  In the effect block control unit 5040, the change pattern layer is selected by the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and the control of the block data number by change pattern corresponding to the change pattern is changed. Control is started using the pattern-based sub rendering block data combination number table (FIG. 436). The row position of the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data combination number table (FIG. 436) is set to the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 436, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set in the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, “2” (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

  Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub rendering block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). Thus, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data control activation process of this embodiment.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub pattern block data number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column indexes from the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, the process is started from the top record of the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data number table specified from the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 activates scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data number table (FIG. 441B). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice) from the sub effect block data number table get. In the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice), one or a plurality of scheduler data is registered, and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or more scheduler data are made to correspond on the basis of the lottery result of the advance notice and the like.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data is completed, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes to the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the variation effect-specific sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data number table row element number (result of step S 7014 is “NO”), the next sub rendering block data is processed.

  FIG. 440 is a flowchart of the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data control updating process according to the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update processing for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the variation effect sub-effect block data number table Is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub rendering block data when the execution of all the scheduler data in the above is completed. The variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control updating process is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

  First, scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data number table from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table row and column index (Step S7021). Thereby, sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to advance notice) constituting the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data number table is specified and defined as sub-effect block data It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is under execution (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all schedulers of sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to a notice) defined by the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. If the process is completed (the result at step S7022 is "NO"), the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data combination number table column index is incremented, and whether the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END") or not Is determined (step S7023). If it is the end data (the result in step S7023 is "YES"), since the series of effects has been completed, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is “NO”), scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. Then, the variation pattern-based sub effect data block control scheduler activation process is executed (step S7024).

  As described in FIG. 435A, FIG. 435B and FIG. 436, the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing, By making the execution times of the respective block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, if the same variation pattern is obtained by blocking, the number of times the scheduler is defined in the production block and the production block is always the same regardless of the combination of production and the appearance of the production. Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub effect schedulers, it is possible to cooperate the operations of various effect devices, and perform various effects without discomfort can do. In addition, because scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and checked for operation in rendering device units and block data units. Can improve the development efficiency.

  FIG. 441 is a view for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance effect of the variable display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and (A) shows the timing for executing the basic effect and the advance effect and the relevant (B) indicates the configuration of sub-effect block data by fluctuation pattern. The sub effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 441 (B), although it is a combination of two types of sub effect block data of background block data and advance notice block data, the number of sub effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 441, the sub pattern block data classified by fluctuation pattern constituting fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” It is constituted by the loss stop). The variation pattern classified sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol, and normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the variation display result is confirmed as lost, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 441 (A), in sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" classified by variation pattern, sub-effect block data related to step-up notice, BTN logo part drop notice and notice of symbol stop notice, and sub-step pertaining to background Block data is defined. Further, in the sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”, sub rendering block data relating to cut-in notice and group preview and sub rendering block data relating to the background are defined. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub effect block data related to the background is defined without defining the notice effect sub effect block data. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not overlapped, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so as to overlap a plurality of advance notice effects. The contents of each preliminary presentation effect shown in FIG. 441 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 441 (B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" will be described.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the background, the normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background are defined. Since the normal variation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  The function "NOP" and the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo combination drop notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the advance notice. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal rendering scheduler, and is defined to perform sub-rendering in accordance with the liquid crystal rendering. As step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. The BTN logo combination falling notice sub-representation block data defines a sub-representation scheduler number and sub-representation scheduler data related to the BTN logo combination falling notice. The BTN logo combination falling advance notice sub effect block data has the same presentation time as the BTN logo combination falling advance liquid crystal effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data defines a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub effect block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal rendering block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal preview rendering from the end of the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to each liquid crystal preview rendering Function until the start of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) until the execution of the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” by the variation pattern is finished. “NOP” is executed and waits for a specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub rendering scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal rendering block data in the variation pattern-based scheduler block by the function "NOP", the scheduler etc. is sequentially scheduled by the program etc. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effects of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. In addition, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

  The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as the lamp, sound, and accessory is defined for each notice effect. Thereby, since the time from the start of the control based on the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of execution of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is managed not by the start of variation but by a relative value from the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. Thus, when the same variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data has a presentation start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although different from that, since the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data, it can be processed without any problem. In the case of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data, it is similarly managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal attraction block data, and similarly in the case of variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data It is managed by a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" will be described. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub rendering block data are executed in parallel.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the background, normal short reach background sub rendering block data is defined. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub rendering block data is scheduler data relating to the background, so it has the same rendering time as the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is completed.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the preview, a function "NOP", a cut-in preview sub rendering block data, and a group preview sub rendering block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The cut-in advance notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in advance notice. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. As the group advance sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group advance are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the group announcement liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  In addition, in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, the same as the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”, but the number of the sub effect block data sequence is the same. no problem.

  Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK", since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the lost stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the user stop background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the background of normal fluctuation 12 seconds are defined. Since the lost stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” ends.

  FIG. 442 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between variation pattern-classified liquid crystal effect block data and variation pattern-classified liquid crystal symbol block data of the present embodiment. The liquid crystal rendering block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data by variation pattern are different only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub rendering block data Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 413B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 443 is a view showing an image for creating a drawing data file in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment with the video synthesis / motion creation graphic tool. is there.

  The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 443, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into liquid crystal rendering scheduler data according to the present embodiment on a step-up rendering unit basis.

  The reason that the drawing data file is not created in a one-on-one relationship with the liquid crystal preview effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notice If it is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data file for 4 lines. Considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data file is created with a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to combine and realize the notice.

  FIG. 444 is a view for explaining the configuration of effect block data of a step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at a predetermined timing.

  The step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data will be described. First, it is determined which step-up notice of step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of fluctuation. The If the lottery result value of the step-up advance notice is not selected, the step-up advance notice is not executed since the step-up advance notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed, so the step-up advance notice is not executed and the drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated.

  In addition, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02, and after waiting for the time designated by the parameter, step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2: Since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END” after the completion of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data execution, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single preview can be realized by combining the presentation scheduler data of the preview in the minimum configuration unit.

  Subsequently, step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 444 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured in a one-to-one correspondence with the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data and the block configuration and execution time. Thereby, it becomes possible to synchronize dynamically with all effect apparatuses also with respect to the combination of a fluctuation pattern and a lottery result of a notice, and an effect with a sense of unity can be realized.

  The step-up notice sub rendering block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the function executed by the sub rendering scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the notice effect defined at a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Furthermore, when execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information specifying the effect content such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data defined hierarchically is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and the schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, thereby dramatically improving the development efficiency. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included in the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is updated), a common schedule can be obtained by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to use software assets related to the presentation control of the gaming machine for a long time.

  Note that the scheduler in the present embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler activated when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the memory use area may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be opened when a predetermined time has elapsed after execution of the schedule data is completed, or may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by liquid crystal production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is constituted by a combination of functions for controlling the effect object, similarly to the sub effect block data. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, the lighting of the lamp, the operation of the drive device, and the like are controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
First, functions (scheduler functions for liquid crystal rendering) that constitute liquid crystal rendering scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that composes the liquid crystal rendering block data described above, and the command is embedded in the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. Send and execute the effect. Further, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect, it is possible to change the attributes (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, an outline of each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

  First, the functions belonging to the group of coordinate setting will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is, for example, for specifying the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and setting the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” designate the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position to set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" designates the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" designates the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” designates the X axis and Y axis coordinate positions, and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

  Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area to be specified to perform enlargement or reduction when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on a CGROM, or converting a unit of coordinates. It is to By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” designates the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” specifies the Z-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" designates X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object will be described. It is not necessary to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation by storing only the liquid crystal display object as a reference in the CGROM and designating an angle to display, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the group of rotation angle settings. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. In addition, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display object by designating an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value.

  Subsequently, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is α setting processing, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and more specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during the animation processing.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX” sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front on the screen or moved to the back side. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back surface.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information on the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents , To perform another rendition. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets frame rendering SW information to the entire liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information defining special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling a sub-scheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, the processing can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Subsequently, parameters specified at the time of execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described by way of an example. FIGS. 446 and 447 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect and the group of parameters are different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub effect scheduler function, and the like.

  The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE_SIZE", "AAD_AD" "Etc. are included. Each parameter will be described below.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying an α value, which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and is 8 bits in length. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter for specifying the number of frames to be skipped in liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for designating a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display object in XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM”, and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of the presentation SW, and designates two 16-bit lengths. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registrations of kick effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registration of the frame effect SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing a frame rendering SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters of the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT” and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for specifying the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of symbol replacement related parameters includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter groups of the sub rendering scheduler function include “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for designating a sub-scheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, effect control in a game machine has been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices, a program for linking a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs are described by program code representing the operation contents and control procedure of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data are called up in a frame where effects are executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, advance notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it has been required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it has been necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of skill is required for each programmer and the development man-hours increase, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for the test for the operation check and the quality improvement of the gaming machine also increases.

  Then, in order to solve the above-mentioned subject, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is possible to realize the effects to be executed in cooperation with liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal rendering effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby realizing a reduction in development period and an improvement in quality.

  Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal rendering effect is used by assigning images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and an effect common block is created by grouping effect blocks for each state such as a variation pattern or jackpot, By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a variation pattern and a big hit is realized.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects relating to lottery, effect and symbol substitution, and interactive effects to external input by the player occur, so only simply execute the combined effect common block as it is Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating the effect common block with the above-described tool, the effect switch (effect SW for calling a program for executing effects at a predetermined timing or executing predetermined control) ) Can be set (built in). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM, and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, callback always occurs regardless of “ON” and “OFF” of the effect SW. Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the predefined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The rendering SW is set to each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal rendering common block, the liquid crystal rendering block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, a still image, and a moving image.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback) To do). Based on the information processed by the program function that is called back, a display list command can be created, and effect display ON / OFF and effect replacement can be realized. In the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lamp lighting, action of an accessory, etc.). In addition, processing such as setting of information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting of a flag or updating of data of a predetermined area, is also possible. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player. .

  The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect called by callback and replacement of the effect is incorporated in advance in the peripheral control unit 1530 and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting a presentation SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge sets a presentation element such as an image or a video at the time of presentation design, and calls a predefined program function, Complex rendering specifications can be realized. In addition, using the production creation tool, production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) can be created in production units, and the development period can be greatly reduced. In addition, production contents can be created based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be greatly reduced.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 448 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch in the present embodiment. The presentation SW is uniquely identified by the presentation SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the presentation, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  The effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

  The effect SW group is a set of effects SW grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group. By specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively displayed. It can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

  FIG. 449 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect SW group according to the present embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group is configured of one or more active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, it includes the leading group number of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SWs, and the number of the leading group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW.

  The presentation SW attribute is information indicating an attribute of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information for specifying whether or not to call a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. The effect SW is statically evaluated in the passive state, and the effect SW is dynamically evaluated in the active state.

  The effect SW start command address is an address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 450 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW start command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 450 exemplifies a presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and a presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of data for the number of commands and the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described using a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 451 is a view showing an example of the step-up notice in the present embodiment, in which (A) shows a step where the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each step. An example is shown.

  The step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four steps as shown in FIG. 45A, and the development effect to the next step is executed at the end of the step-up notice of each step. . When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed. When the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of step-up notice effect, an effect that the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the black color and the fill pattern. For example, when the color of black is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. In addition, as the pattern of filling, the degree of expectation is higher as the number of positions where filling starts is higher, and the degree of expectation may be changed at the position where filling starts. For example, when the filling is started from only one lower left, the expectation is low, and when the filling is started from two places, lower left and upper left, the filling is started from three places at lower left, upper left, and upper right The expectation is higher in order, and the expectation is highest when the filling is started from the four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step-up notice is executed. Regardless of whether or not the development effect is actually developed to the next stage, the effect is executed in a common manner until the middle in order to increase the player's expectation. In the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the screen is filled with a combination of the color of the ink and the filling pattern determined by lottery for the liquid crystal display screen. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes thinner) and characters for displaying in step-up notice 2 appear. In the case of developing into the step-up notice 2, the ink is discharged as it is and the display of characters becomes dark, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the character display is not darkened and the ink is drawn and the character is not displayed.

  In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of “change”, “punishment”, “feeling”, “continuation”, and “one-shot killing”. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, with the characters displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, it shifts to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink gradually fades out before the screen is completely filled with the ink, and finally the ink completely slips off, and the displayed character disappears. It will end up.

  In step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black in step-up notice 2, and an effect that the ink is gradually removed from this state is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of the ink expulsion. For example, when ink is applied only from the lower left, the expectation is low, and when ink is applied from the lower left and the upper left, the ink is applied from the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation increases in the order of going, and the degree of expectation becomes highest when ink is drawn from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink is removed, the development effect is successful and the process proceeds to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

  The step-up notice 4 is the final step of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the contents (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has high expectation in the order of "match", "good chance", "development", "heat fight", "extensive heat", "happiness". In addition, the color of letters is expected to be high in the order of black, white, red and rainbow. In the effect mode of step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

  Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. 452 to 454 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW according to this embodiment. FIG. 452 is a view showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 453 (A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 for painting with black ink from four directions on the screen, and (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to fill in are shown. FIG. 454 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 452 shows all the effects produced in step-up notice 1 and is divided into each drawing (black drawing lower left, black drawing upper left, black drawing lower right, black drawing upper right, character failure, character success), The names of the presentation SW and the contents of the presentation are described in correspondence with each division. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, totaling 26 effects. It has become. In addition, the effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing segment is always one, and only one of the drawing segments “character failure” and “character success” is performed. Therefore, the maximum effects performed simultaneously in step-up notice 1 The number of renderings is 5 effects, including the drawing category “lower left”, the drawing category “upper left”, the drawing category “lower right”, the drawing category “upper right” and the drawing category “character failure” or the drawing category “character success”.

  Also, according to the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1, the method of determining the effect of each drawing section will be specifically described. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the contents of effects relating to the drawing of ink. Specifically, the effect contents relating to the ink drawing include the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing section “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink appearing from the appearance position of the selected ink. Become. In addition, it becomes either the drawing division "character failure" or the drawing division "character success" and the contents of the character displayed at this time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 453 (A), the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the image of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described. . As described above, the total number of effects of the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only presentation data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. In addition, black ink spreads simultaneously from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters “change” are displayed lightly in the drawing division “character failure” and the drawing division “character success”, and then the drawing division “character” In the case of failure, the character of "change" is erased, and at the same time, in the drawing division "character success", the character of "change" is clearly displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 453 (B), the drawing division “lower left” is “red”, the drawing division “upper left” is “none”, and the drawing division “lower right” is “none”, depending on the lottery result of step-up notice 1. The command of division "upper right" is "red", drawing division "character failure" is "improvement", and drawing division "character success" is "none" is issued. As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the character "Iki" is lightly displayed in the drawing section "character failure", and then , The character of "imitation" is deleted in the drawing division "character failure".

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, step up notice 1 drawing command drawing division “lower left” is set to “red” while “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, and step up notice 1 drawing command drawing division “upper right” is to “red” “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON with respect to the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “letter failure is compelling”. On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “character success” is “none”. Since the effect is not performed in the command of “,” neither effect SW is set to ON but is set to OFF.

  By the above, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left" out of all the effects of the step-up notice 1, and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and "improvement" in the drawing section "character failure" The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 454, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 453 (A), an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 454 (B) is performed. Explain the mechanism to perform the effect replacement.

  FIG. 454 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data replaced with the master data. Specifically explaining with reference to the lower left black effect replacement group in FIG. 454, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is an index number on the CGROM of a moving image in which black black spreads from lower left. And the corresponding presentation SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the presentation SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the presentation SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the animation where white black spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the animation It becomes the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI” corresponding to the index SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the ink of the rainbow spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black rendering replacement table. In addition, the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left black rendering replacement table.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command in order to draw effects, and is defined in step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data Triggered (detected) by the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”, a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SW registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. To do. In this embodiment, since the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "lower left" is "red" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, "from the lower left" corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The video number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the red black CGROM from the lower left specified to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 is a CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black black appears from the lower left defined in the step up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, the display list command is created using a movie number on the CGROM corresponding to a movie in which red black appears from the lower left handed from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of replacement of effects by callback in the present embodiment is a low-level control structure (in the present embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure (this embodiment) By calling a program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for modification but capable of executing complex processing), it is possible to separate the detection of replacement timing and replacement control by using a callback. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, which is a data structure, is used to realize complex processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for calling back (the on / off setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment), the processing is always executed by the callback. Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by callback, the structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side When production control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code processed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side is increased, and when new functions are added or functions are changed It is necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, it is always necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the occurrence of a failure due to the change of control but also the function that operated normally before the change is affected and a new failure occurs. There is a risk of

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), the callback is always executed by the callback, and a plurality of the callbacks executed by the callback are executed. Whether or not execution is possible and the processing contents are determined in the callback function. By creating a callback function that corresponds to a single function, even if a new function is added or a function is changed, there is no need to change the LCD effect scheduler data structure, and a call corresponding to a new function. It can be realized by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the influence range due to the change or addition of the function remains in the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting the other callback functions and causing the failure is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the LCD effect scheduler data is executed centrally with a single large program, the execution analysis is performed with a plurality of callback functions and the LCD effect scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the program structure and configuration can be further simplified.

  In the present embodiment, specialization has been made to replacement of effects, but the mechanism of control by callback in this embodiment is not only replacement of effects but also replacement of symbols, control of display or non-display of effects, and drawing target The present invention can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left rendering replacement table explain. If you do not define the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master's presentation SW in the presentation replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master presentation SW must be the liquid crystal presentation scheduler Only the data exists, and the effect SW for replacement corresponding to the master and the index number on the CGROM corresponding only exist in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, about several thousand of the effect replacement table and the effect SW are defined. In a situation where changes in gaming specifications and addition of gaming specifications occur frequently between planning and development of gaming machines and being put into the market, consistency between index numbers of moving images (images) on CGROM and presentation SW It is extremely difficult to maintain

  In the relation between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, an index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be incorrectly defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It may happen that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and replacement is performed with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that an effect dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in outliers may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, the consistency check can be realized by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. Further, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem even if any data in the replacement table is defined. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used, and it is always replaced Display list commands are created using the index numbers on the master's CGROM defined in the table, and effects are drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters appear when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is completely erased without displaying the characters, and the step-up notice ends. The effect of gradually removing black from the top of the display area is executed regardless of success or failure, so that 4 types of effect SW flags for 4 types of drawing patterns that gradually remove black per vertex (Layer) is defined. Further, two types of presentation SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development presentation are defined.

  The upper left ink replacement group, lower right ink replacement group, upper right ink replacement group, letter failure effect replacement group, and character success effect replacement group other than the lower left replacement group shown in FIG. It is.

  In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed, an effect SW flag (layer) corresponding to the mode may be defined for the animation of the displayed character, or one kind of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the parameter animation type may be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are created by individually defining the rendering effect pattern according to the appearance position of the black ink or the character content and setting the rendering SW flag corresponding to the rendering to be performed to ON. It is possible to execute or perform a combined effect. Since switching of effects and combinations are only switching the setting of the effect SW flag, it is possible to set parameters using tools, such as a planner who configures effects without requiring new techniques such as creating a program. Various variations of production can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize several tens of types of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of the black and two types of display patterns as a result of the development effect. This makes it possible to minimize the type of program to be developed, improve the development efficiency of the presentation control program of the gaming machine, and streamline the inspection of the developed presentation control program, thus improving the quality. Can do.

[20-3. Outline of control based on presentation switch]
Subsequently, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 455 is a diagram for explaining a control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and particularly shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, upon receiving a main command (main control command) that triggers rendering start from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues an internal control to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a preliminary lottery or performing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data that matches the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data. If there is data that matches, the peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530 c is set to ON.

  The presentation SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is a presentation SW determination command sequence for turning on the presentation SW. The effect SW determination command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, main control command values, and sub internal command values, or to combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. . For example, the variation start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character preview are defined side by side. It has become possible.

  By defining a plurality of commands side by side, for example, when the mini characters displayed in different effects are different depending on the background even if they are the same mini character preview, the background command value is determined, and after the background is identified, the mini character command value is determined. Although it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background for the first time, a plurality of determinations may be required for several minutes of the command. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice as in this embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make multiple determinations, and an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands can be specified in the same way as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since a plurality of effects SW can be defined for the same command value, a plurality of effects SW can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number and the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 455, when the command “0x103001” is received, “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 452 to 454, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect is executed. It is.

  In the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, an example of these functions will be described. FIG. 456 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function has an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  The LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON, from the steady program or the called back program. The LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the presentation SW not from the presentation SW activation by a command but from a steady program or a called back program.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the presentation SW from a steady program or a called back program. Further, when the “all reset” attribute is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW based on the “reset target effect SW group ID” of the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all the presentation SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

  The LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of the target rendering SW from a steady program or a called back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for obtaining the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady program or the callback program.

[20-4. Example of production switch implementation]
Subsequently, an implementation example of control using a presentation switch will be described. FIG. 457 to FIG. 462 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is described in C language.

  As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In addition, since presentation SW is set to all the presentation blocks, the process based on presentation SW is always called back at the time of execution of a presentation block. The callback is executed even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, and it is determined in the callback function that the specific process is not performed, and the callback function is ended.

  FIG. 457 is a view for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code defining the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of the effect SW control information , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group

  The presentation SW information table is configured based on the presentation SW information table management structure shown in (A), and the presentation SW group ID, the reset target presentation SW group ID, the presentation SW control information (presentation SW attribute), the presentation SW It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions such as an effect SW for performing the same (same type) notice effect, an effect SW for holding display, or an effect SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is expressed by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

  The reset effect SW group ID is identification information for designating an effect SW group in which the effect SW is set to OFF when “effect SW all reset” is designated in “attrib bit assignment” to be described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively designate effect SWs for which processing is to be canceled (reset) simultaneously at the time of switching of the effect SW or the like. Similar to the effect SW group ID, the effect SW group ID to be reset is expressed by bits, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

  The presentation SW control information is information defining the function of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 457 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  The passive (PASSIVE) active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the presentation SW, and becomes “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0” and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In passive, even when the command to activate the rendering SW is received multiple times during the period in which the rendering SW is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the rendering SW is performed only once, and in the active, the rendering is performed in the period in which the rendering SW is defined When the command for activating the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used, for example, when displaying a rendering effect corresponding to button pressing when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

  Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. When the bit is set to “1”, the user side callback function is called instead of the system side callback function.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a callback function for replacement defined in advance is called up at the time of evaluation SW evaluation defined for each display object, still image, and moving image in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Be

  The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, at the time of the evaluation SW evaluation, the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the “reset target effect SW group ID” is set to OFF.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. 457 (A). As for the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and control and effect of a new effect SW are executed by the output command.

  The production SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the replacement information bit of the presentation SW control information (when “replacement is specified” is specified) Is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as effect groups. The effect group includes the effect SW group ID, the active effect SW top ID, the number of active effect SW, the passive effect SW top ID, and the number of passive effect SW.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW top ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the top of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active rendering SW is the number of active rendering SW arranged from the rendering SW corresponding to the active rendering SW leading ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the passive effects SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW leading ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, if “effect SW all reset” is specified in “attrib bit assign”, the continuous belonging to the effect SW group ID It becomes possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect SWs and the plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF.

  FIG. 458 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to an effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 458, specific numerical values are defined for the effect SW numbers using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the presentation SW numbers in an enumerated manner as described above, when setting or referring to the presentation SW numbers in the program, it is not necessary to handle them directly as numerical values, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the presentation SW flag and presentation SW information table will be described. FIG. 459 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining an effect SW flag and an effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) shows an effect SW flag, and (B) shows an effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, “1” (ON) is set, and when not executed, “0” (OFF) is set.

  The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 457 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed, and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the presentation SW information table is stored in an array having the presentation SW number as an index as in the presentation SW flag, and data corresponding to all the presentation SW is stored.

  Subsequently, a presentation SW replacement table information and a presentation SW replacement table for performing presentation replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table, as shown in FIG. 457 (A). FIG. 460 is a diagram showing an example of effect SW replacement table information and program data for defining the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment; (A) is a effect SW replacement table information; ) Shows a presentation SW replacement table.

  FIG. 460A is program data showing a configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

  The presentation SW master data is presentation SW data defined in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, and corresponds to the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1” when the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data, and there is, for example, a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) or the like, and the material information is replaced with corresponding replacement data by evaluating the presentation SW.

  FIG. 460 (B) is program data showing a configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined. In this embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

  As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated with reference to the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued by the result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line of the effect SW replacement table is specified using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. In the effect replacement data, the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponding to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is a material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and videos will be described. By dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and drawing the layer, it is possible to use the display result in a versatile manner. For example, by separating the background layer, even if the character to be displayed is changed, it can be drawn in a common manner.

  In this embodiment, a table (layer information table) for storing layer information is individually stored and managed, so that even if some layers are changed, other layers are not affected. Can.

  FIG. 461 is a view showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list for storing an address for storing each layer information table, (B) is a layer information table (background For). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called by using the effect SW as a trigger, and whether to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 462 is a diagram showing an example of the program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment. (A) is the contents of the layer information table (first notice 1), and (B) is the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half 1 and the second half 2 determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, as in the background layer information table.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 461 (A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, for the first half notice, for big hit effect, for accessory operation, for hold display, etc. are defined.

  Further, FIG. 461 (B) shows a background layer information table. In the effect in the present embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined, and a background corresponding to the game state (short time) Middle background, high background, middle background) are also defined. Furthermore, a variation such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

  FIG. 462 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half 1 of the preview, roulette preview, blackout preview, window preview are defined, and a command for clearing the preview is also defined. FIG. 462 (B) shows the layer information table for the first half 1 of the preview, step-up notice, button mini character notice, conversation notice are defined, and the layer table for clearing the notice as in the first half of the notice. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing notices is used to finish the drawing of notices executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “effect SW all reset” is defined in “attrib bit assign”. Then, when the rendering SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, the rendering SW for all the notices belonging to the rendering SW group ID defined in the resetting target rendering SW group ID is set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the rendering SW Ends and disappears. It should be noted that the layer table for clearing the notice is empty data since no effect is performed.

  At the end of the list storing the layer table and the area allocated to the table storing the layer information, the termination determination record is stored, and when the termination determination record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (the number of records) without setting the number of elements in advance for each list or table.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Effect Layer Table / Liquid Crystal Effect Block Data]
FIG. 463 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table and a liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment, where (A) is a liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal effect common block. Shows the configuration of

  As shown in FIG. 463A, in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table are liquid crystal effect common blocks It is defined in combination with the total number of drawing frames and the rendering SW. In the present embodiment, a total drawing frame number (580), the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” based on the information of the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP” in the callback function.

  The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect SW, total number of frames drawn, loop start frame position, playback time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 463B, when there are a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. A terminal (terminal) is set after the step-up notice 4 and is configured to be able to cope with the increase / decrease of the number of steps by adding / removing the liquid crystal rendering block. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

  The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawn frames defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal effect block. Describing by using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the reproduction of the liquid-crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is performed by (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame is to be restored after the end of the reproduction of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the first row.

  The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, loop start frame position and playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. After the playback of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is completed, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is again displayed. When loop playback is performed from the beginning or midway, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total playback time. Step-up notice 1 “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” liquid crystal effect block playback time is (150) frames, so when the LCD frame “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” finishes playing, the second half 50 frames are looped twice. This can be realized by defining a (250) frame of time (150) frame + loop playback time (50 × 2) frame and defining a (100) frame at the loop start frame position. An effect of performing fluctuation fluctuation without determining a symbol during a pseudo-continuous production can be realized by using a loop playback function.

  Moreover, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of reproduction despite the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment being the same is that something is wrong The drawing is not updated when the next effect common block is not executed, and the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping.

  The control by the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case of executing effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 in this embodiment is performed by performing a lottery for notice related to effects in peripheral control board 1530 and then step up A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice effect are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

  After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and the callback function is called. In the called back function, it is determined whether each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_STEPUP_SUPP” On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks in the liquid crystal rendering common block and control whether or not the liquid crystal rendering block is to be executed using the rendering SW. In addition, the display / non-display of each effect can be switched.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block at each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 464 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal rendering block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  As the contents of the liquid crystal rendering block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal rendering block is defined. The function used in the liquid crystal rendering block which is the number of execution frames, the function or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is the two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function for weighting by the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function indicating the end of the liquid crystal rendering block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal rendering block will be specifically described. To explain with reference to the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the top (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, since “LCD_NOP” in which the number of execution frames (120) is designated is given, the process waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal rendering block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is ended.

  As described in FIG. 451, it is realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the next step of the step-up notice at the end of the step-up notice of each step of the step-up notice. doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", and after performing the weight for (120) frames, by starting the execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is obtained. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts to execute when a frame has elapsed since the start of the execution (120). Thereby, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next step.

  In addition, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal rendering block, and when the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined continuously, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data of step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU 2 for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. The same applies to step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
As mentioned above, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of the step-up notice rendering has been described. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting an operation of the effect button during the change of the pattern and operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Aspect of button mini character production]
FIG. 465 is a view for explaining an outline of button mini character presentation according to the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed at the time of receiving a main command or at the start of variation, and winning. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the button operation input reception period, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the button operation input reception period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  To explain further, when the player has won an execution lottery of the button mini character effect and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the change, the button mini character first half period becomes effective. The button mini character first half valid period is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) for prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the button mini character first half valid period. When the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, the mini character is displayed. Specifically, although it will be described later, when the button is operated during the button mini character first half period, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

  When the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the button mini character first half validity period. In FIG. 397, the character is displayed in a mode different from when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period, but may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

  When the button is operated in the second half of the button mini character effective period, the mini character is displayed in the same manner as the button mini character first half effective period. In FIG. 465, the character is displayed in a mode different from when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period, but may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

[23-2. LCD Production Common Block]
FIG. 466 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 466, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total drawing frame of the number of liquid crystal rendering common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal rendering common block is the liquid crystal rendering common block It is defined in pairs with the number and the presentation SW. In the present embodiment, the total drawing frame number (180) frame, the rendering SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal rendering common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawn frames (150), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed during the (180) frame. After that, during (150) frame, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is ended.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 467 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini character effects in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” of FIG. 467 are the same as the rendering layer table and the liquid crystal rendering block data described in FIG. The presentation SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call a callback function to determine whether to execute the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active renderings in which the active attribute is defined in the rendering SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the rendering effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. Liquid crystal rendering block data]
FIG. 468 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 468 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. First, in the first half of the process, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and weight is applied for 90 frames from the start of the change. . Subsequently, (90) frames are executed for liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the button mini character first half period, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is ended. In the latter half of the production, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal production block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini-character second half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of variation. Thereafter, (120) frames are executed for liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is ended.

  As described above, since the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active production SW, the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” and “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” are executed. If the command to be issued is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effects corresponding to the effects SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed as many times as is issued. Also, a callback is always generated for each frame by the presentation SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame after the button pressing control is finished and until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is finished. By creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for effect rendering during the button effective period and controlling it with the active effect SW, a control is performed in which the callback period is executed without determining the button effective period separately. Is possible. For example, it is possible to count the number of times of continuous strikes by continuously hitting the button, and to perform effects according to the number of times. In addition, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation by calling up sub rendering scheduler data including a function for controlling the lamp in the callback function. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation effective period is ended by calling the sub effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory and performing the operation according to the number of button operations. In the procedure of returning the bonus to the initial position, for example, the effect block including a function of causing the bonus to return to the initial position is executed by causing the "LCD_NOP" to wait until the button operation valid period ends.

[24. Liquid crystal production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents in accordance with the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be notified. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variably display game when predetermined conditions such as a gaming state are satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fluctuation display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol, and reels in which identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are allocated to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a manner corresponding to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each manner. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame as in the case of the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the rendering SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the index number on the CGROM is defined as master data . A reel number is defined for the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each gaming state or performance. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, the left symbol on the river background is R3, and the middle symbol. Is R4, right symbol is R5, left symbol of mountain background is R6, middle symbol is R7, right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it becomes possible to correspond individually to the gaming state and effects, and it becomes possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reels of identification symbols. Identification pattern is displayed in order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 with reel arrangement and next to 0 is the design and identification symbol of the identification symbol when it is displayed back to 1 A reel index is defined that defines the total number and the display order of identification symbols. A plurality of reel indexes can also be defined.

  The tables for replacing the identification symbols include a reel number and a reel index number corresponding to the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on a CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement are defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the replacement symbol table of the identification symbol. In the reel index replacement work number table, work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. Reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as if it were stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo continuous change or the confirmation symbol number value of the identification symbol The identification symbol number value is stored in advance at the start of fluctuation by the peripheral control program in accordance with the contents of the effect.

  The identification of data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When a callback is executed based on the effect switch for identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is in the call back function for identification symbol replacement. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement workpiece is taken out, and the reel index replacement workpiece number is corrected based on the number of identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is identified in the identification symbol replacement table, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image in the identified table is corrected. Identify using index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as in the case of the effect replacement, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used for the replacement of the identification symbol. A display list command is always created using an index number on the master's CGROM defined in the replacement table, and rendering contents are drawn.

  Furthermore, by carrying out replacement of the identification symbol every frame, even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to a normal display. In addition, by setting the reels according to the gaming state, it is possible for the player to grasp the gaming state regardless of the contents of the identification symbol even when a failure occurs in replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. The decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the occurrence timing of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing division by the parameter delivered to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 469 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined in the callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

  As for “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A”, a callback occurs after “Liquid crystal A drawing starts” before “Liquid crystal A drawing start” and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” starts. In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before liquid crystal B drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after liquid crystal B drawing start. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B become different liquid crystals, and it is possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, thereby drawing on the liquid crystal B triggered by the drawing completion of the liquid crystal A or ending the drawing of the liquid crystal B It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A at the same time.

  In "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before all drawing is started, and for "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after all drawing is completed. It is possible to initialize the frame buffer with a necessary background color before drawing by performing determination before the start of drawing, or instruct other rendering devices to execute effects when drawing is completed by determining the end of drawing. It becomes possible.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM” generates a callback before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM” generates a callback after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after the start of drawing of a specific layer. For example, by performing determination before the start of layer drawing, when a plurality of notifications are generated when drawing a layer of notification, it is possible to enlarge and draw a display of a notification with high priority. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the symbol that was drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, the symbol with high expectation The effect can be displayed around the symbol only when the symbol stops.

  As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing section and execute predetermined processing before or after the start of drawing or completion. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 469, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before common block drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after common block drawing completion. The execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering that constitutes a liquid crystal rendering common block is stopped by performing determination before the start of common block rendering, and rendering of rendering is not performed, or the liquid crystal rendering common block It is also possible to execute the liquid crystal rendering common block different from the liquid crystal rendering common block to be executed which has been determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation by performing the determination after the drawing end.

  Also, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the start of drawing of the liquid crystal effect block in the common block of liquid crystal effects, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after drawing of the liquid crystal effect block. By performing the determination before the start of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing, it becomes possible to change the liquid crystal rendering block to be executed based on the result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing the determination after the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it becomes possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block for drawing a single effect. Furthermore, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback after the completion of still image and moving image drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can be generated before starting still image and moving image drawing in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Various effects can be replaced by making a determination before starting to draw a still image or a moving image. In addition, it is possible to add renderings of effects corresponding to replacement contents of various effects by performing determination after drawing completion of a still image or a moving image.

  As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and an image and a video are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the effect category. Be done. Further, as described above, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer.

  When rendering is performed, an image or the like is rendered in parallel to the plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal rendering schedule data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Furthermore, the drawing by the step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (preliminary_first half 1 layer). FIG. 470 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing result of an individual layer and a drawing result of all layers at the time of execution of advance notice rendering according to the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer, but if these effect SWs are to be managed individually, there is a possibility that the processing becomes complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each of the layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

  For example, the presentation SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 470, an effect SW group background, an effect SW group symbol, and an effect SW group advance notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These presentation SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the presentation SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the category of the presentation.

  As described above, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when the symbol display and the hold display in line with the currently displayed background is changed to another background when starting a new change, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer in the division according to the background The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display matched to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and the hold display matched to the new background in a plurality of layers. It is possible to switch the drawing for only the necessary effect display from among a plurality of effect displays superimposed and displayed in layers.

  In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the jackpot effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the effect of the jackpot, but for the hold, the hold that was drawn during the change It is also possible to display continuously. Such control defines the effect group to be hidden as described above as the reset object effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW all reset has been specified is a liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation or This can be realized by defining a common block for liquid crystal effects at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, all the effects are managed as a common block in blocks of a certain length for the purpose of improving the control of the complicated game effects. As a result, a production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the notice lottery, and a series of productions such as symbol fluctuation display and jackpot is realized by drawing based on the selected production block, and complicated control is performed. Therefore, the control that synchronizes the drawing contents with the sub-effects such as an accessory, lamp, and sound output has been realized. In the common block, a period divided by a predetermined timing from the start of symbol variation to the symbol determination is set. These periods correspond to, for example, the first half variation and the second half variation, and are assigned to the variation pattern. It was set according to the variation time of the symbol.

  By configuring in this way, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, by ensuring the independence of the notice effect executed in the first half of the change and the notice effect executed in the second half of the change, the degree of freedom of the combination of the common blocks can be increased.

  However, as described above, since the common block is divided by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize the effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change only by combining the effect blocks having a predetermined length. When performing rendering over such a plurality of periods, each common block is executed independently, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the subsequent common block are associated and the versatility is lowered. For this reason, the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control program codes individually instead of setting program data.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in this embodiment, not only the display of variable symbols and a series of effects of big hits are performed by combining effect blocks of a certain length for all effects, but the length of the effect blocks Is exceptionally not a fixed length, but is configured to allow the effect block length according to the effect period. Furthermore, rendering effects can be rendered by combining rendering blocks having different rendering times, and rendering blocks that straddle the combined rendering blocks can also be rendered simultaneously, thereby realizing rendering effects that continue from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation.

  As the effect across a plurality of periods, for example, there is a countdown effect in which a number is counted down and displayed with the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and the countdown display is continued across the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. FIG. 471 is a diagram for explaining an example of a common block extending over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, in which (A) is a symbol display and execution timing of a notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, and The structure of the liquid crystal advance presentation block by the common block which spans a plurality of periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 471, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 471 (A), a step-up notice and a BTN logo character fall notice are executed in the first half fluctuation, and a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed in the second half fluctuation. The contents of each preliminary announcement effect are as described above. Further, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step up notice until the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 471 (B), the liquid crystal rendering block data of the notice effect using the common block (step-up notice, BTN logo feature drop notice, cut-in notice and group notice) and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice. It shows the configuration of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed during the period until the end time. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The countdown notice effect block includes a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data is started, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half of the fluctuation is finished after the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the start of the step-up notice, and the function NOP that waits until the latter half of the change is finished is a NOP that is executed after the end of the group notice. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to more flexibly operate the common block. In addition, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence such as the execution timing of the other effect blocks being shifted due to the exceptional setting. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, processing such as image reuse, deformation, and additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various presentation expressions are efficiently realized.

  FIG. 472 is a diagram for explaining a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. Conventionally, as shown in FIG. 472, an image drawn in each layer is superimposed on a frame buffer and written, and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Finally, the display buffer command is used to overwrite the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer on the frame buffer to create drawing data of one frame.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies drawing data for one frame to be displayed, which is created in the frame buffer, to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. An effect is newly added around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the buffer for capture, and then written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

  In this way, drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the drawing data that has already been created. However, in such conventional image conversion, only image conversion for drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to addition of new drawing elements for a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, It is limited to the enlargement and reduction of the whole liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing element drawn in each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

  The reason why the image conversion can not be performed for each drawing element is that drawing elements in each effect, for example, background, design, advance notice, etc., are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order, so It is overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when drawn on the frame buffer, it is possible to overwrite the drawing element with another drawing element even if it is attempted to extract the drawing element in a rectangle. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten portion is lost.

  At present, the need to reuse image data for one drawn liquid crystal display has become scarce due to the improvement of VDP processing capability, but diversifying the expressions of presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming In order to execute complicated drawing processing, an increase in load was expected.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems and perform more diverse effects, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When drawing image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display newly, instead of adding the image, each image display unit constituting the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is dynamically changed during drawing. Realize complex rendering by adding new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect rendering data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is provided in units of effect blocks in liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing display by the effect block. Incorporate Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When changing the image, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the corresponding rendering block in the called program function are not drawn on the frame buffer, but allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on the off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to the change of the image of the specific advance notice, the addition of a new image, and the replacement of the effect of the background only, the change of the image or the new image Additions can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a configuration will be specifically described, in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer. FIG. 473 is a diagram for describing a procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer according to the present embodiment and writing the converted image file in the frame buffer.

  As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called an off-screen buffer different from the frame buffer are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

  Explaining further, the rendering SW is embedded in the liquid crystal rendering block data that configures each layer corresponding to the rendering and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that configures the liquid crystal rendering block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal rendering The callback function is called by the callback based on the selected presentation SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 473, first, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the presentation SW before the drawing of the background layer is started. Next, at the drawing timing of each rendering element of the background layer, a display list command for enlargement of each rendering element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the rendering SW. In this way, the enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, an effect is applied to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW at the drawing timing of each effect element in the symbol layer. Create display list command. By transmitting the display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing at which the rendering of all the rendering elements related to the preview layer is finished, a display list command for rotating the preview rendering of each rendering element of the preview layer is performed within the function called back based on the rendering SW. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all rendering elements of the holding layer are written to the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

  According to the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, not the image conversion for the entire screen, but the image conversion regardless of the drawing unit of each layer, the drawing element constituting the layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that callback based on the same effect SW is performed multiple times at each drawing timing in a period from the start of drawing of a liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the type of drawing timing are as described using FIG. 469 described above.

  In addition, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is an image conversion target. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of variation-related drawing, an image is generated based on the result of the lottery result value of the advance lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input at the time of creating the display list command for drawing the image conversion target image. It is possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on the CGROM, and the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a processes the created display list command to perform drawing at the time of game effect execution. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in a buffer assigned to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command for one screen is created, the external request DMA (transfer means) The contents of the buffer were sent to VDP using.

  However, at present, the rendering specification becomes complicated, and the processing load increases, so that the processing time of the advance lottery process at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems, motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process by the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of the peripheral control such as production is executed at a predetermined cycle, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle when the processing with high load as described above is executed repeatedly. .

  In exceptional cases where processing can not be completed within a cycle, processing can not be completed within a cycle on a regular basis, and game control by the main control device and effect control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing cycle. There is a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device will deviate, and the interest of the game will be significantly reduced.

  Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by, for example, reducing the time required for processing with high load in peripheral control processing such as rendering. Therefore, in this embodiment, drawing processing with relatively high load in peripheral control processing, in particular, the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating the native display list command that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source A means for reducing and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control process will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a will be described. FIG. 474 is a diagram for describing a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 474, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information on the display list command to be transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a (parameter value corresponding to the VDP register number and register number). Since it is not, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source can execute. The converted VDP native display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. Further, when a callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs display list transfer setting to the external request DMA. Thus, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  When receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group of one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and the display list command group is output from the buffer to the VDP 1540 a using the external request DMA at the next processing cycle of creating the display list command group. It realizes drawing by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. In the case where a plurality of VDPs of different makers are mounted on one game machine, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data which is an intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP for each maker. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is applied. FIG. 475 is a view for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a without storing the display list command group in the present embodiment in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 475, first, display list transfer setting is performed on the external request DMA by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530 c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal effect scheduler data as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is converted into the converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes the image in the frame buffer. Furthermore, analysis of the display list is interrupted at the timing of analyzing and executing the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group, and a transfer interruption request is generated to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral processing MPU 1511 determines that the interrupt cause is the interrupt by the interrupt display list command in the interrupt processing module, and executes the callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and replaces effects and symbols. The effect replacement method is the same as the description using the above-described FIG. 460 and the like, and the symbol replacement method is also the same as the description using the above-described FIG. 460 and the like. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the rendering SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, and a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command of display list analysis resumption to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for resuming display list analysis, generates a transfer resume request for the external request DMA, and resumes analysis of the display list command.

  As described above, by processing only the replacement part of the rendering using the callback function, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c (temporary storage means) is used without any conversion of the VDP native display list involved in all the rendering other than the replacement. First, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

  By configuring as described above, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the built-in sound source VDP 1540 a without storing in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a that accompanies the image display, and the image processing can be speeded up. In addition, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

  In the peripheral control ROM 1530b, only the frequently used VDP native display list command group may be stored, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed according to a conventional procedure. As a result, processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, and overall processing speed can be increased, and an increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530 b, and processing of different images is performed according to the conventional procedure according to the difference in model and version to improve development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (production control) of gaming machines can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used by a 32-bit CPU are a char (character, character) type, an int (integer) type, and a long (long integer) type, each having a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. . The floating point type is a float (single precision) type or a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes or 8 bytes, respectively.

  The processor used for the peripheral control of the gaming machine is a byte capable of reading and writing data stored in all addresses in units of 1 byte in the memory (ROM, RAM), regardless of whether the processor is a CISC processor or a RISC processor. It is a machine. Note that the address for reading and writing multi-byte data is not limited to this. When the processor reads data of a plurality of bytes, the data is always read from a byte boundary, and when accessed so as to cross the byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, program execution is delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. I'll be relaxed.

  However, in current game machine development, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur at the time of program execution, and the program execution speed may be reduced. In peripheral control of a gaming machine, since it was necessary to complete all processing within a predetermined processing cycle, a reduction in program execution speed may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. Data structures are adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure including a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored when data corresponding to the data structure is stored in the memory. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area for storing. As a result, the data access start position by the processor is adjusted, and the information is arranged so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, so that an alignment violation does not occur and a decrease in the program execution speed is prevented. Can do. Adjusting the alignment of the data structure on all ROMs and RAMs is an enormous amount of work. Therefore, the lottery process at the start of fluctuation that increases the load on the processor and increases the processing time. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the liquid crystal drawing, the lamp control process, and the like. Moreover, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the above-mentioned process.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, the effect display according to the determination result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby changing the decoration pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. The rendering will be executed together with the expected rendering (noticing rendering) applied to the background depiction (background preview) and the movable body operation (feature rendering). As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as background depiction (background advance notice), basically, it has an effect such as "how much should the ratio for causing an image with high expectation to appear to be set?" It is only done to Therefore, the fundamental problem such as “it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectation (expected production) appears” has not yet been solved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction It is possible to execute processing for displaying the background image used in the image in a special mode different from the original image data. When displayed in the special mode, the expectation ( It is suggested that it can be suggested that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is high.

Here, as the “process to display in a special mode”, for example,
A process of displaying original image data as rotational processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around an x, y, or z axis (or an appropriate combination) in a display area, etc.),
-It is possible to exemplify processing such as processing for displaying original image data as mosaic processing data having a predetermined degree of "blurring" or the like.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to a slight processing (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.). It is decided to carry out a special effect to display this (displayed in a special mode). According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to positively detect and recognize the fact even if special effects are performed in which only slight processing is performed on the original image data. However, in exchange for this, even if the special performance is not performed, it seems to be able to remember the sensation and illusion that “there may be the special performance being executed” As a result, even if a state in which an image with a high degree of expectation (special effect) has not appeared continues, it is expected that the sense of expectation for the big hit is suitably maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such “display in a special mode”, it becomes difficult to recognize even the possibility of being in a situation with high expectation. In the end, doing special effects can lose its own meaning.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether "processing in a special mode" is being executed according to the operation by the player. Can be executed. According to such a configuration, the help image can be displayed in response to an operation by the player, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is expected that the reduction of the risk of the loss of

  However, the “help image” according to this explanation example does not clearly indicate whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed, but it includes the recognition difficulty. ing. It is hope that even if it does not appear to be in the state of being executed "processing to display in a special mode" just because it dares to have such recognition difficulty, it can not be convinced that it is in the state of being executed. Will be able to be left, and it will be possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 476 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when a state transition is made between a non-game state in which a game is not executed (such as in a demo screen) and a game execution state in which a game is executed. .

  FIG. 476 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the game is in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen) in which no game is being executed. As shown in FIG. 476 (a), in the effect display device 1600 when in the non-game state, a character image PG (here, which is useful for examining whether the special effect is being executed) A guidance image AG is displayed that suggests that a character imitating a penguin can be made to appear by operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410). In this example, an explanatory note and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

  When the start winning is generated in the situation shown in FIG. 476 (a) and the game (change of special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started, the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 476 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice), the movable body operation (feature effect) and the like. In this way, by causing the guide image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, it is possible to prevent adverse effects on the rendering when in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) can be favorably appealed.

  FIG. 476 (c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the change effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 476 (b) is ended (stop display).

  When the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 476 (c), the change image by the decoration symbol SZ is newly started by digesting the hold information, so that the guide image AG is not displayed. In the state as it is, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 476 (b) will appear again. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 476 (c), the state is shifted again to the non-play state (in the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the state in which the game is not newly started for a predetermined time has been continued after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The displayed condition (the condition shown in FIG. 476 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guidance image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  And in the "process to be displayed in a special mode" according to this effect example, the state in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination) In addition, it can be executed when it is within a period in which a specific effect image appears (a predetermined timing within a specific effect pattern).

  In FIG. 477, an expected effect is performed in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in the “specific effect pattern” and the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image. The example of a display in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 when it exists in the state is shown.

  That is, in this production example, when at least “expected production where a princess character (specific production image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, on condition that a predetermined production condition is satisfied, A process of displaying only the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) after performing a slight rotation process (a process of displaying in a special manner) can be executed. Yes. When the princess character (specific effect image) on which the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) on which the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed is The rate at which jackpot symbols appear is higher than when they are displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 477 (a), the "process to display in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) are of each original image data. It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 477 (b), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (hime character) is subjected to three times rotational processing on the left and then displayed. In the situation shown in FIG. 477 (c), the process (displayed in a special manner) is executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 477 (c), the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is 6 degrees to the left. In this state, the process of displaying these (the process of displaying in a special mode) is executed after the rotation processing is performed.

  As is apparent from FIGS. 477 (a) to (c), each original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. In contrast, only a small amount of rotational processing is applied. In particular, in FIG. 477 (a) to (c), it is possible to compare and see in the same figure, but in actual rendition, FIG. 477 (a corresponding to the result of the remark determination) ) Only one of (c) is displayed and can not be compared among them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 477 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that they are displayed in the special mode, but they are displayed in the special mode. It is expected that the player is aware of a certain possibility (high possibility), and even if Fig. 477 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be convinced, and it is expected that the degree of leaving a hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as “may be in a state of being displayed in a special manner” is expected.

  In addition, a process of displaying the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (a process of displaying them in a special manner) ) May be executed as a process in which each original image data is rotated and displayed separately, and each original image data is converted into one image after being converted into one image. It is possible to execute as processing for applying rotational processing to the image of and displaying it.

  In addition, with regard to FIGS. 477 (b) and (c), when the image shown in FIG. 477 (c) is displayed, the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 477 (b) is displayed. You may make it have the relationship which becomes high. Alternatively, when “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, after displaying FIG. 477 (a) once, it is displayed as a moving image in which the inclination changes in the order of FIG. 477 (b), (c). You may make it make it. Alternatively, both of FIG. 477 (b) and (c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIG. 477 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status related to such “processing to be displayed in a special manner”, the special meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. There is no doubt. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is in a state in which at least "expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed. And the like, it is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether the process of “displaying in a special mode” is being performed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

  FIG. 478 shows that a help image is displayed based on a player's operation being accepted in a state where “expected effect where a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. A display example on the effect display device 1600 of the time is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, when at least “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image” is performed (see FIG. 477), the operation by the player (operation button Character image PG (here, a character resembling a penguin) is useful as a help image to help check if “special effects (here, tilt effects) are being performed” if 410) is performed. It is displayed.

  More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 477 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 478 (a) will appear. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 478 (b) will appear, and when the situation shown in FIG. 477 (c) When an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player is performed, the situation shown in FIG. 478 (c) appears.

  However, as is clear from FIGS. 478 (a) to (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be used to determine whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. It is not explicitly stated whether or not the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems to be in the state where "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, it will become possible to be strongly aware of the possibility, Even if it appears that the process of displaying in a special mode is not being performed, it can not be convinced that hope for the feasibility of the process can be left, and the sense of expectation is maintained. It will be possible.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 478 (a) to 478 (c), the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state where “processing to display in a special manner” is being executed. Regardless of the manner of execution, the display can be made only in one mode which is a predetermined position and which holds the ruler horizontally in the horizontal direction. In this way, by causing an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” and that extends in the horizontal direction to appear by an operation by the player, the image is displayed. (Here, the ruler) can be functioned as a reference image (help image) indicating whether or not the “special effect (in this case, tilt effect) is being performed” state.

  In particular, in this production example, the horizontal direction is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” at a position overlapping with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the “processing to display in a special mode”. A guide image (in this case, a ruler) displayed so as to extend is displayed. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (Hime character) to be subjected to the special processing, it can be further useful to determine whether the special processing is being performed. become.

  That is, in such an example of the effect, the special effect subjected to the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is an effect which is slightly tilted, and when the effect of tilting is performed, the effect of tilting is Expectations are higher than if it is not done. For this reason, the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed. It is arranged to intentionally have difficulty in recognizing that the process of displaying in the special mode is not notified. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility that the degree of high expectation is high when it appears that the directing effect is executed, and even if the directing effect is not seen to be performed, It will be expected to leave hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as "it may be in a state in which a directing effect is being performed".

  Furthermore, a target image (here, a ruler) indicating whether or not the “special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed” is set as a target of “processing to display in a special manner”. One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative symbol SZ, background image) in the form of overlapping at least a part, and the standard image (here, a ruler) This single effect (the degree of expectation) ), And it can be provided as an effect that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is already in the display state.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation progress without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) as it becomes possible as soon as the player makes a selection (depending on the operation). When you are not quite confident that you are in a state where the direction (in this case, tilt direction is being performed), you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not making the player perform the operation by dare Become.

  In the example of effect, the “process of displaying in a special mode” is performed as “the process of performing rotation processing on the original image data and then displaying”, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the processing may be performed as processing for performing rotation processing on image data created based on the original image data instead of the original image data and then displaying the image data. In addition, image data may not be subjected to rotational processing, but may be subjected to another processing or conversion. The point is that it is possible to execute a special process to convert and display an image having a mode different from the normal mode, and when the special process can be performed, the player performs an operation on the special process target by the operation of the player. If the reference image can be displayed, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects.

  By the way, in the above-described effect example, the “process to display in a special mode” can be executed when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. As described above, depending on the result of the production determination, the decoration symbol SZ may be executable a plurality of times within a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. At this time, when the number of times that the “process to display in a special mode” is executed is large, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher than when the number of times is small.

  In addition, with respect to the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case), the decorative symbol SZ is used not only when "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed. It may be possible to be able to be displayed by the operation of the player over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, the decorative symbol SZ may be displayed by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is "comparison reference image (reference image) to background image", the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image in each case. It is clear that it depends on the type of If the display position or display form of the character image PG (especially, here, a ruler) is changed according to the type of background image at that time, the character image PG is a comparison reference. It is possible that the essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the gaming entertainment will be reduced due to the doubt of the credibility. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (the reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariant and absolute image regardless of the presentation situation.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG be changeable among a plurality of predetermined display positions in accordance with an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, regardless of which display position is displayed, it is important that the display form is the same.

  FIG. 479 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by the operation by the player.

  FIG. 479 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, when in this rendering situation, the player carries out an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (the reference image) with the suspicion that "the processing to be displayed in the special mode is not executed". Then, character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any one of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 479 (b) to (d)) predetermined according to the mode of the operation. Processing is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed on the left side in the display area (FIG. 479 (b)). Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) at the center position (FIG. 479 (c)) in the display area When processing for displaying PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, a comparison reference image (standard image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 479 (d)) in the display area. A process of displaying the character image PG as a) is performed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 479 (b) to (d), the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) has the same form regardless of the display position. , Because the positional relationship between the background image (or the decorative pattern) that can be the target of the “process to be displayed in a special mode” and the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) is different, “display in a special mode The ease of determining whether the process of “performing processing” is being performed also naturally becomes different.

  For example, when the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (the center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 479 (c), the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is a comparison target When the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 479 (d) (the right position in the display area). Since the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed so as to hide substantially the entire background image (bidding ticket). It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether the processing to be performed is being performed.

  According to such a configuration, the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is played at “a display position suitable for comparison” which differs depending on the type of background image in each case. Since the information can be displayed by the operation of the user, it is possible to suitably provide a judgment material as to whether or not the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is being performed.

  In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) is made variable in accordance with the number of operations for the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time on the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 are provided, and any one of the operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means in accordance with the subject. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (acceptance period). Will be possible.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) cannot function as an effect (expected degree) by itself, and is therefore required for comparison and determination with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes an worthless image that only makes visual recognition difficult. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the time displayed by the operation by the player, it is desirable to automatically hide the screen without requiring any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is displayed as the comparison reference image (specifically, the ruler here) and the type of the background image, the “processing in a special mode” is performed. In some cases, it may not be sufficient for the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to perform comparison and determination as to whether or not it is in Therefore, in the above presentation example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (standard image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear is reoperated. If it is, the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, every time the predetermined operation means is re-operated, it is intermittently displayed until the player is convinced if the non-display is made after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the operation timing. By performing such operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and comparison and judgment can be made thoroughly.

  However, if such an unlimited continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be very easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. . That is, the player may always get a confident conclusion that "special processing is being performed" or "special processing is not being performed", so that "special mode" It does not specify whether or not the processing to be displayed is being executed, but the above-mentioned purported meaning of "imposing the difficulty of recognition" is overdrawn.

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced, such as by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler possessed by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time a predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. The comparison reference image (character image PG) Since the display area as a whole becomes smaller gradually (here, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to preferably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being performed while making it possible to extend.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), this can not be used for comparison with the background image, resulting in a decrease in game interest. It may be connected. Accordingly, with respect to the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the ruler with the shortest limit) is set in advance, and the minimum level is set. When the size is reduced to the above, even if the predetermined operation means is operated again in this state, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  In addition, it is desirable that the size (display area) of such a comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed as a whole. Becomes smaller (in this case, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), and finally it will not appear, so when you really want to know if "processing in special mode" is being executed It becomes possible to prompt the user to operate only, and other than that, it is expected to concentrate on the original performance content.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable presentation opportunity. Basically, only by looking at the background image and the decorative design SZ, the “special mode” It is possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 477) that predicts whether the process of “displaying” is being performed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 478 and 479 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation means after power-on (or RAM clear). After that, every time the operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally it will not even appear . However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (when appearing at multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions) A process may also be prepared in which the display area as a whole is increased (here, the ruler is elongated) and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operation means.

  Further, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set so that the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is different, the operation according to which of the operation means is operated The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated means. In this case, the remaining number of times (the number of operations to reach the minimum unit) for causing the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear is set separately for each operation means (display position). When the operation is performed, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the production example described with reference to FIG. 479, when the first operating means is operated in the production situation shown in FIG. 479 (a), the production situation shown in FIG. 479 (b) appears. It becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 479 (b), when the first operating means is operated again, this is in exchange for the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) being displayed being extended. As described above, the display is small (the ruler is short). However, after this, even when the second operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 479 (c) appears, and the comparison criteria associated with the re-operation of the first operation means The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 479 (d) appears, and a comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the first operation means being operated again. The reduced display as is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this respect, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 479 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (center position). When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is not operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already in the display state at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. It is desirable that the comparison reference image (character image PG) be newly displayed at another position (left position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where comparison with the background image is difficult due to the operation to the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means By operating the operation means, it is possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. In this way, it is possible to add an interest in searching for at which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the comparison.

  In addition, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is triggered by this. There is no such thing as a display, and the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) (In which the horizontal length becomes substantially longer), so it is possible to see a background image that is difficult to compare, but in a state where “processing to display in a special mode” is being performed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when it is absolutely necessary to know whether or not there is. However, this simultaneously consumes “the remaining number of times (comparison image (character image PG) can be made to appear) (the number of operations to reach the minimum unit)” set respectively for a plurality of operation means. Therefore, it can be said that there is a great price for greatly improving the ease of comparison.

  Further, as described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds after) when displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images In order to increase the time during which PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appearing by the operation with respect to the first operation means is in the “special processing is being executed” state, or the price is increased. In this case, a quick decision on whether or not to further improve the ease of comparison by further operating the second operation means will be required. Since it will be expanded, tension can be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are not displayed may be different. The sizes (the lengths of the rulers) as the respective comparison reference images (character images PG) also differ according to the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) in each operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even when the specific operation means is operated, but when another operation means is operated, the comparison reference image Since an effect situation such as “Character image PG is displayed” can also appear, which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear? Also in the determination, it is possible to provide more interesting by adding a determination factor other than the type of background image to be compared.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time passes It is desirable that the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is made to be non-displayed as a trigger when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a lose before that. That is, as shown in FIG. 478 and FIG. 479, in the state in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, and by comparison with the background image or the like. It will be difficult to concentrate on the production content. As a result, if the user does not notice that the vehicle has been stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be used for the effect is torn down. When this happens, it is desirable to hide the character image PG as a trigger.

  However, the character image PG may not be undisplayed when it is stopped in the big hit, and may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the game is stopped due to a big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed. Therefore, when the character image PG is not displayed after a predetermined time, it is a surprise. It will be expected to function as an effect.

  Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the comparison reference image (specific sound related to the character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, it can be easily recognized that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. However, when such a specific sound is output, the following It is more desirable in order to maintain the game interest to adopt such a method.

  That is, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set separately for each operation means (display position). If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, combined with the fact that the effect content in the display area is difficult to be recognized, the original effect is concentrated It will be difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, the scream of a penguin) can be output while the specific sound (for example, the squeal of a penguin) is “displayed in a special mode”. Makes its sound output acceptable only when it is not running. Thus, with regard to the execution of the “process to display in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, penguin's cry) is not used as the positive indication on the positive side, but only the specific sound (for example, negative indication on the negative side) And penguins), a player who dislikes such a specific sound concentrates on the original presentation, and the possibility of "processing in a special mode" is likely to be high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will be made to appear only at certain times.

  However, for the specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “processing to display in a special mode” is not performed. It is desirable to make the sound output not necessarily acceptable even if That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image which has already been displayed is reduced (the length of the ruler is changed)) by the operation by the player. Sometimes when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output, it is definitely recognized that the “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of the penguin's cry is not output, there may be a state in which the “process to display in a special mode” is being performed or a state in which the “process to display in a special mode” is not performed. As it becomes louder, it becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin) is not output.

  Note that a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition regardless of which of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, only when a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means is operated, if a specific sound can be output under the predetermined condition described above, a specific sound may be output. In the "special mode", there is no possibility that a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for judging whether "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being performed or a specific sound may be output. It is possible to allow the player to select whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears to be useful for determining whether or not the processing of “display processing” is being performed.

  Further, in the above presentation example, the special reference mode is displayed by displaying the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state in a small size (shorter the ruler) in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG). The difficulty of recognizing whether the processing is being performed is suitably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output when the comparative reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (when the comparative reference image (character image PG) is relatively large) For example, if the volume of the penguin's cry) is made smaller than when it is output, recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended to some extent. It will be expected to be maintained.

  Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are arranged so that they do not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 479). It is desirable to set and. It becomes possible to increase the amount of comparison material with the background image by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  The comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. According to such a configuration, even if a large part of the background image overlaps the comparison reference image (character image PG), the comparison is made with the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

  Further, in the above presentation example, whenever the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed small (shorter the ruler) and displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Any mode may be used as long as it is difficult to recognize whether the process of displaying the mode is being performed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the comparative reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same in shape and size, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, in the case where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed at the specific transmission degree", the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the specific transmission degree is small (specific It is important to display the part displayed with transparency short), and the part which is not displayed with specific transmission may be made to hide, and it is possible to make the transmission higher than specific transmission. You may make it display and raise visibility difficulty.

  In addition, as described above, the “processing to display in a special mode” is, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 477 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 477 (b) and shown in FIG. 477 (c). It may be a dynamic depiction process of changing to a different display state. When the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is ended, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. The display state shown in 477 (b) is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 477 (a).

  In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) since it is displayed. It is desirable that the process of displaying in a special mode be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, when the processing for displaying in a special mode as the dynamic depiction processing is being performed, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player. While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 477 (c) passes through the display state shown in FIG. Since the movement such as “return to the display state shown in 477 (a)” will always appear, it is possible to facilitate comparison / determination as to whether or not processing in a special mode is being performed. become able to.

  However, the “processing to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). In other words, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be caused to appear by an operation by the player when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 477 (b) is displayed from the display state shown in FIG. 477 (c). After that, the movement “returned to the display state shown in FIG. 477 (a)” does not necessarily appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed. Will be able to In addition, a strategy is also added because the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended.

  In addition, the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or from a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the production determination. May be performed in a long time. In addition, “a process of displaying in a special mode” as a dynamic depiction process which is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ to the time of the fluctuation stop. “Processing for displaying in a special manner” as dynamic drawing processing performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

  In addition, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, a penguin's cry), the sound output is interrupted in a time (for example, 0.5 seconds which is less than a half time) much shorter than a predetermined time. Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed, the specific sound is not recorded until after the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed. Since the output of (for example, penguin squeak) is suppressed, the specific sound (for example, the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. Can make it difficult to generate a rendering situation as if it is denied by the penguin's cry.

  In this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) in the form of display that spans from before the processing for displaying in the special mode is performed until after it is performed. Become. Therefore, when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 477 (a) is performed while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. The state changes from the state shown in FIG. 477 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 477 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a character imitating a penguin and a ruler, only one of the character imitating a penguin and the ruler may be displayed. The point is that any comparison reference image (character image PG) not subject to the "process to be displayed in a special mode" can be made available by the operation of the player. However, if a standard image (ruler) in which a length unit in the horizontal direction is shown is displayed, it may be easy to determine whether “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. Is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 476 may not necessarily be displayed.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

[Prevents mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword part 5010, effect selection left button 331) are operated by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, and a brightness adjustment button (not shown). When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variation effect is performed by the decorative design. To maintain the

  However, when such a large number of operation means are provided, the existence of the operation means becomes prominent, and the player tends to become a target of mischief. Then, as a result of receiving the rough handling, if an abnormality or a failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, although the gaming effect according to the big hit determination is not being executed, it is in the non-gaming state (state where the above-mentioned operation effect can not be generated). When there is a high possibility of being mischievous due to the occurrence of operation detection in multiple operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, thereby suppressing the handling of the operation means in a rough manner. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, in a state where a game is not started (non-playing state), among a plurality of operation means provided for the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of predetermined operation means which should not require an operation Here, when operations on the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) are respectively detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Effective period during which a penalty is imposed, such as that even if there is an operation to the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. A control is made to generate a period for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation related to the volume is permitted, and the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal operation as the non-play state is restored such that the operation acceptance regarding the luminance is accepted and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output.

  In the effect restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output sound volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume The setting value is not displayed either, and "If the operation for the brightness adjustment button is performed, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed either" However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be limited.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) which are triggered to generate such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the condition of occurrence of the effect restriction period will be complicated to give a tense feeling such as "Isn't the prank being actually monitored by the hole side".

  FIG. 480 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when an effect restriction period is generated based on the fact that a predetermined effect restriction condition is satisfied in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen). is there.

  Now, it is controlled in the state where the game is not started (non-playing state), and the display at the time of standby in the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decoration symbol is displayed in the stopped state, , Etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output at the time of the operation. If it is in the state, a process of adjusting the volume (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly to this, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if the predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is taken as the light amount Process to be reflected). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output.

  As described above, in the non-game state, when the player starts the game, the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated so that the volume and the luminance can be set according to his / her preference. Reception is accepted. When the operation is accepted, the player is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the sound volume setting value or the luminance setting value according to the operation.

  However, as described above, in the non-playing state, there may be a case where a puzzling operation is performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and effectability will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischievous detection are prepared. Based on the fact that it has been detected that there has been an operation, it is possible to execute a process of generating an effect restriction period (function restriction period) for which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment recognizes that the condition concerning the effect restriction is satisfied when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state. It is said.
a. The first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is clocked starting with the operation detection on the sword unit 5010, and the operation detection on the operation button 410 newly occurs until the first timer time is finished, The second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts counting in response to the operation detection for the newly generated operation button 410, and the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 starts while the second timer time is over. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set
b. The third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be clocked by the operation detection to the operation button 410, and the operation detection to the sword unit 5010 newly occurs while the third timer time is finished. The fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is timed to start timing detection of the newly generated sword portion 5010, and the operation detection to the operation button 410 is performed until the fourth timer time is finished. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set

  In addition, these operation patterns a and b are only examples, and when the detection condition concerning the operation pattern other than that is satisfied, it may be made to generate a production restriction period (function restriction period), or detection It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Moreover, about 1st-4th timer time, all may be the same time and may be different time. Also, clocking may be performed using the same timer, or may be performed using different timers.

  Here, "long press on the operation button 410" and "continuous hitting operation (multiple operation) on the operation button 410" are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-playing state). It can be said. However, since these modes are modes that can be operated and instructed in the operation effect in the game execution state, the player has some purpose in starting the game even in the non-game state (e.g. It is assumed that it is possible to carry out these operations, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, the game execution state is set for “operation combinations for a plurality of operation means (for example, operations in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”and the like) to be detected for the purpose of mischief. It can be said that it is important in order to avoid false detection that it is set as what is not operated and instructed as an operation effect at a certain time. This makes it possible to prevent the performance restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before and after the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation for the other operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is respectively performed. As a condition, the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operation to a plurality of operation means is disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, players who have only touched once due to their uniqueness, not the intention of mischief, can be exempted from the penalty, and there is a relatively frequent occurrence of a production restriction period, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a drastic drop in the operation rate as

  In this way, stricting the detection conditions is to avoid that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 drops significantly, and it is confusing with mischief by the mischief. This is because there is a high possibility that the detection condition will be satisfied even if the detection condition is tightened, because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 480, first, at timing tq1 when in the non-play state, an operation on the sword 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied until the first timer time is consumed. It will be in the state (1st step state) which judges.

  That is, as described above, in the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (sword portion 5010 → operation button 410 → sword portion 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period, and these conditions Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the effect restriction period will be taken one step up.

  At timing tq1, the first staircase among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated is raised. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is finished, and the second stage detection condition (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been consumed, the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down one step) is returned.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 480, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at timing tq2 when the first timer time has not been consumed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern (Detection Pattern) Of the three conditions included in a, the “second-step detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and the third detection condition (here, last time) until the second timer time is consumed. It is in a state (second stage state) to determine whether or not the detection condition of (1) is satisfied.

  That is, at the timing tq2, the second stair among the three stairs before generating the effect restriction period is to go up. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the third stage (in this case, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been consumed, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions are satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs).

  In the example shown in FIG. 480, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time has not been consumed (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Among the three conditions of the pattern a, the “third detection condition (last detection condition)” is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, in the effect display device 1600, display (reproduction) of a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed. Let it begin. Along with this, even if there is an operation to the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed either, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Produce production restrictions. Then, the effect restriction period (functional restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued from timing tq3 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

  According to such a configuration, since the effect restriction period occurs when the plurality of operations are operated in a jumbled manner, the operation by the mischief can be suppressed.

  Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (up the stairs), but when time runs out on the middle of the road, All state levels are canceled to return to the original state. Thereby, even when the game is ended in a state where the state level is raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of rising the state level (moving up the stairs) in this way, the "volume control button" or "brightness adjustment button" which is the operation object to be restricted when the effect restriction period occurs. It may be assumed that the “adjustment button” is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his / her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, even if the operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated during the process of rising the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable to prevent the level from changing or affecting the first timer time or the second timer time.

  That is, in this case, even if the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for the operation by the mischief, it is not possible to generate the effect restriction period triggered by this. However, at least the already raised state level will not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the production restriction targets are “volume adjustment button” and “brightness adjustment button”. This means that operations for these functions will be disabled at all, so it is also preferable to suppress mischief for “volume adjustment buttons” and “brightness adjustment buttons” that are not subject to detection of operations by mischief. Will be expected to do.

  In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used in detection of mischief, it is sandwiched between "two operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 480) for another operation means (for example, sword portion 5010)". As for the "operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 480)" to be formed, it is assumed that the operation is performed a predetermined number of times instead of once. It is more desirable to

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the sword 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example 3 seconds) according to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is again detected within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example 3 seconds) according to the detection When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again inside, the detection condition concerning the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the effect restriction period is generated. Moreover, about 5th-7th timer time, all may be the same time and may be different time. Also, clocking may be performed using the same timer, or may be performed using different timers.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. In addition, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), not the operation on the sword unit 5010 but the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again (the number of times specified here is greater than the number of times to be detected (here two times) In the third detection), the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset, and the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. It is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) at a timing while the sword 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or twice (> n times) during the second operation on the sword 5010, the effect restriction period is As it does not occur, it is expected that the condition of occurrence of the production restriction period will be complicated and that a tense feeling such as "Isn't the prank act actually being monitored by the hall side?" Become.

  In addition, in order to achieve such complication, the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or the operation button 410 is l When operating within each timer time for the number of times (> n times), it is desirable to be controlled separately to the state different from the original state (may be different between m times and l times) . Therefore, even when the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in the state controlled to these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

  Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times) If the production restriction period can be generated (same as when operated n times), the production condition of the production restriction period is further complicated, and “the prank action is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that the sense of tension such as Also in this case, it is needless to say that every time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time occurs and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" which are triggers for generating the effect restriction period will be prepared.

  However, such mischief acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnets Goto, and it may lead to the disadvantage of the hall side to take too severe measures. Therefore, with regard to the specific moving image appearing in the effect restriction period, rather than displaying the strong warning content, the content of the degree to explain the proper handling method for the game and the effect, etc. It is desirable.

  As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “the operation acceptance for the volume is permitted. As a result, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation acceptance regarding the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Thus, the normal state as the non-play state is returned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 481, the player starts playing a game at timing tq 4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It can be assumed that the game is shifted to a game execution state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner by generating a start winning. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose for stopping the prank and starting the game has been achieved, in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed A certain production restriction period (function restriction period) is ended.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that the reflection will be insufficient. Until the display is ended, each reception of the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment is permitted, but "even if the volume adjustment is performed, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and the luminance is not Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control as a partially limited period, such as displaying the current brightness setting value but not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  As shown in FIG. 481, when transitioning to the game execution state in this way, detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the operation on the sword unit 5010 or the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time and the second timer time are not counted with these as a trigger, and the effect restriction period occurs. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when a transition is made to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration time as the production restriction period, the game is left in the form of a part of the restriction contents when it is in the production restriction period. Since the transition to the execution state is made, it is possible to encourage reflection on prank acts without interrupting the progression of the game effect.

  In addition, about the partial restriction period, not only until the change display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is ended, but also the decorative symbol is put in a stopped state with the number of holdings being zero. It may be allowed to continue at least for a period of time until it is in the non-playing state.

  In addition, at the timing when the game execution state ends and is shifted to the non-gaming state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 481), a predetermined safe time is set, and until the predetermined safe time elapses. It is desirable that the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated is continued despite the fact that the game is not in the gaming state. That is, it is assumed that the player's excitement does not cool down in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, and it is assumed that the operation on a plurality of operation means is performed excessively. If a penalty is imposed, it may lead to the immediate termination of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-game state.

  In addition, when it is shifted to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the above-mentioned partial restriction period, because there is still a possibility that reflection on the prank is still insufficient, partial restriction until safe time elapses The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again when the safe time has elapsed.

  In addition, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from the start of variation display of the decoration symbol to the stop thereof. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol is immediately ended, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is performed at least until the safe time is ended. It is possible to continue the invalidation state or to continue the partial restriction period.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol variation display is started in the form of the production limitation period (function limitation period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the above-described partially limited period can be continued for a relatively long time.

  In the example described above, even if detection close to the production limit period is detected within the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (the portion where fine dots are applied in FIG. 480), no matter what. The behavior of is not to appear either. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs for generating a penalty are raised), thereby prompting the user to stop the operation due to mischief. You may do so. The specific sound may be output as a different sound according to the type of the operation means to be detected. Similarly to this, every time the timer time is set by the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs of the penalty occurrence), the display content in the effect display device 1600 changes. Also good.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, since the hall is opened for a while and only new customers are about to start playing the game, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be frequently performed to start the game with the setting value according to one's preference. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound will reverberate in the hall and the atmosphere will be spoiled. It's a rise.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation for adjusting the volume or to accept an operation for adjusting the brightness between the time when the power is turned on and the predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state in which the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value can be accepted while the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is set to the “predetermined specific value”. It is supposed to be

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the setting value (volume setting value) and the luminance setting value relating to the output volume of the effect sound are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the "specific value" which is automatically set as the setting value of the sound volume which many players tend to prefer, many games can be played in the time zone in which the hall has just been opened. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust the volume setting value and the brightness setting value according to his / her preference. Note that the establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a certain time has elapsed since the power was turned on, receiving a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a, or in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The identification process may end.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the like are determined based on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or based on a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Acceptance of changes in brightness setting values is allowed, but a special period (opening-only period) during which a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if such a change in the setting values is accepted over a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) First, generate it. And after such a special period (opening-only period) is over, if changes in those setting values are accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. Yes. As a result, for a while after opening the hall (until the time required for completing various adjustments by a new customer), various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output. Thus, it is possible to give an opportunity to perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment to start the game with a set value that suits one's preference.

  FIG. 482 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to the special period (opening-dedicated period).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 482, assuming that the power is turned on at the timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player is satisfied until the predetermined condition is established. It is controlled as the state which does not permit the operation concerning adjustment and the operation reception concerning luminance adjustment. In such a situation, the detection (main control side) related to the game such as the start winning is not permitted, and the game can not be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and a standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still not available. Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is reached, detection related to the game such as the start winning is permitted, and the game start waiting state ( It is controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize. Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (the screen at the time of standby) is displayed, and it can be recognized that the symbol is waiting for variation.

  At this time, while the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, “the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted, but Even if the change of the setting value is accepted, a special period (opening period only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a period dedicated to opening a store can be continued until timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the occurrence of the period, and when the period is ended at timing tr2, the volume is set. A period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the variation of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and behind it. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the period for opening the store is shifted to the normal business period There is nothing to change.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and enters the game start waiting state, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends) Since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period (b), it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after opening the store. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 comes (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has passed), the automatic confirmation to an adjustment confirmation sound can be output, When various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments can be permitted while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. In addition, while maintaining the state that the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period during which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. Until this time, the player can hardly notice that the control is performed during the opening-only period in which the adjustment sound is not output.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game starts waiting state (after timing tr1), when the change of the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted, the setting according to the changed setting value in the effect display device 1600 is accepted. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the luminance side) is performed. Therefore, by confirming such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the setting value according to one's preference.

  However, even if the output of the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way during the period immediately after the opening (the opening dedicated period), the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is reflected as the volume or light amount. After all, the atmosphere in the hall may lead to dyeing in a single color, and there is concern that the atmosphere will be ruined and brought up. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the volume setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 comes, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound It is desirable not to Similarly, with regard to the brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 comes, the changed brightness setting value is used as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, each player adjusts the setting value according to his / her preference while confirming the parameter display on the effect display device 1600 during the period immediately after the opening (the opening dedicated period). In other words, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to his / her preference, there is no influence of sound or light around the pachinko machine 1, so the atmosphere in the hall is It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  It is to be noted that only the brightness among the volume and the brightness may be maintained in a state where the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the light amount even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by the mischief while the game is not started, and the brightness with the higher power consumption compared to the volume is not changed while the game is not started. It is desirable to prevent adjustments from being reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output because the adjustment degree can not be confirmed.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (when the time for opening the store is not fully consumed), the symbol variation (decoration display with decorative symbols) starts based on the winning prize. After that, the player has completed the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment, and it is assumed that the adjustment frequency is greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is prematurely terminated based on the detection It is possible to execute processing to shift to the normal business period.

  However, during the fluctuating display period of the decorative symbol due to the start winning combination that ended the period exclusively for opening the store, the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound associated with the change is output If this happens, it is assumed that many players will perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment after the opening-only period ends early, which may result in a fall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected before timing tr2 after timing tr1, the period dedicated to opening the store is ended early and the normal business period However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the variation state of the decorative symbol generated thereby is terminated (in-fluctuation suppression process).

  FIG. 483 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started when the store opening dedicated period (special period) is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 483, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not been digested yet. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the processing related to the store opening dedicated period is terminated and shifted to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. In this fluctuation suppression processing, while the fluctuation display relating to the decorative symbol is being performed, "the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is permitted, and the change of these setting values is output state. Can be performed to reflect the volume of the lamp or the amount of light from the production lamp in the lighting state, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. The difference from “processing for the opening-only period” is whether or not the decorative display is in a state where the variable display is being performed, and the change in the setting value is reflected as the volume and the amount of light. The content of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation during suppression process is changed to the non-playing state (the number of held is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). And as long as it is not migrated, it keeps running.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 483, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation of the variation time is executed only once), and the non-gaming condition occurs at timing tr4. When it is immediately returned to (the state in which the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed) (for example, 1 hour has not passed since the occurrence of the opening-only period ended early) Even in the state immediately after opening, the special period (opening-dedicated period) is not generated again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-playing state after timing tr4, when a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output. Will be controlled. In the normal business period when suppression processing during fluctuation is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the light intensity of the effect lamp for which the changed brightness setting value is also in the light emission state It is supposed to be reflected as In addition, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (the screen at the time of standby) is displayed, and it can be recognized that the symbol is waiting for variation.

  A player who creates a situation such as "finish the game running state immediately after opening the store-dedicated period (special period) early" can not be convinced with the adjustment content made while the adjustment sound is not output, and it will be started once Because it is assumed that the person who has a desire to adjust more finely until the game is interrupted, a special period (open-only period) ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  In the above example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) for which the period for exclusive use for opening (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the period for exclusive use for opening (special period) occurs. It may be the time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ended.

  Further, the timing at which the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be the timing tr1 or a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  Further, in the above described example, there is a technical feature in the configuration related to the store-opening dedicated period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the contents described above for the processing in the period before timing tr1. It may be realized as different processing.

  Further, in the above described example, at timing tr2, a change is not made to the decorative symbol or background image in the effect display device 1600, but a display change to the extent that an image different from the decorative symbol or background image is additionally displayed If it is, you may make it carry out.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

  Further, in the above-described example, only one of the setting value of the volume and the brightness may be changeable.

[Control to be applied to the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the presentation importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first hit determination is made according to the game ball being received in the first start port 2002, and in the second start port 2004. Regardless of whether or not the second hit determination is made according to the fact that the game ball has been accepted, the symbol variation (the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation) according to the hit determination is performed. After that, a benefit (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be provided. However, the expectation value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (the second symbol change) is higher than the first hit determination (the first symbol change).

  In the example described above, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum is repeated eight times and only about 1000 gaming balls are paid out In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum for 16 seconds. ing.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the sound volume setting value is “waiting for a game start state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, The first side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and "the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed In any of the “second-side execution states”, the numerical value range in which the change of the sound volume setting value is allowed to be the same in any of these states.

  According to such a configuration, regardless of the state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state), the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain game interest through sound adjustment in accordance with each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the above-described “game start waiting state” and “first side execution state”. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", control is performed so as not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed.

  That is, in the "game start waiting state", since the effect sound is not output because the game is not being executed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. It is not possible to confirm the volume of the later volume as an audible sound. For this reason, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) applied to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  In the “first side execution state”, although there is a situation in which a production sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low It is often controlled to the state (low probability non-short game state), and there is not much expectation for the effect. In recent years, when in such a low expectation game state, it has been confirmed that the player plays while watching a portable device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is surely notified to the player about the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output the

  On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", there is a situation where the effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability of getting a big hit is relatively high, the high probability gaming state (high probability time short gaming state It is often controlled by In such a situation, since there is a high degree of expectation to the effect, there is a tendency for volume adjustment to enjoy the effect, so when the volume setting value is changed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. The entertainingness of the game may be reduced by making it difficult for the effect sound and the BGM to be heard according to the second hit. Therefore, in the “second-side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound or BGM according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to preferably maintain the game entertainment by giving an opportunity to adjust the volume under an audible environment.

  However, in the “second-side running state”, the player is more likely to be changed to the big hit mode after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode because the expectation for the effect is increasing. It can be said that securing time (aftertones) for making people aware of it is important for maintaining game interest. In this respect, if the normal processing when being in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after being shifted to the "game start waiting state", the processing according to the "second side execution state" is performed. The player side can easily detect that the game is ended in the lost mode and is in the state of being shifted to the “game start waiting state”, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, when the processing concerning the "second side execution state" is completed and it is shifted to the "game start wait state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the "game start wait state" Control is performed so that normal processing when in the “play start waiting state” (processing for allowing the change of the volume setting value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the change of the volume setting value is permitted, but the volume setting value is changed. It is desirable that the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the process of not allowing the change of the volume setting value itself or the like be performed. However, it is more likely that the “second side execution state” is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”. As in the case of the “second side execution state”, “a process that does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed” is allowed. It is more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode. Therefore, when the processing relating to the “first side execution state” is completed and the process shifts to the “game start waiting state”, the “first side execution state” is different from the case of the “second side execution state” described above. The above-mentioned normal processing (allowing the change of the sound volume setting value and processing to output the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound when the sound volume setting value is changed) which is also performed when being in the state is continued as it is It is desirable to make it.

  By the way, in the situation controlled to the “first side execution state”, a mischievous operation is performed in which operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed and performed within a relatively short time due to stress that is not easily won by big hit. There is concern. That is, as a result of being subjected to rough handling, if an abnormality or failure occurs even in one of the operation means, operability and rendition will be significantly reduced, and a further reduction of the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, not only when being controlled to the "game start waiting state", but also in a situation where it is controlled to the "first side execution state", there is a possibility that the operation detection has occurred due to a plurality of operation means and mischievous When the condition is high, the effect restriction period (functional restriction period) in the explanation example of “preventing mischief for plural operation means (see FIGS. 480 and 481)” may be generated.

That is, in this case, some operations predetermined among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the "game start waiting state (non-playing state)" and the "first side execution state" When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword unit 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Effective period during which a penalty is imposed, such as that even if there is an operation to the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Control is performed to generate a period of time for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 is displayed even if an image related to the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation related to the volume is permitted, and the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation acceptance regarding the luminance is permitted, and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output. The normal state as the “game start waiting state” or the “first side execution state” Will be returned to

  In addition, about the detailed content regarding this production restriction period (function restriction period), another example, etc., it is possible to employ | adopt suitably each content in the description example of "the mischief prevention with respect to several operation means." However, in this case, the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early even if the game start waiting state is shifted to the “first side execution state” when it is in the production restriction period (function restriction period). Under the same conditions as in the "game start wait state", various processes relating to the effect restriction period will be continued. As a result, it is expected to suppress the mischief operation when being controlled to the "first side execution state" with a low degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, when being transferred from the “game start waiting state” to the “second side execution state” when in the effect restriction period (function restriction period), the “effect restriction period (described above with reference to FIG. 481) The processing for the early termination of the function restriction period) and its modified examples are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere at the time when the "second side execution state" having a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

  Further, in the above-described example, only one of the setting value of the volume and the brightness may be changeable.

[Periodical period for which operation acceptance is permitted (effective period) its own performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected effect is to be provided as a function having "a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the big hit being obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination being performed, regardless of the result of the advance effect determination, the first effect pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted when the effect content has progressed to a specific timing. Even if the second effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, when the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination corresponding to the second effect pattern, the second effect pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed when the effect content of the effect pattern 2 progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the second effect pattern, if no special result is obtained in the notice effect determination, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed even if the effect content of the second effect pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing. ) Does not occur. A plurality of types of first effect patterns and second effect patterns may be prepared.

  However, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. is a predetermined change for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the effective period. Since the post-operation effect that generates a display change in the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, the operation reception effect (effective) Period) It has become scarce in its own stage performance, and there is a concern about the decline in the amusement of the game until the stage after the operation is performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
First operation effect means capable of executing an effect after the operation in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives when an operation by the player is detected;
A second operation effect means capable of executing an effect after operation in a form in which an elapsed time from the detected timing reaches a predetermined time value when an operation by the player is detected; It is supposed to prepare.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself when the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and when the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved until the post-operation effect is executed.

  That is, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the effect after operation is executed up to a predetermined timing regardless of which of the early period and the late period within the effective period is operated. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the effective period occurs is advantageous for enjoying the effect by maintaining the execution state as the effect after the operation for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, no matter which timing is operated within the effective period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. Post-operation presentation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the overall performance time from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect by operating at a later time rather than operating for a while after the effective period occurs. It can be said that it is advantageous to enjoy the production.

  In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first effect pattern is selected as a result of effect pattern determination and the effect contents of the first effect pattern progress to a specific timing In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the second effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, and a special result is obtained in the notice effect determination corresponding to the second effect pattern. It is possible to realize as what occurs when the contents of the effect of the second effect pattern progress to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination and the effect content of the first effect pattern progresses to a specific timing In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the first effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, and until the timing when the effect content of the first effect pattern is different from the specific timing. It may be realized as it occurs as it progresses.

  In FIG. 484, regardless of the length of time taken from the occurrence of the effective period to the detection, the post-operation effect is executed in a form which is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. It is a time chart which shows the example about operation receptionist production.

  Now, assuming that the presentation content according to the presentation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1 while the first presentation condition required for the occurrence of the "first operation reception presentation for which the presentation reception is permitted" is satisfied, the timing tr1 The first operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on the progress made up to the end. The first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without performing the post-operation effect when a timing tr3 has arrived when a predetermined set time has elapsed without receiving the effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect where the effect reception is permitted, the image display imitating the operation means to be operated and the gauge display of how long the effective time is left are performed to urge the player to operate Operation promotion effects are performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted is output. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance allowable sound over the predetermined set time, and is in the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, it is put in a non-output state so as not to be audible.

  Here, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output" means that "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr1, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept also including making "the reproduction | regeneration period of a reception allowance sound" in the sound data which has become according to timing tr1. In addition, “to make the non-output state” in this case cancels the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel, and the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. However, it is a concept including the transition to a period in which the “reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data is ended and the subsequent sounds (including silent data) are reproduced.

  And as described above, in such a first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" as an effect after operation based on the detection of the operation by the player and the effect reception being made As for the post-operation effect (operation-based process using the first effect member) which has been started in this way, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period, the effect within the effect pattern is It is made to end when the predetermined timing tr4 comes. In addition, as the "operation-induced process using the first effect member", for example, it is possible to execute as a process for effecting the first decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect reception has been performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 484, if an effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is: It is performed over a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 484, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), an effect after operation (operation-caused processing using the first effect member) Will be executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation reception effect, it is possible to operate immediately after the effective period occurs, as an execution state as an effect after operation (execution state of operation-based processing using the first effect member) Can be maintained for a long time, which is advantageous for enjoying the effects, etc.

  Although described later, in the first operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception permission sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even if it is done, the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 485 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detected timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached.

  Now, assuming that the content of the rendering according to the rendering pattern has progressed to the timing tr11 while the second rendering condition required for the generation of the “second operation receiving rendering permitted to receive the rendering receiving” is satisfied, the timing tr11 The second operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on the progress made up to the end. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (valid period) is also executed without performing the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time elapses without receiving the effect. It is supposed to end. A time value different from a predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and a predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception effect where the effect reception is permitted, the image display imitating the operation means to be operated and the gauge display of how long the effective time is left are performed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion effects are performed.

  Even when the second operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound is output that indicates that the effect reception has been permitted. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At timing tr12, which is a non-output state, it is made inaudible.

  In addition to the new assignment of “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel at timing tr11, “the acceptance acceptable sound is output here” has already been assigned to the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being sent in accordance with the timing tr11. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. Also, the term "playback period of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept including ending to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

  And as described above, in such a second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using a second effect member" as an effect after operation based on the detection of the operation by the player and the effect reception being made For the post-operation effect (operation-based processing using the second effect member) started in this way, although it is started, even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, the effect reception is It is made to continue until the elapsed time from being done reaches a predetermined time value (for example, setting time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined setting time as an effective period). In addition, as the "operation-induced process using the second effect member", for example, it is possible to execute as a process for effecting the second decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect reception has been made.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 485, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is: It is executed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 485, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), an effect after operation (operation-caused processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing that comes after the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs until the post-operation effect ends after the effective period starts. Thus, it is possible to provide such an effect that it is advantageous for maintaining the presentation time as a whole for a long time and enjoying the presentation.

  Although described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is made when the reception permission sound is in the output state, and the effect after operation (the operation-based process using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even when it is executed, the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 484 and FIG. 485, the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) have different effects in these themselves, and the operation reception effects (effective period) are different from each other Since it is generated based on the establishment of the condition, it is expected that the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (valid period) to the post-operation effect is suitably maintained.

  However, only by adopting the configuration according to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period), the following problems remain. That is, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating early in the effective period, or it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating late in the effective period. Since a preferable operation timing for enjoying effects is determined, such as being present, there are still aspects in which the effect in the effective period is scarce, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, it is more preferable to execute the operation reception effect as the special operation reception effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 486 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the content of the rendering according to the rendering pattern has progressed to the timing tr21 while the special rendering condition required for the generation of the special operation reception rendering is satisfied, the special operation reception rendering based on the progress to the timing tr21 Generate a (effective period). Although this special operation reception effect (effective period) will be described later, different from the first and second operation reception effects, a predetermined set time has elapsed and timing tr23 comes with no effect reception being made. Even if there is no operation, the reception of the production always occurs within the effective period, and the post-operation production described later is executed. Although this will also be described later, as the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect, a time value longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect or the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect is set.

  Further, also when the special operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound is output that indicates that the effect reception has been permitted. However, although it will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a reception allowance sound (FIG. 486) corresponding to the first and second operation reception effects (FIG. 484, FIG. 485). The output state is allowed to continue for a longer period of time. In this example, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 486 is also made non-audible at timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage when the predetermined set time has not yet passed. However, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 486 may be such that the output state can be continued until timing tr23 arrives.

  In addition to the new assignment of "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel at timing tr21, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output here" is already in the assigned state for the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being received in time with the timing tr21. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. Also, the term "playback period of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept including ending to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when the operation by the player is detected within the effective period and the effect reception is made, the “first movable shown in FIG. 484 is made based on the fact that the effect reception is made. Operation-based processing using a decorative body (first effect member) and "operation-based processing using a second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 485 are started in parallel with each other It is supposed to be. Therefore, although "operation-based processing using the first effect member" is started, "operation-based processing using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within the effective period thereof. Even when the effect reception is made, it will be ended when the predetermined timing tr24 in the effect pattern comes, and the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is started, With regard to the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” started in this way, the elapsed time from when the effect reception was made, even if the effect reception was made at any timing within the effective period. Continues until the time value reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a setting time longer than the predetermined setting time as the valid period).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 486, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “operation-caused processing using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but in the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in the post-operation presentation, the time value predetermined from the timing tr21a is The process ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 486, assuming that the presentation is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), among the post-operation presentations, “the operation cause using the first presentation member” The “process” is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24. Of the post-operation effects, the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” is determined in advance from the timing tr22a. It will be performed to the timing tr26 (the timing which comes after the timing tr25) which the time value passed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (effective period), the first effect member continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. The operation-based process is performed, and the operation-based process using the second effect member is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to become, the end timing of the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” of the post-operation effects comes at a relatively early stage. Yes, if you operate at a late time without operating for a while after the effective period has occurred, the end timing of "operation-based processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation production is this Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that it will not be possible to maintain long the execution state of "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting production,
-In exchange for shortening the time until the operation-based processing using the second effect member is ended, the execution state of the "operation-based processing using the first effect member" is extended to enjoy this (Do you operate early in the validity period), or,
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "operation-based processing using the first effect member", extend the time until the "operation-based processing using the second effect member" is ended and enjoy this (Do you operate late in the effective period?), Or
-The time for which the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is ended are sacrificed little by little, As a balance (operating at a timing that is not early or late within the validity period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be made to have a strategic operation effect such as this, thereby providing an operation reception effect that is hard to occur in which the operation timing can be selected according to the player's mood You will be able to

  Although it will be described later, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect acceptance is made when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state, the effect after operation (the operation-induced process using the first effect member, based on the effect acceptance, While the operation origination process using a 2nd presentation member is performed, the output state of a acceptance | permission acceptance sound is cancelled | released at this time.

  Here, in the above explanation example, when the effect is received in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 486), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives”. The operation-induced process used "and the" operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value "are executed. . However, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, the case in which the big hit judgment has failed or the case in which the predetermined effect judgment has failed) Even if the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is not performed, and this is compared with the case where the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 486). It is more desirable that “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in which “predetermined time value” is set relatively short be performed in different effect modes.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, “when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied,“ the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-based processing using the first performance member” and “Operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of the rendering reaches a predetermined time value” Since it falls into the same effect content as the operation reception effect (the first and second operation reception effect) which is executed only one of them, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such an effect risk A feeling can be maintained suitably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "the operation-based process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received. The first operation reception effect or the second operation is performed when the post-operation effect is performed in parallel with the operation-based process using the second effect member continued until the elapsed time of the time reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing is higher than when the effect after operation appears in the reception effect.

  However, even though the special operation reception effect is performed, this may not be detected well (detection error) and the effect reception may not be performed, and as a result, the effective period ends without the effect reception being performed. If there is such a thing, the player who saw the situation that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed even though the operation is performed is misidentified as having fallen to an operation reception effect in which only one operation is performed And there is concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, for the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatically received) within the effective period, and “predetermined in the effect pattern” Operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the reached timing comes, and "the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches the predetermined time value." It is desirable that “operation-based processing using 2 rendering members” be performed respectively. As a method of automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and a production aspect related thereto, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 389, or an appropriate combination, and further the contents described in the writing Can be used.

  In the above-described explanatory example, upon generation of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, the acceptance permission sound is output which suggests that the effect reception has been permitted. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 484 to 486, the acceptable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is used as the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception. It is assumed that the reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptance acceptable sound output at the time of generation of the effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the production reception is allowed (when an image display imitating the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains) The operation reception effect is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, by confirming how long the reception-acceptable sound from the output state to the output state continues. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are executed. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time that can maintain the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is made). Thus, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is "special operation reception effect", there is a disadvantage that the effective strategicity that can be selected by the player is narrowed.

  However, even when it is recognized whether or not the operation is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the staging strategy remains to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time of the acceptable reception sound (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) that is output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated, the “predetermined special operation reception effect (valid period)” is set. It is desirable to carry out as what will be made into a non-output state when a specific time which is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of "" has elapsed. According to such a configuration, when the specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)” has elapsed, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state. If the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed, so that “a predetermined set time as a special operation reception effect (effective period) It is possible to provide dramatic strategicity in a state in which half or more of the timing tr21 to tr23) is left.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception acceptance sound that is output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is accepted when in the output state. Even though the output state is maintained, the acceptance sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated is forcibly terminated when the effect is received in the output state. I have to. That is, in this case, when an effect is received in a situation in which it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect (a situation where the specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception effect Is a “special operation reception effect” and whether a more highly anticipated aspect appears as a post-operation effect is an important concern, but one of them (the operation reception effect is “special operation reception effect” It can be easily recognized only by confirming whether or not the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is ended with the effect acceptance as the opportunity. For example, even if it is recognized that the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is not generated as a result of the output state of the acceptance permission sound being not ended, the feeling is switched to "more expect as the operation after operation It will be expected to concentrate on "whether the high aspect has appeared". In this case, “if the aspect with higher expectation appears as the effect after the operation, the effect is designed to have a relationship such that the rate at which the special operation reception effect newly occurs is high until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable.

  Further, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, the image display imitating the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception effect, and the effective time An indication of whether or not there is a remaining gauge is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed. In this point, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display is left (displayed), “The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are started. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. This makes it possible to predict, for example, whether or not the execution state related to the operation-based process using the first effect member is immediately terminated. In addition, as a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 385 or an appropriate combination may be used. Is possible.

  In the special operation reception effect, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs by executing the operation related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player preferably enjoys strategic strategicity over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation related display (prediction effect) that suggests the occurrence before the reception of the effect is permitted. The operation-related display may be executed as "a short-term precursory effect inferior to the timing indication function", as compared with the case where the special operation reception effect with a high degree of expectation occurs. It is desirable in order not to have it.

  Here, as the operation-related display (a short time indication effect lacking in the timing suggestion function) performed in the effect display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs, For example, it can be realized as an image or the like displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white image) when "image display imitating an operation means" appears in a fade-in mode.

  FIG. 487 is a time chart showing an example of processing relating to operation related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and processing regarding channel assignment of sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound. is there.

  That is, from an ergonomic point of view, when the effective period is generated, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is displayed only for several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the effective period is generated. It is known that an operation can be performed so that an effect is received at an unexpected timing. However, even though it is several frames, if "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the effective period has not occurred, the "operation means" Even if the operation is performed in a state in which “image display imitating” is displayed, there is a possibility that the presentation is not accepted, and there is a concern that the entertainment amusement will deteriorate.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 487, the timing trA several frames before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started based on the above, but “image display imitating operation means” is not displayed in the normal mode in a situation where the effective period has not occurred.

  More specifically, at timing trA, “permissible” which can be realized as a fade-in image in which “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in a fade-in mode, a predetermined effect image, etc. Start “pre-operation related display”. Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) comes in the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed in this way, an image imitating the operation means from the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed. The state is shifted to the state in which “display” is displayed in the normal mode.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the acceptance permission sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 487, the acceptance permissible sound is not output at the timing trA, but is output at the timing tr1 (or timing tr11).

  In other words, in order to make it possible to perform operations so that presentations can be received at the timing immediately after the effective period occurs, the acceptable sound is output several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it may be desirable to make it. However, when the acceptance acceptable sound is output several frames before the effective period occurs, the output timing is shifted from the appearance timing of “image display simulating the operation means”. As a result, this may give a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. On the other hand, it is also possible to output a pre-acceptance operation related sound different from the acceptance acceptable sound in the period of the timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11). However, if the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period, the pre-permissible operation-related sound may not be an independent production sound, but may be heard integrally with the reception allowable sound, Eventually, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of incongruity as if sound deviation has occurred.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, several frames of the operation related display (pre-permitted operation related display) are displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. On the other hand, the operation related sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is not executed intentionally, and only the acceptance acceptable sound is output when the effective period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 487, based on the arrival of the timing tr1, the "acceptance sound is included in sound data" is assigned to the channel to output the acceptance sound.

  In the example shown in FIG. 487, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable reception sound” to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptable reception sound is set to the non-output state. Yes. However, the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” itself may continue the assignment state to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at timing tr2.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 487, when an effect is accepted between timings tr1 and tr2 (timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect is accepted is terminated and “image display imitating operation means” is displayed. "Is hidden. On the other hand, as for "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound", the assignment state to the channel is maintained, and the acceptance acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated halfway as described above.

  FIG. 488 is a time chart showing an example of processing relating to operation related display when special operation reception effect is performed and processing relating to channel assignment of sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound.

  As shown in FIG. 488, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation related display (pre-permission operation related display) is performed from when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the effective period occurs comes. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length exceeding twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permission operation related display displayed within, “Expected degree as to whether post-operation effect performed when effect is received is performed in a mode with high expected degree” or “expected degree that the big hit symbol appears” As suggested, one of a plurality of production modes can be selectively made to appear. Note that “image display imitating operation means” is not displayed in the normal mode in a situation where the valid period has not occurred, as in the example shown in FIG. 487.

  For example, the “pre-permission operation-related display” started at the timing trB is different from the “pre-permission operation-related display” shown in FIG. 487, and the “image display imitating the operation means” is later ( A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward the location displayed at timing tr21), and a slight narrative effect having a story characteristic such as non-display at the location (explained with reference to FIGS. 330 to 348) Any aspect of “specific operation-related effects” may be applied). At this time, any of a plurality of modes can be displayed as an effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested by which one of the modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 comes in the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed in this way, the "image display imitating the operation means" is in the normal mode from the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed. It will move to the state displayed.

  In this regard, also in the special operation reception effect, as described above, when the effective period occurs, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 488, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data assigned to the channel at the timing trB.

  That is, as described above, the special operation reception effects are significantly larger than the "minimum time required for ergonomically enabling operation immediately after the effective period occurs" before the effective period occurs. The “pre-acceptance operation display” with high performance is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further improve the rendering in such a rendering period (timing trB to tr21), the rendering sound (pre-acceptance operation related sound) matching the "pre-permission operation related display" displayed in the same period is output It is desirable to make it In addition, since the rendering period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for rendering, even if the rendering sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is output within the period, acceptance acceptance is allowed There can be no inconvenience that the sound can be heard as an integrated sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the effect display related to pre-permission operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the operation related sound prior to acceptance is output, and these output states are displayed as timing tr21. It is made to continue until When the timing tr21 arrives, the state where the “pre-permission operation related display” is displayed is shifted to the state where the “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in the normal mode, and the “pre-permission operation related display” is displayed. It is made to shift from the state where the sound is output to the state where the acceptance acceptance sound is output.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 488, based on the arrival of the timing trB, one sound data including the reproduction section of the “pre-permission operation related sound” and the reproduction section of the “acceptable sound” is used as a channel. The above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized by allocating to the above.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, with respect to the reception allowable sound that is output when the effective period is generated, a part of the sound data that is assigned to the channel in a form extending from the predation effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound played back during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the occurrence of the special operation reception effect (eg, when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is an effect corresponding to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display). As well as it becomes possible to suggest the timing when the special operation reception effect occurs by the flow of sound (pre-permission operation related sound), after the effective period has occurred, the channel assignment is made based on the effect reception. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect has been accepted.

  That is, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect is accepted between the timings tr21 to tr22, the state where the effect acceptance is permitted is terminated and “image display imitating the operation means” is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state to the channel is ended also for "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound", and the output concerning the acceptance acceptable sound is forced to be terminated halfway through that. It is as having mentioned above. Therefore, it is confirmed by the player that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made by confirming whether the reception permission sound is forced to be in the non-output state when the effect reception is made. Will be able to make

  In addition, even in one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the effect sound (pre-permission operation related sound) corresponding to the omen effect (pre-permission operation related display) is in the reproduction state In a certain situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, this is not forcibly terminated. The allocation state to the channel is canceled based on the operation by the player only in a situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half part) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the effective period is in the reproduction state It becomes.

  The one sound data (sound data including the pre-permissible operation-related sound and the permissible reception sound) is assigned before the timing trB and is already assigned at the timing trB. It is also good. Further, as described above, the channel assignment state may be continued after timing tr22. For example, the channel assignment state may be continued until timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at the timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 487, when the timing tr2 comes, the assignment of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel is ended, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state. Yes. However, the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” itself may continue the assignment state to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at timing tr2.

  In the configurations shown in FIG. 484 to FIG. 488, “a plurality of acceptance acceptable sounds having different lengths for maintaining the output state” is prepared as an acceptance acceptable sound accompanying the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect, and effect acceptance is performed. Different permissible reception sounds are generated between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) with different post-operation effects. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the allowable reception sound is continued, the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) (or the first operation reception effect) are provided although there is a demerit that the above-described staging strategy is narrowed. 2 operation reception effect) can be recognized.

  In addition, the plurality of allowable reception sounds continue to be the first reception allowable sound (special operation reception effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is received, and the output state continues. And a second acceptable sound (first and second operation reception effects) to be included. Therefore, when an operation is performed so that a production reception is performed while the reception permission sound is in the output state, a special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptance acceptable sound is originally to be in the non-output state when the effective period is ended, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started Doing so can interfere with the production. In this respect, in the above description example, the reception effect sound whose output state is ended when the effect reception is made, the first acceptance permission sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( Special operation reception effect).

  That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the second acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively shortened", the output state is maintained. However, since the time set value at which the output state is maintained is originally shortened, the second acceptable sound will soon become a non-output state, and it can be said that it is difficult to interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the first acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value at which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting at which the output state is maintained Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the presentation.

  In addition, it is recognized which of the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is generated by confirming how long the output state of the reception permission sound is continued. Even if there is a player to be used, if the output state of the acceptable reception sound is maintained after the time set value for the second acceptable sound has passed, the first acceptable sound is not the second acceptable sound but the second acceptable sound. It is possible to predict that is in a situation where is output. In this point, even if it is confirmed that the output state of the first acceptance acceptable sound is not ended, by confirming that the first acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state when the effect acceptance is generated, It becomes possible to confirm early whether the prediction that special operation reception staging is occurring is correct.

  Further, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 484 to 488, when the valid period of the operation reception effect is generated, the pre-permission operation related display indicating that the valid period is about to occur will be performed. The operation related display includes a first display of pre-permission operation related display (see FIG. 487) having a short display time and a second display of non-permitted operation related display (see FIG. 488) having a long display time. In this regard, when the first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is unassigned to the channel, and is matched with the timing when the valid period occurs. By assigning the sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound to the channel, the acceptance acceptable sound is output. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first before-permission operation related display is not output, but the operation from the time of occurrence of the effective period may be urged without causing the uncomfortable feeling as if the sound shift occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-permissible operation related display having a long display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second pre-permissible operation related display is performed. In the state of assignment, the reproduction period of the acceptance sound comes in accordance with the timing at which the effective period occurs, so that the acceptance sound is output. According to such a configuration, the first half portion is a precursor effect (pre-permission operation related display) by only allocating one sound data to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (such as when the precursor effect occurs). It is possible to suggest the timing for the special operation reception effect to occur by the flow of the effect sound (pre-permission operation related sound) according to the event, and after the effective period has occurred, based on the effect reception Since the channel assignment can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made.

  That is, in the pre-permission operation related display shown in FIG. 488, the corresponding pre-permission operation related sound is output and the acceptance acceptable sound is further output at the occurrence of the effective period, but the pre-operation related relationship shown in FIG. In the display, the corresponding pre-acceptance operation related sound is not output and the acceptance allowable sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  In the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 484 to 488, as the “effect member”, an effect display device 1600, a speaker, an effect lamp, a movable decorative body, and the like can be used. Further, as the "first effect member", any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted, and as the "second effect member", It is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the “first effect member”.

  Further, in the above-described example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or different between the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect). When the operation means to be operated is different, the overhead image displayed in each valid period is different.

  In the first operation reception effect, "the operation-induced process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" is performed as the effect after operation, but “Operation-based processing using a first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives The “operation-induced process using the second effect member” may be performed as an effect after operation. Furthermore, an operation-based process using effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but any operation after the operation according to the first operation reception effect may be performed. The origination process is also executed as the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

  In the second operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value” is executed as the post-operation effect. However, “the operation-based process using the first effect member continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives The “operation-induced process using the second effect member” of which the execution state is continued until the time may be performed as an effect after operation. Furthermore, an operation-based process using effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but any operation after the operation according to the second operation reception effect may be performed. The cause process is also executed as continuing until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, “the operation-caused process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received” "Operation-induced processing using the second effect member continued until reaching a defined time value" is performed as effect after operation, but the effect member is different from the first effect member and the second effect member The operation-caused process used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-based process that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and an elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received is predetermined What is necessary is just to be mixed with the operation-induced process executed as being continued until the value is reached.

  Further, in the above described example shown in FIGS. 484 to 488, the effective period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the effective period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to By setting such a long time, it is possible to enjoy the effective period with the above-mentioned dramatic strategy.

  In the first before-permission operation related display with a short display time (see FIG. 487), “expected degree as to whether the effect after operation performed when the effect is received is performed in a high expectation mode” or “big hit” There is no indication that "the degree of expectation that the pattern appears", but in the second pre-acceptance operation related display with a long display time (see Fig. 488), the degree of expectation after the operation performed when the effect is accepted is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest an "expected degree" as to whether it is performed in a high aspect of "or an expected degree that a big hit symbol appears".

  In the “effective period of special operation reception effects” set as a relatively long time value, “after the operation performed when the effect reception is made by displaying any of a plurality of display modes having different degrees of expectation” It is desirable to be able to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether the rendition is performed in a highly expected manner or the degree of expectation with which the jackpot symbol appears.

  In addition, in the special operation reception effect, "at any time in the effective period when the effect reception is made," the effect by the first effect member generated due to the effect reception "is" attributable to the effect reception " In order to cause the player to recognize that the same effect content as the effect after the operation is to have the relationship in which the execution state is terminated earlier than the “effect by the second effect member that occurs”. desirable.

  In the above-described explanation example shown in FIGS. 484 to 488, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect based on establishment of different production conditions. However, the first operation reception effect does not occur as non-loading, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated as non-loading, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect do not occur as they are not mounted, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

  The special operation reception effect shown in the above described example shown in FIGS. 484 to 488 outputs the specific effect sound data (for example, the effect sound data of BGM) assigned to the channel in the suppression mode or silence. In particular, a state in which the reception of the production is permitted may be generated.

  The present invention has been described with reference to some embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. Improvements and design changes are possible.

  For example, there is a case where a display such as “auto button is being set” is performed in each of the above-described effects related to the automatic effect function, but this display is not necessarily performed. In particular, when not being pachinko machine 1 which is set to automatic production mode, when it is realized as pachinko machine 1 which is always in the state where automatic production function can be activated and processing itself such as "setting to production state" is not installed. It is desirable not to display such as “auto button is being set”.

  In addition, in each of the above-described presentation examples relating to the automatic rendering function, in the case where the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the expiration period ends, the operation to be operated according to the timing when the expiration period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is continuously displayed, it is expected to prevent misrecognition by the player such as “Why does the validity period continue?” Become so.

  In each of the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 374-392 and the effect examples described with reference to FIG. 486, the bird's-eye view image (or the bar display) is not hidden but is maintained after the operation. For the period of timing tf2 to tf4 (or the period of timing tg3 to tg5, the period of timing th3 to th4, etc.) when starting the production, there is at least several frames (for example, two frames). Good. Alternatively, there may be only one frame time. Even if such a period is set, it may be recognized that the period during which the haze image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps the period after the post-operation effect is started. When such a configuration is adopted, most of the post-operation effects are performed in a state in which the haze image (or bar display) is hidden while the above-described operational effects are suitably achieved. Therefore, it can be expected to concentrate on the contents of the effect as the post-operation effect.

  In the example of production related to the above-described “improvement of production using the automatic production function (see FIG. 389)”, the automatic production function is not activated in the state where the hold display on the production display device 1600 is hidden. An automatic reception effect and an automatic reception effect that enables the automatic effect function may be generated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a reception effect in a state where the number of holdings is large or small, that is, in a state where it is difficult to grasp the ease of enabling the automatic performance function. Become. Furthermore, for example, when a non-automatic reception effect is generated in the non-display state of the hold display, the subsequent symbol variation stops more than when the non-automatic reception effect is generated in the state of the hold display. If the ratio of the automatic reception effects to be further increased until it is released, it will be effective when the hold display is hidden and it is difficult to grasp the ease of enabling the automatic effect function. Interestingness can be added.

  The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single function element (an element having one electrical function (such as a resistance element)) is encapsulated. For example, the number of elements having a specific function is two or three. It is a concept that includes components that are enclosed in one package.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “help image for prompting understanding of production”, a ruler is exemplified as “a guide image showing a unit of length in the horizontal direction”, but other images are used. May be In short, it is sufficient if an image drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction appears when the player operates regardless of the state of the production. Note that these reference images do not necessarily have to be drawn as one, and may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

  In addition, the technology according to the explanation example of "preventing mischief for multiple operation means" is to prevent mischief acts to the last, but mischief acts are largely different from cheating acts such as magnet Goto, etc. Making it too strict can lead to a disadvantage on the hall side. Therefore, the image appearing based on the detection of the operation by the player (including the image appearing in the process of causing the specific moving image to appear) is realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. It is also good. In short, when a player's operation is performed randomly, “a specific video that cannot appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed in the effect display device 1600 (not related to mischief) In the state of displaying (replaying) a moving image of contents (for example, it may be forced to move to a state of demo movie, etc.) ", even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the effect sound The change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed either. "The change of the brightness setting value applied to the brightness of the effect lamp even if the operation for the brightness adjustment button is performed ”Is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed”, which is a control for generating a production restriction period (function restriction period) for which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time. , Thereby suppressing the clutter operation by the player is expected.

  In the example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operation means”, in the state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the partial restriction period may be controlled.

  In addition, for the explanation example of "preventing noise due to adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening a store", it is important to control to the normal state that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after power on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to a normal state after a restriction state in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not allowed to be output, and the restriction state is terminated early when the game is started in the restriction state. It is only necessary to be able to be controlled in a normal state, and the length of time that is maintained as a restricted state may be set appropriately (set from a few seconds to a few hours). Good.

  Moreover, in the explanation example of "control concerning the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the effect importance", it is in advantageous conditions by the time of being in the time of the change of the first special symbol and in the time of the change of the second special symbol. Although the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side that is made playable, the change of the first special symbol on the side that can be played under adverse conditions is not The case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is exemplified. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology to a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not loaded, for example, preparing a specific symbol in which a lottery is performed under a condition that is more disadvantageous than the first special symbol. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under advantageous conditions, but the side that can be played under disadvantageous conditions The sound volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the change of the specific symbol.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “Performance of Operation Acceptance Period (Effective Period) itself”, Acceptable Sound Accompanied with Generation of Special Operation Reception Effect and Accompanying Generation of First and Second Operation Reception Effects An effect sound different from the acceptable reception sound may be used.

  That is, although the embodiment shows the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

Claims (1)

Game control means for giving a privilege to a player when a predetermined display mode appears due to symbol variation,
Display means for performing display effects;
Sound output means for audible output of sound;
Detection means that can be detected by operation;
Sound control means for audibly outputting sound by the sound output means according to the progress of the display effect in the display means during the execution period of the symbol variation;
A reception period generating means capable of generating a predetermined effect reception period when the display effect on the display means comes to a predetermined timing during the execution period of the symbol variation,
The predetermined production reception period can be generated after the specific BGM that is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output while maintaining the assignment state to the channel. Game machine, and
In a state where the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner before the predetermined production reception period occurs , or in a state where the specific BGM is not audibly output while maintaining the assignment state to the channel , The predetermined production sound can be audibly output in a non-suppressed manner using a channel different from the channel in which the BGM is assigned ,
During the execution of the symbol variation, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output while maintaining the assignment state to the channel. If there is a detection by the detection means within the predetermined effect reception period which occurs after the audio output state is entered while maintaining the audio output state or the assignment state to the channel in the suppression mode, based on the detection , The audible output of the predetermined effect sound is terminated, and the special effect sound suggesting an expectation degree in which the predetermined display mode appears in the design variation is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner, but the specific BGM is assigned to the channel. state rather Rukoto changes state according to its output as a response to that despite the detection by keeping,
further,
A game machine characterized in that the timing at which the audible output of the special effect sound ends is different depending on at which timing within the predetermined effect reception period the detection by the detection means is made.